The URL can be used to link to this page

EAST WRF EFFLUENT FILTERS REHABILITATION PROJECT - 13-0014-UT1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 �� Snoz EAST WRF EFFLUENT FILTERS REHABILITATION PROJECT (PROJECT No. 13-0014-UT) CONTRACT DOCUMENTS & SPECIFICATIONS 1 U- U 1 Prepared for rwater Conformed Bid Documents OCTOBER 2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ADDENDUM NO. 1 2 for 3 EAST WRF EFFLUENT FILTERS REHABILITATION PROJECT 4 Project Number 13- 0014 -UT 5 6 DATE: November 24, 2014 7 8 SUBJECT: Addendum No. 1 9 10 TO: Prospective Bidders and Others Concerned 11 12 13 Bidders on this project are hereby notified that Addendum No. 1 shall be attached to and made 14 part of the above -named Bid Documents, dated October 2014. 15 16 Bidders should note that Robert Fahey's email address was listed incorrectly on the Pre -Bid 17 Meeting Agenda. To reach Mr. Fahey, please use the following email address: 18 robert.fahey @myclearwater.com. 19 20 The following items are issued to add to, modify, and clarify the Bid Documents. These items 21 shall have full force and effect as the Bid Documents, and the cost involved shall be included in 22 the various prices bid. Bids, to be submitted on the specified bid date, shall conform to the 23 additions and revisions listed herein. 24 25 Responses to Bidder's Questions 26 27 QUESTION 1: Could you please clarify 9900 -23, 3.08, D,1? is this meant as a holding 28 primer? or is it meant to be part of 9900- 23,3.08,D,2? 29 30 RESPONSE 1: See Items 1 and 2 below in the SPECIFICATIONS section. 31 32 IN THE SPECIFICATIONS 33 34 1. SECTION IVA — SECTION 09900 PAINTING 35 36 CHANGE the Tnemec product reference from Series 104 to Series 20 or Series 37 66 on page 09900 -23 Section 3.08 D. 1., lines 25 and 26. 38 39 2. SECTION IVA — SECTION 09900 PAINTING 40 41 DELETE line 31 from page 09900 -23 Section 3.08 D. 2. 42 43 3. SECTION IVA — SECTION 11370 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM 44 45 CHANGE line 25 on Page 11225 -2 to read as follows: 46 Page 1 of 2 Addendum No 1 November 24, 2014 1 Parker 1120 -8B SAE j844 Type B, and Parker Brass NTA, SAE J246 fittings. 2 3 4. SECTION IVA — SECTION 13630 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL 4 SYSTEM 5 6 DELETE Part 2.01 B on Page 13630 -4 and 13630 -5 in its entirety. 7 8 ADD the following: 9 10 B. Upon rehabilitation of each filter cell including testing of all automatic operations, 11 the cell shall be operated using the new filter LCP EP -104, except that an 12 automatic filter backwash cycle shall be manually initiated until all filters are 13 rehabilitated. Existing filter cells that have not been rehabilitated shall continue 14 to be operated using the existing PLC until the filter rehabilitation work is 15 complete. The Contractor shall coordinate the services of the Systems Integrator 16 with those of the filter manufacturer as needed during construction. 17 18 5. SECTION IVA — SECTION 13630 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL 19 SYSTEM 20 21 CHANGE Part 2.07 H. on page 13630 -16 to read as follows: 22 23 The UPS shall be by Allen- Bradley. 24 25 IN THE DRAWINGS 26 27 1. SHEET M2.04 EFFLUENT FILTERS MISC. MECHANICAL DETAILS 28 29 CHANGE the Note that begins with "Furnish & Install New Water Level Sensors ... ".to 30 read as follows: 31 32 Furnish & Install New Water Level Sensors, 2 in each filter cell, 1 in the inlet channel, 2 33 in the clearwell and 1 in the mudwell 34 35 2. SHEET E2.0 PARTIAL POWER ONE -LINE DIAGRAM & PANEL SCHEDULE 36 37 DELETE the existing drawing and ADD the attached drawing 38 39 40 END OF ADDENDUM NO.1 41 42 43 THE CITY OF CLEARWATER 44 PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA 45 By: /s/William B. Horne, II 46 City Manager Page 2 of 2 Addendum Nol November 24, 2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ADDENDUM NO. 2 2 for 3 EAST WRF EFFLUENT FILTERS REHABILITATION PROJECT 4 Project Number 13- 0014 -UT 5 6 DATE: December 1, 2014 7 8 SUBJECT: Addendum No. 2 9 10 TO: Prospective Bidders and Others Concerned 11 12 13 Bidders on this project are hereby notified that Addendum No. 2 shall be attached to and made 14 part of the above -named Bid Documents, dated October 2014. 15 16 The following items are issued to add to, modify, and clarify the Bid Documents. These items 17 shall have full force and effect as the Bid Documents, and the cost involved shall be included in 18 the various prices bid. Bids, to be submitted on the specified bid date, shall conform to the 19 additions and revisions listed herein. 20 21 Responses to Bidder's Questions 22 23 QUESTION 1: Specification Section 11370, Part 2, 2.01,A indicates that the air tubing for 24 the compressed air system is to be Parker ' /2" nylon spiral reinforced air brake 25 tubing. Specification section 15080 Part 2, 2.05, II, B indicates that 2" and smaller 26 compressed air should be Type L Copper. Please clarify what material is to be used for the 27 compressed air tubing. 28 29 RESPONSE 1: The drawings and specifications identify the work as issued. 30 31 QUESTION 2: Specification 01065 Section 1.02 -A states that City of Clearwater will 32 obtain the building permit and Section 1.02 -C -1 states the contractor will obtain the permit. 33 Please clarify. 34 35 RESPONSE 2: See item 1 under the IN THE SPECIFICATIONS Section of this 36 addendum. 37 38 QUESTION 3: Specification 05500- Section 1.01 -A. Scope of Work calls for various items 39 that aren't in the plans. Please clarify. 40 41 RESPONSE 3: See item 2 under the IN THE SPECIFICATIONS Section of this 42 addendum. 43 44 QUESTION 4: Specifications 11366- 2.06- States the Carbon Steel Inlet Boxes are to be 45 painted. Whom is to cover the painting, the manufacturer or the contractor? Page 1 of 3 Addendum No. 2 December 1, 2014 1 2 3 RESPONSE 4: The drawings and specifications identify the work as issued. 4 5 QUESTION 5: There are (4) LS's shown on plan E1.0. One is to be installed in the 6 Mudwell. Please help with the locations for the other three. 7 8 RESPONSE 5: See Item 1 under the ON THE DRAWINGS Section of this 9 addendum. 10 11 QUESTION 6: On Filter No. 5 we are to replace the existing influent DI pipe. In order for 12 this to take place we'll need the influent channel to be drained entirely while we 13 remove /replace the existing pipe. How long can this channel be down? 14 15 RESPONSE 6: The drawings and specifications identify the work as issued. 16 17 QUESTION 7: Are there (7) 3" conduits required between the existing filter control panel 18 and the new filter control panel and each with (50) #12 wires? 19 20 RESPONSE 7: The drawings and specifications identify the work as issued. 21 22 QUESTION 8: Are we to include terminating 350 #12 wires at the existing control panel 23 and at the new control panel for the cables mentioned in the question above or is that by 24 others? 25 26 RESPONSE 8: The drawings and specifications identify the work as issued. 27 28 QUESTION 9: Can you please double check the MCC bucket numbers? They don't see to 29 match the existing MCC configuration. 30 31 RESPONSE 9: The drawings and specifications identify the work as issued. 32 33 QUESTION 10: Can you please provide a specification for the low pressure air butterfly 34 valves that are to be quoted under bid item #5.E? 35 36 RESPONSE 10: The drawings and specifications identify the work as issued. 37 38 39 IN THE SPECIFICATIONS 40 41 1. SECTION IVA — SECTION 01065 PERMITS AND EASEMENTS 42 43 DELETE the word "obtained" on Line 8 of Section 1.02 A. 44 45 2. SECTION IVA — SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METAL Page 2 of 3 Addendum No. 2 December 1, 2014 1 2 CHANGE Line 11 of Section 1.01 A to read "specified herein. The miscellaneous 3 metal items may include but are not limited to" 4 5 6 ON THE DRAWINGS 7 8 1. SHEET E1.0 NOTE 9 9 10 ADD these words and this sentence after the word spares: "(typical for each 11 float). Furnish and install two floats in each filter cell, one float in the inlet 12 channel, two floats in the clearwell, one float in the mudwell, and one float in the 13 chemical clean tank." 14 15 16 17 END OF ADDENDUM NO.2 18 19 20 THE CITY OF CLEARWATER 21 PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA 22 By: /s/William B. Horne, II 23 City Manager 24 25 Page 3 of 3 1 Addendum No. 2 December 1, 2014 CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA EAST WRF EFFLUENT FILTERS REHABILITATION PROJECT (PROJECT NO. 13- 0014 -UT) SECTION I SECTION II SECTION III SECTION IIIA SECTION IV SECTION IVA APPENDIX SECTION V TABLE OF CONTENTS ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS GENERAL CONDITIONS SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ODP DOCUMENTS AND OTHER PROJECT DOCUMENTATION CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Prepared in the Office of the City Engineer SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS EAST WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY EFFLUENT FILTERS REHABILITATION PROJECT CONTRACT #13- 0014 -UT CLEARWATER, FLORIDA Copies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this Project are available for inspection and/or purchase by prospective bidders at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room - website address: www .myClearwater.com/cityprojects, ON THURSDAY, OCTOBER 30, 2014, until no later than close of business three (3) days preceding the bid opening. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the website, reflects reproduction cost only. The work for which proposals are invited consists of rehabilitating the existing effluent filters and replacement of a portion of the compressed air system and chemical cleaning systems; furnishing and installing a new main filter panel, fiber optic cable and plant SCADA work; and may include the replacement of the air operated filter valves. MANDATORY Pre -Bid Conference for all prospective bidders will be held on THURSDAY, NOVEMBER 13, 2014, at 1:00 P.M., at the Municipal Services Building, Conference Room 130.4 Clearwater, Florida, 33756. Representatives of the Owner and Consulting Engineer will be present to discuss this Project. Sealed proposals will be received by the Purchasing Manager, at the Purchasing Office, located at the Municipal Services Bldg., 100 S. Myrtle Ave., 3rd Floor, Clearwater, Florida 33756 -5520, until 1:30 P.M. on THURSDAY, DECEMBER 4, 2014. The bids will be publicly opened in Purchasing Conference Room 342 and read at that hour and place for EAST WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY EFFLUENT FILTERS REHABILITATION PROJECT CONTRACT #13- 0014 -UT. A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and proposal form is available to the general public (Contractors, Sub - contractors, suppliers, vendors, etc.) for review and purchase. However, sealed proposals will only be accepted from those Contractors that are currently City pre - qualified Contractors in the construction category of Wastewater/Water Treatment Facilities with a minimum pre - qualification amount of $1,000,000. Contractors wanting to pre - qualify to bid this project must do so two (2) weeks /ten (10) workdays prior to the bid opening date. A 10% bid bond is required for all City of Clearwater projects. The right is reserved by the City Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida to reject any or all bids. The City of Clearwater, Florida Alyce Benge, Purchasing Manager (727) 562 -4633 Sectionl.docx Page 1 of 1 8/12/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Table of Contents: 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1 2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 1 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 1 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 2 5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 3 6 CONTRACT TIME 3 7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 3 8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 3 9 SUBCONTRACTORS 3 10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM 4 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 4 12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 5 13 REJECTION OF BIDS 5 14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 5 15 OPENING OF BIDS 5 16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 5 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 6 18 AWARD OF CONTRACT 7 19 BID PROTEST 8 20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT 9 21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES 9 Sectionll.docx i 7/29/2013 Section II — Instructions to Bidders 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1.1 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are available at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room — website address: www .myclearwater.com/cityprojects. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the City's Website, reflects reproduction costs only, which is non - refundable. A complete bidder's package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and bid/proposal form is available only to pre - qualified bidders. Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre - qualified but who may be a possible subcontractor, supplier, or other interested person may purchase a "Subcontractor" package consisting of plans, specifications, and list of pay items. 1.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub - bidders or others. 1.3 The City, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, does so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer a license or grant any other permission to use the documents for any other purpose. 2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 2.1 Each prospective Bidder must pre - qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial 1 resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner before obtaining drawings, specifications and contract documents. An application package for pre - qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering Department, P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758 -4748 (mailing address); 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756 -5520 (street address only) or by phone at (727) 562 -4750. Pre - Qualification requirements information is also available on City of Clearwater Website at address: www. myclearwater. com/ gov/ depts/ pwa/ engin /Construction/prequal.asp. Contractors wanting to pre - qualify to bid on a project as a General Contractor must do so two weeks (ten work days) prior to the bid opening date. Bidders currently pre - qualified by the City do not have to make reapplication. 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 3.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. 1 3.2 In reference to the Technical Specifications and/or the Scope of the Work for identification of those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports but not upon non - technical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. In reference to those drawings relating to physical SectionlI.docx Page 1 of 9 7/29/2013 Section II — Instructions to Bidders conditions of existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities) which are at or contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. 3.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the City and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in the Contract Documents. 3.4 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions, possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions appear in the General Conditions. 3.5 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 3.6 On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations and tests. 3.7 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights -of -way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 3.8 The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that, without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work. 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 4.1 All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to the Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda, by the City's planroom to all parties recorded by the City's planroom as planholders having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received after the time frame specified at the pre -bid meeting prior to the date for opening of Sectionll.docx Page 2 of 9 7/29/2013 Section II — Instructions to Bidders Bids may not be answered. Only information provided by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect. 4.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the City or Engineer. 5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 5.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in an amount equal to ten percent (10 %) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of a certified or cashier's check or a Bid Bond (on form attached) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of the General Conditions. A cash bid bond will not be accepted. 5.2 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the Agreement and furnish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract by the City Council, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after the Bid opening. 5.3 The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in the State of Florida. 6 CONTRACT TIME 6.1 The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set forth in the Technical Specifications. 7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 7.1 Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement. 8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 8.1 The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications. 9 SUBCONTRACTORS 9.1 If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the Sectionll.docx Page 3 of 9 7/29/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section II — Instructions to Bidders Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed fifty percent (50 %) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award of the Contract to the City Council, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security to the City of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the City Council will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions. 9.2 No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or organization against whom he has reasonable objection. 10 BID /PROPOSAL FORM 10.1 The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be completed in ink or by typewriter. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. Unit Prices shall be to no more than two decimal points in dollars and cents. The Bidder must state in the Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations or erasures, the price for which he will perform the work as required by the Contract Documents. Bidders are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump sum for each section or item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials, and labor for completing the section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be found that quantities or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the work, are exceeded or should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the work, the amount bid for each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed individual items. 10.2 Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice - president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or partnership shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind the corporation or partnership. 10.3 Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership shall be shown below the signature. 10.4 All names shall be typed or printed below the signature. 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 11.1 Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in a 8.5"xl 1" manila envelope with the project name and number on the bottom left hand corner. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall be enclosed in another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and Sectionll.docx Page 4 of 9 7/29/2013 Section II — Instructions to Bidders addressed to the City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at the office indicated in the Advertisement until the time and date specified. Telegraphic or facsimile bids received by the Purchasing Manager will not be accepted. 12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 12.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified. 12.2 After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or modify any bid. 13 REJECTION OF BIDS 13.1 To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or irregularities of any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in the interest of the public. 14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 14.1 Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future proposals for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non - Collusion Affidavit contained in the Contract Documents. 15 OPENING OF BIDS 15.1 Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids. 16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 16.1 The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees Sectionll.docx Page 5 of 9 7/29/2013 Section II — Instructions to Bidders and impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. 16.2 The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be stated by the Contractor. 16.3 The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required by law. The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales tax and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements. 16.4 The City of Clearwater is exempt from state sales tax on materials incorporated into the WORK. The City of Clearwater reserves the right to implement the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in the Scope of Work Description in Section IV — Technical Specifications and as defined in Section III — General Conditions. 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDSNENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 17.1 In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders with drug -free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has implemented a drug -free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process. Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied bidders have a drug -free workplace program. In order to have a drug -free workplace program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six statements and the accompanying certification statement: (1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition. (2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of maintaining a drug -free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations. (3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). (4) In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any controlled substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction. SectionII.docx Page 6 of 9 7/29/2013 (5) Section II — Instructions to Bidders Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee who is so convicted. (6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug -free workplace through implementation of this section. I certify that this firm does /does not (select only one) fully comply with the above requirements. 18 AWARD OF CONTRACT 18.1 Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. 18.2 In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may be requested in the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons, and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time. 18.3 If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the best interest of the City. 18.4 Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items in the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will be awarded to only one Contractor. 18.5 The successful bidder /contractor will be required to comply with Section 119.0701, Florida Statues (2013), specifically to: (a) Keep and maintain public records that ordinarily and necessarily would be required by the City of Clearwater in order to perform the service; (b) Provide the public with access to public records on the same terms and conditions that the City of Clearwater would provide the records and at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided in this chapter or as otherwise provided by law; (c) Ensure that public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law; and (d) Meet all requirements for retaining public records and transfer, at no cost, to the City of Clearwater all public records in possession of the contractor upon termination of the contract and destroy any duplicate public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. All records stored electronically must Sectionit.docx Page 7 of 9 7/29/2013 Section II — Instructions to Bidders be provided to the public agency in a format that is compatible with the information technology systems of the City of Clearwater. 19 BID PROTEST 19.1 RIGHT TO PROTEST: Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the solicitation or award of a contract may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with the Purchasing Manager, and if not satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with protest procedures set forth in this section. 19.2 PROTEST PROCEDURE: A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the opening of the bid or due date of the request for proposals, unless the aggrieved person could not have been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening or the closing date for proposals. Opening dates for bids or due dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the bid/request document itself. B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each bidder, whichever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders upon telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite specific portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly been violated. C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions should be made in writing, stating reasons for the exception. D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five (5) work days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully coordinated with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City Manager. E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager, he /she may then submit in writing within five (5) work days of receipt of that response his/her reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original formal protest letter and the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City Manager. F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten (10) work days of receipt of the appeal. SectionlI.docx Page 8 of 9 7/29/2013 Section II — Instructions to Bidders 19.3 PROTEST FEE: When filing a formal protest, the protesting vendor must include a fee in the amount of 5% of the selected vendor's total bid to offset the City's additional expenses related to the protest. This fee shall not exceed $2,500 nor be less than $50. If either the Purchasing Manager or the City Manager upholds the protest, the City will refund 100% of the fee paid. 19.4 STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST: In the event of a timely protest, the Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until all administrative remedies have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written determination that the award of contract without delay is necessary to protect the best interest of the City. 20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT 20.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the City of Clearwater's Ordinance related to trench digging (Ordinance No. 7918 -08) along with the Florida Trench Safety Act (Sections 553.60 - 553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s 1926.650 Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws. 21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES 21.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) stormwater permit and implement stormwater pollution prevention plans (SWPPP's) or stormwater management programs (both using best management practices (BMPs) that effectively reduce or prevent the discharge of pollutants into receiving waters. A. The control of construction- related sediment loadings is critical to maintaining water quality. The implementation of proper erosion and sediment control practices during the construction stage can significantly reduce sediment loadings to surface waters. B. Prior to land disturbance, prepare and implement an approved erosion and sediment control plan or similar administrative document that contains erosion and sediment control provisions. NPDES Management Measures available at City of Clearwater Engineering Environmental Division and EPA websites to help address construction - related Best Management Practices. References EPA website Sectionll.docx Page 9 of 9 7/29/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents: SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS i Table of Contents: i 1 DEFINITIONS 1 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS 5 2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE 5 2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS 5 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT 5 2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION 5 2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE 6 2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS 6 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 7 3.1 INTENT 7 3.2. REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES 7 4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 8 4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS 8 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS 8 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES 8 4.4 REFERENCE POINTS 9 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE 9 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND /CONTRACT BOND 9 5.2 INSURANCE 9 5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE 10 5.2.2 PUBLIC LL4BILITYAND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE 10 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY 11 5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS 12 6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 12 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE 12 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 13 6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS 14 6.4 SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS 14 6.5 USE OF PREMISES 15 6.5.1 STAGING AREAS 15 6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS 15 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES 16 SectionlII.docxx i 7/7/2014 6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS 16 6.8 PERMITS 17 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION 17 6.10 EMERGENCIES 18 6.11 DRAWINGS 18 6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW 18 6.11.2 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS 19 6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS 21 6.11.4 DELIVERABLES: 23 6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE 23 6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK 23 6.14 INDEMNIFICATION 24 6.15 CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION 24 7 OTHER WORK 24 7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE 24 7.2 COORDINATION 25 8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY 25 9 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 25 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE 25 9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 26 9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK 26 9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS 26 9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES 26 9.6 LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES 27 10 CHANGES IN THE WORK 28 11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 28 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 28 11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT 30 11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK 30 12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME 31 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 31 13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION 31 13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK 32 13.3 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK 32 13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK 33 13.5 WARRANTY /CORRECTION PERIOD 33 13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 33 13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK 34 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 34 14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT 34 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE 35 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS 35 SectionllLdocxx ii 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION 36 14.5 FINAL INSPECTION 37 14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 37 14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE 37 14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS 38 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 38 15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK 38 15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE 38 15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE 40 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION 40 17 MISCELLANEOUS 40 17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS 40 17.2 GIVING NOTICE 40 17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM 41 17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED 41 17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT 41 17.6 RENEWAL OPTION 41 17.7 ROLL -OFF CONTAINERS AND /OR DUMPSTERS 41 18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK 41 19 MATERIAL USED 41 20 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 42 21 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION 42 21.1 SALES TAX SAVINGS 42 21.2 TITLE AND OWNER RISK 42 21.3 CONTRACTOR'S RECEIPT OF MATERIALS 42 21.4 ODP RECORDS, WARRANTIES AND INDEMNIFICATION 43 22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 44 22.1 GENERAL 44 22.2 EXAMPLE 44 23 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 45 23.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE 45 23.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE 45 23.3 FIXED SIGN 45 23.4 PORTABLE SIGNS 45 23.5 SIGN COLORING 46 23.6 SIGN PLACEMENT 46 23.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE 46 23.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN 47 24 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE 47 25 SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM 48 Sectionlll.docxx iii 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 1 DEFINITIONS Addenda Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents. Agent Architect, engineer or other outside agency, consultant or person acting on behalf of the City. Agreement The written contract between Owner and Contractor covering the Work to be performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as provided therein. Application for Payment The form accepted by Engineer which is to be used by Contractor in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. Approve The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Bid The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the work to be performed. Bidding Documents The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). Bonds Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security. Change Order A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement. City The City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida. Construction Inspector A person who is the authorized representative of the Construction Manager and inspects City construction projects in order to insure the Contractor's work complies with the intent of the Contract Documents. Construction Manager The person who is typically in responsible charge of City construction projects. The Construction Manager assumes responsibility for the management of construction contracts at the Preconstruction Conference. The Construction Manager chairs the Preconstruction Conference and is the authority on any disputes or decisions regarding SectionlIl.docxx Page 1 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions contract administration and performance. The Construction Manager typically acts as the Owner's Representative during construction. Contract Documents The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid (including documentation accompanying the bid and any post -Bid documentation submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of the Agreement. Contract Price The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work. Contract Time The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work. Contractor The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. For the purposes of this contract, the person, firm or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has been made by the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative. Critical Path Method Construction Schedule —CPM A graphic format construction schedule that displays construction activities as they relate to one another for the purpose of identifying the most efficient way to perform the work in a timely manner. The critical path identifies which activity is critical to the execution of the schedule. Day A calendar day of twenty -four (24) hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. Defective An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final payment. Drawings The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement, which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop drawings are not Drawings as so defined. Engineer The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the purposes of this contract, the City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida, or his authorized representative. For certain projects, the Engineer may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. Engineer's Consultant A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent SectionllI.docxx Page 2 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 Section III — General Conditions professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as such in the Supplementary Conditions. F.D.O.T Specifications The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as issued by the Florida Department of Transportation (latest English edition). Furnish The words "furnish ", "furnish and install ", "install ", and "provide" or words of similar meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and install complete in place and ready for service ". Inspection The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and Specifications. These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or overseeing. Laws and Regulations Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction. Liens Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal property. Milestone A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to the final completion date. Notice to Proceed (NTP) A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his obligations under the Contract Documents. Owner The City of Clearwater, Florida. For the purposes of this contract, the person who is the City's authorized representative from the City's Department with whom will be responsible for the maintenance and operation of the Work once the Work is completed. For certain projects, a designee of the Owner may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. Owner's Representative Designee of the Owner with authority to act on behalf of the Owner during construction. Person A natural person, or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial entity. Project The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. SectionllI.docxx Page 3 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions Partial Utilization Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work. Representative of Contractor The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall be at the construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions of these persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre - construction conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City Engineer. Request for Information (RFI) An official written request for clarification of the intent of the contract documents from the Contractor to the Engineer. Shop Drawing All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the Work. Specifications Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. Subcontractor A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the site. Substantial Completion The Work (or a specified part thereof) which has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended; or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. Supplementary Conditions The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions. Supplier A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, material man or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor. Surety Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid, Performance or Payment Bond. Sectionlll.docxx Page 4 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions Underground Facilities All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or water. Unit Price Work Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. Work The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as required by the Contract Documents. Work Change Directive A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to the Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to the Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by this contract. 2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS Engineer shall furnish to Contractor one (1) copy of Contract Documents for execution. Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction. 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME /NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run. 2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable Sectionlll.docxx Page 5 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however, Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, Agent or employee of the Owner or Engineer's Consultant, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Within twenty (20) days of Award of Contract and before the start of the Work, the Owner's Representative shall schedule a preconstruction conference to be attended by Contractor, Engineer, Owner and others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures. Typically, oversight of the project officially passes from the Engineering Department to the Construction Department at the preconstruction conference. In these cases, the preconstruction conference is run by the Construction Department and chaired by the City's Construction Manager. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the Preconstruction Conference a color Critical Path Method (CPM) Construction Schedule. This is to be a sequence of events including submittal review and procurement. Notice to Proceed is usually established at this conference and such date can be inserted into the schedule at that time. The Contractor shall also bring a Submittal Schedule for review by the Engineer. This is to make sure that the list is complete and this schedule shall be the basis of a Submittal Log. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the preconstruction conference a completed Emergency Call List and a completed Authorized Signature List. The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a project disk that has all of the necessary data and survey control points for the purpose of construction stakeout and as -built survey. The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a Contractor evaluation package. This is for the purpose of rating the Contractor's performance for reference when considering future contracts and bid prequalification. 2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS The Contractor is required to attend Progress Meetings. These meetings will be scheduled on a weekly, bi- weekly, or monthly basis depending on the needs of the project. The Contractor shall bring to each meeting an updated submittal log, an updated request for information (RFI) log, a look -ahead schedule to cover the project activity from the current meeting to the next meeting, and all material test reports generated in the same time period. Sectionlll.docxx Page 6 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 3.1 INTENT The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and the Contractor concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment which may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or from trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well - known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual or code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code, whether or not specially incorporated by reference in the responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents, shall change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, Engineer or Owner's Representative, or any of their Agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion. 3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor shall report it to the Owner's Representative in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General Specifications, provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner, or Owner's Representative for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof. Sectionlll.docxx Page 7 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS The Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be Performed, rights -of -way, easements for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of contractor. The Owner shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with which contractor will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by the Owner, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially from those indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review those conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer shall obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer and Contractor. If Engineer finds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there are subsurface or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a work change or Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions. 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following will be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i) reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The Contractor is required to call the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a member of the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation. The LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER is an agency for the protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in local telephone directory. Sectionlll.docxx Page 8 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 4.4 REFERENCE POINTS Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of the Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by a surveyor licensed in the State of Florida. The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications for more specific information regarding the provision of construction surveys. If a City survey crew is assigned to the project and there is excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor will be charged at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one -hour increments with a minimum charge of one hour. 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND /CONTRACT BOND Contractor shall furnish a Performance and Payment Bond in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. This bond shall remain in effect at least one year after the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of time is prescribed by laws and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents' authority to act. All bonds shall be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified to do business in the State of Florida. Owner reserves the right to reject any surety. If the Surety on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall within five days after notice thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to Owner. 5.2 INSURANCE Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and furnished and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance and furnishing of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed or furnished by Contractor, and Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable for the following: (i) Claims under worker's compensation, disability benefits and other similar employee benefit acts; (ii) Claims for damages because of bodily SectionllLdocxx Page 9 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; (iii) Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; (iv) Claims for damages insured by customary personal injury liability coverage which are sustained by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor, or by any other person for any other reason; (v) Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and (vi) Claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by the Owner or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with this paragraph. The policies of insurance so required by this paragraph to be purchased and maintained shall: (i) include as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion in respect of professional liability) Owner of Clearwater and any other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insured, and include coverage for the respective officers and employees of all such additional insures; (ii) include completed operations insurance; (iii) include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's indemnity obligations in Article for Contractor's Responsibilities; (iv) contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least thirty days prior written notice has been given to the Owner, and Contractor and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplemental Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the Contractor as described in this paragraph); (v) remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in accordance with Article for Correction of Defective Work; (vi) with respect to completed operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims -made basis, shall remain in effect for at least two years after final payment. Contractor shall furnish the Owner and each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued evidence satisfactory to the Owner and any such additional insured, of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter and (vii) Name and telephone number of the authorized insurance agent for the Insurer. The limits of liability for the insurance required shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by laws and regulations: 5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE 5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE Comprehensive General Liability including Premise /Operations; Explosion, Collapse and Underground Property Damage; Products /Completed Operations, Broad Form Contractual, Independent Contractors; Broad Form Property Damage; and Personal Injury liabilities: Sectionlll.docxx Page 10 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount $1,000,000. and Over (1) Workers' Compensation Statutory Statutory (2) Employer's Liability $500,000. $1,000,000. 5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE Comprehensive General Liability including Premise /Operations; Explosion, Collapse and Underground Property Damage; Products /Completed Operations, Broad Form Contractual, Independent Contractors; Broad Form Property Damage; and Personal Injury liabilities: Sectionlll.docxx Page 10 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY including all owned (private and others), hired and non -owned vehicles: Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount $1,000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury: $500,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate $1,000,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate (2) Property Damage: $500,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate $1,000,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate (3) Personal Injury, with employment exclusion deleted $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY including all owned (private and others), hired and non -owned vehicles: Receipt and acceptance by Owner of the Contractor's Certificate of Insurance, or other similar document does not constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages, which may be less than required by these Contract Documents. The Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors or others in the Work. Owner may at its option require a copy of the Contractor's Insurance Policy(s). All insurance policies required within this Contract Document shall provide full coverage from the first dollar of exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No deductibles will be accepted without prior approval from Owner. Lonl;shore and Harbor Worker's Compensation Act: Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932, requires an employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of benefits under the Act either by insuring with an insurance carrier authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor as a self - insurer. For General Contractors: Section 4(a) of the Act provides that every employer shall be liable for and shall secure the payment to his employees of the compensation payable under Sections 7, 8, and 9 of the Act. In the case of an employer who is a subcontractor, only if such subcontractor fails to secure the payment of compensation shall the contractor be liable for and be required to secure the payment of compensation. Sectionlll.docxx Page 11 of 51 7/7/2014 Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount $1,000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury $500,000. Each Person $500,000. Each Accident $1,000,000. Each Person $1,000,000. Each Accident (2) Property Damage $500,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Receipt and acceptance by Owner of the Contractor's Certificate of Insurance, or other similar document does not constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages, which may be less than required by these Contract Documents. The Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors or others in the Work. Owner may at its option require a copy of the Contractor's Insurance Policy(s). All insurance policies required within this Contract Document shall provide full coverage from the first dollar of exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No deductibles will be accepted without prior approval from Owner. Lonl;shore and Harbor Worker's Compensation Act: Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932, requires an employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of benefits under the Act either by insuring with an insurance carrier authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor as a self - insurer. For General Contractors: Section 4(a) of the Act provides that every employer shall be liable for and shall secure the payment to his employees of the compensation payable under Sections 7, 8, and 9 of the Act. In the case of an employer who is a subcontractor, only if such subcontractor fails to secure the payment of compensation shall the contractor be liable for and be required to secure the payment of compensation. Sectionlll.docxx Page 11 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS The Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on Insurance will protect the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, the Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Sub - contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise payable under any policy so issued. In addition, the Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to the Owner property or the Work caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by the Owner and; (ii) loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by the Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or after final payment. 6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to the Owner's Representative except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. The Contractor's superintendent shall keep a mobile cell phone on his person so he can be contacted whenever necessary. Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever the Owner's Representative shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed SectionllLdocxx Page 12 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions from the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written consent of the Owner's Representative. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner normally approved holidays. At such times when Inspector overtime is required, the Contractor shall sign an overtime slip documenting such hours and the Contractor shall be provided a copy for his records. At the end of the project and prior to payment of withheld retainage funds, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a check made out to the Owner of Clearwater for full reimbursement of all Inspector overtime hours. Withheld retainage shall not be released until the Owner has received this check. Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be $60.00 per hour. Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer. 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours and Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without the Owner consent given after prior notice to Engineer. Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing, performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work. All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used in the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly stored, may be rejected by the Engineer without testing. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The City of Clearwater, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to purchase major equipment to be incorporated into the WORK under the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in the Contract Documents. In such event, the Contractor shall cooperate and assist the Owner of Clearwater, at no additional cost, to implement the ODP documents and procedures. Sectionlll.docxx Page 13 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or "or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to Owner's Representative and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a determination. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or "or equal" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of acceptability. 6.4 SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative before or at the preconstruction conference a list of all Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for Work to be performed on the Project. The Contractor shall include with this list the qualifications and references for each Subcontractor, supplier or other person and organization for review and approval. Any changes to this list must be submitted to the Owner's Representative for approval prior to the substitution of any Subcontractors, suppliers or other persons and organizations before performing any Work on the Project for the Contractor. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to communicate with the Engineer through Contractor. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the work to be performed by any specific trade. Sectionlll.docxx Page 14 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall not pay or employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his Subcontractors or between Subcontractors. 6.5 USE OF PREMISES Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right -of -way, permits and easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors, employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance of the Work. During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. 6.5.1 STAGING AREAS The Contactor shall obtain and deliver to the City written permission for the use of all staging and storage areas outside of the Limits of Construction. 6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS The timely restoration of all impacted areas, especially right -of -ways, is very important to the Citizens of Clearwater; therefore these time limits are imposed: • Debris piles shall be removed within five (5) consecutive calendar days. • Concrete driveways and sidewalks shall be replaced within ten (10) consecutive calendar days of removal. Resident access shall be maintained at all times. Sectionlll.docxx Page 15 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions • All arterial and collector roadways shall be restored ASAP. • Local streets and asphalt driveways shall be restored as soon as a sufficient quantity is generated, however, this is never to exceed fifteen (15) consecutive calendar days. Local and resident access shall be maintained at all times. • Sod must be restored within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days of a successful pipe pressure test, removal of concrete forms, backfill of excavations, replacement of driveways or sidewalks or other project specific milestone. It must be watered for a period of thirty (30) days after it is placed. Erosion control and dust control of denuded areas must be maintained at all times. If the project or a portion of it does not involve right -of ways, then a different schedule of sod restoration may be considered. 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner or Engineer in the Contract Documents. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental agencies, which are applicable during the performance of the work. 6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Owner's Representative shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor performs any work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work: however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations to the Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as described above. When City projects include Federal or State funding, the requirements of Executive Order 11 -02 shall be adhered to utilizing the Homeland Security E- Verify System to verify employment eligibility. Sectionlll.docxx Page 16 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions 6.8 PERMITS Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. The Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work, and the Owner shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment fees. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner of Clearwater Building Permit Fees will be waived. 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i) all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and (iii) other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work, or during inclement weather, or whenever Owner's Representative may direct; Contractor shall, and shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, any portion of Work or materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident prevention program which shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and supervision of programs for the education and training of employees in the recognition, avoidance and prevention of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid services and medical care to his employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an effective fire protection and prevention program and good housekeeping practices at the site of contract performance throughout all phases of construction, repair, alteration or demolition. Contractor shall require appropriate personal protective equipment in all operations where there is exposure to hazardous conditions. The Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of immediate danger to the Owner's employees, equipment or if property damage exists. This provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the Contractor to Owner, and the Contractor shall remain solely responsible for compliance with all safety requirements and for the safety of all persons and property at the site of Contract performance. The Contractor shall instruct his employees required to handle or use toxic materials or other harmful substances regarding their safe handling and use. The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians and motorists from harm, and to prevent disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when Sectionlll.docxx Page 17 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions prosecution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable. 6.10 EMERGENCIES In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or the Owner's Representative, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If the Owner's Representative determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action. 6.11 DRAWINGS 6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work, and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will bear a stamp or specific written indication that Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. The Contractor shall maintain a submittal log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer and Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each submittal within twenty -one (21) consecutive calendar days. The Sectionlll.docxx Page 18 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions Contractor shall maintain a request for information (RFI) log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer and Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each RFI within twenty -one (21) consecutive calendar days. The untimely submission of Submittal or RFIs shall not be grounds for a delay claim from the Contractor. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor. Contractor shall furnish required submittals with complete information and accuracy in order to achieve required approval of an item within two (2) submittals. Owner's Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor, for Engineer's costs for resubmittals that account for a number greater than twenty percent (20 %) of the total number of first time submittals. Owner's Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor for all third submittals. The number of first time submittals shall be equal to the number of submittals agreed to by Engineer and Contractor. All costs to Engineer involved with subsequent submittal of Shop Drawings, Samples or other items requiring approval will be backcharged to Contractor at the rate of 3.0 times direct technical labor cost by deducting such costs from payments due Contractor for Work completed. In the event that Contractor requests a substitution for a previously approved item, all of Engineer's costs in the reviewing and approval of the substitution will be backcharged to Contractor, unless the need for such substitution is beyond the control of Contractor. 6.11.2 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As -Built Drawings, in good order and legible condition to be continuously marked -up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans, including revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the construction process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not Sectionlll.docxx Page 19 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which are revealed during the construction period. The As -Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer, Engineer's Consultant, and the Owner's Representative at all times during the progress of the Project. The As -Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the Owner's Representative, or his designee, for accuracy and compliance with the requirements of "As -Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the monthly pay requests. The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked -up blueline prints do not conform to the "As -Built Drawings" requirements. As -Built Drawings shall be submitted to the Owner Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay request. Final pay request shall not be processed until As -Built Drawings have been reviewed by the Engineer or the Engineer's Consultant for accuracy and completeness. Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains. The Owner's acceptance of the "As -Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As -Built Drawings. 6.11.2.1 General The Contractor shall prepare an "AS -BUILT SURVEY" per chapter 5J- 17.052, Florida Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The contractor will deliver to the Owner two hard copies of signed and sealed As -Built Drawings and an AutoCAD file. 5J- 17.050 Definition: (10)(a) As -Built Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal and /or vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and delineated: also knonw as Record Survey. This survey shall be clearly titled "As -Built Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the Owner of Clearwater Construction Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the Owner will procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and will back charge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the Owner with the required As -Built Survey. 6.11.2.2 Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems 1. Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. New sanitary service connections and replaced sanitary service connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest downstream manhole. All manholes, cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations, manhole and catch basin dimensions, pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if one exists. 2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted. 6.11.2.3 Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain) All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction Sectionlll.docxx Page 20 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described above. Additionally there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points. 6.11.2.4 Electrical and Control Wiring The as -built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as -built drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional conduit runs, 1 -line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder diagram. 6.11.2.5 Horizontal and Vertical Control The As -Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans or if required by the Owner the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of 1983/90 (horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of measurement shall be the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or vertical), must be approved by the Owner of Clearwater Engineering Department. 6.11.2.6 Standards The As -Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 5J -17 and the ' Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that pertain to the as -built survey it is the requirement of the Owner to have minimum location points at every change in direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes. ' 6.11.2.7 Other 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 The As -Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans. 6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS 6.11.3.1 Layer Naming 6.11.3.1.1 Prefixes and Suffixes DI prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities EP prefix denotes existing points - field collected EX prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols PR prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols FU prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) - line work and symbols TX suffix denotes text — use for all text, no matter the prefix Sectionlll.docxx Page 21 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 6.11.3.1.2 Laver Naming Definitions: GAS gas lines and appurtenances ELEC power lines and appurtenances PHONE telephone lines and appurtenances CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances BOC curbs WALK sidewalk WATER water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers STORM storm lines and appurtenances TREES trees, bushes, planters SANITARY sanitary lines and appurtenances FENCE all fences BLDG buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation DRIVE driveways EOP edge of pavement without curbs TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes TOPBANK top of bank TOESLOPE toe of slope TOPBERM top of berm TOEBERM toe of berm SEAWALL seawall CONCSLAB concrete slabs WALL walls, except seawall SHORE shoreline, water elevation CL centerline of road CLD centerline of ditch CLS centerline of swale CORNER property comers, monumentation BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks Other layers may be created as required, using above format. 6.11.3.2 Layer Properties All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer. All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer. Sectionlll.docxx Page 22 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts. 6.11.3.3 Text Styles Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 0 °, and a text times the plot scale. Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22. height of .010 times the plot scale. height of .008 5°, and a text 6.11.4 DELIVERABLES: The as -built survey shall be produced on bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1 " =20' unless approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver all drawing files in digital format. Acceptable file formats include: DWG, of a shape file. Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727) 562 -4762 or e -mail address Thomas.Mahony@myClearwater.com. 6.12CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism, modification or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution or non - execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its completion and final acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance ". Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work, which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by Owner's Representative, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Owner's Representative, (iii) the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by the Owner to contractor under the Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner, (v) any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance by the Engineer. 6.13CONTINUING THE WORK Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with the Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. SectionllI.docxx Page 23 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 6.14INDEMNIFICATION Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) caused by, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss or damage: (i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (ii) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or omission of a person or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such indemnified party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such person. If, through acts of neglect on the part of Contractor, any other Contractor or any Subcontractor shall suffer loss or damage on the work, Contractor shall settle with such other Contractor or Subcontractor by agreement or arbitration if such other Contractor or Subcontractor will so settle. If such other Contractor or Subcontractor shall assert any claim against the Owner on such account of any damage alleged to have been sustained, the Owner shall notify Contractor, who shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any such claim. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors, or employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this paragraph shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Sub - contractor, Supplier or other person or organization under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under this paragraph shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's Consultants, officers, directors, employees, or agents caused by the professional negligence, errors or omissions of any of them. 6.15CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION Contractor shall notify Owner by US mail addressed to the City Engineer of any changes in company contact information. This includes: contact phone, address, project manager, email addresses, etc. 7 OTHER WORK 7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE The City reserves the right to have its own forces enter the construction site at any time and perform work as necessary in order to perform infrastructure repair or maintenance, whether related to the project or not. The Contractor will allow complete access to all utility owners for these purposes. SectionllLdocxx Page 24 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions The City may have its own forces perform new work related to the project, however, this work will be identified in the Contract Scope of Work and coordination will be such that this activity is denoted in the Contractor's CPM Schedule so as not to cause any delays or interference with the Contractor's work or schedule. 7.2 COORDINATION If the Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site, the following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, the Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility in respect of such coordination. 8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, the Owner shall issue all communications from the Owner to the Contractor through Owner's Representative. The Owner shall furnish the data required of the Owner under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General Conditions. The Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The Work. The Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in the Article on Tests and Inspections. In connection with the Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer may Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with the Owner's right to terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances. Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE Dependent of the project type, the Owner's Representative during the construction period will either be the Construction Manager, the Engineer, or a designee of the Project's Owner. The duties, responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Owner's Representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent of Owner and Engineer. Sectionlll.docxx Page 25 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the requirements of the Contract Documents regarding design issues only, in the form of Submittal responses, RFI responses, Drawings or otherwise, as Engineer may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract Documents. All other clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued form the Owner's Representative. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on the Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as provided in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time. 9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes to be defective, or that Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. 9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop Drawings and Samples. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Change Orders, see the articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on Payments to Contractor and Completion. 9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES The Owner's Representative will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will be referred initially to Owner's Representative in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will be delivered by the claimant to Owner's Representative and the other party to the Agreement promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Owner's Representative and the other party within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit any response to Owner's Representative and the claimant within thirty (30) days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time. Owner's Representative will render a formal decision in writing within thirty (30) days after receipt of the opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Owner Representative's Sectionlll.docxx Page 26 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from Owner Representative's decision is taken within thirty (30) days of the Owner Representative's decision, or the appeal time which may be stated in a Dispute Resolution Agreement between Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or (ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention to appeal from Owner Representative's written decision is delivered by the Owner or Contractor to the other and to Owner's Representative within thirty (30) days after the date of such decision and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim, dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty (60) days of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Owner and Contractor. When functioning as interpreter and judge, Owner's Representative will not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Owner's Representative with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any exercise by the Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution. 9.6 LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES Neither Owner Representative's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Owner's Representative in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise or performance of any authority or responsibility by Owner's Representative shall create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by Owner's Representative to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. Owner's Representative will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the work. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the work. Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to Owner Representative's CEI, the Engineer's Consultants, and assistants. Sectionlll.docxx Page 27 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 10 CHANGES IN THE WORK Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, the Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as may otherwise be specifically provided). If the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in article for Uncovering Work. The Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments recommended by Owner's Representative covering: changes in the work which are (i) ordered by the Owner (ii) required because of acceptance of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the parties; changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Owner's Representative pursuant to the article for Decisions on Disputes; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly. 11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative or promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) Sectionlll.docxx Page 28 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: (i) where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii) where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii) where the Work is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the Work. Where the work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and where the Owner's Representative, the Owner, the Engineer, the Engineer's Consultant, and Contractor cannot mutually agree on a lump sum price, the City of Clearwater shall pay for directed changes in the WORK, on "COST REIMBURSEMENT" basis. The Contractor shall apply for compensation, detailing Contractors forces, materials, equipment, subcontractors, and other items of direct costs required for the directed work. The application for Cost Reimbursement shall be limited to the following items: 1. Labor, including foremen, for those hours associated with the direct work (actual payroll cost, including wages, fringe benefits, labor insurance and labor taxes established by law). Expressly excluded from this item are all costs associated with negotiating the subject change. 2. Materials associated with the change, including sales tax. The costs of materials shall be substantiated through vendors' invoices. 3. Rental or equivalent rental costs of equipment, including necessary transportation costs if specifically used for the WORK. The rental rates shall not exceed the current rental rates prevailing in the locality or as defined in the rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment (a.k.a. DataQuest Blue Book). The rental rate is defined as the full- unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment and shall cover the costs of all fuel, supplies, repairs, insurance, and other costs associated with supplying the equipment for work ordered. Contractor -owned equipment will be paid for the duration of time required to complete the work. Utilize lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly rates. Do not exceed estimated operating costs given in Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed for equipment on stand -by. 4. Additional costs for Bonds, Insurance if required by the City of Clearwater. The following fixed fees shall be added to the costs of the directed work performed by the Contractor or Subcontractor. A. A fixed fee of fifteen percent (15 %) shall be added to the costs of Item 1 above. If work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor's fee shall not exceed five percent (5 %), and the subcontractor's fee shall not exceed ten percent (10 %). B. A fixed fee of ten percent (10%) shall be added to the costs of Item 2 above. Sectionlll.docxx Page 29 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions C. No markup shall be added to the costs of Items 3 and 4. The fixed fees shall be considered the full compensation for all cost of general supervision, overhead, profit, and other general expense. 11.2ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii) Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Owner's Representative to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Owner's Representative. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. The Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if: (i) the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or the Owner believes that the Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On unit price contracts, Owner endeavors to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily complete the construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project construction and completion that not all unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a finalizing change order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually used in the construction of the project will result in a net decrease from the original Contract Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor in his original bid. Sectionlll.docxx Page 30 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions 12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after such occurrence, unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be determined by Owner's Representative. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones) may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made therefore as provided in the article for Changes in the Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by the Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both the Owner and Contractor, an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall the Owner be liable to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused by or within the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for Other Work. 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these Sectionlll.docxx Page 31 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body including all Owner Building Departments and Owner Utility Departments, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Owner's Representative the required certificates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, or of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation of the Work. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this paragraph shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Owner's Representative has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for Owner Representative's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense. If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Owner's Representative or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Owner Representative's request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as Engineer or Owner's Representative may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in Contract Price. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 13.3OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer or Owner's Representative may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been Sectionlll.docxx Page 32 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions eliminated; however, this right of Owner's Representative to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner's Representative or Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Owner's Representative stops Work under this paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract Price. 13.4CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK If required by Engineer or Owner's Representative, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer or Owner's Representative, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). 13.5WARRANTY /CORRECTION PERIOD If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in accordance with the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by the Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendment. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected, removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. 13.6ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, the Owner prefers to accept it, the Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to the Owner's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work such costs to be approved by Owner's Representative as to reasonableness. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Owner Representative's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree Sectionlll.docxx Page 33 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in article for Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs after the Owner Representative's recommendation for final payment an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to the Owner. 13.7OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Owner's Representative to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Owner's Representative in accordance with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Owner may, after seven days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and remedial action, the Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's Representatives, Agents and employees, the Owner's other contractors, and Owner's Representative, Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable the Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained by the Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by the Owner of the Owner's rights and remedies hereunder. 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION Requests for payment shall be processed in accordance with F.S. 218.735 and as described herein. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Owner's Representative for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the 25th of each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Owner's Representative and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, payment will not be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work. Payment will only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully installed including all materials, labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5 %) of the amount of each Application for Payment for the total of all Work, including as -built survey and Inspector overtime reimbursement, completed to date will be held until final completion and SectionlIl.docxx Page 34 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions acceptance of the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be construed to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract. The Contractor shall review with the Engineer or the Construction Inspector all quantities and work for which payment is being applied for and reach agreement prior to submittal of an Official Pay Request. The Engineer or the Construction Inspector will verify that the on -site marked up as -built drawings are up to date with the work and are in compliance with the Contract Documents. In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to produce for Owner, within fifteen (15) days of the approval of any progress payment, evidence and /or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the report is provided. 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work shall be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnisher's of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract. Contractor shall at the Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do so, then the Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid bills, of which the Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon the Owner to the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, the Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by the Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract by the Owner to Contractor, and the Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment made in good faith. 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS The Owner's Representative will within twenty (20) business days after receipt authorize and process payment by the Owner a properly submitted and documented Application for payment, unless the application requires review by an Agent. If the Application for payment requires review and approval by an Agent, properly submitted and documented Applications for payment will be paid by the Owner within twenty -five (25) business days. If an Application for payment is rejected, notice shall be given within twenty (20) business days of receipt indicating the reasons for refusing payment. The reasons for rejecting an Application will be submitted in writing, specifying deficiencies and identifying actions that would make the Application proper. Sectionlll.docxx Page 35 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. The Owner's Representative or Agent may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment to Owner. Owner's Representative or Agent may also refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be necessary in Owner Representative's or Agent's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because: (i) the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement, (ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) the Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Owner's Representative or Agent has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in the article on Suspension of Work and Termination. The Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Owner's Representative or Agent because: (i) claims have been made against the Owner on account of Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to the Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling the Owner to a set -off against the amount recommended, or (iv) the Owner has actual knowledge of any of the events described in this paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor notice of refusal to pay in accordance with the time constraints of this section with a copy to the Owner's Representative or Agent, stating the reasons for such actions, and Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to the Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action. 14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION Use by the Owner at the Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which (i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer, Owner's Representative, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by the Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final Completion of all the Work subject to the following: The Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit the Owner to use any such part of the Work which the Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, Owner's Representative, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefore. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of the articles for Substantial Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. Sectionlll.docxx Page 36 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 14.5 FINAL INSPECTION Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Owner's Representative will make a final inspection with Engineer, Owner and Contractor and will within thirty (30) days notify Contractor in writing of particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. The Owner's Representative will produce a final punch list, deliver it to the Contractor within five (5) days of completion and assign a date for this work to be completed not less than thirty (30) days from delivery of the list. Failure to include any corrective work or pending items does not alter the responsibility of the contractor to complete all the construction services purchased pursuant to the contract. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Owner's Representative and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating instructions, As -built /Record Drawings, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of inspection, Inspector overtime reimbursement as required in the Contract Documents and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (i) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, (ii) consent of the surety, if any or if necessary, to final payment, and (iii) complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to the Owner) of all Liens arising out of or filed in connection with the Work. In lieu of such releases or waivers of Liens and as approved by the Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material and equipment for which a Lien could be filed, and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against any Lien. Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the prosecution of the Work, and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition. 14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if Owner's Representative so confirms, the Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final Application for payment and recommendation of Owner's Representative, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by the Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and SectionlIl.docxx Page 37 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Owner's Representative with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of claims. If on the basis of Owner Representative's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Owner's Representative is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Owner's Representative will indicate in writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment. Thereupon, Owner's Representative will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Owner's Representative will return the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and substance, the Owner shall, within twenty (20) days after receipt thereof pay contractor the amount recommended by Owner's Representative. 14.8WAIVER OF CLAIMS The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by the Owner against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against the Owner other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled. 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK At any time and without cause, Owner's Representative may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety (90) days by notice in writing to Contractor, which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 15.2OWNER MAY TERMINATE Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time); if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; if Contractor disregards the authority of Owner's Representative; if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this Sectionlll.docxx Page 38 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of the Owner, or if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise than as herein specified, or at any time Owner's Representative certifies in writing to the Owner that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or that the work or any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed. The Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and, to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the Owner may deem expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and damages sustained by the Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by the Owner will be reviewed by Owner's Representative as to their reasonableness and when so approved by Owner's Representative incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by the Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by the Owner will not release Contractor from liability. Upon seven (7) days' written notice to Contractor and Owner's Representative, the Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Owner, elect to terminate the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items): for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. Sectionlll.docxx Page 39 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE If, through no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety (90) days by the Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or the Owner's Representative fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted or the Owner fails for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative, and provided the Owner or Owner's Representative does not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from the Owner payment on the same terms as provided in the article for the Owner May Terminate. However, if the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of Owner, the Contractor shall not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Owner's Representative has failed to act on an Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted, or the Owner has failed for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may upon seven (7) day's written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative stop the Work until payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended to preclude Contractor from making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract Price or Change of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping Work as permitted by this article. 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION If and to the extent that the Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on Disputes, the Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding arbitration. 17 MISCELLANEOUS 17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS The form of all submittals, notices, change orders, pay applications, logs, schedules and other documents permitted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall be determined by the Owner's Representative subject to the approval of Owner. 17.2GIVING NOTICE Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. Sectionlll.docxx Page 40 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions 17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM Should the Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error, omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose. 17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs. 17.5ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without the approval of Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights to notice of assignment. 17.6 RENEWAL OPTION Annual Contracts issued through the Engineering Department may be renewed for up to two (2) years, upon mutual consent of both the Owner and the Contractor/Vendor. All terms, conditions and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or in the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the Owner, and must be agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds, and the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by the Construction Department. 17.7 ROLL -OFF CONTAINERS AND /OR DUMPSTERS All City construction projects shall utilize City of Clearwater Solid Waste roll -off containers and/or dumpsters for their disposal needs. For availability or pricing contact Mike Pryor at the City of Clearwater, Solid Waste Department, phone: (727) 562 -4923 or email: Michael.Pryor@myClearwater.com. 18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the Contractor shall work and order thereof. 19 MATERIAL USED All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all materials. Sectionlll.docxx Page 41 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 20 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary General Conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary Technical Specifications, Technical Specifications, Drawings. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern. 21 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) 21.1 SALES TAX SAVINGS The Owner reserves the right to purchase certain portions of the materials for the Project directly in order to save applicable sales tax in compliance with Florida Law since owner is exempt from the payment of sales tax. The contract price includes Florida sales and other applicable taxes for materials, supplies, and equipment which will be a part of the Contractor's Work. Owner - purchasing of construction materials, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. The contract price shall be reduced by the actual cost of the materials purchased by owner plus the normally applicable sales tax, even if the actual cost is in excess of the cost for the materials as -bid by the Contractor. For purposes of calculating engineering fees, contractor fees, architects fees, and any other amounts that are based on the contract amount, however, the original, as -bid contract amount shall be used. Direct purchase shall be considered for single items that exceed $10,000 in value and/or items identified in SECTION V, Bidders Proposal. The Contractor shall provide the Owner an ODP Summary of all intended suppliers, vendors, and materials for consideration as ODP materials (refer to ODP Instructions in Contract Appendix). 21.2TITLE AND OWNER RISK Owner will issue Purchase Orders and provide a copies of Owner's Florida Consumer Certification of Tax Exemption and Certificate of Entitlement directly to the Vendor for ODP materials. Invoices for ODP materials shall be issued to the Owner in care of the Contractor. Notwithstanding the transfer of ODP materials by the Owner to the Contractor's possession, the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all ODP materials; therefore, the owner assumes the risk of damage or loss at the time of purchase or delivery of items, unless material is damaged as the result of negligence by the Contractor. 21.3CONTRACTOR'S RECEIPT OF MATERIALS The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials furnished to the Owner including, but not limited to, verifying correct quantities, verifying documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchases, providing and obtaining all warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents, and inspection and acceptance of the goods at the time of delivery. The Contractor shall coordinate delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and other arrangements normally required by the Contractor for the particular materials furnished. The Contractor shall provide all services required for the unloading and handling of materials. The Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Sectionlll.docxx Page 42 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions Owner from any and all claims of whatever nature resulting from non - payment of goods to suppliers arising from the action of the Contractor. As ODP materials are delivered to the job site, the Contractor shall visually inspect all shipments from the suppliers, and approve the vendor's invoice for materials delivered. The Contractor shall assure that each delivery of ODP materials is accompanied by documentation adequate to identify the Purchase Order against which the purchase is made. This documentation may consist of a delivery ticket and /or an invoice from the supplier conforming to the Purchase Order together with such additional information as the Owner may require. The Contractor will then forward the invoice and additional information, if available, to the Owner for payment within thirty (30) days of receipt of said goods or materials. Such payment shall be directly from public funds. The Contractor shall insure that ODP materials conform to the Specifications and determine prior to acceptance of goods at time of delivery if such materials are patently defective, and whether such materials are identical to the materials ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If the Contractor discovers defective or non - conformities in ODP materials upon such visual inspection, the Contractor shall not utilize such nonconforming or defective materials in the Contractor's Work and instead shall properly notify the Owner of the defective or nonconforming condition so that repair or replacement of those materials can occur without undue delay or interruption to the Project. If the Contractor fails to perform such inspection and otherwise incorporates into the Contractor's Work such defective or nonconforming ODP materials, the condition of which it either knew or should have known by performance of an inspection, Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to the Owner, resulting from Contractor's incorporation of such materials into the Project, including liquidated damages. 21.4ODP RECORDS, WARRANTIES AND INDEMNIFICATION The Contractor shall maintain records of all ODP materials it incorporates into Contractor's Work from the stock of ODP materials in its possession. The Contractor shall account monthly to the Owner for any ODP materials delivered into the Contractor's possession, indicating portions of all such materials which have been incorporated in the Contractor's Work. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing all warranties and guarantees for all materials and products as required by the Contract Documents. All repair, maintenance, or damage- repair calls shall be forwarded to the Contractor for resolution with the appropriate supplier, vendor, or subcontractor. The Owner shall indemnify and hold Contractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and penalties incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that purchases made by Owner, which Owner treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to sales tax. "Final determination" shall mean an assessment by the Department of Revenue that is no longer subject to protest, or a determination of a court having jurisdiction over such matters that is final and not subject to appeal. Contractor agrees to promptly notify owner of any audit, assessment, proposed assessment or notice of deficiency issued with regard to the Project and relating to ODP materials. Sectionlll.docxx Page 43 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 22.1 GENERAL The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route or within a 500 -foot radius, unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, with a printed door hanger notice indicating the following information about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of construction; general sequence and scheduling of construction events; possibility of water service disruption and /or colored water due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the Superintendent's name, Contractor address and telephone number; Contractor's company logo (optional); requirement for residents to remove landscaping and /or other private appurtenances which are in conflict with the proposed construction; and other language as appropriate to the scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed language shall be approved by the City prior to the start of construction. Notification shall be printed on brightly colored and durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4 -1/4 by 11 inches in size. Notification (door hanger) shall be posted to residences and businesses directly affected by the Contractor's activities no later than seven (7) days prior to the start of construction activity. Directly affected by the Contractor's activities shall mean all Contractor operations including staging areas, equipment and material storage, principal access routes across private property, etc. Contractor cannot start without proper seven (7) day notice period to residents. Contractor is required to maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries during normal business hours and to maintain appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen inquires after business hours. Resident notification by the Contractor is a non - specific pay item to be included in the bid items provided in the contract proposal. 22.2 EXAMPLE CITY SEAL Of CITY OF CLEARWATER NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION TODAY'S DATE: / / PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE We are the construction contractor performing (state type of contract) for the City of Clearwater in your area. The work will be performed in the public right -of -way adjacent to your property. This notice is placed a minimum of seven (7) days in advance of construction to notify property owners of the pending start of construction. (Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners) The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right -of -way. Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks will be made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors, textures and /or materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or structures within the right -of -way which must be removed due to the construction process will not be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property Sectionlll.docxx Page 44 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within the right -of -way may be required to be placed elsewhere. We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or any particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Manager at (727) . We will be more than happy to assist you. Construction is anticipated to begin on: Company Name Company Address Contractor Phone Number 23 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 23.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE The Owner desires to inform the general public on the Owner's use and expenditure of public funding for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this purpose, the Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during the full course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at all location(s) of active work. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project sign(s) shall be included in the cost of the work. The number of and type of signs will be stated in SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 — SCOPE DESCRIPTION. 23.2TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended locations or various locations. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be determined after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on sign at the preconstruction conference. 23.3 FIXED SIGN Fixed sign shall be 4 -foot by 6 -foot (4'x6') in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade plywood of the same size and a minimum thickness of 1/2- inches. Sign shall be attached to a minimum of two (2) 4 -inch by 4 -inch (4 "x4 ") below grade pressure treated (P.T.) wooden posts and braced as necessary for high winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring in the ground. Bottom of sign must be a minimum of 24- inches above the ground. Alternate mounting system or attachment to fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for approval. Sign shall be painted white on both sides with exterior rated paint. 23.4 PORTABLE SIGNS Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24- inches by 30- inches (24 "x30 ") in size and will be attached to a standard sized portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080 - inches or thicker, background of white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl lettering. Portable sign shall be two signs located and attached to each side of the traffic barricade. Sectionlll.docxx Page 45 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 23.5SIGN COLORING Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other lettering shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional to the sign itself Each sign shall depict the City's sun and waves logo. The color of the sun shall be pantone yellow; the wave shall be process blue; and the text shall be black. 23.6SIGN PLACEMENT Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the project site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either pedestrian or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the Owner's right -of -way, the signs will be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the Owner's right -of- way, the signs will be placed in the right -of -way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations of active work on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and will remain in place until the request for final payment. 23.7SIGN MAINTENANCE The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement, removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced. SectionIILdocxx Page 46 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 23.8TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN 6' 1- PROJECT NAME (CONTRACT NUMBER) (DEPARTMENT NAME) PROJECT CONTRACTOR: COMPLETION DATE: FUNDING: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE: ',Clearwater a) E E c E iii f ti 4 "x4' P. T. Post (Typ.) If i i41 1' 24 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the Engineer gives written notice to proceed (NTP), which notice shall be given as outlined in Article 2 of these General Conditions. It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within the indicated number of consecutive calendar days as determined in SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE DESCRIPTION. Contract date to commence at issuance of notice to proceed. If the Contractor fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee Holidays, that in the opinion of the Engineer, will require the presence of Inspectors, the Sectionlll.docxx 1 Page 47 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions Contractor shall pay the City of Clearwater, Florida, the amount of Four Hundred Eighty Dollars ($480.00) per each eight -hour (8) day for each Inspector given such assignment. The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance. 25 SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM Any company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or is engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, is ineligible for, and may not bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for an amount equal to or greater than one million ($1,000,000.00) dollars. Therefore, if applicable, each entity submitting a bid, proposal, or response to a solicitation must certify to the City of Clearwater that it is not on either list or engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria at the time of submitting a bid, proposal or response, in accordance with section 287.135, Florida Statutes. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing, or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce. The certification form (the Certification) is attached hereto, and it must be submitted, along with all other relevant contract documents, at the time of submitting a bid, proposal, or response. Failure to provide the Certification may deem the entity's submittal non - responsive. If the City of Clearwater determines that an entity has submitted a false certification form, been placed either on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, (for contracts entered into or renewed on or after July 1, 2011 through June 30, 2012), or submitted a false certification form, has been placed either on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List or been engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, (for contracts entered into or renewed on or after July 1, 2012) then the contract may be terminated at the option of the City of Clearwater. Other than the submission of a false certification, the option to waive the aforementioned deficiencies mentioned in the previous sentence may be asserted on a case -by -case basis, at the sole discretion of the City of Clearwater, if to the following conditions are found to exist: A. For Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, (all of the following must occur): 1. The scrutinized business operations were made before July 1, 2011. 2. The scrutinized business operations have not been expanded or renewed after July 1, 2011. 3. The City of Clearwater determines that it is in the best interest of the City to contract with the company or entity. Sectionlll.docxx Page 48 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 4. The company or entity has adopted, has publicized and is implementing a formal plan to cease scrutinized business operations and to refrain from engaging in any new scrutinized business operations. B. For Companies Engaged in Business Operations in Cuba or Syria: 1. The business operations were made before July 1, 2012. 2. The business operations have not been expanded or renewed after July 1, 2012. 3. The City of Clearwater determines that it is in the best interest of the City to contract with the company or entity. 4. The company or entity has adopted, has publicized, and is implementing a formal plan to cease business operations and to refrain from engaging in any new business operations in Cuba or Syria. Further, the City may allow a company to bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for an amount equal to or greater than one million ($1,000,000.00) dollars, if the City makes a public finding that, absent one of the above exemptions, the City would otherwise be unable to obtain goods or services for which the contract is offered. The City retains the right to pursue civil penalties and any other applicable rights and remedies as provided by law for the false submission of the attached certification form. Sectionlll.docxx Page 49 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WITH THE BID PROPOSAL. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORM AS REQUIRED, MAY DEEM YOUR SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIVE. The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that: 1. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is aware of the requirements of section 287.135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or engaging in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 2. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is eligible to participate in this solicitation and is not listed on either the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engaged in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 3. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce; and 4. If awarded the Contract (or Agreement), the vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner will immediately notify the City of Clearwater in writing, no later than five (5) calendar days after any of its principals are placed on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engages in business operations in Cuba and Syria. Sectionlll.docxx Authorized Signature Printed Name Title Name of Entity /Corporation Page 50 of 51 7/7/2014 STATE OF COUNTY OF Section III — General Conditions The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me on this day of , 201, by (name of person whose signature is being notarized) as the (title) of (name of corporation/entity), personally known to me as described herein , or produced a (type of identification) as identification, and who did /did not take an oath. Notary Public Printed Name My Commission Expires: NOTARY SEAL ABOVE Sectionlll.docxx Page 51 of 51 7/7/2014 SECTION IIIA SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS These Supplemental General Conditions amend or supplement the General Conditions of the Construction Contract and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. All provisions that are not so amended or supplementary remain in full force and effect. The terms used in these Supplemental General Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions. 1. In Paragraph 1 Definitions, delete the definition for Contract Time in its entirety and insert the following in its place: Contract Time - The number of days or the dates stated in the Contract to: (i) achieve Milestones, if any; (ii) achieve Substantial Completion; and (iii) achieve Final Completion. 2. In Paragraph 1 Definitions, add the following new paragraph: Final Completion — The time at which the Work has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Work, including all "punch list" items, is fully and finally completed in a good and workmanlike manner, in accordance with the Contract Documents; is free of all defects and deficiencies; all required final governmental inspections and approvals have been obtained; and all final paperwork, including that necessary to prepare a Final Change Order (if required), has been submitted and approved. 3. Delete Paragraph 2.3 in its entirety and insert the following in its place: 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME /NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT The Contract Times will commence to run on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. The Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No Work shall be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run. A Notice to Proceed may be issued at any time within 60 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. A Notice to Proceed will not be issued prior to the Contractor providing the City a certified copy of the recorded payment and performance bond, pursuant to §255.05(1)(b), Florida Statutes. 4. In Paragraph 6.1, delete the last sentence in the 4th paragraph and insert the following in its place: The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be the City's actual cost per hour, not to exceed $120 per hour. When inspection is being provided by the Engineer or a consultant to the City, Section IIIA.docx Page 1 of 4 07/15/2014 the cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be 3.0 times the Engineer's or consultant's direct technical labor cost. 5. In Paragraph 6.11.1, delete the first full sentence of the first paragraph and insert the following in its place: Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and Samples as called for in the Technical Specifications, and all other items specified to be submitted in the Division 1 specifications, to Engineer for review as called for in the Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. Items required to be submitted in accordance with Division 1 shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements for Shop Drawings as specified in the General Requirements. 6. Delete the last paragraph in Paragraph 6.11.1 in its entirety and insert the following in its place: Contractor shall furnish required submittals with complete information and accuracy. Owner reserves the right to backcharge Contractor for Engineer's actual direct technical labor cost times a 3.0 multiplier for the review of any first time submittals that account for a number greater than thirty -eight (38), not to exceed $467 each. Contractor may combine or group similar items into a single submittal, such as valves or valve O &M manuals, or may group submittals pertaining to a single item into a single submittal, such as a valve shop drawing and the corresponding O &M manual. Contractor shall not combine unrelated items into a single submittal, such as valves and concrete. Owner reserves the right to backcharge Contractor for Engineer's actual direct technical labor cost times a 3.0 multiplier for the review of any re- submittals, or submittals requiring confirmation, that account for a number greater than eight (8), not to exceed a cost of $234 each. In the event that Contractor requests a substitution for a previously approved item, all of Engineer's costs in the reviewing and approval of the substitution will be backcharged to Contractor, unless the need for such substitution is beyond the control of Contractor. Said costs shall be Engineer's actual direct technical labor cost times a 3.0 multiplier, not to exceed $467 each. 7. Delete Paragraph 24 in its entirety and insert the following in its place: 24 CONTRACT TIMES AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 24.1 Time is of the Essence 24.1.1 It is mutually agreed between the parties that time is of the essence. All Contract Time(s) for Milestones, if any, Substantial Completion, Final Completion and readiness for final payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. 24.2 Substantial Completion 24.2.1 Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the Work within 360 days from the date on which Owner issues Contractor a Notice to Proceed. Section IIIA.docx Page 2 of 4 07/15/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 24.2.2 The term Substantial Completion means the time at which the Work has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work is otherwise sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. 24.3 Final Completion 24.3.1 Contractor shall achieve Final Completion of the Work within 390 days from the date on which Owner issues Contractor a Notice to Proceed. 24.4 Liquidated Damages 24.4.1 Contractor and Owner recognize that time is of the essence of this Contract and that Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified herein, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions. The parties also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty), Contractor shall pay as follows: 24.4.2 In the event Contractor fails to achieve Substantial Completion of the Work within the time specified above, Contractor shall be required to pay Owner the sum as specified in the Contract per day for each and every calendar day elapsing after the time specified above, until the Contractor has achieved Substantial Completion. 24.4.3 In the event Contractor fails to achieve Final Completion of the Work within the time specified above, the Owner shall also have the right to: A. Terminate the Contractor without further notice; B. Complete any of the remaining items and backcharge Contractor for all costs incurred, and exercise all other rights and remedies available at law or in equity. Section IIIA.docx Page 3 of 4 07/15/2014 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Section IIIA.docx Page 4 of 4 07/15/2014 SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Table of Contents: SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1 SCOPE OF WORK 1 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION 1 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST 2 2 FIELD ENGINEERING 3 2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR 3 2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS 3 2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA 4 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY 4 3 DEFINITION OF TERMS 4 3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS 4 3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS 4 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK 6 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK 6 6 CONCRETE 7 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 7 7.1 EXCAVATION 7 7.2 FORMS 7 8 REINFORCEMENT 7 8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT 8 9 OBSTRUCTIONS 8 10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT 8 11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS 9 12 DEWATERING 9 12.1 GENERAL 9 12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 10 12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL 10 12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROMANYNON- CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY 10 13 SANITARY MANHOLES 12 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE 12 13.2 PRECAST TYPE 13 SectionlV.doc i 11/26/2013 13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) 13 13.3 DROP MANHOLES 13 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS 13 13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS 13 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES 14 14 BACKFILL 14 15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. 14 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES 14 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT 14 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL 15 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 15 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 15 18 UNDERDRAINS 15 18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 15 18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 16 19 STORM SEWERS 16 19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION 16 1 19.2 TESTING 16 19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT 17 20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 17 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 20.1 MATERIALS 17 20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE 17 20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE 18 20.2 INSTALLATION 18 20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE 18 20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE 18 20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS 19 20.4 TESTING 19 20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS 19 20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS 19 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT 19 20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE 19 20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE 20 21 DRAINAGE 20 22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 20 22.1 BASE 20 22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE 21 22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE 22 22.2 SUBGRADE 22 22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 22 22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 22 SectionlV.doc ii 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS 22 23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 22 23.1.1 AGGREGATE 22 23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS 23 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE 23 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES 23 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS 24 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 24 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 25 23.6.1 CRACKS 25 23.6.2 POTHOLES 25 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES 25 23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 26 23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 26 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 27 23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT 27 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT 27 25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 28 25.1 IRRIGATION 28 25.1.1 DESCRIPTION 28 25.1.2 PRODUCTS 29 25.1.3 EXECUTION 33 25.2 LANDSCAPE 37 25.2.1 GENERAL 37 25.2.2 PRODUCTS 42 25.2.3 EXECUTION 45 26 HDPE DEFORMED REFORMED PIPE LINING 52 26.1 INTENT 52 26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY 52 26.3 MATERIALS 52 26.4 CLEANING /SURFACE PREPARATION 53 26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION 53 26.6 LINER INSTALLATION 53 26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION 54 26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION 54 26.9 PAYMENT 54 27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS 54 27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 54 27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 54 28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS 55 29 CONCRETE CURBS 55 29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 55 29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 55 SectionlV.doc iii 11/26/2013 30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 55 30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 55 30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS 55 30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 56 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT 56 31 SODDING 56 32 SEEDING 56 33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES 57 33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES 57 33.2 PRECAST TYPE 57 33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT 58 34 MATERIAL USED 58 35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 58 36 STREET SIGNS 58 37 AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 58 37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO /VIDEO RECORDING 58 37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING 58 37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS 58 37.4 EQUIPMENT 58 37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO 59 37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO 59 37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION 59 37.8 LIGHTING 59 37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL 59 37.10 VIDEO LOG /INDEX 60 37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE 60 37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES 60 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL 60 38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS 60 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES 60 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS 60 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES 61 38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS 61 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES 61 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS 61 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION 62 38.9 MAINTENANCE 62 38.10 COMPLIANCE 62 39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING 65 40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE 65 SectionN.doc iv 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 41 POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND APPURTENANCES 65 41.1 SCOPE 65 41.2 MATERIALS 66 41.2.1 GENERAL 66 41.2.2 PIPE MATERLALS AND FITTINGS 66 41.2.3 GATE VALVES 68 41.2.4 VALVE BOXES 68 41.2.5 HYDRANTS 69 41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES 70 41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS 70 41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 70 41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES 71 41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS 71 41.3 CONSTRUCTION 71 41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING 71 41.3.2 PIPE LAYING 71 41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 73 41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES 73 41.4 TESTS 74 41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS 74 41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST 74 41.5 STERILIZATION 74 41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT 74 41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM 74 41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE 74 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS 75 41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS 75 41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 75 41.6.1 GENERAL 75 41.6.2 FURNISHAND INSTALL WATER MAINS 76 41.6.3 FURNISHAND INSTALL FITTINGS 76 41.6.4 FURNISHAND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS 76 41.6.5 FURNISHAND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 76 42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 77 43 TENNIS COURTS 77 43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS 77 43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS 77 43.1.2 BASE COURSE 77 43.1.3 PRIME COAT 77 43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE 77 43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE 77 43.1.6 COLOR COAT 78 43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS 79 43.2.1 GENERAL 79 43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION 80 SectionN.doc v 11/26/2013 43.2.3 SLOPE 80 43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION 81 43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING 81 43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE 81 43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER 81 43.2.8 FENCING 82 43.2.9 WINDSCREENS 82 43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT 82 43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE 84 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable) 84 43.2.13 CONCRETE 84 43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING 84 43.2.15 WATER COOLER 85 43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION 85 43.2.17 WARRANTY 85 44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 86 44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 86 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 86 44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY 86 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES 87 44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS 87 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS 87 44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS 87 44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS 87 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 87 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION 88 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 88 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR 88 45 CURED -IN -PLACE PIPE LINING 88 45.1 INTENT 88 45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY 89 45.3 MATERIALS 89 45.4 CLEANING /SURFACE PREPARATION 89 45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION 90 45.6 LINER INSTALLATION 90 45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION 90 45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION 90 45.9 PAYMENT 90 46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING 91 46.1 MATERIALS 91 46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS 91 46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL 91 46.1.3 SAMPLES 91 46.1.4 REJECTION 91 46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS 91 46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES 92 SectionlV.doc vi 11/26/2013 46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE 92 46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS 92 46.3.3 PIPE JOINING 92 46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE 92 46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE 92 46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS 92 46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION 92 46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS 93 46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER 93 46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES 93 46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED 93 46.4.7 BACKFILLING 94 46.4.8 POINT REPAIR 94 46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS 94 47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE 94 47.1 SCOPE 94 47.2 MATERIALS 94 47.3 PIPE 94 47.4 JOINING SYSTEM 95 47.5 FITTINGS 95 48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS 95 48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT 95 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE 95 48.3 COMPOSITION 95 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS 96 48.5 MATERIALS 96 48.6 WATER 96 48.7 REINFORCEMENT 96 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS 96 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION 97 48.10 PROPORTIONING 97 48.11 MIXING 97 48.12 APPLICATION 97 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS 98 48.14 SURFACE FINISH 98 48.15 CURING 98 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION 98 48.17 INSPECTION 99 48.18 EQUIPMENT 99 49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 100 49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT 100 49.2 PAYMENT 100 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 100 49.3.1 MATERIALS 100 49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 101 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS -2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 101 SectionlV.doc vii 11/26/2013 49.4.1 MATERIALS 102 49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL 102 49.6 GROUTING MIX 102 49.7 LINER MIX 102 49.8 WATER 103 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS 103 49.10 EQUIPMENT 103 49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 103 49.11.1 PREPARATION 103 49.11.2 MIXING 104 49.11.3 SPRAYING 104 49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING 104 49.11.5 CURING 104 49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE 105 49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 105 49.12.1 SCOPE 105 49.12.2 MATERIALS 105 49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 107 50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 109 51 IN -LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM 109 51.1 SCOPE 109 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS 110 51.2.1 ASPHALT 110 51.2.2 CONCRETE 110 51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX 110 51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT 110 51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE 111 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION 111 51.6 PLAYING LINES 111 51.7 GENERAL 111 51.8 LIMITATIONS 111 52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 112 53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 112 53.1 MATERIAL 112 53.1.1 GABIONAND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL 112 53.1.2 GABIONAND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL: 114 53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE 115 53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC 115 53.2 PERFORMANCE 115 54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 116 54.1 SCOPE 116 54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK 116 54.3 WORK METHODS 117 54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING 117 54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT 117 SectionW.doc viii 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 54.4 LITTER 117 54.5 VISUAL CHECK 117 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING 117 54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.) 117 54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL 117 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL 118 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY 118 54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION 118 54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA 118 54.13 MULCH CONDITION 118 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR 118 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL 118 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION 118 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION 119 54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE 119 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK 119 54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL 119 54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 119 55 MILLING OPERATIONS 120 55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE 120 55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 120 55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS 121 55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS 121 55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES 121 55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES 121 55.7 TYPES OF MILLING 121 55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS 122 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 122 55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT 122 56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 122 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 122 56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 122 57 RIPRAP 122 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 122 57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 123 58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY 123 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL 123 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING 123 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 123 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 124 60 SIGNING AND MARKING 124 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 124 61 ROADWAY LIGHTING 124 SectionlV.doc ix 11/26/2013 61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 124 62 TREE PROTECTION 125 62.1 TREE BARRICADES 125 62.2 ROOT PRUNING 125 62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING 126 63 PROJECT WEB PAGES 127 63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN 127 63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES 127 63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE 127 63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS 128 63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS 128 63.6 POSTING 128 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES 128 64 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE 128 64.1 CLEARANCE OPTIONS 128 64.2 REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES 128 SectionlV.doc x 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 1 SCOPE OF WORK 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION Project Name: EAST WRF EFFLUENT FILTERS REHABILITATION PROJECT Project Number: 13- 0014 -UT Scope of Work: A. Scope of Work: The work consists of rehabilitating the existing effluent filters at the City's East Water Reclamation Facility (WRF) as described herein, and includes replacement of a portion of the compressed air system and chemical cleaning systems. The project includes furnishing and installing a new main filter control panel, fiber optic cable and plant SCADA work and may include the replacement of the air operated filter valves, which are bid as an additive alternate. B. Restrictions for this Project: 1. Only one of the six filter cells may be taken out of service at a time for rehabilitation work. Each cell shall be disassembled, cleaned, re- built, re- assembled, tested, and returned to service before the next cell may be taken out of service. Cell #4 shall be rehabilitated first followed by Cell #5. 2. Some equipment and services, as listed in the filter vendor's proposal in the Appendix, will be purchased directly by the City at a pre- negotiated price. C. Project Sign The Contractor shall provide 1 fixed project sign(s) as described in SECTION III, ARTICLE 23 of the Contract Documents. The final number of project signs will be determined at the beginning of the project based on the Contractor's schedule of work submitted for approval. Additional project signs may be required above the indicated amount due to the Contractor's schedule of work, which will be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Owner Direct Purchase The following equipment will be procured under the Owner Direct Purchase provisions of the Contract Documents: • Filter Equipment E. Project Contract Period The Contract Period/Contract Time shall be as specified in Section IIIA. SectionlV.doc Page 1 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST Project Name: EAST WRF EFFLUENT FILTERS REHABILITATION PROJECT Project Number: 13- 0014 -UT The following Articles of the Technical Specifications will apply to this contract if marked "X" as shown below: 1 a Scope Of Work 2.1 ►1 Line and Grade Shall Be Performed By The Contractor 2.2 ❑ Line and Grade Shall Be Performed By The City 3 a Definition Of Terms 4 ❑ Order And Location Of The Work 5 n Excavation For Underground Work 6 ❑ Concrete 7 ❑ Excavation And Forms For Concrete Work 8 n Reinforcement 9 11 Obstructions 10 ❑ Restoration Or Replacement Of Driveways, Curbs, Sidewalks And Street Pavement 11 ❑ Work In Easements Or Parkways 12 ❑ Dewatering 13 ❑ Sanitary Manholes 14 ❑ Backfill 15 ❑ Street Crossings, Etc. 16 ❑ Raising Or Lowering Of Sanitary Sewer, Storm Drainage Structures 17 a Unsuitable Material Removal 18 ❑ Underdrains 19 ❑ Storm Sewers 20 ❑ Sanitary Sewers And Force Mains 21 ❑ Drainage 22 ❑ Roadway Base And Subgrade 23 ❑ Asphaltic Concrete Materials 24 ❑ Adjustment To The Unit Bid Price For Asphalt 25 ❑ General Planting Specifications 26 ❑ Hdpe Deformed - Reformed Pipe Lining 27 ❑ Plant Mix Driveways 28 ❑ Reporting Of Tonnage Of Recycled Materials 29 n Concrete Curbs 30 n Concrete Sidewalks And Driveways 31 ❑ Sodding 32 ❑ Seeding 33 ❑ Storm Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins Or Other Storm Structures 34 ❑ Material Used 35 /1 Conflict Between Plans And Specifications 36 ❑ Street Signs 37 ❑ Audio/Video Recording Of Work Areas 38 ❑ Erosion And Siltation Control 39 ❑ Utility Tie In Location Marking SectionlV.doc Page 2 of 128 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section N — Technical Specifications 40 ❑ Award Of Contract, Work Schedule And Guarantee 41 Potable Water Mains, Reclaimed Water Mains and Appurtenances 42 ❑ Gas System Specifications 43 ❑ Tennis Courts 44 ❑ Work Zone Traffic Control 45 ❑ Cured -In -Place Pipe Lining 46 n Specifications for Polyethylene Sliplining 47 ❑ Specifications for Polyvinyl Chloride Ribbed Pipe 48 ❑ Gunite Specifications 49 ❑ Sanitary and Storm Manhole Liner Restoration 50 // Project Information Signs 51 n In -Line Skating Surfacing System 52 n Resident Notification of Start of Construction 53 ❑ Gabions and Mattresses 54 ❑ Lawn Maintenance Specifications 55 ❑ Milling Operations 56 ❑ Clearing and Grubbing 57 ❑ Riprap 58 /1 Treatment Plant Safety 59 ❑ Traffic Signal Equipment and Materials 60 ❑ Signing And Marking 61 ❑ Roadway Lighting 62 i1 Tree Protection 63 n Project Web Pages 64 ❑ Overhead Electric Line Clearance 2 FIELD ENGINEERING 2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR The Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering service required for the project. Such work shall include survey work to establish lines and levels and to locate and lay out site improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels required for the construction of the work. Also included are such Engineering services as are specified or required to execute the Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and Surveyors shall be licensed professionals under the laws of the state of Florida. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As- built Survey to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III (General Conditions), Article 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents. 2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on the Drawings or provided by the City. Control points (for alignment only) shall be established by the Engineer. The Contractor shall locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and shall preserve all permanent reference points during construction. In working near any permanent property comers or reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb any such markets. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed due to the SectionIV.doc Page 3 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them referenced and reset by a Land Surveyor qualified under the laws of the state of Florida. 2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings. Survey notes indicating the information and measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the record drawings for the project. 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY At the completion of all work the contractor shall be responsible to have furnished to the project inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction of this project. Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one -hour increments. Minimum charge is $100.00. The City will generate the project Record construction drawings. 3 DEFINITION OF TERMS For the purpose of these Technical Specifications, the definition of terms from SECTION III, ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS of these Contract Documents shall apply. For the purpose of the Estimated Quantities, the Contractor's attention is called to the fact that the estimate of quantities as shown on the Proposal Sheet is approximate and is given only as a basis of calculation upon which the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not assume any responsibility that the final quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated quantities nor shall the contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate of quantities or of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations pertaining thereto. 3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or associate, or to codes of local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative standard adopted and published at the date of receipt of bids, unless specifically stated otherwise. 3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS Abbreviations used in the Contract Documents are defined as follows: AA Aluminum Association, Inc. AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers' Association AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ACI American Concrete Institute AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AMA Acoustical Materials Association AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc. ANSI American National Standards Institute SectionlV.doc Page 4 of 128 11/26/2013 Section N — Technical Specifications APA American Plywood Association ASAE American Society of Agricultural Engineers ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASHRAE American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers AS SE American Society of Sanitary Engineering ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWG American Wire Gauge AWMA Aluminum Window Manufacturer's Association AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association CFR Code of Federal Regulations CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CS Commercial Standards and National Bureau of Standards DEP Department of Environmental Protection (Florida) DOT Department of Transportation (Florida) EPA Environmental Protection Agency FAC Florida Administrative Code FBC Florida Building Code FFPC Florida Fire Prevention Code FGC Florida Gas Code FMC Florida Mechanical Code FPC Florida Plumbing Code FedSpec Federal Specifications HI Standards of Hydraulic Institute IBBM Iron Body, Bronzed Mounted IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IPS Iron Pipe Size MIL Military Specification NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NPT National Pipe Thread NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers' Association PCA Portland Cement Association PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute SBC Standard Building Code (SBCCI) SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. SDI Steel Door Institute SFPC Standard Fire Prevention Code (SBCCI) SGC Standard Gas Code (SBCCI) SJI Steel Joist Institute SMACCNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association SectionlV.doc Page 5 of 128 11/26/2013 Section N — Technical Specifications SMC Standard Mechanical Code (SBCCI) SPC Standard Plumbing Code (SBCCI) SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council TCA Title Council of America UL Underwriters' Laboratories 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 18 — ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK. 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK The contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times maintaining the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property. The contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the contractor. For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as OSHA "Type C ". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of a "Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify his Competent Person to City staff at the start of construction. City staff are required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or other similar activity in an excavation prepared by the contractor. City staff in conformance with the OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements are to only enter an excavation in compliance with these OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's excavation if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is unsafe or does not conform OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the contractor must either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the accomplishment of the City's work at the Contractor's expense. The restoration quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract to not contain sufficient quantities to allow the contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the Contractor is required to use excavation and trench - shoring methods in compliance with all safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work necessary to complete the project. Not more than one hundred (100) feet of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance specified. For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be six (6) inches wider on each side than the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid SectionlV.doc Page 6 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place, excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without compensation. 6 CONCRETE Unless otherwise directed, all concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest editions of the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the American Concrete Institute, and FDOT's Standard Specifications. All appropriate testing shall be performed according to the American Society of Testing Materials. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall conform to AASHTO M -85. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C -33. All ready mix concrete shall conform to ASTM C -94. The slump for all concrete shall be in the range of 3" to 5 ", except when admixtures or special placement considerations are required. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all concrete placement. All concrete shall be tested in the following manner: Placement of less than 5 cubic yards (cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise, for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding 5 cy, one set of 3 compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At the discretion of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to provide further tests, as determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal, and compensation or denial thereof. 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 7.1 EXCAVATION Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a point 6" outside said concrete work before the forms are placed. Concrete shall be poured "in the dry". 7.2 FORMS Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal (except curbs, metal only, unless by written permission from Engineer). They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth equal to the dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or springing. 8 REINFORCEMENT When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be deformed: ASTMA -A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the SectionlV.doc Page 7 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications requirements of AASHTO M55 (ASTM A185). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A497). Epoxy coated reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM 775/A77 M -86 requirements. 8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the contract unit price for the item of work specified. 9 OBSTRUCTIONS Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof. Should it become necessary to change the position of water or gas or other pipes, sewer drains, or poles, the Engineer shall be at once notified of the locality and circumstances, and no claims for damages arising from the delay in adjusting the pipe, sewer drains or poles shall be made. Failure of the plans to show the location, nature or extent of any existing structures or obstructions shall not be the basis of a claim for extra work. Any survey monument or benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved means. 10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards, whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be replaced with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved material. All replaced base shall be a minimum 8" compacted thickness, or same thickness as base destroyed plus 2 ", if over 6 ", and compacted to 98% of maximum density per AASHTO T- 180. Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor, materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per lineal foot of main or square yard of base. The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid for on a square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of replacement shall be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the pipe. All over this will be at the Contractor's expense. The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard: concrete - per square foot; curbs - per lineal foot; sidewalk 4" or 6" thick - per square foot. SectionlV.doc Page 8 of 128 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications Concrete walks at drives shall be a minimum of 6" thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10 /10 welded wire mesh (also see Articles 8 and 30). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all driveway, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work. 11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the construction progress. The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration Activities within a reasonable time following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration within a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction activity or a delay in approval of partial payment requests. Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work. The contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on any and all phases of the contract work. The contractor shall not obtain water from local residents or businesses except as the contractor shall obtain written permission. Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's wastewater treatment plants, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the treatment plants will be coordinated at the pre - construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory requirements. 12 DEWATERING 12.1 GENERAL Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the dry". The contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity underdrain system, or sumps with pumps. Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain firm and reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of handling large volumes of air as well as of water. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work, the surrounding area, or the general public. He shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this he may be required to conduct the water to a suitable place of discharge may be determined by the Engineer. The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures. SectionlV.doc Page 9 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL The City of Clearwater will hold the Contractor responsible for obtaining a Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Groundwater from Any Non - Contaminated Site Activity prior to dewatering or discharging into the City's streets, storm sewers or waterways. Prior to discharging produced groundwater from any construction site, the contractor must collect samples and analyze the groundwater, which must meet acceptable discharge limits. The following document has been incorporated into this section for reference... 12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON - CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY City Notification Procedure - Contractor must provide the City of Clearwater Environmental Department with the following information prior to beginning dewatering activities: 1) A copy of all groundwater laboratory results 2) A copy of the FDEP Notification It is recommended that the Contractor call or meet with the City Environmental staff if you have any questions. You may contact the City at 562 -4750 for direction or further assistance. STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION GENERIC PERMITOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON - CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY The facility is authorized to discharge produced ground water from any non - contaminated site activity which discharges by a point source to surface waters of the State, as defined in Chapter 62- 620, F.A.C., only if the reported values for the parameters listed in Table 1 do not exceed any of the listed screening values. Before discharge of produced ground water can occur from such sites, analytical tests on samples of the proposed untreated discharge water shall be performed to determine if contamination exists. Minimum reporting requirements for all produced ground water dischargers. The effluent shall be sampled before the commencement of discharge, again within thirty (30) days after commencement of discharge, and then once every six (6) months for the life of the project to maintain continued coverage under this generic permit. Samples taken in compliance with the provisions of this permit shall be taken prior to actual discharge or mixing with the receiving waters. The effluent shall be sampled for the parameters listed in Table 1. TABLE 1 Screening Values for Discharges into: Parameter Fresh Waters Coastal Waters SectionlV.doc Page 10 of 128 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications Total Organic Carbon (TOC) 10.0 mg /1 10.0 mg /1 PH, standard units 6.0 -8.5 6.5 -8.5 Total Recoverable Mercury — by Method 1631E 0.012 41 0.025 µg/1 Total Recoverable Cadmium 9.3 µg/1 9.3 µg /1 Total Recoverable Copper 2.9 41 2.9 µg /1 Total Recoverable Lead 0.03 mg /1 5.6 .ig /1 Total Recoverable Zinc 86.0 µg /1 86.0 µg /1 Total Recoverable Chromium (Hex.) 11.0 µg /1 50.0 tg /1 Benzene 1.0 µg /1 1.01.1g/1 Naphthalene 100.0 µg /1 100.0 µg /1 If any of the analytical test results exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, except TOC, the discharge is not authorized by this permit or by the City of Clearwater. (a) For initial TOC values that exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, which may be caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds, the permittee may request to be exempted from the TOC requirement. To request this exemption, the permittee shall submit additional information with a Notice of Intent (NOI), described below, which describes the method used to determine that these compounds are naturally occurring. The Department shall grant the exemption if the permittee affirmatively demonstrates that the TOC values are caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds. (b) The NOI shall be submitted to the appropriate Department district office thirty (30) days prior to discharge, and contain the following information: 1. the name and address of the person that the permit coverage will be issued to; 2. the name and address of the facility, including county location; 3. any applicable individual wastewater permit number(s); 4. a map showing the facility and discharge location (including latitude and longitude); 5. the name of the receiving water; and 6. the additional information required by paragraph (3)(a) of this permit. (c) Discharge shall not commence until notification of coverage is received from the Department. For fresh waters and coastal waters, the pH of the effluent shall not be lowered to less than 6.0 units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units for coastal waters, or raised above 8.5 units, unless the permittee submits natural background data confirming a natural background pH outside of SectionlV.doc Page 11 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications this range. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be less than 6.0 units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units in coastal waters, the pH shall not vary below natural background or vary more than one (1) unit above natural background for fresh and coastal waters. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be higher than 8.5 units, the pH shall not vary above natural background or vary more than one (1) unit below natural background of fresh and coastal waters. The permittee shall include the natural background pH of the receiving waters with the results of the analyses required under paragraph (2) of this permit. For purposes of this section only, fresh waters are those having a chloride concentration of less than 1500 mg /1, and coastal waters are those having a chloride concentration equal to or greater than 1500 mg /l. In accordance with Rule 62- 302.500(1)(a -c), F.A.C., the discharge shall at all times be free from floating solids, visible foam, turbidity, or visible oil in such amounts as to form nuisances on surface waters. If contamination exists, as indicated by the results of the analytical tests required by paragraph (2), the discharge cannot be covered by this Generic Permit. The facility shall apply for an individual wastewater permit at least ninety (90) days prior to the date discharge to surface waters of the State is expected, or, if applicable, the facility may seek coverage under any other applicable Department generic permit. No discharge is permissible without an effective permit. If the analytical tests required by paragraph (2) reveal that no contamination exists from any source, the facility can begin discharge immediately and is covered by this permit without having to submit an NOI request for coverage to the Department. A short summary of the proposed activity and copy of the analytical tests shall be sent to the applicable Department district office within one (1) week after discharge begins. These analytical tests shall be kept on site during discharge and made available to the Department if requested. Additionally, no Discharge Monitoring Report forms are required to be submitted to the Department. All of the general conditions listed in Rule 62- 621.250, F.A.C., are applicable to this Generic Permit. There are no annual fees associated with the use of this Generic Permit. 13 SANITARY MANHOLES 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the drawings. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into concrete manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full section of sewer pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe. The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed twenty four inches. Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of manholes. SectionlV.doc Page 12 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. 13.2 PRECAST TYPE Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer. AASHTO M 85 Type II cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of 5 inches. The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall be a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "0" ring to provide a watertight joint Minimum concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days. Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve contractor of responsibility for compliance to these specifications unless letter from contractor requesting specific variance is approved by the City Engineer. Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before being sent to the job site to permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering system shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered. Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of Clearwater Engineering Index #302 Sheets 1 and 2 of 2. Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed. The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A 1 or A 2 Classification soil approximately five (5) inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing. 13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade changes without disturbing the manhole. See Section IV, Article 23.7 — Asphaltic Concrete — Adjustment of Manholes. 13.3 DROP MANHOLES Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as detailed on the drawings. 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush with or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Detail 301. 13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two (2) coats of Type II Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type II Class I) as SectionIV.doc Page 13 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite or approved equal. Interior of built up manholes which have sewers entering with a free drop or which receive discharge from a force main shall have the inside plastered with 1/2 -inch of grout and coated as precast manholes below. The exterior of all precast manholes shall have a 15 mil dry thickness of PROCO EP214 -351 Sewper Coating or approved equal. The interior shall be AGRU SUREGRIP HDPE or PP -R Liner with a minimum thickness of 2 mm. 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a manhole adapter coupling by Flo Control, Inc., or approved water stop coupling. 14 BACKFILL Material for backfill shall be carefully selected from the excavated material or from other sources as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free from organic matter or debris, contain no rocks or other hard fragments greater than 3" in the largest dimension and all fill shall be similar material. Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the sides and top of pipe by hand shovels and thoroughly compacted to 12" above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means. Backfill under all types of paving shall be compacted in layers not to exceed 12" in thickness unless alternate method is approved by the Engineer. Backfill shall be a minimum of 98% compaction as determined by the modified Proctor Density Test to the bottom of pavement. Backfill outside of pavement areas shall be compacted the full depth to the ground surface to a minimum of 95% compaction of AASHTO T 180 Standard Density Test. The cost of backfill shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of the pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structure. 15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, the trenches shall be bridged in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon the roadway or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The material used, and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be satisfactory to the Engineer. The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation. 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES Sanitary Sewer or Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by the Engineer. 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work. SectionlV.doc Page 14 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated and removed from the site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off - site at his expense. The limits of the excavation shall be determined in the field by the Engineer. 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of unsuitable material excavated and replaced with suitable material as determined by either cross sections of the excavation, truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal. 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment, tools, labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item. 18 UNDERDRAINS The Contractor shall construct sub - surface drainage pipe as directed in the Contract Scope of Work and detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe shall be embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT crushed aggregate, located behind the back of curb and aggregate surface covered with a non - degradable fibrous type filter material. A #57 aggregate may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be 8" diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F -758 "Standard Specification For Smooth Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiffness of 46 in conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M -189 described in FDOT Section 948 -4.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 - SDR 35. Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A -2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454B or 12454C, manufactured per ASTM F949 -93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60% flatting and with a double gasket joint. Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non - perforated pipe with compacted backfill. All poly - chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall be the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi 140 -N or approved equal) per the construction detail drawings. 18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of lineal feet of 8" Sub -drain in place and accepted. SectionlV.doc Page 15 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be based upon the unit price per lineal foot for underdrain as measured above, which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain (specifically underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean -outs, sod, driveway, road and sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item. 19 STORM SEWERS All storm drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be steel reinforced concrete unless otherwise specified or approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 430 of the 2013 FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Mirafi 140N filter fabric or equivalent (as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit price for the pipe. All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty is found in the fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street before laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and not simply wedged up. Before finishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to find that the inverts coincide and pipe is clear throughout. 19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the stations and left or right offsets of all manholes, inlet structures and terminals ends of subdrains, as measured from the nearest downstream manhole along the centerline of the sewer along with the elevations of the north edge of manhole cover, inverts of all pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets. (Gutter) 19.2 TESTING The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly watertight sewer under all conditions. At the discretion of the City Engineer or his designee, the watertightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring the infiltration. The watertightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section of the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 150 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No trench made joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The work under this Section shall include the internal video recording of new stormwater drainage pipes and drainage structures. The Contractor shall provide the City with a video of the completed stormwater drainage system, and a written report. The Contractor shall pump down SectionIV.doc Page 16 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications and clean the pipes and drainage structures, to the satisfaction of the City, prior to video recording. The video shall be of the standard DVD format, in color, with all the pertinent data and observations recorded as audio on the DVD. The data should include: 1) An accurate recorded footage of the pipe lengths. 2) The drainage structure number and pipe size. 3) The run of the pipe and direction of flow (i.e. from S -1 to S -2). 4) Details of structural defects, broken pipes, sags, dips, misalignments, obstructions and infiltration. The written report shall include the four (4) items listed previously. All visual and video recording inspections shall be completed by the Contractor and be in accordance with Section 430 -4.8 of the 2013 FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. Any deficient or damaged pipe discovered during the video recording process shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to repair or replace at their own expense within the contractual duration. As a complement to the video report, the Contractor shall also provide digital photos of areas of concern in electronic (computer CD) and hard copy form (in color). All known pipe breaks or those breaks discovered after the video inspection shall be repaired by the Contractor regardless of the test allowances. Faulty sections of drainage pipes or drainage structures rejected by the Engineer shall be removed and re -laid by the Contractor. Sections of pipe that are repaired, re -laid or replaced shall be accompanied with a corresponding post construction video inspection at the Contractor's expense. In all cases that a leak is found, re- inspection shall be required at the Contractor's expense, to confirm that the problem has been resolved. 19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted, measured along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of storm manholes or drainage structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price includes all work required to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap, labor and incidentals, etc.). 20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 20.1 MATERIALS 20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall conform with ASTM specification D 3034 for S.D.R. 35. Sewer pipe with more than 10 feet of cover shall be SDR 26. The pipe shall be plainly marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with ASTM D 3212 76. The laying length of pipe joints shall be a maximum of 20 -feet. Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and fittings for gravity sewer shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for DIP SectionlV.doc Page 17 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications water main except pipe shall be interior "polylined" in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets shall be C 900, SDR 18 polyvinyl chloride water main pipe as described in Technical Section 41. A two -way cleanout shall be installed on each lateral at the property line. 20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe except that DIP shall be "polylined" in accordance with manufactures recommendations. All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. 20.2 INSTALLATION 20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Installation of gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices contained in ASTM D 2321 and Unibell UNI B 5. The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable width (typically pipe OD plus 8 to 12 -inch on each side) allowing working space to place and compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and movable sheeting shall be performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and compaction will not disturb compacted haunching material or pipe alignment. Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow preparation of bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench without standing water. Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to prevent flotation or misalignment. Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support pipe, the contractor will be required to remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class I material (1/2" Dia. aggregate) to provide firm support of pipe. Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint 2 feet in length and shall use an approved water stop around pipe joint entry. The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The contractor is required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction inspector the location of all new laterals. 20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. SectionlV.doc Page 18 of 128 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS The contractor shall submit to the Engineer a marked set of "As Built" construction drawings describing both the stations and left or right offset of all lateral terminal ends as measured from the nearest downstream manhole along the center line of the sewer main. The as built drawings will also describe elevations of the north edge of the manhole cover rings and inverts of all main pipes in manholes. 20.4 TESTING 20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 50 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive, the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The Contractor shall TV inspect all mains to verify the true and uniform grade and the absence of bellies or dropped joints prior to acceptance. Any infiltration, dips or sags of more than 1/4- inches shall be cause for rejection. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. 20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 P.S.I. for two (2) hours, as described in Section 41.04 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT 20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per lineal foot per appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for payment shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes. Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per lineal foot of pipe as measured from the centerline of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe including a two -way cleanout at the property line. Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete the installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering, backfill and grading. SectionIV.doc Page 19 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 21 DRAINAGE The Contractor shall provide proper outlet for all water courses and drains interrupted during the progress of the work and replace them in as good condition as he found them. 22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 22.1 BASE This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall refer to Section IV, Article 1 "Scope of Work" of the city's Contract Specifications for additional roadway base and subgrade items. Roadway base shall be 8" compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be 12" compacted minimum thickness with a minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an independent testing laboratory perform all required density testing. Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the base, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract Specifications will apply. Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to the base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material shall be included in the bid item for base. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all base and subgrade placement or reworking. The following base materials are acceptable: 1. SHELL BASE: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 2. LIMEROCK BASE: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a FDOT approved certified pit. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 3. CRUSHED CONCRETE BASE: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 204 and 901 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed concrete material shall be FDOT approved. The Contractor shall provide certified SectionIV.doc Page 20 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications laboratory tests on gradation to confirm that the crushed concrete base material conforms to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a minimum of 185. LBR and gradation tests shall be provided to the city by the Contractor once a week for continuous operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless requested more frequently by the City Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 4. SOIL CEMENT BASE: Unless otherwise noted, soil cement base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 270 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. An Asphalt Rubber Membrane Interlayer (ARMI) shall be included in the pavement design per Section 341 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) to minimize reflective cracking unless otherwise noted in the project plans and specifications. The ARMI layer shall be overlaid with asphalt on the same day it is placed for the Contractor to receive full compensation for the work. The soil cement base design shall be by a certified lot under the direction of a Registered Florida Professional Engineer, and must be approved by the City Engineer. Said design shall provide for a minimum of 300 P.S.I. in seven days. All plant mixed soil cement shall be certified by a registered laboratory that has been approved by the Engineer. The only approved method for spreading the cement is the use of a spreader box. The use of a spreader bar for spreading cement will not be allowed. The applying of the cement shall not be allowed when the wind velocity is sufficient to jeopardize material interests (i.e. vehicles, etc.) from airborne cement particles. The density testing frequency shall be at the discretion of the registered Florida Professional Engineer responsible for the soil cement design. 5. ASPHALT BASE: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 280 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement and compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or base. 6. REWORKED BASE: When the plans call for the working of the existing base, the finished reworked base shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 8" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, and be constructed in accordance with the applicable FDOT requirements for the type of material used. The density requirements (except for asphalt and soil cement base) shall be per Section 200 -7 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). For asphalt, the density requirements are per Section 330 -11 and for soil cement per Section 270 -5 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half -inch (1/2 "). Areas deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place. SectionlV.doc Page 21 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item), stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 22.2 SUBGRADE All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the subgrade, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract Specifications will apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing, grading, filling, and removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to prepare it per the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price for base or subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value after the mixing of materials for the stabilized subgrade. 22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth shall be per Section 161 -6.4 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values shall be per Section 160 -7.2 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing values shall either be corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place (latest edition). 22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for subgrade shall include: roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in the bid item for base. 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS This specification is for the preparation and application of all S -Type Marshall Mix Design asphaltic concrete materials on roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted. 23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 23.1.1 AGGREGATE All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 through 915 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. SectionlV.doc Page 22 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality control /assurance procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall note that the City shall have the right to have an independent testing laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all materials to be used. Tests to be performed by the independent testing laboratory every 1000 tons include, but are not limited to, Marshall stability and flow, extraction/gradation and cores to determine density and thickness. The results of such tests and analyses shall be considered, along with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with the applicable specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the Contractor. Payment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined by the following: 1. Density per Section 330 -11 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per Section 330 -13 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of 1/4" or greater shall be corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness for a length extending at least 25' from each end of the deficient area, or when the Engineer allows for an overlay per Section 330 - 15.2.3 of FDOT's Standard Specifications 2000 edition. In addition, for excesses of 1/4" or greater, the Engineer will determine if the excess area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, or if the pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on the thickness specified in the contract. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all asphalt. 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES All asphalt mix designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. All asphalt mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer PRIOR to the commencement of the paving operation. Reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) material may be substituted for aggregate in the asphaltic concrete mixes up to 25% by weight. SectionlV.doc Page 23 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements: Table 1: Layer Thickness for Asphalt (Layers Are Listed in Sequence of Construction) COURSE THICKNESS (Inches) LAYER THICKNESS (Inches) Type S —I Type S —I with Type S —III Top Layer Type S —III FC -3 Type S —III with FC -3 Top Layer Type S —I with FC -3 Top Layer 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1 1 1 1'/2 1'/2 2 11/4 3/4 * 1 1 2'/2 11/4 11/4 11/2 1 11/2 1 3 11/2 11/2 2 1 2 1 * At the Engineer's discretion, 2" of S -III is acceptable for use on residential streets Additional Notes: 1. Type S —III shall be limited to the final (top) structural layer (one layer only). 2. All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 3. All pavement designs shall include a minimum of two inches of asphalt. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible to review the project plans for complete pavement design detail. 5. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, Type S —III per Section 331 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall be used as final riding surface on streets with the speed limit of less than 35 mph, streets with an average daily traffic (ADT) of less than 3000, and all residential streets. 6. An FC -3 friction course per Section 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall be used on streets with a speed limit of 35 mph or greater, and streets with an ADT of 3000 or greater. 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture, surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, etc.) shall be in accordance with Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. SectionlV.doc Page 24 of 128 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 23.6.1 CRACKS Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method. 2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the level of the surrounding roadway surface. 3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking. 4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 23.6.2 POTHOLES Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method. 2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole. 3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted. 4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each item. The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions: The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements. The riser shall consist of an A -36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum requirements of A.S.T.M. A -36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or fiberglass risers is not permitted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per manufacturer's specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure that the manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each riser. If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfill using asphalt is acceptable. The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable. SectionIV.doc Page 25 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final asphaltic concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving operation shall occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On arterial roadways, the manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period between initial adjustment and final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve boxes, tree aeration vents, etc. will be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be included in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure that they are not paved over. It is the Contractor's responsibility to inform the owners of all utilities of impending work and coordinate their adjustments so they are completed prior to the scheduled paving. 23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 1. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed by the Construction Inspector or Engineer, with payment to be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt. 2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the road being open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans. 3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements. 4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. Prior to paving, all construction areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or mechanical type) that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre- wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day before leaving the job site. 5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Tack shall also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost (including heating, hauling and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be '/4" above the lip or face of said curb per City Index 101. 23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 1. Unless otherwise noted in this section, all of the asphaltic concrete specifications in Sections 23.1 through 23.8 above shall apply to superpave asphaltic concrete. All asphaltic concrete pavement shall be designed and placed in accordance with the FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (latest edition). SectionlV.doc Page 26 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 2. All aggregate shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 and 902 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 3. All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Asphaltic binder shall be Grade PG 67 -22 unless otherwise specified in the Scope of Work. 4. All superpave mix designs shall conform to Sections 320 and 334 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 5. All general construction requirements shall conform to Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Basis of measurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used. 23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack and/or prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching, filling of cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and specifications. 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in accordance with the following provisions: 1. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price Index varies more than 10% from the bid price at the time of the bid opening. 2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FDOT shall be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT's internet site. The address is: http: / /wwwl1.myflorida.com. It is under the section "Doing Business with FDOT" in the "Contracts Administration" section under "Asphalt Index ". For additional information, call FDOT @ 850- 414 -4000. 3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be used for the initial determination of the asphalt price. 4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt will be used for payment calculation. 5. The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index. 6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat. 7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made for any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time. 8. The City reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt. SectionIV.doc Page 27 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 25.1 IRRIGATION 25.1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic underground irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and facilities required to perform all work in connection with the underground sprinkler irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and /or specified. Work noted as "NIC ", "existing ", or "by others" is not included in this pay item. B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the turf /landscape areas except at road/paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of the Engineer. 25.1.1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irrigation subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope, mainline, system pressure, controls, etc. B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED.SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work shall apply. C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall be removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the contractor's expense. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of three (3) hard cover binders with three rings containing the following information: 1. Index sheet stating the contractor's address and business telephone number, 24 hour emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name(s) and address(es) of local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier where replacement equipment can be purchased. 2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract. 3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment. 4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and "hands on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered. a. Four -hour instruction (minimum) for the Drip Emitter equipment operation and maintenance. b. Two -hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and maintenance. SectionlV.doc Page 28 of 128 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.1.1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The Irrigation Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting requiring excavation 24 in. diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of main lines. B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials. C. The Irrigation Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until final acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen, or missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the contractor. D. The Irrigation Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to the Engineer prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to comply with the FDOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the public. 25.1.1.3 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory service for one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City of Clearwater. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or faulty materials, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater or FDOT. 25.1.2 PRODUCTS 25.1.2.1 GENERAL A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted. 25.1.2.2 PIPING A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and tested in accordance with these specifications. B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40, conforming to ASTM D2665 and D1785. C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the mainline is required to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80. 25.1.2.3 PIPE FITTINGS A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval. The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples. SectionlV.doc Page 29 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.1.2.4 PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end. B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned. The Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe. 25.1.2.5 THREADED CONNECTIONS A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant. 25.1.2.6 GATE VALVES 25.1.2.6.1 MANUAL GATE VALVES 2 IN. AND SMALLER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. 200 -250 psi Ball Valve 2. PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals 3. Threaded -Dual end Union Connectors 4. Non -Shock Safe -T Shear Stem 5. Safe -T Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing Company , Sylmer, California, or approved equal. 25.1.2.6.2 GATE VALVES 21/2" IN. AND LARGER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. AWWA -C -509 2. 200 lb. O. W.G 3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B 4. Deep socket joints 5. Rising stem 6. Bolted bonnet 7. Double disc 8. Equipped with 2" square operating key with tee handle B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve 3" and larger. The "street key" shall be 5' long with a 2" square operating nut. 25.1.2.7 SLEEVES A. Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater) 25.1.2.8 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance - pressure across -the diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25 -30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a SectionlV.doc Page 30 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (PSI). The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 150 psi. B. The valve body and bonnent shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic, stainless steel and other chemical/UV resistant materials. The valve's one -piece diaphragm shall be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice. C. The valve body shall have a 1" inch (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch slip by slip inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections. D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation. E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California, or approved equal. F. Identify all control valves using metal I.D. tags numbered to match drawings. 25.1.2.9 VALVE BOXES A. For remote control drip valve assembly and UNIK control timer use a Brooks #36 concrete value box with #36 -T cast iron traffic bearing cover, or approved equal. B. For flush valve assembly use an Ametek #181014 (10 ") circular valve box with #181015 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. C. For air relief assembly use an Ametek #182001 (6 ") economy turf box with #182002 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. 25.1.2.10 DRIP IRRIGATION 25.1.2.10.1 CONSTRUCTION A. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one -half inch (1/2 ") low - density linear polyethylene tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self - cleaning, integral drippers at a specified spacing, (12 ", 18 ", or 24" centers). The tubing shall be brown in color and conform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an inside diameter (I.D.) of 0.57 inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded to the inside wall of the tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self - flushing/cleaning elastomer diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper. 25.1.2.10.2 OPERATION A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet pressure of seven to seventy (7 -70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating pressure shall be between 15 -45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9 gallons per hour (GPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow /reduced pressure compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be available in 12 ", 18" and 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified. Techline pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise specified on Plans. Maximum system pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius shall be 7 ". SectionIV.doc Page 31 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications B. For on- surface or under mulch installations, 6" metal wire staples (TLS6) shall be installed 3' -5' on center, and two staples installed at every change of direction. 25.1.2.10.3 LINE FLUSHING VALVES A. The sub - surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each independent zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall match the dripline manufacturer and connect directly to the dripline. 25.1.2.10.4 AIR/VACUUM RELIEF VALVE A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an Air /Vacuum Relief Valve at its high point(s). The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi. 25.1.2.10.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressures of 25 psi. Regulating accuracy shall be within =/ -6 %. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high - impact engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed stainless steel compression spring which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the water passage. 25.1.2.10.6 FILTERS A. The filter shall be a multiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial size to travel through or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall be constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance. 25.1.2.10.7 FITTINGS A. All connections shall be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the integrity of the subsurface irrigation system. 25.1.2.11 AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from the Field Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type which may be installed in a valve box underground. The controller shall function normally if submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall function if submerged in water. B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to insure waterproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for screws allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box. C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt alkaline battery for one full year regardless of the number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations either sequentially or independently. SectionlV.doc Page 32 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications D. The controller shall have three independent programs with eight start times each, station run time capability from one minute to twelve hours in one minute increments, and a seven day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching solenoids installed on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall be capable of manual single station or manual program operation. E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.2.12 FIELD TRANSMITTER A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an infrared connection. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall operate on one 9V alkaline battery. B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven -key programming pad. A beep sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after one minute when not in use. C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of UNIK Control Modules. D. The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.2.13 LATCHING SOLENOID A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing installation of the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES -B, GB, of EFB series valve. B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.3 EXECUTION 25.1.3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general details of the work. B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced. C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed, except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections required by outside authorities. SectionlV.doc Page 33 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically mentioned in these Technical Special Provisions. F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the decisions. In event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost. G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of sprinkler equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other underground utilities. Contractor shall employ all data contained in the contract Documents and shall verify this information at the construction site to confirm the manner by which it relates to the installation. H. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer. I. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all required sleeving prior to roadway base. 25.1.3.2 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING 25.1.3.2.1 TRENCHING - GENERAL A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches. Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on Drawings. B. Maintain 6 in. horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all lines of other trades. C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind. D. Maintain 6 in. vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45 degrees to 90 degrees. E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities. 25.1.3.2.2 BACKFILLING A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have 18" of fill placed over the pipe. B. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter larger than '/2 in. C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 of FDOT Specification Book, 1996 Edition. D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil. E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs. F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per AASHTO T 180 - latest edition. Under landscaped area, compaction shall not exceed 95% of maximum density. SectionlV.doc Page 34 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of mechanical tampers or approved hand tampers. When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more than six (6 ") inches thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall have a face area of not more than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities. 25.1.3.2.3 ROUTING OF PIPING: A. Routing of pressure and non - pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines. 1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations. 2. Report to Owner any major deviation from routing indicated. C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure supply line. D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between site and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original Drawings, and without additional cost. E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method, and maintain the staking of approved layout. 25.1.3.3 INSTALLATION 25.1.3.3.1 WATER SUPPLY A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost to the Owner. 25.1.3.3.2 ASSEMBLIES A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings. B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly. C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical Special Provisions. D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the male threads only. 25.1.3.3.3 SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER) A. The contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway, utility and /or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies. 25.1.3.3.4 PLASTIC PIPE A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. SectionlV.doc Page 35 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent. 1. Allow welded joints as least 15 minutes setup /curing time before moving or handling. 2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water pressure is on. 3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four hours has elapsed for solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent manufacturer. C. Curing 1. When the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least 24 hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure. D. Flushing the system: 1. After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control valves and flush out the system with a full head of water. E. Installing piping under existing pavement: 1. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking & boring. 2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any existing pavement. All repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be accomplished at no additional cost. 25.1.3.3.5 CONTROLLERS A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans. 1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineers representative prior to installation. 25.1.3.3.6 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than 6 in., nor less than 4 in. cover from the top of the valve to finish grade. B. Install valves in a plumb position with 24 in. minimum maintenance clearance from other equipment, 3 feet minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls, and no closer than 7 feet from the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways. C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for each sprinkler zone. 25.1.3.3.7 GATE VALVES A. Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper maintenance. B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill. SectionlV.doc Page 36 of 128 11/26/2013 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2 LANDSCAPE 25.2.1 GENERAL 25.2.1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Contract Documents shall include the Plans, Details, Specifications, Bid Proposal, Contract Agreement, including Installation Schedule, all Addenda, and Contractual and Special Conditions when required. 25.2.1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and environmental matters. B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by the Contractor and paid for directly by the Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing. 25.2.1.3 SCOPE OF WORK A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to the work specified in this Section. The Scope of Work includes everything for and incidental to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans, Schedules, Notes and as specified herein. B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish grading if necessary); to remove and/or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish, plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans. C. Work under this Section shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the landscape drawings. D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document. 25.2.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors under the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work, shall be made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their commencement of work on the project. B. All work of this Section shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices. C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the Contractor's convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the SectionIV.doc Page 37 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Plans. If conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plan shall predominate and be considered the controlling document. D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safety among persons in his employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape Architect shall be held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting from compliance or non - compliance with these standards. E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is built into or affects the work in this Section. F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to excavation. Call "One Call" at 1- 800 - 432 -4770. G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the work, such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect. 25.2.1.5 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance period, two copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one year. B. Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all specified work. 25.2.1.6 ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS A. If there are additions /alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions /alternates at the time of bidding. B. The Owner, through his Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void. C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk. D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions and warranties stated herein. 25.2.1.7 ABBREVIATIONS /DEFINITIONS O.A. or HT.: The over -all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied state of the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. C.T. : Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds. SectionlV.doc Page 38 of 128 11/26/2013 1 1 1 C. W.: SPR.: Section IV — Technical Specifications Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the fronds. Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. ST. TR. : Straight trunk. MIN.: 1 Minimum. GAL.. IGailon container size, i.e., 1 gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc. .. 1 DIA.: Diameter. ' LVS.: On center, distance between plant centers. 1 1 • 1 1 1 1 1 Leaves. D.B.H.: Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4 -1/2 feet above grade. CAL.: B &B: PPP: FG: STD.: Owner: Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade, larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade. Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Plants per pot. Field grown. Standard, single, straight trunk. To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work is performed. Owner 's Representative: Owner's on -site representative shall be responsible for approval of quantity and quality of materials specified and execution of installation. SectionlV.doc Page 39 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Contractor: Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape Contractor. Landscape Architect: This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who produces the landscape Plans and Specifications. 25.2.1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 25.2.1.8.1 PLANT MATERIALS A. Provide container grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If plant delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered. B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have been cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be pulled by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time. C. Balled and burlapped plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not less than 1 foot diameter of ball to every 1 inch caliper of trunk; root ball depth shall not be less than 2/3 of root ball diameter. B & B plants which cannot be planted upon delivery shall have their root balls covered with moist soil or mulch. D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root pruning to be done a minimum of 4 weeks before removal from the field and planting at the site. Root balls may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except plastic shrink wrap for transport only. E. Remove all fronds form sabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of 12 inches of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms, only a minimum of palm fronds shall be removed from crown to facilitate moving and handling. Clear trunk shall be determined after minimum fronds have been removed. Boots shall be removed from trunk unless otherwise specified. Palms shall be planted within 24 hours of delivery. F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots moist. G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. H. Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty -four (24) hours after stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing in a shaded area. SectionlV.doc Page 40 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2.1.9 JOB CONDITIONS 25.2.1.9.1 ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS. A. The Contractor shall examine the sub - grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions under which work is to be performed and notify the Landscape Architect or Project Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of conditions and full responsibility for the completed work. B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and following the approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the Landscape Architect for adjustments to the Schedule. C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting procedures. D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing prior to planting. E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to the planting of lawns, protecting lawn trees and promptly repairing damages from planting operations. 25.2.1.9.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy to the Owner's Representative and /or the Landscape Architect for approval. The Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule. B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc. in order to complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and/or to maintain the progress schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. C. The Owner's Representative's may request in writing work stoppage. Upon written request from the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend delivery of material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the Owner, the Owner's Representative, or the General Contractor with respect to any additional costs which may result from work stoppage. 25.2.1.9.3 UTILITIES A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities. Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties concerned. SectionIV.doc Page 41 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2.2 PRODUCTS 25.2.2.1 MATERIALS 25.2.2.1.1 PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE A. Plant species, sizes, etc. shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material Scheduled. Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of Horticulture, L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions), or conforms with names accepted in the nursery trade. 25.2.2.1.2 PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the species and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insect pests or their eggs, plant diseases, defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in leaf and shall have healthy, well - developed root systems. B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided tree species that have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees that have the main trunk forming a "Y" shape or parallel branching are not acceptable. C. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida #1 or better as to shape and quality for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and II, Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition). D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at the place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with requirements for name variety, size quality, or designated area. E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that are applicable to landscape materials. F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit Landscape Architect proof of it being non - available. In such event, if the Landscape Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source. When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by adjustment to Contract amount. G. Height and /or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This measurement shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be taken after pruning for specified sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to measurements specified in the plant material schedule, except that plant material larger than specified may be used with the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect; with no increase to the Contract price. Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery. H. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible. SectionlV.doc Page 42 of 128 11/26/2013 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications I. Balled and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the plant and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Root balls and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B & B procedures. J. Container -grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice -versa provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect approves the substitution. K. Container grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but not over two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound condition exists. 25.2.2.1.3 GRASSES: SOD OR SEED A. Sod or seed (as /if specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious week, freshly mowed before cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than 24 hours before laying and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it will be installed. Sod must be kept moist prior to and after installation. B. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place. Purity, germination and weed content shall be as certification requirements. 25.2.2.1.4 MULCH A. Mulch shall be 100% Grade `B" shredded cypress bark mulch, thoroughly mixed with a pre- emergence weed killer according to the label directions as specified on the plan. B. Install mulch to an even depth of 3" before compaction. 25.2.2.1.5 FERTILIZER A. Granular fertilizer shall be uniform in composition; free flowing and suitable for application with approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully conforming to State of Florida fertilizer laws. B. All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis and shall contain the appropriate minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specified herein. C. Agriform 20 -10 -5 fertilizer tablets or approved equal, shall be placed in planting pit for all plant materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. D. Ground cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with Osmocote Time Release Fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. E. For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia and St. Augustine grass at the rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per one thousand (1,000) square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 50% of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be 1:1 or 2:1 for complete fertilizer formulations. Phosphorus shall be no more than 1/4 the nitrogen level. They shall also contain magnesium and micronutrients (i.e. manganese, iron, zinc, copper, etc.). SectionlV.doc Page 43 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2.2.1.6 STAKES AND GUYS A. For trees, approved plastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree trunk. Galvanized steel guy wire shall not be used. B. Stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over 2" caliper. Stakes shall be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees 2" caliper and under. A minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree shall be used. C. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with a minimum of 3 stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5 - 2" x 4" by 16" wood connected with two - 3/4" steel bands shall be used around the palm trunk. D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved. 25.2.2.1.7 PLANTING SOIL A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and loosened native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test, prior to planting and at no additional cost to the Contract, any soils which may be unsuitable for the vigorous growth of plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to the Landscape Architect immediately in writing. B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist of 1/3 peat and 2/3 sandy loam, with no lumps over F. C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil. There must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 — 6.5 pH) with no excess of calcium or carbonate, and it shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps, roots and toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or a hindrance to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt. D. Bed preparation for annual beds under 1 gallon container size shall consist of 3" of Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full length and width of planting area. Rototil organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into native soil. 25.2.2.1.8 SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Terra -Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans. 25.2.2.1.9 TREE PROTECTION A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal members. Space vertical members 6 feet to 8 feet on center. The barricade shall be placed so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree within a circle described by a radius of one foot for each inch of the tree's diameter at breast height DBH at 4 - %2 feet above grade. SectionlV.doc Page 44 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2.2.1.10 ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and /or specifications for protection of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install as directed by the manufacturer. 25.2.2.1.11 PACKAGED MATERIALS A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the site. 25.2.2.1.12 PESTICIDES A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's directions. 25.2.3 EXECUTION 25.2.3.1 PREPARATION 25.2.3.1.1 OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities, irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work. B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a relocated position for any materials necessary. 25.2.3.1.2 GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round -Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the manufacturer's specifications. B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed/turf eradication has been achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting bed. C. Pre - emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round -Up" or "Rodeo ", and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect. D. Should any plant material in the same, or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals, the same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will conform to the required finish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface drainage without puddling. SectionlV.doc Page 45 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over 1 - 1/2 inches in any dimension form individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated material off the site. 25.2.3.1.3 PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING A. Prepare native subgrade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread 3 inches of Florida peat (1/3), sandy loam (1/3), or other approved organic soil amendment over the full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by "crowning' to insure that surface drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates. Add Osmocote time release fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. 25.2.3.1.4 PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round -Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's Specifications. B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub - grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches. C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth, even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf flush to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing yard drains. D. A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1000 square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 505 of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. Thoroughly work fertilizer into the top 4 inches of soil. E. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition. 25.2.3.2 INSTALLATION 25.2.3.2.1 BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED) A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated. Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction. B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect. C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well - drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0 - 6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction. 25.2.3.2.2 LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc. as SectionlV.doc Page 46 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent blockage of signage, etc. B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material schedule (if provided), otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the normally accepted spacing for each species. C. Leave an 18 inch (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer leaves of installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant sizes. D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as possible to the intent of the plans. 25.2.3.2.3 PLANTING PROCEDURES A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after settlement normal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground surface will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted "high" with the root ball about 1 inch higher than the surrounding grade. C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20 -10 -5 planting tablets, or approved equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agriform planting tablets shall be placed uniformly around the root mass at a depth that is between the middle and the bottom of the root mass. Application rate: 1 gallon 1 - 21 gram tablet 3 gallon 2 - 21 gram tablet 5 gallon 3 - 21 gram tablet 7 gallon 4 - 21 gram tablet Trees 3 tablets each ' /2" (12 millimeters) caliper Palms 7- 21 gram tablets D. Native soil shall be used in back - filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers. E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 inches (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all tie -down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom of the root ball. Thoroughly water -in before bringing the back -fill up to the proper grade Roots of bare plants shall be properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection. F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Thoroughly water -in before bringing the backfill up to the proper grade. SectionlV.doc Page 47 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to straight or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant a minimum of 18 inches from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant. H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed -free Florida peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at 120 degree angles in a triangular pattern. I. Sabal palms may be planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved. 25.2.3.2.4 SODDING A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the soil adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut. B. An application of 6 -6 -6, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made to all lawn areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1,000 square feet. The ground shall be wet down before the sod is laid in place. C. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub areas. Cut down soil level to 1 inch to 1-1/2 inches below top of walks prior to laying sod. D. Within 2 hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient water shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of 2 inches (50 millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to keep sod moist until rooted to subgrade. E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other approved equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated. F. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be leveled, filling -in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas. G. On slopes steeper than 2:1 and as required, the sod shall be fastened in place with suitable wooden pins or by other approved method. 25.2.3.2.5 SEEDING A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of Transportation. See plan for type of seed. 25.2.3.2.6 TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree at 120 degree spacing shall be used. SectionlV.doc Page 48 of 128 11/26/2013 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications Stakes shall be driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by approved plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of 4 feet height of stake above grade and a minimum of 30 inches of stake below grade. B. For single trunk palms, a minimum of 3 stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5- 2 inch x 4 inch x 16 inch wood connected with two % inch steel bands. Palms shall be staked with a minimum of 5 feet of stake above grade. C. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months after the date of final acceptance of the landscape work. D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially hazardous areas. 25.2.3.2.7 MULCHING A. All planting beds shall be weed -free prior to mulching. B. All curb, roadway, and bed line edges will be "trenched" to help contain the applied mulch. C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a 3 inch layer (before compaction) of 100% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified on the Plans or General Notes. D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of buildings. Maintain a minimum 3 inch clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a minimum 6 inch clearance for the walls of buildings. E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed in front of the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum 6 inches of non - mulched clearance from the outside edge of annuals. 25.2.3.2.8 PRUNING A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape and form of the plant. B. Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches, and branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree. 25.2.3.2.9 CLEAN -UP A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job, keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition. C. The clean -up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying, staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications. SectionlV.doc Page 49 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2.3.2.10 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on, about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.) standards. B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from damage. C. the Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms as specified. 25.2.3.2.11 REPAIR OF DAMAGES E. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by his operations to other materials, property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage. F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by his work or employees to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be done by others, at the Owner's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the Contractor who is responsible for the damage. 25.2.3.3 MAINTENANCE A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from the beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance. B. Operations: 1. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds, mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control, replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections, replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash -out repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the University of Florida Cooperative Extension Service. 2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy, vigorous growth of the landscape. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch of water for all planted materials before leaving the site. 25.2.3.4 INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE 25.2.3.4.1 INSPECTION A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within 15 days of notifications, the installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and/or graphic inspection report will be sent to the Owner and /or Landscape Contractor. SectionlV.doc Page 50 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2.3.4.2 REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set forth in Plans and Specifications. B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within 15 days and notify the Landscape Architect that the correction has been made. 25.2.3.4.3 ACCEPTANCE A. After replacement of rejected plant material (if any) have been made, and completion of all other correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in writing. B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty period. C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the Owner. 1. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment sufficient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such claim. 2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved equivalent ", or in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from his Contract price. The final selection rests with the Owner or his representative. 3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to compensate for the value not received from the under - specified plant materials. No additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that exceed specifications. 25.2.3.5 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a period of one (1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is either dead or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no charge to the Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation during the warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality or improper materials or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same with no additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant shall be given the equal amount of warranty. SectionlV.doc Page 51 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING 26.1 INTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of 8" to 12" sanitary sewers by the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless, continuous, fold and form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the fold and form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 26.3 MATERIALS Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell classification: P.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to ASTM D 1248. The Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material shall have a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum property values shown below with the applicable ASTM requirements: Material Property ASTM Method Value HDPE HDPE Tensile Strength D 638 3,300 psi Elasticity Modulus E= 113,000 psi Impact Strength D 256 A 3.0 ft-lb /in Flexure Modulus E= 136,000 psi Expansion Coeff. c =0.009 in/in/deg F At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be reviewed for defects and tested in accordance with ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or deleterious faults. The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. The Engineer may at any time request the Contractor provide test results from field samples to the above requirements. SectionlV.doc Page 52 of 128 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications Liner shall be marked at 5 -foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS -20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Pipe Liners, Inc. 3421 N. Causeway, Suite 321, New Orleans, LA 70002, 1- 800 - 344 -3744 or approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and /or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids. 26.4 CLEANING /SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. 26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed- circuit color television, and recorded on VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. 26.6 LINER INSTALLATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the full interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe, pressure and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces are to be met. SectionlV.doc Page 53 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than a eight hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 26.9 PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc, to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. 27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS New driveways or existing black top driveways that must be broken back in widening the pavement (remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street) shall be constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the exception that the base shall be six (6) inches. Use Section 23 G Asphaltic Concrete as specified for the street paving. When finished surface of existing drive is gravel, replacement shall be of like material. Payment shall be the same as Plant Mix Driveways. 27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Plant Mix Driveways in place and accepted. 27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Plant Mix Driveways as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. SectionlV.doc Page 54 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS This Article deleted. 29 CONCRETE CURBS Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 100 feet, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 10 feet. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete curbs. 29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be lineal feet of curb in place and accepted. 29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4 "), except at driveway crossings where a minimum thickness of six inches (6 ") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10 /10 welded wire mesh reinforcement is required for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not more than 100 hundred feet, and scoring marks shall be made every 5 feet. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. 30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six (6) inches in thickness with 6/6 x 10 /10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal distance between expansion joints of no less than four (4) feet measured in any direction. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. SectionlV.doc Page 55 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways. 30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square feet of 4" concrete sidewalk, 6" concrete sidewalk, and 6" concrete driveways in place and accepted. 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where required, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 31 SODDING Unless otherwise noted herein, the contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The area for sod application shall be loosened and excavated to a suitable depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and structures. Sod shall be placed with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform finished grade with a sod roller immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be graded and placed so as to prohibit erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod that has been cut for more than 72 hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in advance. The sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall continue to water sod as needed and/or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure, soil, heat and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract. Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional compensation. Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be determined by the Engineer. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials, placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor, equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the basis of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. 32 SEEDING Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The seed and /or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic conformance with the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982 and 983. However, no wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 lb. of Rye Seed (to total 60 lb. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured. SectionlV.doc Page 56 of 128 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment (including water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in place and accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such work as stated above shall be included in the cost of other work. 33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Part B Index Numbers 200 to 235. When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans and applicable parts of the specifications, Section Numbers 7, 8, & 9, and as approved by the Engineer. Said structures shall be protected and saved from damage by the elements or other causes until acceptance of the work. 33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the Index Numbers 201 and 202. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with brick and mortar on top of concrete base. The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of the manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer. 33.2 PRECAST TYPE The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing. Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets will not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be in accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturers option. Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or outside, the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of precast structure be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be provided under manhole ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Manhole using 0 ring between precast sections will not be acceptable for storm structures. SectionlV.doc Page 57 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis. 34 MATERIAL USED This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 19 — MATERIAL USED. 35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 20 — CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 36 STREET SIGNS The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is PROHIBITED. All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal. 37 AUDIONIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO RECORDING Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio /video recording taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets, easements, rights -of -way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of a pre - construction conditions. 37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO RECORDING The video recordings shall not be made more than twenty -one (21) days prior to construction in any area. 37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio videotapes shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of pre - construction color audio -video recording documentation. 37.4 EQUIPMENT All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the Contractor. The total audio video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking. SectionlV.doc Page 58 of 128 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO Each recording shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each video shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in viewer orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio recording shall also be free from any conversations. 37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name, contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom -in and zoom out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during videotape playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. The construction documentation shall be recorded in SP mode. 37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end, overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the videotape viewer, highly visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion as to clearly indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture. 37.8 LIGHTING All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No taping shall be done during precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects. 37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional to the number, size and value of the surface features within that construction areas zone of influence. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during taping shall not exceed forty -four (44) feet per minute. SectionlV.doc Page 59 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 37.10 VIDEO LOG /INDEX All videotapes shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by videotape number and project title. Each videotape shall have a log of that videotape's contents. The log shall describe the various segments of coverage contained on the video tape in terms of the names of the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the date. 37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE Tape coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc. within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults, fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or right of way at any one time. 37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work. 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL 38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by mulches such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other permanent vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping. 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on -site drainage controls which prevent erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required, depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days. 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by sediment traps such as secured hay bales, sod, stone, etc., which shall be maintained and modified as required by construction progress, and which must be approved by the City Engineer before installation. SectionlV.doc Page 60 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter fences, berms, sediment barriers, vegetative buffers and other measures intended to trap sediment and /or prevent the transport of sediment onto adjacent properties, or into existing water bodies; must be installed, constructed, or, in the case of vegetative buffers, protected from disturbance, as a first step in the land alteration process. Such systems shall be fully operative and inspected by the City before any other disturbance of the site begins. Earthen structures including but not limited to berms, earth filters, dams or dikes shall be stabilized and protected from drainage damage or erosion within one week of installation. 38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS Areas of 3 acres or more shall be required to have temporary sedimentation basins as a positive remedy against downstream siltation and will be shown and detailed on construction plans. During development, permanent detention areas may be used in place of silt basins, provided they are maintained to the satisfaction of the City. The Contractor will be required to prohibit discharge of silt through the outfall structure during construction of any detention area and will be required to clean out the detention area before installing any permanent subdrain pipe. In addition, permanent detention areas must be totally cleaned out and operating properly at final inspection and at the end of the one year warranty period. When temporary sedimentation basins are used, they shall be capable at all times of containing at least one (1) cubic foot of sediment for each one hundred (100) square feet of area tributary to the basin. Such capacity shall be maintained throughout the project by regular removal of sediment from the basin. 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES Land alteration and construction shall be minimized in both permanent and intermittent waterways and the immediately adjacent buffer of 25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and the buffer area whenever possible, and barriers shall be used to prevent access. Where in channel work cannot be avoided, precautions must be taken to stabilize the work area during land alteration, development and /or construction to minimize erosion. If the channel and buffer area are disturbed during land alteration, they must be stabilized within three (3) calendar days after the in channel work is completed. Silt curtains or other filter /siltation reduction devices must be installed on the downstream side of the in channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to increased turbidity. Wherever stream crossings are required, properly sized temporary culverts shall be provided by the contractor and removed when construction is completed. The area of the crossing shall be restored to a condition as nearly as possible equal to that which existed prior to any construction activity. 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy. SectionlV.doc Page 61 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance with the following standards: a. No more than 400 lineal feet of trench shall be open at any one time; b. Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway. 38.9 MAINTENANCE All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required. 38.10 COMPLIANCE Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and /or more stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a "Stop Work Order ". City of Clearwater Standard Detail Drawings No. 601 and 607 are examples of accepted methods that may be used or required to control erosion and siltation. SectionlV.doc Page 62 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications City of Clearwater - Erosion Control This notice is to inform the prime contractor that the City of Clearwater holds them responsible for soil erosion control on their site. The City of Clearwater Engineering Department has the responsibility to minimize the amount of soil erosion into the City's streets, storm sewers and waterways. The construction of a new residence or commercial site and major remodeling of an existing site creates a potential for soil erosion. These instances are usually the result of contractors and subcontractors accessing the property with equipment or construction materials. Then rain storms redistribute the eroded soil into the adjacent streets, storm systems and waterways. When erosion takes place, a City Inspector will place a correction notice at the site. The procedure will be as follows: 1st occurrence 2nd occurrence 3rd occurrence 4th occurrence - Warning $32 Re- inspection Fee $80 Re- inspection Fee Stop Work Order Dependent on the severity of the erosion, the City's Engineering Department may elect to rectify the erosion problem and charge the contractor accordingly. The attached drawings and details are recommendations for the contractor to use as means to support the site from eroding. The contractor may elect to shovel and sweep the street daily or on an as needed basis. However, erosion must be held in check. If the contractor would like to meet with a City inspector on any particular site, please contact Construction Services at 562 -4750 or Planning & Development Services at 562 -4741. Erosion Control Required - City of Clearwater's Code of Ordinances requires erosion control on all land development projects. Erosion control must be in place and maintained throughout the job. Failure to do so may result in additional costs and time delays to the permit holder. Contact Engineering Department with specific questions at 562 -4750. SectionlV.doc Page 63 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications CITY OF CLEARWATER NOTICE OF EROSION VIOLATION UNDER SECTION 3 -701 (DIVISION 7 — EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL) OF THE CITY OF CLEARWATER CODE OF ORDINANCES, THIS SITE HAS BEEN FOUND IN VIOLATION. THIS SITE MUST BE RESTORED TO AN EROSION CONTROLLED SITE PRIOR TO ANY FURTHER DEVELOPMENT TO CONTINUE. Warning $32.00 Re- inspection Fee $80.00 Re- inspection Fee Stop Work Order CITY OF CLEARWATER PLANNING & DEVELOPMENT SERVICES 727 562 -4741 ENGINEERING /CONSTRUCTION 727 562 -4750 DATE POSTED: Inspector's Name: Received by: (Signature indicates only a copy of this notice has been received and does not in any way indicate admission of guilt or concurrence with findings of the inspector.) Inspector's Signature: IT IS A VIOLATION TO REMOVE THIS NOTICE ANY UNAUTHORIZED PERSON REMOVING THIS SIGN WILL BE PROSECUTED SectionlV.doc Page 64 of 128 11/26/2013 MI MI •••- MI I MI AM O■ • I MI • -- r OM 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb of the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals cross diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to service connection. Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by the American Public Works Association as follows: SAFETY RED Electric power, distribution & transmission Municipal Electric Systems HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW Gas Distribution and Transmission Oil Distribution and Transmission Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Telephone and Telegraph Systems Police and Fire Communications Cable Television SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE Water Systems Slurry Pipe Lines SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems LAVENDER RECLAIMED WATER WHITE PROPOSED EXCAVATION Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall be 6 -inch x 3 -inch and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical curb shall be 4 -inch X 2 -inch and be placed on the curb face. 40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE This article not used. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 24 — AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE. 41 POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND APPURTENANCES 41.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in connection with the construction of potable water mains, reclaimed water mains and appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching, backfilling and clean up. SectionlV.doc Page 65 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.2 MATERIALS 41.2.1 GENERAL Materials, equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall be of first quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modern design and engineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation, except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects during shipment and construction. 41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 41.2.2.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSI /AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table: Size Class Thickness (In.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) 4" 51 0.26 350 6" 50 0.25 350 8" 50 0.27 350 12" 50 0.31 350 The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to centerline of pipe. Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI /AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSI /AWWA C104/A21.4 80 or latest revision. 41.2.2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 4 -inch through 8 -inch shall be in accordance with ANSI /AWWA C900 or latest revision and the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standard D 2241 and PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall have the same O.D. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be compatible for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings. Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table: SectionlV.doc Page 66 of 128 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications Size Dimension Ratio (OD/Thick.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) Laying Length (Ft) 4 18 150 20 6 18 150 20 8 18 150 20 Pipe larger than 8 -inch shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the use of ductile iron in sizes 4 -inch through 8 -inch when needed due to laying conditions or usage. The bell of 4 -inch and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements of ASTM D 1869. Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling, storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe material for potable water service. All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with two (2) strands of insulated 12 gauge A.W.G. solid strand copper wire taped to the top of each joint of pipe with about 18- inches between each piece of tape. It is to be installed at every valve box through a 2 -inch PVC pipe to 12- inches minimum above the top of the concrete slab. The 2 -inch PVC pipe shall be the same length as the adjustable valve box, and the 2 -inch PVC pipe shall be plugged with a 2 -inch removable brass plug with recessed nut. This wire is to be continuous with splices made only by direct bury 3M brand splice kit approved by the Engineer. This wire is to be secured to all valves, tees and elbows. 41.2.2.3 FITTINGS AND JOINTS Fitting from 4 -inch through 16 -inch in size will be compact ductile iron cast in accordance with ANSI /AWWA C153 /A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets shall be in accordance with requirements of ANSI /AWWA C153 /A 21.53. The working pressure rating shall be 350 P.S.I. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with require requirements of ANSI /AWWA C104/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in accordance with ANSI /AWWA C111 /A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSI /AWWA Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic (USA) manufacture will be acceptable. 41.2.2.4 RESTRAINT Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved mechanical restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants shall be restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint connectors. 41.2.2.5 PIPE WITHIN CASING All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed and have properly sized casing spacers (Cascade Series) installed on the pipe so that the pipe will be centered within the casing. SectionlV.doc Page 67 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Each end of the casing shall be properly sealed to prevent the intrusion of soil, water, or debris within the casing itself. It shall be sealed by brick and mortar, cement or any approved method by the Engineer. 41.2.3 GATE VALVES Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with respect to the vertical. Gate valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures, shall be handwheel operated with rising stems. Valves 4- inches and larger, buried in earth shall be equipped with 2 -inch square operating nuts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall be fitted with joints suitable for the pipe with which they are to be used. The direction of opening for all valves shall be to the left (counter clockwise). Pressure Rating: Unless otherwise shown or specified, valves for high pressure service shall be rated at not less than 150 psi cold water, nonshock. The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body. Installation: Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines shall be so supported that their weight is not carried through valves. Two Inch Diameter and smaller: Not allowed. These should be approved ball valves. Three Inch Diameter: Not allowed. Four Inch to Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate Valves, 4 to 16 -inch diameter, inclusive, shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM Rubber in conformance with ANSI /A.WWA. Standard Specification C509 -515 latest revision. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509 -515, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 p.s.i. differential pressure, all internal parts removable from bonnet without removing body from pressure main, corrosion resistant bronze or stainless steel nonrising stem with 0 ring bonnet seal with epoxy coated inside and outside cast iron or ductile iron valve body.. Larger than Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate valves larger than 16 -inch shall be suitable for the service intended and shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM rubber in conformance with ANSI /AWWA. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509 -80, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 psi differential pressure. All valves shall be equipped with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers, bronze or babbitt tracks and scrapers and valved by -pass. 41.2.4 VALVE BOXES Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast iron. No PVC Risers or Derisers are allowed as part of a valve box assembly. They are to be a- piece valve box assembles. The lower part of the assembly can be ordered in various heights to accommodate different depths. Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall be provided where shown. The valve box cover shall be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their installation shall be included in the bid price for valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve boxes and pad detail. SectionlV.doc Page 68 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.2.5 HYDRANTS No other hydrants, other than those listed below, may be used in extension to or replacement of the City of Clearwater potable water system: • Kennedy Guardian #K 81D Fire Hydrant, • Mueller Super Centurion 25 Fire Hydrant • AVK Nostalgic 2780. • American Darling B -84 -B. No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval of the City of Clearwater. Above hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AWWA Specification C 502 and include the following modifications: 1. All shipments to be palletized and tailgate delivery. 2. Hydrants shall conform to A.W.W.A. Standard C -502 latest revision and must be UL/FM listed. 3. Hydrants shall be of the compression type, closing with line pressure. 4. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and bottom with an 0-ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil. 5. Hydrants shall be of the traffic model breakaway type, with the barrel made in two sections with the break flange located approximately 2 -inch above the ground line. Breakaway bolts not allowed. 6. Operating nut shall be of one -piece bronze or ductile iron construction. 7. A dirt shield shall be provided to protect the operating mechanism from grit buildup and corrosion due to moisture. 8. A thrust washer shall be supplied between the operating nut and stem lock nut to facilitate operation. 9. Operating nut shall be a #7 (1-1/2-inch) pentagon nut. 10. Nozzles shall be of the tamper resistant, 1/4 turn type with 0-ring seals or threaded into upper barrel. Nozzles shall be retained with a stainless steel locking device. 11. The main valve shall be of EPDM solid rubber. 12. The seat shall be of a bronze ring threaded to a bronze insert in the hydrant shoe, with 0- rings to seal the barrel from leakage of water in the shoe. 13. The main valve stem will be 304 or higher grade stainless steel and made in two sections with a breakable coupling. 14. Hydrant shall have a 6 -inch Mechanical Joint epoxy lined elbow, less accessories. 15. Hydrant shall have a 5 -1/4 -inch valve opening, and shall be a left hand operation to open. 16. Hydrant shall be without drains. 17. Hydrant shall have two (2) 2-1/2-inch hose nozzles and one (1) 4-1/2-inch pumper nozzle. Threads shall be in accordance with the National Standard Hose Coupling Thread Specifications. SectionlV.doc Page 69 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 18. Hydrant body shall have a factory finish of yellow paint. All paints shall comply with AWWA standard C- 502 -85 or latest revision. All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latest AWWA Specification C 502. Constrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from the hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Constrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent movement of the hydrant. All hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant may be shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system. No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's Engineering Department. 41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to 4 -inch P.V.C. water main. The largest service connection allowable on 4 -inch main shall be 1 -1/2 -inch. Service saddles shall be used on all 2- inch service connections to 6 -inch and larger mains. Service saddles (JCM 406 series or Ford FC 202 series) shall be wide bodied ductile iron with epoxy or nylon coating and shall have stainless steel straps. 41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS 1. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials. 2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery; and no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or unsatisfactory material shall be used. 3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site. 4. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. 41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS The City of Clearwater owns and maintains all backflow prevention devices that are installed within their system. Therefore, any and all devices must be purchased from the City and installed by City work forces. Backflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery (service connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 or latest revision. Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, when required, is determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from possible backflow of water within the customers private system. The types of devices allowed are: SectionlV.doc Page 70 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 1. Double Check Valve Assembly a device composed of two single, independently acting, approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the assembly and suitable connections for testing the watertightness of each check valve. 2. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device a device containing a minimum of two independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks. 41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES Steel body tapping sleeves shall be JCM Industries Inc., JCM 412 or Smith -Blair 622. All steel body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body, stainless steel bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and 3/4 -inch bronze test plug. 41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS Blow offs are not allowed. 41.3 CONSTRUCTION 41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING 1. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded rolled against pipe already on the ground. 2. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. 3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench. 41.3.2 PIPE LAYING 41.3.2.1 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves and hydrants at the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant stems plumb. All pipe installed shall be pigged and properly blown off before any pressure testing and sterilization of the pipe can be completed. The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of 30- inches and a maximum of 42- inches below finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid conflicts and obstructions. Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is required, the Engineer shall have the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and grade or arrange with the Owners of the structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction of the obstructions. SectionlV.doc Page 71 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.3.2.2 INSTALLATION Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves and hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick, ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or dumped in the trench. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe or fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs or rejection. All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each pipe, and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped clean and dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being placed in the line. If the pipe laying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place without getting earth into it, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the trench, a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools, clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe. As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to prevent dirt from entering the joint space. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer. The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of 10 per cent or greater, the laying shall start at bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade. Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb stems; or where long radius curves are permitted, the amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of ANSI/AWWA C600 -82 and C900 81 or latest revisions. No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable. SectionlV.doc Page 72 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 41.3.3.1 GENERAL Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified above for installation of pipe. 41.3.3.2 VALVES Valves in water mains shall, where possible, be located on the street property lines extended unless shown otherwise on the plans. All valves shall be installed at the tee in all cases, not to exceed 18- inches from the main line. The valve box shall not transmit any shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished pavement or such other level as may be directed. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve box and pad detail. 41.3.3.3 HYDRANTS Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians. All hydrants located 10 -feet of more from the main shall have a gate valve at the main and another gate valve at the hydrant location. No valve can be located anywhere in the hydrant run to circumvent the use of two valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 5 of 5 for potable water hydrants. No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's Engineering Department. All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with nozzles as shown or as directed by the Engineer. Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a 6 -inch ductile iron branch controlled by an independent 6 inch gate valve. 41.3.3.4 ANCHORAGE Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant runout length precludes the use of hydrant connecting swivel joints. Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown on the plans. 41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made until all requirements of the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met and the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer. SectionlV.doc Page 73 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be made in a thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the actual conditions. All fittings shall be properly sterilized and pipe will be properly swabbed before connections to existing facilities. All connections to existing facilities will be completed under the supervision of the City of Clearwater Water Division. 41.4 TESTS 41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS After installation of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds per square inch for a period of two (2) hours and shall conform to AWWA C600 latest revision. All mains shall be pigged and flushed to remove all sand and other foreign matter before any hydrostatic test can or will be performed. The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and all necessary apparatus, together with operating personnel, shall be furnished by the Contractor at his expense. The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line. 41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater's Owner Representative 48 -hours advance notice of the time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing. 41.5 STERILIZATION Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized in accordance with AWWA C651. 41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to Federal Specification 0 S 602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or "Perchloron ". 41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing shall continue until a clean, clear stream of water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are not available for flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the installed blow off devices generally at the ends of the lines. 41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE All piping, valves, fittings and all other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a minimum chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then remain in the distribution system for a minimum contact period of eight (8) hours and never more than 24 hours before it is flushed out. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the contact period. SectionlV.doc Page 74 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free ' residual chlorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall be in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test set. 41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS After the water system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein, City of Clearwater Water Division or the Owner's Representative personnel shall take samples of water from remote points of the distribution system in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall forward the samples to a laboratory certified by the Florida State Board of Health for bacterial examination in accordance with AWWA C651. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of ' coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before the system is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the sterilization as outlined above. If methods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of samples shall be secured from the laboratory prior to sterilization and shall be followed in all ' respects. The City of Clearwater shall secure clearance of the water main from the Florida Department of Environmental Protection before the water distribution system is put into operation. 1 41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 41.6.1 GENERAL Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid Form. Payment for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump sum payment for the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute full compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work. No separate ' payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the applicable pay items of work: • Clearing and grubbing • Excavation, including necessary pavement removal • Shoring and/or dewatering • Structural fill t• Backfill • Grading • Tracer wire • Refill materials • Joints materials • Tests and sterilization • Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. 1 SectionlV.doc Page 75 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS 41.6.2.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line, including the length of valves and fittings. 41.6.2.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains complete and ready for operation. 41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 41.6.3.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron fittings satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped on the body of the fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical weights by more than the tolerances permitted in ANSI /AWWA C110 /A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case, the weight will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance. 41.6.3.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings. 41.6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS 41.6.4.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished and installed. 41.6.4.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover. 41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 41.6.5.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and installed. The only hydrants allowed to be installed in the City of Clearwater utilities system are listed in Section 41.2.5. No exceptions. 41.6.5.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the fire hydrant complete including necessary thrust SectionlV.doc Page 76 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications anchorage, 6 -inch pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on the hydrant lead. 42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS This article not applicable. 43 TENNIS COURTS 43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS 43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS All soil under courts shall be treated with DSMA 184 at the rate of 2 pounds active ingredient per 1,000 square foot. Materials shall be brought to the job site in tagged containers. Tags shall be retained and turned into the Engineer's Office. 43.1.2 BASE COURSE Base Course shall be Limerock 6" thick after compaction. Specifications for the base shall be the same as those for Limerock in Section IV - Article 22 of the City of Clearwater Technical Specifications. Subgrade stabilizing will not be required. Surface shall be cut to within 1/2" of true grade in preparation of 1" leveling course. Prior to applying prime coat, surface shall be approved by the Engineer. 43.1.3 PRIME COAT The material used for prime coat shall be cut -back Asphalt Grade RC -70 or RC -250 and shall conform to Section 300 of the Florida State Department of Transportation's "Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction ". 43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE A.Leveling Course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S -III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Leveling Course shall be constructed running East and West. Finish surface of leveling course shall not vary more than 1/4" when checked with a 10 foot straight edge. If a deficiency of more than 'A" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. 43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE Surface course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S -III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Surface Course shall be constructed running North and South. Finish surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4" in 10 feet. Prior to application of color coat, surface shall be checked for low areas by flooding the surface with water. Low areas shall be patched as approved by the Engineer prior to application of the color coat. No areas which retain water will SectionlV.doc Page 77 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications be approved. If a deficiency of more than 1/4" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. 43.1.6 COLOR COAT 43.1.6.1 MATERIALS Materials used in the patching and color coating of Tennis Courts shall be manufactured specifically for Tennis Court Application. All materials must be approved by the Engineer prior to the start of construction. Request for approval of coating materials may be submitted prior to the opening of bids. In requests for approval, the Contractor shall present manufacturer's literature along with the name, address, and date of three previous Tennis Court applications of the proposed material. 43.1.6.2 CONSTRUCTION 43.1.6.2.1 SURFACE PREPARATION The surface to be coated must be sound, smooth, and free from loose dirt or oily materials. Prior to the application of surfacing materials, the entire surface should be checked for minor depressions or irregularities. If it is determined that minor corrections are necessary, the Contractor shall make repairs using approved tack coat and/or patching mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use. After patching the surface shall not vary more than 1/8" in ten feet in any direction. If a deficiency of more than 1/8" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. In order to provide a smooth, dense underlayment of the finish course, one or more applications of resurfacer or patch mix shall be applied to the underlaying surface as deemed necessary by the Engineer. Asphaltic concrete Surface Course with a smooth tight mix and no ponding, will not require the resurfacing or patching mix. Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course which is course and rough or is ponding water will require the use of the resurfacer or patch mix. No applications shall be covered by a succeeding application until thoroughly cured. 43.1.6.2.2 FINISH COLOR COURSE The finish course shall be applied to a clean, dry surface in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. A minimum of two applications of color coat will be required. Texture of cured color coat is to be regulated in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to provide a medium speed surface for tennis play. The color of application shall be dark green for the regulation double's playing area and red for all other others. The finished surface shall have a uniform appearance and be free from ridges and tool marks. 43.1.6.3 PLAYING LINES Forty -eight (48) hours minimum after completion of the resurfacing, 2 inch wide playing lines shall be accurately located, marked and painted with approved marking paint. SectionlV.doc Page 78 of 128 11/26/2013 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 43.1.6.4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS No parts of the construction involving Tennis Court surfacing or patching products shall be conducted during rainfall, or when rainfall is imminent or unless the air temperature is at least 50 degrees, Fahrenheit and rising. NOTE: The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum or 24 hours in advance of all base and asphalt related work. 43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS 43.2.1 GENERAL 43.2.1.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the installation of clay tennis court(s) as set forth in these specifications and /or the construction drawings. The scope of work is indicated on drawings and specified herein. Basis of design for clay courts with sub - surface irrigation system is Hydrogrid Tennis, Inc. or prior approved equal. 43.2.1.2 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS The Owner may make such investigation as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the Bidder to perform the work and the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any Bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigations of such Bidders fail to satisfy the owner that such Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work contemplated herein within the time limit agreed upon. Factors to be considered in awarding the Bid shall include the successful completion of similar sub - surface irrigation clay tennis court installations of like value, scope, size and quality as this project, with in the last five (5) years. The Owner desires to award this contract to firms that have been in business for a minimum of five (5) years. The qualifications and experience of the personnel assigned to the project will be a determining factor in the award of the Bid. 43.2.1.3 STANDARDS The Contractor shall perform all work in a thorough, workmanlike manner and conform to standards for tennis court construction as prescribed or approved by the United States (Lawn) Tennis Association and the United States Tennis Court and Tract Builders Association. The Contractor shall construct the tennis courts with laser guided equipment. 43.2.1.4 BUILDING PERMITS AND TAXES The Contractor shall secure all construction permits required by law, the City of Clearwater will waive all permit fees. 43.2.1.5 COURT LAYOUT The Owner shall establish two horizontal control points and a construction bench mark. The Contractor shall locate the four corners of each battery and shall layout the courts in conformance with the specifications and drawings. SectionlV.doc Page 79 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 43.2.1.6 BUILDING REQUIREMENTS The Owner shall provide and maintain reasonable access to the construction site, as well as an area adjacent to the site for storage and preparation of materials. Adequate water outlets within fifty (50) feet of the site shall be provided. 43.2.1.7 SCHEDULE The Owner desires to award the contract to firms who will complete this project in a reasonable time schedule. Consideration in awarding this bid will be given to firms who may commence and complete the project within a reasonable period of time after award of the bid. The Owner, in its sole discretion, will determine the reasonable schedule standard as it relates to the "Notice to Proceed." 43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION 43.2.2.1 SUITABILITY The Contractor shall examine the site to determine its suitability for installation of the courts. 43.2.2.2 DEMOLITION The contractor shall demo the existing tennis courts, remove the existing ten (10) foot high fence surrounding the tennis courts and all underground utilities within the limits of the construction area. Utilities extending outside the construction limits shall be capped and terminated. The existing tennis courts shall be ground into millings suitable to be mixed into the sub -grade at the proposed location of the new clay tennis courts. Any sub -grade material beneath the existing tennis courts not suitable for planting beds shall be removed and also utilized as sub -grade material beneath the new courts. All demolition materials not utilized in construction of the new courts shall be removed and disposed from the project site. The Contractor shall provide documentation of any recycled materials. 43.2.2.3 SUB -GRADE The sub -grade shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final sub -grade elevation. The sub -grade shall be graded level. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is required. The Contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner. 43.2.2.4 FINAL GRADE The final grades outside the tennis court areas and within the construction limits shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final grade elevations with positive drainage away from tennis courts and towards drainage swales or outfall structures. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is required. The contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner. 43.2.3 SLOPE 43.2.3.1 SLOPE REQUIREMENTS Rate and direction of slope of the finished surfaces shall be one (1) inch in forty (40) feet, all in one plane, as indicated on the drawings. SectionlV.doc Page 80 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION 43.2.4.1 LINER Two layers of 6 mil construction plastic shall be installed over the sub -grade surface with a minimum overlap of five (5) feet where pieces are joined. Use only materials that are resistant to deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows: a. Polyethylene sheet, Construction Grade. 43.2.4.2 BASE COURSE The base course shall consist of six (6) inches of porous base material as supplied by Quality Aggregate of Sarasota Florida. The surface of the base course shall be smooth and even, and it shall be within one - quarter (1/4) inch of the established grade. 43.2.4.3 IRRIGATION SYSTEM Perforated pipe shall be installed in trenches in the base course. These trenches shall be in on four (4) foot centers and shall be run perpendicular to the slope of the court. The pipe shall be two and one - quarter (2-1/4) inch diameter with a nylon needle punched sock surrounding the pipe. Six (6) water control canisters shall be installed per court with each canister controlling five (5) grid pipe trenches. Provide all required controls systems time clocks; float switches, control wiring and solenoids, etc. for a complete sub - surface irrigation system. 43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING 43.2.5.1 CURB Brick curb shall be installed around the entire perimeter of the court area with an elevation of one - quarter (1/4) to one -half (1/2) inch above the finished screening course elevation. 43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE 43.2.6.1 COURT SURFACE A surface course of ISP Type II Aquablend or Lee Hyroblend tennis court material shall be installed over the screening course to a compacted depth of one (1) inch. The Aqua/Hydroblend material shall be watered to its full depth immediately after leveling and then compacted by rolling with a tandem roller weighing 600 to 1000 pounds. The finished surface shall not vary from specified grade by more than one - eighth (1/8) inch. 43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER Root barrier (geo -tech fabric) eighteen (18) inches height shall be placed in a trench on the outside edge of the perimeter curbing eighteen (18) inches in depth with herbicide coating buttons to prevent plant root systems in entering the sub - surface base course of the clay tennis courts. SectionlV.doc Page 81 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 43.2.8 FENCING 43.2.8.1 DESIGN The contractor shall provide a total color coated fencing system as indicated on drawings and described herein. All components: frames, fabric and fittings shall be black. Basis of Design Ameristar HT -25 or prior approved equal subject to strict compliance with Ameristar published specification. 43.2.8.2 POSTS All posts shall be a minimum 2 -1/2" Ameristar HT-25 pipe; top rails 1 -5/8" Ameristar HT -25 pipe with manufacturers standard "Permacoat" color system. 43.2.8.3 FENCE FABRIC Fence Fabric shall be 1 -3/4" #6 gauge mesh throughout, manufactures standard galvanized wire with PVC coating. All fabric to be knuckled on both selvages. 43.2.8.4 GATES Provide gates at locations indicated. At service gates, provide a keeper that automatically engages gate life and holds it in the open position until manually released. Provide gate stops for double gates consisting of a mushroom -type flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and designed to engage a center drop rod or plunger -bar. Include a locking device and padlock eyes as an integral part of the latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with a single padlock. Provide latch, fork type or plunger -bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with padlock eye as an integral part of the latch. Gate Hinges — Size and material to suit gate size, non - lift -off type, and offset to permit 180 - degree gate opening. Provide one and one -half (1 -1/2) pair of hinges for each leaf over six (6) foot nominal height. 43.2.9 WINDSCREENS The contractor shall provide nine (9) foot high windscreens at all ten (10) foot high fencing. Basis of design is Durashade plus by Ball Products, Inc. or equal by Putterman. Black high - density polyethylene, eight (8) oz. per square yard edges hemmed with grommets at twelve (12) inch on center. Attach to chain link fencing at the top and bottom with 50 LBS plastic ties. 43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT 43.2.10.1 POST FOUNDATIONS Post foundations shall be not less than thirty -six (36) inches in length, eighteen (18) inches in width and thirty (30) inches in depth. Foundations shall be placed to provide an exact distance between posts of forty -two (42) feet on a doubles court and thirty -three (33) feet on a singles court. 43.2.10.2 NET POSTS & SLEEVES Net posts shall be galvanized steel having an outside diameter of not less than two and seven - eighths (2 7/8) inches with electrostatically applied enamel finish and shall be equipped with a reel type net tightening device. Post sleeves and posts shall be set plumb and true so as to support SectionlV.doc Page 82 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications the net a height of forty -two (42) inches above the court surface at the posts. Post sleeves shall be Schedule 40 PVC to be set in concrete per net post manufactures recommendation. 43.2.10.3 CENTER STRAP ANCHOR A center strap anchor shall be firmly set in accordance with the rules of the USTA. 43.2.10.4 NET A tennis net conforming to the USTA regulations shall be installed on each court. The net shall have black synthetic netting, a headband of white synthetic material in double thickness with the exterior treated for resistance to mildew and sunlight, and bottom and end tapes of back synthetic material treated to prevent deterioration from the sunlight. A vinyl coated, impregnated steel cable, having a diameter of one quarter (1/4) inch and a length five (5) feet greater than length between the net post shall hold the net in suspension. The net shall have tie strings of a synthetic material at each corner. Basis of Design — Duranet DTS by Ball Products, Inc. 43.2.10.5 CENTER STRAP Provide a center strap of white heavy duty polyester webbing with black oxide coated brass slide buckles and nickel plated double end snap. Center strap shall be placed on the net and attached to the center strap anchor. 43.2.10.6 LINE TAPES Line tapes shall be 100% nylon and shall be two (2) inches in width. The tapes shall be firmly secured by aluminum nails with aluminum length of two and one -half (2 — 1/2) inches. Positioning shall be in accordance with regulations of the USTA. 43.2.10.7 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT Deliver the following equipment to the owner: 1. Ride -on Tandem Roller - Brutus AR -I Roller, automatic forward- neutral - reverse transmission; 24 inch wide drum; 3 -horse power Briggs and Stratton engine. 2. Hand drag brooms (4 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame with 4 -1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline. 3. Tow drag brooms (1 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame 4 -1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline. 4. Deluxe Proline Line Sweeper (4 each) - friction - driven rubber sleeves; synthetic bristle brush; with fence hook cast aluminum. 5. Scarifier /Lutes (2 each) - 30" wide all aluminum; Proline. 6. Tennis Shoe Cleaners (2 each) - steel frame construction "Scrusher" exact installation location by Owner. 7. Tennis Two Step (2 each) - polyethylene construction with two rubber panels. 8. Court Rake (1 each) — six -foot length aluminum. SectionlV.doc Page 83 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE Provide shade structures as indicted on drawings. Basis of design: Suntrends, Inc. "Cabana Bench 8" — 8'long x 6' wide gable design with standard canvas canopy, direct burial installation. Provide concrete footing, size and reinforcement as required by shade structure manufacture. 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable) The owner shall supply water line to within fifty (50) feet of the courts with 50 pounds per square inch running pressure at its terminus. This line shall have the capacity to supply 30 gallons of water per minute for each court. 43.2.13 CONCRETE Provide concrete consisting of portland cement per ASTM C 150, aggregates per ASTM C 33, and potable water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28 -day compressive strength of 3,500 psi. Use at least four sacks of cement per cu. yd., 1 -inch maximum size aggregate, 3 -inch maximum slump. 43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING 43.2.14.1 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall provide signed and sealed electrical shop drawings by a professional electrical engineer for approval of the relocation and re- aiming of the existing tennis court sport lighting fixtures and electrical service to water coolers. The shop drawings shall include all necessary information according to local electrical codes in providing a complete operating system from the existing electrical panel. The shop drawings shall provide data showing the maximum foot candles the existing fixtures will provide at its new locations for tournament play. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval. 43.2.14.2 RE -LAMP The Contractor shall re -lamp and clean lens of all existing lighting fixtures after relocating the light pole and fixtures to its new location. The City will provide the new lamps. 43.2.14.3 ELECTRICAL PERMIT The Contractor shall submit electrical drawings to City of Clearwater Planning and Development Services to obtain permits for installation of the electrical works. 43.2.14.4 POLES & FIXTURES The Contractor shall install three (3) new sixty foot (60') poles and fourteen (14) new fixtures. The City will purchase and provide the new poles and fixtures for the Contractor to install, any other miscellaneous items required to provide a complete operable system shall be provided by the Contractor. Attached with this specification are the photometric lumination charts for the eight -(8) tennis courts. This information is provided by Musco Sport Lighting, 1838 East Chester Drive, Suite #104, High Point, NC 27265, phone (336) 887 -0770 fax (336) 887 -0771. Contact Douglas A. Stewart. Contractor shall install the poles and fixtures based on the following information: SectionlV.doc Page 84 of 128 11/26/2013 Pole T1 Pole T2 Pole T3 Pole T4 Pole T5 Pole T6 Pole T7 Pole T8 Pole T9 Section IV — Technical Specifications existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5 existing 12 fixture pole, remove six fixtures and place on pole T5 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits new pole w /existing sixteen fixtures (8 on one side and 8 on the other) and 2 circuits new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5 existing 12 fixture pole, remove four fixtures and place on pole T5 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5 Light levels ended up at 58+ footcandles. Existing poles have concrete footing approximately one foot wide on all sides Contractor shall plan relocation light poles accordingly. 43.2.14.5 ELECTRICAL CONDUITS Existing electrical conduits are installed individually Contractor place electrical junction boxes at existing New conduits will be required for the three (3) new the cost for these electrical conduits in the relocating 43.2.15 WATER COOLER to the existing light pole, it is suggested the pole locations and utilize existing conduits. light poles and the Contractor shall include of the new light poles. 43.2.15.1 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall provide shop drawings for the installation of water cooler in the cabana area of the tennis courts, electrical, water and drainage submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval. 43.2.15.2 WATER FOUNTAIN Basis for design: Halsey Taylor HOF Series — water cooler with sealed back panels, or equal. 43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION Instruct the Owner's personnel on proper operation and maintenance of court and equipment. 43.2.17 WARRANTY 43.2.17.1 EQUIPMENT The Contractor shall supply warranty cards and operation and maintenance manuals for all equipment to the Owner upon completion of construction of the project. 43.2.17.2 WARRANTY The Contractor shall warranty the courts, fencing, sidewalks and court accessories against defective materials and /or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of completion. SectionlV.doc Page 85 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 43.2.17.3 WARRANTY SUB - SURFACE IRRIGATION SYSTEM The Contractor shall warranty the sub - surface irrigation of the clay tennis courts for a period of two years from the day of completion. 44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone traffic control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization, hazard warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be necessary at outlying points. 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and /or as may be required by construction permits issued by Pinellas County and /or the Florida Department of Transportation for the Project, incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the U.S. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of Transportation, or most recent addition. 44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY The general objectives of a program of work zone safety is to protect workers, pedestrians, bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives: • Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones. • Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation he will be facing as he proceeds through or around the work zone. • Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle. • Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material. • Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site). • Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices. • Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and/or around construction or maintenance work zones. The 2004 Design Standards (DS), Index 600 "When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone, accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only approved temporary traffic control devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic control zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and detours marked shall be provided by appropriate signs ". 2004 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction SectionlV.doc Page 86 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 102 -5 Traffic Control: 102 -5.1 Standards: FDOT Design Standards (DS) are the minimum standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of requirements increase with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but local streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the designated "Spring Break" season with prior approval by the City Engineer. 44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS Obtain permits for Pinellas County and Florida Department of Transportation roadways. Traffic control devises conform to national and state standards. 44.3.1.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected by the construction process. 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS Consult with City Traffic staff for preliminary traffic control options. Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary. 44.3.2.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Message Board Display, Minimum of 7 -day notice period prior to road closure and maybe longer for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor. 44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS 44.3.3.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION C -View Release 44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS 44.3.4.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION News Release The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than 7 days. 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the Traffic Operations Division, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone 562 -4750, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control plan. SectionlV.doc Page 87 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications All maintenance of traffic (MOT) plans shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer or an individual who is certified in the preparation of MOT plans in the State of Florida. 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION The Traffic Operations Division may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traffic control devices of the Contractor. The City's Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may make known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector. 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL Payment for work zone traffic control is a non - specific pay item to be included in the construction costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise in the Scope of Work in these Technical Specifications and a bid item(s) is included for Work Zone Traffic Control in the proposal form. 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic Safety Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of Transportation. This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and /or sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a 24 -hour per day basis and shall review the project on a day -to -day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic control. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain traffic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall ensure that routine deficiencies are corrected within a 24 -hour period. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control or to provide alternate traffic arrangements. Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may be grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a designated Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in temporary suspension of all activities except traffic and erosion control and such other activities deemed to be necessary for project maintenance and safety. 45 CURED -IN -PLACE PIPE LINING 45.1 INTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of sanitary sewer and storm pipes by the installation if a cured in place jointless, continuous, thermosetting resin impregnated polyester flexible felt liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand SectionlV.doc Page 88 of 128 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system(s) and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 45.3 MATERIALS The liner shall be polyester fiber felt tubing saturated with a resin prior to insertion. Resin type and qualities shall be as specified by the manufacturer to obtain a cured liner with the following properties: Tensile Strength Flexural Strength Flexural Modulus of Elasticity Long Term Modulus of Elasticity (50 Years) ASTM D638 ASTM D790 ASTM D790 ASTM D2290 3,000 psi 4,500 psi 300,000 psi 150,000 psi Liner shall meet strengths as shown in ASTM F1216 unless otherwise submitted and approved by the Engineer. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS -20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Insituform of North America, Inc., 3315 Democrat Road, Post Office Box 181071, Memphis, Tennessee 38118; or InLiner USA 1900 N.W. 44th St., Pompano Beach Florida 33064, 305- 979 -0802, or an approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and /or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids. 45.4 CLEANING /SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. SectionlV.doc Page 89 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed - circuit color television, and recorded on DVD, CD VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. 45.6 LINER INSTALLATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide for a tight fit on the interior of the existing pipe to be lined. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including operations for inversion, heat curing and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, excessive wrinkling or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. 45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 95% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight -hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 45.9 PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, lateral reconnection, etc, to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. SectionlV.doc Page 90 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING 46.1 MATERIALS 46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS The pipe supplied under this specification shall be high performance, high molecular weight, high density polyethylene pipe (Driscopipe 1000) as manufactured by Phillips Driscopipe, Inc., Dallas, Texas and shall conform to ASTM D 1248 (Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34) or approved equal. Minimum cell classification values shall be 345434C as referenced in ASTM D 3350 latest edition. If fittings are required, they will be supplied under this specification and shall be molded or manufactured from a polyethylene compound having a cell classification equal to or exceeding the compound used in the pipe. To insure compatibility of polyethylene resins, all fittings supplied under this specification shall be of the same manufacture as the pipe being supplied. 46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL The resin used for manufacturer of the pipe shall be manufactured by the pipe manufacturer, thus maintaining complete control of the pipe quality. The pipe shall contain no recycled compound except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from the same raw material. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or other deleterious defects, and shall be identical in color, density, melt index, and other physical properties. The polyethylene resin used shall have all ingredients pre compound prior to extrusion of pipe, in plant blending is not acceptable. The Engineer may request, as part of the quality control records submittal, certification that the pipe produced is represented by the quality assurance testing. Additionally, test results from manufacturer's testing or random sampling by the Engineer that do not meet appropriate ASTM standards or manufacturer's representation, may be cause for rejection of pipe represented by the testing. These tests may include density and flow rate measurements from samples taken at selected locations within the pipe wall and thermal stability determinations according to ASTM D 3350, 10.1.9. 46.1.3 SAMPLES The owner or the specifying engineer may request certified lab data to verify the physical properties of the materials supplied under this specification or may take random samples and have them tested by an independent laboratory. 46.1.4 REJECTION Polyethylene pipe and fittings may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this specification. 46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS Pipe supplied under this specification shall have a nominal IPS (Iron Pipe Size) O.D. unless otherwise specified. The SDR (Standard Dimension Ratio) of the pipe supplied shall be as specified by the Engineer, on the construction plans and/or the scope of work. SectionlV.doc Page 91 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES 46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE Pipe shall be stored on clean, level ground to prevent undue scratching or gouging of the pipe. If the pipe must be stacked for storage, such stacking should be done in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The handling of the pipe should be done in such a manner that it is not damaged by dragging over sharp objects or cut by chokers or lifting equipment. 46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS Segments of pipe having cuts or gouges in excess of 10% of the wall thickness of the pipe should be cut out and removed. The undamaged portions of the pipe shall be rejoined using the butt fusion joining method. 46.3.3 PIPE JOINING Sections of polyethylene pipe should be joined into continuous lengths on the job site above ground. The joining method shall be the butt fusion method and shall be performed by the manufacturer's representative and in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The butt fusion equipment used in the joining procedures should be capable of meeting all conditions recommended by the pipe manufacturer, including, but not limited to, temperature requirements, alignment, and fusion pressures. 46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE Fused segments of pipe shall be handled so to avoid damage to the pipe. When lifting fused sections of pipe, chains or cable type chokers should be avoided. Nylon slings are preferred. Spreader bars should be used when lifting long fused sections. Care should be exercised to avoid cutting or gouging the pipe. 46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE 46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS The liner(s) to be slip lined into the existing storm sewer shall have the following sizes: 12 -inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 15 -inch existing sewer. 16 -inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 18 -inch existing sewer. 18 -inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 21 -inch existing sewer. 211/2-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 24 -inch existing sewer. 28 -inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 30 -inch existing sewer. 34 -inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 36 -inch existing sewer. 42 -inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 48 -inch existing sewer. 46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION The existing line shall be cleaned of debris and other obstructions prior to TV inspections or insertion of the polyethylene liner. Cleaning can be accomplished with a high velocity cleaner, a bucket and scrapper, root saws, corkscrews, and rodding or balling units. The method used will be determined by the condition of the existing line. Final cleaning may be required prior to inserting the liner. SectionlV.doc Page 92 of 128 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS All excavations shall conform to OSHA requirements and any additional requirements as set by the specifying engineer or his representative. Insertion shaft excavations shall coincide with points requiring removal of obstructions or shall be determined by the engineer. An entry slope grade of 2 1/2:1 maximum shall be used to provide a safe bending radius for the polyethylene. The bottom of the entry pit should provide a straight section for ease of entry of the liner into the existing pipe. The length of the level excavation should be at least twelve times the diameter of the liner being inserted. The width of the shaft should be as narrow as possible. The required width will depend on the location, type of soil, depth of the existing sewer line and the water table. 46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER After completion of the access shaft, the top half of the existing sewer shall be broken or cut and removed for the full length of the access shaft. A fabricated pulling head shall be connected to the leading end of the liner pipe. A cable shall be connected to the pulling head so that the liner pipe can be pulled into the existing sewer. Power winches used for pulling in long lengths of polyethylene liner pipe shall be rated equal to the project requirements. Once started, the pulling operation should continue to completion. Insertion is normally done at about a slow walking speed. After insertion, a minimum of 12 hours shall be allowed for the liner pipe to reach equilibrium with the sewer temperature and to allow the liner pipe to stress relieve itself. The polyethylene liner pipe should protrude at least 6 inches into the manhole where it terminates. After the 12 -hour equilibrium period, the annular space between the original pipe and the liner shall be pressure grouted. Said grouting must be from the bottom up to prevent air pockets from forming. Also the grout must be recommended for underwater application and have elastomeric properties. Products used shall be approved by the engineer. The liner shall not be displaced when the annular space is being filled. Spacers, inflatable plugs or other methods approved by the Engineer must be used to prevent displacement. The length of fused pipe that can be pulled will vary depending on field conditions, the ease of access to the area, and the working space available. 46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES The Contractor shall be solely responsible to confirm all pipe sizes prior to ordering, fusing and installation of the liner. 46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED After the liner has been pulled into place, allowed to recover and sealed at the manholes, pipe connections okayed by the engineer shall be reconnected to the liner pipe. SectionlV.doc Page 93 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Pipe connections shall be connected by the use of a pre- fabricated polyethylene saddle. A neoprene gasket shall be installed between the saddle and the liner pipe so that a complete water seal is accomplished when the saddle is placed on the liner pipe and secured with stainless steel bands. 46.4.7 BACKFILLING All excavations shall be backfilled using on site materials or as specified by the engineer. Cost for backfilling of access shafts and underdrain connections shall be including in the unit price bid for sliplining and reconnection of service laterals. Before any excavation is done for any purpose, it will be the responsibility of the contractor to contact the various utility companies and to determine the locations of their facilities. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to provide adequate protection for utility facilities. Any temporary construction right of way and /or storage areas will be arranged for by the contractor. 46.4.8 POINT REPAIR The engineer or his representative will determine if a point repair is necessary only after it has been demonstrated that a liner pipe cannot be pulled through the existing pipe. Payment will be made for each repair. The contractor will be expected to remove the obstruction and clear the pipe. If removing the top of the existing pipe will accomplish the removal of the obstruction, the bottom of the existing pipe should remain in place to form a cradle for the liner. 46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS All materials not used in the backfilling operation shall be disposed of off site by the contractor. Finish grading shall be required. In locations other than street right -of -ways, the surface shall be graded smooth and sodded with the same kind of grass as the existing lawn. Excavation points in street right -of -ways shall be repaired as specified by the engineer. 47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE 47.1 SCOPE This specification designates general requirements for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic (spiral wound) pipe with integral wall bell and spigot joints for the conveyance of storm water. 47.2 MATERIALS All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with specification for "Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large Diameter Ribbed Gravity Storm Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter ". The pipe and fittings shall be made of PVC plastic. 47.3 PIPE The bell shall consist of an integral wall section. The solid cross section fiber ring shall be factory assembled on the spigot. Sizes and dimensions shall be as shown in this specification. SectionlV.doc Page 94 of 128 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications Standard laying lengths shall be 13 ft. + 1 inch. At manufacturer's option, random lengths of not more than 15% of total footage may be shipped in lieu of standard lengths. 47.4 JOINING SYSTEM Joints shall be either an integral bell gasketed joint. When the joint is assembled according to manufactures recommendation it will prevent misalignment of adjacent pipes and form a silt tight joint. 47.5 FITTINGS All fittings and accessories shall be as manufactured and furnished by the pipe supplier or approved equal and have bell and /or spigot configurations compatible with that of the pipe. 48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS 48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT Pressure injected grout shall be of cement and water and shall be proportioned generally in the ratio of 1.5 (one and one half) cubic foot (one and one half bags) of cement to 1 (one) cubic foot (7.50 gal.) of water. This mix shall be varied as the grouting proceeds as is necessary to provide penetration in the operator's judgment. Cement shall be Portland Cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, latest edition serial designation C150 for Portland Cement, Type I. Portland Cement shall weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot. Water used in the grout shall be fresh, clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, vegetable, sewage and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per gallon. Grout pump shall be of the positive displacement type and shall be capable of producing adequate pressure to penetrate the area. All pressure grouting will be at the direction of the Engineer. 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE Guniting shall conform to all requirements of "Specifications for Materials, Proportioning, and Application of Shotcrete (ACI 506.2 77)" published by the American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, except as modified by those specifications. Steel reinforcement shall be incorporated in the Gunite as required and shall be furnished, bent, set and placed in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. The purpose of this specification is to obtain a dense and durable concrete having the specified strength. 48.3 COMPOSITION Gunite shall be composed of Portland Cement, aggregate and water so proportioned as to produce a concrete suitable for pneumatic application. SectionlV.doc Page 95 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS Concrete ingredients shall be selected, proportioned in such a manner as will produce concrete which will be extremely strong, dense and resistant to weathering, and abrasion. Concrete shall have a minimum 28 -day strength of 4,000 psi. 48.5 MATERIALS Portland Cement: Cement shall be Portland cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C150 for Portland Cement, Type I. A bag of cement shall be deemed to weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot. Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall be natural siliceous sand consisting of hard, clean, strong, durable and uncoated particles, conforming to the requirements of American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C33 for Concrete Aggregates. Fine aggregate shall not contain less than 3% nor more than 6% of moisture. Fine aggregate shall be evenly graded from fine to coarse and shall be within the following limits: Passing No. 3/8 Sieve 100% Passing No. 4 Sieve 95% to 100% Passing No. 8 Sieve 80% to 100% Passing No. 16 Sieve 50% to 85% Passing No. 30 Sieve 25% to 60% Passing No. 50 Sieve 10% to 30% Passing No. 100 Sieve 2% to 10% 48.6 WATER Water used in mixing, at the nozzle shall be fresh, clean, and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, vegetable, sewage, and /or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per gallon. 48.7 REINFORCEMENT Steel mesh reinforcement shall be electrically welded, cold drawn, mild steel fabric conforming to the latest requirements of ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 185 for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. Mesh can be fabricated from cold drawn steel wire conforming to the requirements of the latest ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 82 and sized as shown on Plans Page 7 of 7. 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS Cement shall be stored with adequate provisions for the prevention of absorption of moisture. It shall be stored in a manner that will permit easy access for inspection and identification of each shipment. Aggregate shall be stockpiled at points selected to provide maximum drainage and to prevent the inclusion of any foreign material during rehandling. SectionlV.doc Page 96 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION Unsound materials of construction and all coated, scaly, or unsound concrete in manholes and inlets shall be removed by chipping with pneumatic hammers and chisels to sound surface, all cracks and cavities shall be chipped to such formation that their sides form approximately a 45 degree angle to the exposed surface for at least one (1) inch in depth. All areas to receive pneumatic concrete shall be cleaned by flushing or scouring with water and compressed air jets to assure removal of all loose particles. All areas of existing surfaces that do not require chipping shall be given a wet sandblasting with the gunite equipment and the air pressure at the cement gun shall not be less than 50 psi. Surface preparation of existing metal surface of a corrugated pipe shall be lightly sandblasted to remove loose material. All sandblasted areas shall then be cleaned by an air /water blast to remove all particles from the cleaning operation. To insure perfect bond, the newly sandblasted surface shall be thoroughly moistened with water prior to application of gunite. In no instance shall gunite be applied in an area where free running water exists. 48.10 PROPORTIONING Prior to start of guniting the Contractor shall submit to the Owner the recommended mix as a ratio of cement to aggregate. Recommended mix shall be on the basis of test data from prior experience. Provided data submitted is adequate no further testing of recommended mix will be required. If required, the Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary to control the actual amounts of all materials entering into the concrete. The types of equipment and methods used for measuring materials shall be subject to approval. 48.11 MIXING Gunite shall be thoroughly mixed by machine and then passed through a sieve to remove all large particles before placing in hopper of the cement gun. The mixture shall not be permitted to become damp. Each batch should be entirely discharged before recharging is begun. The mixer should be cleaned thoroughly enough to remove all adherent materials from the mixing vanes and from the drum at regular intervals. Water in any amount shall not be added to the mix before it enters the cement gun. Quantities of water shall be controlled by a valve at the nozzle of the gun. Water content shall be adjusted as required for proper placement, but shall in no case exceed four gallons of water per sack of cement, including the water contained in the aggregate. Remixing or tempering shall not be permitted. Mixed material that has stood 45 minutes without being used shall be discarded. Rebound materials shall not be reused. 48.12 APPLICATION Gunite shall not be placed on a frozen surface nor during freezing weather. Gunite shall not be placed when it is anticipated that the temperature during the following 24 hours will drop below 32 degrees, Fahrenheit. Sequence of application may be from bottom to top or vice versa if rebound is properly removed. Corners shall be filled first. "Shooting" shall be from an angle as near perpendicular to the SectionIV.doc Page 97 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications surface as practicable, with the nozzle held approximately 3 feet from the work (except in confined control). If the flow of material at the nozzle is not uniform and slugs, sand spots, or wet sloughs result, the nozzleman shall direct the nozzle away from the work until the faulty conditions are corrected. Such defects shall be replaced as the work progresses. Guniting shall be suspended if: 1. Air velocity separates the cement from the sand at the nozzle. 2. Temperature approaches freezing and the newly placed gunite cannot be protected. Gunite shall be applied in one or more layers to such total thickness as required to restore the area as detailed over the original lines of the adjoining surface, unless otherwise specified. All cavities, depressions, washouts and similar failures shall be rebuilt to original lines by use of gunite reinforced with wire mesh. Where the cavity exceeds 4 inches in depth a layer of mesh shall be used for each 3 inches of depth of gunite. In no case shall wire mesh be placed behind existing reinforcement. The time interval between successive layers in sloping vertical or overhanging work must be sufficient to allow initial but not final set to develop. At the time the initial set is developing, the surface shall be cleaned to remove the thin film of laitance in order to provide a perfect bond with succeeding applications. 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Construction joints or day's work joints shall be sloped off to a thin, clean, regular edge, preferably at a 45- degree slope. Before placing the adjoining work, the slope portion and adjacent gunite shall be thoroughly cleaned as necessary, then moistened and scoured with an air j et. 48.14 SURFACE FINISH Nozzleman shall bring the gunite to an even plane and to well formed corners by working up to ground wires or other guides, using lower placing velocity than normal. After the body coat has been placed, the surface shall be trued with a thin edge screed to remove high areas and expose low areas. Low areas shall be properly filled with concrete to insure a true, flat surface. After the concrete surface has been trued, the entire surface shall be given a flashcoat finish except where a special type finish is specified on the drawings. 48.15 CURING Curing shall be in accordance with either paragraph 3.7.1(d) or paragraph 3.7.5. of ACI 506.2 77 depending upon atmospheric condition. 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION During progress of the work, where appearance is important, adjacent areas or grounds which may be permanently discolored, stained, or otherwise damaged by dust and rebound, shall be adequately protected sensitive areas, when contacted, shall be cleaned by early scraping, brushing or washing, as the surroundings permit. SectionlV.doc Page 98 of 128 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 48.17 INSPECTION Because of the importance of workmanship affecting the quality of the gunite, continual inspection during placing shall be maintained. Any imperfections discovered shall be cut out and replaced with sound material. 48.18 EQUIPMENT Cement Gun: The mixing and delivering equipment shall be either the vertical double chamber type or rotary type. The upper chamber of the double chamber type shall receive and pressurize the dry mix and deliver it to the lower chamber. The lower chamber shall force the pressurized mix into the delivery hose by means of a feed wheel. The type of feeder utilized should be of sufficient capacity that the lower chamber may continuously furnish all required material to the delivery hose while the upper chamber receives the recharge. The rotary type cement gun shall have an enlarged hopper to feed material into a rotating multiported cylinder. Material shall fall by gravity into a port which shall then be rotated to a position in which the material is expelled by air into a moving stream of air. All equipment must be kept in good repair. The interior of drums, feed gearing and valves shall be cleaned as often as necessary (at least once every 8 hour shift) to prevent material from caking on critical parts. Nozzle: Nozzle shall be the premixing type with perforated water feed ring inside the nozzle. The maximum length of material hose for the application of gunite shall be approximately 150 feet although it shall be permissible to use as much as 800 feet of material hose if the supply air pressure measured at the cement gun is increased to maintain proper velocity. The following table gives requirements for compressor size, hose size and air pressure using 150 feet of material hose: Comp. Cap (cfm) Max. Hose Dia. (In.) Max. Size Nozzle (In.) Min. Air Press. (psi) 365 1 5/8 1 5/8 60 600 2 2 80 750 2 1/2 2 1/2 90 For each 25 feet of material hose used in excess of 150 feet, the required air pressure shall be increased by 5 psi. Air Compressor: Any standard type of compressor shall be satisfactory if it is of sufficient capacity to provide, without interruption, the pressures and volume of air necessary for the longest hose delivery. The air compressor capacity determinations shall include allowances made for the air consumed in blowing rebound, cleaning, reinforcing and for incidental uses. Compressor equipment shall be of such capacity so as to insure air pressures at the special mixer capable of producing the required material velocities. Water Supply: The water pressure at the discharge nozzle should be sufficiently greater than the operating air pressure to assure the water is intimately mixed with the other materials. If the line water pressure is inadequate, a water pump or pressurized tank shall be introduced into the line. The water pressure shall be uniformly steady (nonpulsating). SectionlV.doc Page 99 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made -in -place liner systems used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. In addition to these specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work. Purpose of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion protection, repair voids and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular system the Contractor will submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All OSHA regulations shall be met. 49.2 PAYMENT Payment for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the installed liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the pay item per linear foot of liner: Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal; Excavation, including necessary pavement removal; Shoring and /or dewatering; Structural fill; Backfill and compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe extensions and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and grass or shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 49.3.1 MATERIALS 49.3.1.1 LINERS Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound vertical wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The contractor shall measure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet all requirements of ASTM D 3753. 49.3.1.2 MORTAR Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two and three parts clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No. 8 sieve. 49.3.1.3 GROUTING Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four bags of Portland Cement Type II per cubic yard of clean, well graded sand. SectionlV.doc Page 100 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the removal of the manhole ring and corbel section. Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls. Care is to be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole. Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner. If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar. Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts. Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout. Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the outside of the liner and the inside wall of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertically as possible. Pour six inches of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular void to insure an adequate bottom seal. Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V.C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to seal the area around the manhole liner and piping. Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with grout. Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure. Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed. Observe watertightness and repair any visible leakage. Backfill around the new liner and compact the backfll. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing sod. Where manholes fall in paved areas, disturbed base shall be replaced twice the original thickness and compacted in 8" layers. Asphalt shall be replaced with 1 1/2" of Pinellas County Type II surface. 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS -2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM This specification shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong Seal MS 2 product. Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory training. The applicator /contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying the Strong Seal MS 2 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural cementitious liner of a minimum 1/2" thickness using a machine specially designed for the application. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with the following specifications which includes: 1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application. 2. The removal of any loose and unsound material. SectionlV.doc Page 101 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 3. The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a 2 coat application. 49.4.1 MATERIALS 49.4.1.1 PATCHING MIX Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C -109) 15 min., 200 psi 6 hrs., 1,400 psi 2. Shrinkage (ASTM C -596) 28 days, 150 psi 3. Bond (ASTM C -952) 28 days, 150 psi 4. Cement Sulfate resistant 5. Density, when applied 105 +/- 5 pcf 49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacture's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C -109) - 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs. 2. Bond (ASTM C -952) - 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs. 49.6 GROUTING MIX Strong -Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according to the manufacture's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable, and have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 250 psi and a 1 day strength of 50 psi. 49.7 LINER MIX Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole surfaces and shall have the following minimum requirements at 28 days: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C 109) 3,000 psi 2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 300 psi 3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 600 psi 4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 0% at 90% R.H. 5. Bond (ASTM C 952) 130 psi 6. Density, when applied 105 + pcf Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at the Job site. Bag weight shall be 50 51 pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic foot. Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be 1/2" to 5/8" long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the un mixed state, have a lead content not greater than two percent (2 %) by weight. SectionlV.doc Page 102 of 128 11/26/2013 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according to the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide conditions. Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site. Bag weight shall be 50 -51 pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 56 pounds per cubic foot. Cement content must be 65 % -75% of total weight of bag. One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 108 pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of .67 cubic foot of volume. Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than 1/2" in length nor greater than 5/8" in height. Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for any heavy metal. Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process. A two coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat rough troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be spray applied to assure minimum 1/2" thickness after troweling or brush finishing to a relatively smooth finish. 49.8 WATER Shall be clean and potable. 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or recommendation from the manufacturer. 49.10 EQUIPMENT A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles with discharge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered. Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power the hydraulic system and air compressor. 49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 49.11.1 PREPARATION 1. Place boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines and to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole. 2. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and SectionlV.doc Page 103 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and /or scraper. Fill any large voids with quick setting patching mix. 3. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Some leaks may require weep holes to localize the infiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with the quick setting mix prior to the final liner application. When severe infiltration is present, drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required. 4. Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations. 5. After all preparation has been completed, remove all loose material. 49.11.2 MIXING For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using the Spray Mate Model 35C or 35D equipment for 30 seconds to a minute after all materials have been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare another batch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without interruption until each application is complete. 49.11.3 SPRAYING The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all cracks, crevices and voids are filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light troweling. The light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the bond. Not before the first application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface sheen which could be 15 minutes to 1 hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second application made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of 1/2 inch. The surface is then troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to the finished coat to remove trowel marks. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than 24 hours have elapsed between applications. The wooden bench covers shall be removed and the bench is sprayed such that a gradual slope is produces from the walls to the invert with the thickness at the edge of the invert being no less than 1/2 inch. The wall bench intersection shall be rounded to a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The final application shall have a minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow. 49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING At some point during the application, at least four (4) 2 inch cubes may be prepared each day or from every 50 bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance with the Owner's or Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C 109. 49.11.5 CURING Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been completed. SectionlV.doc Page 104 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 49.12.1 SCOPE Materials and application procedures for manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of: 1. Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume infiltration 2. Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofing), where required, as follows: a. Hydrophilic foam- injected through wall of manhole to fill voids and/or b. Hydrophilic gel- injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks 3. Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing) 4. Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of 1/2 inch 5. Epoxy coating, minimum of 30 dry mils 49.12.2 MATERIALS 49.12.2.1 REPAIRING CEMENT A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shall have the following properties: Set Time Tensile Strength ASTM C 307 Compressive Strength ASTM -C 109 1 -3 minutes 1 day 510 psi 3 days 745 psi 28 days 855 psi 1 day 3,125 psi 7 days 7,808 psi 28 days 9,543 psi SectionlV.doc Page 105 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Flexural Strength ASTM C 78 1 day 410 psi 3 days 855 psi 28 days 1,245 psi 49.12.2.2 HYDROPHILIC GROUTING Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shall pressure inject either one or both of the following materials: 1. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks in and voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows: Tensile Strength 380 psi ASTM D 3574 -86 Elongation 400% ASTM D 3574 -86 Bonding Strength 250 -300 psi 2. A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole -to prevent seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior of manhole. Physical properties are as follows: Density 8.75 -9.17 lbs /gal ASTM D -3574 Tensile Strength 150 psi ASTM D- 412 Elongation 250% ASTM D -3574 Shrinkage Less than 4% ASTM D -1042 Toxicity Non Toxic 49.12.2.3 WATERPROOFING A waterproofing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three components -two powders and a special liquid) react with moisture and the constituents of the substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will continue for approximately six months. Upon completion the color will be light grey. Physical properties are as follows: Slant /Shear bond Strength to Calcium Aluminate Cement ASTM (to be given) 1,200 1,800 psi Tensile Strength (7 day cure) ASTM C 190 380 psi (2.62 MPa) 325 psi (2.24 MPa) Permeability 8.1x10 llcm/sec to (3 day cure) 7.6x10 cm/sec CRD 48 55 at 100% RH at50 %RH 49.12.2.4 CEMENT LINING A self bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and provide corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (before adding fibers) shall have the following properties: Calcium Aluminate Cement 12 Hrs 24 Hrs 7 Days 28 Days SectionlV.doc Page 106 of 128 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications Astm C 495 Compressive Strength, Psi 7000 11000 12000 13000 Astm C 293 Flexural Strength, Psi 1000 1500 1800 2000 Astm C 596 Shrinkage At 90% Humidity -- <0.04 <0.06 <0.08 Astm C 666 Freeze -Thaw Aft 300 Cycle No Damage Astm C 990 Pull - Out Strength 200 - 230 Psi Tensile Astm C 457 Air Void Content (7 Days) 3% Astm C 497 Porosity/Adsorption Test 4 - 5% Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSI after 24 Hrs moist curing at 68 F. The calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which comply with ASTM C 1116 and ASTM C 1018, added at the rate of one pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture shall be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch, but no greater than two inches. It will have a dark grey color. 49.12.2.5 EPDXY COATING A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of 30 dry mils. This epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface, including excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be 100% solids, can be applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes. Its uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the following properties at 75 degrees F: Mixing Ratio (Parts A:B), by volume 1:1 Color (other colors available on request) Light Gray Pot Life, hrs 1 Tensile Strength, psi, min 2,000 Tensile Elongation, % 10 —20 Water Extractable Substances, mg. /sq. in., max 5 Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi 1,800 49.12.2.6 CHEMICAL RESISTANCE Alcohols, Trichloroethylene, Nitric Acid (3 %), Jet Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10 %), MEK, Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3 %), Gasoline, Corn Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil, Hydrochloric Acid (3 %), and many others. 49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 49.12.3.1 PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW Work shall proceed as follows: 1. Remove rungs (steps), if desired by client. 2. Clean manhole and remove debris. a. Plug lines and/or screen out displaced debris. b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease. c. Hydroblast and /or sand blast structure. SectionlV.doc Page 107 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications d. Remove debris from work area. 3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement. (Note: Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as required by client. 4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration. 5. Apply cementitious /crystallization waterproofing agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as needed. 6. Spray and /or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces. 7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces. NOTE: Steps 1 -5 shall be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step 6) shall require a cure time of at least twenty -four hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step 7) to cement lining. 49.12.3.2 PREPARATION An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the rungs shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and /or sand blasted to remove any loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from entering lines and other areas by either plugging the lines ( where feasible) or inserting protective screens. 49.12.3.3 STRUCTURAL REPAIR Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill cracks and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying waterproofing/crystallization. 49.12.3.4 INFILTRATION CONTROL Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam. 1. Drill 5/8" holes through active leaking surface. 2. Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Inject material until water flow stops. 4. Remove fittings (if necessary). 49.12.3.5 WATERPROOFING /CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS 1. Apply a slurry coat of powder #1 to moist wall using a stiff brush, forming an undercoat. 2. Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand. 3. Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal forming process. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks. 5. Apply powder #1 as an overcoat. 6. Allow one (1) hour to cure before applying cement lining. SectionlV.doc Page 108 of 128 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 49.12.3.6 CEMENT LINING 1. Dampen surface. 2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application. 3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (and no more than 2 inches) has been achieved. 4. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole. 5. Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish. 6. Allow for a 24 -hour cure time prior to epoxy coating. NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing times. 49.12.3.7 EPDXY COATING Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a thickness of at least 30 mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six (6) hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours. 49.12.3.8 CLEAN UP The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area. 49.12.3.9 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 49.12.3.10 WARRANTY All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years, provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used. 50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 23 — PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS. 51 IN -LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM 51.1 SCOPE 1. These specifications pertain to the application of the Plexiflor Color Finish System over recreational areas intended for In -Line Skating activities. The materials specified in the SectionIV.doc Page 109 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications site plans shall be of colors indicated and for application over the Plexipave Acrylic Latex System. 2. The work shall consist of suitable cleaning and preparation of the surface to assure a satisfactory bond of the system to the existing surface. 3. All coverage rates are calculated prior to dilution. 4. Plexiflor In -line Skating Surfacing System • 1 Coat of Acrylic Resurfacer • 2 Coats of Fortified Plexipave • 2 Coats of Plexiflor • Plexicolor Line Paint 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS 51.2.1 ASPHALT Allow new asphalt to cure a minimum of 6 months. The surface must be checked for birdbaths, cracks and other irregularities and repaired with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification Section 10.14. (Surfacing prior to six months may make the asphalt subject to indentation). 51.2.2 CONCRETE Concrete shall have a wood float or broom finish. DO NOT PROVIDE STEEL TROWEL FINISH. DO NOT USE CURING AGENTS OR CONCRETE HARDENERS. Allow the concrete to cure a minimum of 30 days. Acid Etch the entire surface with Concrete Preparer according to California Specification Section 10.13. Check surface for birdbaths, cracks and other irregularities and repair with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification Section 10.14. 51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX Court Patch Binder Mix: 100 Lbs. #80 -100 Mesh Silica Sand (dry) 3 gallons Couth Patch Binder 1 to 2 gallons Portland Cement. 51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT 1. Application of the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix shall be applied to the clean, dry, level surfaces to receive the Plexiflor Surfacing System. The mix shall be applied according to California Specification Section 10.8 using the following mix: Acrylic Resurfacer Water (Clean and Potable) Sand (60 -80 mesh) Liquid Yield 55 gallons 20 -40 gallons 600 -900 pounds 112 -138 gallons 2. Over asphalt surfaces, apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two coats (depending on surface porosity) at a rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat. 3. Non - coated concrete surfaces must be neutralized with concrete preparer and primed with California Ti -Coat according to Specification Section 10.17. The Acrylic Resurfacer Mix SectionlV.doc Page 110 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications must be applied within 3 hours of the TiCoat application while the primer is dry but still tacky to the touch. Apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two applications at a rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat. 51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE After the filler coat application has dried, apply two coats of Fortified Plexipave at an undiluted rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat using the following mix: Plexipave Color Base 30 gallons Plexichrome 20 gallons Water 20 gallons 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION 1. Plexiflor is factory premixed and ready to use from the container. The material may be diluted with one (1 ) part water to six (6) parts Plexiflor to improve flowability and provide uniform application. 2. Apply two coats of Plexiflor at a rate of .04 -.05 gallons per square yard per coat. 3. Plexiflor is applied (in a similar manner to Plexipave) in windrows on the surface with sufficient quantity to cover as the squeegee is pulled over the surface. Apply only light pressure to the squeegee. Do not allow ridges to form between passes of the squeegee. Ridges existing after material dries should require corrective action. 4. Plexiflor and its preliminary coatings should be allowed to thoroughly dry prior to application of subsequent coats. 51.6 PLAYING LINES Four hours minimum after completion of the color resurfacing, playing lines shall be accurately located, marked and painted with Plexicolor Line Paint as specified by The National In -Line Hockey Association. 51.7 GENERAL 1. The contractor shall remove all containers, surplus materials and debris upon completion of work leaving the site in a clean, orderly condition that is acceptable to the owner. Gates shall be secured and all containers shall be disposed of in accordance with Local, State and Federal regulations. 2. Materials specified for the Plexiflor System shall tee delivered to the site in sealed, property labeled arums with California Products Corporation labels that are stenciled with the proper batch code numbers. Products packaged or labeled in any other manner will not be accepted. Mixing with clear, fresh water shall only be done at the job site. Coverage rates are based upon material prior to mixing with water as specified. 51.8 LIMITATIONS 1. Do not apply if surface temperature is less than 50 °F or more than 1 40 °F. 2. Do not apply when rain or high humidity is imminent. 3. Do not apply when surface is damp or has standing water. SectionlV.doc Page 111 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 4. Plexiflor will not hide surface imperfections of previous coatings. 5. Keep from freezing. Do not store in the hot sun. 6. Keep containers tightly closed when not in use. 7. Plexiflor will not prevent substrate cracks from occurring. 8. Plexiflor will mark slightly from normal use of some In -line Skates. 9. Coefficient of friction = 0.78 10. Coating Application Drying Time: 30 minutes to 1 hour at 70 °F with 60% relative humidity. 11. Keep court clean. Excess dirt or foreign material can cause the surface to be slippery. In -Line hockey is a physical sport. Always wear NIHA recommended protective gear. 52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 22 - RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION. 53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 53.1 MATERIAL 53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL 53.1.1.1 PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES Gabion & mattress basket units shall be of non - raveling construction and fabricated from a double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the appearance of a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of 0.1063 inches (approx. US gauge 12). All wire used in the fabrication of the gabion shall comply with or exceed Federal Specifications QQ- W -461H, possess a maximum tensile strength of 70,000 p.s.i. with a Finish 5, Class 3 zinc coating in accordance with the current ASTM A -641. The weight of zinc coating shall be determined by ASTM A -90. The grade of zinc used for coating shall be High Grade or Special High Grade, as prescribed in ASTM B -6, Table 1. Uniformity of coating shall equal or exceed four 1- minute dips by the Preece test, as determined by ASTM A -239. The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC coated wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3 1/4 inches by 4 1/2 inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire core, 0.1338 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 10), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.173 inches. Lacing and connecting wire shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 13 1/2), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of alternate wire fasteners shall be permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener produces a four (4) wire selvedge joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining in a locked and closed condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge wires. Tiger -Tite SectionlV.doc Page 112 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Interlocking Fasteners are an approved alternate joint material. The Interlocking Wire Fastener shall meet stainless steel material specification ASTM A -313, Type 302, Class 1, or equal. All of the above wire diameters are subject to tolerance limit of 0.004 inches in accordance with ASTM A -641. 53.1.1.2 PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not less than 0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist deleterious effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show any material difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to attack from acids and resistant to abrasion. 1. Specific Gravity: a. According to ASTM D -2287 and ASTM D- 792; in the range of 1.30 to 1.34. 2. Tensile Strength: a. According to ASTM D -142; not less than 2980 psi. 3. Modulus of Elasticity: a. According to ASTM D -412; not less than 2700 psi at 100% strain. 4. Resistance to Abrasion: a. According to ASTM 1242; weight loss <12% (Method B). 5. Brittleness Temperature: a. According to ASTM D -746, Procedure A; shall be at least 8.3 degrees centigrade below the minimum temperature at which the gabions will be handled or placed but not lower than -9.4 degrees centigrade. 6. Hardness: a. According to ASTM D -2240; shall be between 50 and 60 Shore D when tested. 7. Creeping Corrosion: a. Maximum corrosion penetration to the wire core from a square cut end section shall not be more than 25mm when the specimen has been immersed for 2000 hours in a 50% SOLUTION HC1 (hydrochloric acid 12 Be). 53.1.1.3 ACCELERATED AGING TESTS Variation of the initial properties will be allowed, as specified below, when the specimen is submitted to the following Accelerated Aging Tests: 1. Salt Spray Test: a. According to ASTM B -117 b. Period of test = 3000 hours. 2. Exposure to ultraviolet rays: a. According to ASTM D -1499 and ASTM G -23 (Apparatus Type E). Period of test = 3000 hours at 63 degrees centigrade. SectionlV.doc Page 113 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 3. Exposure to high temperature: a. Testing period: 240 hours at 105 degrees centigrade, when tested in accordance with ASTM D- 1203 and ASTM D -2287. 53.1.1.4 PROPERTIES AFTER AGING TESTS After the above Accelerated Aging Tests have been performed, the PVC compound shall exhibit the following properties: 1. Appearance: a. The vinyl coating shall not crack, blister or split and shall not show any remarkable change in color. 2. Specific Gravity: a. Shall not show change higher than 6% of its initial value. 3. Durometer Hardness: a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value. 4. Tensile Strength: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 5. Elongation: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 6. Modulus of Elasticity: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 7. Resistance to Abrasion: a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value. 8. Brittleness Temperature: a. Cold Bend Temperature - Shall not be lower than -20 degrees centigrade. b. Cold Flex Temperature - Shall not be higher than +18 degrees centigrade. 53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL: The filler stone shall be limestone from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is started. Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or supplier for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific gravity of 2.3 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure. The individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be retained in the gabion or mattress baskets. The stone shall meet the following physical requirements: • Absorption, maximum 5% • Los Angeles Abrasion (FM 10T096), maximum loss 45% • Soundness (Sodium Sulphate), (FM 1- T104), maximum loss 12% SectionlV.doc Page 114 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications • Flat and elongated pieces, materials with least dimension less than one third of greatest dimension shall not exceed 5% by weight. All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening. 53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE Mattress wire shall conform to the same specifications as gabions except as follows: 1. The nominal diameter of the wire used in the fabrication of the netting shall be 0.0866 inches minimum, subject to diameter tolerance in accordance with the current ASTM A 641, Table 3. 2. All wire shall be galvanized according to ASTM A 641, Table 1. The minimum weight of the zinc coating shall be 0.70 ozs. /sq. ft. for the 0.0866 inch wire used for mesh and lacing and 0.80 ozs. /sq. ft. for the 0.106 wire used for selvedge. 3. Adhesion of the zinc coating to the wire shall be capable of being wrapped in a close helix at a rate not exceeding 15 turns per minute around a cylindrical steel mandrel having a diameter 3 times the nominal wire diameter being tested. After the wrap test is completed, the wire shall not exhibit any cracking or flaking of the zinc coating to such an extent that any zinc can be removed by rubbing with bare fingers. 53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC Fabric shall conform to FDOT Standard Index 199, Type D -2, and FDOT Standard Specifications, 1996 edition, Section 985. 53.2 PERFORMANCE Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such a manner that the sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into rectangular baskets of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a manner that the strength and flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the mesh. Where the length of the gabion and mattress exceeds one and one -half its horizontal width, they shall be equally divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no additional tying is required at this juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not ravel. This is defined as the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a section of mesh is cut. Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single and double loops are alternated. A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical reinforced edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled line of gabions shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back. SectionlV.doc Page 115 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended. Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one two third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top. Filler stone shall not be dropped more than 12" into the gabions and mattresses. Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or cut the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against movement. Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the manufacturer's recommendations or five days, whichever is less. 54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 54.1 SCOPE To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of plant beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems; ornamental pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces at designated areas. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance activities and reporting irregularities in the work zone. The Contractor(s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the landscaped street medians including: • Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traffic; • Trash and debris removal from the job site; • Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces; • Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms; • Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted); • Irrigation service and repair; • Mulch replacement; • Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the • Reporting of irregularities at the job site. 54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract between the hours of 6:30 a.m. and 7:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed holidays. The City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract maintenance at other hours. All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, that is the cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc., be completed before leaving the job site. SectionlV.doc Page 116 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 54.3 WORK METHODS 54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service). Any variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in writing by an authorized representative of the other party. 54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT The contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated location: 54.4 LITTER Remove trash and debris from the area to be maintained. Proper disposal of collected trash and debris is a requirement of the contractor. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes, tornadoes, vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The contractor should report such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the extraordinary cleanup from the contractor would be considered. 54.5 VISUAL CHECK The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within 24 hours after providing the service. 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature size of the particular specie. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants in a neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope. Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following flower formation, according to the following specifications: 54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.) Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to remain in order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded heads that are encountered in the pruning process; remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation; such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed on palms. 54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the contractor. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon completion. SectionlV.doc Page 117 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL Proper and safe work zones in vehicular traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the contractor, according to the attached Maintenance of Traffic specifications. 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park users are present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high pedestrian use areas. 54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20 -6 -12 sulfur coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in mid - February, early June, and mid - September, for the first two years. Fertilizer types and amounts will change with requirements of maturing landscape materials. 54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable. Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by contractor at his/her expense. 54.13 MULCH CONDITION Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil moisture, usually 3 inches. 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR Should be performed at each visit to assure the systems proper operation and timing. Drip tubing should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and operating schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled system running time. All repairs which will be charged at $20.00 or more must be approved in advance by the city. Minor repairs, less than $20.00, should be billed to the City in addition to the monthly maintenance fee. 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be replaced by the contractor at the contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on City properties. 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION Apply three pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across the root zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February. SectionlV.doc Page 118 of 128 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION The City will provide a freeze /frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze /frost sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility (yet to be determined). Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the sensitive plants, securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's directions. The City will furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City will notify the Contractor one (1) day or twenty -four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to protect plant material. After uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it to the designated City facility. Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or remain in place as directed by the City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11:00 a.m. about removing the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may cancel the freeze protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day (5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on -site work at the contracted rate per man -hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for the installation and removal of the covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate per employee required. The City and contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations with weather conditions. Should freeze /frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the City. 54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE This location is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within 7 working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six and no further than ten calendar days apart. 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK Within 24 hours of completing work the contractor shall notify the supervisor assigned to monitor the contract either in person or by phone of said completion. It is acceptable to leave a phone message. However, to make certain the message is received, it is advisable to call between 6:30 a.m. — 7:30 a.m. or 2:30 p.m. — 3:00 p.m. 54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be given 48 hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been completed successfully then the City will pay for services billed. 54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1. This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a six month period on plants and 12 month warranty on palms. Landscape installer will coordinate irrigation operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the landscape materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm heads /fronds as he feels appropriate. 2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates. SectionlV.doc Page 119 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 3. All maintenance shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with trade practices and standards which prevail in the industry. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature caused by the Contractor or his/her employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing of the specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. The City shall, at its option, invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs the next regular payment to the Contractor. 5. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences, and shall schedule to perform the required maintenance to the location as soon as the pertaining circumstances are relieved. 55 MILLING OPERATIONS 55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shall be performed in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all milling. 55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 1. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the contractor is responsible to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment. 2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven days from the time it was milled, unless otherwise noted in the contract documents. 3. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of the vacuum or the mechanical type, that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre- wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in addition to the roadways before leaving the job site. 4. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the concrete surface. 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line and /or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this removal shall be included in the bid item for milling. 6. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling. 7. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications for S -Type resurfacing projects or Section 330 (latest edition) for superpave resurfacing projects. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. SectionlV.doc Page 120 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 8. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to said base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item for milling. 9. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after the milling operation is complete. 55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS All surplus existing materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the property of the City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the Public Services Division at (727) 562 -4950 to schedule delivery of material. 55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the property of the Contractor. The Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City. 55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES All utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by their owners at the owner's expense. The Contractor shall arrange his schedule to allow utility owners the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours notice per State Statute). All utility adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing operations. 55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Article 23.7 of the City's Technical Specifications. 55.7 TYPES OF MILLING There are two types of milling used by the City: A. Wedge — This will consist of milling a six foot wide strip along the curb line of the pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height and pavement cross section. B. Full Width — This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line /edge of pavement to curb line /edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry shall remain unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer. SectionlV.doc Page 121 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to restore and /or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend approximately 50 to 100 feet in both directions from the low point of the existing Swale. 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted. 55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of radius returns and intersections, prime and /or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals necessary to complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications. 56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures, appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles, posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction. Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the Contractor shall take ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off -site in accordance with all Local, State and Federal Requirements. 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer. 56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. 57 RIPRAP The work included in this specification includes the construction of either sand - cement or rubble riprap as shown on the plans. The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement for riprap shall be the volume of sand used in cubic yards for sand - cement, or the dry weight in tons for rubble. SectionlV.doc Page 122 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for sand - cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling, equipment, excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand- cement and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. No payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on -site is used as rubble riprap. 58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY This article applies to all City projects located at one of the City's Wastewater Treatment Plants (WWTP) or Potable Water Reservoirs. 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL The Contractor shall be aware that hazardous materials are used at the WWTP's and the water reservoirs. These may include sodium hypochlorite, gaseous chlorine, sulfur dioxide and ammonia. Potential safety hazards associated with these substances include: • An accidental spill or release can impair respiratory functions and result in severe burns to the skin and eyes. At the pre - construction conference, the contractor will be provided with a copy of the City of Clearwater Public Utilities Department Emergency Response Plan, and a copy of the applicable Material Safety Data Sheets. All employees of the contractor and sub - contractor assigned to this job shall be familiar with the content of these documents. 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING Prior to issuance of a notice to proceed, the contractor must submit documentation regarding employee safety training relating to the items in Section A above. The documentation must include: • Verification that all employees assigned to this job have received and understood training in the proper work practices necessary to safely perform the job while working around gaseous chlorine and sulfur dioxide gas. • The date of the training, and • The means used to verify that the employee understood the training. 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS All traffic signal work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications (Sections 603 through 699), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment, materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit, signal and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power service assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors, SectionlV.doc Page 123 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications pedestrian detectors, traffic controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, removal of existing traffic signal equipment, and internally illuminated signs. All traffic signal installations shall be mast arms and conform to the requirements of FDOT's Mast Arm Assembly standard, and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report, shall also be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm colors shall be determined and approved by the City prior to ordering from the manufacturer. All traffic signal indicators for vehicles and pedestrians shall be LED's and, approved by both the City and FDOT. In addition to this, all pedestrian signal indicators shall utilize countdown features. Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is PROHIBITED unless directed by the City's Traffic Engineering Division. 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and /or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 60 SIGNING AND MARKING All signing and marking work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes the following work: RPM's (Section 706), painted traffic stripes and markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular delineators /flex posts (Sections 705 and 972). The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or markings shall be "blacked -out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No payment will be made for these incorrect or "blacked -out" areas. Omissions in striping or markings shall be corrected to the City's satisfaction prior to any payment being made. 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and /or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 61 ROADWAY LIGHTING All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. 61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. SectionlV.doc Page 124 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 62 TREE PROTECTION 62.1 TREE BARRICADES A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land preparation or construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all staging and /or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows: 1. At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms. 2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer species. 3. At or greater than two - thirds of the dripline of all other protected species 4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand. B. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two -inch lumber for upright posts. Upright posts are to be at least four feet in length with a minimum of one foot anchored in the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet apart. Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch by four -inch lumber and shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The project City's representative must approve any variation from the above requirements. C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City's representative. D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No equipment, chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within such protective barriers. E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any protected tree or palm. F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this section, and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees. 62.2 ROOT PRUNING A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and /or impacts to the critical root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other equipment designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is strictly prohibited. Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by SectionlV.doc Page 125 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications construction activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of 18 inches below existing grade or to the depth of the proposed impact if less than 18 inches from existing grade. Tim Kurtz, Senior Landscape Architect is the City's Representative on Engineering Department projects for root Pruning issues and can be reached at (727) 562 -4737, or through the construction inspector assigned to the project. B. Root pruning shall only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted) inspected and approved by the City's representative prior to actual root pruning. D. Root pruning shall be performed as far in advance of other construction activities as is feasible, but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated tree protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning. E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and /or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any root pruning activities. F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches per one inch of the trunk diameter from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City's representative prior to said root pruning. G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be done to a minimum depth of 18" from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less than 18 ". H. Root pruning shall be performed using a Doscocil Root Cutting Machine or equivalent. Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the City's representative, prior to any work adjacent to trees to be preserved. I. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected. J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled around to prevent damage to the root. K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or burlap and kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established. L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may require a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root pruned trees. M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root pruning requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional boring as opposed to open trenching. 62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING A. All tree pruning and /or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2001, American National Standard for tree care operations — Tree, Shrub and other Woody Plant Maintenance — Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A -300. SectionlV.doc Page 126 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts (pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree) are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. C. No protected tree shall have more than 30 percent of its foliage removed. D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion - tailed. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. 63 PROJECT WEB PAGES 63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the current City Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project information as: Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project Contacts. Note: Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer shall consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the Project Web Pages. 63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES Project Web Pages should conform to the W3C Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section 508 guidelines whenever possible: http:// www .w3.org /TR/1999 /WAI- WEBCONTENT 19990505/ http://www.section508. gov/ In particular, use of variable -width tables, user - adjustable /relative font sizes, ALT text for images, CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design/aesthetics. 63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE The City's Sun and Waves logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and electronic material. It should be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising, vehicles, apparel and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the proportion shown here, with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise distorted to fit a space. The logo is approved for use by city departments, and is not to be used by outside vendors without the permission of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public Communications office. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from the Public Communications. This is for internal use only. SectionlV.doc Page 127 of 128 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics should be posted to the Project Web Pages. 63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow Public's input sent back to the City regarding the Project. 63.6 POSTING The site should be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different than City's Web server, if approved, should be coordinated with the City's Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conformity issues. 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES Unless otherwise specified and agreed Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages up -to -date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's Webmaster for posting. 64 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE 64.1 CLEARANCE OPTIONS When working in the vicinity of overhead power lines the Contractor shall utilize one of the following options: Option 1 - Having the power lines de- energized and visibly grounded. Option 2 - Maintaining a minimum distance of 20 feet of clearance for voltages up to 350 kV an 50 feet of clearance for voltages more than 350 kV. Option 3 - Determine the line voltage and provide clearance in accordance with the table included in Section 64.2. 64.2 REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES VOLTAGE (nominal, kV, alternating current) MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCE (feet) Up to 50 10 Over 50 to 200 15 Over 20 to 350 20 Over 350 to 500 25 Over 500 to 750 35 SectionlV.doc Page 128 of 128 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications Over 750 to 1,000 45 Over 1000 (as established by the utility owner /operator or registered professional engineer who is a qualified person with respect to electric power transmission and distribution) Note: The value that follows "to" is up to and includes that value. For example, over 50 to 200 means up to and including 200kV. SectionlV.doc Page 129 of 128 11/26/2013 Index of Technical Specifications Sign and Seal Sheet for CITY OF CLEARWATER EAST WRF EFFLUENT FILTERS REHABILITATION PROJECT (Project No. 13- 0014 -UT) SPECIFICATIONS Thomas A. Traina, P.E. DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005, 01014, 01015, 01030, 01040, 01050, 01065, 01090, 01150, 01152, 01153, 01200, 01300, 01310, 01340, 01385, 01410, 01500, 01505, 01510, 01600, 01625, 01640, 01670, 01700, 01710, 01720, 01730, 01740, 01820 DIVISION 02 SITEWORK Unless otherwise specified herein, all site work and items for which a specification is not provided herein or within the City of Clearwater Standard Specifications (Section IV) shall be in accordance with the FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, 2010 edition. 02062, 02064, 02140, 02221, 02485 DIVISION 03 CONCRETE 03350, 03600, 03740 DIVISION 05 METALS 05500 DIVISION 06 WOOD AND PLASTICS 06600 DIVISION 09 FINISHES 09865, 09900 DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT 11366, 11370 DIVISION 13 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT 13567, 13630, 13640 DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL 15010, 15062, 15064, 15080, 15094, 15100 0„I'll,,,,,,/ .,,, 114.°rtili1;:tflte, , p i 5.....1.0 a SECTION IVA EAST WRF EFFLUENT FILTERS REHABILITATION PROJECT SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (PROJECT No. 13- 0014 -UT) PREPARED FOR: Clearwater U CITY OF CLEARWATER ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT 100 SOUTH MYRTLE AVENUE CLEARWATER, FL 33756 PREPARED BY: Kin ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC. g KING ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC. 4921 MEMORIAL HIGHWAY ONE MEMORIAL CENTER, SUITE 300 TAMPA, FL 33634 CONFORMED BID DOCUMENTS October 2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01014 SUMMARY OF WORK 01015 CONTROL OF WORK 01030 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01040 COORDINATION 01050 FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING 01065 PERMITS AND EASEMENTS 01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01150 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01152 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01153 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01200 MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES 01300 SUBMITTALS 01310 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01385 COLOR AUDIO -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS 01410 TESTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01505 MOBILIZATION 01510 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT I I 01625 START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01640 QUALITY CONTROL I 01670 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS I 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01710 CLEANING I 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS I 01730 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS I 01820 TRAINING I DIVISION 02 SITEWORK I 02062 REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT 02064 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING, AND I EQUIPMENT 02140 TEMPORARY DEWATERING (NOT IN CONTRACT) I 02221 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES I 02485 SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS DIVISION 03 CONCRETE I 03350 MULTI - LAYERED LINING SYSTEM (NOT IN CONTRACT) I 03600 GROUT 03740 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE I DIVISION 05 METALS I 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METAL 1 I -ii- I 1 1 1 1 1 DIVISION 06 WOOD AND PLASTICS 06600 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS DIVISION 09 FINISHES 09865 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING 09900 PAINTING DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT 11366 RAPID SAND FILTERS 11370 COMPRESSED -AIR SYSTEM DIVISION 13 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT 13567 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING PROVISIONS (NOT IN CONTRACT) 13630 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13640 FIBER OPTIC CABLE DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL 15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15062 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15064 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 15080 SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS 15094 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15100 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES -III- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01005 2 3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. Description 10 11 The work to be completed consists of the furnishing of all labor, materials and 12 equipment, and the performance of all Work included in this Contract. At all 13 times during the project the Wastewater Treatment Plant (WWTP) shall remain 14 in service. Throughout the project, the Contractor shall cooperate fully with 15 operations staff in order to minimize disruption to facility operations. No facility 16 or structure shall be taken out of service, except those specifically scheduled 17 to be demolished, without the prior written approval of the Owner or Engineer. 18 Plant operations and regulatory compliance will take priority over and may 19 impact the construction schedule. 20 21 B. Work Included 22 23 The Contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, materials, plant, 24 power, light, heat, fuel, water, tools, appliances, equipment, supplies and other 25 means of construction necessary or proper for performing and completing the 26 Work. He shall perform and complete the Work in the manner best calculated 27 to promote rapid construction consistent with safety of life and property and to 28 the satisfaction of the Engineer, and in strict accordance with the Contract 29 Documents. The Contractor shall clean up the Work and maintain it during 30 and after construction, until accepted, and shall do all work and pay all costs 31 incidental thereto. He shall repair or restore all structures and property that 32 may be damaged or disturbed during performance of the Work. 33 34 The cost of incidental work described in these General Requirements, for 35 which there are no specific Contract Items, shall be considered as part of the 36 general cost of doing the work and shall be included in the prices for the 37 various Contract Items. No additional payment will be made therefore. 38 39 The Contractor shall provide and maintain such modern plant, tools, and 40 equipment as may be necessary, in the opinion of the Engineer, to perform in 41 a satisfactory and acceptable manner all the work required by this Contract. 42 Only equipment of established reputation and proven efficiency shall be used. 43 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the adequacy of his 44 workmanship, materials and equipment, prior review of the Engineer 45 notwithstanding. 46 47 C. Public Utility Installation and Structures 48 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -1 07/15/14 1 Public utility installations and structures shall be understood to include all 2 poles, tracks, pipes, wires, conduits, house service connections, vaults, 3 manholes and all other appurtenances and facilities pertaining thereto whether 4 owned or controlled by the Owner, other governmental bodies or privately 5 owned by individuals, firms or corporations, used to serve the public with 6 transportation, traffic control, gas, electricity, telephone, sewerage, drainage, 7 water or other public or private property which may be affected by the work 8 shall be deemed included hereunder. 9 10 The Contractor shall protect all public utility installations and structures from 11 damage during the work. Access across any buried public utility installation, 12 or structure, shall be made only in such locations and by means reviewed by 13 the Engineer. The Contractor shall so arrange his operations as to avoid any 14 damage to these facilities. All required protective devices and construction 15 shall be provided by the Contractor at his expense. All existing public utilities 16 damaged by the Contractor, which are shown on the Plans or have been 17 located in the field by the utility, shall be repaired by the Contractor, at his 18 expense, as directed by the Engineer. No separate payment shall be made 19 for such protection or repairs to public utility installations or structures. 20 21 Public utility installations or structures owned or controlled by the Owner or 22 other governmental body, which are shown on the Plans to be removed, 23 relocated, replaced or rebuilt by the Contractor shall be considered as a part of 24 the general cost of doing the Work and shall be included in the prices bid for 25 the various contract items. No separate payment shall be made therefore. 26 27 Where public utility installations or structures owned or controlled by the 28 Owner or other governmental body are encountered during the course of the 29 Work, and are not indicated on the Plans or in the Specifications, and when, in 30 the opinion of the Engineer, removal, relocation, replacement or rebuilding is 31 necessary to complete the work under this Contract, such work shall be 32 accomplished by the utility having jurisdiction, or such work may be ordered, in 33 writing by the Engineer, for the Contractor to accomplish. If such work is 34 accomplished by the utility having jurisdiction it will be carried out expeditiously 35 and the Contractor shall give full cooperation to permit the utility to complete 36 the removal, relocation, replacement or rebuilding as required. If such work is 37 accomplished by the Contractor, it will be in accordance with the General and 38 Supplemental General Conditions. 39 40 The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner and other governmental 41 utility departments and other owners of public utilities of the locations of his 42 proposed construction operations, at least forty -eight hours in advance of 43 breaking ground in any area or on any unit of the work. 44 45 The maintenance, repair, removal, relocation or rebuilding of public utility 46 installations and structures, when accomplished by the Contractor as herein 47 provided, shall be done by methods reviewed by the Engineer. 48 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.02 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS 2 3 A. Drawings 4 5 When obtaining data and information from the Drawings, figures shall be used 6 in preference to scaled dimensions, and large scale drawings in preference to 7 small scale drawings. 8 9 B. Copies Furnished to Contractor 10 11 The Engineer may incorporate the addenda into a set of "conformed" drawings 12 and specifications, and may provide one electronic copy of each to the 13 Contractor. The conformed drawings and specifications shall not supersede 14 the Contract Documents provided to the Contractor. It shall be the 15 responsibility of the Contractor to check that the conformed drawings and 16 specifications properly include all revisions /addenda to the Contract 17 Documents. The Contractor shall furnish each of the subcontractors, 18 manufacturers, and suppliers such copies of the Contract Documents as may 19 be required for their work. Additional copies of the Drawings and 20 Specifications, when requested, may be furnished to the Contractor at cost of 21 reproduction. 22 23 C. Supplementary Drawings 24 25 When, in the opinion of the Engineer, it becomes necessary to explain more 26 fully the work to be done or to illustrate the work further or to show any 27 changes which may be required, Drawings known as Supplementary 28 Drawings, with Specifications pertaining thereto, will be prepared by the 29 Engineer and copies thereof will be given to the Contractor and the Owner. 30 31 D. Contractor to Check Drawings and Data 32 33 The Contractor shall verify all dimensions, quantities and details shown on the 34 Drawings, Supplementary Drawings, Schedules, Specifications or other data 35 received from the Engineer and shall notify him of any errors, omissions, 36 conflicts and discrepancies found therein. The Contractor shall submit to the 37 Engineer a Request for Information (RFI), consecutively numbered, detailing 38 all conflicts and discrepancies. Engineer shall promptly provide a response to 39 all RFIs submitted by the Contractor. Contractor will not be allowed to take 40 advantage of any conflicts and discrepancies, as full instructions will be 41 furnished by the Engineer, should such conflicts and discrepancies be 42 discovered. 43 44 E. Specifications 45 46 The Technical Specifications generally consist of three parts: General, 47 Products, and Execution. The General Section contains General 48 Requirements that govern the work. Products and Execution modify and GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -3 07/15/14 1 supplement these by detailed requirements for the work and shall always 2 govern whenever there appears to be a conflict. 3 4 F. Intent 5 6 All Work called for in the Specifications applicable to this Contract, but not 7 shown on the Drawings in their present form, or vice verse, shall be of like 8 effect as if shown or mentioned in both. Work not specified in either the 9 Drawings or in the Specifications, but involved in carrying out their intent or in 10 the complete and proper execution of the work, is required and shall be 11 performed by the Contractor as though it were specifically delineated or 12 described. 13 14 The apparent silence of the Specifications as to any detail, or the apparent 15 omission from them of a detailed description concerning any work to be done 16 and materials to be furnished, shall be regarded as meaning that only the best 17 general practice is to prevail and that only material and workmanship of the 18 best quality is to be used, and interpretation of these Specifications shall be 19 made upon that basis. 20 21 The inclusion of the Related Requirements (or work specified elsewhere) in 22 the General part of the specifications is only for the convenience of the 23 Contractor, and shall not be interpreted as a complete list of related 24 Specification Sections. 25 26 1.03 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 27 28 A. Manufacturer 29 30 The names of proposed manufacturers, suppliers and dealers who are to 31 furnish materials, fixtures, equipment, appliances or other fittings shall be 32 submitted to the Engineer for review. Such review must be obtained before 33 shop drawings will be checked. No manufacturer will be approved for any 34 materials to be furnished under this Contract unless he shall be of good 35 reputation and have a plant of ample capacity. He shall, upon the request of 36 the Engineer, be required to submit evidence that he has manufactured a 37 similar product to the one specified and that it has been previously used for a 38 like purpose for a sufficient length of time to demonstrate its satisfactory 39 performance. All transactions with the manufacturers or subcontractors shall 40 be through the Contractor, unless the Contractor shall request, in writing to the 41 Engineer, that the manufacturer or subcontractor deal directly with the 42 Engineer. Any such transactions shall not in any way release the Contractor 43 from his full responsibility under this Contract. 44 45 Any two or more pieces of material or equipment of the same kind, type or 46 classification, and being used for identical types of service, shall be made by 47 the same manufacturer. 48 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -4 07/15/14 1 1 1 B. Delivery 2 I 3 The Contractor shall deliver materials in ample quantities to insure the most 4 speedy and uninterrupted progress of the work so as to complete the work 5 within the allotted time. The Contractor shall also coordinate deliveries in 1 6 order to avoid delay in, or impediment of, the progress of the work of any 7 related Contractor. 8 I 9 C. Tools and Accessories 10 11 The Contractor shall, unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, 1 12 furnish with each type, kind or size of equipment, one complete set of suitably 13 marked high grade special tools and appliances that are needed to adjust, 14 operate, maintain or repair the equipment. Such tools and appliances shall be I15 furnished in approved painted steel cases, properly labeled and equipped with 16 good grade cylinder locks and duplicate keys. 17 I18 Spare parts shall be furnished as specified. Where spare parts are specified 19 to be "manufacturer's recommended" or "as recommended by the I 20 manufacturer ", the Contractor shall furnish those spare parts that are normally 21 or commonly recommended by the manufacturer as shown on the 22 manufacturer's readily available literature. I23 24 Each piece of equipment shall be provided with a substantial nameplate, 25 securely fastened in place and clearly inscribed with the manufacturer's name, I 26 year of manufacture, serial number, weight and principal rating data. 27 28 D. Installation of Equipment I29 30 The Contractor shall have on hand sufficient proper equipment and machinery 31 of ample capacity to facilitate the work and to handle all emergencies normally I 32 encountered in work of this character. 33 34 Equipment shall be erected in a neat and workmanlike manner on the I 35 foundations at the locations and elevations shown on the Drawings, unless 36 directed otherwise by the Engineer during installation. All equipment shall be 37 correctly aligned, leveled and adjusted for satisfactory operation and shall be I 38 installed so that proper and necessary connections can be made readily 39 between the various units. 40 I 41 42 The Contractor shall furnish, install and protect all necessary anchor and attachment bolts and all other appurtenances needed for the installation of the 43 devices included in the equipment specified. Anchor bolts shall be as I 44 reviewed by the Engineer and made of ample size and strength for the 45 purpose intended. Substantial templates and working drawings for installation 46 shall be furnished. 1 47 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -5 07/15/14 1 The Contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish all materials and labor for, 2 and shall properly bed in non - shrink grout, each piece of equipment on its 3 supporting base that rests on masonry foundations. Grout shall completely fill 4 the space between the equipment base and the foundation. All metal surfaces 5 coming in contact with concrete or grout shall receive a coat of coal tar epoxy 6 equal to Kop -Coat 300M. 7 8 E. Service of Manufacturer's Representative 9 10 The prices for equipment shall include the cost of furnishing a competent and 11 experienced engineer or superintendent who shall represent the manufacturer 12 and shall assist the Contractor, when required, to install, adjust, test and place 13 in operation the equipment in conformity with the Contract Documents. 14 15 Prior to placing the equipment in permanent operation, the manufacturer shall 16 furnish to the Engineer and Contractor a written Certificate of Proper 17 Installation stating that the equipment has been installed in strict accordance 18 with the manufacturer's recommendations. 19 20 After the equipment is placed in operation by the Contractor, such engineer or 21 superintendent shall make all adjustments and tests required by the Engineer 22 to prove that such equipment is proper and in satisfactory operating condition, 23 and shall instruct/train such personnel as may be designated by the Owner in 24 the proper operation and maintenance of such equipment. 25 26 1.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING 27 28 A. General 29 30 For tests specified to be made by the Contractor, the testing personnel shall 31 make the necessary inspections and tests and the reports thereof shall be in 32 such form as will facilitate checking to determine compliance with the Contract 33 Documents. Five copies of the reports shall be submitted and the authorities' 34 certification thereof must be furnished to the Engineer as a prerequisite for the 35 acceptance of any material or equipment. 36 37 If in the making of any test of any material or equipment it is ascertained by 38 the Engineer that the material or equipment does not comply with the 39 Contract, the Contractor will be notified thereof and he will be directed to 40 refrain from delivering said material or equipment, or to remove it promptly 41 from the site or from the work and replace it with acceptable material, without 42 cost to the Owner. 43 44 Tests of electrical and mechanical equipment and appliances shall be 45 conducted in accordance with recognized test codes of the ANSI, ASME, or 46 the IEEE, except as may otherwise be stated herein. 47 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -6 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of equipment 2 during tests and instruction periods and shall neither have nor make any claim 3 for damage that may occur to equipment prior to the time when the Owner 4 formally takes over the operation thereof. 5 6 B. Costs 7 8 All inspection and testing of materials furnished under this Contract will be 9 performed by the Owner or duly authorized inspections engineers or 10 inspection bureaus without cost to the Contractor, unless otherwise expressly 11 specified. 12 13 The cost of shop and field tests of equipment and of certain other tests 14 specifically called for in the Contract Documents shall be borne by the 15 Contractor and such costs shall be deemed to be included in the Contract 16 price. 17 18 Materials and equipment submitted by the Contractor as equivalent to those 19 specified may be tested by the Owner for compliance with the specifications. 20 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the expenditures incurred in 21 making such tests on materials and equipment that are rejected for non - 22 compliance. 23 24 C. Inspection of Materials 25 26 The Contractor shall give notice in writing to the Engineer, sufficiently in 27 advance of his intention to commence the manufacture or preparation of 28 materials especially manufactured or prepared for use in or as part of the 29 permanent construction. Such notice shall contain a request for inspection, 30 the date of commencement and the expected date of completion of the 31 manufacture or preparation of materials. Upon receipt of such notice, the 32 Engineer will arrange to have a representative present at such times during 33 the manufacture as may be necessary to inspect the materials or he will notify 34 the Contractor that the inspection will be made at a point other than the point 35 of manufacture, or he will notify the Contractor that inspection will be waived. 36 The Contractor must comply with these provisions before shipping any 37 material. Such inspection shall not release the Contractor from its 38 responsibility for furnishing materials meeting the requirements of the Contract 39 Documents. 40 41 D. Certificate of Manufacture 42 43 When inspection is waived or when the Engineer so requires, the Contractor 44 shall furnish authoritative evidence in the form of Certificates of Manufacture 45 that the materials to be used in the work have been manufactured and tested 46 in conformity with the Contract Documents. These certificates shall be 47 notarized and shall include copies of the results of physical tests and chemical GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -7 07/15/14 1 analyses, where necessary, that have been made directly on the product or on 2 similar products of the manufacturer. 3 4 E. Shop Tests of Operating Equipment 5 6 Each piece of equipment for which pressure, duty, capacity, rating, efficiency, 7 performance, function or special requirements are specified shall be tested in 8 the shop of the maker in a manner that shall conclusively prove that its 9 characteristics comply fully with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 10 No such equipment shall be shipped to the work until the Engineer notifies the 11 Contractor, in writing, that the results of such tests are acceptable. 12 13 Five copies of the manufacturer's actual test data and interpreted results 14 thereof, accompanied by a certificate of authenticity sworn to by a responsible 15 official of the manufacturing company, shall be forwarded to the Engineer for 16 review. 17 18 The cost of shop tests and of furnishing manufacturer's preliminary and shop 19 test data of operating equipment shall be borne by the Contractor. 20 21 F. Preliminary Field Tests 22 23 As soon as conditions permit, the Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, 24 and instruments and shall make preliminary field tests of equipment. If the 25 preliminary field tests disclose any equipment furnished under this Contract 26 that does not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the 27 Contractor shall, prior to the acceptance tests, make all changes, adjustments 28 and replacement required. The Contractor shall assist in the preliminary field 29 tests as applicable. 30 31 G. Final Field Tests 32 33 Upon completion of the work and prior to final payment, all equipment and 34 systems installed under this Contract shall be subjected to acceptance tests 35 as specified or required to prove compliance with the Contract Documents. 36 37 The Contractor shall furnish labor, fuel, energy, water and all other materials, 38 equipment and instruments necessary for all acceptance tests, at no additional 39 cost to the Owner. The equipment suppliers and subcontractors shall assist in 40 the final field tests, as applicable. 41 42 H. Failure of Tests 43 44 Any defects in the materials and equipment or their failure to meet the tests, 45 guarantee or requirements of the Contract Documents shall be promptly 46 corrected by the Contractor by replacement or otherwise as directed by the 47 Engineer. The decision of the Engineer as to whether or not the Contractor 48 has fulfilled his obligations under the Contract shall be final and conclusive. If GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -8 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 the Contractor fails to make these corrections or if the improved materials and 2 equipment, when tested, shall again fail to meet the guarantees or specified 3 requirements, the Owner, notwithstanding its partial payment for work, 4 materials and equipment, may reject the work, materials and equipment and 5 may order the Contractor to remove them from the site at his own expense. 6 7 I. Final Inspection 8 9 During such final inspections, the work shall be clean and free from water. In 10 no case will the final change order be prepared until the Contractor has 11 complied with all requirements set forth and the Engineer has made his final 12 inspection of the entire work and is satisfied that the entire work is properly 13 and satisfactorily constructed in accordance with the requirements of the 14 Contract Documents. 15 16 1.05 TEMPORARY STRUCTURES 17 18 A. Temporary Fences 19 20 If, during the course of the work, it is necessary to remove or disturb any fence 21 or part thereof, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, if so ordered by the 22 Engineer, provide a suitable temporary fence, which shall be maintained until 23 the permanent fence is replaced. The Engineer shall be solely responsible for 24 the determination of the necessity for providing a temporary fence and the 25 type of temporary fence to be used. 26 27 B. Temporary Driveways 28 29 At its own expense, the Contractor shall furnish, install, maintain and remove 30 all temporary driveways and access roads required to provide access to the 31 work and through the site of the work to maintain existing operations and to 32 allow construction of other projects in the area. The Contractor shall fully 33 cooperate with the Owner in providing this access. 34 35 C. Temporary Structures and Facilities 36 37 The Contractor shall construct any temporary piping and facilities as required 38 in order to maintain existing treatment capacity and operations during 39 construction. 40 41 1.06 TEMPORARY SERVICES 42 43 A. First Aid 44 45 The Contractor shall keep upon the site, at each location where work is in 46 progress, a completely equipped first aid kit and shall provide ready access 47 thereto at all times when people are employed on the work. 48 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -9 07/15/14 1 1.07 LINE AND GRADE 2 3 A. Line and Grade 4 5 All work under this Contract shall be constructed in accordance with the lines 6 and grades shown on the Drawings, or as given by the Engineer. The full 7 responsibility for maintaining alignment and grade rests upon the Contractor. 8 9 The Contractor, prior to commencing of construction, shall have established 10 bench marks and base line controlling points. The Contractor shall so place 11 excavation and other materials as to cause no inconvenience in the use of the 12 reference marks provided. He shall remove any obstructions placed by him 13 contrary to this provision. 14 15 B. Surveys 16 17 The Contractor shall furnish and maintain, at his own expense, stakes and 18 other such materials to establish all working or construction lines and grades, 19 as required, and shall be solely responsible for the accuracy thereof. 20 21 All surveying shall be performed in accordance with Specification 01050. 22 23 C. Safeguarding Marks 24 25 The Contractor shall safeguard all points, stakes, grade marks, monuments 26 and bench marks made or established on the work, bear the cost of re- 27 establishing them if disturbed, and bear the entire expense of rectifying work 28 improperly installed due to not maintaining or protecting or to removing without 29 authorization such established points, stakes and marks. 30 31 The Contractor shall safeguard all existing and known property corners, 32 monuments and marks adjacent to but not related to the work and, if required, 33 shall bear the cost of re- establishing them if disturbed or destroyed. 34 35 1.08 ADJACENT STRUCTURES AND LANDSCAPING 36 37 A. The Contractor shall also be entirely responsible and liable for all damage or 38 injury as a result of his operations to all other adjacent public and private 39 property, structures of any kind and appurtenances thereto met with during the 40 progress of the work. The cost of protection, replacement in their original 41 locations and conditions or payment of damages for injuries to such adjacent 42 public and private property and structures affected by the work, whether or not 43 shown on the Drawings or specified shall be included in the various Contract 44 Items and no separate payments will be made therefore. Where such public 45 and private property, structures of any kind and appurtenances thereto are not 46 shown on the Drawings and when, in the opinion to avoid interference with the 47 work, payment therefore will be made as provided for in the General 48 Conditions. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -10 07/15/14 1 1 1 2 Contractor is expressly advised that the protection of buildings structures, I 3 tunnels, tanks, pipelines, etc. and related work adjacent to and in the vicinity of 4 his operations, wherever they may be, is solely his responsibility. Conditional 5 inspection of buildings or structures in the immediate vicinity of the project 6 which may reasonably be expected to be affected by the Work shall be 7 performed by and be the responsibility of the Contractor. 8 1 9 Contractor shall, before starting operations, make an examination of the 10 interior and exterior of the adjacent structures, buildings, facilities, etc., and 11 record by noted, measurements, photographs, etc., conditions which might be I12 aggravated by open excavation and construction. Repairs or replacement of 13 all conditions disturbed by the construction shall be made to the satisfaction of 14 the Owner and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. This does not preclude I15 conforming to the requirements of the insurance underwriters. Copies of 16 surveys, photographs, reports, etc., shall be given to the Engineer. 17 1 18 Prior to the beginning of any excavations, the Contractor shall advise the 19 Engineer of all buildings or structures on which he intends to perform work or I 20 which performance of the project work will affect. 21 22 B. Protection of Trees I23 24 1. The Contractor shall adequately protect all trees and shrubs with boxes 25 or otherwise in accordance with ordinances governing the protection of I 26 27 trees. No excavated materials shall be placed so as to injure such trees or shrubs. Trees or shrubs destroyed through negligence of the 28 Contractor or his employees shall be replaced with new stock of similar I 29 30 size and age, in the proper season and at the sole expense of the Contractor. 31 32 2. Beneath trees or other surface structures, where possible, pipelines 33 may be built in short tunnels, backfilled with excavated materials, 34 except as otherwise specified, or the trees or structures carefully I 35 supported and protected from damage. 36 37 3. The Owner may order the Contractor, for the convenience of the I 38 Owner, to remove trees along the line or trench excavation. If so 39 ordered, the Owner will obtain any permits required for removal of 40 trees. I41 42 C. Lawn Areas 43 I 44 Lawn areas shall be left in as good condition as before the starting of the work. 45 Where sod is to be removed, it shall be carefully removed, and later replaced, 46 or the area where sod has been removed shall be restored with new sod. 1 47 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -11 07/15/14 1 D. Restoration of Fences 2 3 Any fence, or part thereof, that is damaged or removed during the course of 4 the work shall be replaced or repaired by the Contractor and shall be left in as 5 good or better a condition as existed before starting the work. The manner in 6 which the fence is repaired or replaced and the materials used in such work 7 shall be subject to the review of the Engineer. No additional payment will be 8 made for the replacement or repair of any fence. 9 10 1.09 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PUBLIC 11 12 A. Barriers and Lights 13 14 During the prosecution of the work, the Contractor shall put up and maintain at 15 all times such barriers and lights as will effectively prevent accidents. The 16 Contractor shall provide suitable barricades, red lights, "danger" or "caution" or 17 "street closed" signs and watchmen at all places where the work causes 18 obstructions to the normal traffic or constitutes in any way a hazard to the 19 public. 20 21 B. Smoke Prevention 22 23 The Contractor shall use hard coal, coke, oil or gas as fuel for equipment 24 generating steam. A strict compliance with ordinances regulating the 25 production of emission of smoke will be required. No open fires will be 26 permitted. 27 28 C. Noise 29 30 The Contractor shall eliminate noise to as great an extent as practicable at all 31 times. Air compressing plants shall be equipped with silencers and the 32 exhaust of all gasoline motors or other power equipment shall be provided with 33 mufflers. In the vicinity of hospitals and schools, special care shall be used to 34 avoid noise or other nuisances. The Contractor shall strictly observe all local 35 regulations and ordinances covering noise control. 36 37 Except in the event of an emergency, no work shall be done between the 38 hours of 7:00 P.M. and 7:00 A.M., or on Sundays. If the proper and efficient 39 prosecution of the work requires operations during the night, the written 40 permission of the Engineer shall be obtained before starting such items of the 41 work. 42 43 D. Access to Public Services 44 45 Neither the materials excavated nor the materials or plant used in the 46 construction of the work shall be so placed as to prevent free access to all fire 47 hydrants, valves or manholes. 48 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -12 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 E. Dust Prevention 2 3 The Contractor shall prevent dust nuisance from his operations or from traffic 4 by keeping the roads and /or construction areas sprinkled with water at all 5 times or when directed by the Owner and /or Engineer. 6 7 1.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING 8 9 A. The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting or patching of his portion of the work 10 that may be required to make the several parts thereof join and coordinate in a 11 manner satisfactory to the Engineer and in accordance with the Drawings and 12 Specifications. The work shall be performed by competent workmen skilled in 13 the trade required by the restoration. 14 15 1.11 CLEANING 16 17 A. During construction of the work, the Contractor shall, at all times, keep the site 18 of the work and adjacent premises as free from material, debris and rubbish as 19 is practicable and shall remove the same from any portion of the site if, in the 20 opinion of the Engineer, such material, debris, or rubbish constitutes a 21 nuisance or is objectionable. 22 23 The Contractor shall remove from the site all of his surplus materials and 24 temporary structures when no further need therefore develops. 25 26 B. Final Cleaning 27 28 At the conclusion of the work, all erection plant, tools, temporary structures 29 and materials belonging to the Contractor shall be promptly taken away, and 30 he shall remove and promptly dispose of all water, dirt, rubbish or any other 31 foreign substances. 32 33 The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all equipment and materials installed by 34 him and shall deliver such materials and equipment undamaged in a bright, 35 clean, polished and new operating condition. 36 37 1.12 MISCELLANEOUS 38 39 A. Protection against Siltation and Bank Erosion 40 41 1. The Contractor shall arrange his operations to minimize siltation and 42 bank erosion on construction sites and on existing or proposed water 43 courses, drainage ditches, wetlands and other areas of concern. 44 45 2. The Contractor, at his own expense, shall remove any siltation deposits 46 and correct any erosion problems as directed by the Engineer that 47 results from his construction operations. 48 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -13 07/15/14 1 3. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any fines resulting from 2 the encroachment of any environmentally protected areas. 3 4 B. Protection of Wetland Areas 5 6 The Contractor shall properly dispose of all surplus material, including soil, in 7 accordance with Local, State and Federal regulations and the permits issued 8 for this project. Under no circumstances shall surplus material be disposed of 9 in wetland areas as defined by the Florida Department of Environmental 10 Protection, Southwest Florida Water Management District, U.S. Army Corps of 11 Engineers, etc. 12 13 C. Existing Facilities 14 15 The work shall be so conducted to maintain existing facilities in operation 16 insofar as is possible. Requirements and schedules of operations for 17 maintaining existing facilities in service during construction shall be as 18 described in these Specifications. 19 20 D. Use of Chemicals 21 22 All chemicals used during project construction or furnished for project 23 operation, whether herbicide, pesticide, disinfectant, polymer, reactant, or of 24 other classification, must show approval of either EPA or USDA. Use of all 25 such chemicals and disposal of residues shall be in strict conformance with 26 manufacturers' instructions. 27 28 E. Tree Removal 29 30 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer and any regulatory authorities forty - 31 eight (48) hours in advance of any removal of trees on the project. No clearing 32 shall occur and no earth moving equipment shall be placed on -site until after 33 the notice has been issued. The Contractor shall provide maintenance of the 34 tree barricades and other preventive measures to protect the trees that are to 35 remain. Failure to notify the Engineer before removing trees shall result in the 36 in -kind replacement of the tree at no additional cost to the Owner. 37 38 F Sanitary and Storm Sewer Systems 39 40 The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the satisfactory installation of 41 storm sewer and sanitary sewer systems to be in substantial conformance to 42 the approved Drawings. No roadway base or paving shall be constructed until 43 the Contractor has performed tamping of these lines to his and the Engineer's 44 satisfaction, and all storm sewer and sanitary sewer invert grades are verified 45 in the field by the Owner. The tamping of lines and verification of elevations in 46 no way absolves the Contractor from any of contractual obligations. 47 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -14 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 G. Related Permits 2 3 The Contractor recognizes that the Owner has applied for, and may have 4 received, certain permits pertaining to the work. At the sole discretion of the 5 Owner, the Owner may assign said permits to the Contractor and the 6 Contractor shall accept said assignments upon such request from the Owner. 7 8 H. All work in the vicinity of open waters, wetlands or any jurisdictional area is to 9 be performed in strict accordance with the environmental permits and their 10 conditions. Erosion barriers, when shown on the construction Drawings, are 11 the minimum required. If the Contractor's construction methods require that 12 additional erosion control is necessary to satisfy these permits, such controls 13 shall be supplied, installed and maintained throughout the construction 14 process by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner or Engineer. 15 16 It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to submit, in a timely manner, any 17 information, data, etc. that is required as a condition of a permit. Required 18 information, data, etc. shall be submitted directly to the permitting agency by 19 the Contractor with copies to the permittee and the Engineer. The Contractor 20 will be held responsible for any fine(s) or other action resulting from a violation 21 of permit conditions. 22 23 1.13 DISPOSAL 24 25 A. The Contractor shall directly pay all tipping fees associated with disposal of 26 construction demolition debris. The Contractor shall include in its bid all costs 27 associated with disposal of construction debris including collection, storage, 28 hauling and tipping fees. 29 30 1.14 RESTORATION OF PROPERTY 31 32 A. Responsibility. All damage resulting from construction work on existing 33 structures, wetland areas, roadway pavement, driveways, other paved areas, 34 fences, utilities, traffic control devices and any other obstruction not 35 specifically named herein, shall be repaired, restored or replaced by the 36 Contractor unless otherwise specified. 37 38 B. Temporary Repairs. All damage named in Paragraph A above shall be at 39 least temporarily repaired, restored or replaced immediately following 40 construction efforts at that location. Temporary restoration shall mean putting 41 the affected area back into a safe, usable condition. In no case shall trenches 42 remain open over night within a street right -of -way unless the governing Traffic 43 Control Division grants specific approval. 44 45 C. Permanent Repairs. All damage shall be permanently repaired, restored, or 46 replaced not later than the 30th calendar day following the completion of 47 construction at that location unless otherwise stipulated. Permanent repairs 48 shall be accomplished in a professional workmanship -like manner in GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -15 07/15/14 1 accordance with Specifications contained herein, or contract documents, if 2 addressed. The Contractor may be relieved of the 30 -day time limit above 3 only by specific written agreement with the Engineer. 4 5 D. Owner Retribution. In the event that the Contractor fails to make the 6 permanent repairs within the time specified, the Owner, at its option, will, with 7 its own resources or by contract with others, cause the repair, restoration, or 8 replacement of the affected area to be accomplished. The costs of such work 9 will be deducted either from the next pay request or from any other monies 10 owed the Contractor. 11 12 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 13 14 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 15 16 17 END OF SECTION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -16 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01014 2 3 SUMMARY OF WORK 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 LOCATION OF WORK 8 9 A. All Work of this Contract is located in rights -of -way, easements, or on property 10 owned by the City of Clearwater, Florida. 11 12 1.02 WORK TO BE DONE 13 14 A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, services and 15 incidentals to complete all work required by these Specifications and as shown 16 on the Drawings. 17 18 B. The Contractor shall perform the work complete, in place and ready for 19 continuous service, and shall include repairs, testing, permits, clean up, 20 replacements, and restoration required as a result of damages caused during 21 this construction. 22 23 C. All materials, equipment, skills, tools, and labor which is reasonably and 24 properly inferable and necessary for the proper completion of the work in a 25 substantial manner and in compliance with the requirements stated or implied 26 by these Specifications or Drawings shall be furnished and installed by the 27 Contractor without additional compensation, whether specifically indicated in 28 the Contract Documents or not. 29 30 D. The Contractor shall comply with all Municipal, County, State, Federal, and 31 other codes applicable to the proposed construction work. 32 33 1.03 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORK TO BE PERFORMED 34 35 A. The work of this Contract comprises the general rehabilitation of the following 36 facilities, as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein. 37 38 1. Mobilization, demobilization, insurances, permits and bonds. 39 40 2. Rehabilitation of existing facilities as described in Section IV. 41 42 1.04 CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES 43 44 A. General 45 46 1. Upon successful construction completion of each new component, and 47 pre- operational testing, Contractor shall conduct testing as required by 48 the Contract Documents. SUMMARY OF WORK 01014 -1 10/10/14 1 2 2. Contractor shall ensure that, prior to start -up of any component, all 3 handrails, walkways, lighting and associated safety - related facilities are 4 in place. 5 6 3. Contractor shall provide Engineer a minimum of 14- calendar days 7 advance written notice of any requested change in operation to the 8 existing facility, bypass requirements or connections to existing 9 facilities, and shall obtain the Engineer's written review before 10 scheduling this work. 11 12 B. Restrictions 13 14 1. In planning its work, the Contractor shall consider the following 15 requirements. 16 17 a. As noted elsewhere in these Specifications and on the Drawings, 18 the number of filters cells that can be taken out of service will be 19 limited. 20 21 b. The Contractor shall not take any existing facilities out of service 22 without obtaining the Owner's or Engineer's prior written review. 23 24 c. All new facilities shall be tested in accordance with Specification 25 01625 to demonstrate to the Engineer and Owner that the new 26 facility and associated equipment properly operates prior to 27 taking any other existing facilities or equipment out of service. 28 29 c. All manipulation of valves shall be performed by the Owner's 30 personnel. The Contractor shall not be allowed to manipulate 31 any valves except in emergencies. If there is an emergency, the 32 Owner shall be notified immediately. 33 34 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 35 36 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 37 38 39 END OF SECTION SUMMARY OF WORK 01014 -2 10/10/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01015 2 3 CONTROL OF WORK 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 WORK PROGRESS 8 9 A. The Contractor shall provide equipment that will be efficient, safe, appropriate 10 and large enough to secure a satisfactory quality of work and a rate of 11 progress that will ensure the completion of the work within the Contract 12 Time(s). If, at any time, such facilities appear to the Engineer to be inefficient, 13 inappropriate, insufficient or unsafe for securing the quality of work required or 14 for producing the rate of progress aforesaid, he may order the Contractor to 15 increase the facilities equipment, and the Contractor shall conform to such 16 order. Failure of the Engineer to give such order shall in no way relieve the 17 Contractor of his obligations to secure the quality of the work and rate of 18 progress required to meet the Contract Time(s). 19 20 1.02 PRIVATE LAND 21 22 A. The Contractor shall not enter or occupy private land outside of easements, 23 except by permission of the Owner. 24 25 1.03 WORK LOCATIONS 26 27 A. Work shall be located substantially as indicated on the Drawings, but the 28 Engineer reserves the right to make such modifications in locations as may be 29 found desirable to avoid interference with existing structures or for other 30 reasons. Where fittings are noted on the Drawings, such notation is for the 31 Contractor's convenience and does not relieve him from laying and jointing 32 different or additional items where required. 33 34 1.04 OPEN EXCAVATIONS 35 36 A. All open excavations shall be adequately safeguarded by providing temporary 37 barricades, caution signs, lights and other means to prevent accidents to 38 persons, and damage to property. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, 39 provide suitable and safe bridges and other crossings for accommodating 40 travel by Owner's personnel, pedestrians and workmen. Bridges provided for 41 access to private property during construction shall be removed when no 42 longer required. The length of open trench will be controlled by the particular 43 surrounding conditions and does not endanger existing facilities. If the 44 excavation becomes a hazard, or if it excessively restricts traffic, construction 45 procedures such as limiting the length of open trench, prohibiting stacking 46 excavated material in the street, and requiring that the trench shall not remain 47 open overnight. 48 CONTROL OF WORK 01015 -1 07/15/14 1 B. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent injury to the public due to 2 open trenches. All trenches, excavated material, equipment, of other 3 obstacles, which could be dangerous to the public, shall be well lighted at 4 night. 5 6 1.05 TEST PITS 7 8 A. The Contractor shall excavate test pits (pot -hole) for locating underground 9 pipelines or structures in advance of construction to verify that the work can be 10 constructed as intended. Test pits shall be excavated and backfilled by the 11 Contractor so as not to create a hazardous area. Test pits shall be backfilled 12 immediately after their purpose has been satisfied and the surface restored 13 and maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. 14 15 1.06 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC 16 17 A. Unless permission to close a street is received in writing from the proper 18 authority, all excavated material shall be placed so that vehicular and 19 pedestrian traffic may be maintained at all times. If the Contractor's 20 operations cause traffic hazards, he shall repair the road surface, provide 21 temporary ways, erect wheel guards or fences, or take other measures for 22 safety satisfactory to the Engineer. 23 24 B. Detours around construction will be subject to the review of the Owner and the 25 Engineer. Where detours are permitted, the Contractor shall provide all 26 necessary barricades and signs as required to divert the flow of traffic. While 27 traffic is detoured the Contractor shall expedite construction operations and 28 those periods when traffic is being detoured will be strictly controlled by the 29 Owner. 30 31 C. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent injury to the public due to 32 open trenches. Night watchmen may be required where special hazards exist, 33 or police protection provided for traffic while work is in progress. The 34 Contractor shall be fully responsible for damage or injuries whether or not 35 police protection has been provided. 36 37 1.07 CARE AND PROTECTION OF PROPERTY 38 39 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preservation of all public and 40 private property, and shall use every precaution necessary to prevent damage 41 thereto. If any direct or indirect damage is done to public or private property 42 by or on account of any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in the execution 43 of the work on the part of the Contractor, such property shall be restored by 44 the Contractor, at his expense, to a condition similar or equal to that existing 45 before the damage was done, or he shall make good the damage in other 46 manner acceptable to the Engineer. 47 CONTROL OF WORK 01015 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B. All sidewalks that are disturbed by the Contractor's operations shall be 2 restored to their original condition with the use of similar or comparable 3 materials. All curbing shall be restored in a condition equal to the original 4 construction and in accordance with the best modern practice. 5 6 C. Along the location of the work all fences, walks, bushes, trees, shrubbery, and 7 other physical features shall be protected and restored in a thoroughly 8 workmanlike manner. Fences and other features removed by the Contractor 9 shall be replaced in the location indicated by the Engineer as soon as 10 conditions permit. All grass areas beyond the limits of construction that have 11 been damaged by the Contractor shall be restored to original conditions. 12 13 D. Trees close to the work shall be boxed or otherwise protected against injury. 14 The Contractor shall trim all branches that are susceptible to damage because 15 of his operations, but in no case shall any tree be cut or removed without prior 16 notification of the appropriate tree authority. All injuries to bark, trunk, limbs, 17 and roots of trees shall be repaired by dressing, cutting, and painting in 18 accordance with approved methods, using only approved tools and materials. 19 20 E. The protection, removal, and replacement of existing physical features shall be 21 part of the work under the Contract and all costs in connection therewith shall 22 be included in the unit and /or lump sum prices established. 23 24 1.08 PROTECTION AND RELOCATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES 25 26 A. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the protection of all 27 buildings, structures, and utilities, public or private, including poles, signs, 28 services to buildings, utilities in the street, gas pipes, water pipes, hydrants, 29 sewers, drains, and electric and telephone cables, whether or not they are 30 shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall carefully support and protect all 31 such structures and utilities from injury of any kind. Any damage resulting 32 from the Contractor's operations shall be repaired by him at his expense. 33 34 B. The Contractor shall bear full responsibility for obtaining all locations of 35 underground structures and utilities (including existing water services, drain 36 lines, and sewers). Services shall be maintained and all costs or charges 37 resulting from damage thereto shall be paid by the Contractor. 38 39 C. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, permanent relocation of a utility owned by the 40 Owner is required, the Engineer may direct the Contractor in writing, to 41 perform the work. Work so ordered will be paid for at the unit prices bid in the 42 Proposal, if applicable, or as extra work as provided for in the General 43 Conditions. If relocation of a privately owned utility is required, the Owner will 44 notify the Utility to perform the work as expeditiously as possible. The 45 Contractor shall fully cooperate with the Owner and Utility, and shall have no 46 claim for delay due to such relocation. 47 CONTROL OF WORK 01015 -3 07/15/14 1 D. Underground and above ground utilities /facilities are identified on the 2 Drawings based on best information available at the time for the preparation of 3 the plans. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to locate all utilities prior to 4 any excavation. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to 5 existing underground utilities and facilities, and shall coordinate the protection 6 of these utilities with the Owner. 7 8 1.09 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS AND SERVICES 9 10 A. The Contractor shall interrupt water, telephone, Cable TV, sewer, gas, or other 11 related utility services and disrupt the normal functioning of the system as little 12 as possible, and shall notify the Engineer and public well in advance of any 13 requirement for dewatering, isolating, or relocating a section of a utility, so that 14 necessary arrangements may be made with the appropriate agency. 15 16 B. If it appears that utility service will be interrupted for an extended period, the 17 Engineer may order the Contractor to provide temporary service lines. 18 Inconvenience of the users shall be the minimum, consistent with the existing 19 conditions. The safety and integrity of the system is of prime importance in 20 scheduling work. 21 22 1.10 PROTECTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND EQUIPMENT 23 24 A. All newly constructed work shall be carefully protected from injury or damage 25 in every way. No wheeling or walking or placing of heavy loads shall be 26 allowed and any portion injured or damaged shall be reconstructed by the 27 Contractor at his own expense. 28 29 1.11 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES 30 31 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and paying for all water 32 required for construction purposes. The Contractor shall make all connections 33 and other provisions, including backflow prevention and metering provisions, 34 necessary to obtain said water from the local utility's potable and /or reclaimed 35 water system, as required. The Contractor shall pay the appropriate party for 36 all water used for construction purposes. Bid prices shall include the costs 37 incurred for water usage. 38 39 1.12 MAINTENANCE OF FLOW 40 41 A. The Contractor shall, at his own cost, provide for the flow of sewers, drains, 42 and water courses interrupted during the progress of the work, and shall 43 immediately remove all offensive matter. The entire procedure for maintaining 44 existing flows shall be reviewed by the Engineer in advance of the interruption 45 of any flow. 46 CONTROL OF WORK 01015 -4 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.13 COOPERATION WITHIN THIS CONTRACT 2 3 A. All firms or persons authorized to perform any work under this Contract shall 4 cooperate with the General Contractor and his subcontractors or trades, and 5 shall assist in incorporating the work of other trades where necessary or 6 required. 7 8 B. Cutting and patching, drilling and fitting shall be carried out where required by 9 the trade or subcontractor having jurisdiction, unless otherwise indicated 10 herein or directed by the Engineer. 11 12 1.14 COOPERATION OUTSIDE THIS CONTRACT 13 14 A. As part of normal and /or emergency system operations and maintenance, the 15 Owner may employ the services of contractors outside this contract. As such, 16 the Contractor of this Work shall coordinate their schedule with and 17 accommodate said contractor as necessary for the execution of their work. 18 This coordination shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. 19 20 B. As part of normal and /or emergency system operations and maintenance, the 21 Owner has normal delivery and maintenance suppliers that will be on -site on a 22 regular basis. Contractor shall allow continuous access to all equipment and 23 facilities, so as not to impede the operation and maintenance of said facility. 24 This coordination shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. 25 26 1.15 CLEAN -UP 27 28 A. During the course of the work, the Contractor shall keep the site of his 29 operations in a clean and neat condition. He shall remove, transport and 30 properly dispose of all surplus broken pavement, crushed concrete, lumber, 31 excess steel, equipment, temporary structures, and any other refuse from the 32 construction operation, on a weekly basis or as directed by the Owner and /or 33 Engineer. At the conclusion of the work, remove, transport and properly 34 dispose of any surplus excavation, and refuse remaining from the construction 35 operation, and leave the entire site of his work in a neat and orderly condition. 36 37 B. The Contractor shall provide for disposal of excavated material removed from 38 the site. 39 40 1.16 COORDINATION WITH ELECTRICAL UTILITY 41 42 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the power company 43 to have electrical service supplied to the site. 44 45 1.17 WORK SEQUENCE 46 47 A. The Owner may incur penalties for failure to maintain service /operations. 48 Therefore, the Contractor will schedule and complete the work in a manner CONTROL OF WORK 01015 -5 07/15/14 1 that assures that the facility maintains service including redundancy 2 throughout the duration of the project. Prior to taking any service or operation 3 off -line, Contractor shall prepare a work sequence plan and coordinate all shut 4 downs with the Owner and /or Engineer. All temporary measures and 5 materials required to meet this condition during construction shall be provided, 6 installed, maintained and removed by the Contractor. All costs associated 7 with this effort shall be borne by the Contractor. All fines imposed by failure to 8 meet this operating condition, due to the Contractor's Work Sequence, shall 9 be borne by the Contractor. 10 11 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 12 13 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 14 15 16 END OF SECTION CONTROL OF WORK 01015 -6 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01030 2 3 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 WORKMANSHIP, MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 8 9 A. When a particular product is specified or called for, it is intended and shall be 10 understood by the Contractor that the Contractor's proposal includes those 11 products in its bid. Should the Contractor desire to incorporate products equal 12 to those specified, the Contractor shall furnish information as described in the 13 General Conditions. The alternate product or products submitted by the 14 Contractor shall meet the requirements of the Specifications and shall, in all 15 respects, be equal to the products specified by name herein. 16 17 B. All apparatus, mechanism, equipment, machinery and manufactured articles 18 for incorporation into the Work shall be the new and unused standard products 19 of recognized reputable manufacturers unless specifically noted otherwise. 20 21 C. Contractor shall properly dispose of all excess materials from the site. 22 23 1.02 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEMS 24 25 A. The Contractor shall perform all work necessary to locate, excavate and 26 prepare for connections to the existing systems, as shown on the Drawings. 27 All connections to existing systems shall be coordinated with the Owner and /or 28 Engineer prior to commencing the work. All connections to existing systems 29 shall be attended by the Owner and /or Owner's Representative. The costs for 30 this work and for the actual connection to the existing systems shall be 31 included in the various prices bid and shall not result in any additional cost to 32 the Owner. 33 34 1.03 EXISTING UNDERGROUND PIPING, STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES 35 36 A. The attention of the Contractor is directed to the fact that during excavation, 37 the possibility exists that the Contractor may encounter water, gas, telephone, 38 electrical, and /or other utilities not shown on the Drawings. The Contractor 39 shall exercise extreme care before and during excavation to locate and flag 40 these lines so as to avoid damage thereto. Should damage occur to an 41 existing line, the Contractor shall immediately contact the utility and the 42 Owner. If the repair is to be completed by the Contractor it shall be carried out 43 in a timely and quality manner. Costs associated with such damage shall be 44 borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 45 46 B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all utility or other poles, 47 the stability of which may be endangered by the close proximity of excavation, 48 are temporarily supported in position while work proceeds in the vicinity of the SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -1 10/10/14 1 pole and that utility or other companies concerned be given reasonable 2 advance notice of any such excavation by the Contractor. 3 4 C. The locations of existing utilities are shown without express or implied 5 representation, assurance, or guarantee that they are complete or correct or 6 that they represent a true picture of underground piping to be encountered. 7 Encountering existing utilities at different depths or locations than shown on 8 the Drawings shall not be cause for additional costs to the Owner. 9 10 D. The existing piping and utilities that interfere with new construction shall be 11 rerouted as shown, specified or required. The Contractor shall excavate test 12 pits sufficiently ahead of the proposed work to predict potential conflicts. 13 Before any piping and utilities not shown on the Drawings are disturbed, the 14 Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of the location of the pipeline 15 or utility and shall reroute or relocate the pipeline or utility as directed. 16 17 E. The Contractor shall exercise care in any excavation to locate all existing 18 piping and utilities. All utilities that do not interfere with completed work shall 19 be carefully protected against damage. Any existing utilities damaged in any 20 way by the Contractor shall be restored or replaced by the Contractor at his 21 expense, as directed by the Engineer. 22 23 F It is intended that wherever existing utilities such as water, gas, telephone, 24 electrical, or other service lines must be crossed, deflection of the pipe within 25 recommended limits and cover shall be used to satisfactorily clear the 26 obstruction unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. However, when in 27 the opinion of the Owner or Engineer this procedure is not feasible, he may 28 direct the use of fittings for the utility crossing. The Contractor shall verify 29 utility crossings with test pits prior to construction as required by the Engineer. 30 31 1.04 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICE TECHNICIAN 32 33 A. Bid prices for equipment furnished shall include the cost of a competent field 34 service technician of the manufacturers of all equipment to assist in the 35 installation, adjustment and testing of the equipment, and to instruct the 36 Owner's operating personnel on operation and maintenance. The approved 37 manufacturer's operation and maintenance data shall be delivered to the 38 Engineer prior to instructing the Owner's personnel. This supervision may be 39 divided into two or more time periods, as required by the installation program 40 or as directed by the Engineer. 41 42 B. After installation of the equipment has been completed and the equipment is 43 presumably ready for operation, but before it is operated by others, the 44 manufacturer's field service technician shall inspect, operate, test and adjust 45 the equipment. The inspection shall include at least the following points where 46 applicable: 47 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -2 10/10/14 1 I1 1. Soundness (without damaged parts). 2 I 3 4 2. Completeness in all details, as specified and required. 5 3. Correctness of setting, alignment, and relative arrangement of various 6 parts. 7 8 4. Adequacy and correctness of packing, sealing and lubricants. I 9 10 5. Calibration and adjustment of all related instrumentation and controls. 11 I 12 13 6. Energize equipment. 14 7. Deficiency correction. I15 16 8. Demonstration of compliance with applicable performance specification. 17 I18 C. The operation, testing and adjustment shall be as required to prove that the 19 equipment has been left in proper condition for satisfactory operation under 20 the conditions specified. I21 22 D. Upon completion of this work, the manufacturer's field service technician shall I 23 submit to the Engineer, a complete, signed report of the results of his 24 inspection, operation, adjustments and tests. The report shall include detailed 25 descriptions of the points inspected, tests and adjustments made, quantitative 26 results obtained if such are specified, and suggestions for precautions to be I 27 taken to ensure proper maintenance. 28 I 29 30 E. Each equipment manufacturer shall provide instruction to the Owner's operating personnel. Training shall not be performed until the requirements of 31 Paragraphs B, C and D above have been fully satisfied and any specified I 32 performance testing completed. Training shall be provided for the number of 33 days specified in each equipment section of these specifications. Training 34 shall be provided on an 8 -hour per day basis. Partial days of less than eight I 35 36 (8) full working hours shall not be credited toward the specified duration. Training shall not be concurrent with on -going testing, debugging or 37 installation activities; but shall be on a separate activity devoted exclusively to I 38 39 the instruction of the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the manufacturer's equipment. Qualified representatives of each equipment 40 manufacturer specifically skilled in providing instruction to operations I 41 42 personnel shall perform training. Training shall provide an overview of operations and maintenance requirements and shall include as a minimum, 43 but not be limited to: I 44 45 1. Description of unit and component parts. 46 I 47 2. Operating capabilities and performance criteria. 48 1 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -3 10/10/14 1 3. Operating procedures. 2 3 4. Maintenance procedures. 4 5 5. Servicing and lubrication schedules. 6 7 6. Troubleshooting. 8 9 7. Electrical instrumentation and control requirements and interface. 10 11 The operating and maintenance data to be provided shall be used as a basis 12 for training. Additional requirements for Training are provided in Section 13 01820. 14 15 F A written "Certificate of Proper Installation" executed by the manufacturer 16 stating that the installation of the equipment is satisfactory, that the equipment 17 has been satisfactorily tested and ready for operation, and that the operating 18 personnel have been instructed in the operation and maintenance of the 19 equipment shall be submitted before start-up by the Owner. The Certificate 20 shall indicate date and time instruction was given and names of operating 21 personnel in attendance. This certification shall be submitted on a certification 22 form reviewed by the Engineer. 23 24 G. See the Technical Specifications for additional requirements for furnishing the 25 services of the manufacturer's field service technician. 26 27 H. For other equipment furnished, the Contractor, unless otherwise specified, 28 shall furnish the services of accredited field services technicians of the 29 manufacturer only when some evident malfunction or over - heating makes 30 such services necessary in the opinion of the Engineer. 31 32 1.05 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 33 34 A. Operating and maintenance data for each piece of equipment furnished shall 35 be delivered directly to the Engineer for review within 60 days of shop drawing 36 review completion. No payment shall be made for equipment installed or 37 stored on -site until the Engineer has reviewed the adequacy and 38 completeness of operating and maintenance data. Final copies of operating 39 and maintenance data shall have been delivered to the Engineer prior to 40 scheduling the training /instruction period with the Owner. 41 42 1.06 EQUIPMENT DATA LIST 43 44 A. Obtain, prepare and submit a complete, detailed listing of equipment and 45 motor data for all electrical items furnished under this Contract. This listing 46 shall be submitted with the preliminary draft of Operations and Maintenance 47 Data Manuals on Equipment Data Sheets. 48 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -4 10/10/14 1 1 1 1.07 SPARE PARTS 2 1 3 A. Spare parts to be provided for certain equipment are specified in the pertinent 4 sections of the Specifications. The Contractor shall collect and store all spare 5 parts in a manner approved by the manufacturer. In addition, the Contractor I6 shall furnish to the Engineer an inventory listing all spare parts, the equipment 7 they are associated with, the name and address of the supplier, and the 8 delivered cost of each item. Copies of actual invoices for each item shall be II 9furnished with the inventory to substantiate the delivered cost. The Contractor 10 shall deliver the spare parts to the Engineer ten (10) days prior to start-up of 11 the equipment. I12 13 B. All spare parts shall be furnished in containers clearly identified in indelible 14 markings as to contents. Each container shall be packed for prolonged 15 storage. 16 17 C. No start-up activities shall take place until the specified spare parts have been I18 furnished. 19 20 1.08 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT I 21 22 A. Special care shall be taken to ensure proper alignment of all equipment, with I 23 particular attention to mechanical equipment such as pumps and electric 24 drives. The units shall be carefully aligned on their foundations by qualified 25 millwrights after their sole plates have been shimmed to true alignment at the I 26 27 anchor bolts. The anchor bolts shall be set in place and the nuts tightened against the shims. After the foundation alignments have been approved by 28 the manufacturer, the bedplates or wing feet of the equipment shall be I 29 30 securely bolted in place. The alignment of equipment shall be further checked after securing to the foundations, and after confirmation of all alignments, the 31 sole plates shall be finally grouted in place. The Contractor shall be U 32 33 responsible for the exact alignment of equipment with associated piping and, under no circumstances, will "pipe springing" be allowed. 34 I 35 36 B. All wedges, shims, filling pieces, keys, packing, or other materials necessary to properly align, level and secure apparatus in place shall be furnished by the 37 Contractor. All parts intended to be plumb or level must be proven exactly so. I 38 39 Any grinding necessary to bring parts to proper bearing after erection shall be done at the expense of the Contractor. 40 I41 1.09 MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION SCHEDULES 42 43 A. For all mechanical and electrical equipment furnished, the Contractor shall I 44 provide a list including the equipment name; address and telephone number of 45 the manufacturer's representative and service company so that service and /or 46 spare parts can be readily obtained. 1 47 1 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -5 10/10/14 1 1.10 INSTALLATION LISTS 2 3 A. All manufacturers or equipment suppliers who propose to furnish equipment or 4 products shall submit an installation list to the Engineer along with the required 5 Shop Drawings. 6 7 B. The installation list shall include all installations (minimum of two) where 8 identical equipment has been installed and has been in operation for a period 9 of at least one (1) year. 10 11 1.11 SLEEVES AND OPENINGS 12 13 A. The Contractor shall provide all openings, channels, chases, etc., and install 14 anchor bolts and other items to be embedded in concrete, as required to 15 complete the work under this Contract, together with those required by 16 subcontractors, and shall do all cutting and patching, excepting cutting and 17 patching of materials of a specified trade and as stated otherwise in the 18 following paragraph. 19 20 B. The Contractor shall coordinate with the subcontractors to provide all sleeves, 21 inserts, hangers, anchor bolts, etc., of the proper size and material for the 22 execution of the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for any corrective 23 cutting and refinishing required to make the necessary openings, chases, etc. 24 In no case shall beams, lintels or other structural members be cut without the 25 written acceptance of the Engineer. 26 27 1.12 PROVISIONS FOR CONTROL OF EROSION 28 29 A. Sufficient precautions shall be taken during construction to minimize the run - 30 off of polluting substances such as silt, clay, fuels, oils, bitumens, calcium 31 chloride, or other polluting materials harmful to humans, fish, or other life, into 32 the supplies and surface waters of the state. Control measures must be 33 adequate to assure that turbidity in the receiving water will not be increased 34 more than 10 nephelometric turbidity units (NTU), or as otherwise required by 35 the state or other controlling body, in water used for public water supply or fish 36 unless limits have been established for the particular water. In surface water 37 used for other purposes, the turbidity must not exceed 25 NTU unless 38 otherwise permitted. Special precautions shall be taken in the use of 39 construction equipment to prevent operations that promote erosion. 40 41 B. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the EPA -NPDES generic 42 permit for storm water discharges and the storm water pollution prevention 43 plan developed for the project. 44 45 1.13 VALVE INDICES 46 47 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing tags for all valves required 48 on the work and installing the tags required for his own work. Tags on above SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -6 10/10/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ground valves shall be non - corrosive metal or plastic, 2 inches in diameter, 19- 2 gauge thickness. Tags for buried valves shall be secured to a concrete base 3 as shown on the Drawings. Submit to the Engineer for review, two (2) 4 samples of each type of tag proposed and manufacturer's standard color chart 5 and letter styles. Tags shall have stamped on them the information shown on 6 the Drawings and the data described herein. The Contractor shall submit to 7 the Engineer for review, not less than 120 days before start-up, a valve 8 schedule containing all valves required for the work. The schedule shall 9 contain for each valve, the location, type, a number, words to identify the 10 valve's function, and the normal operating position. The information contained 11 in the valve schedules shall be coded on the tags in a system provided by the 12 Owner. Above ground valve tags shall be furnished with non - corrosive metal 13 wire for attachment thereof. 14 15 1.14 HURRICANE PREPAREDNESS PLAN 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 B. In the event of inclement weather, or whenever Engineer shall direct; the 23 Contractor shall carefully protect the Work and materials against damage or 24 injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of Engineer, any portion of Work or 25 material has been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the 26 Contractor or subcontractors to set protect the Work, such Work and materials 27 shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor. 28 29 1.15 WARRANTIES 30 31 A. The Contractor and the equipment manufacturers shall warranty all equipment 32 supplied under these Specifications for a minimum period of one (1) year 33 unless otherwise specified. Warranty period shall commence on the date that 34 the Work is accepted by the Owner as substantially complete. 35 36 B. The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, 37 design and materials. If any part of the equipment should fail during the 38 warranty period, it shall be replaced and returned to service at no expense to 39 the Owner. 40 41 C. If, within the warranty period, repairs or changes are required in connection 42 with work that in the opinion of the Engineer is rendered necessary as the 43 result of the use of materials, equipment or workmanship that is inferior, 44 defective, or not in accordance with the terms of the Contract, the Contractor 45 shall promptly upon receipt of notice from the Owner and without expense to A. Within 30 days of the date of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer and Owner a Hurricane Preparedness Plan. The Plan should outline the necessary measures that the Contractor proposes to perform at no additional cost to the Owner in case of a hurricane warning. 46 the Owner: 47 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -7 10/10/14 1 1 1. Place in satisfactory condition in every particular all of such work and 2 correct all defects herein. 3 t 4 . 2. Repair or replace all damage to buildings, the site, or equipment or 5 contents thereof, which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is the result of 6 the use of materials, equipment or workmanship that are inferior, I 7 defective, or not in accordance with the terms of the Contract. 8 9 3. Repair or replace any work or material or equipment disturbed in I 10 fulfilling any such guarantee. 11 12 D. If within ten (10) days after receiving notice, the Contractor fails to proceed to I 13 comply with the terms of the warranty, the Owner may have the defects 14 corrected, and the Contractor and his surety shall be liable for all expenses 15 incurred, provided, however, that in case of an emergency where, in the I 16 opinion of the Owner, delay would cause Toss or damage, repairs may be 17 started without notice being given to the Contractor and the Contractor shall 18 pay the cost thereof. 1 19 20 E. All special guarantees or warranties applicable to specific parts of the work, as 21 may be stipulated in the Contract Documents, shall be subject to the terms of I 22 this paragraph during the first year following acceptance. All special 23 guarantees and manufacturers' warranties shall be assembled by the I24 Contractor and delivered to the Engineer, along with a summary list thereof, 25 before the acceptance of the Work. 26 I 27 F The manufacturer's warranty period shall run concurrently with the 28 Contractor's warranty or guarantee period. No exception to this provision shall 29 be allowed. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining equipment I 30 warranties from each of the respective suppliers or manufacturers for all the 31 equipment specified. The form of warranty may be included in the Contract 32 Documents, or shall otherwise be acceptable to the Owner. I 33 34 G. In the event that the manufacturer is unwilling to provide a one -year warranty 35 commencing at the time of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall obtain I 36 from the manufacturer a three (3) year warranty starting at the time that the 37 manufacturer certified proper installation as specified elsewhere herein. This 38 three -year warranty shall not relieve the Contractor of the one -year warranty I 39 commencing upon Substantial Completion. 40 41 H. The Contractor's one -year warranty or guarantee period shall be part of the I 42 project's Performance Bond. 43 44 I. Additional warranty requirements are specified in Section 01740. I 45 46 1.16 WATERTIGHTNESS 47 1 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -8 10/10/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A. Special precautions shall be taken in the curing of concrete to reduce concrete 2 cracking. All water - retaining structures (those that are intended to hold a 3 liquid) shall be filled and tested for leaks by the Contractor, with water 4 acceptable to the Engineer, prior to surface coating or painting. Procedure 5 and manner in which any leaks are repaired must be reviewed by the 6 Engineer. All costs associated with the testing and repair of leaks shall be at 7 the expense of the Contractor. 8 9 1.17 CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS 10 11 A. The Contractor shall strictly adhere to the specific requirements of the 12 governmental unit or agencies having jurisdiction over the work. Wherever 13 there is a difference in the requirements of a jurisdictional body and these 14 Specifications, the more stringent shall apply. 15 16 1.18 PUBLIC NUISANCE 17 18 A. The Contractor shall not create a public nuisance including, but not limited to, 19 encroachment on adjacent lands, flooding of adjacent lands, or excessive 20 noise. 21 22 B. Sound levels measured by the Engineer personnel shall not exceed 45 dBA 7 23 PM to 7 AM or 55 dBA 7 AM to 7 PM. This sound level shall be measured at 24 the exterior of the exterior wall of the nearest residence. Levels at the equip - 25 ment shall not exceed 85 dBA measured five (5) feet from the equipment at 26 any time. Sound levels in excess of these values are sufficient cause to have 27 the work suspended. Work stoppage by the Engineer or Owner for excessive 28 noise shall not relieve the Contractor of completing the Work in accordance 29 with the Contract Time(s), at no additional cost to the Owner. 30 31 C. No extra charge may be made for time lost due to work stoppage resulting 32 from the creation of a public nuisance. 33 34 1.19 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 35 36 A. Contractor shall perform work in accordance with OSHA, state and local safety 37 requirements. 38 39 1.20 SUSPENSION OF WORK DUE TO WEATHER 40 41 A. During inclement weather, all work that could be damaged or rendered inferior 42 by such weather conditions shall be suspended. The orders and decisions of 43 the Engineer as to suspensions shall be final and binding. The ability to issue 44 such an order shall not be interpreted as a requirement to do so. During 45 suspension of the work for any cause, the work shall be suitably covered and 46 protected so as to preserve it from injury by the weather or otherwise; and, if 47 the Engineer shall so direct, rubbish and surplus materials shall be removed. 48 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -9 10/10/14 1 B. The Contractor shall be responsible for documenting all inclement weather 2 conditions. 3 4 1.21 RELOCATIONS 5 6 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the relocation of structures, including 7 but not limited to light poles, signs, sign poles, fences, piping, conduits and 8 drains that interfere with the positioning of the work as set out on the 9 Drawings. The cost of all such relocations shall be borne by the Contractor at 10 no additional cost to the Owner. 11 12 1.22 SALVAGE 13 14 A. Any existing equipment or material including, but not limited to, valves, pipes, 15 fittings, couplings, etc., which is removed or replaced as a result of 16 construction under this project may be designated y the Owner to be salvaged. 17 Any existing equipment or material to be salvaged shall remain onsite and the 18 Contractor shall be responsible for delivering the salvage equipment/materials 19 to the exact location onsite as directed by the Engineer. 20 21 1.23 PERMITS 22 23 A. Upon notice of award, the Contractor shall immediately apply for all applicable 24 permits, not previously obtained by the Owner, from the appropriate 25 governmental agency or agencies. No work shall commence until all 26 applicable permits have been obtained and copies delivered to the Engineer. 27 The costs for obtaining all permits shall be borne by the Contractor. 28 29 1.24 PUMPING 30 31 A. The Contractor with his own equipment shall perform all pumping necessary to 32 prevent flotation of any part of the structures during construction operations. 33 All water collected during pumping operations shall be properly disposed of in 34 accordance with these specifications and /or regulatory requirements, 35 whichever is more stringent. 36 37 B. The Contractor shall, with his own equipment, pump out water that may seep 38 or leak into the excavations or structures. All water collected during pumping 39 operations shall be properly disposed of in accordance with these 40 specifications and /or regulatory requirements, whichever is more stringent. 41 Below grade galleries and other operating areas shall be kept dry at all times. 42 The extent of pumping required in tanks, channels and other non - operating 43 areas will be determined by the Owner /Engineer. 44 45 1.25 NOTIFICATION OF WORK ON EXISTING FACILITIES 46 47 A. Before commencing work on any of the existing structures or equipment, the 48 Contractor shall notify the Owner /Engineer, in writing, at least 10 calendar 49 days in advance of the date he proposed to commence such work. SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -10 10/10/14 2 1.26 OWNER OCCUPANCY AND OPERATION OF COMPLETED FACILITIES 3 4 A. It is assumed that portions of the work will be completed prior to completion of 5 the entire work. Upon completion of construction of each individual facility, ' 6 including testing, if the Owner, at his sole discretion, desires to accept the 7 individual facility, the Contractor will be issued a dated certificate of completion 8 and acceptance for each individual facility. The Owner will assume ownership ' 9 and begin operation of the individual facility on that date and the one -year 10 guaranty period shall commence on that date. The Owner has the option of 11 not accepting any individual completed facility, but accepting the entire work ' 12 as a whole when it is completed and tested. 13 14 1.27 POTENTIAL IMPACTS ON THE SCHEDULE ' 15 16 A. The Owner may incur penalties for failure to maintain service /operations. 17 Therefore, the Bidders are noticed that this work is at an active and operating 18 Water Reclamation Facility and that plant operations, regulatory compliance 19 and required testing will take priority over and may impact the construction 20 schedule. '21 22 23 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) '24 25 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 26 '27 28 END OF SECTION 29 1 1 1 1 1 1 ' SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -11 10/10/14 1 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 1 i 1 1 1 1. i1 1 1 1 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -12 10/10/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01040 2 3 COORDINATION 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.1 PROJECT COORDINATION 8 9 A. The Contractor shall provide for the complete coordination of all construction 10 efforts. This shall include but not necessarily be limited to coordination of the 11 following: 12 13 1. The work of subcontractors. 14 15 2. The flow of material and equipment from suppliers. 16 17 3. The effort of equipment manufacturers during testing and start-up. 18 19 4. The interrelated work with public and private utility companies. 20 21 5. The interrelated work with the Owner where tie -ins to existing facilities 22 are required. 23 24 5. The effort of independent testing agencies. 25 26 6. The work to be provided under allowances. 27 28 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 29 30 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 31 32 33 END OF SECTION 34 COORDINATION 01040 -1 07/15/14 1 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 COORDINATION 01040 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 SECTION 01050 2 I 3 4 FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 1 9 A. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all field engineering and survey 10 services required. Such work shall include survey work to establish existing 11 and /or proposed lines and grades and to locate and lay out site boundaries I12 and easements, project control, site improvements, structures, controlling lines 13 and levels and all other survey required for the construction of the work. Also 14 included are such engineering services as are specified or required to execute I15 the Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and surveyors shall be 16 licensed professionals registered in the State of Florida. I 17 18 B. The accuracy of any method of staking shall be the responsibility of the 19 Contractor. All surveying for vertical and horizontal control shall be the I 20 responsibility of the Contractor. 21 22 C. The Contractor shall be held responsible for the preservation of all stakes and 23 marks. If any stakes or marks are carelessly or willfully disturbed by the I 24 Contractor, the Contractor shall not proceed with any work until he has 25 established such points, marks, lines and elevations as may be necessary for I 26 the prosecution of the work. 27 28 1.02 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS I29 30 A. Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those 31 designated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall locate and protect control I 32 33 points prior to starting site work and shall preserve all permanent reference points during construction. In working near any permanent property corners or 34 reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb any I 35 such markers. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed 36 due to the proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them 37 referenced and reset by a Registered Land Surveyor. I38 39 1.03 PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS 40 I 41 42 A. The Contractor shall engage the services of a Florida Registered Land Surveyor to establish all lines and grades on the Drawings necessary to fully 43 construct the work in accordance with Chapter 5J -17 of the Florida I 44 Administrative Code. 45 46 B. The Registered Land Surveyor shall establish and stake all pipeline and I 47 roadway right -of -way adjacent to construction at 100' intervals on tangents, 50' 48 intervals on curves and at all changes in direction. The surveyor shall place FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING 01050 -1 10/10/14 1 1 lath and hub at such points with stations indicated. Tack in hub shall not be 2 permitted. 3 4 1. The Registered Land Surveyor shall utilize current right -of -way maps, 5 plats and property deeds, all being of public record, in conjunction with 6 existing monumentation to establish the existing right -of -way lines and 7 utility easement boundaries. 8 9 C. The Registered Land Surveyor shall establish a temporary benchmark system 10 in accordance with Chapter 5J -17 F.A.C. and shall provide a written list to the 11 Contractor for his use. 12 13 D. The Contractor shall provide an as -built survey of all pipes and structures 14 constructed under the project that shall be signed and sealed by a Florida 15 Registered Surveyor and Mapper. At minimum, the As -Built Survey shall 16 include: 17 18 1. Top of concrete elevations and northings and eastings for all basins 19 and structures; 20 2. Weir elevations for all basins and structures; 21 3. Pipe inverts for gravity pipelines and top of pipe elevations for pressure 22 pipelines for all yard piping, electrical ductbanks and fiber optice cable 23 conduits, and northings and eastings of all changes in pipe direction. 24 25 1.04 RECORDS 26 27 A. Contractor shall maintain a complete, accurate log of all control and survey 28 work as construction progresses. Survey notes indicating the information and 29 measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall be kept in 30 notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the Record Drawings. 31 32 1.05 SUBMITTALS 33 34 A. Submit name and address of surveyor to the Engineer. 35 36 B. On request of the Engineer, submit documentation to verify accuracy of field 37 engineering work. 38 39 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 40 41 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 42 43 44 END OF SECTION FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING 01050 -2 10/10/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01065 2 3 PERMITS AND EASEMENTS 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the construction of the 10 project adheres to City, County, State, and Federal standards and regulations, 11 and to all permits and easements acquired for the project. 12 13 B. The Contractor shall coordinate all work within rights -of -way with the agency 14 having jurisdiction, including all road /lane closures, road /lane narrowing and 15 detours. 16 17 C. Copies of any Permits, Deeds, Easement Agreements or License Agreements 18 that the Owner has obtained will be available for review by prospective bidders 19 at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room — website address: 20 www .myclearwater.com /cityprojects. The Contractor shall conduct all 21 operations in accordance with the requirements of all Permits, Easements and 22 License Agreements. 23 24 D. Where Permits, Deeds, Easement Agreements, or License Agreements 25 require that certain Work is to be performed only in the presence of a 26 representative of the permitting entity, the Contractor shall provide all 27 coordination and notification required to assure full compliance with the permit 28 conditions. 29 30 E. The Owner has obtained or will obtain certain Permits, Deeds, 31 Easement Agreements, or License Agreements required for construction of 32 the project. A listing of those Permits, Deeds, Easement Agreements, or 33 License Agreements that the Owner has obtained or applied for is listed 34 below. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all other Permits, 35 Easement Agreements, or License Agreements necessary for the proper 36 execution of the Work not specifically noted to be obtained by the Owner. 37 38 F The Contractor shall comply with all terms, conditions, provisions and 39 requirements of all permits issued or to be issued for the Project. Should the 40 Contractor's failure to comply with said permits lead to enforcement action 41 by any of the permitting or jurisdictional agencies, any resultant costs in 42 the forms of repairs, fines, penalties, administrative costs, attorney's fees or 43 consultant fees shall be deducted from the Contract Price or shall be 44 otherwise collectible from the Contractor and its Surety, jointly and severally. 45 46 G. The Contractor shall notify the Owner a minimum of 30 days prior to the 47 expiration of a permit if said expiration occurs prior to completion of the Work. PERMITS AND EASEMENTS 01065 -1 CONFORMED 07/15/14 1 2 3 4 5 6 1.02 PERMITS 7 8 9 H. Prior to any land clearing or tree removal, the Contractor shall construct a soil tracking device in accordance with current Florida Department of Transportation design standards. 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 A. Permits by, or applied for by, the Owner are as follows: Permit Title Agency Permit/File Number Building Permit City of Clearwater TBD B. Each bidder shall be familiar with the requirements of the permit conditions that relate to construction activities and shall include the cost of satisfying these permit conditions in developing a bid for the project. C. At a minimum, the Contractor shall register with appropriate authorities, obtain the following permits, comply with their respective conditions, and submit copies of all applications and final permits to Engineer and Owner: 1. City of Clearwater building permit(s) 2. Generic Permit for the Production of Groundwater (if required) 3. Storm Water NPDES (if required) D. The Contractor shall obtain all construction permits required including those necessary for clearing, grubbing, and tree removal. No clearing shall occur and no earth - moving equipment shall be placed on -site until after the permits have been issued. E. The Contractor shall obtain, implement and comply with all local and state permits required for dewatering, including consumptive or water use permitting, if required for construction from the Southwest Florida Water Management District. F. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining, and complying with, all required permits relating to discharges from dewatering shall obtain a State of Florida Department of Environmental Protection Generic Permit for the PERMITS AND EASEMENTS 01065 -2 CONFORMED 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Discharge of Produced Ground Water From Any Non - Contaminated Site 2 Activity in accordance with 62- 621.300(2) FAC. See specification Section 3 02140 Temporary Dewatering. 4 5 G. The Contractor shall obtain, implement and comply with the requirements of a 6 Generic Permit for Storm Water Discharge from Large and Small Construction 7 Activities (CGP), in accordance with 62- 621.300(4) FAC. The Contractor shall 8 submit a CGP Notice of Intent (NOI) to the Florida Department of 9 Environmental Protection (FDEP) and develop and submit a Storm Water 10 Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) as part of the CGP. The Contactor shall: 11 12 1. Obtain the CGP form and NOI Application Form from the FDEP or its 13 website, DEP Documents 62- 621.300(4)(a) and 62- 621.300(4)(b), 14 respectively. 15 16 2. Develop an SWPPP in compliance with FDEP storm water permitting 17 rules that shall include, at a minimum, the following: 18 19 a. A site evaluation of how and where pollutants may be mobilized 20 by storm water. 21 b. A site plan for managing storm water runoff. 22 c. Identification of appropriate erosion and sediment controls 23 including Best Management Practices to reduce erosion, 24 sedimentation, and storm water pollution. 25 d. A maintenance and inspection schedule. 26 e. Plan and procedures for record keeping. 27 f. A map depicting storm water exit areas. 28 29 3. Complete and submit the NOI Application, including all attachments, to 30 the local FDEP office along with the appropriate application fee. 31 32 4. The Contractor shall furnish a copy of the FDEP Notice of Permit, along 33 34 35 1.03 EASEMENTS with a copy of the SWPPP, to the Engineer. 36 37 38 39 1 1 40 A. The Contractor shall comply with all provisions of the various easements for the following parcels: Easement Number Owner County Parcel ID PERMITS AND EASEMENTS 01065 -3 CONFORMED 07/15/14 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) 4 5 6 END OF SECTION PERMITS AND EASEMENTS 01065 -4 CONFORMED 07/15/14 1 SECTION 01090 12 3 REFERENCE STANDARDS 4 ' 5 6 PART 1 — GENERAL 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 1 8 9 A. Abbreviations and acronyms are used in the Contract Documents to identify 10 reference standards. '11 12 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 13 ' 14 A. Application: When a standard is specified by reference, comply with 15 requirements and recommendations stated in that standard, except when 16 requirements are modified by the Contract Documents or applicable codes 17 establish stricter standards. 18 19 B. Publication Date: The publication in effect on the date of issue of Contract 20 21 Documents, except when a specific publication date is specified. 22 1.03 ABBREVIATIONS, NAMES, AND ADDRESSES OF ORGANIZATIONS '23 24 Obtain copies of referenced standards direct from publication source, when needed 25 for proper performance of Work, or when required for submittal by Contract 26 Documents. 27 28 AA Aluminum Association '29 900 19th Street NW 30 Washington, DC 20006 31 32 AASHTO American Association of State Highway 33 and Transportation Officials 34 444 North Capitol Street, NW Suite 249 35 Washington, DC 20001 36 37 ACI American Concrete Institute 38 38800 Country Club Drive 39 Farmington Hills, MI 48331 40 41 Al Asphalt Institute 42 2696 Research Park Drive 43 Lexington KY 40511 44 45 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 46 One East Wacker Drive 47 Suite 3100 48 Chicago, IL 60601 -2001 ' REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 -1 07/15/14 1 2 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 3 1140 Connecticut Avenue 4 Suite 705 5 Washington DC 20036 6 7 ANSI American National Standards Institute 8 1819 L Street, NW 9 Washington, DC 20036 10 11 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 12 Three Park Avenue 13 New York, NY 10016 -5990 14 15 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 16 100 Barr Harbor Drive 17 West Conshohocken, PA, 19428 18 19 AWWA American Water Works Association 20 6666 W. Quincy Avenue 21 Denver, CO 80235 22 23 AWS American Welding Society 24 550 N.W. LeJeune Road 25 Miami, FL 33126 26 27 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 28 933 N. Plum Grove Road 29 Schaumburg, IL 60173 -4758 30 31 FS Federal Specification General Services 32 Administration Specifications and Consumer 33 Information Distribution Section (WFSIS) 34 470 L'enfant Plaza — Suite 8100 35 Washington, DC 20407 36 37 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association 38 1300 North 17th Street 39 Suite 1847 40 Rosslyn, VA 22209 41 42 PCA Portland Cement Association 43 5420 Old Orchard Road 44 Skokie, IL 60077 45 46 PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute 47 209 W. Jackson Blvd. 48 Chicago, IL 60606 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SSPC Society for Protective Coatings 3 40 24th Street,. 6th floor 4 Pittsburgh, PA 15222 5 6 UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 7 333 Pfingston Road 8 Northbrook, IL 60062 9 10 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 11 12 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 13 14 15 END OF SECTION 16 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 -3 07/15/14 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK REFERENCE STANDARDS 07/15/14 01090 -4 1 1 1 SECTION 01150 I 2 3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4 I 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK I8 9 A. This section defines the Work included in each bid item in the Bid / Proposal 10 section of the Contract Documents. Payment will be made based on the 1 11 specified items included in the description in this section for each pay item 12 number. 13 14 B. All prices included in the Bid Form / Schedule of Prices shall be full 15 compensation for all labor, supervision, materials, tools, equipment, and 16 incidentals necessary to complete the Work as shown on the Drawings and /or I17 as specified in the Contract Documents. Actual quantities of each item bid on 18 a unit price basis will be determined upon completion of the construction in the 19 manner established for each item in this section. Payment for all items listed 20 in the Bid Form / Schedule of Prices shall constitute full compensation for all 21 work shown and /or specified to be performed under the Contract. 22 I23 C. Restoration is considered to be an integral part of the Work, and all bid prices 24 shall include the cost of restoration necessitated by the Work related to that I 25 bid item. All existing structures and property including, but not limited to, 26 paving, stabilized roads, drainage piping and ditches, catch basins, head 27 walls, yard culverts, lawns, fences, trees, shrubs, ground areas, walkways, I 28 sidewalks, driveways, alleys, curbs, gutters, irrigation systems, buildings, 29 structures and equipment that are altered, removed or damaged during 30 construction shall be restored to the same or better condition than existed prior I 31 to construction at no additional cost to the Owner. Cleanup is an integral part 32 of restoration process. 33 I 34 D. The Contractor shall exercise care to preserve and protect existing facilities 35 during all periods for the construction phase. All existing structures, 36 equipment, and private property, including, but not limited to paving, stabilized I 37 38 roads, drainage piping and ditches, latch basins, head walls, yard culverts, lawns, fences, trees, shrubs, ground areas, walkways, driveways, alleys, 39 curbs, gutters and irrigations systems that are altered, removed or damaged I 40 during construction and are not included in the proposed alterations of the new 41 work shall be restored to the same or better condition than existed prior to 42 construction. I43 44 E. The Contractor shall be responsible for all traffic maintenance requirements 45 necessitated by the construction /installation of those specific bid items I 46 requiring traffic maintenance. The cost for this work shall be included in the 47 specific unit price submitted for that particular bid item. 1 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01150 -1 10/10/14 1 2 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3 4 PART 3 — EXECUTION 5 6 3.01 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 7 8 A. Filter Equipment and Services (Pay Item 1A) 9 10 1. The Owner has pre- negotiated the scope of supply and the price of 11 specific items of equipment and services, as listed below: 12 13 • Rapid Sand Filters 14 15 2. The Contractor shall employ the manufacturer of the pre- negotiated 16 equipment and shall incorporate such materials and services into the 17 project. 18 19 3. The manufacturer of the equipment listed above has agreed to provide 20 the materials and services as fully described in the scope of work, 21 proposal, quotation, or other documents attached hereto in the 22 Appendix as part of the Contract Documents. The pre- negotiated 23 equipment prices will be held firm by the manufacturer for 12 months 24 from the date of the "Notice to Proceed ". The Contractor shall be 25 responsible for ordering equipment and services from the manufacturer 26 throughout the duration of the Contract. The Contractor shall bear all 27 costs related to equipment or service price increases by the 28 manufacturer after 12 months from the date of the "Notice to Proceed ". 29 30 4. The Contractor shall provide, furnish and install under Bid Item 1C, all 31 work, materials, equipment, and hardware not described in the 32 manufacturer's scope of supply including, but not limited to, all 33 coordination, ordering and scheduling of the equipment delivery to the 34 site, transportation, unloading, storage, installation in strict accordance 35 with the manufacturer's instructions, start-up services, O &M manuals in 36 electronic format, and all other labor, materials, tools, appliances, 37 supervision and incidentals not included in the aforementioned 38 manufacturer's scope of supply, proposal, quotation, etc., but 39 necessary for the proper completion of the work. 40 41 5. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price 42 included in the Bid Form for Filter Equipment and Services shall not be 43 made. The cost for this equipment and services shall be paid by the 44 City to the manufacturer and deducted from the Contract by Addendum. 45 46 6. Payment: Payment of the lump sum price included under Pay Item 1A 47 shall not be made. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01150 -2 10/10/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 B. Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) — Sales Tax Savings Retained by the City (Pay 3 Item 1B) 4 5 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price 6 stipulated in the Bid Form for ODP — Sales Tax Savings Retained by 7 the City shall not be made. The tax savings amount shall be deducted 8 from the Contract by Addendum. 9 10 2. Payment: Payment of the lump sum price included under Pay Item 1B 11 shall not be made. 12 13 C. Filter Rehabilitation Complete (Pay Item 1C) 14 15 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price bid for 16 Filter Rehabilitation Complete shall not be made and all items shall be 17 included in the lump sum price bid. 18 19 2. Payment: Payment of the lump sum price bid for Pay Item 1C shall be 20 made on a percent complete basis in accordance with the Schedule of 21 Values and shall be full compensation for the furnishing of all labor, 22 materials, tools and equipment, including, but not limited to, 23 disassembly, removal and disposal of filter cell components (except the 24 underdrain frames); repair, painting and re- grouting the underdrain 25 frames and gullet covers; installation of filter equipment and filter control 26 program provided by the filter manufacturer; filter control panel; fiber 27 optic patch panels, conduit and cable; integration of filter controls into 28 the existing plant SCADA system; high pressure air compressor system 29 and tubing; flow switch on the existing eyewash shower and integration 30 into the existing plant SCADA system; replacement of filter No. 5 31 influent pipe and link seal; and, all supervision, inspection, startup, 32 testing, and coordination, all pertinent Division 1 requirements and all 33 other services necessary for the complete rehabilitation of the Rapid 34 Sand Filters as detailed in the Contract Documents. 35 36 The Owner has pre- negotiated the scope of supply and the price of 37 specific items of equipment and materials on the items listed below. : 38 39 • Rapid Sand Filter 40 41 The scope and negotiated price are provided in the Appendix. 42 43 The Contractor shall employ the services of the manufacturer of the 44 pre- negotiated equipment and incorporate such materials and services 45 into the project. 46 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01150 -3 10/10/14 1 The Contractor shall provide all work not described in the filter 2 equipment manufacturer's scope of supply including, but not limited to, 3 all coordination, ordering and scheduling of the equipment delivery to 4 the site, transportation, unloading, storage, installation in strict 5 accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, start-up services, 6 performance testing, O &M manuals in electronic format, and all other 7 labor, materials, tools, appliances, supervision and incidentals not 8 included in the manufacturer's scope of supply, proposal, quotation, 9 etc., but necessary for the proper completion of the work. 10 11 D. Filter Angle Iron Clips (Pay Item 1D) 12 13 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment for furnishing and installing 14 Filter Angle Iron Clips shall be made on a per -each basis for each Filter 15 Angle Iron Clip removed and replaced, as directed by the Engineer. 16 17 2. Payment: Payment for Pay Item 1D shall be made at the unit price bid 18 in the proposal and shall be full compensation for removing the existing 19 clip, furnishing and welding a new clip to the filter frame, and for the 20 furnishing of all labor, supervision, coordination, materials, tools, 21 equipment, paint, clean -up, demobilization, and all other services 22 necessary to perform the work described in the Contract Documents. 23 24 E. East WRF Influent Pump Station Rehabilitation (Bid Item 2) - NOT IN 25 CONTRACT 26 27 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price bid for 28 Item 2 East WRF Influent Pump Station Rehabilitation shall not be 29 made and all items shall be included in the lump sum price bid. 30 31 2. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 2 shall be made in accordance with the 32 Schedule of Values and shall be full compensation for the furnishing of 33 all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and supervision required to 34 perform the work as shown on the drawings and specified herein 35 including but not limited to design, furnish, install, operate, and maintain 36 a redundant bypass pumping system, removing the existing coating and 37 cleaning the wet well interior concrete surfaces and pump discharge 38 piping, preparation of the wet well surfaces and piping, installation of a 39 multilayered wet well coating system to the interior surfaces of the wet 40 well, coating the discharge piping, installing a new spray water system, 41 clean, replace hardware, and coat the valves and piping inside the 42 valve vault, inspection, startup, testing, and coordination services, all 43 pertinent Division 1 requirements; and, all other services necessary for 44 the complete rehabilitation of the Wet Well at the East WRF as detailed 45 in the Contract Documents. 46 47 F. Mobilization (Bid Item 3) MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01150 -4 10/10/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price bid for 3 Mobilization shall be on a lump sum basis, but the cost shall not exceed 4 four percent (4 %) of the proposed Base Bid Total. 5 6 2. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 3 shall be full compensation for all 7 costs associated with initiating the project as limited by other sections of 8 the agreement including the Contractor's Performance and Payment 9 Bonds. Payment for these performances shall be based on the terms 10 of Section 01505 and in accordance with the Schedule of Values. 11 12 G. Indemnification (Bid Item 4) 13 14 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the amount stipulated 15 under Bid Item 4 Indemnification shall not be made and all items shall 16 be included in the lump sum. 17 18 2. Payment: Payment of One Hundred Dollars ($100.00) for Bid Item 4 19 shall be full compensation for Indemnification of the Owner and the 20 Owner's Engineer as specified in the General Conditions, and shall be 21 included in the first payment request. 22 23 H. Filter Influent Valves and Actuators — Additive Alternate (Bid Item 5A) 24 25 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment for furnishing and installing 26 Filter Influent Valves and Actuators shall be made on a per -each basis 27 for each Filter Influent Valve and Actuator removed and replaced, as 28 directed by the Engineer. 29 30 2. Payment: Payment of the unit price bid for Pay Item 5A shall be full 31 compensation for furnishing and installing the Filter Influent Valves and 32 Actuators including, but not limited to; removal of the existing valve and 33 actuator, installation of new valve and actuator; all pertinent 34 Specification Division 1 requirements; the removal and re- painting of 35 any pipe fittings removed for this Work; the painting of all new filter 36 valves and actuators to match existing piping; and, the furnishings of all 37 labor, tools, equipment, rigging, restoration, testing, start-up, clean -up, 38 demobilization, and any other materials or items required for the 39 complete replacement of the Filter Influent Valves and Actuators. 40 41 I. Filter Filtrate Valves and Actuators — Additive Alternate (Bid Item 5B) 42 43 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment for furnishing and installing 44 Filter Filtrate Valves and Actuators shall be made on a per -each basis 45 for each Filter Filtrate Valve and Actuator removed and replaced, as 46 directed by the Engineer. 47 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01150 -5 10/10/14 1 2. Payment: Payment of the unit price bid for Pay Item 5B shall be full 2 compensation for furnishing and installing the Filter Filtrate Valves and 3 Actuators including, but not limited to; removal of the existing valve and 4 actuator, installation of new valve and pneumatic actuator; all pertinent 5 Specification Division 1 requirements; the removal and re- painting of 6 any pipe fittings removed for this Work; the painting of all new filter 7 valves and actuators to match existing piping; and, the furnishings of all 8 labor, tools, equipment, rigging, restoration, testing, start-up, clean -up, 9 demobilization, and any other materials or items required for the 10 complete replacement of the Filter Filtrate Valves and Actuators. 11 12 J. Filter Backwash Valves and Actuators — Additive Alternate (Bid Item 5C) 13 14 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment for furnishing and installing 15 Filter Backwash Valves and Actuators shall be made on a per -each 16 basis for each Filter Backwash Valve and Actuator removed and 17 replaced, as directed by the Engineer. 18 19 2. Payment: Payment of the unit price bid for Pay Item 5C shall be full 20 compensation for furnishing and installing the Filter Backwash Valves 21 and Actuators including, but not limited to; removal of the existing valve 22 and actuator, installation of new valve and pneumatic actuator; all 23 pertinent Specification Division 1 requirements; the removal and re- 24 painting of any pipe fittings removed for this Work; the painting of all 25 new filter valves and actuators to match existing piping; and, the 26 furnishings of all labor, tools, equipment, rigging, restoration, testing, 27 start-up, clean -up, demobilization, and any other materials or items 28 required for the complete replacement of the Filter Backwash Valves 29 and Actuators. 30 31 K. Mudwell Valves — Additive Alternate (Bid Item 5D) 32 33 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment for furnishing and installing 34 Mudwell Valves shall be made on a per -each basis for each Filter 35 Mudwell Valve removed and replaced, as directed by the Engineer. 36 37 2. Payment: Payment of the unit price bid for Pay Item 5D shall be full 38 compensation for furnishing and installing the Mudwell Valves including, 39 but not limited to; removal of the existing valve and actuator, installation 40 of new valve, mounting the existing actuator to the new valve; all 41 pertinent Specification Division 1 requirements; the removal and re- 42 painting of any pipe fittings removed for this Work; the painting of all 43 new filter valves and actuators to match existing piping; and, the 44 furnishings of all labor, tools, equipment, rigging, restoration, testing, 45 start-up, clean -up, demobilization, and any other materials or items 46 required for the complete replacement of the Mudwell Valves and 47 Actuators. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01150 -6 10/10/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 L. Filter Air Mix Valves and Actuators — Additive Alternate (Bid Item 5E) 3 4 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment for furnishing and installing 5 Filter Air Mix Valves and Actuators shall be made on a per -each basis 6 for each Filter Air Mix Valve and Actuator removed and replaced, where 7 directed by the Engineer. 8 9 2. Payment: Payment of the unit price bid for Pay Item 5E shall be full 10 compensation for furnishing and installing the Filter Air Mix Valves and 11 Actuators including, but not limited to; removal of the existing valve and 12 actuator, installation of new valve and pneumatic actuator; all pertinent 13 Specification Division 1 requirements; the removal and re- painting of 14 any pipe fittings removed for this Work; the painting of all new filter 15 valves and actuators to match existing piping; and, the furnishings of all 16 labor, tools, equipment, rigging, restoration, testing, start-up, clean -up, 17 demobilization, and any other materials or items required for the 18 complete replacement of the Filter Air Mix Valves and Actuators. 19 20 M. Backwash Pump Check Valves — Additive Alternate (Bid Item 5F) 21 22 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment for furnishing and installing 23 Backwash Pump Check Valves shall be made on a per -each basis for 24 each Backwash Pump Check Valve removed and replaced, where 25 directed by the Engineer. 26 27 2. Payment: Payment of the unit price bid for Pay Item 5F shall be full 28 compensation for furnishing and installing the Backwash Pump Check 29 Valves including, but not limited to; removal of the existing valve, 30 installation of new valve; all pertinent Specification Division 1 31 requirements; the removal and re- painting of any pipe fittings removed 32 for this Work; the painting of all new filter valves to match existing 33 piping; and, the furnishings of all labor, tools, equipment, rigging, 34 restoration, testing, start-up, clean -up, demobilization, and any other 35 materials or items required for the complete replacement of the 36 Backwash Pump Check Valves. 37 38 N. Backwash Pump Butterfly Valves — Additive Alternate (Bid Item 5G) 39 40 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment for furnishing and installing 41 Backwash Pump Butterfly Valves shall be made on a per -each basis for 42 each Backwash Pump Butterfly Valve removed and replaced, where 43 directed by the Engineer. 44 45 2. Payment: Payment of the unit price bid for Pay Item 5G shall be full 46 compensation for furnishing and installing the Backwash Pump Butterfly 47 Valves including, but not limited to; removal of the existing valve and MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01150 -7 10/10/14 1 actuator, installation of new valve and manual actuator; all pertinent 2 Specification Division 1 requirements; the removal and re- painting of 3 any pipe fittings removed for this Work; the painting of all new filter 4 valves and actuators to match existing piping; and, the furnishings of all 5 labor, tools, equipment, rigging, restoration, testing, start-up, clean -up, 6 demobilization, and any other materials or items required for the 7 complete replacement of the Backwash Pump Butterfly Valves. 8 9 10 END OF SECTION 11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01150 -8 10/10/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01152 2 3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. Submit Applications for Payment to the Engineer in accordance with the 10 approved payment schedule, and in the format established by the Owner. 11 12 B. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review, the proposed Application 13 for Payment form, prior to the first payment request. Format shall be MS 14 Excel. 15 16 1.02 FORMAT AND DATA REQUIRED 17 18 A. Submit applications typed on forms either provided in these Specifications, 19 furnished by the Owner, or as approved by the Owner, with itemized data 20 typed on 8 -1/2 inch x 11 inch or 8 -1/2 inch x 14 -inch white paper continuation 21 sheets. 22 23 B. Provide itemized data on continuation sheet: 24 25 1. Format, schedules, line items and values: those of the Schedule of 26 Values accepted by the Engineer. 27 28 1.03 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR EACH PROGRESS PAYMENT 29 30 A. Application Form: 31 32 1. Fill in required information, including that for Change Orders executed 33 prior to date of submittal of application. 34 35 2. Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with respective totals indicated 36 on continuation sheets. 37 38 3. Execute certification with signature of a responsible officer of the 39 Contractor. 40 41 B. Continuation Sheets: 42 43 1. Fill in total list of all scheduled component items of work, with item 44 number and scheduled dollar value for each item. 45 46 2. Fill in dollar value in each column for each scheduled line item when 47 work has been performed or products stored. APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01152 -1 07/15/14 1 3. List each Change Order executed prior to date of submission, at the 2 end of the continuation sheets. 3 4 a. List by Change Order Number, and description, as for an original 5 component item of work. 6 7 4. To receive approval for payment on component material stored on site, 8 submit copies of the original invoices with the Application for Payment. 9 The application for payment must also include a table summarizing the 10 amount of each invoice and the schedule of values line item to which 11 the stored materials apply. 12 13 1.05 SUBSTANTIATING DATA FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS 14 15 A. Provide substantiating data, containing suitable information for review of costs 16 requested with a cover letter identifying: 17 18 1. Project. 19 20 2. Application number and date. 21 22 3. Detailed list of enclosures. 23 24 4. For stored products: 25 26 a. Item number and identification as shown on application. 27 28 b. Description of specific material. 29 30 c. Supplier invoices. 31 32 d. A table identifying stored material, amount stored, amount 33 installed, and schedule of values item, which the material 34 applies. 35 36 B. Submit one copy of data and cover letter for each copy of application. 37 38 C. The Contractor is to maintain an updated set of drawings to be used as record 39 drawings. As a prerequisite for monthly progress payments, the Contractor is 40 to exhibit the updated record drawings for review by the Owner and the 41 Engineer. 42 43 D. Contractor shall maintain an updated construction schedule in accordance 44 with these Specifications. As a prerequisite for monthly progress payments, 45 Contractor shall submit the updated construction schedule with the 46 applications for progress payments. If the Contractor fails to submit the 47 required updated schedule within the time prescribed, the Engineer may APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01152 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 withhold progress payment estimates until such a time as the Contractor 2 submits the required updated schedule. 3 4 E. Contractor shall maintain an updated set of As -Built Drawings in accordance 5 with these Specifications. As a prerequisite for monthly progress payments, 6 Contractor shall submit the updated As -Built Drawings with the applications for 7 progress payments. If the Contractor fails to submit the updated As -Built 8 Drawings, the Engineer may withhold progress payment estimates until such a 9 time as the Contractor submits same. 10 11 1.06 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT 12 13 A. Fill in application form as specified for progress payments. 14 15 B. Use continuation sheet for presenting the final statement of accounting as 16 specified in the Specification. 17 18 C. All appropriate information must be entered on the application form. 19 20 1. The line title, "Application Period ", must indicate the dates between 21 which all work was completed during the pay period. These dates must 22 be consecutive with the dates of the previous Payment Request and 23 they must not overlap. 24 25 2. All blank lines within the "Contract Data" and "Summary of Project 26 Status" section of the application must be completed. Also, if any 27 Change Orders have been approved, the "Change Orders" section 28 must include that information. 29 30 3. All calculations and arithmetic must be precise to the penny. 31 32 4. The application must be signed and dated by an authorized 33 representative of the Contractor. 34 35 1.07 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE 36 37 A. Prior to submitting a completed Application for Payment request, the 38 Contractor shall arrange a field meeting with the Owner and /or Engineer to 39 review and verify all installed quantities and /or stored materials. Only when 40 the Owner /Engineer and Contractor agree on installed quantities and 41 percentages, should the Application for Payment be submitted. 42 43 B. Submit six (6) copies of Applications for Payment to the Engineer at the times 44 stipulated in the General Conditions. 45 46 C. When the Engineer finds Application properly completed and correct, he will 47 transmit certificate for payment to Owner, with copy to Contractor. APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01152 -3 07/15/14 1 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) 5 6 7 END OF SECTION APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01152 -4 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01153 2 3 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. Promptly implement Change Order procedures. 10 11 1. Provide full written data required to evaluate changes. 12 13 2. Maintain detailed records of work done on a time and material /force 14 account basis. 15 16 3. Provide full documentation to Engineer on request. 17 18 B. Designate in writing the member of Contractor's organization: 19 20 1. Who is authorized to accept changes in the work. 21 22 2. Who is responsible for informing others in the Contractor's employ of 23 the authorization of changes in the work. 24 25 1.02 DEFINITIONS 26 27 A. Change Order: See General Conditions. 28 29 B. Work Directive Change: A written order to the Contractor, signed by Owner 30 and Engineer, which amends the Contract Documents as described, 31 authorizes Contractor to proceed with a change that affects the Contract Sum 32 or the Contract Time, and that will be included in a subsequent Change Order. 33 34 C. Engineer's Supplemental Instructions: A written order, instructions, or 35 interpretations, signed by Engineer making minor changes in the Work not 36 involving a change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. 37 38 D. Field Order: A written order to the Contractor, signed by the Engineer and the 39 Contractor, which is issued to interpret/clarify the Contract Documents, order 40 minor changes in the work. The work described by a Field Order is to be 41 accomplished without change to the Contract Sum, Contract Time, and /or 42 claims for other costs. 43 44 1.03 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES 45 46 A. Owner and Engineer may initiate changes by submitting a Work Directive 47 Change to the Contractor. Request will include: CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01153 -1 07/15/14 1 2 1 Detailed description of the change, products, and location of the change 3 in the Project. 4 5 2. Supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications. 6 7 3. The projected time span for making the change, and a specific 8 statement as to whether overtime work is or is not authorized. 9 10 4. A specific period of time during which the requested price will be 11 considered valid. 12 13 B. Contractor may initiate changes by submitting a written notice to the Engineer, 14 containing: 15 16 1. Description of the proposed changes. 17 18 2. Statement of the reason for making the changes. 19 20 3. Statement of the effect on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 21 22 4. Statement of the effect on the work of separate contractors. 23 24 5. Documentation supporting any change in Contract Sum or Contract 25 Time, as appropriate. 26 27 1.04 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE AUTHORIZATION 28 29 A. Work Directive Change will describe changes in the Work, both additions and 30 deletions, with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of 31 the change and will designate the method of determining any change in the 32 Contract Sum and any change in Contract Time. 33 34 B. Owner and Engineer will sign and date the Work Directive Change as 35 authorization for the Contractor to proceed with the changes. 36 37 1.05 DOCUMENTATION OF PROPOSALS AND CLAIMS 38 39 A. Support each quotation for a lump sum proposal, and for each unit price, 40 which has not previously been established, with sufficient substantiating data 41 to allow the Engineer to evaluate the quotation. 42 43 B. On request, provide additional data to support time and cost computations: 44 45 1. Labor required. 46 47 2. Equipment required. CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01153 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3. Products required. 3 4 a. Recommended source of purchase and unit cost. 5 6 b. Quantities required. 7 8 4. Taxes, insurance, and bonds. 9 10 5. Credit for work deleted from Contract, similarly documented. 11 12 6. Overhead and profit. 13 14 7. Justification for any change in Contract Time. 15 16 C. Support each claim for additional costs, and for work done on a time -and- 17 material /force account basis, with documentation as required for a Lump Sum 18 proposal, plus additional information: 19 20 1. Name of the Owner's authorized agent who ordered the work and date 21 of the order. 22 23 2. Dates and times work was performed and by whom. 24 25 3. Time record, summary of hours worked, and hourly rates paid. 26 27 4. Receipts and invoices for: 28 29 a. Equipment used, listing dates, and times of use. 30 31 b. Products used, listing of quantities. 32 33 c. Subcontracts. 34 35 1.06 PREPARATION OF CHANGE ORDERS AND FIELD ORDERS 36 37 A. Engineer will prepare each Change Order and Field Order. 38 39 B. Change Order will describe changes in the Work, both additions and deletions, 40 with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of the 41 change. 42 43 C. Change Order will provide an accounting of the adjustment in the Contract 44 Sum and in the Contract Time. 45 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01153 -3 07/15/14 1 D. Field Order will describe interpretations or clarifications of Contract 2 Documents, order minor changes in the Work, and/ or memorialize trade -off 3 agreements. 4 5 E. Field Order work will be accomplished without change in the Contract Sum, 6 Contract Time, and /or claims for other costs. 7 8 1.07 LUMP SUM /FIXED PRICE CHANGE ORDER 9 10 A. Engineer initiates the form, including a description of the changes involved and 11 attachments based upon documents and proposals submitted by Contractor, 12 or requests from Owner, or both. 13 14 B. Once Engineer has completed and signed the form, all copies should be sent 15 to Contractor for review. After review by Contractor, all copies should be sent 16 to Owner for review. Engineer should make distribution of executed copies. 17 18 1.08 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER 19 20 A. Content of Change Orders will be based on either: 21 22 1. Engineer's definition of the scope of the required changes. 23 24 2. Contractor's Proposal for a change, as recommended by Engineer. 25 26 3. Survey of complete work. 27 28 B. The amounts of the unit prices to be: 29 30 1. Those stated in the Agreement. 31 32 2. Those mutually agreed upon between Owner and Contractor. 33 34 C. When quantities of each of the items affected by the Change Order can be 35 determined prior to start of the work: 36 37 1. Owner and Engineer will sign and date a Work Directive Change as 38 authorization for Contractor to proceed with the changes. 39 40 D. When quantities of the items cannot be determined prior to start of the work: 41 42 1. Engineer or Owner will issue a Work Directive change directing the 43 Contractor to proceed with the change on the basis of unit prices, and 44 the Engineer will cite the applicable unit prices. 45 46 2. Upon completion of the change, the Engineer will determine the cost of 47 such work based on the unit prices and quantities used. Contractor CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01153 -4 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 shall submit documentation to establish the number of units of each 2 item and any claims for a change in Contract Time. 3 4 3. Engineer will sign and date the Change Order to establish the change 5 in Contract Sum and in Contract Time. 6 7 4. Contractor will sign and date the Change Order to indicate their 8 agreement with the terms therein. 9 10 5. Owner will then sign the change order. 11 12 1.09 TIME AND MATERIAL /FORCE ACCOUNT CHANGE ORDER /CONSTRUCTION 13 CHANGE AUTHORIZATION 14 15 A. Engineer and Owner will issue a Work Directive Change directing Contractor 16 to proceed with the changes. 17 18 B. Upon completion of the change, the Contractor shall submit itemized 19 accounting and supporting data. 20 21 C. Engineer will determine the allowable cost of such work, as provided in 22 General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. 23 24 D. Engineer will sign and date the Change Order to establish the change in 25 Contract Sum and in Contract Time. 26 27 E. Contractor will sign and date the Change Order to indicate agreement 28 therewith. 29 30 F. Owner will then sign the Change Order. 31 32 1.10 CORRELATION WITH CONTRACTOR'S SUBMITTALS 33 34 A. Not greater than monthly revise Schedule of Values and Application for 35 Payment forms to record each change as a separate item of work and to 36 record the adjusted Contract Amount. 37 38 B. Not greater than monthly revise the Progress Schedule to reflect each change 39 in Contract Time. Revise sub - schedules to show changes for other items of 40 work affected by the Change Order. 41 42 C. Upon completion of work under a Change Order, enter pertinent changes in 43 Record Documents. 44 45 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 46 47 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 48 49 END OF SECTION 50 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01153 -5 07/15/14 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01153 -6 07/15/14 • 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01200 2 3 MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 PRE - CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE 8 9 A. In accordance with the Contract Documents, prior to the commencement of 10 Work, a preconstruction conference shall be held at a mutually agreed time 11 and place. 12 13 B. The purpose of the conference shall be to designate responsible personnel 14 and establish a working relationship. Matters requiring coordination shall be 15 discussed and procedures for handling such matters established. The agenda 16 shall include as a minimum: 17 18 1. Contractor's Initial Construction Schedule 19 20 2. Procedures for Transmittal, Review and Distribution of Shop Drawings 21 22 3. Procedures for Submittal and Review of Monthly Applications for 23 Payment 24 25 4. Maintaining As -Built Drawings 26 27 5. Critical Work Sequencing and Construction Restrictions 28 29 6. Field Decisions and Change Orders 30 31 7. Field Office, Storage Areas and Security 32 33 8. Equipment and Material Deliveries 34 35 9. Safety Meetings and Program 36 37 10. Traffic Control Plan 38 39 11. Pre - construction Video 40 41 C. The Engineer shall preside at the conference, and shall arrange for 42 preparation and distribution of the minutes. 43 44 1.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS 45 46 A. The Owner shall schedule and conduct regular project meetings at least 47 monthly and at other times as deemed necessary by the progress of the work. MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES 01200 -1 07/15/14 1 The Contractor and the Engineer shall be represented at each meeting. The 2 Contractor and /or Engineer may request attendance by representatives of 3 material Supplier(s) and Subcontractor(s). 4 5 B. The Engineer shall preside at the conference and shall arrange for keeping 6 the minutes and distributing them to all persons in attendance. The purpose of 7 the meetings shall include but not be limited to reviewing the progress of the 8 Work, maintaining coordination of efforts, discussing changes in scheduling 9 and resolving problems that may develop; claims review; and future 10 scheduling. 11 12 PART 2 — PRODUCT (NOT USED) 13 14 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 15 16 17 END OF SECTION MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES 01200 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01300 2 3 SUBMITTALS 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 GENERAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS 8 9 A. All submittals, regardless of origin, shall be transmitted in the format provided 10 to the Contractor by the Engineer, certified and signed by the Contractor 11 indicating the submittal to be correct and in accordance with the Contract 12 Documents, and noting any special instructions regarding the submittal. Each 13 submittal shall identify the submittal number in the format required by the 14 Engineer, with the name and number of this contract, the Contractor's name, 15 and references to applicable specification paragraphs and Contract Drawings. 16 Each submittal shall indicate the intended use of the item in the Work. When 17 catalog pages are submitted, applicable items shall be clearly identified. The 18 current revision, issue number, and date shall be indicated on all drawings and 19 descriptive data. 20 21 B. Contractor shall stamp each submittal and said stamp shall be Contractor's 22 representation to Owner and Engineer that Contractor accepts full 23 responsibility for determining and verifying all quantities, dimensions, field 24 construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data, and that he 25 has reviewed or coordinated each submittal with the requirements of the Work 26 and the Contract Documents. 27 28 C. All deviations from the Contract Documents shall be identified on each 29 submittal and shall be tabulated in Contractor's letter of transmittal. Such 30 submittals shall indicate, as pertinent to the deviation, essential details of all 31 changes proposed by Contractor (including modifications to other facilities that 32 may be a result of the deviation) and all required piping and wiring diagrams. 33 34 D. Contractor shall accept full responsibility for the completeness of each 35 submission, and, in the case of a resubmission, shall verify that all exceptions 36 previously noted by Engineer have been taken into account. In the event that 37 more than one resubmission is required because of the Contractor's failure to 38 account for exceptions previously noted, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for 39 the charges of Engineer for review of the additional resubmissions. 40 41 E. Resubmittals shall be made within seven (7) days of the date of the letter 42 returning the material to be modified or corrected, unless within seven (7) days 43 the Contractor submits an acceptable request for an extension of the 44 stipulated time period, listing the reasons the resubmittal cannot be completed 45 within that time. 46 47 F Any need for more than one resubmission, or any other delay in obtaining SUBMITTALS 01300 -1 07/15/14 1 Engineer's review of submittals, will not entitle Contractor to extension of the 2 Contract Time unless delay of the Work is directly caused by a change in the 3 work authorized by a Change Order. 4 5 G. Contractor's letter of resubmittal shall list the date of his original submittal, the 6 date of the Engineer's letter returning the submittal, and the dates of 7 submission and return of any previous resubmittals. 8 9 H. Engineer's review of drawings and data submitted by Contractor will cover 10 only general conformity to the drawings and specifications, external 11 connections, and dimensions which affect the layout. Engineer's review does 12 not indicate a thorough review of all dimensions, quantities, and details of the 13 material, equipment, device or item shown. Engineer's review of submittals 14 shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for errors, omissions, or 15 deviations, or responsibility for compliance with the Contract Documents. 16 17 1 It is intended that submittals be handled electronically whenever possible, 18 however, when necessary to employ paper copies, five copies of each drawing 19 and necessary data, plus the number of copies that the Contractor wants 20 returned, shall be submitted to Engineer. Engineer will not accept submittals 21 from anyone but Contractor. Submittals shall be consecutively numbered in 22 direct sequence of submittal and without division by subcontracts or trades. 23 Resubmittals shall bear the number of the first submittal followed by a letter 24 (A, B, etc.), to indicate the sequence of the resubmittal. If applicable, the 25 Engineer will provide the Contractor with an electronic file of the submittal 26 format to be followed. 27 28 J. When submittals are returned marked CONFIRM or REJECTED - RESUBMIT, 29 the corrections shall be made as noted thereon and as instructed by Engineer 30 and corrected copies shall resubmitted. 31 32 K. When corrected copies are resubmitted, Contractor shall in writing direct 33 specific attention to all revisions and shall list separately any revisions made 34 other than those called for by Engineer on previous submissions. 35 36 L. When the submittals are returned marked APPROVED, NO EXCEPTIONS 37 TAKEN or MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED resubmittal is not required. 38 39 1.02 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS 40 41 A. The Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval a Schedule of Submittals 42 identifying the date of the initial submission, the beginning of manufacture as 43 applicable, and the delivery to the site. This Schedule shall be submitted as a 44 separate submittal and be approved as a prerequisite to the submission of any 45 other submittal. No other shop drawing or submittal will be reviewed until the 46 Schedule of Submittals is approved. 47 SUBMITTALS 01300 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B. The Schedule of Submittals shall include all submittals specified to be 2 submitted including shop drawings, schedules, permits, warranties, reports, 3 and other items specified to be submitted. 4 5 C. The Schedule of Submittals shall show the submittal of each shop drawing 6 and /or submittal sufficiently in advance of performing the related work or other 7 applicable activities, or within the time specified in the individual work sections 8 of the Specifications, so that the installation will not be delayed by processing 9 times, including disapproval and resubmittal (if required), coordination with 10 other submittals, testing, purchasing, fabrication, delivery, and similar 11 sequenced activities. 12 13 D. The Schedule of Submittals shall indicate those submittals that are critical to 14 the progress schedule. The Schedule shall show other, non - critical shop 15 drawing submittals spread out over the contract time as required to minimize 16 the number of concurrent reviews being performed, or as directed by the 17 Engineer. All equipment testing certifications, certifications of proper 18 installation, warranties, O &M manuals, spare parts and Owner training 19 materials specified to be provided shall be submitted in accordance with this 20 specification, and shall either be submitted with the shop drawing submittal for 21 the equipment, or submitted separately. 22 23 E. The Contractor shall so develop the Schedule of Submittals such that the total 24 number of submittals does not exceed thirty -eight (38). In developing the 25 Schedule of Submittals, the Contractor shall identify separate submittals for: 26 27 1. Each item of equipment specified in Divisions 11 through 14 and major 28 items of equipment listed in Division 16. 29 2. Each pipe material of construction (ductile iron, steel, PVC, HDPE, etc.) 30 3. Construction and start-up schedules. 31 4. Field testing and equipment start-up reports specified to be performed and 32 prepared by equipment suppliers. 33 34 In developing the Schedule of Submittals, the Contractor may identify a single 35 submittal for a given Division, such as Division 5 Miscellaneous Metals, or a 36 given Section, such as 15100 Valves, incorporating all items into a single 37 submittal. However, no submittal shall include items from two (or more) 38 different Divisions. 39 40 In developing the Schedule of Submittals, the Contractor may identify 41 equipment- related submittals for warranties, spare parts, O &M manuals, and 42 training plans separately, or with the specific equipment submittal, or in groups 43 of common items (i.e., O &M manuals, warranties, etc.). 44 45 As specified elsewhere, the Contractor will be required to submit certificates of 46 proper installation, sign -in sheets for equipment/systems training sessions, 47 and proof of delivery receipts for O &M manuals and spare parts, however, SUBMITTALS 01300 -3 07/15/14 such submittals will not count against the total number of submittals specified above. Similarly, monthly schedule and narrative updates that are submitted with Applications for Payment will not count against the total number of submittals specified above. F. In accordance with Section IIIA, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for Engineer's cost to review excess submittals and re- submittals and /or confirmations that exceed a total ten (10) beyond that specified above (total of 48 submittals and re- submittals). G. Following is an example listing of the anticipated submittals for this project. 1 Schedule of Submittals, Hurricane Plan 2 Surveyor Information, Project Sign 3 Schedule of Values, Schedule of Payments 4 Construction Schedule 5 Video Contractor and Pre Construction Video 6 Building Department Permits 7 Grout, Bonding Agent 8 Paint and Coatings Compressed Air System Components, Pipe, Tubing, Equipment 9 and O &M Manual 10 Chemical Clean Pumping System Equipment and O &M Manual 11 Filter Equipment, O &M and Training Plan 12 DI Pipe, Accessories, Fittings, Supports 13 C900, C905, HDPE, PVC Pipe, Accessories, Fittings, Valves 14 Stainless Steel and Galvanized Pipe and Fittings 15 Check Valves, Plug Valves 16 Butterfly Valves and Actuators 17 Valves and Actuators O &M Manuals 18 Electrical Wires, Raceways, and Cables 19 Electrical Boxes and Fittings 20 Electrical Wiring Devices and Supporting Devices 21 Electrical Identification and Grounding 22 Electrical Motors, Starters, Disconnects 23 Main Filter Control Panel and O &M 24 FOC and Networking Components 25 Modifications to Existing LCP 26 SCADA HMI Graphics 27 Process Instrumentation, Equipment, and O &M Manuals 28 Startup Schedule 29 Filter #1 Test Results 30 Filter #2 Test Results 31 Filter #3 Test Results 32 Filter #4 Test Results 33 Filter #5 Test Results 34 Filter #6 Test Results SUBMITTALS 01300 -4 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 35 Final Approved Shop Drawings and O &Ms 36 Contract Closeout Submittals 1 2 1.03 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 3 4 A. Before Work is started, Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review a 5 schedule of the proposed construction operations. The construction schedule 6 shall indicate the sequence of the Work, the time of starting and completion of 7 each part, the installation date for each major item of equipment, and the time 8 for making connections to existing piping, structures, or facilities. 9 10 B. At least every 30 days the schedule shall be revised as necessary to reflect 11 changes in the progress of the Work. 12 13 C. Owner may require Contractor to add to his equipment, or construction forces, 14 as well as increase the working hours, if operations fall behind schedule at any 15 time during the construction period. 16 17 1.04 PROGRESS REPORTS 18 19 A. A progress report shall be furnished to Engineer with each application for 20 progress payment. If the Work falls behind schedule, Contractor shall submit 21 additional progress reports at such intervals as Engineer may request. 22 23 B. Each progress report shall include sufficient narrative to describe current and 24 anticipated delaying factors, their effect on the construction schedule, and 25 proposed corrective actions. Any Work reported complete, but which is not 26 readily apparent to Engineer, must be substantiated with satisfactory 27 evidence. 28 29 C. Each progress report shall also include three (3) prints of the accepted graphic 30 schedule marked to indicate actual progress. 31 32 1.05 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 33 34 A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review a Schedule of Values 35 after review of the tentative schedule and before submission of the first 36 application for payment. The schedule of values, showing the value of each 37 major unit of work, significant pieces of mechanical and rotating equipment, 38 and significant electrical and instrumentation components in sufficient detail as 39 requested by the Engineer, shall be acceptable to the Engineer before any 40 application for payment is prepared or approved. 41 42 B. The sum of the items listed in the Schedule of Values shall equal the Contract 43 Price. Such items as Bond premium, temporary construction facilities, may be 44 listed separately in the schedule of values, provided the amounts can be 45 substantiated. Overhead and profit shall not be listed as separate items. The SUBMITTALS 01300 -5 07/15/14 1 Schedule of Values shall contain at a minimum a complete listing of the 2 various project milestones that are "critical path" items according to the 3 approved construction schedule. 4 5 C. In addition to those items listed in Paragraph B, the O &M manuals, as -built 6 drawings, start -up, training, and any other individualized component that the 7 Contractor or Engineer wants separately itemized for payment shall also be 8 included on the Schedule of Values. 9 10 D. An unbalanced Schedule of Values providing for overpayment of Contractor 11 on items of Work that would be performed first will not be accepted. The 12 Schedule of Values shall be revised and resubmitted until acceptable to 13 Engineer. Final acceptance by Engineer shall indicate only consent to the 14 Schedule of Values as a basis for preparation of applications for progress 15 payments and shall not constitute an agreement as to the value of each 16 indicated item. 17 18 E. The following provides the minimum requirements of the Schedule of Values 19 • ODP - Sand Filter Rehab Equipment 20 • ODP Tax Savings - Sand Filter Rehab Equipment 21 • Bonds and Insurances 22 • Schedule of Values Submission 23 • Schedule Submission 24 • Mobilization 25 • Submit Sand Filter 26 • Remove and Install Sand Filter 27 • Filter Media Disposal 28 • Paint Underdrain and Gullet Covers 29 • Filter Angle Iron Clips 30 • Submit High Pressure Air System 31 • Submit Compressor 32 • Furnish and Install Compressor 33 • Submit Air Dryer 34 • Furnish and Install Air Dryer 35 • Submit Chemical Cleaning System 36 • Install Chemical Cleaning System 37 • Furnish and Install Safety Shower and Eyewash Float Switch 38 • Filter Control Panel 39 • Fiber Optic Patch Panels 40 • Fiber Optic Cable 41 • Filter SCADA HMI Screens 42 • Electrical - Mobilization 43 • Electrical - Switchgear Labor and Material 44 • Electrical - Rigid Conduit Labor and Material 45 • Electrical - Feeder Wire Labor and Material SUBMITTALS 01300 -6 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 w 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 • Electrical - Branch Wire Labor and Material 2 • Electrical - Trim Out Labor and Material 3 • I & C - Filter Programming and Start-up 4 • Submit Valves 5 • Furnish and Install Backwash Valves 6 • Furnish and Install Filtrate Valves 7 • Furnish and Install Filter Effluent Valves 8 • Furnish and Install Filter Influent Valves 9 • Furnish and Install Backwash Butterfly Valves 10 • Furnish and Install Backwash Check Valves 11 • Start-up and Testing 12 • O &M Manuals 13 • Record Documents 14 • Training 15 • Final Electronic Submittal and Warranty Forms 16 • Clean -Up and Demobilization 17 • Indemnification 18 • Contingency 19 20 1.06 SCHEDULE OF PAYMENTS 21 22 A. Within thirty (30) days after Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall furnish to 23 the Engineer a schedule of estimated monthly payments. The schedule shall 24 be revised and resubmitted each time an application for payment varies more 25 than 10 percent from the estimated payment schedule. 26 27 1.07 SURVEY DATA 28 29 A. All field books, notes, and other data developed by Contractor in performing 30 surveys required as part of the Work shall be available to Engineer for 31 examination throughout the construction period. All such data shall be 32 submitted to Engineer with the other documentation required for final 33 acceptance of the Work. 34 35 1.08 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS, WORKING DRAWINGS AND ENGINEERING 36 DATA 37 38 A. Shop drawings, working drawings, and engineering data shall be included in 39 the Schedule of Submittals identifying the dates for the initial submission of 40 shop and working drawings, the beginning of manufacture, testing and 41 installation of materials, supplies and equipment. 42 43 B. The Schedule of Submittals shall show the submittal of each shop drawing 44 sufficiently in advance of performing the related work or other applicable activi- 45 ties, or within the time specified in the individual work sections of the 46 Specifications, so that the installation will not be delayed by processing times SUBMITTALS 01300 -7 07/15/14 1 including re- review and resubmittal (if required), coordination with other 2 submittals, testing, purchasing, fabrication, delivery, and similar sequenced 3 activities. 4 5 C. The Schedule of Submittals shall indicate those submittals that are critical to 6 the progress schedule, and shall show other shop drawing submittals spread 7 out over the contract time as required to minimize the number of concurrent 8 reviews or as directed by the Engineer. 9 10 D. Engineering data covering all equipment and fabricated materials that will 11 become a permanent part of the Work shall be submitted to Engineer, for 12 review. These data shall include drawings and descriptive information in 13 sufficient detail to show the kind, size, arrangement, and operation of 14 component materials and devices; the external connections, anchorages, and 15 supports required; performance characteristics; and dimensions needed for 16 installation and correlation with other materials and equipment. 17 18 1.09 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 19 20 A. Operation and maintenance data submittals are specified in Section 01730. 21 22 1.10 LAYOUT DATA 23 24 A. Contractor shall keep neat and legible notes of measurements and 25 calculations made by him in connection with the layout of the Work. Copies of 26 such data shall be furnished to the Engineer for use in checking 27 28 B. Contractor's layout as provided under Lines and Grades. All such data 29 considered of value to Owner will be transmitted to Owner by Engineer with 30 other records upon completion of the Work. 31 32 1.11 SUBMITTALS FOR COLOR SELECTION 33 34 A. The following is a list of items that must be submitted together for color 35 selection. No single item on this list will be approved without the submittal of 36 all other items. 37 38 1. Paint for piping, valves, valve box covers, meter box covers, etc. 39 40 2. Paint for equipment. 41 SUBMITTALS 01300 -8 07/15/14 1 1 1 PART 2 - PRODUCT (NOT USED) ' 2 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) 4 I 5 6 END OF SECTION 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SUBMITTALS 01300 -9 07/15/14 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SUBMITTALS 01300 -10 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01310 2 3 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 4 5 6 PART 1 — GENERAL 7 8 1.01 GENERAL 9 10 A. Construction under this contract must be coordinated to assure that construction 11 is completed within the time allowed by the Contract Documents. The 12 Contractor will also coordinate his activities with the other contractors to allow 13 orderly and timely completion of all the work. 14 15 B. All construction schedules shall be of the critical path method, bar chart type, 16 and shall be prepared using SURETRACK, PRIMAVERA P3, or equal. 17 18 C. The Contractor is advised that the construction schedule must reflect that no 19 major pieces of equipment or systems may be shut down or started up within 20 one week prior to the toxicity screening and compliance testing events 21 highlighted on the Owner's TRE Schedule at the end of this section. It is 22 anticipated that the 2015 TRE Schedule will look similar. 23 24 1.02 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING GENERAL PROVISIONS 25 26 A. Within 15 calendar days after the issuance of the Notice of Award, the 27 Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer a preliminary construction 28 progress schedule. The schedule shall contain a sufficient number of tasks such 29 that no single task has a value that exceeds 2.0% of the total Contract Price. 30 Partial payments will not be approved until an acceptable construction progress 31 schedule has been accepted by the Engineer. 32 33 B. The schedule shall be updated monthly reflecting the baseline schedule and the 34 Contractor's progress on each activity. No progress payment will be approved 35 until the updated schedule is submitted and accepted by the Engineer. 36 37 C. Night work may be established by the Contractor as regular procedure only with 38 the prior written permission of the Owner. Such permission, however, may be 39 revoked at any time by the Owner if the Contractor fails to maintain adequate 40 equipment and supervision for the proper execution and control of the work at 41 night. 42 43 D. The Contractor shall designate an authorized representative who shall be 44 responsible for development and maintenance of the schedule and of progress 45 and payment reports. This representative of the Contractor shall have direct 46 project control and complete authority to act on behalf of the Contractor in 47 fulfilling the commitments of the Contractor's schedule. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310 -1 10/10/14 1 2 1.03 PROGRESS OF THE WORK 3 4 A. The work shall be executed with such progress as may be required to prevent 5 any delay to the general completion of the work. The work shall be executed at 6 such times and in or on such parts of the project, and with such forces, materials 7 and equipment to assure completion of the work in the time established by the 8 Contract. 9 10 B. If the Contractor, for his convenience and at his own expense, should desire to 11 carry on his work at night or outside regular hours, he shall submit written notice 12 to the Engineer and he shall allow ample time for satisfactory arrangements to 13 be made for inspecting the work in progress. The Contractor shall reimburse the 14 Owner for extra inspection required for work outside regular hours. The 15 Contractor shall light the different parts of the project as required to comply with 16 all applicable Federal and State regulations and with all applicable requirements 17 of the municipality in which the work is being done. 18 19 PART 2 — PROGRESS SCHEDULE SUBMITTALS 20 21 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 22 23 A. As required within the General Conditions, the Contractor shall submit a critical 24 path progress schedule as described herein. The schedule shall take into 25 considerations all work phasing and restrictions as specified elsewhere in the 26 Contract Documents. 27 28 B. The critical path progress schedule requirement shall consist of a detailed 29 schedule, monthly status reports (Monthly Reports), a start-up schedule, and 30 revisions to the schedules and analyses as described. The planning, 31 scheduling, management and execution of the work are the sole responsibilities 32 of the Contractor. The progress schedule shall allow the Engineer to review 33 Contractor's planning, scheduling, management and execution of the work; to 34 assist Engineer in evaluating work progress and make progress payments; to 35 allow other contractors to cooperate and coordinate their activities with those of 36 the Contractor; and to provide Owner with information about "construction 37 schedule" and "cumulative outlay schedule." 38 39 C. Engineer's review of the schedule submittals shall not relieve Contractor from the 40 responsibility for any deviations from the Contract Documents unless Contractor 41 has in writing called Engineer's attention to such deviations at the time of 42 submission and Engineer has given written concurrence to the specific 43 deviations, nor shall any concurrence by Engineer relieve Contractor from 44 responsibility for errors and omissions in the submittals. 45 46 D. Float or slack time is not for the exclusive benefit of the Owner, the Engineer or 47 the Contractor. Extensions of time for performance, as specified in the General CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310 -2 10/10/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 and Supplementary Conditions, will be granted only to the extent that equitable 2 time adjustments for the network activity, or activities affected, exceed the total 3 float or slack time along the affected network paths, as shown in the precedence 4 diagram and report in effect at the instant of either (a) a notice to proceed with a 5 change, or (b) a notice of suspension of work or possession, or (c) detection of a 6 subsequently acknowledged differing site condition, or (d) occurrence of cause 7 for an excusable delay. Further, use of float time in the schedule, or the 8 allocation of float time to activities by means of special logic restraints or 9 imposed dates, shall be shared to the benefit of Owner, Engineer, Contractor, 10 and his subcontractors and suppliers in proportion of their scope of 11 responsibilities. Excessive use of float time to the detriment of succeeding 12 activities may be cause for denying an extension of time if it can be 13 demonstrated that the float along the network paths affected at the instant of the 14 delaying condition would have been larger than the delay had it not been for the 15 excessive and unreasonable float usage in violation of the sharing concept 16 required by this Specification. 17 18 E. Engineer's review of the schedule submittals shall be only for conformance with 19 the information given in the Contract Documents and shall not extend to the 20 means, methods, sequences and techniques or procedures of construction or to 21 safety precautions or programs incident thereto. Engineer's review of the 22 schedule submittals will be predicated on a Contractor's stamp of approval 23 signed off by Contractor. Contractor's stamp of approval on any schedule 24 submittals shall constitute a representation to Owner and Engineer that 25 Contractor, has either determined or verified all data on the submittal, or 26 assumes full responsibility for doing so, and that Contractor and his 27 subcontractors and suppliers have reviewed and coordinated the sequences 28 shown in the submittal with the requirements of the work under the Contract 29 Documents. 30 31 2.02 SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS 32 33 A. Graphic network diagrams shall be on a time - scaled precedence network format. 34 The graphic network diagram shall include the following format: 35 36 1. Description of each activity, or restraint, shall be brief but convey the 37 scope of work described. 38 39 2. Activities shall identify all items of work that must be accomplished to 40 achieve Substantial Completion, or any interim substantial completion, 41 such as the major disciplines of work; items pertaining to the approval of 42 regulatory agencies; contractor's time required for submittals, fabrication 43 and deliveries; the time required by Engineer to review all submittals as 44 set forth in the Contract Documents; items of work required of Owner to 45 support pre - operational and start-up testing; time required for the 46 relocation of utilities. Activities shall also identify interface milestones with 47 the work of other contract work under separate contracts with Owner. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310 -3 10/10/14 1 2 3. Any activities not shown on the graphic network diagram shall be 3 considered to have no effect on the Contractor's ability to achieve 4 Substantial Completion, or any interim substantial complel:ion, within the 5 Contract Time. Any delays to activities that do not appear in the 6 concurred detailed schedule shall give rise only to non - prejudicial delays. 7 Attempts to impose after - the -fact logic constraints where none existed 8 previously to justify time extensions will not be permitted. 9 10 4. Activity durations shall be in whole working days. 11 12 5. Graphic diagrams shall be time - scaled and sequenced by work areas. 13 The Diagram of Activities shall show numerical values for total float and 14 be shown on their early schedules. The diagram shall be neat and legible 15 and submitted on sheets no larger than 24 inches by 36 inches on a 16 medium suitable for reproduction. 17 18 B. Printout reports shall contain the following data for each activity or restraint: 19 20 1. Activity identification, activity description, activity duration, activity 21 man -days, computed or specified early start date, computed early finish 22 date, computed late start date, computed or specified late finish date, and 23 total float and free float. 24 25 2. Five separate reports shall be provided, including all activities and 26 restraints, and shall be submitted monthly as follows: 27 28 a. Activity, sort by early start dates in order of ascending numbers. 29 b. Activity, sort by department. 30 c. Float report, in order of ascending total float values. 31 d. Successor /predecessor report. 32 33 PART 3 — EXECUTION 34 35 3.01 DETAILED SCHEDULE SUBMITTAL 36 37 A. Submittal shall include a time - scaled graphic diagram showing all Contract 38 activities, computer printout reports, and a supporting narrative. The initial 39 Detailed Schedule submittal shall be delivered within 10 calendar days after the 40 Notice to Proceed, and shall use the Notice to Proceed as the "data date ". Upon 41 receipt of Engineer's comments, Contractor shall meet with Engineer and 42 discuss an appraisal and evaluation of the proposed work plan. Necessary 43 revisions resulting from this review shall be made by Contractor and the detailed 44 schedule resubmitted within 15 calendar days after the meeting. The re- 45 submittal, if agreed to by the Owner, and unless subsequently changed with the 46 concurrence of or at the direction of Owner, shall be the work plan to be used by 47 the Contractor for planning, scheduling, managing and executing the work. If CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310 -4 10/10/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Contractor fails to provide an acceptable Detailed Schedule submittal, he will be 2 deemed not to have provided a basis upon which progress may be evaluated, 3 which will further constitute reasons for refusing to recommend payment. 4 5 B. The graphic diagram shall be formatted in accordance with Article 2.02(A) 6 above. The diagram shall include (1) all detailed activities grouped by major 7 areas of work. The critical path activities shall be identified, including critical 8 paths for interim dates, if applicable, by clearly highlighting the path on the 9 graphics diagram. 10 11 C. This submittal shall include five copies of the graphic diagram, the printout 12 reports and the narrative, in accordance with Article 2.02 of these scheduling 13 requirements. 14 15 D. The narrative shall include sufficient data to explain the basis of Contractor's 16 determination of durations, describe the contract conditions and restraints 17 plugged into the schedule, and provide a "what -if' analysis pertaining to potential 18 problems and practical steps to mitigate them. Should Engineer require 19 additional data, this information shall be supplied by Contractor within ten 20 calendar days. 21 22 3.02 MONTHLY STATUS REPORTS 23 24 A. Beginning with the first month, and every month thereafter, Contractor shall 25 submit to Engineer, with each Application for Payment, a Monthly Status Report 26 (based on the Detailed Schedule) with data as of the last day of the pay period. 27 The monthly Status Report shall include a revised copy of the currently accepted 28 graphic diagram, computer printouts and a narrative. The Monthly Status Report 29 will be reviewed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall address the Engineer's 30 comments in the subsequent Monthly Status Report. If Contractor fails to 31 provide acceptable Monthly Status Reports, he will be deemed not to have 32 provided a basis upon which progress may be evaluated, which will be reason 33 for refusing to recommend progress payments. 34 35 B. The revised diagram shall show, for the currently accepted detailed diagram, 36 percentages of completion for all activities, actual start and finish dates, and 37 remaining durations, as appropriate. Activities not previously included in the 38 currently accepted detailed schedule shall be added, except that contractual 39 dates will not be changed except by Change Order. Review of a revised 40 diagram by the Engineer will not be construed to constitute concurrence with the 41 time frames, duration, or sequencing for such added activities; instead the 42 corresponding data as ultimately incorporated into an appropriate change order 43 shall govern. 44 45 C. The narrative shall include the information shown in the following outline in a 46 narrative form: 47 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310 -5 10/10/14 1 1 Construction progress (refer to activity number in the Detailed Schedule) 2 including: 3 4 a. Activities completed this reporting period; 5 b. Activities in progress this reporting period; 6 c. Activities scheduled to commence next reporting period. 7 8 2. Description of problem areas 9 10 3. Current and anticipated delays 11 12 a. Cause of the delay; 13 b. Corrective action and schedule adjustments to correct the delay; 14 c. Impact of the delay on other activities, on milesi:ones, and on 15 completion dates. 16 17 4. Changes in construction sequence 18 19 5. Pending items and status thereof 20 21 a. Permits 22 b. Change Orders 23 c. Time extensions 24 d. Other 25 26 6. Contract completion date status 27 28 a. Ahead of schedule and number of days 29 b. Behind schedule and number of days 30 31 3.03 REVISIONS 32 33 A. All revised Detailed Schedule submittals shall be in the same form and detail as 34 the initial submittal and shall be accompanied by an explanation of the reasons 35 for such revisions, all of which shall be subject to review by Engineer. The 36 revision shall incorporate all previously made changes to reflect current as -built 37 conditions. Minor changes to the submittal may be reviewed at monthly 38 meetings. Changes to activities having adequate float shall be considered a 39 minor change. 40 41 B. A revised detailed work plan submittal shall be submitted for review, when 42 required by Engineer, for one of the following reasons: 43 44 1. Owner or Engineer directs a change that affects the date(s) specified in 45 the Agreement or alters the length of a critical path. 46 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310 -6 10/10/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2. Contractor elects to change any sequence of activities so as to affect a 2 critical path of the currently accepted detailed schedule documents. 3 4 C. If, prior to agreement on an equitable adjustment to the Contract Time, Engineer 5 requires revisions to the Detailed Schedule in order to evaluate planned 6 progress, Contractor shall provide an interim revised submittal for review with 7 change effect(s) incorporated as directed. Interim revisions to the documents 8 will be incorporated during the first subsequent Monthly Status Report. 9 10 3.04 START -UP SCHEDULE SUBMITTALS 11 12 A. At least 90 calendar days prior to the date of Substantial Completion, Contractor 13 shall submit a time - scaled (days after notice to proceed) graphic diagram 14 detailing the work to take place in the period between 60 days prior to 15 Substantial Completion, together with a supporting narrative. Engineer shall 16 respond within 10 calendar days after receipt of the submittal. Upon receipt of 17 Engineer's comments, Contractor shall make the necessary revisions and 18 submit the revised schedule within ten calendar days. If Contractor fails to 19 provide acceptable Start-up Schedule Submittals, he will be deemed not to have 20 provided a basis upon which progress may be evaluated, which will be reason 21 for refusing to recommend payment. 22 23 B. The Start-up Schedule may not be combined with the Detailed Schedule. The 24 Start-up Schedule is intended to show much greater detail than the Detailed 25 Schedule for start-up activities. Typical information required includes, but is not 26 limited to, the timing of vendor representatives, pre -op testing, individual 27 equipment start-ups, Owner's training, and performance certification testing. 28 29 C. The graphic diagram shall use the currently accepted Detailed Schedule for 30 those activities completed ahead of the last 60 calendar days prior to Substantial 31 Completion, and detailed activities for the remaining 60 -day period within the 32 time frames outlined in the currently accepted Detailed Schedule. 33 34 D. Contractor will be required to continue the requirement for monthly reports, as 35 outlined in Articles 3.03 and 3.04 above. In preparing these reports, Contractor 36 must assure that the Detailed Schedule is consistent with the progress noted in 37 the Start-up Schedule. 38 39 E. In addition, Contractor will be required to submit a revised copy of the start-up 40 graphic diagram on a monthly basis with a start-up narrative. This revised 41 diagram shall highlight percentages of completion, actual start and finish dates, 42 and remaining durations as applicable. Activities not previously included in the 43 accepted detailed work plan shall be added in these submittals, except that 44 contractual dates shall not be changed except by Change Order. Reviews of 45 these submittals by Engineer will not be construed to constitute concurrence with 46 the time frames, durations or sequence of work for each added activity. 47 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310 -7 10/10/14 1 3.05 CONSTRUCTION PERIOD 2 3 A. Whenever it becomes apparent from the current monthly progress evaluation 4 and updated schedule data that any milestone and /or Contract completion date 5 will not be met, the Contractor shall take appropriate action to bring the work 6 back on schedule. Actions could include: 7 8 1. Increase construction manpower in such quantities and crafts as to 9 substantially eliminate the backlog of work; 10 11 2. Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per work day, work 12 days per week, or the amount of construction equipment, or any 13 combination of the foregoing sufficient to substantially eliminate the 14 backlog of work; and 15 16 3. Reschedule work items to achieve concurrency of accomplishment. 17 18 B. The addition of equipment or construction forces, increasing the working hours or 19 any other method, manner, or procedure to return to the current Detailed Schedule 20 shall be at the Contractor's own cost and shall not be considered justification for a 21 Change Order or treated as an acceleration order. 22 23 24 END SECTION 25 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310 -8 10/10/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Preliminary Schedule of THE activities for City of Clearwater East/Northeast facility: 2 9/18/13 — 3 11/5/13 — 4 12/10/13 — 5 6 12/30/13 — 7 1/7/14 — 8 9 2/4/14 — 10 3/4/14 — 11 12 3/28/14 — 13 4/8/14 — 14 15 5/6/14 — 16 17 6/3/14 — 18 19 6/27/14 — 20 7/8/14 — 21 22 8/5/14 — 23 24 9/9/14 — 25 26 9/29/14 — 27 10/7/14 — 28 29 11/4/14 — 30 31 12/9/14 — 32 33 12/29/14 — 34 35 Perform Phase I TIE on toxic 8 -9 September 2013 sample Conduct quarterly compliance testing (samples collected 3 -8 November) Conduct monthly 100% chronic toxicity screening for potential TIE (8 -9 December sample) Submit quarterly progress report to FL DEP Conduct monthly 100% chronic toxicity screening for potential TIE (5 -6 January sample) Conduct quarterly compliance testing (samples collected 2 -7 February) Conduct monthly 100% chronic toxicity screening for potential TIE (2 -3 March sample) Submittal date for the Jan -Mar quarterly report Conduct monthly 100% chronic toxicity screening for potential TIE (6 -7 April sample). Conduct quarterly compliance testing (samples collected 4 -9 May) — Collect and save additional volume of sample at each collection date. Conduct monthly 100% chronic toxicity screening for potential TIE (1 -2 June sample). Submittal date for the Apr -Jun quarterly TCP progress report. Conduct monthly 100% chronic toxicity screening for potential TIE (6 -7 July sample). Conduct quarterly compliance testing (samples collected 3 -8 August) — Collect and save additional volume of sample at each collection date. Conduct monthly 100% chronic toxicity screening for potential TIE (7 -8 September sample). Submittal date for Jul -Sep quarterly TCP progress report. Conduct monthly 100% chronic toxicity screening for potential TIE (5 -6 October sample). Conduct quarterly compliance testing (samples collected 2 -7 November) — Collect and save additional volume of sample at each collection date. Conduct monthly 100% chronic toxicity screening for potential TIE (7 -8 December sample). Submittal date for Oct -Dec quarterly TCP progress report CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310 -9 10/10/14 1 1 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 2 3 4 i CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 1 01310 -10 10/10/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01340 2 3 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review such working drawings, 10 shop drawings, test reports and data on materials and equipment (hereinafter 11 in this Section called data), and material samples (hereinafter in this Section 12 called samples) as are required for the proper control of work, including but 13 not limited to those working drawings, shop drawings, data and samples for 14 materials and equipment specified elsewhere in the Specifications and in the 15 Contract Drawings. 16 17 B. The Contractor shall note that there are specific submittal requirements in 18 other sections of these Specifications, including the requirement to submit and 19 have reviewed a Schedule of Shop Drawing Submittals prior to the submittal of 20 any other shop drawing, as described in Section 01300. 21 22 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS 23 24 A. When used in the Contract Documents, the term "shop drawings" shall be 25 considered to mean Contractor's Drawings for material and equipment that will 26 become an integral part of the Project. These drawings shall be complete and 27 detailed. Shop drawings shall consist of fabrication, erection and setting 28 drawings and schedule drawings, manufacturer's scale drawings, bills of 29 material, wiring and control diagrams, and inspection and test reports including 30 performance curves and certifications as applicable to the Work. 31 32 B. All details on shop drawings submitted for review shall show clearly the 33 elevations of the various parts to the main members and lines of the structure 34 and /or equipment, and where correct fabrication of the work depends upon 35 field measurements, such measurements shall be made and noted on the 36 shop drawings before being submitted for review. 37 38 1.03 PRODUCT DATA 39 40 A. Product data as specified in individual sections, include, but are not 41 necessarily limited to, standard prepared data for manufactured products 42 (sometimes referred to as catalog data), such as the manufacturers product 43 specification and installation instructions, availability of colors and patterns, 44 manufacturer's printed statements of compliances and applicability, roughing - 45 in diagrams and templates, catalog cuts, product photographs, standard wiring 46 diagrams, printed performance curves and operational -range diagrams, 47 production or quality control inspection and test reports and certifications, mill SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01340 -1 07/15/14 1 reports, product operating and maintenance instructions and recommended 2 spare -parts listing storage instructions, and printed product warranties, as 3 applicable to the work. 4 5 1.04 WORKING DRAWINGS 6 7 A. When used in the Contract Documents, the term "working drawings" shall be 8 considered to mean the Contractor's Drawings for temporary structures such 9 as temporary bulkheads, support of open cut excavation, support of utilities, 10 ground water control systems, forming and falsework; for underpinning; and 11 for such other work as may be required for construction but does not become 12 an integral part of the Project. 13 14 B. Working drawings shall be signed and sealed by a registered Professional 15 Engineer, currently licensed to practice in the State and shall convey, or be 16 accompanied by, calculations or other sufficient information to completely 17 explain the structure, machine, or system described and its intended manner 18 of use. Prior to commencing such work, working drawings must have been 19 reviewed without specific exceptions by the Engineer. Such review will be for 20 general conformance and will not relieve the Contractor in any way from his 21 responsibility with regard to the fulfillment of the terms of the Contract. All 22 risks of error are assumed by the Contractor. The Owner and Engineer shall 23 have no responsibility for errors on the working drawings or the finished work. 24 25 1.05 SAMPLES 26 27 A. The Contractor shall furnish, for review of the Engineer, samples required by 28 the Contract Documents or requested by the Engineer. Samples shall be 29 delivered to the Engineer as specified or directed and in quantities and sizes 30 as specified. A minimum of two samples of each item shall be submitted 31 unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall prepay all shipping charges 32 on samples. Materials or equipment for which samples are required shall not 33 be used in work until reviewed by the Engineer. 34 35 B. Samples specified in individual sections, include, but are not necessarily 36 limited to, physical examples of the work such as sections of manufactured or 37 fabricated work, small cuts or containers of materials, complete units of 38 repetitively -used products, color /texture /pattern swatches and range sets, 39 specimens for coordination of visual effect, graphic symbols, and units of work 40 to be used by the Engineer or Owner for independent inspection and testing, 41 as applicable to the Work. 42 43 C. The Contractor shall prepare a transmittal letter for each shipment of sample, 44 shall enclose a copy of this letter with the shipment, and shall send a copy of 45 this letter to the Engineer. Review of a sample shall be only for the 46 characteristics or use named in such review and shall not be construed to 47 change or modify any Contract requirements. SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01340 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.06 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS 2 3 A. The Contractor shall review, approve, and submit, with reasonable 4 promptness and in such sequence, so as to cause no delay in the Contract 5 Work or in the Work of the Owner or any separate contractor, all shop 6 drawings, product data, working drawings and samples required by the 7 Contract Documents. 8 9 B. It is intended that all shop drawing be submitted electronically by email, 10 however, when electronic submittals cannot be made, the Contractor shall 11 submit to the Engineer five (5) copies of the shop drawing, plus the number of 12 copies he wants returned. The Engineer will review the submittal and 13 electronically return to the Contractor appropriate review comments and /or 14 marked -up copies of the shop drawings if applicable. 15 16 C. Shop drawings, product data, working drawings and samples shall be 17 transmitted using a form provided by the Engineer and furnished with the 18 following information: 19 20 1. Number and title of the drawing. 21 22 2. Date of drawing or revision. 23 24 3. Name of project building, facility or system. 25 26 4. Name of contractor, subcontractor, and manufacturer submitting 27 drawing. 28 29 5. Clear identification of contents, location of the work, and the sheet 30 numbers where the product is found in the contract drawings. 31 32 6. Contractor Certification Statement. 33 34 7. Submittal Identification Number. 35 36 8. Contract Drawing Number Reference. 37 38 9. Statement indicating any deviations from the Contract Documents. 39 40 D. All items specified are not necessarily intended to be a manufacturer's 41 standard product. Variations from specified items will be considered on an "or 42 equal" basis. If submittals show variations from Contract requirements 43 because of standard shop practice or for other reasons, the Contractor shall 44 describe such variations in his letter of transmittal and on the shop drawings 45 along with notification of his intent to seek contract adjustment. If acceptable, 46 proper adjustment in the Contract shall be implemented where appropriate. If 47 the Contractor fails to describe such variations he shall not be relieved of the SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01340 -3 07/15/14 1 responsibility for executing the work in accordance with the Contract, even 2 though such drawings have been reviewed. Variations submitted but not 3 described may be cause for rejection. Any variations initiated by the 4 Contractor will not be considered as an addition to the scope of work unless 5 specifically noted and then accepted as such in writing by the Engineer. 6 7 E. Data on materials and equipment shall include materials and equipment lists 8 giving, for each item thereon, the name and location of the supplier or 9 manufacturer, trade name, catalog reference, material, size, finish and all 10 other pertinent data. 11 12 F. For all mechanical and electrical equipment, the Contractor shall provide a 13 single list that includes the equipment name, and address and telephone 14 number of the manufacturer's representative and service company, so that 15 service and /or spare parts can be readily obtained. In addition, a maintenance 16 and lubrication schedule for each piece of equipment shall be submitted as 17 specified in Section 01730. 18 19 G. The Contractor shall use the color "green" to make his remarks on the 20 Submittals. Only the Engineer will utilize the color "red" in marking submittals. 21 22 1.07 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY 23 24 A. It is the duty of the Contractor to check, and coordinate with the work of all 25 trades, all drawings, data, schedules and samples prepared by or for him 26 before submitting them to the Engineer for review. Each copy of every 27 drawing or data sheet 11"x17" and larger shall bear Contractor's stamp 28 showing that they have been so checked and approved. Drawings or data 29 sheets 11"x17" and smaller shall be bound together in an orderly fashion and 30 bear the Contractor's stamp on the cover sheet. The cover sheet shall fully 31 describe the packaged data and include a list of all sheet numbers within the 32 package. Shop drawings submitted to the Engineer without the Contractor's 33 stamp will be returned to the Contractor, without review at the Engineer's 34 option. 35 36 B. The Contractor shall review shop drawings, product data, and samples prior to 37 submission to determine and verify the following: 38 39 1. Field measurements. 40 41 2. Field construction criteria. 42 43 3. Manufacturer's catalog numbers and similar data. 44 45 4. Conformance with Specifications. 46 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01340 -4 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 C. Shop drawings shall indicate any deviations in the submittal from the 2 requirements of the Contract Documents. 3 4 D. No extension of time will be authorized because of the Contractor's failure to 5 transmit complete and acceptable submittals sufficiently in advance of the 6 Work. 7 8 E. The Contractor shall not begin any work affected by a submittal returned, 9 "Confirm" or "Rejected- Resubmit ". Before starting this work, all revisions 10 must be corrected by the Contractor. After resubmittal they will be reviewed 11 and returned by the Engineer. If returned marked, "No Exceptions Taken" or 12 "Make Corrections Noted ", the Contractor may begin this work. Any 13 corrections made to these shop drawings shall be followed without exception. 14 15 F. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all shop drawings and data 16 sufficiently in advance of construction requirements to provide not less than 17 twenty -one (21) calendar days for Engineer's review from the time the 18 Engineer receives them. 19 20 G. The Contractor shall be responsible for and bear all cost that may result from 21 the ordering of any material or from proceeding with any part of work prior to 22 review by the Engineer of the necessary shop drawings. 23 24 H. All shop drawings, product data, working drawings and samples submitted by 25 subcontractors for review shall be sent directly to the Contractor for checking. 26 The Contractor shall be responsible for their submission according to the shop 27 drawing schedule so as to prevent delays in delivery of materials and project 28 completion. 29 30 I. The Contractor shall check all subcontractor's shop drawings, product data, 31 working drawings and samples regarding measurements, size of members, 32 materials, and details to satisfy him that they are in conformance to the 33 Contract Documents. Shop drawings found to be inaccurate or otherwise in 34 error shall be returned to the subcontractors for correction before submission 35 to the Engineer. 36 37 1.08 ENGINEER'S REVIEW OF SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING 38 DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 39 40 A. The Engineer's review is for general conformance with the design concept and 41 contract drawings. Markings or comments shall not be construed as relieving 42 the Contractor from compliance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications 43 or departures thereof. The Contractor remains responsible for details and 44 accuracy, for coordinating the work with all other associated work and trades, 45 for selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of assembly, and for 46 performing work in a safe manner. 47 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01340 -5 07/15/14 B. The review of shop drawings, data, and samples will be general. The review shall not be construed as: 1. Permitting any departure from the Contract requirements; 2. Relieving the Contractor of responsibility for any errors, including details, dimensions, and materials; 3. Approving departures from details furnished by the Engineer, except as otherwise provided herein. C. If the shop drawings, data or samples as submitted describe variations and show a departure from the Contract Documents, which Engineer finds to be in the interest of the Owner and to be so minor as not to involve a change in Contract Price or Time, the Engineer may return the reviewed drawings without noting an exception. D. Submittals will be returned to the Contractor under one of the following: "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" is assigned when there are no notations or comments on the submittal. When returned under this code 1:he Contractor may release the equipment and /or material for manufacture. "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED" is assigned when notations or comments have been made on the submittal pointing out minor discrepancies as compared with the Contract Documents. Resubmittal or confirmation is not necessary prior to release for manufacturing. "EXCEPTIONS AS NOTED" or "CONFIRM" is assigned when a confirmation of the notations and comments is required from the Contractor. The Contractor may release the equipment or material for manufacture; however, all notations and comments must be incorporated into the final product addressing the omissions and /or nonconforming items that were noted. Only the items to be "confirmed" need to be resubmitted. "REJECTED - RESUBMIT" is assigned when the submittal is in noncompliance with the Contract Documents and must be corrected and the entire package resubmitted. This code generally means that the equipment or material cannot be released for manufacture unless the Contractor takes full responsibility for providing the submitted items in accordance with Contract Documents. "FOR YOUR INFORMATION" is assigned when the package provides information of a general nature that may or may not require a response. E. Resubmittals will be handled in the same manner as first submittals. On resubmittals the Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing, on the SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01340 -6 07/15/14 1 1 1 transmittal and on resubmitted shop drawings by use of revision triangles or 2 other similar methods, to revisions other than the corrections requested by the 3 Engineer on previous submissions. Any such revisions that are not clearly 4 identified shall be made at the risk of the Contractor. The Contractor shall 5 make corrections to any work done because of this type revision that is not in 6 accordance to the Contract Documents as may be required by the Engineer. 7 ' 8 F If the Contractor considers any correction indicated on the shop drawings to 9 constitute a change to the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall give 10 written notice thereof to the Engineer at least seven (7) working days prior to ' 11 release for manufacture. 12 13 G. The number of shop drawings the Engineer will review is limited as described ' 14 in the General Condition or Supplemental General Conditions, and the 15 Contractor will be back charged for costs incurred by the Engineer due to 16 excessive shop drawing submittals or resubmittals as described therein. This 17 limitations is intended to reduce the number of submittals to be reviewed, but 18 shall not be construed to limit the number of shop drawings required and the 19 Contractor shall submit all shop drawings required as directed by the Enginer. '20 21 H. When the shop drawings have been completed to the satisfaction of the 22 Engineer, the Contractor shall carry out the construction in accordance ' 23 therewith and shall make no further changes therein except upon written 24 instruction from the Engineer. 25 26 I. Partial submittals may not be reviewed. The Engineer will be the only judge 27 as to the completeness of a submittal. Submittals not complete will be 28 returned to the Contractor. The Engineer may at his option provide a list or ' 29 mark the submittal directing the Contractor to the areas that are incomplete. 30 31 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 32 33 2.01. SHOP DRAWINGS 34 35 Final shop drawings shall be submitted in electronic format, organized by submittal 36 number, on CD. 37 ' 38 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 39 40 '41 END OF SECTION 42 1 1 ' SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01340 -7 07/15/14 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01340 -8 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01385 2 3 COLOR AUDIO -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 DESCRIPTION 8 9 A. Scope 10 11 The Contractor shall prepare color audio /video DVDs of all work areas within 12 20 days of the Notice to Proceed. These specifications shall supplement the 13 Owner's color audio - video construction records requirements, if any, and the 14 more stringent shall apply. 15 16 B. Requirements Included 17 18 Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color 19 audio /video DVD recording taken of the entire Project, including access to the 20 site of the work. Streets, easements, rights -of way, lots or construction sites 21 within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of pre- construction 22 conditions. One copy of the DVD recordings and video log shall be submitted 23 to the Owner. The Engineer will designate those areas, if any, to be omitted 24 from or added to the audio - visual coverage. All DVDs and written records 25 shall become the property of the Owner. 26 27 C. Scheduling 28 29 No construction shall begin prior to review of the DVDs covering the Project 30 construction area(s) by the Owner. The Owner will have the authority to reject 31 all or any portion of video DVD not conforming to specifications and order that 32 it be redone at no additional charge. The Contractor shall reschedule 33 unacceptable coverage within seven days after being notified. 34 35 D. Videographer Qualifications 36 37 The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer 38 known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of preconstruction 39 color audio -video DVD documentation. The videographer, through the 40 Contractor, shall furnish to the Engineer a list of all equipment to be used for 41 the audio -video recording, i.e., manufacturer's name, model number, 42 specifications and other pertinent information. 43 44 Additional information to be furnished by the videographer is the names and 45 addresses of two references that the videographer has performed color audio - 46 video recording on projects of a similar nature within the last 12 months. 47 Engineer's review of the selected videographer is required prior to taking first COLOR AUDI -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS 01385 -1 07/15/14 1 audio -video DVD. 2 3 E. Equipment 4 5 The Contractor shall finish all equipment, accessories, materials and labor to 6 perform this service. The total audio -video system shall reproduce bright, 7 sharp, clear pictures with accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, 8 tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the 9 recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operalor with proper 10 volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some 11 instances, audio -video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by 12 conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking. 13 The color video camera used in the recording shall be of Industrial Grade and 14 shall have EIA Standard NTSC type color - 1.0V 75 OHMS. Video output from 15 camera shall be capable of horizontal resolution of 350 lines at center and 16 utilize a minimum of 8:1 zoom with a 2/3 Newvicon tube or CCD pick -up 17 element for optimum color imagery plus minimum lag through of one foot 18 candle. The recording shall be made with Industrial Grade recorder. The 19 recordings shall be high resolution, extended still frame capable, in color. The 20 recorded video DVDs shall be compatible for playback with any American TV 21 Standard DVD player. 22 23 F. Recorded Information, Audio 24 25 Each DVD shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by 26 the general location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. 27 Accompanying the video recording of each video DVD shall be a 28 corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording, This audio 29 recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or 30 aide, shall assist in viewer orientation and in any needed identification, 31 differentiation, clarification, or objective description of the features being 32 shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio recording shall also be 33 free from any conversations. 34 35 G. Recorded Information, Video 36 37 All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information 38 to include the date and time of recording. The date information shall contain 39 the month, day and year. The time information shall contain the actual hour, 40 minutes and seconds of the day. Additional information shall be displayed 41 periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project 42 name, contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This 43 transparent information shall appear on the extreme upper left hand third of 44 the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom -in and zoom -out rates shall be sufficiently 45 controlled such that recorded objects are clearly viewed during video DVD 46 playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as 47 lens focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and COLOR AUDI -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS 01385 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 electrical focus shall be properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture 2 quality. The construction documentation shall be recorded in SP mode. 3 4 H. Viewer Orientation 5 6 The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer 7 orientation. To this end, overall establishing views of all visible house and 8 business addresses shall be utilized. In areas where the proposed 9 construction location will not be readily apparent to the video DVD viewer, 10 highly visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion 11 as to clearly indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When 12 conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances for the recording 13 system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall 14 not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of 15 the camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture. 16 17 I. Lighting 18 19 All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No recording shall be 20 done during precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when 21 sufficient sunlight is present to properly illuminate the subjects of recording 22 and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects. 23 24 J. Speed of Travel 25 26 The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be 27 directly proportional to the number, size and value of the surface features 28 within that construction areas zone of influence. The rate of speed in the 29 general direction of travel of any vehicle used during recording of a linear 30 project site shall not exceed 44 feet per minute. 31 32 K. Video Log /Index 33 34 All video DVDs shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified 35 by video DVD number and project title. Each video DVD shall have a log of 36 that video DVD's contents. The log shall describe the various segments of 37 coverage contained on the video DVD in terms of the names of the streets or 38 location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, 39 video unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if 40 reasonably available) and the date. 41 42 L. Area of Coverage 43 44 DVD coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of 45 influence of construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such 46 coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, 47 curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes, landscaping, COLOR AUDI -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS 01385 -3 07/15/14 1 culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc., 2 within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the 3 existence of any faults, fractures, or defects. DVD coverage shall be limited to 4 one side of the site, street, easement or right -of -way at any one time. 5 6 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 7 (NOT USED) 8 9 PART 3 — EXECUTION 10 11 3.01 GENERAL 12 13 A. Prior to requesting Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall review the 14 pre- construction video with the Owner /Engineer and identify any work needed 15 to restore the site to pre- construction conditions. 16 17 18 END OF SECTION COLOR AUDI -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS 01385 -4 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01410 2 3 TESTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an Independent Testing 10 Laboratory to perform that geotechnical testing (concrete, compaction) 11 specifically indicated on the Contract Documents or specified in the 12 Specifications or at any other time Contractor elects to have materials and 13 equipment tested for conformity with the Contract Documents. 14 15 1. Contractor shall coordinate with the laboratory to facilitate the execution 16 of its required services. 17 18 2. Employment of the laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor's 19 obligations to perform the Work of the Contract. 20 21 B. Contractor shall perform and pay for all other testing (pressure, torque, etc.) 22 required in the specifications. 23 24 1.02 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY 25 26 A. Laboratory is not authorized to: 27 28 1. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract 29 Documents. 30 2. Approve or accept any portion of the Work. 31 32 3. Perform any duties of the Contractor. 33 34 1.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 35 36 A. Coordinate with laboratory personnel, provide access to Work, to 37 Manufacturer's operations. 38 39 B. Secure and deliver to the laboratory adequate quantities of representational 40 samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing. 41 42 C. Provide to the laboratory the preliminary design mix proposed to be used for 43 concrete, and other materials mixes, which require control by the testing 44 laboratory. 45 46 D. Materials and equipment used in the performance of work under this Contract 47 are subject to inspection and testing at the point of manufacture or fabrication. TESTING AND LABORATORY SERVICES 01410 -1 07/15/14 1 Standard specifications for quality and workmanship are indicated in the 2 Contract Documents. The Engineer may require the Contractor to provide 3 statements or certificates from the manufacturers and fabricators that the 4 materials and equipment provided by them are manufactured or fabricated in 5 full accordance with the standard specifications for quality and workmanship 6 indicated in the Contract Documents. All costs of this testing and providing 7 statements and certificates shall be a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor, 8 and no extra charge to the Owner shall be allowed on account of such testing 9 and certification. 10 11 E. Furnish incidental labor and facilities: 12 13 1. To provide access to work to be tested. 14 15 2. To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of the 16 product to be tested. 17 18 3. To facilitate inspections and tests. 19 20 4. For storage and curing of test samples. 21 22 F. The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the laboratory sufficiently in 23 advance (minimum 48 hours) of operations to allow for laboratory assignment 24 of personnel and scheduling of tests. 25 26 G. Employ and pay for the services of the same or a separate, equally qualified 27 independent testing laboratory to perform additional inspections, sampling and 28 testing required for the Contractor's convenience and as reviewed by the 29 Engineer. 30 31 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 32 33 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 34 35 36 END OF SECTION TESTING AND LABORATORY SERVICES 01410 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01500 2 3 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SANITARY FACILITIES 8 9 A. The Contractor shall furnish temporary sanitary facilities at the site, as 10 provided herein, for the needs of all construction workers and others 11 performing work or furnishing services on the Project. 12 13 B. Sanitary facilities shall be of reasonable capacity, properly maintained 14 throughout the construction period, and obscured from public view to the 15 greatest practical extent. If toilets of the chemically treated type are used, at 16 least one toilet will be furnished for each 20 persons. The Contractor shall 17 enforce the use of such sanitary facilities by all personnel at the site. 18 19 1.02 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC 20 21 A. Contractor shall conduct his work to interfere as little as possible with public 22 travel, whether vehicular or pedestrian. Whenever it is necessary to cross, 23 obstruct, or close roads, driveways and walks, whether public or private, 24 Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable and safe bridges, detours, or 25 other temporary expedients for the accommodation of public and private 26 travel, and shall give reasonable notice to owners of private drives before 27 interfering with them. Driveway access to commercial properties shall be 28 maintained at all times. Such maintenance of traffic shall not be required 29 when Contractor has obtained permission from the owner and tenant of private 30 property, or from the authority having jurisdiction over public property involved, 31 to obstruct traffic at the designated point. At all times, the Contractor shall 32 perform the Work in accordance with the permits and easement agreements. 33 34 B. Traffic control shall be in accordance with DOT Roadway and Traffic Design 35 Standards for Traffic Control Through Work Zones. All local Traffic 36 Regulations shall be followed. 37 38 C. In making open -cut street crossings, the Contractor shall not block more than 39 one -half of the street at a time. Whenever possible, Contractor shall widen the 40 shoulder on the opposite side to facilitate traffic flow. Temporary surfacing 41 shall be provided as necessary on shoulders. 42 43 1.03 BARRICADES AND LIGHTS 44 45 A. All streets, roads, highways, and other public thoroughfares that are closed to 46 traffic shall be protected by effective barricades on which shall be placed 47 acceptable warning signs. Barricades shall be located at the nearest TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 -1 07/15/14 1 intersecting public highway or street on each side of the blocked section. 2 3 B. All open trenches and other excavations shall have suitable barricades, signs, 4 and lights to provide adequate protection to the public. Obstructions such as 5 material piles and equipment shall be provided with similar warning signs and 6 lights. Contractor shall be responsible for public safety within the construction 7 area. 8 9 C. All barricades and obstructions shall be illuminated with warning lights from 10 sunset to sunrise. Material storage and conduct of the Work on or alongside 11 public streets and highways shall cause the minimum obstruction and 12 inconvenience to the traveling public. All barricades, signs, lights and other 13 protective devices shall be installed and maintained in conformity with 14 applicable statutory requirements and, where within railroad and highway 15 rights -of -way, as required by the authority having jurisdiction thereof. 16 17 D. Open trenches and other excavations shall not be left open over weekends 18 and holidays, or greater than one calendar day, except during extreme 19 weather conditions. 20 21 1.04 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC AND PRIVATE PROPERTY 22 23 A. Contractor shall protect, shore, brace, support, and maintain all underground 24 pipes, conduits, drains, and other underground construction uncovered or 25 otherwise affected by his construction operations. All pavement, surfacing, 26 driveways, curbs, walks, buildings, utility poles, guy wires, fences, and other 27 surface structures affected by construction operations, together with all sod 28 and shrubs in yards and parking areas, shall be restored to their original 29 condition, whether within or outside the easement. All replacements shall be 30 made with new materials. 31 32 1.05 PARKING 33 34 A. Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable parking areas for the use of all 35 construction workers and others performing work or furnishing services in 36 connection with the Project, as required to avoid any need for parking personal 37 vehicles where they may interfere with public traffic, Owner's operations, or 38 construction activities, where indicated on the drawings or directed by the 39 Engineer. 40 41 1.06 DUST CONTROL 42 43 A. Contractor shall take reasonable measures to prevent unnecessary dust. 44 Earth surfaces subject to dusting shall be kept moist with water or by 45 application of a chemical dust suppressant. Dusty materials in piles or in 46 transit shall be covered when practicable to prevent blowing. 47 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B. Buildings or operating facilities that may be adversely affected by dust shall be 2 adequately protected from dust. Existing or new machinery, motors, 3 instrument panels or similar equipment, shall be protected by suitable dust 4 screens. Proper ventilation shall be included with dust screens. 5 6 1.07 SWEEPING 7 8 A. The Contractor shall sweep loose material from all pavement at the end of 9 each workday. 10 11 1.08 POLLUTION CONTROL 12 13 A. Contractor shall prevent the pollution of drains and watercourses by sanitary 14 wastes, sediment, debris and other substances resulting from construction 15 activities. No sanitary wastes will be permitted to enter any drain or 16 watercourse other than sanitary sewers. No sediment, debris or other 17 substance will be permitted to enter sanitary sewers and reasonable measures 18 will be taken to prevent such materials from entering any drain or watercourse. 19 20 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 21 22 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 23 24 25 END OF SECTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 -3 07/15/14 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 -4 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01505 2 3 MOBILIZATION 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 DEFINITION AND SCOPE 8 9 A. Mobilization shall include the obtaining of all permits, insurance, and bonds; 10 moving onto the site of all plant and equipment; furnishing and erecting plants, 11 temporary facilities, and other construction facilities; all as required for the 12 proper performance and completion of the Work. Mobilization shall include, 13 but not be limited to, the following principal items: 14 15 1. Move onto the site all plant and equipment required for first month's 16 operations. 17 18 2. Install temporary construction power, wiring, and lighting facilities. 19 20 3. Establish fire protection plan and safety program. 21 22 4. Secure construction water supply. 23 24 5. Provide on -site sanitary facilities and potable water facilities. 25 26 6. Arrange for and erect Contractor's work and storage yard and 27 employees' parking facilities. 28 29 7. Submit all required insurance certificates and bonds. 30 31 8. Obtain all required permits. 32 33 9. Post all OSHA, Environmental Protection Agency, Department of Labor, 34 and all other required notices. 35 36 10. Have superintendent at the job site full time. 37 38 11. Submit a detailed construction schedule acceptable to the Engineer. 39 40 12. If required, erect project construction sign(s). 41 42 13. Submit a finalized schedule of values and schedule of payments 43 acceptable to the Owner. 44 45 14. Submit a finalized schedule of submittals. 46 47 15. Construct, maintain, and restore temporary access and haul roads. MOBILIZATION 01505 -1 07/15/14 1 2 16. Provide a continuous color audio - videotape recording of existing 3 conditions. 4 5 PART 2 — PRODUCT (NOT USED) 6 7 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 8 9 10 END OF SECTION MOBILIZATION 01505 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 SECTION 01510 2 3 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 4 I 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED I8 9 A. Furnish, install and maintain temporary utilities required for construction, 10 remove on completion of Work. I11 12 1.02 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES 13 14 15 A. Comply with National Electric Code. 16 B. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and regulations and with utility 17 18 company requirements. 19 C. Comply with Local City and County Health Department Regulations. 1 20 21 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 22 1 23 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL 24 I 25 A. Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for the 26 required usage, must not create unsafe conditions, and must not violate 27 requirements of applicable codes and standards. 28 I29 2.02 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING 30 I 31 A. Arrange with utility company and Owner to provide service required for power 32 and lighting, and pay all costs for service and for power used in the 33 construction, testing and trial operation prior to final acceptance of the work by I 34 the Owner. All cost associated with obtaining temporary and permanent 35 power shall be at Contractor expense. 36 I 37 B. Provide adequate artificial lighting for all areas of work when natural light is not 38 adequate for work, and for areas accessible to the public. 39 I40 2.03 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE 41 42 A. Arrange with local telephone service- company to provide direct line telephone I 43 44 service or mobile phone service at the construction site for the use by personnel and employees. 45 I 46 47 B. Pay all costs for installation, maintenance and removal, and service charges. 1 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01510 -1 07/15/14 1 C. In lieu of direct telephone service, provide cellular phone service for site 2 superintendent(s). 3 4 2.04 TEMPORARY WATER 5 6 A. The Contractor shall install at each connection to the local water supply 7 system a backflow preventer and meter meeting local utility requirements. 8 9 B. The Contractor shall pay for all temporary water facilities, including the 10 backflow preventers and meters, and the actual amount of water used during 11 construction. 12 13 2.05 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES 14 15 A. Provide sanitary facilities in compliance with laws and regulations. 16 17 B. Service, clean and maintain facilities and enclosures. 18 19 PART 3 — EXECUTION 20 21 3.01 GENERAL 22 23 A. Maintain and operate systems to assure continuous service. 24 25 B. Modify and extend systems as work progress requires. 26 27 C. Allow the Owner and Engineer reasonable use of all temporary utilities. 28 29 3.02 REMOVAL 30 31 A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no 32 longer required as determined by the Engineer. 33 34 B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of 35 temporary facilities. 36 37 38 END OF SECTION TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01510 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01600 2 3 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. Material and equipment incorporated into the Work shall: 10 11 1. Conform to applicable specifications and standards. 12 13 2. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically 14 identified in writing by the Engineer. 15 16 B. Manufactured and Fabricated Products: 17 18 1. Design, fabricate and assemble in accord with the best engineering and 19 shop practices. 20 21 2. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges, 22 to be interchangeable. 23 24 3. Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical, by the same 25 manufacturer. 26 27 4. Products shall be suitable for service conditions. 28 29 5. Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall 30 be adhered to unless variations are specifically identified in writing. 31 32 C. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is 33 designed or is specified. 34 35 1.02 REVIEW OF MATERIALS 36 37 A. All materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be subject to the 38 inspection and review of the Engineer. No material shall be delivered to the 39 work without prior review of the Engineer. 40 41 B. Facilities and labor for handling and inspection of all materials and equipment 42 shall be furnished by the Contractor. If the Engineer requires, either prior to 43 beginning or during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall submit 44 samples of materials for such special tests as may be necessary to demon - 45 strate that they conform to the specifications. Such samples shall be 46 furnished, stored, packed, and shipped as directed at the Contractor's MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 -1 07/15/14 1 expense. Except as otherwise noted, the Owner will make arrangements for 2 and pay for the tests. 3 4 C. The Contractor shall submit data and samples sufficiently early to permit 5 consideration and review before materials are necessary for incorporation in 6 the work. Any delay resulting from the Contractor's failure to submit samples 7 or data promptly shall not be used as a basis of claims against the Owner or 8 the Engineer. 9 10 D. The materials and equipment used on the work shall correspond to the 11 accepted samples or other data previously submitted to the Engineer for 12 review. 13 14 1.03 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION 15 16 A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with 17 manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such 18 instructions to parties involved in the installation, including four copies to the 19 Engineer. 20 21 1. Maintain one set of complete instructions at the job site during 22 installation and until completion. 23 24 B. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accord 25 with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements. 26 27 1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with 28 manufacturer's instructions, consult with Engineer for further 29 instructions. 30 31 2. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions. 32 33 C. Perform work in accord with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any 34 preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or 35 exempted by Contract Documents. 36 37 1.04 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING 38 39 A. Arrange deliveries of Products in accord with construction schedules, 40 coordinate to avoid conflict with work and conditions at the site. 41 42 1. Deliver Products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original 43 containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. 44 45 2. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with 46 requirements of Contract Documents and submittals, and that Products 47 are properly protected and undamaged. MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by methods to prevent 3 soiling or damage to Products or packaging. 4 5 1.05 STORAGE AND PROTECTION 6 7 A. The Contractor shall furnish a covered, weather - protected storage structure 8 providing a clean, dry, non - corrosive environment for all mechanical 9 equipment, valves, architectural items, electrical and instrumentation 10 equipment, and special equipment to be incorporated into this project. 11 Storage of equipment shall be in strict accordance with the "instructions for 12 storage" of each equipment supplier and manufacturer including connection of 13 heaters, placing of storage lubricants in equipment, etc. The Contractor shall 14 furnish a copy of the manufacturer's instructions for storage to the Engineer 15 prior to storage of all equipment and materials. Corroded, damaged or 16 deteriorated equipment and parts shall be replaced before acceptance of the 17 project. Equipment and materials not properly stored will not be included in a 18 payment estimate. 19 20 B. Store Products in accord with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and 21 labels intact and legible. 22 23 1. Store products subject to damage by the elements in weather tight 24 enclosures. 25 26 2. Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by 27 manufacturer's instructions. 28 29 3. Store fabricated products above the ground, on blocking or skids, 30 prevent soiling or staining. Cover products which are subject to 31 deterioration with impervious sheet coverings, provide adequate 32 ventilation to avoid condensation. 33 34 4. Store loose granular materials in a well- drained area on solid surfaces 35 to prevent mixing with foreign matter. 36 37 C. All materials and equipment to be incorporated in the work shall be handled 38 and stored by the Contractor before, during, and after shipment in a manner to 39 prevent warping, twisting, bending, breaking, chipping, rusting, and any injury, 40 theft or damage of any kind whatsoever to the material or equipment. 41 42 D. Cement, sand and lime shall be stored under a roof and off the ground and 43 shall be kept completely dry at all times. All miscellaneous steel, and 44 reinforcing steel shall be stored off the ground or otherwise to prevent 45 accumulations of dirt or grease, and in a position to prevent accumulations of 46 standing water and to minimize rusting. Precast concrete sections shall be 47 handled and stored in a manner to prevent accumulations of dirt, standing MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 -3 07/15/14 1 water, staining, chipping or cracking. Brick, block and similar masonry 2 products shall be handled and stored in a manner to reduce breakage, 3 chipping, cracking, and spilling to a minimum. 4 5 E. All materials that, in the opinion of the Engineer, have become so damaged as 6 to be unfit for the use intended or specified shall be promptly removed from 7 the site of the work, and the Contractor shall receive no compensation for the 8 damaged material or its removal. 9 10 F Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make 11 periodic inspections of stored Products to assure that Products are maintained 12 under specified conditions, and free from damage or deterioration. 13 14 G. Protection After Installation: 15 16 1. Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products 17 from damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations. 18 Remove covering when no longer needed. 19 20 H. The Contractor shall be responsible for all material, equipment, and supplies 21 sold and delivered to the Owner under this Contract until final inspection of the 22 work and acceptance thereof by the Owner. In the event any such material, 23 equipment, and supplies are lost, stolen, damaged, or destroyed prior to final 24 inspection and acceptance, the Contractor shall replace same without 25 additional cost to the Owner. 26 27 I. Should the Contractor fail to take proper action on storage and handling of 28 equipment supplied under this Contract within seven days after written notice 29 to do so has been given, the Owner retains the right to correct all deficiencies 30 noted in previously transmitted written notice and deduct the cost associated 31 with these corrections from the Contractor's Contract. These costs may be 32 comprised of expenditures for labor, equipment usage, administrative, clerical, 33 engineering and any other costs associated with making the necessary 34 corrections. 35 36 1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 37 38 A. Contractor's Options: 39 40 1. For products specified only by reference standard, select any product 41 meeting that standard. 42 43 2. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, 44 submit the products or manufacturers named in the Proposal, which 45 complies with the specifications. 46 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 -4 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3. For products specified by naming one or more products or 2 manufacturers and "or equal ", Contractor shall submit a request as for 3 substitutions for any product or manufacturer not specifically named. 4 5 B. Substitutions: 6 7 1. After the Effective Date of the Agreement, the Engineer will consider 8 written requests from Contractor for substitution of products. 9 10 2. Submit a separate request for each product, supported with complete 11 data, with drawings and samples as appropriate, including: 12 13 a. Comparison of the qualities of the proposed substitution with that 14 specified. 15 16 b. Changes required in other elements of the work because of the 17 substitution. 18 19 c. Effect on the construction schedule. 20 21 d. Cost data comparing the proposed substitution with the product 22 specified. 23 24 e. Any required license fees or royalties. 25 26 f. Availability of maintenance service, and source of replacement 27 materials. 28 29 3. The Engineer will be the judge of the acceptability of the proposed 30 substitution. 31 32 C. Contractor's Representation: 33 34 1. A request for a substitution constitutes a representation that Contractor: 35 36 a. Has investigated the proposed Product and determined that it is 37 equal to or superior in all respects to that specified. 38 39 b. Shall provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution 40 as for the product specified. 41 42 c. Will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into 43 the Work, and make such other changes as may be required to 44 make the Work complete in all respects. 45 46 d. Waives all claims for additional costs, under his responsibility, 47 which may subsequently become apparent. MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 -5 07/15/14 1 1.07 SPECIAL TOOLS 2 3 A. Manufacturers of equipment and machinery shall furnish any special tools 4 (including grease guns or other lubricating devices) required for normal 5 adjustment, operations and maintenance, together with instructions for their 6 use. The Contractor shall preserve and deliver to the Owner these tools and 7 instructions in good order no later than upon completion of the Contract. 8 9 1.08 WARRANTY 10 11 A. For all major pieces of equipment, submit a warranty from the equipment 12 manufacturer as specified in Section 01740. The manufacturer's warranty 13 period shall be concurrent with the Contractor's warranty. 14 15 1.09 SPARE PARTS 16 17 A. Spare parts for certain equipment have been specified in the pertinent 18 sections of the Specifications. The Contractor shall collect and store all spare 19 parts so required in an area to be designated by the Engineer. In addition, the 20 Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer an inventory listing all spare parts, the 21 equipment they are associated with, the name and address of the supplier, 22 and the delivered cost of each item. Copies of actual invoices for each item 23 shall be furnished with the inventory to substantiate the delivered cost. 24 25 1.10 GREASE, OIL, AND FUEL 26 27 A. All grease, oil, and fuel required for testing of equipment shall be furnished 28 with the respective equipment. The Owner shall be furnished with a year's 29 supply of required lubricants including grease and oil of the type 30 recommended by the manufacturer with each item of equipment supplied. 31 32 B. The Contractor shall be responsible for changing the oil in all drives and 33 intermediate drives of each mechanical equipment after initial break -in of the 34 equipment, which in no event shall be any longer than three weeks of 35 operation. 36 37 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 38 39 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 40 41 42 END OF SECTION MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 -6 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01625 2 3 START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. Prior to requesting issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, the 10 Contractor shall perform start-up testing services as specified herein. 11 12 B. Start-up of the facilities and appurtenances will require completion of all 13 structures, installation of all equipment, and all connections to existing 14 systems. All components of the new system shall be installed as if each were 15 ready for use by the Owner for their intended purposes. The Contractor shall 16 provide a written startup plan, for review by the Engineer, for individual 17 facilities and systems. As applicable, the startup plan shall be in accordance 18 with the construction phasing plan described in the Contractor's Schedule 19 described in Section 01310. 20 21 C. All equipment will be tested and accepted by the Engineer prior to placement 22 of the new facilities into operation. 23 24 D. All lubricants, water, air, fuel and power necessary for initial operation and 25 tests shall be furnished by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 26 27 E. In addition to furnishing, delivering, installing, and testing each piece of 28 equipment, the Contractor shall provide the services of competent factory 29 certified representatives for the periods indicated in other sections of these 30 Specifications. Such representatives shall assist the Engineer by instructing 31 the operating personnel of the Owner in the maintenance and operation of the 32 equipment, conducting tests, and making recommendations for producing the 33 most efficient results. These services shall be made during the initial 34 operation of the completed facilities and be in addition to services necessary 35 during erection or to correct defective materials or workmanship during the 36 guarantee period. These representatives shall be specially trained and 37 qualified to provide installation services, adjustment, start-up, and testing work 38 and shall not be sales representatives only. The cost of such representation, 39 including subsistence and travel, shall be provided by the Contractor at no 40 additional cost to the Owner. 41 42 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 43 44 PART 3 — EXECUTION 45 46 3.01 PRELIMINARY MATTERS 47 48 A. General Requirements: 49 START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625 -1 07/15/14 1. Successfully execute the start-up of the system and demonstrate satisfactory performance of the intended use thereof. The start-up and performance demonstration shall be successfully executed prior to the Engineer's issuance of Substantial Completion. 2. Field acceptance tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer. At least thirty (30) calendar days prior to testing, Contractor shall submit details of all test procedures to the Engineer for review and comment. Test procedures shall be submitted to the Engineer in accordance with Specification Section 01340. This notification shall be shown on the Progress Schedule. 3. All performance tests and inspections shall be scheduled at least ten (10) working days in advance with the Engineer. All performance tests and inspections shall be conducted during the normal work week of Monday through Friday, unless otherwise authorized, in writing, by the Engineer. 4. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of equipment during start-up systems testing and shall neither have nor make any claim for damage that may occur to equipment prior to the time when the Owner takes over the operation thereof. 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing and installing all necessary valves, whether shown on the Drawings or not, in order to facilitate testing of pumping systems, tanks, and all other system start- up testing, at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Preparation for Systems Start-Up: 1. All mechanical and electrical equipment shall be checked to ensure that each component is in good working order and properly installed and connected. All systems shall be purged as required. All sumps, tanks, basins, chambers, wet wells, and pipelines that are hydraulically checked shall be drained and returned to their original condition once the water testing is complete. All pipelines that have been filled and flushed shall be drained clean. 2. All instruments and controls shall be calibrated through their full operational distribution range. Any other adjustments required for proper operation of all instrumentation and control equipment shall be made and confirmed by the specific factory authorized service representative. 3. The Contractor shall work with each factory certified technician to complete any remaining tasks, connections, adjustments, and START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 preparations needed to ensure proper equipment and /or system 2 operation. 3 4 4. No testing or equipment operation shall occur until the Engineer has 5 confirmed that all specified safety equipment has been installed and is 6 in good working order. 7 8 5. No testing or equipment operation shall occur until the Engineer has 9 verified that all maintenance equipment, spare parts, and equipment 10 Operation and Maintenance manuals have been furnished as specified. 11 12 6. No testing or equipment operation shall occur until the factory certified 13 technician for that particular component has confirmed that all 14 lubricants, electrical connections, drains, fuel and exhaust systems 15 have been provided and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's 16 recommendations. 17 18 7 No testing or equipment operation shall occur until the Contractor has 19 submitted and the Engineer has reviewed the Certificate of Proper 20 Installation. 21 22 3.02 PRESSURE TESTS 23 24 A. Field pressure tests shall be made to confirm compliance with the Contract 25 Documents. The Contractor shall perform field tests as herein specified. All 26 tanks, water mains, piping and equipment shall be tested in the field in the 27 presence of the Engineer or his authorized agent. 28 29 B. Hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be performed in accordance with the 30 applicable sections of the American Water Works Association Standard for 31 Installation of Cast Iron /Ductile Iron Water Mains, AWWA C -600, Concrete 32 Pressure Pipe, AWWA M9, and Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride 33 (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings for Water Mains, AWWA C -605, except as 34 herein modified. 35 36 C. The Contractor shall submit his plan for pressure testing to the Engineer for 37 review at least ten (10) days before starting the work. The Contractor shall 38 remove and adequately dispose of all blocking material and equipment after 39 completion and acceptance of the field hydrostatic test, unless otherwise 40 directed by the Engineer. Any damage to the pipe shall be repaired by the 41 Contractor. 42 43 D. After completion of all work and before final acceptance, a hydrostatic and 44 leakage test shall be conducted. Water required for testing new pipelines will 45 be provided by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. Water mains shall 46 be tested with potable water and force mains and storm water lines shall be 47 tested with reclaimed water, if available. Where applicable, the Contractor START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625 -3 07/15/14 1 2 3 4 5 6 E. Each newly installed pressure main shall be tested at a pressure equal 1.5 7 times the pipeline design pressure or 150 psi; whichever is greater. The 8 duration of each test shall be a minimum of two (2) hours. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 G. All exposed pipe, fittings, valves, air valves, blow -offs and joints shall be 16 carefully examined during the test, and all joints showing a visible leakage 17 shall be made tight. All defective pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and 18 accessories shall be removed from the line and replaced by the Contractor 19 with new components at no additional cost to the Owner. 20 21 H. The Contractor may backfill the trench before testing the line, but he shall 22 open up the trench at his own expense to repair any leaks. 23 24 I. All visible Teaks shall be corrected regardless of the total leakage revealed by 25 the test as compared to the allowable calculated losses. All lines that fail to 26 meet the test shall be repaired and retested as necessary, until test 27 requirements are complied with. All repairs and retests shall be performed at 28 the Contractor's own expense with no additional cost to the Owner. 29 30 J. The installation will not be accepted until the leakage is equal to or less than 31 the allowable leakage as determined by the formula below: 32 33 L = SD(P)o.s 34 133,200 shall coordinate the development of the water supply with the pipeline work in order that water will be available to meet these requirements. At no time are valves on the water supply system to be operated without the prior authorization of the Engineer. F. Any test pump(s), piping connections, taps, fittings, pressure gauges, compressors, and all necessary components thereof which might be required for the hydrostatic tests, shall be furnished by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 35 36 37 38 39 in which "L" equals the allowable leakage, in gallons per hour; "S" is the length of the pipe tested, in feet; "D" is the nominal pipe diameter, in inches; and "P" is the average test pressure during the leakage test, in pounds per square inch, gauge. 40 K. All tests shall be made under the supervision of the Engineer or authorized 41 agents thereof. No additional compensation will be paid to the Contractor for 42 performing the above required tests; the cost of all labor, materials, lubricants, 43 fuels, power, necessary appliances, and the coordination for testing purposes 44 shall be included in the unit price or prices bid for the various items of work. 45 46 L. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer a minimum of 72 hours advance 47 notice for scheduling hydrostatic and leakage tests. START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625 -4 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3.03 DISINFECTION OF POTABLE WATER LINES 3 4 A. Prior to disinfection, the lines shall be cleaned and flushed. Flushing and 5 cleaning shall occur after all hydrostatic and leak tests have been performed 6 and passed. Lines shall be disinfected in accordance with the applicable 7 requirements of AWWA C651 and as described hereinafter. 8 9 B. Before being placed in service, all potable water pipelines installed under this 10 Contract shall be disinfected by chlorination in accordance with AWWA 11 Standards. Either of the following disinfectants may be allowed upon written 12 authorization from the Engineer. 13 14 1. Liquid Chlorine: A chlorine gas -water mixture shall be applied by 15 means of a solution -feed chlorination device. The device must provide 16 a means to prevent the backflow of water into the chlorine cylinder. 17 18 2. Calcium Hypochlorite Solution: A solution consisting of 5 percent 19 calcium hypochlorite powder and 95 percent water by weight shall be 20 prepared and this solution will be injected or pumped into the line. 21 22 C. The point of application of the chlorinating agent shall be at the beginning of 23 the pipeline extension and through a corporation stop inserted in the top of the 24 newly installed pipe. The water injector for delivering the chlorine- bearing 25 water into the pipe may be supplied from a tap on the pressure side of the 26 valve controlling the flow into the pipeline extension. 27 28 D. Water from the existing distribution system or other source of supply shall be 29 controlled so as to flow slowly into the newly installed pipeline during the 30 application of chlorine. The Contractor shall not allow the chlorine solution in 31 the line being treated to flow back into the line supplying the water. 32 33 E. Treated water shall be retained in the new pipeline at least 24 hours, after 34 which the chlorine residual in the line shall be at least 50 mg /I. Should the 35 initial procedure fail to result in the conditions specified, the chlorination 36 procedure shall be repeated until acceptable results are obtained, at the 37 Contractor's expense. 38 39 F. The Contractor shall tap the lines at points designated by the Engineer and 40 provide necessary piping to discharge water from the line to a designated 41 location as directed by the Engineer. 42 43 G. Following chlorination, all treated water shall be thoroughly flushed from the 44 line, at its extremities, until the replacement water throughout its length, upon 45 testing, is proved comparable to the quality of water in the existing distribution 46 system. 47 START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625 -5 07/15/14 1 H. Water for flushing will be provided through connections to the Owner's piping 2 systems. The Contractor shall pay for all water used in flushing the pipelines. 3 At no time are valves on the distribution system to be operated without the 4 presence of a duly qualified representative of the Engineer. 5 6 I. After the water lines have been disinfected and flushed, samples of water shall 7 be taken from several points in sterilized containers, and samples forwarded to 8 the Engineer, or its designated representative, for bacterial examination. If 9 repeated tests of such samples show the presence of coliform organisms, the 10 disinfection shall be repeated or continued until tests indicate absence of 11 contamination. Final acceptance of the bacterial samples shall be received 12 prior to placing the system into operation. 13 14 J. The Contractor shall submit his plan for disinfection of the potable water 15 pipelines to the Engineer for review at least ten (10) days before starting the 16 work. Lines shall be totally free and clean prior to final acceptance. 17 18 3.04 LEAKAGE TEST — GRAVITY SEWERS AND OTHER PIPELINES 19 20 A. All gravity sewer will be tested by the Contractor prior to final acceptance of 21 the work. All tests will be conducted in a manner to minimize any interference 22 with the Contractor's work or progress. The Contractor shall notify the 23 Engineer 72 hours in advance of such tests and, at his option, the Engineer 24 shall witness such tests. 25 26 B. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when the work is ready for testing, 27 and tests shall be made as soon thereafter as practicable, under the 28 observation of the Engineer. Reading meters, gauges or other measuring 29 devices shall be new and furnished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall 30 furnish all other labor, materials, services and equipment including power, fuel, 31 meters and gauges; water and other items and apparatus necessary for 32 making leakage tests, preparing guidelines for testing, assembling, placing, 33 and removing testing equipment and placing in service. 34 35 C. Air Leakage Test 36 37 1. Tests by this method shall be limited to sewers 36 inches in diameter 38 and smaller. The maximum allowable air leakage is based on 39 pre- wetted pipe walls. The Contractor may therefore fill the pipe with 40 clear water and then empty the pipe prior to air testing. When pipe 41 walls are pre- wetted, air leakage tests shall be completed within 24 42 hours after filling the sewer section to be tested. 43 44 2. Air pressure tests shall be made by placing the sewer under 3.0 psig air 45 pressure and measuring the volume of air required to maintain this 46 pressure. The rate of air leakage shall be determined when the system START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625 -6 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 reaches an equilibrium state and air flow shall be read by means of an 2 approved rotometer. 3 4 3. The maximum rate of air loss shall be 0.003 cfm per square foot of 5 interior pipe surface and the maximum air flow shall not exceed 2.0 cfm 6 when the total pressure on the sewer is maintained at 3.0 psig. When 7 the groundwater level is above the invert of the sewer, but below a level 8 adequate for infiltration testing, the maximum air loss shall be reduced 9 6 percent for each foot of groundwater above the sewer invert. 10 11 4. Air testing equipment shall be arranged so that compressors, valving, 12 gauges, and other test devices are located at the ground surface. Air 13 testing equipment shall have an approved air relief arrangement to 14 prevent the sewer from being pressurized to greater than 10.0 psig. 15 16 D. Manhole Vacuum Tests: Each manhole shall be visually inspected for leakage 17 or evidence thereof after assembly, installation, and backfilling activities have 18 been completed. This inspection shall occur by the Engineer or the Engineer's 19 authorized agent. The Contractor shall demonstrate the integrity of the 20 installed materials and construction procedures by conducting a vacuum test 21 in accordance with ASTM C1244 -93. If the manhole shows signs of leakage, 22 it shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no additional cost to 23 the Owner. 24 25 E. Repairing Leaks: When leakage occurs in excess of the specified amount, 26 defective manholes, pipe, pipe joints, or other appurtenances shall be located 27 and repaired at the expense of the Contractor. If the defective portions cannot 28 be located, the Contractor shall remove, reconstruct, and retest as much of the 29 original work as necessary to obtain satisfactory test results. 30 31 3.05 SYSTEM START -UP 32 33 A. Contractor Responsibilities 34 35 1. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer ten (10) days notice in writing 36 of his intent to perform systems start -up. 37 38 2. The Contractor shall provide sufficient personnel to test equipment, 39 monitor and record data, as directed by the Engineer. 40 41 3. The Contractor shall obtain, install, calibrate and operate all test 42 equipment, gauges, pressure recorders, communications systems, etc., 43 as directed by the Engineer. 44 45 4. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Engineer, provide access to the 46 work, provide all incidental labor and facilities, and provide any 47 temporary utilities or construction aids required. START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625 -7 07/15/14 1 2 5. The Contractor shall ensure that all equipment, subsystems, and other 3 separable parts of the Work have been adjusted and balanced and that 4 any and all field tests have been conducted and demonstrated to be in 5 proper operating condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 6 7 B. Start-Up Tests 8 9 1. Start-Up Systems Testing shall include, but not be limited to the 10 following: 11 12 a. The Contractor shall verify that all valves (new and existing, 13 manual and automatic) are in their proper operating position in 14 accordance with the specific operating scenario being tested. 15 16 b. The Contractor shall fill the pipes with water, in an approved 17 manner, taking care to allow the gradual release of air from all 18 high points. 19 20 c. In the presence of the Engineer, the Contractor shall 21 demonstrate the operation of all equipment and facilities 22 including all instrumentation and controls and all manual and 23 automatic control systems. The Contractor shall be responsible 24 for calibrating and verifying the accuracy of all new instruments. 25 The Contractor shall demonstrate the proper operation of all 26 auto - shutdown features and standby power systems or devices. 27 28 d. The Contractor shall demonstrate proper operation of all aspects 29 of the Control System, PLC's, Operator Interface Terminals, and 30 all hardware and software furnished. If applicable, the 31 Contractor shall also demonstrate the full integration of the 32 SCADA System with the Owner's existing network. The 33 Contractor shall make modifications to the existing HMI screens 34 as required or as directed by the Engineer for a fully functional 35 system. 36 37 e. Following the successful completion of these tests, the 38 Contractor shall demonstrate automatic controlled operation of 39 the equipment and facilities over a period of not less than 72 40 hours of continuous successful operation. 41 42 f. The Contractor shall also be responsible for performing all tests 43 outside of those previously described as may be required by the 44 manufacturers for all equipment, pumps and control valves. 45 START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625 -8 07/15/14 1 g. Data records shall be kept by the Contractor. This information 2 shall be submitted to the Engineer for review at the end of the 3 test period. 4 5 2. Should the Contractor fail to demonstrate satisfactory performance on 6 the first and any subsequent attempt, he shall make all necessary 7 alterations, adjustments, repairs and replacements. When the facility is 8 again ready for operation, it shall be brought on line and new tests shall 9 be started. This procedure shall be repeated as often as necessary 10 until the facility has operated continuously to the satisfaction of the 11 Engineer, for the specified test duration. 12 13 14 END OF SECTION 15 START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625 -9 07/15/14 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625 -10 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01640 2 3 QUALITY CONTROL 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 8 9 A. Quality assurance and control of installation 10 11 B. References 12 13 C. Field samples 14 15 D. Mock -up 16 17 E. Inspection and testing laboratory services 18 19 F. Manufacturers' field services and reports 20 21 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS 22 23 A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards 24 25 B. Section 01300 - Submittals: Submission of Manufacturers' Instructions and 26 Certificates 27 28 C. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services 29 30 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE /CONTROL OF INSTALLATION 31 32 A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site 33 conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. 34 35 B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. 36 37 C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request 38 clarification from Engineer before proceeding. 39 40 D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except 41 when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate 42 higher standards or more precise workmanship. 43 44 E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified 45 quality. 46 47 F Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized QUALITY CONTROL 01640 -1 07/15/14 1 2 3 1.04 REFERENCES 4 5 A. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Owner Bids. 6 7 B. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, 8 request clarification for Engineer before proceeding. 9 10 C. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered 11 from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any 12 reference document. 13 14 1.05 FIELD SAMPLES 15 16 A. Install field samples at the site as required by individual specifications Sections 17 for review. 18 19 B. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the Work. 20 21 C. Where field sample is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear 22 area after field sample has been accepted by Engineer. 23 24 1.06 MOCK -UP 25 26 A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section. 27 28 B. Assemble and erect specified items, with specified attachment and anchorage 29 devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. 30 31 C. Where mock -up is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area 32 after mock -up has been accepted by Engineer. 33 34 1.07 INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 35 36 A. Owner will appoint, employ, and pay for services of an independent firm to 37 perform inspection and testing. 38 39 B. The independent firm will perform inspections, tests, and other services 40 specified in individual specification Sections and as required by the Engineer. 41 42 43 44 45 46 D. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, 47 equipment, tools, storage and assistance as requested. to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement. C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Engineer, in duplicate, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non - compliance with Contract Documents. QUALITY CONTROL 01640 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1. Notify Engineer and independent firm 48 hours prior to expected time 3 for operations requiring services. 4 5 2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional 6 samples and tests required for Contractor's use. 7 8 E. Retesting required because of non - conformance to specified requirements 9 shall be performed by the same independent firm on instructions by the 10 Engineer. Payment for retesting will be charged to the Contractor by 11 deducting inspection or testing charges from the Contract Price. 12 13 1.08 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS 14 15 A. Submit qualifications of observer to Engineer 30 days in advance of required 16 observations. Observer shall be subject to review of Engineer and Owner. 17 18 B. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or Product 19 suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site 20 conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, 21 start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, 22 and to initiate instructions when necessary. 23 24 C. Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to 25 applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' 26 written instructions. 27 28 D. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Engineer for review. 29 30 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 31 32 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 33 34 35 END OF SECTION 36 QUALITY CONTROL 01640 -3 07/15/14 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK QUALITY CONTROL 01640 -4 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01670 2 3 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 DESCRIPTION 8 9 A. General: 10 11 1. This section covers furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, 12 and performing all work and services for furnishing, submission, 13 processing and handling of requests for substitution and product 14 options. See items as indicated on drawings and as specified. Any 15 substitution or option shall be in accord with provisions of Contract 16 Documents, and completely coordinated with work of other trades. 17 18 2. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish all 19 supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices 20 incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. 21 22 3. See appropriate sections for specific items specified. See General 23 Conditions for additional information. 24 25 B. Procedure: 26 27 1. For products, equipment, and materials that are named on drawings or 28 in specifications for which a request for substitution is made, observe 29 procedures outlined in these specifications. 30 31 C. Costs: Cost incurred by requester in providing information, catalogs, and 32 samples - including but not limited to labor, materials, freight postage, and 33 transportation - are sole cost of "Requestor" with no cost assessed Owner or 34 Engineer. 35 36 1.02 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION - GENERAL: 37 38 A. Base all bids on materials, equipment and procedures specified. 39 40 B. Certain types of equipment and kinds of material are described in 41 specifications by means of trade names and catalog numbers and /or 42 manufacturer's names. Where this occurs, it was not intended to exclude from 43 consideration such types of equipment and kinds of material bearing other 44 trade names, catalog numbers and /or manufacturer's names, capable of 45 accomplishing purpose of types of equipment or kinds of material specifically 46 indicated. 47 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01670 -1 07/15/14 1 C. Other types of equipment and kinds of material may be acceptable to Owner 2 and Engineer. 3 4 D. Types of equipment, kinds of material and methods of construction, if not 5 specifically indicated must be accepted in writing by Engineer and be agreed 6 upon by Owner. 7 8 E. Conditional bids will not be accepted. 9 10 1.03 SUBMISSION OF REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION: 11 12 A. Within no more than 30 days after award of the Contract, the Engineer will 13 consider requests for substitutions of products, materials, systems or other 14 items. Requests must be received by Engineer within 30 calendar days after 15 the date of Contract award. All requests for substitution shall be completed as 16 specified below. 17 18 B. Substitute items must comply with color and pattern of base specified items 19 unless specifically approved otherwise. 20 21 C. Submit two (2) copies of request for substitution. Include in request: 22 23 1. Name of product located by Drawing No. or Specification No., followed 24 by a detail or line number the particular item(s) for which request for 25 substitution is initiated. 26 27 2. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with 28 Contract Documents. 29 30 3. For Products: 31 32 a. Product identification by schedule or tag no., including 33 manufacturer's name. 34 35 b. Manufacturer's literature, marked to indicate specific model, 36 type, size, and options to be considered: 37 38 1) Product Description 39 2) Performance and test data 40 3) Reference standards 41 4) Difference in power demand 42 5) Dimensional differences for specified unit 43 44 c. Submit samples, full size if so required. Engineer reserves right 45 to impound sample until physical units are installed on project for 46 comparison purposes. All costs of furnishing and return of 47 samples shall be paid by requester. Engineer is not responsible SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01670 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 for Toss of or damage to samples. 2 3 d. Name and address of similar projects where product was used, 4 date of installation, and field performance data on installation. 5 6 4. For construction methods: 7 8 a. Detailed description of proposed method 9 10 b. Drawings illustrating methods 11 12 5. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method 13 specified. 14 15 16 17 18 or method specified. 19 20 8. Include with any request a specific statement defining changes in 21 contract time or amount. 22 23 D. In making request for substitution, or in using an approved substitute item, 24 Supplier /Manufacturer represents: 25 26 1. He has personally investigated proposed product or method, and has 27 determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified, 28 and that it will perform function for which it is intended. 29 30 2. Will provide same or better warranty for substitute item as for product or 31 method specified. 32 33 3. Will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into work, to include 34 but not be limited to the following: 35 36 a. Building and structure modifications as necessary; 37 38 b. Additional ancillary equipment to accommodate change; 39 40 c. Piping, valving, mechanical, electrical, or instrumentation 41 changes, and 42 43 d. All other changes required for work to be complete in all respects 44 to permit incorporation of substitution into project. 45 46 4. Waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution which 47 subsequently become apparent. SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01670 -3 07/15/14 6. Data relating to changes in construction schedule. 7. Accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product 1 2 E. Written acceptance or rejection of items presented for alternative 3 consideration will be given within two weeks after request is received. 4 5 F. In the event the acceptance of an alternate results in a change in contract 6 price or time, or is a deviation from the Contract Documents, a change order 7 will be issued to reflect such change. In the event the acceptance of an 8 alternate does not result in a change in Contract price or time, a field order 9 shall be issued. 10 11 G. Alternates may be rejected for the following reasons: 12 13 1. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents or 14 building spaces. 15 16 2. If they are, in Engineer's opinion, not equal to base product specified, or 17 will not adequately perform function for which intended. 18 19 3. If request is not initiated by the Contractor in accordance with this 20 specification section. 21 22 4. If request will require will, in the opinion of the Engineer, excessive time 23 and /or engineering resources to evaluate. 24 25 1.04 SUBSTITUTION DUE TO UNAVAILABILITY 26 27 A. Unavailability of specified item due to strikes, lockouts, bankruptcy, 28 discontinuance of production, proven shortage, or similar occurrences are 29 reasons for substitution after Contract award. 30 31 B. Notify Engineer in writing, as soon as condition of unavailability becomes 32 apparent; include substantiating data. Submit request for substitution 33 sufficiently in advance to avoid delays. 34 35 C. Submit data as required in paragraph 1.03 above. 36 37 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 38 39 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 40 41 42 END OF SECTION SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01670 -4 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01700 2 3 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. Comply with requirements stated in General Conditions and in Specifications 10 for administrative procedures in closing out the Work. 11 12 B. Electronic Shop Drawings and O &M Manuals 13 14 1. The Contractor shall furnish final Shop Drawings and Operations and 15 Maintenance Data in electronic ".pdf" format for all equipment furnished 16 under all Specification Sections in Divisions 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 and 16. 17 18 2. The Contractor shall organize all electronic Shop Drawings and 19 Operations and Maintenance Data by specification division and section 20 number, and submit two (2) copies on compact disk media (CDROM). 21 22 1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 23 24 A. When Contractor considers the Work, or portion thereof, to be substantially 25 complete, he shall submit to the Engineer: 26 27 1. A written notice that the Work, or designated portion thereof, is 28 substantially complete. 29 30 2. A list of items to be completed or corrected. 31 32 B. Within a reasonable time after receipt of such notice, the Engineer will make 33 an inspection to determine the status of completion. 34 35 C. Should the Engineer determine that the Work is not substantially complete: 36 37 1. The Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor, in writing, giving the 38 reasons therefore. 39 40 2. Contractor shall remedy the deficiencies in the Work, and send a 41 second written notice of substantial completion to the Engineer. 42 43 3. The Engineer will re- inspect the Work. 44 45 D. When the Engineer finds that the Work is substantially complete, he will: 46 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 -1 07/15/14 1 1. Prepare and deliver to Owner a tentative Certificate of Substantial 2 Completion with a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected 3 before final payment. 4 5 2. After consideration of any objections made by the Owner as provided in 6 General Conditions, and when the Engineer considers the Work 7 substantially complete, he will execute and deliver to the Owner and the 8 Contractor a definite Certificate of Substantial Completion with a 9 revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected. 10 11 1.03 FINAL INSPECTION 12 13 A. When Contractor considers all the Work to be complete, he shall submit 14 written certification that: 15 16 1. Contract Documents have been reviewed. 17 18 2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents. 19 20 3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents. 21 22 4. Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of the 23 Owner's representative and are operational. 24 25 5. Work is completed and ready for final inspection. 26 27 B. The Engineer will make an inspection to verify the status of completion with 28 reasonable promptness after receipt of such certification. 29 30 C. Should the Engineer consider that the Work is incomplete or defective: 31 32 1. The Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, listing the 33 incomplete or defective work. 34 35 2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated 36 deficiencies, and send a second written certification to the Engineer that 37 the Work is complete. 38 39 3. The Engineer will re- inspect the Work. 40 41 D. When the Engineer finds that the Work is acceptable under the Contract 42 Documents, he shall request the Contractor to make closeout submittals. 43 44 1.03 PARTIAL SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ACCEPTANCE 45 46 A. For the purpose of construction phasing and for the commencement of the 47 warranty period for equipment, the Owner may accept portions of process CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 systems. Partial Substantial Completion shall be allowed for a complete 2 process system only, or combination of process systems working together, 3 and the Owner shall only consider for partial Substantial Completion those 4 systems as specified herein. 5 6 B. The following general requirements must be completed prior to the Owner 7 accepting partial Substantial Completion of a system. Owner shall accept 8 stand -alone ancillary systems for consideration of partial substantial 9 acceptance. 10 11 1. An equipment manufacturer representative shall be present for all initial 12 start-up and testing as specified in Section 01625 and all other start-up 13 and testing as required in the equipment specifications in Division 11. 14 15 2. The Contractor shall provide training of Owner personnel in the 16 operation of new equipment, according to the equipment specifications 17 outlined in Division 11 and Section 01820. 18 19 3. Contractor shall provide Operating and Maintenance Data to the Owner 20 as required by Section 01730. 21 22 4. All electrical equipment including controls, conduit, wiring and safety 23 interlocks for each piece of equipment as shown on the Drawings must 24 be completed as outlined in Divisions 13 and 16. 25 26 5. All Control System equipment must be installed and operational for the 27 system that is being tested for partial substantial completion as outlined 28 in Divisions 13 and 16. 29 30 6. All inlet and discharge piping must be connected and tested for each 31 system that is being tested for partial substantial completion in 32 compliance with Division 01. 33 34 7 Certifications of Proper Installation shall be furnished, along with spare 35 parts, calibration certificates, and the results of all tests. 36 37 1.05 RE- INSPECTION FEES 38 39 A. Should the Engineer perform re- inspections, due to failure of the Work, to 40 comply with the claims of status of completion made by the Contractor: 41 42 1. Owner will compensate the Engineer for such additional services. 43 44 2. Owner will deduct the amount of such compensation from the final 45 payment to the Contractor. 46 47 1.06 CONTRACTOR'S CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS TO ENGINEER CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 -3 07/15/14 1 2 A. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities. 3 4 B. Project Record Documents. 5 6 C. Operating and Maintenance Data, Instructions to Owner's Personnel. 7 8 D. Warranties and Bonds. 9 10 E. Keys and Keying Schedule. 11 12 F. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials. 13 14 G. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens. 15 16 H. Certificate of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations. 17 18 I. Contractor's Final Affidavit. 19 20 J. Lien Waivers from Subcontractors and Suppliers. 21 22 K. Consent of Surety from the bonding company. 23 24 L. Contractor's Guarantee. 25 26 1.07 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS 27 28 A. Submit a final statement of accounting to the Engineer. 29 30 B. Statement shall reflect all adjustments to the Contract Sum: 31 32 1. The original Contract Sum. 33 34 2. Additions and deductions resulting from: 35 36 a. Previous Change Orders. 37 38 b. Unit Prices. 39 40 c. Deductions for uncorrected Work. 41 42 d. Penalties and Bonuses. 43 44 e. Deductions for liquidated damages. 45 46 f. Deductions for re- inspection payments. 47 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 -4 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 g. Other adjustments. 2 3 3. Total Contract Sum, as adjusted. 4 5 4. Payments. 6 7 5. Sum remaining due. 8 9 C. Engineer will prepare a final Change Order, reflecting adjustments to the 10 Contract Sum, which were not previously made by Change Orders. 11 12 1.08 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 13 14 A. Contractor shall submit the final Application for Payment in accordance with 15 procedures and requirements stated in the General Conditions. 16 17 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 18 19 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 20 21 22 END OF SECTION 23 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 -5 07/15/14 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 -6 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01710 2 3 CLEANING 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. The Contractor shall execute cleaning during progress of Work and at 10 completion of the Work as required by the General Conditions. 11 12 1.02 DISPOSAL REQUIREMENTS 13 14 A. The Contractor shall conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with 15 all applicable Laws and Regulations. 16 17 B. Disposal of waste materials shall be in accordance with the Section III, 17.7 18 and local Ordinances. 19 20 PART 2 — MATERIALS 21 22 2.01 MATERIALS 23 24 A. The Contractor shall use only those cleaning materials which do not create 25 hazards to health or property and which do not damage surfaces. 26 27 B. The Contractor shall use only those cleaning materials and methods 28 recommended by the Manufacturer of the surface material to be cleaned. 29 30 C. The Contractor shall use cleaning materials only on surfaces so recommended 31 by cleaning material Manufacturer. 32 33 PART 3 — EXECUTION 34 35 3.01 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION 36 37 A. The Contractor shall execute daily cleaning to keep the Work, the site and 38 adjacent properties free from accumulations of waste materials, water, eroded 39 material, rubbish and windblown debris resulting from construction operations. 40 41 B. The Contractor shall provide suitable on -site containers for the daily collection 42 of all waste materials, debris and rubbish. 43 44 C. The Contractor shall remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from site 45 containers periodically and dispose of in accordance with Section 1.02. 46 47 D. The Contractor shall schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants CLEANING 01710 -1 07/15/14 1 resulting from the cleaning process do not fall on wet or newly- coated 2 surfaces. 3 4 E. The Contractor shall remove from the site all surplus materials and temporary 5 structures when no further need therefore develops and as approved by 6 the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible and liable for all spillage 7 and shall incur all associated costs including, but not limited to, costs related 8 to repair and maintenance resulting from any such damage. 9 10 3.02 FINAL CLEANING 11 12 A. The Contractor shall employ skilled workmen for final cleaning. 13 14 B. The Contractor shall remove all grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, 15 fingerprints, labels and all other foreign materials from sight- exposed interior 16 and exterior surfaces. 17 18 C. Prior to Final Completion, the Contractor shall conduct an inspection of sight - 19 exposed interior and exterior surfaces and all Work areas, to verify that the 20 entire Work and the entire construction area of the Work are clean. 21 22 23 END OF SECTION CLEANING 01710 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01720 2 3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. Maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of: 10 11 1. Drawings 12 13 2. Specifications 14 15 3. Addenda 16 17 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract 18 19 5. Engineer's Field Orders or written instructions 20 21 6. Accepted Shop Drawings, Working Drawings and Samples 22 23 7. Field Test Records 24 25 8. Construction Photographs, if provided 26 27 9. Detailed progress schedule 28 29 1.02 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES 30 31 A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from 32 documents used for construction. 33 34 1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents. 35 36 2. Provide locked cabinet of secure storage space for storage of samples. 37 38 B. File documents and samples in accordance with CSI format. 39 40 C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do 41 not use record documents for construction purposes. 42 43 D. Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by the 44 Engineer. 45 46 E. As a pre- requisite for monthly progress payments, the Contractor shall exhibit 47 the updated "record documents" for review by the Engineer and Owner. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720 -1 07/15/14 1 2 1.03 MARKING DEVICES 3 4 A. Provide felt tip marking pens for recording information in the color code 5 designated by the Engineer. 6 7 1.04 RECORDING 8 9 A. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat large printed letters. 10 11 B. Record information concurrently with construction progress. 12 13 1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. 14 15 C. Drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction: 16 17 1. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor 18 datum. 19 20 2. Denote all underground piping elevations and dimensions; all changes 21 to piping location; horizontal and vertical locations of underground 22 utilities and appurtenances, all referenced to permanent surface 23 improvements. Actual installed pipe material, class, etc. 24 25 3. Locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the 26 construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the 27 structure. 28 29 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 30 31 5. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order. 32 33 6. Details not on original Contract Documents. 34 35 7. Equipment and piping relocations. 36 37 8. Major architectural and structural changes including relocation of doors, 38 windows, etc. 39 40 9. Architectural schedule changes according to Contractor's records and 41 shop drawings. 42 43 D. Specifications and Addenda; legibly mark each Section to record: 44 45 1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and supplier of each 46 product and item of equipment actually installed. 47 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order. 2 3 E. Shop Drawings (after final review): 4 5 1. Five (5) sets of shop drawings for each piece of process equipment, 6 piping, electrical and instrumentation system. 7 8 1.05 SUBMITTAL 9 10 A. At contract close -out, deliver Record Documents to the Engineer for the 11 Owner. 12 13 B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing: 14 15 1. Date 16 17 2. Project title and number 18 19 3. Contractor's name and address 20 21 4. Title and number of each Record Document 22 23 5. Signature of Contractor or his authorized representative 24 25 26 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 27 28 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 29 30 31 END OF SECTION 32 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720 -3 07/15/14 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720 -4 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01730 2 3 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's 10 maintenance and operation of new equipment and processes furnished and or 11 installed by the Contractor. 12 13 1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section 14 and as referenced in other pertinent sections of Specifications. 15 16 2. The information in the O &M Manual shall be specific and targeted for 17 the equipment and processes supplied for this project. 18 19 3. Incorporate operating and maintenance data furnished by the Owner, if 20 previously defined in the scope of work. 21 22 B. Furnish all labor, equipment, materials, and all other items required to supply 23 and deliver to the Engineer, O &M Manuals for the work, mechanical 24 equipment, instrumentation equipment, electrical equipment, process control 25 equipment, and software on a facility wide, system by system, and individual 26 equipment basis as pertinent to the project. 27 28 C. Five (5) draft O &M Manuals for each piece of equipment shall be submitted to 29 the Engineer upon delivery of the equipment. The draft O &M Manuals will 30 include the manufacturer's test results and specification and may be used as a 31 training aid. 32 33 D. Furnish the Owner five (5) complete hardcopy sets of operation and 34 maintenance data and two (2) complete set of operation and maintenance 35 data in electronic "pdf format on a CD as specified herein for the project. 36 37 1. Any modifications required after final O &M submission shall be made to 38 the manuals by issuance of all new manuals with the revised or 39 additional information included and clearly identified. 40 41 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 42 43 A. Preparation of data shall be done by personnel: 44 45 1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described 46 products. 47 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730 -1 07/15/14 1 2. Familiar with requirements of this Section. 2 3 3. Skilled and technical writer to the extent required to communicate 4 essential data. 5 6 4. Skilled as draftspersons competent to prepare required Drawings. 7 8 1.03 FORM OF SUBMITTALS 9 10 A. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel. 11 12 B. Format: 13 14 1. Size: 8 -1/2 inches x 11- inches. 15 16 2. Paper: 20 pound minimum white, for typed pages. 17 18 3. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly typewritten. 19 20 4. Drawings: 21 22 a. Provide reinforced punched binder tabs, bind in with text. 23 b. Reduce larger Drawings to 11- inches x 17- inches and fold to 24 size of text pages and printed only on one side. 25 26 5. Provide tabbed fly -leaf for each separate product, or each piece of 27 operating equipment. 28 29 a. Provide typed description of the product, and of each major 30 component part of equipment. 31 b. Provide indexed tabs. 32 33 6. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATING 34 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS." List: 35 36 a. Title of Project 37 b. Identity of separate structure as applicable. 38 c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual. 39 40 C. Binders: 41 42 1. Commercial quality three -post binders with durable and cleanable 43 plastic covers. 44 45 2. Maximum post width: 2- inches. Each binder filled to not more than 46 75% capacity. 47 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related 2 consistent groupings. 3 4 D. Refer to Specification Section 01300 for additional submittal requirements. 5 6 1.04 GENERAL CONTENT OF MANUAL 7 8 A. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic 9 order. If more than one volume is required, the table of contents of each 10 volume shall be included with all volumes. 11 12 B. The contact information, address, and phone number for the Contractor and 13 the responsible principal shall be included. 14 15 C. A list of each product included, indexed to content of the volume. 16 17 D. A list, with each product, name, address, and telephone number of: 18 19 a. Manufacturer 20 b. Subcontractor or installer. 21 c. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate. 22 d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement. 23 24 E. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set 25 forth in Contract Documents. 26 27 F Product Data: 28 29 1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product. 30 31 2. Annotate each sheet to: 32 33 a. Clearly identify specific product or part installed. 34 b. Clearly identify data applicable to installation. 35 c. Delete references to inapplicable information. 36 37 G. Drawings: 38 39 1. Supplement product data with Drawings as necessary to clearly 40 illustrate: 41 42 a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. 43 b. Control and flow diagrams. 44 c. Owner Tag Numbers. 45 d. Exploded views with part numbers listed and identified. 46 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730 -3 • 07/15/14 1 2. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to 2 assure correct illustration of completed installation. 3 4 H. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular 5 installation: 6 7 1. Organized in consistent format under separate headings for different 8 procedures. 9 10 2. Provide logical sequence of instructions of each procedure. 11 12 3. Provide an overview of how the complete system should operate. 13 14 I. Provide a copy of each warranty, bond, and service contract issued. 15 16 1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel with the following 17 information: 18 19 a. Proper procedures in event of failure. 20 b. Circumstances and events that may affect validity of warranties 21 or bonds. 22 23 1.05 CONTENT OF MANUAL FOR ARCHITECTURAL PRODUCTS, MOISTURE - 24 PROTECTED, WEATHER- EXPOSED, AND APPLIED MATERIALS, AND FINISHES 25 26 A. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products. 27 28 1. Catalog number, size, and composition. 29 2. Applicable Standards 30 3. Chemical Composition 31 4. Details of Installation or Application 32 5. Color and texture designations. 33 6. Information required for re- ordering special- manufactured products. 34 7. Storage instructions and shelf life information. 35 36 B. Instructions for care and maintenance. 37 38 1. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and 39 methods. 40 41 2. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods that are detrimental to 42 product. 43 44 3. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. 45 46 4. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair. 47 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730 -4 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.06 CONTENT OF MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS 2 3 A. Content, for each electrical, mechanical, instrumentation, and communication 4 system, as appropriate: 5 6 1. A table identifying each piece of equipment, each associated control or 7 instrument, the location of the control or instrument, and the function of 8 the control or instrument. 9 10 2. A description of the system and its component parts. 11 12 3. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions for 13 the system, the sub - system, and the component parts. 14 15 4. Performance curves, engineering data, and tests. 16 17 5. Complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replaceable parts. 18 19 6. Assembly drawings. 20 21 7. The manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and 22 diagrams, and exploded views required for operations and 23 maintenance. 24 25 8. Manufacturer's model and serial number. 26 27 9. List of all special tools required to service equipment and /or systems 28 including where the tools are stored. 29 30 10. Circuit directories of panel boards. 31 32 a. Electrical service. 33 b. Controls. 34 c. Communications. 35 36 11. As- installed color -coded wiring diagrams and control diagrams. 37 38 12. Instrument loop diagrams showing the path that a control or 39 instrumentation signal takes from its origin to the action it takes. 40 41 13. An electrical schematic for each item. 42 43 14. A chart listing the controls /instruments in a loop identifying the 44 equipment's abbreviated symbol, a description of the symbol, design 45 criteria, process flow, quantity supplied, and manufacturer's model and 46 serial number. 47 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730 -5 07/15/14 15. Operating procedures. a. Routine and normal operating instructions. b. Sequences required. c. Special operating instructions. d. Start-up, break -in, routine, and normal operating instructions. e. Regulation, control, stopping, shut - down, and emergency instructions. f. Special operating instructions. g. Control settings and ranges. 16. Maintenance procedures. a. Routine maintenance. b. Guide to "trouble- shooting." c. Disassembly, repair, and re- assembly. d. Alignment, adjustment, tolerances, and checking. e. Type and frequency of preventive maintenance activities required for each piece of equipment. f. List of lubricants required. g. Period between lubrications. h. Servicing and lubrication schedule. 17. The manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 18. Abnormal and emergency operations. a. Potential overloads. b. Procedures for equipment breakdown. c. Action to be taken in a power outage. d. Identity of alarms by equipment location and action to correct. e. Equipment safety features, requirements, and potential hazards. 19. Programming manuals for programmable devices including list of standard programming. 20. Other data as required under pertinent Sections of the Specifications. 21. A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, recommended quantities to be maintained in storage, and predicted life of parts subject to wear. 22. The final manual shall include the startup report for each piece of equipment and documentation that the Owner's designated personnel attended a formal training session as applicable for each piece of equipment. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730 -6 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 23. Charts of equipment, instrument, and valve tag numbers with location, 2 function, sheet number, model number, serial number, and actuator 3 type identified. 4 5 1.07 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL 6 7 A. Refer to Specification 01820 for Training and Instruction of Owner's personnel. 8 9 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used) 10 11 PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) 12 13 14 END OF SECTION 15 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730 -7 07/15/14 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730 -8 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01740 2 3 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. Compile warranties and bonds, as specified in the General Conditions. 10 11 B. Co- execute submittals when so specified. 12 13 C. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents. 14 15 D. Submit to the Engineer for review and transmittal to Owner. 16 17 1.02 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS 18 19 A. Assemble warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts, 20 executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers and 21 subcontractors. 22 23 B. Number of original signed copies required. Two each. 24 25 C. Table of Contents. Neatly typed in orderly sequence. Provide complete 26 information for each item. 27 28 1. Product or work item. 29 30 2. Firm, with name of principal, address and telephone number. 31 32 3. Scope. 33 34 4. Date of beginning warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract. 35 36 5. Duration of warranty, bond or service maintenance contract. 37 38 6. Provide information for Owner's personnel: 39 40 a. Proper procedure in case of failure. 41 42 b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond. 43 44 7 Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone 45 number. 46 47 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01740 -1 07/15/14 1 1.03 WARRANTY SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS 2 3 A. For all major pieces of equipment, submit a warranty from the equipment 4 manufacturer. The manufacturer's warranty period shall be concurrent with 5 the Contractor's for one (1) year, unless otherwise specified, commencing at 6 the time of substantial completion and /or final acceptance by the Owner, 7 whichever is later. 8 9 B. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining certificates for equipment 10 warranty for all major equipment that has a 1 HP motor or that has a list price 11 of more than $1,000. The Engineer reserves the right to request warranties 12 for equipment not classified as major. The Contractor shall still warrant 13 equipment not considered to be "major" in the Contractor's one -year warranty 14 period even though certificates of warranty may not be required. 15 16 C. In the event that the equipment manufacturer or supplier is unwilling to provide 17 a one -year warranty commencing at the time of Owner acceptance, the 18 Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer a three (3) year warranty 19 commencing at the time of equipment delivery to the job site. The two -year 20 warranty from the manufacturer shall not relieve the Contractor of the one -year 21 warranty starting at the time of Owner acceptance of the equipment. 22 23 1.04 WARRANTY START DATE 24 25 A. No warranty shall start until the Engineer has issued a "Notice of Substantial 26 Completion ". 27 28 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 29 30 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 31 32 33 END OF SECTION WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01740 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01820 2 3 TRAINING 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 The Contractor shall be responsible for performing and /or coordinating the following work 10 relating to training the Owners designated personnel for this project: 11 12 A. Instruct and train the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of 13 the equipment and systems supplied and /or installed under this Contract. 14 15 B. Incorporate operation and maintenance data and training services furnished 16 by the suppliers into the training program such as shop drawings, equipment 17 manuals, and start -up, engineering, and training assistance. 18 19 C. Ensure that system suppliers provide qualified training instructors experienced 20 in the proper operation and maintenance of all applicable equipment and 21 systems. 22 23 D. Prepare instructors and training materials required for complete factory, field, 24 classroom, and hands -on training. 25 26 E. Furnish training videos and training manuals during the training program. The 27 training manual shall be a separate document from the O &M Manual. 28 29 F. Include in the Contract Price the cost for training equipment; preparing training 30 manuals in addition to O &M manuals; conducting classroom instructions; 31 performing field, factory, and hands -on training; and coordinating and 32 incorporating training service provided by suppliers and all other activities 33 required to provide a comprehensive training program of sufficient length, as 34 determined by the Owner. 35 36 1.02 SUBMITTALS 37 38 A. TRAINING PLAN 39 40 In conjunction with submittal of draft O &M Manuals, and at least 30 days 41 before equipment or systems startup, the Contractor shall submit to the 42 Engineer a proposed training manual and detailed training plan with specific 43 information as identified in PART 2 of this specification. 44 45 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE 46 47 A. Preparation of training materials and instructions to be provided shall be TRAINING 01820 -1 07/15/14 1 performed by personnel: 2 3 1. Trained and experienced in operation and maintenance of equipment 4 and systems installed under this Contract. 5 6 2. Familiar with the training requirements of the Owner. 7 8 B. The Contractor shall furnish the resumes and references for each instructor to 9 be used in the training program. 10 11 C. The Engineer and Owner may review the resumes. Based on the review of 12 the resumes and contacts with references, the Engineer shall accept, request 13 additional information, or reject proposed instructors for the training program. If 14 a proposed instructor is rejected, the Contractor shall submit the resume and 15 references of another candidate within a reasonable time. 16 17 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 18 19 2.01 TRAINING PLAN 20 21 A. A detailed training plan specific to the project or equipment shall be prepared 22 with specific information as follows: 23 24 1. Title and objectives. 25 2. Training schedule. 26 3. Prerequisite training and experience of attendees. 27 4. Recommended types of attendees (e.g., managers, engineers, 28 operators, maintenance staff). 29 5. Course description and outline of course content. 30 6. Duration. 31 7. Location (e.g., training center or site). 32 8. Format (e.g., lecture, self- study, demonstration, hands -on). 33 9. Instruction materials and equipment requirements. 34 10. Training manual. 35 36 B. The factory training program shall be completed before start-up of the Owner's 37 system and shall use equipment similar to the Owner's equipment. 38 39 C. The field training programs shall be conducted in accordance with the 40 approved schedule. 41 42 D. In conjunction with start-up of, the Contractor shall provide a competent and 43 experienced person thoroughly familiar with the Work for one 8 -hour day to 44 instruct the Owner's designated personnel in the operation, maintenance, and 45 control of the equipment or systems. 46 47 E. The Contractor shall coordinate and submit a training schedule to the TRAINING 01820 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Engineer 30 days before the first training event. 2 3 2.02 VIDEOTAPED TRAINING MATERIAL 4 5 A. The Contractor shall produce or provide video training material subject to 6 review of the Owner. 7 8 B. Provide four copies of each videotape in DVD format in plastic case with title, 9 the Owner's name, and date on a label in a clear plastic sleeve. 10 11 C. Bear all costs associated with production and provision of the DVDs. 12 13 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 14 15 16 END OF SECTION 17 TRAINING 01820 -3 07/15/14 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK TRAINING 01820 -4 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 SECTION 02062 2 3 REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. Furnish all labor, tools, equipment, materials, and incidentals required to 10 remove all existing structures, equipment, pipe, fittings, valves, electrical, 11 instrumentation and controls, and all appurtenances as noted on the Contract 12 Drawings, as reasonably inferred and as required in order to perform the work 13 as described in the Contract Documents. 14 15 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 16 17 PART 3 — EXECUTION 18 19 3.01 GENERAL 20 21 A. The Contractor shall not proceed with the removal of any equipment without 22 specific approval from the Owner. Any facilities removed without proper 23 authorization shall be replaced to the satisfaction of the Owner at the 24 Contractor's expense. 25 26 B. All existing equipment, valves, hardware, tubing, insulation, hangers, and 27 supports not required to be reused and not designated as being turned over to 28 the Owner, shall become the property of the Contractor immediately upon 29 removal from their present locations. The Contractor shall remove such 30 material from the plant site at his own expense and it shall not be reused. 31 32 C. All existing equipment, valves, hardware, tubing, insulation, hangers, and 33 supports designated as being turned over to the Owner, shall be identified, 34 cleaned, protected, crated or boxed and stored at the plant site. 35 36 D. Pieces of equipment weighing 150 Ibs or more shall be provided with suitable 37 skids before storing. 38 39 E. Wherever piping is removed for disposition, adjacent pipe, and headers that 40 are to remain in service shall be blanked off or plugged and then supported or 41 anchored. 42 43 G. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions against damaging the 44 material and equipment to be stored and reused. The Contractor shall repair 45 any damage resulting from his operations, as directed by and to the 46 satisfaction of the Engineer. Itemized lists of materials removed and stored 47 shall be given to the Resident Project Representative daily. A final typed 48 itemized list shall be furnished to the Engineer in 6 copies at the completion of REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT 02062 -1 07/15/14 1 construction. The list shall include items, method of packaging, and place of 2 storage. 3 4 3.02 EQUIPMENT TO BE RETAINED 5 6 A. All equipment removed shall remain the property of the Owner unless 7 designated otherwise by the Owner. 8 9 B. If the Owner elects not to retain ownership of a certain item, the item shall 10 become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the plant 11 site at the Contractor's expense. 12 13 C. If the Owner requests that the Contractor utilize a specific hauling service for 14 the removal of existing equipment or facilities, the Contractor shall utilize that 15 service at no additional cost to the Owner. 16 17 18 END OF SECTION REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT 02062 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 02064 2 3 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to modify, 10 alter and /or convert existing structures as shown or specified and as required 11 for the installation of new mechanical equipment, piping, and appurtenances. 12 Existing piping and equipment shall be removed and dismantled as necessary 13 for the performance of structural alterations in accordance with the 14 requirements herein specified. 15 16 1.02 DEWATERING FOR STRUCTURES 17 18 A. The Contractor shall take any and all precautions necessary to assure that the 19 structures affected by this project and all connecting structures, pipelines, and 20 conduits do not become buoyant and are not damaged in any way as a result 21 of the work specified herein. 22 23 B. The Contractor shall furnish, install, maintain, operate, and remove a 24 temporary dewatering system, in accordance with Section 02140, if provided, 25 as required to lower and control the groundwater level, such that there is no 26 danger of any structure becoming buoyant. In no event shall ground water 27 rise to such a level to cause unbalanced pressure on structures. Flotation 28 shall be prevented by maintaining a positive and continuous operation of the 29 dewatering system. The Contractor shall be fully responsible and liable for all 30 damages to existing structures, piping or equipment that may result from 31 failure of the groundwater dewatering system. 32 33 D. Dewatering System 34 35 1. The dewatering system shall be adequate to lower the groundwater 36 levels to required levels. The dewatering system must maintain the 37 lowered water table at all times until no longer needed. 38 39 2. The Contractor shall provide and have ready on -site for immediate use 40 at all times standby pumping and /or power systems to serve the 41 dewatering system in case of failure of the primary pumping /power 42 systems. 43 44 45 46 47 48 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for creating and implementing a dewatering plan and a groundwater disposal plan. The plans shall be submitted to the Engineer and shall be reviewed prior to initiating any dewatering activities. The Contractor shall also comply with the requirements of the Florida Department of Environmental Protection MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING, AND EQUIPMENT 02064 -1 07/15/14 1 (FDEP) Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Groundwater 2 from any Non - Contaminated Site Activity (rule 62- 621.300) for all 3 discharges to surface waters or systems that flow into surface waters. 4 5 4. Removal of the dewatering system shall be accomplished after the 6 dewatering system is no longer required. 7 8 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 9 10 PART 3 — EXECUTION 11 12 3.01 GENERAL 13 14 A. The Contractor shall cut, repair, reuse, excavate, demolish, or otherwise 15 remove parts of the existing structures or appurtenances, as indicated on the 16 Contract Drawings, herein specified, or necessary to permit completion of the 17 work under this Contract. He shall dispose of surplus materials resulting from 18 the above work. The work shall include all necessary cutting and bending of 19 reinforcing steel, structural steel, or miscellaneous metal work found 20 embedded in the existing structures. Any item called for to be removed shall 21 be assumed to include connecting conduit, wiring and supports, unless as 22 otherwise directed by the Engineer. 23 24 B. The Contractor shall dismantle and remove all existing equipment, piping and 25 other appurtenances required for the completion of the work. Where called for 26 or required, the Contractor shall cut existing pipelines for the purpose of 27 making connections thereto. Anchor bolts for equipment and structural steel 28 removed shall be cut off one inch below the concrete surface. Surface shall 29 be finished as specified in Specification 03740. 30 31 C. At the time that a new connection is made to an existing pipeline, additional 32 new piping, extending to and including a new valve, shall be installed. 33 34 D. No existing structure, equipment, or appurtenance shall be shifted, cut, 35 removed, or otherwise altered except as directed by the Engineer. 36 37 E. When removing materials or portions of existing structures and when making 38 openings in walls and partitions, the Contractor shall take all precautions and 39 use all necessary barriers and other protective devices so as not to damage 40 the structures beyond the limits necessary for the new work, and not to 41 damage the structures or contents by falling or flying debris. Unless otherwise 42 permitted, line drilling will be required in cutting existing concrete. 43 44 F. Materials and equipment removed in the course of making alterations and 45 additions shall remain the property of the Owner, except that items not 46 salvageable, as determined by the Engineer and the Owner, shall become the 47 property of the Contractor to be disposed of by him off the work site at his own MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING, AND EQUIPMENT 02064 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 place of disposal. Operating equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned, 2 lubricated, and greased for protection during prolonged storage. 3 4 G. All alterations to existing structures shall be done at such time and in such 5 manner as will comply with the time schedule. So far as possible before any 6 part of the work is started, all tools, equipment and materials shall be 7 assembled and made ready so that the work can be completed without delay. 8 9 H. All workmanship and new materials involved in constructing the alterations 10 shall conform to the General Specifications for the classes of work insofar as 11 such specifications are applicable. 12 13 I. All cutting of existing concrete or other material to provide suitable bonding to 14 new work shall be done in a manner to meet the requirements of the 15 respective section of these Specifications covering the work. When not 16 covered, the work shall be carried on in the manner and to the extent directed 17 by the Engineer. 18 19 J. Surfaces of seals visible in the completed work shall be made to match as 20 nearly as possible the adjacent surfaces. 21 22 K. Non - shrink grout shall be used for setting wall castings, sleeves, leveling 23 pump bases, doweling anchors into existing concrete and elsewhere as 24 shown. 25 26 L. Where necessary or required for the purpose of making connections, the 27 Contractor shall cut existing pipelines /couplings in a manner to provide a 28 typical joint. Where required, the Contractor shall weld beads, flanges, or 29 provide Dresser Couplings or equal, all as required. 30 31 M. The Contractor shall provide flumes, hoses, piping, and other related items to 32 divert or provide suitable plugs, bulkheads, or other means to hold back the 33 flow of water or other liquids, all as required in the performance of the work 34 under this Contract. 35 36 N. Blasting will not be permitted to complete any work under this Contract. Care 37 shall be taken not to damage any part of existing buildings or foundations or 38 outside structures. 39 40 3.02 CONNECTING TO EXISTING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 41 42 A. The Contractor shall verify the exact location, material, alignment, joint, etc., of 43 existing piping and equipment prior to making the connections called out in the 44 Drawings. These verifications shall be performed with adequate time to 45 correct any alignment issues prior to the actual time of connection. 46 47 48 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING, AND EQUIPMENT 02064 -3 07/15/14 1 3.03 CLEANING EXISTING STRUCTURES 2 3 A. After dewatering and before commencing work on any tank, structure, 4 channels, clarifier, conduit or other structures, the Contractor shall remove and 5 dispose of the grit and other solids remaining in such structures in a lawful 6 manner. 7 B. If the Owner requests that the Contractor utilize a specific hauling service for 8 the removal of existing equipment or facilities, the Contractor shall utilize that 9 service at no additional cost to the Owner. 10 11 END OF SECTION MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING, AND EQUIPMENT 02064 -4 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 02140 2 3 TEMPORARY DEWATERING (Not in Contract) 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 DESCRIPTION 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 B. Groundwater quality testing has been conducted by the City and the results 17 have shown elevated levels of TOC. Follow up testing has been conducted by 18 the City and the results show the elevated levels of TOC are not caused be 19 petroleum hydrocarbons and are believed to be consistent with background 20 levels of TOC in this area. As such, the Contractor shall utilize this data to 21 apply for and secure a State of Florida Department of Environmental 22 Protection Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Ground Water From 23 Any Non - Contaminated Site Activity in accordance with 62- 621.300(2) FAC. 24 Results of the groundwater testing are included in Appendix A. Any additional 25 groundwater testing required to obtain the Generic Permit shall be performed 26 by the Contractor. 27 28 C. It is anticipated that ground water dewatering will be required at all times when 29 the wet well is empty, being drained, or is otherwise susceptible to becoming 30 buoyant in order to perform the rehabilitation work of this project. 31 32 D. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to conduct the necessary soil testing 33 required to design a dewatering system for this project, and to retain the 34 services of a Geotechnical Engineer to design the dewatering system. Submit 35 the geotechnical engineer's signed and sealed plan for review. The 36 Contractor shall be required to dispose of the product water from dewatering 37 activities in accordance with all laws applicable thereto. 38 39 E. The Contractor will be responsible for all costs associated with both 40 dewatering and with disposing of product water from dewatering activities. 41 42 F. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the sizing, design, and 43 construction of the dewatering system and for the disposal of product water 44 from dewatering. The Contractor may utilize the existing stormwater collection 45 and treatment system for disposal of produced groundwater. 46 A. The Work to be performed includes the furnishing of all equipment, materials and labor necessary to design, furnish, install, operate, and maintain temporary dewatering systems to remove subsurface ground waters as required by local conditions in accordance with all applicable laws, the requirements set forth and as shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, or as required for the completion of the work. 47 48 TEMPORARY DEWATERING 02140 -1 07/15/14 1 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 2 3 A. Groundwater dewatering and disposal of product water from dewatering shall 4 be in strict accordance with the latest revision of all Laws and Regulations; 5 with the local, State and Federal permits for the project; and, with the 6 Contractor's Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) and the 7 Contractor's Dewatering Plan. 8 9 1.03 DEWATERING PLAN 10 11 A. Prior to commencing any excavations, the Contractor shall submit a written 12 Dewatering Plan to the Engineer for review. The Contractor shall make any 13 and all field investigations and tests necessary to properly design and 14 construct a temporary dewatering system and temporary disposal or 15 infiltration /percolation system. 16 17 B. The Dewatering Plan shall include calculations based on field measured 18 geotechnical /hydrogeological data identifying the amount of water that will be 19 produced from dewatering. The Plan shall indicate the rate at which product 20 water from dewatering is produced as well as the length of time it will be 21 produced for each distinct construction phase applicable to each dewatering 22 activity identified below: 23 24 C. Those times when any clarifier is prone to buoyancy, including those times 25 when the installation or replacement of ground water relief valves and 26 installation of internal structural and rotating components. 27 28 D. The Dewatering Plan shall be in conformity with the overall construction plan 29 and shall itemize all pumping equipment, ground penetration equipment and 30 piping. The pumping and piping arrangement, the volume of proposed 31 discharge, and the location of the proposed discharge shall be identified in the 32 Dewatering Plan. 33 34 E. The Dewatering Plan shall be signed and sealed by a Florida Registered 35 Professional Engineer. 36 37 1.04 UPLIFT AND FLOTATION 38 39 A. Uplift of a structure could occur if the groundwater elevation is higher than the 40 elevation of water inside the structure. The Contractor shall monitor the 41 groundwater elevation, by constructing piezometers where necessary, at all 42 times any of the clarifiers are dewatered (drained), under rehabilitation, or with 43 water levels below their typical operating level. 44 45 B. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for ensuring that ground water levels 46 are controlled as required to prevent flotation and shall be fully responsible 47 and liable for all damages to structures and or pipes that may result from the 48 operation and /or failure of the dewatering system. TEMPORARY DEWATERING 02140 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 3 4 PART 3 — EXECUTION 5 6 3.01 TEMPORARY DEWATERING 7 8 A. The Contractor shall provide adequate equipment for the removal of surface or 9 subsurface waters that may accumulate in the tanks or in the excavation. The 10 Contractor shall prevent flotation and migration of fines by maintaining a 11 positive and continuous operation of the dewatering system. 12 13 B. If subsurface water is encountered, the Contractor shall utilize suitable 14 equipment to adequately dewater the tanks or the excavation so that it will be 15 dry to the bottom or to a depth of 12- inches below the subgrade compaction 16 level or over - excavation level, as appropriate. A well point system, trench 17 drain, sump pump operation, or other dewatering method selected by the 18 Contractor shall be utilized to maintain the work area in a dry condition for 19 preparation of the bottom and until the fills, structures or pipes to be built 20 thereon have been completed to such extent that they will not be floated or 21 otherwise damaged by allowing water levels to return to natural levels. No 22 water shall be allowed to contact masonry or concrete within 24 hours after 23 being placed. 24 25 C. Dewatering shall at all times be conducted in such a manner as to preserve 26 the undisturbed bearing capacity of the subgrade soils at the proposed bottom 27 of excavations and to preserve the integrity of adjacent structures and utilities. 28 Well or sump installations shall be constructed and operated continuously with 29 proper sand filters to prevent drawing of finer grained soil from the surrounding 30 ground. 31 32 D. In the event that satisfactory dewatering cannot be accomplished due to 33 subsurface conditions, or where dewatering could damage existing structures, 34 the Contractor shall notify the Engineer before commencing construction. 35 36 E. Engine- driven dewatering pumps shall be equipped with residential type 37 mufflers. Where practical and feasible, electrical "power drops" and electric 38 motor - driven equipment shall be used in lieu of portable generators. 39 40 F. The Contractor shall take all additional precautions to prevent uplift of any 41 structure during construction, including the installation of piezometers for water 42 level monitoring. 43 44 G. The Contractor shall take all precautions to preclude the accidental discharge 45 of fuel, oil, etc. to prevent adverse effects on groundwater quality. All costs 46 associated with any such adverse effects shall be borne by the Contractor. 47 48 H. The Contractor shall, at no expense to the Owner, be required to excavate TEMPORARY DEWATERING 02140 -3 07/15/14 1 below grade and refill with fill material if the Engineer determines that 2 adequate drainage has not been provided. 3 4 3.02 DISPOSAL 5 6 A. The Contractor shall not cause flooding by overloading or blocking up the flow 7 in the drainage facilities, and shall leave the facilities unrestricted and as clean 8 as originally found. Any damage to existing facilities shall be repaired or 9 restored as directed by the Engineer or the authority having jurisdiction, at no 10 cost to the Owner. 11 12 B. The Contractor shall be responsible for acquiring and complying with all 13 permits required to dispose of the product water from dewatering and shall 14 protect adjacent waterways from product water run -off and turbidity while the 15 system is in operation. 16 17 C. In areas where adequate disposal sites are not available, partially backfilled 18 trenches may be used for water disposal. The Contractor's plan shall include 19 temporary culverts, barricades and other protective measures to prevent 20 damage to property or injury to any person or persons. 21 22 D. No flooding of streets, roadways, driveways or private property shall be 23 permitted. 24 25 3.03 EQUIPMENT REMOVAL AND AREA RESTORATION 26 27 A. Removal of dewatering equipment shall be accomplished after the system is 28 no longer required. All materials and equipment constituting the system shall 29 be removed by the Contractor. 30 31 B. All sock drains shall be filled with flowable fill when no longer needed, and 32 abandoned in place. 33 34 C. All areas shall be restored in accordance with Specification Section 02485. 35 36 37 END OF SECTION TEMPORARY DEWATERING 02140 -4 07/15/14 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 02221 2 3 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. This section includes, except as elsewhere provided, all excavation for 10 pipelines and appurtenances including drainage, filling, backfilling, grading, 11 disposal of surplus material and restoration of trench surfaces. 12 13 B. Excavation shall provide suitable room for installing pipe, structures and 14 appurtenances. Pavement shall be cut with pneumatic chisels along straight 15 lines before excavating. 16 17 C. The Contractor shall furnish and place all sheeting, bracing and supports, and 18 shall remove from the excavation all materials which the Engineer may deem 19 unsuitable for backfilling. The bottom of the excavation shall be firm, dry and 20 in all respects, acceptable. The length of open trench shall be related closely 21 to the rate of installing pipe. All excavation shall be made in open trenches. 22 23 D. All pipe and fittings shall be clearly marked with the name or trademark of the 24 manufacturer, the batch number, the location of the plant and strength 25 designation, as applicable. All pipe shall be laid with a 2 -inch metallic tape, 26 appropriately color -coded and imprinted with the type of service, 12- inches 27 below final grade, directly above the utility for identification and ease of 28 location. The appropriate tape color codes are as follows: 29 30 Grey, Gravity Sewer 31 Green - Sanitary force main 32 Blue - Potable water 33 Lavender - Reclaimed water 34 35 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 36 37 2.01 MATERIALS 38 39 A. General 40 41 1. Materials for use as fill shall be described below. For each material, the 42 Contractor shall notify the Testing Lab of the source of the material at 43 least ten calendar days prior to the date of anticipated use of such 44 material. 45 46 2. Materials shall be furnished as required from off -site sources and 47 hauled to the site. EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES 02221 -1 07/15/14 1 3. Disposal of unsuitable material is specified in this Section. See 2 Paragraph 3.10. 3 4 B. Common Fill 5 6 1. Common fill shall consist of mineral soil, free of organic material, loam, 7 wood, trash and other objectionable material which may be 8 compressible or which cannot be compacted properly. Common fill 9 shall not contain stones larger than 10 -in. in any dimension, broken 10 concrete, masonry, rubble, or other similar materials. It shall have 11 physical properties such that it can be readily spread and compacted 12 during filling. 13 14 2. Material falling within the above specification, encountered during the 15 excavation, may be stored in segregated stockpiles for reuse. All 16 material which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is not suitable for reuse 17 shall be spoiled as specified herein for disposal of unsuitable materials. 18 19 C. Crushed Stone 20 21 1. Crushed stone shall be used for manhole bases, as a drainage layer 22 below structures with underdrains and at other locations indicated on 23 the Drawings. 24 25 2. Crushed stone for pipe bedding shall be size No. 67 with gradation as 26 defined in Table 1 of Section 901 of Florida Department of 27 Transportation Standard Specifications for Road & Bridge Construction. 28 29 D. Select Fill 30 31 1. Select fill shall be noncohesive, non - plastic material free of all debris, 32 lumps or clods. Fill material shall be clean earth fill composed of sand 33 or a mixture of clay and sand. Backfill material placed within one foot of 34 piping and appurtenances shall not contain any stones or rocks larger 35 than 2 inches in diameter, or 3/4 -inch in diameter for PVC pipe. 36 37 PART 3 — EXECUTION 38 39 3.01 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS 40 41 A. Excavated material shall be stacked without excessive surcharge on the 42 trench bank. Inconvenience to traffic and abutters shall be avoided as much 43 as possible. Excavated material shall be segregated for use in backfilling as 44 specified below. 45 46 B. Surplus excavated material which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is suitable 47 for use in backfilling or for replacing rock and boulders shall be stockpiled at a 48 satisfactory site to be obtained by the Contractor to be used as required. EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES 02221 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Unsatisfactory surplus material including paving, rock or boulders, muck, 2 stumps and other material, as directed by the Engineer, shall be disposed of 3 by the Contractor. 4 5 C. It is expressly understood that no excavated material shall be removed from 6 the site of the work or disposed of by the Contractor except as directed by the 7 Engineer. When removal of surplus material has been directed by the 8 Engineer, the Contractor shall dispose of such surplus material. 9 10 D. Should conditions make it impracticable or unsafe to stack material adjacent to 11 the trench, the material shall be hauled and stored at a location provided by 12 the Contractor. When required, it shall be rehandled and used in backfilling 13 the trench. No extra compensation will be made for rehandling material. 14 15 3.02 SHEETING AND BRACING 16 17 A. The Contractor shall furnish, put in place, and maintain sheeting and bracing 18 required to support the sides of the excavation and prevent loss of ground 19 which could damage or delay the work or endanger adjacent structures. If the 20 Engineer is of the opinion that at any point sufficient or proper supports have 21 not been provided, he may order additional supports placed at the expense of 22 the Contractor from his responsibility for the sufficiency of such supports. 23 Care shall be taken to prevent voids outside of the sheeting, but if voids are 24 formed, they shall be immediately filled and rammed. 25 26 3.03 TEST PITS 27 28 A. The Contractor may be required to excavate test pits for the purpose of 29 locating underground utilities or structures as an aid in establishing the precise 30 location of new work. Test pits shall be backfilled as soon as the desired infor- 31 mation has been obtained. The backfilled surface shall be maintained in a 32 satisfactory condition for travel until resurfaced as hereinafter specified. 33 34 B. Excavation of test pits shall be considered work incidental to the project and 35 shall be done at the Contractor's expense. 36 37 C. If, for any reason, a test pit is left open for any period of time, it shall be 38 properly barricaded and lighted by the Contractor, when directed by the 39 Engineer, in accordance with State and Local laws. 40 41 3.04 DRAINAGE 42 43 A. The Contractor shall furnish all materials and equipment and perform all 44 incidental work required to install and maintain the drainage system he 45 proposes for handling ground water or surface water encountered. He shall 46 assume all responsibility for the adequacy of the methods, materials, and 47 equipment employed. Construction shall not begin until the Engineer is 48 assured that the proposed method will be satisfactory. The requirements for a EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES 02221 -3 07/15/14 stable subgrade are indicated below, and the Contractor must alter his drainage methods, if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the trench bottom is unsatisfactory. B. The Contractor shall provide pumping equipment and devices to properly remove and dispose of all water entering trench and excavation. The grade shall be maintained acceptably dry until structures and pipe to be constructed therein are completed. All drainage shall be performed without damage to the trench, pavements, pipes, electrical conduits, or other utilities. Pipe and masonry shall not be laid in water or submerged within 24 hours after being placed. Water shall not flow over new masonry within four days after placement. D. In no event shall water rise to cause unbalanced pressure on structures until the concrete or mortar has set at least 24 hours. The Contractor shall prevent flotation of the pipe promptly placing backfill. E. If the Contractor elects to use underdrains for handling water, he shall furnish and install pipe and crushed stone graded from course to fine, and shall furnish and install all pumps and equipment necessary to maintain the water level continuously at the required elevation. Pipe underdrains shall be laid with open joints and bedded in crushed stone for the full width of trench, and to a depth of 6 -in. below the invert of underdrain. F The invert of underdrain shall be 12 -in. below the normal subgrade. Pipe underdrains shall have no permanent outlet and shall be sealed at the completion of the work. The length of continuous underdrain to be used shall be limited as conditions require. An impervious bulkhead of clay or concrete shall be constructed in the trench bottom between 100 ft. lengths of the underdrain system to obstruct the free flow of ground water after construction is completed. All excavation below normal grade for the purpose of installing underdrains, the crushed stone and underdrain pipe shall be considered a part of the drainage work to be done under the pipe items. The Contractor shall continuously guard against the loss of earth through subbase or the underdrain. Should loss of either take place, the Contractor shall alter the stone size to provide a satisfactory barrier or filter. G. Where other methods of handling water prove inadequate, the Contractor shall furnish, install, operate, and remove proper well point facilities. H. The Contractor shall submit a dewatering plan to the Engineer prior to commencement of work in accordance with Section 02140. EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES 02221 -4 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 3.05 TRENCH EXCAVATION A. Excavation shall be made for all trenches which are required for the installation of pipes, culverts, manholes and drainage structures. B. Trench width at the ground surface may vary depending on depth, type of soil, and position of surface structures. The minimum clear width of the trench, sheeted or unsheeted, measured at the springline of the pipe should be 1 foot greater than the outside diameter of the pipe. The maximum recommended clear width of the trench at the top of the pipe is equal to the pipe outside diameter plus 2 feet. If the maximum recommended trench width must be exceeded or if the pipe is installed in a compacted embankment, then pipe embedment should be compacted to a point of at least 2 -1/2 pipe diameters from the pipe on both sides of the pipe or to the trench walls, whichever is less. C. The trench may be excavated by machinery to, or just below subgrade provided that the material remaining in the bottom of more than slightly disturbed. D. Rock shall be removed to a minimum of 8 -in. clearance around sides of the pipe being laid. the designated the trench is no the bottom and E. The trench bottom should be constructed to provide a firm, stable and uniform support for the full length of the pipe. Bell holes should be provided at each joint to permit proper assembly and pipe support. Any part of the trench bottom excavated below grade should be backfilled to grade and should be compacted as required to provide firm pipe support. When an unstable subgrade condition is encountered that could provide inadequate pipe support, additional trench depth should be excavated and refilled with suitable foundation material. Ledge rock, boulders, and large stones should be removed to provide 4- inches of soil cushion of all sides of the pipe and accessories. 3.06 PIPE BEDDING A. The Contractor shall furnish and install pipe on the type of bedding shown on the Drawings or as specified by the Engineer but shall be Type 4 bedding at a minimum. Regardless of the type of bedding used by the Contractor, holes in the trench shall be provided to receive the pipe bell. The hole excavated shall be sufficient to relieve pipe bells of all loads and yet provide support over the total length of the pipe barrel. B. Pipe shall be installed with proper bedding providing uniform longitudinal support under the pipe. Backfill material shall be worked under the sides of the pipe to provide satisfactory support under the haunches of the pipe. All bedding material shall be select fill. Sharp stones and crushed rock (larger than 3 /4 -in.), which could cause significant scratching or abrasion of the pipe, EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES 02221 -5 07/15/14 1 shall be excluded from the embedment material. Proper compaction 2 procedures shall be exercised. 3 4 C. Where required to provide a firm bedding for the pipe crushed stone bedding 5 shall be provided from a depth of 12" below the pipe up to the pipe haunches. 6 7 3.07 BACKFILLING 8 9 A. As soon as practicable after the pipe has been laid, joined and bedded, 10 backfilling shall begin and thereafter be prosecuted expeditiously. 11 12 B. Select backfill material, free from stones and other foreign material, shall be 13 placed to a depth of 12- inches over the top of the pipe. Backfill shall be 14 thoroughly compacted by hand - tamping as placed. The remainder of the 15 trench shall be backfilled in loose 12 -inch lifts of common or structural fill as 16 applicable. 17 18 C. Any space remaining between the pipe and side of the trench shall be packed 19 full by hand shovel with selected earth, free from stones having a diameter 20 greater than 2 -inch, and thoroughly compacted with a tamper as fast as placed 21 up to a level of 12- inches above the top of the pipe. 22 23 D. Backfilling shall be carried up evenly on both sides with at least one person 24 tamping for each person shoveling material into the trench. 25 26 E. The remainder of the trench above the compacted backfill, as just described 27 shall be filled thoroughly compacted by rolling, ramming, as the Engineer may 28 direct, sufficiently to prevent subsequent settling. 29 30 F. Backfill around manholes shall be selected material and thoroughly 31 compacted. All backfill shall be compacted, especially under and over pipes 32 connected to the structures. 33 34 G. All fill shall be placed in a dry condition. 35 36 3.08 COMPACTION 37 38 A. Gravel and crushed stone in open areas, shall be placed in layers not to 39 exceed eight (8) inches in depth as measured before compaction. Each layer 40 shall be compacted by a minimum of four (4) coverages. Incidental 41 compaction due to traffic by construction equipment will not be credited toward 42 the required minimum four (4) coverages. 43 44 B. Fill shall be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 12- inches and should be 45 compacted to a minimum of 98% of the maximum modified Proctor dry 46 density, as established in accordance with ASTM D -1557. Density tests 47 should be performed in each fill lift to confirm compaction before the next lift is 48 placed. EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES 02221 -6 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 C. Areas adjacent to structures and other confined inaccessible to the roller or 3 truck shall be compacted with hand guided mechanical compaction 4 equipment. 5 6 D. Backfill and compaction for manholes and drainage structures shall be in 7 accordance with the requirements for Excavation and Backfilling of Structures, 8 if required, as specified elsewhere. 9 10 E. It is the intention that the fill materials, with respect to moisture, be used in the 11 condition they are excavated insofar as this is practicable. Material that is too 12 wet shall be spread on the fill area and permitted to dry, assisted by harrowing 13 if necessary, until the moisture content is reduced enough to allow for proper 14 compaction as determined by the Engineer. Muck, mud, or organic material 15 shall not be utilized as trench fill. Such matter shall be removed from the 16 trench and replaced with suitable fill material. 17 18 3.09 GRADING 19 20 A. Grading shall be performed at such places as are indicated on the Drawings, 21 to the lines, grades, and elevations shown or as directed by the Engineer and 22 shall be made in such a manner that the requirements for formation of 23 embankments can be followed. All unacceptable material encountered, or 24 whatever nature within the limits indicated, shall be removed and disposed of 25 as directed. During the process of excavation, the grade shall be maintained 26 in such condition that it will be well drained at all times. When directed, 27 temporary drains and drainage ditches shall be installed to intercept or divert 28 surface water which may affect the progress or condition of the work. 29 30 B. The right is reserved to make small adjustments or revisions in lines or grades 31 if found necessary as the work progresses, due to discrepancies on the 32 Drawings of in order to obtain satisfactory construction. 33 34 C. Stones or rock fragments larger than 4 -in. in their greatest dimensions will not 35 be permitted in the top 6- inches of the subgrade. 36 37 D. All fill slopes shall be uniformly dressed to the slope, cross - section and 38 alignment shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. 39 40 E. In cuts, all loose or protruding rocks on the back slopes shall be jarred loose or 41 otherwise removed to line or finished grade of slope. All cut and fill slopes 42 shall be uniformly dressed to the slope, cross - section and alignment shown on 43 the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. 44 45 3.10 DISPOSAL OF UNSUITABLE SURPLUS MATERIAL 46 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES 02221 -7 07/15/14 1 A. Unsuitable and surplus excavated materials and pavement shall become the 2 property of the Contractor and removed and disposed of by him off the project 3 site. 4 5 B. Suitable excavated materials may be used for fill or backfill if it meets the 6 Specification for common fill and has been reviewed by the Engineer. 7 Excavated material shall be neatly stockpiled at the site where designated by 8 the Engineer provided there is an area available that will not interfere with the 9 operation of the plant or inconvenience traffic or adjoining property owners. If 10 space limitations do not permit stockpiling on the site, the Contractor will be 11 required to make arrangements for off -site stockpiling. Transport of such 12 material from and to the immediate site including any stockpiling agreements 13 shall by entirely at the Contractor's expense and shall not constitute grounds 14 for additional payment. 15 16 C. Surplus excavated material shall be used to fill depressions or other purposes 17 as the Engineer may direct. 18 19 3.11 DISPOSAL AND REPLACING OF ROCK 20 21 A. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of all pieces of rock which are not 22 suitable for use in other parts of the work. Rock disposed of by hauling away 23 to spoil areas is to be replaced with surplus excavation obtained elsewhere on 24 the site, insofar as it is available. Any deficiency in the backfill material shall 25 be made up with acceptable material from outside sources. 26 27 B. Rock may be used in fill only after review by the Engineer. 28 29 30 END OF SECTION EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES 02221 -8 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 02485 2 3 SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to satisfactorily return all 10 construction areas to their original conditions or better. 11 12 B. Work includes furnishing and placing seed, sod, fertilizer, gravel, concrete, 13 asphalt, planting, watering and maintenance until acceptance by the Owner. 14 15 C. The restoration of grassed areas under this project shall be by sodding. 16 17 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 R A satisfactory stand of grass is defined herein as a full lawn cover over areas 25 to be seeded or sodded, with grass free of weeds, alive and growing, leaving 26 no bare spots larger than 3/4 sq. yd. within a radius of 10 ft. 27 28 1.03 SUBMITTALS 29 30 A. Provide technical data as required for shop drawings on all materials or 31 installation procedures required under this Section and in accordance with the 32 contract documents. 33 34 B. Submit representative topsoil samples for analysis by a private laboratory to 35 determine nutrient deficiencies and outline a proper fertilization program. 36 37 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 38 39 2.01 MATERIALS 40 41 A. Fertilizer shall be a complete fertilizer, the elements of which are derived from 42 organic sources. Fertilizer shall be a standard product complying with State 43 and Federal fertilizer laws. 44 45 1. Percentages of nitrogen, phosphorus and potash shall be based on 46 laboratory tests on soils outlined in Paragraph 1.03B. For purpose of 47 bidding, assume 6% nitrogen, 6% phosphorus and 6% potash by A. The Contractor shall provide a satisfactory stand of grass as specified. If necessary, the Contractor shall repeat any or all of the work, including grading, fertilizing, watering, and seeding or sodding at no additional cost to the Owner until a satisfactory stand is obtained. SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS 02485 -1 07/15/14 1 weight. At least 50% of the total nitrogen shall contain no less than 3% 2 water- insoluble nitrogen. 3 4 2. Fertilizer shall be delivered to the site, mixed as specified, in the original 5 unopened standard size bags showing weight, analysis and name of 6 manufacturer. Containers shall bear the manufacturer's guaranteed 7 statement of analysis, or a manufacturer's certificate of compliance 8 covering analysis shall be furnished to the Engineer. Store fertilizer in a 9 weatherproof place and in such a manner that it will be kept dry and its 10 effectiveness will not be impaired. 11 12 3. Superphosphate shall be composed of finely ground phosphate rock as 13 commonly used for agricultural purposes containing not less than 20% 14 available phosphoric acid. 15 16 B. Grass seed shall be the same as existed prior to construction and shall be 99 17 percent minimum purity, 80 percent minimum germination and 1 percent 18 maximum weed seed, labeled in accordance with U.S. Department of 19 Agriculture Rules and Regulations under Federal Seed Act in effect. Seed 20 which has become wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged in transit or storage 21 shall not be acceptable. 22 23 C. All disturbed areas with the limits of construction shall receive vegetative 24 treatment after final grading in accordance with these plans or landscaping 25 plans. Disturbed areas not specifically designated with a vegetative cover 26 shall be vegetated as follows: 27 28 Side slopes constructed at 4:1 (H to V) shall be sodded with argentine Bahia 29 or seeded and then covered with an erosion control blanket. The blanket shall 30 be the S75BN blanket as manufactured by North America Gree or equal. 31 32 Side slopes less than 4:1 (H to V) shall be seeded and mulched. 33 34 D. Sodding 35 36 1. Sod shall be Argentine Bahia of firm texture having a compacted growth 37 and good root development. 38 39 2. Sod shall be certified to meet Florida State Plant Board Specifications, 40 absolutely true to varietal type, and free from weeds or other 41 objectionable vegetation, fungus, insects and disease of any kind. 42 43 3. Before being cut and lifted the sod shall have been mowed 3 times with 44 the final mowing not more than a week before cutting into uniform 45 dimensions. 46 47 E. Mulch shall be fresh hay. Rate of application specified herein shall correspond 48 to depth not less than 1 inch or more than 3 inches according to texture and SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS 02485 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 moisture content of mulch material. 2 3 F. It is the Contractor's responsibility to water the site, as required during seeding 4 and sodding operations and through the maintenance period and until the 5 work is accepted. The Contractor shall make whatever arrangements may be 6 necessary to ensure an adequate supply of water to meet the needs for his 7 work. The Contractor shall also furnish all necessary hose, equipment, 8 attachments and accessories for the adequate irrigation of lawns and planted 9 areas as may be required. 10 11 G. Asphaltic concrete surface shall consist of either Type S -1 or Type S -3 12 asphaltic concrete meeting the specified criteria outlined by the Florida 13 Department of Transportation Specifications, and Placement & Compaction 14 Procedures. 15 16 H. Base material shall consist of either limerock or shell material complying with 17 FDOT specifications and meeting a minimum LBR of 100. 18 19 PART 3 — EXECUTION 20 21 3.01 INSTALLATION 22 23 A. Following the subgrade preparation, the Contractor shall commence work on 24 lawns and grassed areas. Areas to be seeded or sodded shall be free from 25 soft spots and uneven grades. Apply 20 lbs. of 12 -3 -6 fertilizer per 1,000 sq. 26 ft. 27 28 B. Seeded and sodded areas shall be protected from traffic or other use by 29 placing warning signs or erecting barricades as necessary. Any areas 30 damaged prior to actual acceptance by the Owner shall be repaired by the 31 Contractor as directed by the Engineer. 32 33 3.02 LAWN BED PREPARATION 34 35 A. Areas to be sodded shall be cleared of all rough grass, weeds, and debris and 36 the ground brought to an even grade. 37 38 B. The soil shall then be thoroughly tilled to a minimum 8 -inch depth. 39 40 C. Superphosphate at a rate for bidding purposes of 5 pounds per 1,000 square 41 foot and complete fertilizer at a rate for bidding purposes of 16 pounds per 42 1000 square foot shall be evenly distributed over entire area and cross - disked 43 into a depth of 4 -6 inches. 44 45 D. The areas shall then be brought to proper grade, free of sticks, stones, or 46 other foreign matter over 1 -inch in diameter of dimension. The surface shall 47 conform to finish grade, less the thickness of sod, free of water - retaining 48 depressions, the soil friable and of uniformly fill texture. SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS 02485 -3 07/15/14 1 2 3.03 SOD HANDLING AND INSTALLATION 3 4 A. A one -foot wide strip of sod shall be provided around all structures, except 5 fencing, along the edges of slabs and along the edge of pavement. 6 7 B. During delivery, prior to planting, and during the planting of the lawn areas, the 8 sod panels at all times be protected from excessive drying and unnecessary 9 exposure of the roots to the sun. All sod shall be stacked during construction 10 and planting so as not to be damaged by sweating or excessive heat and 11 moisture. 12 13 C. After completion of soil conditioning as specified above, sod panels shall be 14 laid tightly together so as to make a solid sodded lawn area. On mounds and 15 other slopes, the long dimension of the sod shall be laid perpendicular to the 16 slope. Immediately following sod laying the lawn areas shall be rolled with a 17 lawn roller customarily used for such purposes, and then thoroughly watered. 18 19 D. Bring the sod edge in a neat, clean manner to the edge of all paving and shrub 20 areas. Top dressing with clean, weed free, sand may be required at no 21 additional cost to the Owner if deemed necessary by the Engineer. 22 23 3.04 CLEANUP 24 25 A. Soil, mulch, seed, or similar materials spilled onto paved areas shall be 26 removed promptly, keeping those areas as clean as possible at all times. 27 Upon completion of seeding and sodding operations, all excess soil, stones, 28 and debris remaining shall be removed from the construction areas. 29 30 3.05 MAINTENANCE 31 32 A. Any existing landscape items damaged or altered during construction by the 33 Contractor shall be restored or replaced as directed by the Engineer. 34 35 B. Maintain landscape work until Owner accepts project. Watering, weeding, 36 cultivating, restoration of grade, mowing and trimming grass, protection from 37 insects and diseases, fertilizing and similar operations as needed to ensure 38 normal growth and good health for live plant material shall be the responsibility 39 of the Contractor and at no additional cost to the Owner. Sodded areas shall 40 receive no less than 1.5 inches of water per week. 41 42 3.06 REPAIRS TO LAWN AREAS DISTURBED BY CONTRACTOR'S OPERATIONS 43 44 A. Lawn areas planted under this Contract and all lawn areas damaged by the 45 Contractor's operation shall be repaired by proper soil preparation, fertilizing, 46 and reseeding, in accordance with these Specifications. 47 48 END OF SECTION SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS 02485 -4 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 03350 2 3 MULTI - LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM 4 (NOT IN CONTRACT) 5 6 7 PART 1 — GENERAL 8 9 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 10 11 A. Description: 12 13 This section covers all workmanship, materials safety and quality requirements 14 for concrete resurfacing and lining work. Provide and apply concrete and 15 polyurea materials as specified and as indicated on drawings. 16 17 B. A general description of the work to be performed is listed below: 18 19 • Power wash the interior surface of the wet well to remove grease and 20 contaminants. 21 • Sand blast the interior surface of the wet well to obtain the correct surface 22 profile and surface mechanical grip properties. 23 • Power rinse the interior surface of the wet well to remove sand blasting 24 debris, dust, and particles. 25 • Patch the interior surface of the wet well by applying a polymer modified 26 mortar and using a bonding agent. 27 • Apply a spray -on type polymeric multi - layered lining system to the entire 28 interior of the wet well. The lining system shall be specifically developed 29 for the corrosive wastewater environment. 30 31 C. Cracks and joints that require additional materials shall be injected with 32 hydrophilic polyurethane grout. 33 34 1.02 RELATED WORK: 35 36 Division 1 - General Requirements 37 38 1.03 REFERENCES: 39 40 A. This section contains references to the documents listed below. They are a 41 part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the 42 requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the more 43 stringent of the requirements shall prevail. 44 45 B. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the 46 documents in effect at the time of receipt of Bids. 47 48 C. Referenced publications found within this specification shall be the latest MULTI - LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM 03350 -1 07/15/14 revision unless otherwise specified; and applicable parts of the referenced publications shall become a part of this specification as if fully included. Reference Title ASTM (American Society of Testing and Materials) ASTM C 920 Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants ASTM D 3960 Practice for Determining Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content of Paints and Related Coatings ASTM D 4259 Practice for Abrading Concrete ASTM E 337 Standard Practice Test Method for Measuring Humidity with a Psychrometer Federal Standard Colors F 595 B Federal Standard Colors Guideline No. 03732 Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface for Sealers, Coatings, and Polymer Overlays ICRI (International Concrete Restoration Institute) Guideline No. 03732 Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface for Sealers, Coatings, and Polymer Overlays Preparation Preparation NACE (National Association of Corrosion Engineers) Publication 6D -173 "A Manual for Painter Safety" Publication 6G -164 "Surface Preparation Abrasives for Industrial Maintenance Painting" Publication TPC2 Coatings and Linings for Immersion Service: Chapter 1 Safety Chapter 2 Surface Preparation Chapter 3 Curing Chapter 4 Inspection Publication 6F -163 "Surface Preparation of Steel or Concrete Tank Interiors." RP0892 -92 Standard Recommended Practice, Lining over Concrete in Immersion Service RP0288 -88 Standard Recommended Practice, Inspection of Linings on Steel and Concrete SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) SSPC -SP 12 Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Steel and Other Hard Materials by High and Ultrahigh Pressure Water Jetting Prior to Recoating SSPC -SP 13 Surface Preparation of Concrete SSPC -PA -3 "A Guide to Safety in Paint Application" SSPC -Guide 12 Guide for Illumination of Industrial Painting Project OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration) 1915.35 Standards — 29 CFR — Painting MULTI - LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM 03350 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 ANSI (American National Standards Institute) 3 ANSI /ASC 29.4 Abrasive Blasting Operations — Ventilation and Safe Practice 4 5 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE 6 7 A. The manufacturer and /or applicator of the liner system shall be a company 8 that specializes in the design, manufacture or installation of corrosion 9 protection systems for wet wells. The applicator shall be completely trained in 10 leak repair, surface preparation and corrosion materials application in wet 11 wells. 12 13 B. The applicator shall be trained and certified by the manufacturer for the 14 handling, mixing, application and inspection of the liner system as described 15 herein. 16 17 C. To ensure total unit responsibility, all materials and installation thereof shall be 18 furnished and coordinated with /by one supplier /applicator. 19 20 D. Requirements: 21 22 1. Do not use or retain contaminated, outdated, or diluted materials for 23 resurfacing. Do not use materials from previously opened containers. 24 2. Use only products of the approved Manufacturer(s). Use products of 25 one manufacturer in any one resurfacing system with compatible 26 materials. Provide same material product for touch -up as for original 27 material. 28 3. If any requirements of this specification conflict with a referenced 29 standard, the more stringent requirement shall apply. 30 4. Make all locations and phases of the work available for access by the 31 Engineer. The Contractor shall provide ventilation and egress to safely 32 access the coating work areas for construction and inspection. 33 5. Conduct work so that the resurfacing system is installed as specified 34 herein. Inspect work continually to ensure that the resurfacing system 35 is installed as specified herein. The Contractor shall inspect the work to 36 determine conformance with the specifications and referenced 37 documents. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of the progress 38 and the quality of the work through daily reports as specified below. 39 Any nonconforming coating system work shall be corrected as specified 40 herein or as recommended by the Manufacturer. 41 6. Summarize test data, work progress, areas covered, ambient 42 conditions, quality control inspection test findings, and other information 43 pertinent to the resurfacing system installation in daily reports to be 44 submitted to the Engineer. 45 7 The methods of construction shall be in accordance with all 46 requirements of this specification. 47 8. Employ only trades people who have at least five years of experience 48 performing resurfacing work of similar size and complexity as the work MULTI - LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM 03350 -3 07/15/14 1 specified in this Section. Submittals to verify these qualifications are to 2 be made within thirty (30) days of the Notice -to- Proceed and are 3 subject to approval by the Engineer. 4 5 1.05 SUBMITTALS 6 7 A. Submit the following prior to commencing with any phase of the work covered 8 by this Section: 9 10 1. Manufacturer's current printed recommendations and product data 11 sheets for all coating system products supplied under this section 12 including performance criteria, surface preparation and applications, 13 volatile organic compound (V.O.C.) data, and safety requirements. 14 2. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for any materials brought on -site 15 including all resurfacing system materials, solvents, and abrasive blast 16 media. 17 3. Storage requirements including temperature, humidity, and ventilation 18 for resurfacing system materials. 19 4. Manufacturer's requirements, including application procedures for 20 resurfacing materials shall be in writing and shall be followed in detail. 21 All safety precautions recommended by the Manufacturer shall be 22 strictly adhered to at all times when work is in progress. 23 5. Color samples for all surfaces to be resurfaced that have been field - 24 matched to existing colors. 25 6. Submit applicators' certification that resurfacing materials comply with 26 Federal, State, and Local regulations for VOC (Volatile Organic 27 Compounds). 28 7 Submit daily reports that contain the following information: Substrate 29 conditions, ambient conditions, application procedures, work completed 30 and location thereof. Mark -up drawings that show location of work. 31 8. Submit letter(s) with associated product data signed by Manufacturer 32 certifying that submitted products are suitable for application on the 33 surfaces to be resurfaced and for the service conditions. 34 35 1.06 WARRANTIES 36 37 A. All patch or filler concrete used below the lining coating shall be warranted for 38 the same length of times as the lining coating. 39 40 B. The Contractor shall warrant the lining coating for a period of 10 years. A 41 coating failure will have occurred if the lining fails to prevent damage or 42 corrosion to the structure, bubbles out from wall or metal, or fails to adhere to 43 concrete or metal. Failure does not include mechanical or chemical abuse. If 44 coatings are deemed to have failed the Contractor shall at his expense 45 completely repair the damaged area including an expanded area of a 46 minimum of 6- inches in any direction. 47 MULTI - LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM 03350 -4 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.07 DELIVERIES AND STORAGE 2 3 A. Materials shall be stored in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations 4 in enclosed structures and shall be protected from weather and adverse 5 temperature conditions. Flammable materials shall be stored in accordance 6 with state and local codes. Materials exceeding storage life recommended by 7 the manufacturer shall be removed from the site. 8 9 B. Store all materials only in area or areas designated by the Engineer solely for 10 this purpose. Confine mixing, thinning, clean -up and associated operations, 11 and storage of materials - related debris before authorized disposal, to these 12 areas. All materials are to be stored on pallets or similar storage /handling 13 skids off the ground in sheltered areas in which the temperature is maintained 14 between 70 °F and 90 °F. 15 16 C. Mix all resurfacing materials in a mixing area supplied by the Contractor. This 17 enclosed area must protect the mixing operation and materials from direct 18 sunlight, inclement weather, freezing, or other means of damage or 19 contamination. Protect all other concrete and metallic surfaces and finishes 20 from any spillage of material(s) within the mixing area. 21 22 D. Do not use floor drains, dikes or storm drains for disposal of resurfacing 23 systems materials. 24 25 E. The Contractor shall take all precautions and implement all measures 26 necessary to avert potential hazards associated with the resurfacing system 27 materials as described on the pertinent Material Safety Data Sheets or 28 container labels. 29 30 F Deliver all materials to the job site in their original, unopened containers. Each 31 container shall bear the Manufacturer's name and label. 32 33 1. Labels on all material containers must show the following information: 34 35 a. Name or title of product. 36 b. Federal Specification Number if applicable. 37 c. Manufacturer's batch number and date of manufacture. 38 d. Manufacturer s name. 39 e. Generic type of material. 40 f. Application and mixing instructions. 41 g. Hazardous material identification label. 42 h. Shelf life date. 43 i. Storage requirements. 44 45 G. All containers shall be clearly marked indicating any personnel safety hazards 46 associated with the use of or exposure to the materials. 47 48 H. All materials shall be handled and stored to prevent damage or loss of label. MULTI - LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM 03350 -5 07/15/14 1 2 I. The Contractor shall provide resurfacing material storage and mixing areas. 3 4 J. Do not use or retain contaminated, outdated, prematurely opened, diluted 5 materials, or materials which have exceeded their shelf life. 6 7 1.08 COORDINATION OF WORK 8 9 A. Work Areas: 10 11 The work areas on the job site will be limited to the immediate area around the 12 influent pump station or as designated by the Owner. The Contractor's 13 personnel shall not be permitted in any area other than those expressly 14 designated by the Owner. 15 16 B. Coordination: 17 18 The Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer and Owner regarding 19 availability of work areas, completion times, safety, access and other factors, 20 which can impact plant operations. 21 22 1.09 SAFETY 23 24 A. The work is inside a confined space. The Contractor's work forces shall 25 comply with all applicable documentation and safety requirements related to 26 confined spaces and all safety requirements referenced in Section 1.03. 27 28 B. The Contractor shall provide personnel with all safety equipment necessary to 29 protect them during any phase of the work. This shall include, but not be 30 limited to safety glasses, goggles, earplugs, hard hats, steel toed work shoes, 31 appropriate personal protective clothing, gloves, and plant approved escape 32 respirators (where required). 33 34 C. Keep any flammable materials such as cleaning solvents, thinners, or 35 resurfacing materials away from open flames, sparks or temperatures higher 36 than 150 °F. Drums containing flammable materials will be grounded. No 37 solvent in any quantity shall be allowed inside containment enclosures or 38 permitted confined spaces at any time during resurfacing work. 39 40 D. Power tools are to be in good working order to avoid open sparking. No spark 41 producing tools shall be utilized in restricted areas as indicated herein. 42 43 E. The Contractor shall fireproof all work areas by maintaining a clean work area 44 and having Underwriter's Laboratories approved fire extinguishers on -hand. 45 The Contractor shall furnish these fire extinguishers. 46 47 F. Workers doing abrasive blasting operations shall wear a fresh air supplied 48 protective helmet and hood and personal protective clothing acceptable to MULTI - LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM 03350 -6 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 industry standards and all government regulations. 2 3 G. Dispose of rags used for wiping up resurfacing materials, solvents, and 4 thinners by drenching them with water and placing in a metal container with a 5 tight fitting metal cover. Complete this disposal process at the end of each 6 day. Final disposal of these materials is the Contractor's responsibility. 7 8 H. Matches, smoking, flames, or sparks resulting from any source including 9 welding, must be remote from the work area during coating work. Smoking is 10 permitted only in designated areas of the plant. 11 12 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 13 14 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 15 16 A. Materials specified are those that have been evaluated for the specific service. 17 Equivalent materials by other manufacturers may be submitted upon written 18 approval of the Engineer. As part of the proof of equality, the Contractor shall 19 submit certified test reports from a nationally known, reputable and 20 independent testing laboratory conducting comparative tests between the 21 product specified and the requested substitution. 22 23 B. Requests for substitution shall include manufacturer's literature for each 24 product giving name, product number, generic type, descriptive information, 25 solids by volume, recommended dry film thickness and certified lab test 26 reports showing results to equal the performance criteria of the products 27 specified herein. In addition, a list of five projects shall be submitted in which 28 each product has been used and rendered satisfactory service. 29 30 C. All requests for product substitution shall be made at least 10 days prior to the 31 bid opening date. 32 33 D. Any material savings shall be passed to the Owner in the form of a contract 34 dollar reduction. 35 36 E. Approved manufacturers for this project include products of the Sika 37 Corporation, GML Coatings, and Spectrashield Liner Systems. 38 39 2.02 MATERIALS 40 41 Specific Products are listed below to establish a quality benchmark. 42 43 A. Polymer- modified Portland Cementitious Mortar (SikaTop 123 Plus) 44 45 MULTI - LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM 03350 -7 07/15/14 1 1 Component A shall be a liquid polymer emulsion of an acrylic 2 copolymer base and additives with the following properties. 3 a. pH: 4.5 -6.5 4 b. Film Forming Temperature: 73 °F max. 5 c. Tear Strength: 950 -psi min. 6 d. Elongation at Break: 500% min. 7 e. Particle Size: less than 0.1 micron 8 9 2. Component A shall contain an organic, penetrating corrosion inhibitor, 10 which has been independently proven to reduce corrosion in concrete 11 via ASTM G3 (half -cell potential tests). The corrosion inhibitor shall not 12 be calcium nitrite, and shall have a minimum of 5 years of independent 13 field testing to document performance on actual construction projects. 14 15 3. Component B shall be a blend of selected portland cements, specially 16 graded aggregates; admixtures for controlling setting time, water 17 reducers for workability, and an organic accelerator. 18 19 4. The materials shall be non - combustible, both before and after cure. 20 21 5. The materials shall be supplied in a factory- proportioned unit. 22 23 6. The polymer- modified, portland cement mortar must be placeable from 24 1/8" to 1 -1/2" in depth per lift for vertical applications and 1/8" to 1" in 25 depth for overhead applications. 26 27 7 Performance Criteria 28 29 a. Typical Properties of the polymer- modified, portland cement 30 mortar: 31 • Working Time: Approximately 10 — 15 minutes 32 • Finishing Time: 20 - 60 minutes 33 • Color: concrete gray 34 35 b. Typical Properties of the cured polymer- modified, portland 36 cement mortar: 37 • Compressive Strength (ASTM C -928) 38 28 day: 6500 psi min 39 • Flexural Strength (ASTM C -348) 40 28 days: 1,180 psi min 41 • Bond Strength (ASTM C -882 Modified) 42 28 days: 1,650 psi min 43 44 c. The portland cement mortar shall not produce a vapor barrier. 45 46 47 48 MULTI - LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM 03350 -8 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B. Epoxy Resin /Portland Cement Adhesive (Sika Armetec 110 EpoCem) 2 3 1. Component "A" shall be an epoxy resin /water emulsion containing 4 suitable viscosity control agents. It shall not contain butyl glycidyl ether. 5 2. Component "B" shall be primarily a water solution of a polyamine. 6 3. Component "C" shall be a blend of selected portland cements and 7 sands. 8 4. The material shall not contain asbestos. 9 5. Performance Criteria 10 a. Properties of the mixed epoxy resin /portland cement adhesive. 11 • Pot Life: 90 minutes @ 73° F 12 • Contact Time: 95 °F (35 °C) 6 hours 13 68 °F (20 °C) 12 hours 14 50 °F (10 °C) 16 hours 15 40 °F (5 °C) 24 hours 16 • Color: dark gray 17 18 b. Properties of the cured epoxy resin /portland cement adhesive. 19 • Compressive Strength (ASTM C -109) 20 3 day: 4500 psi (31.0 MPa) 21 7 day: 6500 psi (44.8 MPa) 22 28 day: 8500 psi (58.6 MPa) 23 • Splitting Tensile Strength (ASTM C -496) 24 28 days: 600 psi (4.1 MPa) 25 • Flexural Strength (ASTM C -348) 26 1250 psi (8.6 MPa) 27 • Bond Strength ASTM C -882 at 14 days 28 Wet on Wet, 0 -hr. open time: 2800 psi (19.3 MPa) 29 24 -hr. open time: 2600 psi (17.9 MPa) 30 • Bond of Steel Reinforcement to Concrete (Pullout Test) 31 Minimum 508 -psi (3.5 MPa) 32 • Plain Reinforcement 573 psi (3.95 MPa) 33 34 c. The epoxy resin /portland cement adhesive shall not produce a 35 vapor barrier. 36 37 d. Material must be proven to prevent corrosion of reinforcing steel 38 when tested under the procedures as set forth by the Federal 39 Highway Administration Program Report No. FHWA/RD86 /193. 40 Proof shall be in the form of an independent testing laboratory 41 corrosion report showing prevention of corrosion of the 42 reinforcing steel. 43 44 C. Hydrophilic Polyurethane Grout (SikaFix HH Hydrophilic) 45 46 1. Nonflammable hydrophilic polyurethane resin. 47 2. Cures to from a flexible adhesive closed cell foam. MULTI - LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM 03350 -9 07/15/14 1 1 3. The material shall not contain volatile solvents. 1 2 4. Performance Criteria 3 a. Properties of the uncured resin. I 4 • Shelf Life : 1 Year @ 73° F 5 • Solids (ASTM D 2369 B) 83% 6 • Viscosity (ASTM D 2196 A) 650 -800 csp 7 • Density (ASTM D 3574 -95) 8.7 -9.2 Ibs /gal 8 • Flashpoint F (ASTM D -92) 225 9 • Reaction Time 1:1 with Water 20 sec @ 68 F 1 10 11 b. Properties of the cured grout. 12 • Tensile Strength (ASTM D 3575 -95) 380 psi I 13 • Bond Strength 250 -300 psi 14 • Elongation (ASTM D 3574 -95) 400% 15 • Shrinkage (ASTM D 1042) less than 10% 16 17 2.03 MULTI - LAYERED LINING SYSTEM I 18 19 A. Lining System 20 21 Only materials and products suitable for installation in a severe hydrogen 22 sulfide environment without any deterioration to the liner may be used. 23 Materials specified herein are the only approved standard coating systems. 24 The following list specifies the material requirements for resurfacing systems. 25 The approved products are as follows: 26 27 Green Monster Liner or Spectrashield. 28 29 2.04 ABRASIVE BLAST MEDIA 30 31 A. Provide the material, size, gradation, and quality necessary to produce the 32 degree of cleanliness and surface profile required herein. 33 34 PART 3 - EXECUTION 35 36 3.01 GENERAL 37 38 A. Hoisting, Scaffolding, Staging, and Planking: 39 40 Provide, set -up, and maintain all required hoists, scaffolds, and staging and 41 planking, and perform all access related hoisting work required to complete 42 the work of this section as indicated and specified. Scaffolds shall have solid 43 backs and floors to prevent dropping materials from there to the floors or 44 ground below. 45 46 MULTI - LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM 03350 -10 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B. Environmental Requirements: 2 3 Comply with the Manufacturer's recommendations as to environmental 4 conditions under which resurfacing system materials can be applied. Do not 5 apply resurfacing system materials when dust is in work site. The Contractor 6 shall provide all temporary lighting during the work. 7 8 C. Protection: 9 10 Cover or otherwise protect finish work or other surfaces not being resurfaced. 11 Erect and maintain protective tarps, enclosures and /or maskings to contain 12 debris (such as dust or airborne particles resulting from surface preparation) 13 generated during any and all work activities. This includes, but is not limited to 14 the use of dust/debris collection apparatus as required. 15 16 D. Initial Inspection Of Surfaces To Be Coated: 17 18 It is the responsibility of the Contractor to inspect and report unacceptable 19 concrete substrate surface conditions to the Engineer prior to the 20 commencement of surface preparation activities. Unacceptable surface 21 conditions are defined as the presence of cracked surfaces or concrete 22 deteriorated to a depth of greater than 1 -inch or otherwise unable to withstand 23 surface preparation as specified herein. 24 25 E. Thinners and Solvents: 26 27 The Contractor shall use only solvents and thinners as recommended by the 28 Manufacturer. 29 30 3.02 PREPARATION OF EXISTING PRE -CAST AND BRICK SURFACES 31 32 A. Surface preparation shall produce a cleaned, abraded and sound surface with 33 no evidence of laitance, loose concrete, brick or mortar, contaminants or 34 debris, and shall display a surface profile suitable for application of liner 35 system 36 37 B Prior to abrasive media blasting, loose materials, acid constituents, grease, oil, 38 and other contaminants shall be removed with a 2500 -5000 psi power wash 39 using potable water and an alkaline -based emulsifying detergent as 40 recommended by the resurfacing material manufacture. 41 42 C. All interior surfaces to be coated must be clean, sound, and free of 43 contaminants. All loose and deteriorated concrete, mortar and brick shall be 44 removed by mechanical means. Mechanically prepare the substrate to obtain 45 a surface profile of +/- 1/16" (CSP 5 or greater as per ICRI Guidelines) with a 46 new exposed aggregate surface for the precast. The area to be patched shall 47 not be less than 1/8" in depth for the precast portion. The entire brick surface 48 shall be covered. MULTI - LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM 03350 -11 07/15/14 1 2 D. Where reinforcing steel with active corrosion is encountered, sandblast the 3 steel to a white metal finish to remove all contaminants and rust. Where 4 corrosion has occurred due to the presence of chlorides, the steel shall be 5 high pressure washed after mechanical cleaning. Prime steel with 2 coats of 6 Sika Armatec 110 EpoCem as per the technical data sheet. (See Spec 7 Component SC- 201 -0699) 8 9 E. Abrasive Blast Cleaning 10 11 1. Sand blasting media shall be washed, graded and free of contaminants 12 that might interfere with the adhesion of the resurfacing materials. 13 Used or spent blast abrasive shall not be reused on work covered by 14 this section. 15 2. The compressed air used for blast cleaning will be filtered free of 16 condensed water or oil. Moisture traps will be cleaned at least once 17 every four hours or more frequently as is appropriate. 18 3. Oil separators shall be installed just downstream of compressor 19 discharge valves and at the discharge of the blast pot discharges. Oil 20 separators shall be cleaned at least once every four hours or more 21 frequently as is appropriate. 22 4. A paper blotter test shall be performed by the Contractor when 23 requested by the Engineer or the Engineer's representative to 24 determine if the air is sufficiently free of oil and moisture. 25 5. Regulators, gauges, filters, and separators will be in good working order 26 for all of the compressor air lines to blasting nozzles at all times during 27 this work. 28 6. An air dryer or drying unit shall be installed which dries the compressed 29 air prior to blast connections. This dryer shall be used and maintained 30 for the duration of surface preparation work. 31 7. The quality, volume, and velocity of life support and ventilation air used 32 during surface preparation shall be in accordance with applicable safety 33 standards and as required to ensure adequate visibility and proper 34 dissipation of volatiles without impacting the prepared surface or the 35 health of the public or personnel working for the Contractor, 36 Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Representatives, or anyone who 37 may be affected by on -site maintenance coating work activities. 38 8. The abrasive blast nozzles used shall be the venturi or other high 39 velocity type supplied with a minimum of 100 -psig air pressure and the 40 necessary volume to obtain the required blast cleaning production rates 41 and specified degree of cleanliness. 42 9. The Contractor must provide adequate ventilation for airborne 43 particulate evacuation and lighting (meeting all pertinent safety 44 standards) to optimize visibility for both blast cleaning and observation 45 of the substrate during surface preparation work. 46 MULTI - LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM 03350 -12 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 E. After abrasive blasting, the interior surface shall be power rinsed with potable 2 water to remove all loose materials and other contaminants. 3 4 3.03 APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS POLYMER - MODIFIED PORTLAND 5 CEMENTITIOUS MORTAR 6 7 A. Mechanically mix in an appropriate sized mortar mixer or with a mud paddle 8 and low speed (400 -600 rpm) drill. Pour approximately 4/5 gal Component A 9 into the mixing container. Add Component B while continuing to mix. Mix to a 10 uniform consistency for a maximum of three minutes. Add remaining 11 Component A to mix for desired consistency. 12 13 B. Should smaller quantities be needed, be sure the components are measured 14 in the correct ratio and that the Component B is uniformly blended before 15 mixing the components together. Mix only that amount of material that can be 16 placed in 10 -15 minutes. Do not re- temper material. 17 18 C. Placement Procedure: At the time of application, the substrate shall be a 19 saturated surface but with no standing water. Mortar must be scrubbed into 20 substrate filling all pores and voids. While the scrub coat is still plastic, force 21 material against edge of repair, working toward center. If repair area is too 22 large to fill while scrub coat and is still wet use Sika Armatec 110 EpoCem in 23 lieu of scrub coat. (See spec component SC- 200 - 0699). After filling, 24 consolidate then screed. Allow mortar to set to desired stiffness then finish 25 with trowel for smooth surface. Wood float or sponge float for a rough surface. 26 Areas where the depth of the repair area to sound concrete is greater than 1- 27 1/2 ", the repair shall be made in lifts of 1 -1/2" maximum thickness. The top 28 surface of each lift shall be scored to produce a rough surface for the next lift. 29 The preceding lift shall be allowed to reach final set before applying fresh 30 material. The fresh mortar must be scrubbed into the preceding lift. 31 32 D. As per ACI recommendations for Portland cement concrete, curing is required. 33 Moist cure with wet burlap and polyethylene, a fine mist of water or a water - 34 based* compatible curing compound. Moist curing should commence 35 immediately after finishing and continue for 48 hours. Protect newly applied 36 material from rain, sun, and wind until compressive strength is 70% of the 28- 37 day compressive strength. To prevent from freezing cover with insulating 38 material. Setting time is dependent on temperature and humidity. Pretesting 39 of curing compound is recommended. 40 41 E. Adhere to all procedures, limitations and cautions for the polymer- modified 42 Portland cement mortar in the manufacturers' current printed technical data 43 sheet and literature. 44 45 F. Exposed rebar steel surfaces shall be abraded to produce a minimum surface 46 profile of 3 mils. Before preparing steel, remove oil, grease and /or all other 47 types of contaminants. 48 49 MULTI - LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM 03350 -13 07/15/14 1 3.04 APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS HYDROPHILIC POLYURETHANE GROUT 2 3 A. Prepare materials per Manufacturer's recommendations. 4 5 B. Drill injection ports at a 45° degree angle to intersect the crack at 6 approximately '/z the depth of the structure. Spacing of the injection ports 7 depends on crack width, but normal spacing varies from 6" to 24 ". It is 8 necessary to flush the drilled holes with water to remove drill dust from the 9 holes and cracks, and insure that the crack is wet enough to react with the 10 grout when introduced to the crack. On structures open on both sides, provide 11 ports on opposite sides at staggered elevations. Install the injection ports in 12 the holes. 13 14 C. Inject first port with clean water at 250 -psi minimum until air and water begin to 15 flow out of the crack and the other ports. Complete this step for every port. 16 17 D. Limitation times and related temperature range restrictions between 18 successive lifts for all products specified herein per Manufacturer's stated 19 requirements. 20 21 E. Inject the prepared cracks with a minimum of 250 psi in order to achieve 22 maximum filling and penetration without the inclusion of air pockets or voids in 23 the polyurethane chemical grout. Begin the pressure injection at the lowest 24 packer and continue until there is the appearance of the polyurethane 25 chemical grout at an adjacent packer, thus indicating travel. When travel is 26 indicated, a decision to discontinue or continue the pressure injection from that 27 packer should be made by the contractor, based on his experience, with the 28 approval of the engineer. Continue the procedure until all applicable cracks 29 have been filled. 30 31 F. Pump polyurethane chemical grout for 45 seconds and then pause to allow the 32 material to flow into all of the cracks and crevices. Watch for material flow and 33 water movement to appear on the surface. When movement stops, begin 34 injection into the next packer. When sealing vertical cracks, begin injecting at 35 the bottom of the crack and work vertically. If site temperature are extremely 36 low, heat bands or heated water baths may be used on the pails, before and 37 during use to maintain the products temperature. Re- inject to assure that all 38 voids are properly sealed off. 39 40 G. If penetration of any cracks is impossible, consult the engineer before 41 discontinuing the injection procedure. If modification of the proposed 42 procedure is required to fill the cracks, submit said modification in writing to 43 the engineer for acceptance prior to proceeding. 44 45 H. Adhere to all limitations and cautions for the polyurethane chemical grout as 46 stated in the manufacturer's current printed literature. 47 48 I. Caution: Expanding chemical grout is exerting outward high pressures and MULTI - LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM 03350 -14 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 review of drawings of the area to be repaired is recommended. 2 3 J. All equipment and procedures used for polyurethane resin injection system 4 application shall be as recommended by the Manufacturer. Unless specified 5 elsewhere herein, the Contractor shall comply with the Manufacturer's most 6 recent written instructions. 7 8 3.05 APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS MULTI - LAYERED LINING SYSTEMS 9 10 A. General: 11 12 Application procedures shall conform to recommendations of the 13 manufacturer, including materials handling, mixing, environmental controls 14 during application, safety and spray equipment. 15 16 B. Spray equipment shall be specifically designed to accurately ratio and apply 17 the liner system. 18 19 C. Application of multi- component liner system shall be in strict accordance with 20 manufacturer's recommendation. Finished thickness of the spray on multi - 21 layered lining system shall be a minimum of 125 mils thick. A permanent 22 identification and date of work performed shall be affixed to the structure in a 23 readily visible location. 24 25 1. All specified surface preparation shall be performed in accordance with 26 the latest version of the SSPC, NACE, ICRI and other standards 27 referenced in this section. 28 29 2. The newly applied mortar and the existing concrete surfaces shall be 30 abraded to produce a minimum surface profile of equal to 40 -grit 31 sandpaper with no loose concrete remaining by abrasive blast cleaning. 32 This preparation will be followed by vacuum cleaning to remove all dust, 33 dirt or friable substances leaving clean, dust free surfaces for 34 resurfacing. 35 36 3. Verify that the pH of the concrete surfaces to be coated is within the 37 range of 9 to 11. Application of coating materials outside this range will 38 not be permitted without written approval from the Engineer. 39 40 B. All phases of surface preparation work specified herein must be inspected by 41 the Engineer before the Contractor proceeds with the subsequent phase of 42 surface preparation. 43 44 C. Observe limitation times and related temperature range restrictions between 45 successive lifts for all products specified herein per Manufacturer's stated 46 requirements. 47 48 D. The multi -layer systems shall have a minimum of two coats each of different MULTI - LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM 03350 -15 07/15/14 1 color. Coatings must be inspected after application for pinholes. 2 3 E. All equipment and procedures used for the resurfacing system application 4 shall be as recommended by the Manufacturer. Unless specified elsewhere 5 herein, the Contractor shall comply with the Manufacturer's most recent written 6 instructions with respect to the following: 7 8 a. Mixing of All Materials 9 b. Protection and Handling of All Materials 10 c. Recoat Limitation and Cure Times 11 d. Minimum Ambient and Substrate Temperatures 12 e. Substrate's Degree of Dryness 13 f. Relative Humidity and Dew Point of Air 14 g. Application. 15 h. Final Curing. 16 i. Use of Proper Application Equipment. 17 18 F. Curing of Resurfacing System: 19 20 The applied lining system shall be protected from damage during curing and 21 shall be cured as recommended by the Manufacturer. Ambient conditions 22 shall be controlled by the Contractor during curing to ensure the minimum air 23 temperature and minimum relative humidity as required by the Manufacturer 24 are maintained. 25 26 G. Chemical Resistant Lining 27 28 General Note: The Contractor is advised that with all thick -film, quick curing 29 materials applied to concrete surfaces, outgassing of the concrete can occur. 30 Possible remedies include applying materials when the temperature of the 31 concrete surfaces are descending, or applying a thin (1/8 ") layer of the 32 specified surfacing material. Other remedies may exist, and may be submitted 33 for the Engineer's approval. 34 35 H. Safety And Ventilation Requirements: 36 37 Requirements for safety and ventilation shall be in accordance with SSPC 38 Paint Application Guide No. 3. 39 40 41 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL INSPECTION AND TESTING 42 43 A. Inspection by the Engineer or others does not limit the Contractor's 44 responsibilities for quality control inspection and testing as specified herein or 45 as required by the Manufacturer's instructions. 46 47 B. Perform the quality control procedures listed below in conjunction with the 48 requirements of this Section. 49 MULTI - LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM 03350 -16 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Inspect all materials upon receipt to ensure that all are supplied by the 2 Manufacturer. 3 4 2. Provide specified storage conditions for the resurfacing system 5 materials, solvents, and abrasives. 6 7 3. The pH of the concrete substrate will be measured using pH- indicating 8 papers. pH testing is to be performed once every 50 sq. ft. Acceptable 9 pH values shall be between 9.0 and 11.0 as measured by a full range 10 (1 -12) color indicating pH paper with readable color calibrations and a 11 scale at whole numbers (minimum). Use Hydrion Insta -Check Jumbo 12 0 -13 or 1 -12 or equal. The paper shall be touched to the surface once 13 using moderate gloved finger pressure. The surface shall not be wiped 14 or moved laterally to disturb the surface during pH testing. Following 15 the one touch, lift the paper vertically to not "wipe" the surface. 16 Compare the color indicated with the scale provided and record the pH. 17 18 4. Inspect and record substrate profile (anchor pattern). Surfaces shall be 19 abraded, as a minimum, equal to the roughness of 40 grit sand paper. 20 21 5. Measure and record ambient air temperature once every two hours of 22 each shift using a thermometer and measure and record substrate 23 temperature once every two hours using a surface thermometer. 24 25 6. Measure and record relative humidity every two hours of each shift 26 using a sling psychrometer in accordance with ASTM E337. 27 28 C. Provide correct mixing of resurfacing materials in accordance with the 29 Manufacturer's instructions. 30 31 D. Inspect and record that the "pot life" of resurfacing materials are not exceeded 32 during installation. 33 34 35 Manufacturer's instructions. 36 37 F. Upon full cure of the mortar and lining material, the installed system shall be 38 checked by high voltage spark detection in accordance with NACE RP0188- 39 88BN to verify a pinhole -free surface. Voltage shall be set at 11,000 volts. 40 Areas, which do not pass the spark detection test, shall be corrected at no 41 cost to the Owner and rechecked. 42 43 G. Upon completion of the lining system installation the lined area shall be 44 cleaned and prepared to permit close visual inspection by the Engineer or the 45 Engineer's Representative. Any and all deficiencies or defective work (not in 46 compliance with this section or related sections) will be marked for repair or 47 removal /replacement by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 48 E. Verify curing of the resurfacing materials in accordance with the MULTI - LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM 03350 -17 07/15/14 1 3.07 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA 2 3 A. Acceptance Criteria for Surface Preparation Work: All surfaces shall be 4 prepared in accordance with the specification and referenced standards 5 herein. 6 7 B. Acceptance Criteria for Coating System Application Work: Acceptable coating 8 work will be based upon the following: 9 1. No pockmarks, trowel marks, depressions, unconsolidated areas, 10 waviness or ridges, pinholes or holidays in either size or frequency. 11 2. No inter -coat bond failures between lifts. 12 3. Proper curing of coatings. 13 14 C. Resurfaced areas shall pitch to drains. There shall be no areas that puddle 15 when flood tested. 16 17 D. The Engineer or Engineer's Representative shall, at their discretion, inspect 18 the following: 19 20 1. Profile and degree of cleanliness of substrate. 21 2. Thickness of materials /coverage rate confirmation. 22 3. Ambient temperature and humidity requirements, and substrate 23 temperature. 24 4. Curing and recoat times. 25 5. Proper curing of the resurfacing materials. 26 27 E. Rework required on any holidays or any other inadequacies found by the 28 Engineer or the Engineer's representative in the quality of the coating work 29 should be marked. Such areas shall be recleaned and reworked by the 30 Contractor according to these specifications and the manufacturer's 31 recommendations at no additional cost to the Owner. 32 33 F. The Contractor is responsible for keeping the Engineer informed of all 34 progress so that inspection for quality can be achieved. 35 36 G. The Contractor is ultimately responsible for the quality performance of the 37 applied materials and workmanship. Inspections by the Engineer or the 38 Engineer's Representative do not limit this responsibility. 39 40 3.08 FINAL INSPECTION 41 42 A. Perform a final inspection to determine whether the resurfacing system work 43 meets the requirements of the specifications. The Engineer and the 44 Engineer's Representative will conduct final inspection with the Contractor. 45 46 47 END OF SECTION MULTI - LAYERED WET WELL LINING SYSTEM 03350 -18 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 03600 2 3 GROUT 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install 10 grout complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 11 12 1.02 SUBMITTALS 13 14 A. Submit to the Engineer shop drawings and product data showing materials of 15 construction and details of installation for: 16 17 1. Commercially manufactured non - shrink cementitious grout. The 18 submittal shall include catalog cuts, technical data, storage 19 requirements, product life, working time after mixing, temperature 20 considerations, conformity to required ASTM standards and Material 21 Safety Data Sheet. 22 23 2. Commercially manufactured non - shrink epoxy grout. The submittal 24 shall include catalog cuts, technical data, storage requirements, product 25 life, working time after mixing, temperature considerations, conformity 26 to required ASTM standards and Material Safety Data Sheet. 27 28 3 Cement grout. The submittal shall include the type and brand of the 29 cement, the gradation of the fine aggregate, product data on any 30 proposed admixtures and the proposed mix of the grout. 31 32 4. Concrete grout. The submittal shall include the mix design, constituent 33 quantities per cubic yard, the water /cement ratio, and fiber 34 reinforcement. 35 36 B. Laboratory Test Reports 37 38 1. Submit laboratory test data as requested by the Engineer. 39 40 C. Certifications 41 42 1. Where applicable, certify that commercially manufactured grout 43 products and concrete grout admixtures are suitable for use in contact 44 with potable water after 30 days curing. 45 46 D. Qualifications 47 48 1. Grout manufacturers shall submit documentation that they have at least GROUT 03600 -1 07/15/14 1 1 10 years of experience in the production and use of the proposed 1 2 grouts to be supplied. 3 4 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 5 6 A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 7 8 1. ASTM C531 - Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and 9 Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical Resistant Mortars, 10 Grouts and Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes 11 12 2. ASTM C579 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of 13 Chemical Resistant Mortars, Grouts and Monolithic Surfacings and 14 Polymer Concretes 15 16 3. ASTM C827 - Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early 17 Ages of Cylindrical Specimens from Cementitious Mixtures 18 19 4. ASTM C1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, 20 Hydraulic- Cement Grout (Non- shrink) 21 22 B. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Standard (CRD) 23 24 1. CRD C -621 - Corps of Engineers Specification for Non - shrink Grout 25 26 C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect 27 at the time of bid opening shall apply. 28 29 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE 30 31 A. Qualifications 32 33 1. Grout manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years of experience in 34 the production and use of the type of grout proposed for the work. 35 36 B. Pre - installation Conference 1 37 38 1. Where specifically required, and well in advance of grouting, conduct a 39 pre - installation meeting to review the requirements for surface 1 40 preparation, mixing, placing and curing procedures for each product 41 proposed for use. Parties concerned with grouting shall be notified of 42 the meeting at least 10 days prior to its scheduled date. 1 43 44 C. Services of Manufacturer's Representative 45 46 1. A qualified field technician of the non - shrink grout manufacturer, 47 specifically trained in the installation of the products, shall attend the 1 48 pre - installation conference and shall be present for the initial installation GROUT 03600 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 of each type of non - shrink grout. Additional services shall also be 2 provided, as required, to correct installation problems. 3 4 D. Field Testing 5 6 1. All field testing and inspection services required shall be provided by 7 the Owner. The Contractor shall assist in the sampling of materials and 8 shall provide any ladders, platforms, etc, for access to the work. The 9 methods of testing shall comply in detail with the applicable ASTM 10 Standards. 11 12 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 13 14 A. Deliver materials to the jobsite in original, unopened packages, clearly labeled 15 with the manufacturer's name, product identification, batch numbers and 16 printed instructions. 17 18 B. Store materials in full compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 19 Total storage time from date of manufacture to date of installation shall be 20 limited to 6 months or the manufacturer's recommended storage time, 21 whichever is less. 22 23 C. Material that becomes damp or otherwise unacceptable shall be immediately 24 removed from the site and replaced with acceptable material at no additional 25 cost to the Owner. 26 27 D. Non - shrink, cement -based grouts shall be delivered as pre - blended, 28 prepackaged mixes requiring only the addition of water. 29 30 E. Non - shrink epoxy grouts shall be delivered as pre- measured, prepackaged, 31 three component systems requiring only blending as directed by the 32 manufacturer. 33 34 1.06 DEFINITIONS 35 36 A. Non - shrink Grout: A commercially manufactured product that does not shrink 37 in either the plastic or hardened state, is dimensionally stable in the hardened 38 state and bonds to a clean base plate. 39 40 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 41 42 2.01 GENERAL 43 44 A. The use of a manufacturer's name and product or catalog number is for the 45 purpose of establishing the standard of quality desired. 46 47 B. Like materials shall be the products of one manufacturer or supplier in order to 48 provide standardization of appearance. GROUT 03600 -3 07/15/14 1 2 2.02 MATERIALS 3 4 A. Non- shrink Cementitious Grout 5 6 1. Non - shrink cementitious grouts shall meet or exceed the requirements 7 of ASTM C1107, Grades B or C and CRD C -621. Grouts shall be 8 Portland cement based, contain a pre - proportioned blend of selected 9 aggregates and shrinkage compensating agents and shall require only 10 the addition of water. Non - shrink cementitious grouts shall not contain 11 expansive cement or metallic particles. The grouts shall exhibit no 12 shrinkage when tested in conformity with ASTM C827. 13 14 2. General purpose non - shrink cementitious grout shall conform to the 15 standards stated above and shall be SikaGrout 212 by Sika Corp.; Set 16 Grout by Master Builders, Inc.; Gilco Construction Grout by Gifford Hill 17 & Co.; Euco NS by The Euclid Chemical Co.; NBEC Grout by U. S. 18 Grout Corp. or equal. 19 20 3. Flowable (Precision) non - shrink cementitious grout shall conform to the 21 standards stated above and shall be Masterflow 928 by Master 22 Builders, Inc.; Hi -Flow Grout by the Euclid Chemical Co.; SikaGrout 212 23 by Sika Corp.; Supreme Grout by Gifford Hill & Co.; Five Star Grout by 24 U. S. Grout Corp. or equal. 25 26 B. Non - shrink Epoxy Grout 27 28 1. Non - shrink epoxy -based grout shall be a pre - proportioned, three 29 component, 100 percent solids system consisting of epoxy resin, 30 hardener, and blended aggregate. It shall have a compressive strength 31 of 14,000 psi in 7 days when tested in conformity with ASTM D695 and 32 have a maximum thermal expansion of 30 x 10-6 when tested in 33 conformity with ASTM C531. The grout shall be Ceilcote 648 CP by 34 Master Builders Inc.; Five Star Epoxy Grout by U.S. Grout Corp.; 35 Sikadur 42 Grout -Pak by Sika Corp.; High Strength Epoxy Grout by the 36 Euclid Chemical Co. or equal. 37 38 C. Cement Grout 39 40 1. Cement grouts shall be a mixture of one part portland cement 41 conforming to ASTM C150, Types I, II, or 111 and 1 to 2 parts sand 42 conforming to ASTM C33 with sufficient water to place the grout. The 43 water content shall be sufficient to impart workability to the grout but not 44 to the degree that it will allow the grout to flow. 45 46 D. Concrete Grout 47 48 1. Concrete grout shall proportioned with cement, [pozzalan,] coarse and GROUT 03600 -4 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 fine aggregates, water, water reducer and air entraining agent to 2 produce a mix having an average strength of 2900 psi at 28 days, or 3 2500 psi nominal strength. Coarse aggregate size shall be [3/8] [1 /2] -in 4 maximum. Slump should not exceed 5 -in and should be as low as 5 practical yet still retain sufficient workability. 6 7 2. Synthetic reinforcing fibers shall be added to the concrete grout mix at 8 the rate of 1.5 Ibs of fibers per cubic yard of grout. Fibers shall be 9 added from the manufacturer's premeasured bags and according to the 10 manufacturer's recommendations in a manner that will ensure complete 11 dispersion of the fiber bundles as single monofilaments within the 12 concrete grout. 13 14 E. Water 15 16 1. Potable water, free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, organic 17 matter, or other deleterious substances. 18 19 PART 3 — EXECUTION 20 21 3.01 PREPARATION 22 23 A. Grout shall be placed over cured concrete which has attained its full design 24 strength unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. 25 26 B. Concrete surfaces to receive grout shall be clean and sound; free of ice, frost, 27 dirt, grease, oil, curing compounds, Iaitance and paints and free of all loose 28 material or foreign matter that may affect the bond or performance of the 29 grout. 30 31 C. Roughen concrete surfaces by chipping, sandblasting, or other mechanical 32 means to ensure bond of the grout to the concrete. Remove loose or broken 33 concrete. Irregular voids or projecting coarse aggregate need not be removed 34 if they are sound, free of Iaitance and firmly embedded into the parent 35 concrete. 36 37 1. Air compressors used to clean surfaces in contact with grout shall be 38 the oil -less type or equipped with an oil trap in the air line to prevent oil 39 from being blown onto the surface. 40 41 D. Remove all loose rust, oil or other deleterious substances from metal 42 embedments or bottom of base plates prior to the installation of the grout. 43 44 E. Concrete surfaces shall be washed clean and then kept moist for at least 24 45 hours prior to the placement of cementitious or cement grout. Saturation may 46 be achieved by covering the concrete with saturated burlap bags, use of a 47 soaker hose, flooding the surface, or other method acceptable to the Engineer. 48 Upon completion of the 24 hour period, visible water shall be removed from GROUT 03600 -5 07/15/14 1 the surface prior to grouting. The use of an adhesive bonding agent in lieu of 2 surface saturation shall only be used when directed by the Engineer for each 3 specific location of grout installation. 4 5 F Epoxy -based grouts do not require the saturation of the concrete substrate. 6 Surfaces in contact with epoxy grout shall be completely dry before grouting. 7 8 G. Construct grout forms or other leak -proof containment as required. Forms 9 shall be lined or coated with release agents recommended by the grout 10 manufacturer. Forms shall be of adequate strength, securely anchored in 11 place and shored to resist the forces imposed by the grout and its placement. 12 13 1. Forms for epoxy grout shall be designed to allow the formation of a 14 hydraulic head and shall have chamfer strips built into forms. 15 16 H. Level and align the structural or equipment bearing plates in accordance with 17 the structural requirements and the recommendations of the equipment 18 manufacturer. 19 20 I. Equipment shall be supported during alignment and installation of grout by 21 shims, wedges, blocks or other means. The shims, wedges and blocking 22 devices shall be prevented from bonding to the grout by appropriate bond 23 breaking coatings and removed after grouting unless otherwise directed by the 24 Engineer. 25 26 3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL 27 28 A. Mix, apply and cure products in strict compliance with the manufacturer's 29 recommendations and this Section. 30 31 B. Have sufficient manpower and equipment available for rapid and continuous 32 mixing and placing. Keep all necessary tools and materials ready and close at 33 hand. 34 35 C. Maintain temperatures of the foundation plate, supporting concrete, and grout 36 between 40 and 90 degrees F during grouting and for at least 24 hours 37 thereafter or as recommended by the grout manufacturer, whichever is longer. 38 Take precautions to minimize differential heating or cooling of base plates and 39 grout during the curing period. 40 41 D. Take special precautions for hot weather or cold weather grouting as 42 recommended by the manufacturer when ambient temperatures and /or the 43 temperature of the materials in contact with the grout are outside of the 60 and 44 90 degrees F range. 45 46 E. Install grout in a manner that will preserve the isolation between the elements 47 on either side of the joint where grout is placed in the vicinity of an expansion 48 or control joint. GROUT 03600 -6 07/15/14 1 1 2 F. Reflect all existing underlying expansion, control and construction joints I 3 4 through the grout. 5 3.03 INSTALLATION - CEMENT GROUTS AND NONSHRINK CEMENTITIOUS I 6 GROUTS 7 8 A. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not add cement, I 9 sand, pea gravel or admixtures without prior review by the Engineer. 10 11 B. Avoid mixing by hand. Mixing in a mortar mixer (with moving blades) is I 13 12 recommended. Pre -wet the mixer and empty excess water. Add premeasured amount of water for mixing, followed by the grout. Begin with 14 the minimum amount of water recommended by the manufacturer and then I 16 15 add the minimum additional water required to obtain workability. Do not exceed the manufacturer's maximum recommended water content. 17 I 18 C. Placements greater than 3 -in in depth shall include the addition of clean, 19 washed pea gravel to the grout mix when approved by the manufacturer. 20 Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for the size and amount of 21 aggregate to be added. 22 23 D. Place grout into the designated areas in a manner that will avoid segregation, I 24 air entrapment or both. Do not vibrate grout to release air or to consolidate the 25 material. Placement should proceed in a manner that will ensure the filling of 26 all spaces and provide full contact between the grout and adjoining surfaces. 27 Provide grout holes as necessary. I 28 29 E. Place grout rapidly and continuously to avoid cold joints. Do not place cement 30 grouts in layers. Do not add additional water to the mix (retemper) after initial I 31 32 stiffening. 33 F. Just before the grout reaches its final set, cut back the grout to the substrate at I34 a 45 degree angle from the lower edge of bearing plate unless otherwise 35 directed by the Engineer. Finish this surface with a wood float (brush) finish. 36 I37 G. Begin curing immediately after form removal, cutback, and finishing. Keep 38 grout moist and within its recommended placement temperature range for at 39 least 24 hours after placement or longer if recommended by the manufacturer. I40 Saturate the grout surface by use of wet burlap, soaker hoses, ponding or 41 other appropriate means. Provide sunshades as necessary. If drying winds 42 inhibit the ability of a given curing method to keep grout moist, erect wind I 43 breaks until wind is no longer a problem or curing is finished. 44 45 3.04 INSTALLATION - NONSHRINK EPDXY GROUTS 46 1 47 A. Mix in accordance with the procedures recommended by the manufacturer. 48 Do not vary the ratio of components or add solvent to change the consistency GROUT 03600 -7 07/15/14 1 1 of the grout mix. Do not overmix. Mix full batches only to maintain proper 2 proportions of resin, hardener and aggregate. 3 4 B. Monitor ambient weather conditions and contact the grout manufacturer for 5 special placement procedures to be used for temperatures below 60 or above 6 90 degrees F. 7 8 C. Place grout into the designated areas in a manner which will avoid trapping 9 air. Placement methods shall ensure the filling of all spaces and provide full 10 contact between the grout and adjoining surfaces. Provide grout holes as 11 necessary. 12 13 D. Minimize "shoulder" length (extension of grout horizontally beyond base plate). 14 In no case shall the shoulder length of the grout be greater than the grout 15 thickness. 16 17 E. Finish grout by puddling to cover all aggregate and provide a smooth finish. 18 Break bubbles and smooth the top surface of the grout in conformity with the 19 manufacturer's recommendations. 20 21 F. Epoxy grouts that are self curing shall not require the application of water. 22 Maintain the formed grout within its recommended placement temperature 23 range for at least 24 hours after placing, or longer if recommended by the 24 manufacturer. 25 26 3.05 INSTALLATION - CONCRETE GROUT 27 28 A. Screed underlying concrete to the grade shown on the Drawings. Provide the 29 surface with a broomed finish, aligned to drain. Protect and keep the surface 30 clean until placement of concrete grout. 31 32 B. Remove the debris and clean the surface by sweeping and vacuuming of all 33 dirt and other foreign materials. Wash the tank slab using a strong jet of 34 water. Flushing of debris into tank drain lines will not be permitted. 35 36 C. Saturate the concrete surface for at least 24 hours prior to placement of the 37 concrete grout. Saturation may be maintained by ponding, by the use or 38 soaker hoses, or by other methods acceptable to the Engineer. Remove 39 excess water just prior to placement of the concrete grout. Place a cement 40 slurry immediately ahead of the concrete grout so that the slurry is moist when 41 the grout is placed. Work the slurry over the surface with a broom until it is 42 coated with approximately 1/16 to 1/8-in thick cement paste. A bonding grout 43 composed of 1 part portland cement, 1.5 parts fine sand, a bonding admixture 44 and water, mixed to achieve the consistency of thick paint, may be substituted 45 for the cement slurry. 46 47 D. Place concrete grout to final grade using the scraper mechanism as a guide 48 for surface elevation and to ensure high and low spots are eliminated. Unless GROUT 03600 -8 07/15/14 1 I1 specifically approved by the equipment manufacturer , mechanical scraper 2 mechanisms shall not be used as a finishing machine or screed. I 3 4 E. Provide grout control joints as indicated on the Drawings. 5 I 6 7 F. Finish and cure the concrete grout as specified for cast -in -place concrete. 8 3.06 SCHEDULE I 9 10 A. The following list indicates where the particular types of grout are to be used: 11 I 12 13 1. General purpose non - shrink cementitious grout: Use at all locations where non shrink grout is called for on the plans except for base plates 14 greater in area than 3 -ft wide by 3 -ft long and except for the setting of I 15 anchor rods, anchor bolts or reinforcing steel in concrete. 16 17 2. Flowable non - shrink cementitious grout: Use under all base plates I 18 greater in area than 3 -ft by 3 -ft. Use at all locations indicated to receive 19 flowable non - shrink grout by the Drawings. The Contractor, at his /her 20 option and convenience, may also substitute flowable non - shrink grout 21 for general purpose non - shrink cementitious grout. I 22 23 3. Non - shrink epoxy grout: Use for the setting of anchor rods, anchor I 24 bolts and reinforcing steel in concrete and for all locations specifically 25 26 indicated to receive epoxy grout. 27 4. Cement grout: Cement grout may be used for grouting of incidental I28 base plates for structural and miscellaneous steel such as post base 29 plates for platforms, base plates for beams, etc. It shall not be used 30 when nonshrink grout is specifically called for on the Drawings or for I 31 grouting of primary structural steel members such as columns and 32 girders. 33 I 34 35 5. Concrete grout: Use for overlaying the base concrete under scraper mechanisms of clarifiers to allow more control in placing the surface 36 grade. I 37 38 END OF SECTION 39 1 1 1 1 GROUT 03600 -9 07/15/14 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK GROUT 03600 -10 07/15/14 1 SECTION 03740 2 3 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and cut, 10 remove, repair or otherwise modify parts of existing concrete structures or 11 appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Work 12 under this Section shall also include bonding new concrete to existing 13 concrete. 14 15 1.02 SUBMITTALS 16 17 A. Submit to the Engineer a Schedule of Demolition and the detailed methods of 18 demolition to be used at each location. 19 20 B. Submit manufacturer's technical literature on all product brands proposed for 21 use, to the Engineer for review. The submittal shall include the manufacturer's 22 installation and /or application instructions. 23 24 C. When substitutions for acceptable brands of materials specified herein are 25 proposed, submit brochures and technical data of the proposed substitutions 26 to the Engineer before delivery to the project. 27 28 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 29 30 A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 31 32 1. ASTM C881 - Standard Specification for Epoxy- Resin -Base Bonding 33 Systems for Concrete. 34 35 2. ASTM C882 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy -Resin 36 Systems Used with Concrete by Slant Sheer. 37 38 3. ASTM C883 - Standard Test Method for Effective Shrinkage of 39 Epoxy -Resin Systems Used with Concrete. 40 41 4. ASTM D570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics. 42 43 5. ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. 44 45 6. ASTM D695 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of 46 Rigid Plastics. 47 48 7. ASTM D732 - Standard Test Method for Shear Strength of Plastics by MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 03740 -1 07/15/14 1 1 Punch Tool. 2 3 8. ASTM D790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of 4 Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating 5 Materials. 6 7 B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect 8 at the time of bid opening shall apply. 9 10 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE 11 12 A. No existing structure or concrete shall be shifted, cut, removed, or otherwise 13 altered until authorization is given by the Engineer. 14 15 B. When removing materials or portions of existing structures and when making 16 openings in existing structures, all precautions shall be taken and all 17 necessary barriers, shoring and bracing and other protective devices shall be 18 erected to prevent damage to the structures beyond the limits necessary for 19 the new work, protect personnel, control dust and to prevent damage to the 20 structures or contents by falling or flying debris. Unless otherwise permitted, 21 shown or specified, line drilling will be required in cutting existing concrete. 22 23 C. Manufacturer Qualifications: The manufacturer of the specified products shall 24 have a minimum of 10 years of experience in the manufacture of such 25 products and shall have an ongoing program of training, certifying and 26 technically supporting the Contractor's personnel. 27 28 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 29 30 A. Deliver the specified products in original, unopened containers with the 31 manufacturer's name, labels, product identification and batch numbers. 32 33 B. Store and condition the specified product as recommended by the 34 manufacturer. 35 36 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 37 38 2.01 MATERIALS 39 40 A. General 41 42 1. Materials shall comply with this Section and any state or local 43 regulations. 44 45 B. Epoxy Bonding Agent 46 47 1. General 48 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 03740 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 a. The epoxy bonding agent shall be a two- component, 2 solvent -free, asbestos -free moisture insensitive epoxy resin 3 material used to bond plastic concrete to hardened concrete 4 complying with the requirements of ASTM C881, Type II and the 5 additional requirements specified herein. 6 7 2. Material 8 9 a. Properties of the cured material: 10 11 1) Compressive Strength (ASTM D695): 8500 psi minimum 12 at 28 days. 13 14 2) Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 4000 psi minimum at 14 15 days. 16 17 3) Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 - Modulus of Rupture): 18 6,300 psi minimum at 14 days. 19 20 4) Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 5000 psi minimum at 14 21 days. 22 23 5) Water Absorption (ASTM D570 - 2 hour boil): One 24 percent maximum at 14 days. 25 26 6) Bond Strength (ASTM C882) Hardened to Plastic: 1500 27 psi minimum at 14 days moist cure. 28 29 7) Effective Shrinkage (ASTM C883): Passes Test. 30 31 8) Color: Gray. 32 33 3. Manufacturers include: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ - Sikadur 32, 34 Hi -Mod; Master Builder's, Cleveland, OH - Concresive Liquid (LPL) or 35 equal. 36 37 C. Epoxy Paste 38 39 1. General 40 41 a. Epoxy Paste shall be a two- component, solvent -free, asbestos 42 free, moisture insensitive epoxy resin material used to bond 43 dissimilar materials to concrete such as setting railing posts, 44 dowels, anchor bolts and all- threads into hardened concrete and 45 shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C881, Type I, 46 Grade 3 and the additional requirements specified herein. It may 47 also be used to patch existing surfaces where the glue line is 48 1 /8 -in or Tess.. MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 03740 -3 07/15/14 1 2 2. Material 3 4 a. Properties of the cured material: 5 6 1) Compressive Properties (ASTM D695): 10,000 psi 7 minimum at 28 days. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 5) Water Absorption (ASTM D570): 1.0 percent maximum at 19 7 days. 20 21 6) Bond Strength (ASTM C882): 2,000 psi at 14 days moist 22 cure. 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 b. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, N.J. - Sikadur Hi -mod LV 32; 33 Master Builders, Inc., Cleveland, OH - Concresive 1438 or equal. 34 35 D. Non - Shrink Precision Cement Grout, Non - Shrink Cement Grout, Non - Shrink 36 Epoxy Grout and Polymer Modified mortar are included in Section 03600 37 GROUT. 38 39 E. Adhesive Capsule type anchor system shall be equal to the HVA adhesive 40 Anchoring System by Hilti Fastening Systems, Tulsa, OK. The capsule shall 41 consist of a sealed glass capsule containing premeasured amounts of a 42 polyester or vinylester resin, quartz sand aggregate and a hardener contained 2) Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 3,000 psi minimum at 14 days. Elongation at Break - 0.3 percent minimum. 3) Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 - Modulus of Rupture): 3,700 psi minimum at 14 days. 4) Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 2,800 psi minimum at 14 days. 7) Color: Concrete grey. 3. Manufacturers include: a. Overhead applications: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ - Sikadur Hi -mod LV 31; Master Builders, Inc., Cleveland, OH - Concresive 1438 or equal. 43 in a separate vial within the capsule. 44 45 F. Acrylic Latex Bonding Agent 46 47 G. Crack Repair Epoxy Adhesive 48 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 03740 -4 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1. General 2 3 a. Crack Repair Epoxy Adhesive shall be a two- component, 4 solvent -free, moisture insensitive epoxy resin material suitable 5 for crack grouting by injection or gravity feed. It shall be 6 formulated for the specific size of opening or crack being 7 injected. 8 9 b. All concrete surfaces containing potable water or water to be 10 treated for potable use that are repaired by the epoxy adhesive 11 injection system shall be coated with an acceptable epoxy 12 coating approved by the FDA for use in contact with potable 13 water. 14 15 2. Material 16 17 a. Properties of the cured material 18 19 1) Compressive Properties (ASTM D695): 10,000 psi 20 minimum at 28 days. 21 22 2) Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 5,300 psi minimum at 14 23 days. Elongation at Break - 2 to 5 percent. 24 25 3) Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 - Modulus of Rupture): 26 12,000 psi minimum at 14 days (gravity); 4,600 psi 27 minimum at 14 days (injection) 28 29 4) Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 3,700 psi minimum at 14 30 days. 31 32 5) Water Absorption (ASTM D570 - 2 hour boil): 1.5 percent 33 maximum at 7 days. 34 35 6) Bond Strength (ASTM C882): 2,400 psi at 2 days dry; 36 2,000 psi at 14 days dry plus 12 days moist. 37 38 7) Effective Shrinkage (ASTM 883): Passes Test. 39 40 3. Manufacturers include: 41 42 a. For standard applications: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, 43 NJ - Sikadur Hi -Mod; Master Builders Inc., Cleveland, 44 OH - Concressive 1380 or equal. 45 46 b. For very thin applications; Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, 47 NJ - Sikadur Hi -Mod LV; Master Builders Inc., Cleveland, 48 OH - Concressive 1468 or equal. MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 03740 -5 07/15/14 1 2 PART 3 — EXECUTION 3 4 3.01 GENERAL 5 6 A. Cut, repair, reuse, demolish, excavate or otherwise modify parts of the existing 7 structures or appurtenances, as indicated on the Drawings, specified herein, 8 or necessary to permit completion of the Work. Finishes, joints, 9 reinforcements, sealants, etc. are specified in respective Sections. All work 10 shall comply with other requirements of this of Section and as shown on the 11 Drawings. 12 13 B. All commercial products specified in this Section shall be stored, mixed and 14 applied in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 15 16 C. In all cases where concrete is repaired in the vicinity of an expansion joint or 17 control joint the repairs shall be made to preserve the isolation between 18 components on either side of the joint. 19 20 D. When drilling holes for dowels /bolts in new or existing concrete, drilling shall 21 stop if rebar is encountered and the hole location shall be relocated to avoid 22 rebar. Rebar shall not be cut without prior review by the Engineer. Where 23 possible, rebar locations shall be identified prior to drilling using "rebar 24 locators" so that drilled hole locations may be adjusted to avoid rebar 25 interference. 26 27 3.02 CONCRETE REMOVAL 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 B Where existing reinforcing is exposed due to saw cutting /core drilling and no 37 new material is to be placed on the sawcut surface, a coating or surface 38 treatment of epoxy paste shall be applied to the entire cut surface to a 39 thickness of 1 /4 -in. 40 41 C. In all cases where the joint between new concrete or grout and existing 42 concrete will be exposed in the finished work, except as otherwise shown or 43 specified, the edge of concrete removal shall be a 1 -in deep saw cut on each 44 exposed surface of the existing concrete. 45 46 D. Concrete specified to be left in place which is damaged shall be repaired. 47 48 E. The Engineer may from time to time direct the Contractor to make additional MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 03740 -6 07/15/14 A. Concrete designated to be removed to specific limits as shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer, shall be done by saw cutting or line drilling at limits followed by chipping or jack- hammering as appropriate in areas where concrete is to be taken out. Remove concrete in such a manner that surrounding concrete or existing reinforcing to be left in place and existing in place equipment is not damaged. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 repairs to existing concrete. These repairs shall be made as specified or by 2 such other methods as may be appropriate. 3 4 3.03 CONNECTION SURFACE PREPARATION 5 6 A. Connection surfaces shall be prepared as specified below for concrete areas 7 requiring patching, repairs or modifications as shown on the Drawings, 8 specified herein, or as directed by the Engineer. 9 10 B. Remove all deteriorated materials, dirt, oil, grease, and all other bond 11 inhibiting materials from the surface by dry mechanical means. Ensure the 12 areas are at minimum 1 /2 -in in depth. Irregular voids or surface stones need 13 not be removed if they are sound, free of laitance, and firmly embedded into 14 parent concrete, subject to the Engineer's final inspection. 15 16 C. If reinforcing steel is exposed, it must be mechanically cleaned to remove all 17 contaminants and rust. If half of the diameter of the reinforcing steel is 18 exposed, chip out behind the steel. The distance chipped behind the steel 19 shall be a minimum of 1 /2 -in. Reinforcing to be saved shall not be damaged 20 during the demolition operation. 21 22 D. Reinforcing from existing demolished concrete which is shown to be 23 incorporated in new concrete shall be cleaned by mechanical means to 24 remove all loose material and products of corrosion before proceeding with the 25 repair. It shall be cut, bent or lapped to new reinforcing as shown on the 26 Drawings and provided with 1 -in minimum cover all around. 27 28 E. The following are specific concrete surface preparation "methods" to be used 29 where called for on the Drawings, specified herein or as directed by the 30 Engineer. 31 32 1. Method A: After the existing concrete surface at connection has been 33 roughened and cleaned, thoroughly moisten the existing surface with 34 water. Brush on a 1/16 -in layer of cement and water mixed to the 35 consistency of a heavy paste. Immediately after application of cement 36 paste, place new concrete or grout mixture as detailed on the Drawings. 37 38 2. Method B: After the existing concrete surface has been roughened and 39 cleaned, apply epoxy bonding agent at connection surface. The field 40 preparation and application of the epoxy bonding agent shall comply 41 strictly with the manufacturer's recommendations. Place new concrete 42 or grout mixture to limits shown on the Drawings within time constraints 43 recommended by the manufacturer to ensure bond. 44 45 3. Method C: Drill a hole 1 /4 -in larger than the diameter of the dowel. The 46 hole shall be blown clear of loose particles and dust just prior to 47 installing epoxy. The drilled hole shall first be filled with [epoxy paste], 48 then dowels /bolts shall be buttered with paste then inserted by tapping. MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 03740 -7 07/15/14 1 Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, deformed bars shall be 2 drilled and set to a depth of ten bar diameters and smooth bars shall be 3 drilled and set to a depth of fifteen bar diameters. If not noted on the 4 Drawings, the Engineer will provide details regarding the size and 5 spacing of dowels. 6 7 4. Method D: Combination of Method B and C. 8 9 5. Method E: Capsule anchor system shall be set in existing concrete by 10 drilling holes to the required depth to develop the full tensile and shear 11 strengths of the anchor material being used. The anchor bolts system 12 shall be installed per the manufacturer's recommendation in holes sized 13 as required. The anchor stud bolt, rebar or other embedment item shall 14 be tipped with a double 45 degree chamfered point, securely fastened 15 into the chuck of all rotary percussion hammer drill and drilled into the 16 capsule filled hole. The anchor may be installed in horizontal, vertical 17 and overhead positions. 18 19 3.04 GROUTING 20 21 A. Grouting shall be as specified in Section 03600. 22 23 3.05 CRACK REPAIR 24 25 A. Cracks on horizontal surfaces shall be repaired by gravity feeding crack 26 sealant into cracks per manufacturer's recommendations. If cracks are less 27 than 1/16 -in in thickness they shall be pressure injected. 28 29 B. Cracks on vertical surfaces shall be repaired by pressure injecting crack 30 sealant through valves sealed to surface with crack repair epoxy adhesive per 31 manufacturer's recommendations. 32 33 34 END OF SECTION MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 03740 -8 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 05500 2 3 MISCELLANEOUS METAL 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install 10 miscellaneous metals as shown on the Construction Drawings and as 11 specified. herein. The miscellaneous metal items may include but are not 12 limited to the following: 13 14 1. All metal frames, ladders, stair rails, floor opening frames including 15 gratings and supports. 16 17 2. Prefabricated access hatches and frames. 18 19 3. Anchors and anchor bolts except those specified to be furnished with all 20 equipment. 21 22 4. Railings, posts and supports both interior and exterior. 23 24 5. Cast iron frames, covers, grates, drain leaders and drains. 25 26 6. Stair nosings, steel plates, overhead steel door frames, angle frames, 27 plates and channels. 28 29 7. Guardrails 30 31 1.02 COORDINATION 32 33 A. The work in this section shall be completely coordinated with the work of other 34 Sections. Verify at the site both the dimensions and work of other trades 35 adjoining items of work in this Section before fabrication and installation of 36 items herein specified. 37 38 B. Furnish to the pertinent trades all items included under this Section that are to 39 be built into the work of all other Sections. 40 41 1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 42 43 A. Detail Drawings, as provided for in the General Conditions, showing sizes of 44 members, method of assembly, anchorage, and connection to other members 45 shall be submitted to the Engineer for review before fabrication. 46 47 MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -1 CONFORMED 07/15/14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 B. For each fabricated item include drawings, elevations, and details. Show the following: 1. Details of Sections 2. Jointing and Connections 3. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS symbols; indicate net weld length. 4. Reinforcing 5. Fasteners and Anchors 6. Accessories 7. Location of each finish C. Manufacturer's specifications, details and installation instructions. Submit for: 1. All manufactured products used in fabrications. D. Samples shall be submitted at the request of the Engineer for concurrent review with shop drawings. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Field measurements shall be taken at the site to verify or supplement indicated dimensions and to insure proper fitting of all items. B. Where fabricated items or their anchors are to be embedded into concrete and masonry work, deliver such items to those performing the installation, together with all coordination Drawings and installation instructions required. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork where required for installation in new concrete or other adjacent work. 1.05 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS A. Design, manufacturing and assembly of elements of the materials herein specified shall be in accordance with the standards of the below listed organizations, except as otherwise shown or specified. Where reference is made to a standard of one of these, or other organizations the version of the standard in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1. Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe 2. Gray Iron Castings 3. Galvanizing, general 4. Galvanizing, hardware 5. Galvanizing, assemblies 6. Stainless Steel Bolts, Fasteners 7. Stainless Steel Plate and Sheet Wire 8. Welding Rods for Steel ASTM A53 ASTM A48 (Class 30) ASTM A123 ASTM A153 ASTM A386 AISI, Type 316 AISI, Type 316 AWS Spec. for Arc Welding 9. ANSI /AWS D1.1 -88 -- Structural Welding Code -- Steel; 1988. MISCELLANEOUS METAL CONFORMED 05500 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10. ANSI /AWS D1.3 -81 - Structural Welding Code -- Sheet Steel; 1981 2 11. ASTM A 36/A 36M -88d -- Standard Specification for Structural Steel; 3 1988. 4 12. ASTM A 307 -88a -- Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and 5 Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength; 1988. 6 13. ASTM A 501 -88 -- Standard Specification for Hot - Formed Welded and 7 Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing; 1988. 8 14. ASTM A 563 -88a -- Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel 9 Nuts; 1988. 10 15. ASTM B 221 -85a -- Standard Specification for Aluminum and Alumi- 11 num -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes; 1985. 12 16. FS FF -S -92B -- Screw, Machine: Slotted, Cross - Recessed or Hexagon 13 Head; 1974 (Amended 1975). 14 17. FS FF -W -84A - Washers, Lock (Spring); 1967 (Amended 1980). 15 18. FS FF -W -92B -- Washer, Flat (Plain); 1974. 16 19. SSPC -PA 1 -- Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting; Steel Structures 17 Painting Council; 1982. 18 20. SSPC -Paint 12 -- Cold - Applied Asphalt Mastic (Extra Thick Film); Steel 19 Structures Painting Council; 1982. 20 21. SSPC -Paint 13 -- Red or Brown One -Coat Shop Paint; Steel Structures 21 Painting Council; 1982. 22 22. SSPC -SP 1 -- Solvent Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting Council; 23 1982. 24 23. SSPC -SP 3 -- Power Tool Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting Council; 25 1982. 26 24. SSPC -SP 5 -- White Metal Blast Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting 27 Council; 1985. 28 25. SSPC -SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting 29 Council; 1985. 30 26. SSPC -SP 8 -- Pickling; Steel Structures Painting Council; 1982. 31 27. SSPC -SP 10 - Near -White Blast Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting 32 Council; 1985. 33 34 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 35 36 2.01 ANCHORS, BOLTS, AND FASTENING DEVICES 37 38 A. Anchors, bolts, etc., shall be furnished as necessary for installation of the work 39 of this Section. Unless otherwise specified, all anchor bolts shall be 316 40 stainless steel construction. 41 42 B. Compound masonry anchors shall be of the type shown or required and shall 43 be equal to Star Slug in compounded masonry anchors manufactured by Star 44 Expansion Industries, equal by Phillips Drill Co., Rahlplug, or equal. Anchors 45 shall be minimum "two unit" type. 46 47 C. The bolts used to attach the various members to the anchors shall be the 48 sizes shown or required. Stainless steel shall be attached to concrete or MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -3 CONFORMED 07/15/14 1 masonry by means of stainless steel machine bolts and iron or steel shall be 2 attached with steel machine bolts unless otherwise specifically noted. 3 4 D. For structural purposes, unless otherwise noted, expansion bolts shall be 5 Wej -it "Ankr- Tite ", Phillips Drill Co. "Wedge Anchors ", or Hilti "Kwik- Bolt ". 6 When length of bolt is not called for on the Construction Drawings, the length 7 of bolt provided shall be sufficient to place the wedge portion of the bolt a 8 minimum of 1 -inch behind the reinforcing steel within the concrete. Material 9 shall be as noted on the Construction Drawings. If not listed, all materials 10 shall be stainless steel. 11 12 2.02 ALUMINUM ITEMS 13 14 A. Aluminum gratings shall be of serrated I -Bar Aluminum Alloy 6063 -T6, and 15 shall be Thompson Fabricating Company, Aluminum I -Bar Grating; or equal. 16 Bearing bars shall be 1 -1/2 inch minimum. Grating to be of sufficient strength 17 to carry a uniformly distributed live load of not less than 200 pounds per 18 square foot with maximum deflection of 1/4" of the span length. Provide 19 bearing angles, anchors, and bolts constructed of aluminum or stainless steel 20 and as detailed. Grating shall be removable type with standard removable 21 fasteners. Aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete surfaces shall be 22 protected with a special protective lacquer, bituminous coating, or other 23 specified coating in order to keep stains to a minimum. Top surface of all bars 24 shall be flush; ends of gratings shall be provided with binding strips of same 25 depth and thickness as the main bars welded thereto. All openings 2 inches 26 and greater in diameter shall be banded with a bar of the same depth and 27 thickness as the main bearing bars of the grating, or furnished with continuous 28 cross bridges. Each cut bar shall be welded to the band if banding is utilized. 29 The ends of all grating sections shall be likewise banded. Clamps and bolts 30 used for attaching grating to supporting members shall be stainless steel. All 31 grating shall be clamped unless noted otherwise. Clamps shall be as 32 recommended by the manufacturer. 33 34 B. Stair treads shall be as specified above for grating and shall have abrasive 35 nonslip nosing. 36 37 C. Aluminum nosing at concrete stairs shall be an extrusion. of 4 -inch minimum 38 width with abrasive filled and shall be Wooster Products, Inc., Alumogrit 39 Treads, Type 116; equal by Barry Pattern and Foundry Co.; Andco; or equal. 40 Embedded anchors shall be furnished with a minimum of three anchors per 41 tread. 42 43 D. Aluminum ladders shall be fabricated to the dimensions and details and 44 installed as shown on the Construction Drawings. 45 46 E. Aluminum Handrails, Mechanically Fastened Type: 47 MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -4 CONFORMED 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 All aluminum mechanically fastened type pipe handrails and guardrails shall 2 be clear anodized aluminum finish and installed as specified herein and 3 indicated on the Construction Drawings. Handrails shall be made of nominal 4 1 -1/2 inches inside diameter pipe (schedule 40 for rails, schedule 80 for posts) 5 fabricated of seamless 6105 -T5 or 6061 -T6 alloy, ASTM B -429 or ASTM B- 6 221. The supplier of the handrail system shall supply all necessary fittings, 7 rackets, transition, corner and connector pieces, toeboards, protective 8 gaskets, etc., for a complete job at the locations indicated on the Construction 9 Drawings. All mounting hardware including bolts, studs, nuts, etc., shall be 10 stainless steel Type 316. Bends shall be smooth and accurate to the details 11 shown. The handrail systems shall comply with all OSHA codes and Section 12 1208.2 of the Standard Building Code. Railing systems incorporating pop - 13 rivets or glued fittings shall not be allowed. 14 15 Handrailings and components shall be as manufactured by Thompson 16 Fabricating Company, Birmingham, Alabama, or equal. 17 18 Handrails and stair rails shall be designed to withstand a 200 Ib concentrated 19 load applied in any direction at any point on the top rail. Handrails and stair 20 rails shall also be designed to withstand a Toad of 50 Ib /ft. applied horizontally 21 to the top rail. The 200 Ib load will not be applied simultaneously with the 22 501b /ft. load. In addition, the handrails shall be designed to withstand a Toad of 23 100Ib /ft. applied vertically downward to the top rail and simultaneously with the 24 501b /ft. horizontal Toad. The 100Ib /ft. vertical Toad does not apply to stair rails. 25 26 Spacing of posts where posts are required shall be as noted on shop 27 drawings, but in all cases shall be uniform and shall not exceed the 28 requirements of OSHA and Section 1208.2 of the Standard Building Code. 29 Shorter spacing may be used where required to maintain the maximum 30 spacing. The fabricator of the aluminum handrail and guardrail system shall 31 be responsible for the design and preparation of shop drawings and design 32 calculations (signed and sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer) to 33 meet OSHA requirements and Section 1208.2 of Standard Building Code. 34 35 All railings shall be erected in line and plumb. Field splicing and expansion 36 compensation shall be accomplished using internal splice sleeves. Make 37 provisions for removable railing sections, as detailed and where shown on the 38 Construction Drawings. 39 40 Where handrail or guardrail posts are set in concrete, as per the 41 manufacturer's requirements, the posts shall be set into aluminum sleeves 42 cast in the concrete and firmly cemented with 1651 epoxy resin by E -Bond 43 Epoxies, Oakland Park, Florida, or Moulded Reinforced Plastics, Inc., Fort 44 Lauderdale, Florida or equal. Collars shall be placed on the posts and 45 fastened in place, as shown and as detailed on the shop drawings. 46 MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -5 CONFORMED 07/15/14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 Where handrail is supported from structural members, it shall be done by the use of sockets, flanges, brackets, or other means, which will provide neat and substantial support for the pipe railing. All railing shall be properly protected by paper, plastic, a coating or by all three against scratching, splashes, mortar, paint, or other defacements during transportation and erection and until adjacent work by other trades has been completed. F. Toeboards: 1. Contractor shall furnish and install aluminum toeboards conforming to latest OSHA requirements on all railings and other locations. 2. Toeboards shall consist of an extruded 6063 -T6 aluminum shape bolted by means of a pipe clamp to the railing posts without requiring any drilling or welding of the toeboard to the railing posts as manufactured by Thompson Fabricating Company, or equal. Toeboards shall have pitched top and tear drop bottom to prevent accumulation of dirt, or other material. 3. Toeboards shall be aluminum alloy 6063 -T6. All fastening hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. G. Kickplates, if required, shall be fabricated and installed as shown on the Drawings. H. Aluminum safety gate shall be fabricated of extruded aluminum. I. Prefabricated checkerplate aluminum floor hatches shall be Type "JD ", or "KD" as manufactured by Bilco Co., equal by Babcock -Davis Associates, Inc.; Type "AM" Inland- Ryerson Construction Products Co., Milcor Division; or equal, sized as shown. Hatches with either dimension over 3 feet -6 inches shall be double leaf type. Hatches shall be designed for a live load of 300 pounds per square foot. Hatches shall be watertight. J. Ship ladders shall be of all aluminum construction as detailed. Treads shall have abrasive nosing as manufactured by Thompson Fabricating Company, Birmingham, Alabama. K. Checkplate aluminum cover plates shall be fabricated to the details shown and installed at the locations shown. Structural aluminum angle and channel door frames shall be provided as shown on the Construction Drawings and shall be anodized. Frames shall be fabricated with not less than three anchors on each jamb. MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -6 CONFORMED 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 M. Miscellaneous aluminum shapes and plates shall be fabricated as shown. 2 Angle frames for hatches, beams, grates, etc., shall be furnished complete 3 with welded strap anchors attached. Furnish all miscellaneous aluminum 4 shown but not otherwise detailed. Structural shapes and extruded items shall 5 conform to the detail dimensions or the Shop Drawings within the tolerances 6 published by the American Aluminum Association. 7 8 2.03 STEEL ITEMS 9 10 A. Sleeves shall be steel or cast iron pipe in walls and floors with end joints as 11 shown on the Drawings. All pipe sleeves shall have center anchor around 12 circumference as shown. 13 14 B. Miscellaneous steel pipe for sleeves and lifting attachments and other uses as 15 required shall be Schedule 40 pipe fabricated according to the details as 16 shown on the Drawings. 17 18 C. Miscellaneous steel shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with the 19 Construction Drawings and shall include: beams, angles, support brackets, 20 closure angles in roof at edge of T -beam; base plates to support ends of 21 T- beams; door frames; splice plates, anchor bolts (except for Equipment 22 furnished in Divisions 11, 13, 14 and 15); lintels and any other miscellaneous 23 steel called for on the Drawings and not otherwise specified. 24 25 D. Guardrails shall be of a standard FDOT W -Beam design with reflectors. All 26 mounting hardware including bolts, washers, nuts shall be galvanized. 27 28 2.04 CAST IRON ITEMS 29 30 A. Outside pipe clean -out frames and covers, when and where shown on the 31 Construction Drawings, shall be heavy duty, R- 6013 -R -6099 series as 32 manufactured by Neenah Foundry Co., or equal. All outside pipe clean -outs 33 shall be 6 -inch diameter. 34 35 B. Frames, covers and grates for wet wells, catch basins and inlets shall be of a 36 good quality, strong, tough even grained cast iron and capable of supporting 37 an H -20 loading. Castings shall be as manufactured by the U.S. Foundry, 38 Neenah Foundry, Mechanics Iron Foundry or equal. Sizes shall be as shown 39 on the Drawings. Covers to have letters "WATER ", "SEWER" or "DRAIN ", as 40 applicable, embossed on top. 41 42 C. Electric and telephone wet well frames and covers, when and where shown on 43 the Construction Drawings, shall be ductile iron castings conforming to all 44 requirements of ASTM A536. The covers shall be watertight and shall have 45 the letters "HIGH VOLTAGE," "LOW VOLTAGE," "SIGNAL," "TELEPHONE," 46 as applicable, embossed on top in letters 2 inches high. The clear opening 47 shall be 36- inches. 48 MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -7 CONFORMED 07/15/14 1 2.05 STAINLESS STEEL ITEMS 2 3 A. Stainless steel items, where shown on the Drawings, shall be manufactured 4 using 316 S.S., unless otherwise noted. 5 6 2.06 MATERIALS - MISCELLANEOUS 7 8 A. Use fasteners of suitable size and length for the materials being fastened and 9 for the type of connection required. 10 11 1. For concealed interior and exterior use or built into exterior walls use 12 nonferrous stainless steel and zinc coated. 13 14 2. For embedded anchor that will be protected from the elements, use 15 fasteners of the same material as the miscellaneous stem being 16 fastened. 17 18 PART 3 — EXECUTION 19 20 3.01 FABRICATION 21 22 A. All miscellaneous metal work shall be formed true to detail, with clean, 23 straight, sharply defined profiles and smooth surfaces of uniform color and 24 texture and free from defects impairing strength or durability. 25 26 B. Connections and accessories shall be of sufficient strength to safely withstand 27 stresses and strains to which they will be subjected. Steel accessories and 28 connections to steel or cast iron shall be steel, unless otherwise specified. 29 Threaded connections shall be made so that the threads are concealed by 30 fitting. 31 32 C. Welded joints shall be rigid and continuously welded or spot welded as 33 specified or shown. The face of welds shall be dressed flush and smooth. 34 Exposed joints shall be close fitting and jointed where least conspicuous. 35 36 D. Welding of parts shall be in accordance with the Standard Code for Arc and 37 Gas Welding in Building Construction of the AWS and shall only be done 38 where shown, specified, or permitted by the Engineer. All welding shall be 39 done only by welders certified as to their ability to perform welding in 40 accordance with the requirements of the AWS Code. Component parts of 41 built -up members to be welded shall be adequately supported and clamped or 42 held by other adequate means to hold the parts in proper relation for welding. 43 44 E. Welding of aluminum work shall be on the unexposed side as much as 45 possible in order to prevent pitting or discoloration. 46 47 F. All aluminum finish exposed surfaces, except as specified below, shall have 48 manufacturer's standard mill finish. Aluminum handrails shall be given an MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -8 CONFORMED 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 anodic oxide treatment in accordance with the Aluminum Association 2 Specification AA- C22 -A41. A coating of methacrylate lacquer shall be applied 3 to all aluminum before shipment from the factory. 4 5 G. Castings shall be of good quality, strong, tough, even - grained, smooth, free 6 from scale, lumps, blisters, sand holes, and defects of any kind which render 7 them unfit for the service for which they are intended. Castings shall be 8 thoroughly cleaned and will be subjected to a hammer inspection in the field 9 by the Engineer. All finished surfaces shown on the Drawings and /or specified 10 shall be machined to a true plane surface and shall be true and seat at all 11 points without rocking. Allowances shall be made in the patterns so that the 12 thickness specified or shown shall not be reduced in obtaining finished 13 surfaces. Castings will not be acceptable if the actual weight is less than 95 14 percent of the theoretical weight computed from the dimensions shown. The 15 Contractor, if requested by the Owner or Engineer, shall provide facilities for 16 weighing castings in the presence of the Owner or Engineer showing true 17 weights, certified by the supplier. 18 19 H. All steel finish work shall be thoroughly cleaned, by effective means, of all 20 loose mill scale, rust, and foreign matter before shipment and shall be given 21 one shop coat of primer compatible with finish coats specified in Painting 22 Section after fabrication but before shipping. Paint shall be applied to dry 23 surfaces and shall be thoroughly and evenly spread and well worked into joints 24 and other open spaces. Abrasions in the field shall be touched up with primer 25 immediately after erection. Final painting is specified in Painting Section 26 09900. 27 28 I. Galvanizing, where required, shall be the hot -dip zinc process after fabrication. 29 Following all manufacturing operations, all items to be galvanized shall be 30 thoroughly cleaned, pickled, fluxed, and completely immersed in a bath of 31 molten zinc. The resulting coating shall be adherent and shall be the normal 32 coating to be obtained by immersing the items in a bath of molten zinc and 33 allowing them to remain in the bath until their temperature becomes the same 34 as the bath. Coating shall be not less than 2 oz. per sq. ft. of surface. 35 36 J. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; use anchors of same material and 37 finish as item except where specifically indicated otherwise. 38 39 K. Fabricate to prevent water intrusion or migration. 40 41 3.02 INSTALLATION 42 43 A. Install all items furnished except items to be imbedded in concrete or other 44 masonry which shall be installed under Division 03. Items to be attached to 45 concrete or masonry after such work is completed shall be installed in 46 accordance with the details shown. Fastening to wood plugs in masonry will 47 not be permitted. All dimensions shall be verified at the site before fabrication 48 is started. MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -9 CONFORMED 07/15/14 1 2 B. All steel surfaces to come in contact with exposed concrete or masonry shall 3 receive a protective coating of heavy bitumastic troweling mastic applied in 4 accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions prior to installation. 5 6 C. Where aluminum is embedded in concrete, apply a heavy coat of bitumastic 7 troweling mastic in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions prior to 8 installation. 9 10 D. Where aluminum contacts masonry or concrete, provide a 1/32 -inch neoprene 11 gasket between the aluminum and the concrete or masonry. 12 13 E. Where aluminum contacts a dissimilar metal, apply a heavy brush coat of 14 zinc - chromate primer and provide a 1/32-inch neoprene gasket between the 15 aluminum and the dissimilar metal. 16 17 F. Where aluminum contacts wood, apply two coats of aluminum metal and 18 masonry paint to the wood. 19 20 G. Anchor metal fabrications to substrata indicated; set all fasteners required. 21 22 H. Cut, drill and fit items as required for installation. 23 24 1. Fit exposed connection together accurately to form tight hairline joints. 25 26 2. Weld joints as indicated. 27 28 a. Comply with AWS code for welding procedures, for appearance 29 and quality of welds, and for corrective methods. 30 b. Grind exposed joints smooth. 31 32 I. Set items accurately in location, alignment and elevation; level, true and free 33 of rack, measured from established lines and levels. 34 35 J. Provide temporary bracing as required. 36 37 3.03 CLEANING AND TOUCH -UP 38 39 A. Touch up shop paint immediately after erection. 40 41 1. Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded surfaces. 42 43 2. Paint with same material used for shop painting, minimum 2 mils dry 44 film thickness. 45 46 47 END OF SECTION MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -10 CONFORMED 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 ' 34 35 36 ' 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 1 1 1 1 SECTION 06600 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY This section includes all Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Fabrications, including but not limited to: 1. FRP Weir Plates 2. FRP Scum Baffles 3. FRP Splice Plates 4. FRP Scum Baffle Supports 5. FRP Accessories 6. FRP HVAC Ductwork Products and 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK. The Contractor shall fumish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as required for the provision and proper installation of all of the FRP Products as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. All anchor bolts, gaskets, sealants, and other accessories and appurtenances, required for a complete and operating installations shall be included whether specifically mentioned or not. 1.03 REFERENCES ANSI /NSF 61 ANSI /AWWA ASTM D 638 ASTM D 695 ASTM D 790 — Drinking Water System Components — Health Effects. F101 — Contact - Molded, Fiberglass- Reinforced Plastic Wash Troughs and Launders — Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. — Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics — Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All FRP products and fabrications shall be supplied by an experienced firm who has continually engaged in the manufacture and /or fabrication of fiberglass reinforced plastics. Firms not listed in this specification must clearly document a minimum of five years of experience with similar projects of equal scope or design. B. The Contractor shall assure that all field dimensions are taken accurately and communicated properly to the FRP Fabricator, that other trades will not affect a proper installation of the FRP, and that all manufacturer's instructions and recommendations are followed. FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06600 -1 07/15/14 1 2 C. The scum baffle and scum baffle mounting brackets shall be manufactured 3 and installed such that there is no interference between the weir plate and the 4 weir plate mounting hardware. With the exception of cutting to length, field 5 modifications to the scum baffle mounting brackets and to weir plates will not 6 be permitted. 7 8 1.05 SUBMITTALS 9 10 A. Submit shop drawings and product data for all FRP materials and fabrications 11 as required by this scope of work. 12 13 B. Product Data: 14 15 1. Manufacturer's catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, 16 and identification of materials of construction, including resins and glass 17 fiber content and layout for FRP constructions. 18 19 2. Manufacturers catalog data with load and deflection charts for all FRP 20 gratings. 21 22 3. Manufacturers catalog data for all FRP Structural Shapes. 23 24 4. Manufacturer's 6 -inch square samples of FRP laminate of the same 25 construction, thickness, and color as the structural item. 26 27 5. Test results of FRP laminate. 28 29 6. Installation instructions and manufacturer certification that materials 30 comply with specified requirements and are suitable for the intended 31 application. 32 33 C. Shop Drawings: 34 35 1. Shop drawings shall show all FRP materials as required and include all 36 dimensions, connections, fasteners, structural supports, adjustments, 37 openings, anchors, tolerances, assembly, and installation details as 38 required and shall be based on field measurements by the Contractor to 39 ensure proper installation. 40 41 1.07 WARRANTY 42 43 A. The Contractor and the FRP manufacturer shall warrant all FRP products to 44 be free of defects in materials and workmanship in accordance with 45 Specification Section 01740 as applicable. 46 47 1.08 COORDINATION 48 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06600 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A. The Contractor and the FRP manufacturer shall coordinate the weir design 2 and installation requirements with the filter equipment manufacturer as 3 applicable. 4 5 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 6 7 2.01 GENERAL 8 9 A. All FRP materials shall be manufactured with vinylester or epoxy resin, with 10 chemical formulations as necessary to provide the corrosion resistance, 11 strength and other physical properties compatible with domestic wastewater 12 as required. 13 14 B. All structural shapes shall be constructed of continuous strand roving, 15 continuous transverse mat, and synthetic surface veil, and shall include 16 ultraviolet (UV) inhibitors. 17 18 C. After fabrication of FRP, all cuts, holes, and abrasion shall be sealed 19 according to Manufacturer's instructions. 20 21 2.02 FRP WEIRS, SCUM BAFFLES, SPLICE PLATES, AND SUPPORTS 22 23 A. Except for bolts and hardware specified herein, weirs splice places, baffles, 24 and supports shall be polyester plastic resin, reinforced with glass fiber and 25 molded to produce uniform smooth surfaces. 26 27 B. The glass content of the finished laminate shall not be less than 30% and not 28 more than 32% using Type E silane glass with chrome or silane finish. Final 29 laminate thickness shall be within 10% of nominal specified thickness. 30 31 C. The surface shall be resin rich, free of voids and porosity, without dry spots, 32 crazes or unreinforced areas and shall provide for increased corrosion 33 resistance and UV protection. All machines or cut edges shall be sealed with 34 resin. The weirs, splice places, baffles, and supports shall all be the same 35 color and shall be green, white, or grey. 36 37 D. Ultraviolet resistance is required in all laminates. Surfacing veil is required on 38 all surfaces to increase chemical resistance and provide additional UV 39 protection. 40 41 E. The weirs, splice plates, baffles, supports, and washers shall be a minimum of 42 1/4" thick plastic laminate. Oversized mounting holes shall be provided for 43 vertical and horizontal alignment of at least 2- inches with 5 -inch diameter FRP 44 washers to cover the holes. 45 46 F. Weirs and splice plates shall be mounted with stainless steel hardware on 47 centers not to exceed 24- inches. Weirs shall not exceed 12 -feet in length 48 unless otherwise noted. Cut ends of non - standard lengths shall be sealed FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06600 -3 07/15/14 1 with resin. 2 3 G. The scum baffle panels shall be 12- inches high and shall not exceed 12 -feet in 4 length unless otherwise noted. Splice plates shall be minimum 6 -inch x 12- 5 inch. The scum baffle brackets shall be 7 -inch x 10 -inch x 1/4-inch FRP with 6 gussets on both sides and slotted holes to provide horizontal, vertical and 7 radial adjustment of the baffle. The brackets shall be installed a maximum of 8 4 -feet on center or as shown on the Drawings. Fastening holes in the scum 9 baffle panel shall be countersunk to accommodate 3/8 -inch flat head 10 fasteners. Cut ends of non - standard lengths shall be sealed with resin. 11 12 H. Anchors, nuts, bolts, washers and all other hardware shall be Type 316 13 stainless steel. 14 15 I. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Laminate Physical Properties: 16 17 Method Test Min. Value 18 ASTM D -638 Tensile Strength 24,000 psi 19 ASTM D -790 Flexural Strength 35,000 psi 20 ASTM D -790 Flexural Modulus 2.0 x 106 psi 21 ASTM D -2583 Barcol Hardness 40 22 ASTM D -570 Water Absorption 0.2% 23 24 J. Construction shall comply with all requirements of ANSI /AWWA/NSF 25 standards listed above, and manufacturer shall provide proof of such 26 certification. 27 28 K. Straight weirs shall be cut from a flat sheet. 29 30 L. Weir notch configuration and dimensions shall match the existing weirs. 31 32 M. Caulking or weir gaskets shall be installed or applied to provide a leak free 33 seal between the weir plate and the concrete wall. The gasket shall be 1/4- 34 inch, closed cell neoprene or as recommended by the weir plate manufacturer. 35 The caulking shall be Sikaflex 1A or as recommended by the weir plate 36 manufacturer. 37 38 N. Weirs, splice plates, baffles, supports, and washers shall be as manufactured 39 by MFG Water Treatment Products, Warminister, or equal. 40 41 PART 3 — EXECUTION 42 43 3.01 INSPECTION 44 45 Upon receipt of material at job site, the Contractor shall inspect all materials for 46 shipping damage. Any damage is to be noted on the shipping receipt / packing list 47 and reported promptly to the shipper. 48 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06600 -4 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3.02 HANDLING AND STORAGE 2 3 A. Handle all FRP materials with reasonable care to prevent damage. Use 4 shipping pallets to move material. Do not drag FRP materials. 5 6 B. If FRP materials are not to be installed immediately, then store to prevent 7 twisting, bending, breaking, or damage of any kind. 8 9 3.03 INSTALLATION 10 11 A. The Contractor shall coordinate and verify that other construction trades and 12 materials have been installed per the Drawings, and, that they are accurate in 13 location, alignment, elevation, and are plumb and level. 14 15 B. Install FRP materials in accordance with the installation drawings and 16 instructions supplied by the FRP Manufacturer. 17 18 C. Install materials accurately in location and elevation, level, and plumb. Field 19 fabricate as necessary for accurate fit. 20 21 D. All field cuts, holes or abrasions must be sealed with Manufacturer's sealing 22 resin according to Manufacturer's instructions to prevent corrosion. 23 24 E. If the Work requires the Contractor to perform additional tasks that may 25 damage the installed FRP materials, the Contractor shall be responsible for 26 covering the FRP materials with plywood, or other suitable protective material. 27 28 F. Prior to installation of the weirs and scum baffle supports, the Contractor shall 29 pressure wash and grind smooth the concrete surface where those items will 30 be mounted to the existing structure. 31 32 3.04 WEIR INSTALLATION 33 34 A. V -notch weirs shall be installed level for the entire length of the weir. The 35 weirs shall be installed using a level surveying instrument and shall be 36 adjusted to a tolerance of ± 1/32 -inch. 37 38 B. Verify that weirs are installed level by raising water level to that point where 39 overflow first occurs. Level weirs as required so water slowly equally along 40 length of weir. 41 42 43 END OF SECTION 44 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06600 -5 07/15/14 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06600 -6 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 09865 2 3 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for the surface 10 preparation and application of shop primers necessary to complete this 11 Contract in its entirety. 12 13 1.02 SUBMITTALS 14 15 A. Submit to the Engineer for review, shop drawings, manufacturer's 16 specifications and data on the proposed primers and detailed surface 17 preparation, application procedures and dry mil thickness. 18 19 B. Submit representative physical samples of the proposed primers, if required by 20 the Engineer. 21 22 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 23 24 2.01 MATERIALS 25 26 A. Submerged Surfaces: 27 28 1. Shop primer for ferrous metals that will be submerged or that are 29 subject to splash action or that are specified to be considered 30 submerged service shall be sprayed with one coat of Tnemec Series 66 31 at 3.0 -5.0 mils (D.F.T.), PPG Pitt -Guard Epoxy Coating 97 -145 at 4.0- 32 6.0 mils (D.F.T.), or equal. 33 34 2. Voids and bugholes in concrete surfaces must be filled with Tnemec 35 Series 218 (up to 1/4" deep) or Tnemec Series 219 (1/4" to 1 'A" deep) 36 or equal as recommended by the manufacturer of the paint system. 37 38 B. Non - submerged Surfaces: 39 40 1. Shop primer for ferrous metals other than those covered by Paragraph 41 2.01A shall be sprayed with one coat of Tnemec Series 66 Epoxy Fast 42 Dry Primer 94 -109 (3.0 -5.0 mils D.F.T.) or equal. 43 44 C. Non - primed Surfaces: 45 46 1. Gears, bearings surfaces, and other similar surfaces obviously 47 not to be painted shall be given a heavy shop coat of grease or 48 other suitable rust - resistant coating. This coating shall be SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING 09865 -1 07/15/14 1 maintained as necessary to prevent corrosion during all periods 1 1 2 of storage and erection and shall be satisfactory to the Engineer 3 up to the time of the final acceptance test. 4 5 D. Compatibility of Coating Systems: 6 7 1. Shop priming shall be done with primers that are guaranteed by 8 the manufacturer to be compatible with their corresponding 9 primers and finish coats specified in Section 09900 for use in the 1 10 field and which are recommended for use together. 11 12 PART 3 — EXECUTION 13 14 3.01 APPLICATION 1 16 A. Surface Preparation and Priming: 17 18 1. Nonsubmerged components scheduled for priming, as defined above, 19 shall be sandblasted clean in accordance with SSPC -SP -6, Commercial 20 Grade, immediately prior to priming. Submerged components 21 scheduled for priming, as defined above, shall be sandblasted clean in 22 accordance with SSPC- SP -10. Near White, immediately prior to 23 priming. 24 25 2. Surfaces shall be dry and free of dust, oil, grease, dirt, rust, loose mill 26 scale, and other foreign material before priming. Concrete surfaces 27 shall be prepared in accordance with ICRI CSP 4 -6. 28 29 3. Shop prime in accordance with the paint manufacturer's 30 recommendations. 31 1 32 4 Priming shall follow sandblasting before any evidence of corrosion has 33 occurred and within 24 hours. 34 35 5. Allow all new concrete to cure for a minimum of 28 days. Test for 36 moisture by plastic film tape down test (ASTM D4263). 3 38 39 END OF SECTION 1 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING 09865 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 09900 2 3 PAINTING 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. The work of this section consists of furnishing all materials, labor, equipment 10 and incidentals required and performing all the painting necessary to complete 11 this Contract in its entirety. 12 13 B. It is the intent of these Specifications to paint all concrete where scheduled, 14 exposed miscellaneous metal, pipe, fittings, supports, valves, equipment and 15 all other work obviously required to be painted unless otherwise specified. 16 Minor items omitted in the schedule of work shall be included in the work of 17 this Section where they come within the general intent of the Specifications as 18 stated herein. 19 20 C. The following surfaces or items are not required to be painted: 21 22 1. Portions of metal, other than aluminum, embedded in concrete. This 23 does not apply to the back face of items mounted to concrete or 24 masonry surfaces, which shall be painted before erection. Aluminum to 25 be embedded in or in contact with concrete or masonry shall be coated 26 to prevent electrolysis. 27 2. Stainless steel. 28 3. Fencing 29 4. Concealed surfaces of pipe or crawl spaces. 30 5. Acoustical ceilings. 31 6. Tile. 32 7. Fiberglass, other than piping. 33 8. Packing glands and other adjustable parts and nameplates of 34 mechanical equipment. 35 9. Electrical switchgear, motor control centers, lighting and power panels, 36 and control panels. 37 10. Polyethylene chemical storage tanks. 38 39 1.02 REFERENCES 40 41 A. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) 42 SSPC -SP -1 through SSPC -SP -10 Surface Preparation Specifications 43 44 B. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) 45 ICRI CSP — 3 through ICRI CSP — 6 Concrete Surface Preparation Standards. 46 47 48 PAINTING 09900 -1 CONFORMED 12/11/14 1 1.03 SUBMITTALS 2 3 A. Submit to the Engineer for review in accordance with the General Conditions, 4 shop drawings, working drawings and product data including manufacturer's 5 specifications and data on the proposed paint systems and detailed surface 6 preparation, application procedures and dry film thickness. 7 8 B. Submit to the Engineer for review in accordance with the General Conditions, 9 color cards, including standard and special colors, for initial color selections. 10 11 C. Schedule of Painting Operations: Submit to the Engineer for review a 12 complete Schedule of Painting Operations in a timely manner and properly 13 notify and coordinate the fabricators' surface preparation and painting 14 operations with these Specifications. This Schedule shall include for each 15 surface to be painted, the brand name, the percent volume of solids, the 16 coverage and the number of coats the Contractor proposes to use in order to 17 achieve the specified dry film thickness, and color charts. Apply all material in 18 strict accordance with the Schedule and the manufacturer's instructions. Wet 19 and dry paint film gauges shall be made available to the Engineer to verify the 20 proper application while work is in progress. 21 22 1.04 SPARE MATERIAL 23 24 A. Furnish one unopened gallon can of each type and each color of paint used. 25 26 1.05 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS 27 28 A. Contractor shall submit a list of similar projects successfully completed within 29 the past 3 years. Contractor shall also supply record of Certificates of 30 Approval from Manufacturers to show they have completed technical product 31 and application training. Contractors shall submit a list of surface preparation 32 and application equipment sufficient to mix and apply the products specified. 33 34 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 35 36 2.01 MATERIALS 37 38 A. All painting materials shall be fully equal to those manufactured by the 39 Tnemec Company Inc., Carboline, PPG /Porter Coatings, and Sherwin 40 Williams. The painting schedule has been prepared on the basis of these 41 products and recommendations for applications. No brand other than those 42 named will be considered, unless the brand and type of paint proposed for 43 each item, together with sufficient data, substantiated by certified tests 44 conducted at no expense to the Owner, demonstrating equality to the paint(s) 45 named, is submitted in writing to the Engineer for review within 30 days after 46 the issuance of the Notice to Proceed. The type and number of tests 47 performed shall be subject to the Engineer's review. 48 PAINTING 09900 -2 CONFORMED 12/11/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B. All painting materials shall be delivered to the mixing room in unbroken 2 containers, bearing the manufacturer's brand, date of manufacturer, batch 3 number, and name. They shall be used without adulteration and mixed, 4 thinned, and applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions for the 5 applicable materials and surface. 6 7 C. Shop priming shall be done with primers that are guaranteed by the 8 manufacturer to be compatible with the finish paints to be used. 9 10 D. No paint containing lead will be allowed. Oil shall be pure boiled linseed oil. 11 12 E. Work areas will be designated by the Engineer for storage and mixing of all 13 painting materials. Materials shall be in full compliance with the requirements 14 of pertinent codes and fire regulations. Proper containers outside of the 15 buildings shall be provided and used for painting wastes, and no plumbing 16 fixture shall be used for this purpose. 17 18 F. All recommendations of the paint manufacturer in regard to the health and 19 safety of workmen shall be followed. 20 21 G. Where new painting is specified for surfaces with existing finishes, the 22 Contractor shall sample the existing coating(s) for compatibility with the 23 proposed new paint and notify the Engineer of any incompatibities found. 24 25 2.02 PAINTING SYSTEMS 26 27 A. Colors for pipe shall match that of existing connected piping. Colors for 28 structural steel shall match that of existing connected structural steel. 29 30 B. The following surfaces shall have the types of paint scheduled below applied 31 at the dry film thickness (D.F.T.) in mils per coat noted. Some of the painting 32 systems listed below may not be used in this project. Some colors will require 33 an additional coat beyond that listed below to obtain the proper color 34 coverage. 35 36 1. Non - submerged concrete and precast concrete walls and ceilings: 37 38 a. Tnemec 39 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (3.0 - 5.0 mils D.F.T.) 40 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (4.0 - 6.0 mils D.F.T.) 41 42 b. Carboline 43 1st Coat : Carboguard 890 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 44 2nd Coat : Carboguard 890 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 45 46 c. PPG /HPC 47 1st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils 48 D.F.T.) PAINTING 09900 -3 CONFORMED 12/11/14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2. Submerged Concrete 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) d. Sherwin Williams 1st Coat: Concrete and Masonry Primer 2nd Coat: Loxon Topcoat a. Tnemec 1St Coat: Tnemec Series N69 (3.0 — 5.0 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series N69 (4.0 — 6.0 mils D.F.T.) b. Carboline 1 Coat: Carboguard 691 (10.0 -14.0 mils D.F.T.) c. PPG /HPC 2 Coats: Pitt -Guard All Weather D -T -R Epoxy Coating 97- 946/949 Series. (5.0 -7.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) Sherwin Williams 1st Coat : Cor Cote FRE (80 -100 mils D.F.T 3. Interior Exposed Masonry (above grade and interior partitions) a. Tnemec 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 54 -660- (80 -100 sq. ft. per gal.) 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (4.0 — 6.0 mils D.F.T.) 3rd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (4.0 — 6.0 mils D.F.T.) b. Carboline 1 Coat: Sanitile 600 /600TG (60 -80 sq. ft. per gal.) 2 Coats: Sanitile 655 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) c. PPG /HPC 1 Coat: Aquapon Polyamide Epoxy Block Filler 97- 685/686 (40 to 80 sq. ft. per gal @ 12.0 -24.0 mils D.F.T.) 2 Coats: Aquapon High Build Semi -Gloss Polyamide Epoxy Coating 97 -130 Series. (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) d. Sherwin Williams 1st Coat: Concrete and Masonry Primer 2nd Coat: Loxon Topcoat 4. Interior and Exterior Exposed Masonry (Unpainted) PAINTING 09900 -4 CONFORMED 12/11/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 a. Tnemec 2 Regular CMU 3 2 Coats: Prime a Pell 200 @ 75 -100 SF /gallon /coat 4 Split face CMU 5 2 Coats: Prime a Pell Plus @ 65 -80 SF /gallon /coat 6 7 b. Carboline 8 CMU 9 1 Coat: Carbocrete Sealer WB @ 60 -80 SF /gallon 10 Split Face CMU 11 2 Coats: Carbocrete Sealer WB, 1st coat @ 40 -60 SF /gallon & 12 2nd coat @ 80 -120 SF /gallon 13 14 c. PPG /HPC 15 2 Coats: PPG /HPC Canyon Tone Stain Clear at 100 to 150 SF 16 per gallon. 17 18 5. Exterior Exposed Stuccoed Walls 19 20 a. Tnemec 21 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 180 smooth (4.0 — 6.0 mils D.F.T.) 22 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 180 smooth (4.0 —6.0 mils D.F.T.) 23 24 b. Carboline 25 1st Coat: Sanitile 100 (10.0 -12.0 mils D.F.T.) 26 2nd Coat: Sanitile 155 (2.0 -3.0 mils DFT) 27 3rd Coat: Sanitile 155 (2.0 -3.0 mils D.F.T.) - OPTIONAL 28 29 c. PPG /HPC 30 1st Coat Pitt-Flex Elastomeric Coating 4 -110 (5.5 -7.3 mils 31 D.F.T.) 32 2nd Coat Pitt-Flex Elastomeric Coating 4 -110 (5.5 -7.3 mils 33 D.F.T.) 34 35 6. Ferrous metals submerged or subject to splashing 36 37 a. Tnemec 38 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 104 -1211 High Solids Catalyzed Epoxy 39 Coating (3.0 -5.0 mils D.F.T.) 40 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 104 -Color High Solids Catalyzed Epoxy 41 Coating (8.0 — 10.0 mils D.F.T.) 42 43 b. Carboline 44 1 Coat: Carboguard 691 (10.0 -14.0 mils D.F.T.) 45 46 c. PPG /HPC 47 1 Coat: Pitt-Guard All Weather D -T -R Epoxy Coating 97- 48 946/949 Series. (5.0 -7.0 mils D.F.T per coat) PAINTING CONFORMED 09900 -5 12/11/14 1 1 Coat: Pitt-Guard All Weather D -T -R Epoxy Coating 97- 946/949 2 Series. (5.0 -7.0 mils D.F.T per coat) 3 4 d. Sherwin Williams 5 1st Coat: Cor -Cote HB 6.0 -9.0 mils (D.F.T.) 6 2nd Coat: Cor -Cote HB 6.0 -9.0 mils (D.F.T.) 7 8 7. Exterior non - submerged ferrous metals: 9 10 a. Tnemec 11 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (3.0 - 5.0 mils D.F.T.) 12 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (4.0 - 6.0 mils D.F.T.) 13 3rd Coat: Tnemec Series 1074 (2.5 - 4.5 mils D.F.T.) 14 15 b. Carboline 16 1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -5.0 mils D.F.T.) 17 2nd Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -5.0 mils D.F.T.) 18 3rd Coat : Carbothane 133HB (3.0 -4.0 mils D.F.T.) 19 20 c. PPG /HPC 21 1st Coat: Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94 -109 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 22 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils 23 D.F.T.) 24 3rd Coat: Pitthane HB Semi -Gloss Urethane 95 -8800 (2.0 -6.0 25 mils D.F.T.) 26 27 d. Sherwin Williams 28 1st Coat: Macropoxy 646 (3.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 29 2nd Coat: HiSolids Polyurethane (2.0 -4.0 mils (D.F.T.) 30 31 8. Interior non - submerged ferrous metals: 32 33 a. Tnemec 34 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Color (3.0 - 5.0 mils D.F.T.) 35 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Color (4.0 - 6.0 mils D.F.T.) 36 37 b. Carboline 38 1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -5.0 mils D.F.T.) 39 2nd Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -5.0 mils D.F.T.) 40 41 c. PPG /HPC 42 1st Coat: Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94 -109 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 43 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils 44 D.F.T.) 45 46 9. Exterior galvanized and non - ferrous metal: 47 48 a. Tnemec PAINTING 09900 -6 CONFORMED 12/11/14 1 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 2 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 1074 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 3 4 b. Carboline: 5 1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -4.0 mils D.F.T.) 6 2nd Coat : Carbothane 133HB (3.0 -4.0 mils D.F.T.) 7 8 c. PPG /HPC 9 1st Coat: Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94 -109 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 10 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils 11 D.F.T.) 12 3rd Coat: Pitthane HB Semi -Gloss Urethane 95 -8800 (2.0 -6.0 13 mils D.F.T.) 14 15 d. Sherwin Williams 16 1st Coat: Macropoxy 646 (2.5 -3.5 mils D.F.T.) 17 2nd Coat: H- Solids Polyurethane (2.5 -3.5 mills D.F.T.) 18 19 10. Interior galvanized and non - ferrous metals: 20 21 a. Tnemec 22 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Color (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 23 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Color (3.0 - 5.0 mils D.F.T.) 24 25 b. Carboline: 26 1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -4.0 mils D.F.T.) 27 2nd Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -5.0 mils D.F.T.) 28 29 c. PPG /HPC 30 1st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils 31 D.F.T.) 32 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils 33 D.F.T.) 34 35 11. Galvanized and non - ferrous metal submerged or subject to splashing: 36 37 a. Tnemec 38 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 39 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 40 41 b. Carboline 42 1 Coat: Carboguard 691 (10.0 -14.0 mils D.F.T.) 43 44 c. PPG /HPC 45 1st Coat: PPG Pitt-Guard All Weather D -T -R Epoxy Coating 97- 46 946/949 Series. (5.0 -7.0 mils D.F.T per coat) 47 2nd Coat: PPG Pitt-Guard All Weather D -T -R Epoxy Coating 97- 48 946/949 Series. (5.0 -7.0 mils D.F.T per coat) PAINTING CONFORMED 09900 -7 12/11/14 3rd Coat: PPG Pitt-Guard All Weather D -T -R Epoxy Coating 97- 946/949 Series. (5.0 -7.0 mils D.F.T per coat) 12. Metal surfaces exposed to temperatures above 250 °F: a. Tnemec 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 39- 1261(0.7 -1.5 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 39- 1261(0.7 - 1.5 mils D.F.T.) b. Carboline 1 Coat: Thermaline 450, up to 450 °F (8.0 -10.0 mils D.F.T.) or 1st Coat: Carbozinc 11 or 11 HS (2.0 -3.0 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat: Thermaline 4700, 400 - 1000 °F (2.0 mils D.F.T.) c. PPG /HPC 2 Coats: Speedhide Int/Ext Aluminum Paint 6 -230. (1.0 -1.3 mils D.F.T. per coat) 13. Insulated Pipe: a. Tnemec 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 6 (2.0 - 3.0 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 6 (2.0 - 3.0 mils D.F.T.) b. Carboline 2 Coats: Sanitile 155 (2.0 -3.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) c. PPG /HPC 2 Coats: PITT -TECH Interior /Exterior Satin DTM Industrial Enamels 90 -474 Series.(2.0 -3.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) 14. Aluminum in contact with dissimilar metals: a. Tnemec 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) b. Carboline 1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -4.0 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -4.0 mils D.F.T.) c. PPG /HPC 1st Coat: Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94 -109 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 15. Plastic Piping - Interior: PAINTING 09900 -8 CONFORMED 12/11/14 2 a. Tnemec I3 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 4 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 5 I 6 b. Carboline 7 1st Coat : Carbocrylic 120 (1.0 -2.0 mils D.F.T.) 8 2 Coats : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -4.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) I9 10 c. PPG /HPC 11 1st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 I 12 13 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 14 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) I 1 16 16. Plastic Piping - Exterior 17 I 18 19 a. Tnemec 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 73 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 20 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 73 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 22 22 b. Carboline 23 1st Coat : Carbocrylic 120 (1.0 -2.0 mils D.F.T.) 24 2 Coats : Carbothane 133HB (3.0 -4.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) 1 25 26 c. PPG /HPC 27 1st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 I28 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 29 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 30 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) ' 31 3rd Coat: Pitthane HB Semi -Gloss Urethane 95 -8800 32 (2.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 33 I 35 34 d. Sherwin Williams 1st Coat: Hi- Solids Polyurethane (2.5 -3.5 mils D.F.T) 36 2nd Coat: Hi- Solids Polyurethane (2.5 -3.5 mils D.F.T) I 37 38 17. Interior Drywall and Plaster - Industrial Areas 39 I 40 41 a. Tnemec 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 51 -792 (1.0 - 1.5 mils D.F.T.) 42 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) I 44 43 3rd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 45 b. Carboline I 46 1st Coat : Carbocrylic 120 (1.0 -2.0 mils D.F.T.) 47 2nd Coat : Sanitile 655 (4.0 -5.0 mils DFT) 48 3rd Coat : Sanitile 655 (4.0 -5.0 mils D.F.T.) I PAINTING 09900 -9 CONFORMED 12/11/14 c. PPG /HPC 1st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 18. Interior Drywall and Plaster -Office Areas a. Tnemec 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 51 -792 (1.0 —1.5 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 6 (2.0 — 3.0 mils D.F.T.) 3rd Coat: Tnemec Series 6 (2.0 — 3.0 mils D.F.T.) b. Carboline 1st Coat : Carbocrylic 120 (1.0 -2.0 mils D.F.T.) 2 Coats: Sanitile 155 (2.0 -3.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) c. PPG /HPC 1st Coat: Speedhide Interior Latex Primer /Sealer 6 -2 (1 mil DFT) 2 Coats: Speedhide Int Latex Eggshell 6 -411 (2 mils D.F.T. per coat) 19. Interior Concrete Floors a. Tnemec 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 201 (5.0 — 7.0 mils D.F.T >) 2nd Coat: Tenemec Series 280 (8.0 — 10.0 mils D.F.T.) Note: Apply 50 — 70 mesh silica sand at 5 lbs. per 150 sq. ft. between 1st and 2nd coat to provide non -slip surface. b. Carboline 1st Coat: Carboguard 1340 (1.0 -2.0 mils D.F.T.) 2 Coats: Carboguard 890 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) Note: Utilize 40 -60 mesh silica sand to provide non -slip surface. Consult with Carboline for application details. c. PPG /HPC 1st Coat: Megaseal High Solids Primer 99 -6639 (5.0 — 7.0 mils D.F.T) 2nd Coat: Megaseal Self- Leveling Epoxy 99 -6680 (10.0 -12.0 mils D.F.T.) 20. Concrete in highly Corrosive Environment Special Coating PAINTING 09900 -10 CONFORMED 12/11/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 a. Tnemec 3 1St Coat: Tnemec Series 434 Perma - Shield H2S 4 (125 mils D.F.T.) 5 2 "d Coat: Tnemec Series 435 Perma -Glaze 6 (12.0 -15.0 mils D.F.T.) 7 8 b. Carboline 9 1St Coat: Plasite 5371 (125 mils) 10 2nd Coat: Plasite 4500S (12.0 -15.0 mils D.F.T.) 11 12 c. PPG /HPC /Polyspec (Concrete Headworks) 13 1St Coat: 300EX Epoxy Primer 14 2nd Coat: TuffRez 240 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Liner 15 (100 mils) 16 3rd Coat: TuffRez 240 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Liner 17 (100 mils) 18 19 d. PPG /HPC /Polyspec (Wet wells /Lift Stations -Force & Gravity 20 Mains) 21 1st Coat: 300EX Epoxy Primer 22 2nd Coat: TuffRez 240 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Liner 23 (100 mils) 24 3rd Coat: TuffRez 240 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Liner 25 (100 mils) 26 27 e. PPG /HPC /Enviroline (Concrete Headworks) 28 1st Coat #54 High Solids Epoxy Primer (3 -5 mils DFT), 29 2nd Coat #224 100% Solids Epoxy Novolac 30 (20 -40 mils DFT) 31 3rd Coat #224 100% Solids Epoxy Novolac 32 (20 -40 mils DFT) 33 34 f. PPG /HPC /Enviroline (Manholes /Lift Stations -Force & Gravity 35 Mains) 36 1st Coat #54 High Solids Epoxy Primer (3 -5 mils DFT) 37 2nd Coat #224 100% Solids Epoxy Novolac (20 -40 mils DFT) 38 3rd Coat #224 100% Solids Epoxy Novolac (20 -40 mils DFT) 39 40 g. Sherwin Williams 41 1st Coat: CorCote FRE (80 -100 mils D.F.T) 42 43 21. Metals submerged or subject to splashing in highly Corrosive 44 Environment Special Coating 45 46 a. Tnemec 47 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 435 Perma - Shield H2S (30 mils D.F.T.) 48 PAINTING 09900 -11 CONFORMED 12/11/14 1 b. Carboline 2 1 Coat: Plasite 4500S (35.0 -40.0 mils D.F.T.) 3 4 c. PPG /HPC /Polyspec 5 6 d. Sherwin Williams 7 1st Coat: Cor Cote HB (6.0 -9.0 mils D.F.T) 8 2nd Coat: Cor Cote HB (6.0 -9.0 mils D.F.T) 9 10 22. Secondary Containment Concrete 12.5% Sodium Hypochlorite 11 12 a. Tnemec 13 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 61 -5002 Tenemeliner 14 (8.0 -10.0 mils D.F.T.) 15 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 61 -5001 Tenemeliner 16 (8.0 -10.0 mils D.F.T.) 17 18 b. Carboline 19 1st Coat: Semstone 800 primer 20 Finish Coats: Semstone 870 21 (reference Semstone 870 application spec for installation details) 22 23 23. Buried Pipe Appurtenances (Coal Tar Epoxy / Bitumastic Coating) 24 25 a. Tnemec 26 1st Coat Tnemec Series 46H -413 Tneme -Tar 27 (14.0 -20.0 mils D.F.T) 28 2nd Coat Tnemec Series 46H -413 Tneme -Tar 29 (14.0 -20.0 mils D.F.T) 30 31 b. Carboline 32 1st Coat Carboline Bitumastic 300M (14.0 -20.0 mils D.F.T) 33 2nd Coat Carboline Bitumastic 300M (14.0 -20.0 mils D.F.T) 34 35 c. Sherwin Williams 36 1st Coat: Tar -Guard (16 -20 mils D.F.T) 37 2nd Coat: Tar -Guard (16 -20 mils D.F.T) 38 39 C. Any surfaces not specifically named in the Schedule and not specifically 40 excepted shall be prepared, primed and painted in the manner and with 41 materials consistent with these Specifications. The Engineer shall select 42 which of the manufacturer's products, whether the type is indicated herein or 43 not, shall be used for such unnamed surfaces. No extra payment shall be 44 made for this painting. 45 46 2.03 COLOR CODING FOR PIPES AND EQUIPMENT 47 PAINTING 09900 -12 CONFORMED 12/11/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A. Color coding shall consist of color code painting and identification of all 2 exposed conduits, through items and pipelines for the transport of gases, 3 liquid and semi - liquids including all accessories such as valves, insulated pipe 4 coverings, fittings, junction boxes, bus bars, connectors and all operating 5 accessories that are integral to be whole functional mechanical pipe and 6 electrical conduit system. Colors shall be as noted in the Paint and Color 7 Coding Schedules attached at the end of this Section. 8 9 B. All hangers and pipe support floor stands shall be painted the same color and 10 with the same paint as the pipe it supports. The system shall be painted up to, 11 but not including, the flanges attached to the mechanical equipment nor the 12 flexible conduit connected to electrical motors. When more than one pipe 13 system is supported on the same bracket, the bracket shall be painted the 14 same color as the adjacent wall or ceiling. Colors shall be as noted in the 15 Paint and Color Coding Schedule. 16 17 C. All systems which are an integral part of the equipment, that is originating from 18 the equipment and returning to the same piece of equipment, shall be painted 19 between and up to, but not including, the fixed flanges or connections on the 20 equipment. 21 22 2.04 LETTERING OF TITLES 23 24 A. Each pipe system shall be labeled with the name of the materials in each 25 pipeline and alongside this an arrow indicating the direction of flow of liquids. 26 Titles shall be as so described in attached schedule. Titles shall not be 27 located more than twenty (20) linear feet apart and shall also appear directly 28 adjacent to each side of any wall the pipeline breaches, adjacent to each side 29 of the valve regulator, flowcheck, strainer clean -out, and all pieces of 30 equipment. 31 32 B. Titles shall identify the contents by complete name. Identification title 33 locations shall be determined by the Engineer but, in general, they shall be 34 placed where the view is unobstructed and on the two lower quarters of pipe 35 or covering where they are overhead. Title should be clearly visible from 36 operating positions especially those adjacent to control valves. 37 38 C. Titles on equipment shall be applied at eye level on machines, where possible, 39 or at the uppermost broad vertical surface of low equipment. Where more 40 than one piece of the equipment item to be titled exists, the items shall be 41 numbered consecutively, as indicated on the mechanical drawings, or as 42 directed by the Engineer; for example Pump No. 1, Pump No. 2, etc. Titles 43 shall be composed and justified on the left hand side as follows: Pump No. 1. 44 45 D. Application of titles. 46 47 1. The color of the titles shall be black or white to best contrast with the 48 color of the pipes and equipment and shall be stencil applied. PAINTING 09900 -13 CONFORMED 12/11/14 1 2 2. Stencil text is to be in ALL CAPS worded exactly as shown in the 3 Schedule. Titles are to be printed in a single line. 4 5 3. Letter sizes. 6 7 Outside Diameter 8 of Pipe or Size of Legend 9 Covering (inches) Letters (inches) 10 11 3/4 to 1-1/4 1/2 12 1 -1/2 to 2 3/4 13 2 -1/2 to 6 1 -1/4 14 8 to 10 2-1/2 15 More than 10 3-1/2 16 17 Equipment titles are to be two inches high. 18 19 4. Arrow sizes. Where "a" is equal to 3/4 of outside diameter of pipe or 20 covering, the arrow shaft shall be 2 "a" long by 3/8 "a" wide. The arrow 21 head shall be an equilateral triangle with sides equal to "a." Maximum 22 "a" dimension shall be 6 inches. 23 24 5. When using direction arrows, point arrowhead away from pipe markers 25 and in direction of flow. If flow can be in both directions, use a 26 double- headed directional flow. 27 28 2.05 FABRICATED EQUIPMENT 29 30 A. Unless otherwise indicated, all fabricated equipment shall be shop primed and 31 shop or field finished. 32 33 B. All items to be shop primed shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose material 34 prior to priming. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, any prime coating shall 35 have been improperly applied or if material contrary to these Specifications 36 shall have been used, that coating shall be removed by sandblasting to white 37 metal and re- primed in accordance with these Specifications. 38 39 C. All shop prime coats shall be of the correct materials and applied in 40 accordance with these Specifications. Remove any prime coats not in 41 accordance with these Specifications by sandblasting and apply the specified 42 prime coat at no additional cost to the Owner. 43 44 D. Shop primed surfaces shall be cleaned thoroughly and damaged or bare spots 45 retouched with the specified primer before the application of successive paint 46 coats in the field. 47 PAINTING CONFORMED 09900 -14 12/11/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 E. Be responsible for and take whatever steps are necessary to properly protect 2 the shop prime and finish coats against damage from weather or any other 3 cause. 4 5 F. A shop finish coat shall be equal in appearance and protection quality to a 6 field applied finish coat. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, a shop finish coat 7 does not give the appearance and protection quality of other work of similar 8 nature, prepare the surfaces and apply the coat or coats of paint, as directed 9 by the Engineer, to accomplish the desired appearance and protection quality. 10 Submit to the Engineer sufficient evidence that the standard finish is 11 compatible with the specified finish coat. 12 13 G. Wherever fabricated equipment is required to be sandblasted, protect all 14 motors, drives, bearings, gears, etc., from the entry of grit. Any equipment 15 found to contain grit shall be promptly and thoroughly cleaned. 16 17 PART 3 — EXECUTION 18 19 3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES 20 21 A. All surfaces to be painted shall be prepared, as specified herein or in Section 22 09865, and shall be dry and clean before painting. Special care shall be given 23 to thoroughly clean interior concrete and concrete block surfaces of all marks 24 before application of finish. 25 26 B. All metal welds, blisters, etc., shall be ground and sanded smooth in 27 accordance with SSPC -SP -3 or in difficult and otherwise inaccessible areas by 28 hand cleaning in accordance with SSPC -SP -2. All pits and dents shall be 29 filled and all imperfections shall be corrected so as to provide a smooth 30 surface for painting. All rust, loose scale, oil, grease and dirt shall be removed 31 by use of solvents, wire brushing or sanding. 32 33 C. Concrete surfaces shall be finished as specified in Division 3. Report 34 unsatisfactory surface conditions to the Engineer. Concrete shall be free of 35 dust, oil, curing compounds, and other foreign matter. Concrete surfaces shall 36 have any Iaitance or weak layers removed prior to install of coatings or linings 37 using captive shot blasting systems. Concrete shall have a minimum surface 38 tensile strength of at least 300 PSI per ASTM D -4541 standard. Testing is 39 required to confirm this strength using ASTM D -4541 standard and methods. 40 Surface profile shall be CSP -3 to CSP -6 meeting ICRI (International Concrete 41 Repair Institute) standard guideline #03732 for Coating, Concrete, producing 42 an anchor profile equal to 60 -grit sandpaper or coarser. Prepare concrete 43 surfaces by mechanical (captive shot blast) means to achieve this desired 44 profile. Moisture Vapor Transmission should be 3 pounds or Tess per 1,000 45 square feet over 24 hour timeframe as confirmed through a calcium chloride 46 test as per ASTM E -1907. Quantitative relative humidity (RH) testing, ASTM 47 F -2170, should confirm concrete RH results < 75 %. Application of coatings 48 and linings should be made when out gassing of concrete is declining during PAINTING 09900 -15 CONFORMED 12/11/14 1 periods when surface temperatures of the concrete is falling. Use of a surface 2 thermometer to determine when surface temperatures are falling is required. 3 When in doubt, double priming may be required. All surface irregularities, 4 cracks, expansion joints and control joints should be properly addressed prior 5 to application of coatings and linings. Remove all contaminates and 6 contaminated surface layers prior to application of coatings and linings. 7 8 D. Concrete block surface shall be smooth and cleaned of all dust, efflorescence, 9 chalk, loose mortar, dirt, grease, oil, tar and other foreign matter. 10 11 E. All plastic pipe surfaces shall be lightly sanded before painting. 12 13 F. Wood surfaces shall be dry. Sand to obtain a smooth surface. All 14 encrustations shall be removed. 15 16 G. Exposed Pipe: Bituminous coated pipe shall not be used in exposed 17 locations. Pipe that will be exposed after project completion shall be primed in 18 accordance with the requirements herein. Any bituminous coated pipe that is 19 inadvertently installed in exposed locations shall be sandblasted clean before 20 priming and painting. After installation all exterior, exposed flanged joints shall 21 have the gap between adjoining flanges sealed with a single component 22 polysulfide sealant to prevent rust stains. 23 24 H. Primed or Previously Painted Surfaces and Nonferrous Surfaces: All coated 25 surfaces shall be cleaned prior to application of successive coats. All 26 nonferrous metals not to be coated shall be cleaned. This cleaning shall be 27 done in accordance with SSPC -SP -1, Solvent Cleaning. 28 29 I. Shop- Finished Surfaces: All shop- coated surfaces shall be protected from 30 damage and corrosion before and after installation by treating damaged areas 31 immediately upon detection. Abraded or corroded spots on shop- coated 32 surfaces shall be "Hand Cleaned" and then touched up with the same 33 materials as the shop coat. All shop coated surfaces which are faded, 34 discolored, or which require more than minor touch -up, in the opinion of the 35 Engineer, shall receive new surface preparation before being repainted. Cut 36 edges of galvanized sheets and exposed threads, and cut ends of galvanized 37 piping, electrical conduit and metal pipe sleeves, that are not to be finished 38 painted, shall be "Solvent Cleaned" and primed with zinc dust -zinc oxide metal 39 primer. 40 41 J. Galvanized and Zinc - Copper Alloy Surfaces: These surfaces to be painted 42 shall be "Solvent Cleaned" and treated as hereinafter specified. Such 43 surfaces not to be painted shall be "Solvent Cleaned." Brush off blasting per 44 SSPC -SP7 galvanized surfaces to insure optimum coating adhesion. 45 46 K. Aluminum embedded or in contact with concrete must be painted with one 47 shop coat of zinc chromate followed by one heavy coat of aluminum PAINTING 09900 -16 CONFORMED 12/11/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 pigmented asphalt paint. Brush off blasting per SSPC -SP7 of galvanized 2 surfaces to insure optimum coating adhesion. 3 4 3.02 WORKMANSHIP 5 6 A. General: 7 8 1 Primer (spot) and paint used for a particular surface shall, in general, be 9 as scheduled for that type of new surface. Confirm with the paint 10 manufacturer that the paint proposed for a particular repaint condition 11 will be compatible with the existing painted surface. Sample repainted 12 areas on the actual site will be required to insure this compatibility. 13 Finished repainted areas shall be covered by the same guarantee 14 specified for remainder of work. 15 16 2. At the request of the Engineer, samples of the finished work prepared in 17 strict accordance with these Specifications shall be furnished and all 18 painting shall be equal in quality to the samples. Finished areas shall 19 be adequate for the purpose of determining the quality of workmanship. 20 Experimentation with color tints shall be furnished to the satisfaction of 21 the Engineer where standard chart colors are not satisfactory. 22 23 3. Protection of furniture and other movable objects, equipment, fittings 24 and accessories shall be provided throughout the painting operations. 25 Canopies of lighting fixtures shall be loosened and removed from 26 contact with surface, covered and protected and reset upon completion. 27 Remove all electric plates, surface hardware, etc., before painting, 28 protect and replace when completed. Mask all machinery name plates 29 and all machined parts not receiving a paint finish. Dripped or 30 spattered paint shall be promptly removed. Lay drop cloths in all areas 31 where painting is being done to adequately protect flooring and other 32 work from all damage during the operation and until the finished job is 33 accepted. 34 35 4. On metal surfaces apply each coat of paint at the rate specified by the 36 manufacturer to achieve the minimum dry mil thickness required. If 37 material has thickened or must be diluted for application by spray gun, 38 the coating shall be built up to the same film thickness achieved with 39 undiluted material. One gallon of paint as originally furnished by the 40 manufacturer shall not cover a greater area when applied by spray gun 41 than when applied unthinned by brush. Deficiencies in film thickness 42 shall be corrected by the application of an additional coat(s). On 43 masonry, application rates will vary according to surface texture, 44 however, in no case shall the manufacturer's stated coverage rate be 45 exceeded. On porous surfaces, it shall be the painter's responsibility to 46 achieve a protective and decorative finish either by decreasing the 47 coverage rate or by applying additional coats of paint. 48 PAINTING 09900 -17 CONFORMED 12/11/14 1 5. Paints shall be mixed in proper containers of adequate capacity. All 2 paints shall be thoroughly stirred before use and shall be kept stirred 3 while using. No unauthorized thinners or other materials shall be added 4 to any paint. 5 6 6. Only skilled painters shall be used on the work and specialists shall be 7 employed where required. 8 9 B. Field Priming: 10 11 1. Steel members, metal castings, mechanical and electrical equipment 12 and other metals that are shop primed before delivery at the site will not 13 require a prime coat on the job. All piping and other bare metals to be 14 painted shall receive one coat of primer before exposure to the 15 weather, and this prime coat shall be the first coat as specified in the 16 painting schedule. 17 18 2. Equipment which is customarily shipped with a baked -on enamel finish 19 or with a standard factory finish shall normally be field painted unless 20 the prefinished equipment is specifically color selected and unless the 21 finish has not been damaged in transit or during installation. Surfaces 22 that have been shop painted and have been damaged, or where the 23 shop coats or coats of paint have deteriorated, shall be properly 24 cleaned and retouched before any successive painting is done on them 25 in the field. All such field painting shall match as nearly as possible the 26 original finish. 27 28 C. Field Painting: 29 30 1. All painting at the site shall be designated as Field Painting. 31 32 2. All paint shall be at room temperature before applying, and no painting 33 shall be done when the temperature is below 50 °F, in dust -laden air, 34 when rain or snow is falling, or until all traces of moisture have 35 completely disappeared from the surface to be painted. 36 37 3. Successive coats of paint shall be tinted so as to make each coat easily 38 distinguishable from each other with the final undercoat tinted to the 39 approximate shade of the finished coat. 40 41 4. Finish surfaces shall not show brush marks or other irregularities. 42 Undercoats shall be thoroughly and uniformly sanded with No. 00 43 sandpaper or equal to remove defects and provide a smooth even 44 surface. Top and bottom edges of doors shall be painted and all 45 exterior trim shall be back - primed before installation. 46 47 5. Painting shall be continuous and shall be accomplished in an orderly 48 manner so as to facilitate inspection. All exterior concrete and masonry PAINTING 09900 -18 CONFORMED 12/11/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 paint shall be performed at one continuous manner structure by 2 structure. Materials subject to weathering shall be prime coated as 3 quickly as possible. Surfaces of exposed members that will be 4 inaccessible after erection shall be cleaned and painted before erection. 5 6 6. All materials shall be brush painted unless spray painting is specifically 7 directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for all 8 damage caused by overspray or drifting. 9 10 7. All surfaces to be painted, as well as the atmosphere in which painting 11 is to be done, shall be kept warm and dry by heating and ventilation, if 12 necessary, until each coat of paint has hardened. Any defective paint 13 shall be scraped off and repainted in accordance with the Engineer's 14 directions. 15 16 8. Before final acceptance of the work, all damaged surfaces of paint shall 17 be cleaned and repainted as directed by the Engineer. 18 19 9. Any pipe scheduled to be painted and having received a coating of a tar 20 or asphalt- compound shall be painted with two coats of PPG /HPC 21 PITT- GUARD® Epoxy Penetrating Sealer 95 -2328 or equal before 22 successive coats are applied per the schedule. Tnemec recommends 23 using 66 Hi -Build Epoxoline over tar, but a test patch must be run 24 initially to test the paint's compatibility with the tar. Carboline does not 25 recommend application of their coatings over tar. Instead, Carboline 26 recommends removal of the tar followed by the application of suitable 27 coatings based on the substrate and intended service application. 28 29 3.03 CLEANUP 30 31 A. The premises shall at all times be kept free from accumulation of waste 32 material and rubbish caused by employees or work. At the completion of the 33 painting remove all tools, scaffolding, surplus materials, and all rubbish from 34 and about the buildings and leave work "broom clean" unless more exactly 35 specified. 36 37 B. Upon completion, remove all paint where it has been spilled, splashed or 38 splattered on all surfaces, including floors, fixtures, equipment, furniture, etc., 39 leaving the work ready for inspection. 40 41 C. All cloths and waste that might constitute a fire hazard shall be placed in 42 closed metal containers or destroyed at the end of each day. Upon 43 completion of the work, the entire job left clean and acceptable to the 44 Engineer. 45 46 3.04 INSPECTION, TESTING EQUIPMENT AND PROCEDURES 47 48 A. Inspection PAINTING 09900 -19 CONFORMED 12/11/14 1 2 1. All phases of the work are subject to inspection by the Engineer to 3 assure proper performance and compliance with the specifications. 4 5 2. The Engineer shall be advised of the proper time to inspect surface 6 preparation, prime coat and each succeeding coat. The Contractor 7 shall apply additional coats only after the previous coat has been 8 observed by the Engineer or Owner's representative. 9 10 B. Testing 11 12 1. The Contractor shall have on the project site the following testing 13 equipment. Equipment shall be in calibration and proper working order. 14 Equipment shall be used in accordance with the manufacturers' 15 instructions or as directed by the Engineer. 16 17 Sling Psychrometer: Relative humidity and dew point readings shall be 18 taken at intervals throughout the days work. Readings shall be taken at 19 the start of the mornings work, mid day and afternoon. Should 20 environmental conditions change, additional reading shall be taken to 21 assure that coatings are being applied under the conditions as outlined 22 by the coatings manufacturer. 23 24 Surface Temperature Thermometer: Surface temperatures shall be 25 taken in areas where work is being performed. Surface temperature 26 shall be that as specified by the coatings manufacturer. 27 28 Replica Tape & Micrometer: Testex X- Course Replica Tape shall be 29 employed to determine the surface profile of blasted surfaces. Surface 30 profile shall be as specified. 31 32 Dry Film Thickness Measurements: Dry film thickness reading shall be 33 taken with a properly calibrated (per the manufacturer's instructions) 34 Type 1 (magnetic) or Type 2 (electromagnetic) instrument. Dry film 35 thickness reading will be taken and recorded in the in a frequency and 36 manner as dictated by the Engineer. 37 38 Holiday Detection: After completion of immersion coating systems on 39 steel surfaces, all surfaces shall be holiday detected in accordance with 40 ASTM G 62 low voltage holiday detection. Holiday detector shall be a 41 Tinker & Rasor Model M -1 or equal. Areas found to have holidays shall 42 be marked and repaired in accordance with the paint manufacturer's 43 instructions. The Engineer shall be notified of time of testing so that he 44 might be present to witness testing. The Contractor shall provide 45 ladders, rigging, etc. as necessary to allow the Engineer to spot check 46 paint thickness of each coat. 47 48 PAINTING 09900 -20 CONFORMED 12/11/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3.05 PAINT 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 A. General Notes & Guidelines: 1. All color numbers and names herein refer to the master color card. Colors of specified equal manufacturers shall be submitted for review to the Engineer. 2. Pipe lines, equipment, or other items which are not listed here shall be assigned a color by the Engineer and shall be treated as an integral part of the Contract. 3. When color coding is specified or directed by the Engineer, it shall consist of color code painting and identification of all exposed conduits, through lines and pipelines for the transport of gases, liquids or semi - liquids, including all accessories such as valves, insulated pipe coverings, fittings, junction boxes, bus bars, connectors and any operating accessories which are integral to a whole functional mechanical pipe and electrical conduit systems. 4. The colors of the Finish Schedule shall be interpreted as follows: COLORS White Ivory Red L. Green Green D. Green COLORS L. Brown Brown Bronze L. Gray M. Gray D. Gray TNEMEC # 11WH 01 BR 06SF 52GN 09SF 08S F TNEMEC # 06BR 84BR 86BR 31GR 33GR 34GR COLORS Tank Blue Blue D. Blue L. Blue Aqua COLORS Inter. Orange Orange Tan Yellow Safety Yellow TNEMEC # 25BL 11SF 78BL 26BL 1 OGN TNEMEC # 05SF 04S F 04BR 03SF 02SF 5. All moving parts, drive assemblies, and covers for moving parts which are potential hazards, shall be Safety Orange 04SF. 6. All safety equipment shall be painted in accordance with OSHA standards. 7. All in -line equipment and appurtenances not assigned another color shall be painted the same base color as the piping. The pipe system shall be painted with the pipe color up to, but not including, the flanges attached to pumps and mechanical equipment assigned another color. PAINTING 09900 -21 CONFORMED 12/11/14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 Tanks shall be painted the color of the piping system that they serve, unless the tank is fiberglass or polyethylene. 8. All conduits shall be painted to match its background surface. 9. Building surface colors shall be painted, as scheduled in the Finish Schedule, or as selected by the Engineer. 10. Control panels shall be factory finished. 3.06 GUARANTEE AND ANNIVERSARY INSPECTION A. All work shall be warranted for a period of one year from date of acceptance of the project. B. The Owner will notify the Contractor at least 30 days prior to the anniversary date and shall establish a date for the inspection. Any defects in the coating system shall be repaired by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. Should a failure occur to 25% of the painted surface, either interior or exterior, the entire surface shall be cleaned and painted in accordance with these specifications. 3.07 PAINT AND COLOR CODING SCHEDULE Piping and Legend Backwash Waste Blower Air Coagulant Compressed Air Drains Fuel Potable Water Process Sample Reclaimed Effluent Return Activated Sludge Sodium Hypochlorite Sprinkler Thickened Sludge Wastewater Waste Activated Sludge Color Bands Light Brown Green Orange Aqua Dark Green Red Black. Red White Dark Blue Light Grey Red Pantone Purple 522C Brown Yellow Red Dark Brown Orange Dark Gray White Equipment and Building Exterior Equipment, Valves, Gates, Fans Interior Equipment and Pumps (including factory finished) Structural Steel (Interior) Ceiling Cranes and Hoists Ductwork PAINTING 09900 -22 Match Color Match System Match System White White Yellow Surface Mounted CONFORMED 12/11/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Interior Air Handling and Ventilation Equipment Match Surface Mounted 2 Valve and Gate Operators Match System 3 Electrical Conduit and Junction Boxes Match Surface Mounted 4 Submerged Concrete Black 5 6 3.08 PAINT SCHEDULE 7 8 A. All new equipment shall be painted to match the color of the existing 9 equipment being replaced. 10 11 B. All new piping, valves, and supports shall be painted to match the color of the 12 existing equipment piping valves, and supports being replaced. 13 14 C. Painting described by additive alternate items shall match the color of the 15 existing items. 16 17 D. The underdrain frames, and gullet covers of each filter cell shall be coated with 18 a Tnemec Polyurethane Lining System (or equal) as described herein. The 19 underdrain vent piping and the low pressure air supply piping inside the filter 20 shall not be painted: 21 22 1. Steel Surface Preparation 23 24 Remove all rust, and rust stain by Near White Blast Cleaning (SSPC- 25 SP10). Prime as soon as possible the same day with Tnemec Series 26 20 or Series 66 @ 4.0 -6.0 mils DFT. Two coats are required for steel 27 that is not to be topcoated with Series 406. 28 29 2. Polyurethane Lining System Coating 30 31 Finish: Tnemec Series 406 Elasto - Shield @ 75.0 -100.0 mils DFT 32 33 34 E. Other items to be painted are as noted on the drawings and /or in the 35 Specifications. 36 37 38 39 END OF SECTION 40 PAINTING 09900 -23 CONFORMED 12/11/14 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PAINTING 09900 -24 CONFORMED 12/11/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 11366 2 3 RAPID SAND FILTERS 4 5 PART 1- GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals 10 required to rehabilitate six (6) existing rapid sand filter cells as shown on the 11 Drawings and specified herein. 12 13 B. The Work involves rehabilitating six (6) existing shallow bed single media 14 filters in a functioning (in- service) wastewater treatment plant and includes 15 removing and disposing of filter media (sand), disassembling, rehabilitating 16 existing filter components, replacing filter components, re- assembling, 17 installing new media, field testing, complete and ready for operation. 18 19 C. The Owner has negotiated a scope of supply, fee (price) and terms and 20 conditions for the furnishing and delivery of replacement filter equipment and 21 other services with Evoqua Water Technologies (Evoqua). A copy of the 22 Evoqua proposal is included herewith. The Contractor shall be responsible for 23 the furnishing of all materials, labor, tools, equipment, accessories and all 24 other work required to properly perform the work described herein that is not 25 included in the Evoqua proposal. In addition, the Contractor shall be 26 responsible for coordinating with Evoqua as required for the proper completion 27 of the work required under this project. 28 29 D. Only one (1) of the six (6) filter cells may be taken out of service for 30 rehabilitation at any one time. All work on the cell being rehabilitated must be 31 completed and associated testing must be satisfactorily conducted before the 32 next filter cell can be taken out of service for rehabilitation. 33 34 E. Cell #4 shall be rehabilitated first, followed by Cell #5. The remaining cells can 35 be rehabilitated in any order preferred by the Contractor. The influent pipe to 36 Cell #5 shall be replaced while Cell #5 is being rehabilitated. 37 38 F. Each filter cell contains six (6) steel underdrain frames and gullet covers that 39 are not to be replaced. The frames and gullet covers shall be cleaned, 40 inspected, painted, and reused. The clips that hold the core assembly 41 components to the frame shall be replaced as directed by the Engineer and 42 paid for at the unit price bid in the Proposal. 43 44 G. These Specifications are intended to give a general description of the work 45 required, but do not cover all details. It is, however, intended to cover the 46 furnishing, the shop testing, the delivery, installation and field testing of all 47 materials, equipment and appurtenances required for the complete RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366 -1 10/16/14 1 rehabilitation of the existing filter system as shown on the Drawings or herein 2 specified, whether specifically mentioned in these Specifications or not. 3 4 H. The rehabilitation work inside each filter cell and in the pipe gallery shall be 5 conducted simultaneously with work on the new filter control panel and the 6 new PLC. Each filter that has not been rehabilitated shall continue to be 7 operated using the existing PLC and the existing PLC program. After a filter is 8 rehabilitated, it shall be operated using the new filter control panel and the 9 new PLC program. 10 11 I. Prior to rehabilitation work in any of the cells, the Contractor shall establish the 12 working elevations of all existing inlet and backwash weirs in each filter cell, 13 and all level control floats. This information shall be submitted to the 14 Engineer. 15 16 J. Prior to filter cell disassembly and before ordering equipment and before 17 submitting shop drawings, the Contractor shall enter each filter cell and 18 physically measure the distance between the concrete walls at either end of 19 the filter troughs and the location of the trough support stands relative to these 20 walls. The replacement trough sections shall be manufactured to the length 21 necessary to fit between the existing concrete walls and supported at the 22 location of the existing trough stands, which are mounted between the existing 23 frames and are not to be relocated. All dimensions shall be coordinated with 24 the manufacturer and shown on the shop drawings to ensure fabrication and 25 installation of troughs of the correct length. Modification of the troughs in the 26 field after delivery will not be permitted. 27 28 K. New valves and actuators are to be furnished and installed for each filter, 29 some on an additive alternate basis. As previously indicated, the Contractor 30 will be allowed to take only one filter out of service at any one time. This 31 requirement will necessitate that all valves associated with a particular filter be 32 replaced /installed while that filter is out of service for rehabilitation. 33 34 L. Replacing the backwash pump discharge valves and the washwater supply 35 valves to each filter necessitates disassembly of some portion of the 36 washwater piping, which prevents the backwashing of other filters. To allow 37 other filters to be backwashed, the Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner 38 in scheduling the replacement of the backwash pump discharge valves and 39 the filter washwater valves. Replacement of any one of these valves shall not 40 exceed 8 hours in a 24 -hour time period in order that other filters can be 41 backwashed. If a backwash pump discharge valve or a filter washwater valve 42 cannot be replaced in an 8 hour period, the Contractor shall install blind 43 flanges and pipe restraints as necessary to place the backwash system back 44 in service to enable the other filters to be washed. 45 46 M. The influent pipe to filter cell #5 shall be replaced while cell #5 is being 47 rehabilitated or when there are no other filter cells out of service RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366 -2 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS 3 4 A. The existing filters cells are 12 x 30 Hydro Clear Rapid Sand Filters as 5 originally manufactured by Zimpro /Passavant, Inc. These filters were installed 6 and became operational on or about 1990. The company is presently owned 7 by Evoqua Water Technologies (Evoqua). 8 9 C. The filters share a common influent channel and utilize conventional downflow 10 technology and upflow for filter washing. Filtered water is collected in a 11 common clearwell that also serves as the source for washwater. Spent 12 washwater (waste washwater) is collected in a common mudwell and returned 13 to the treatment plant by gravity. 14 15 D. The filters are controlled automatically by an existing PLC or manually by the 16 plant operators from existing control consoles. The filter system uses 17 pneumatically operated butterfly valves to control flow. Similar valves are also 18 used for a low pressure air scour of the filter surface. 19 20 1.03 REFERENCES 21 22 A. Design, manufacturing and assembly of elements of the equipment herein 23 specified shall be in accordance with the standards of the below listed 24 organizations, except as otherwise shown or specified. Where reference is 25 made to a standard of one of these or other organizations the version of the 26 standard in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 27 28 1. NSF - Standard 61 - Drinking Water Systems Components - Health 29 Effects. 30 2. AWWA B100 Water Treatment Filtering Material latest edition. 31 32 1.04 SUBMITTALS 33 34 A. Copies of all materials required to establish compliance with the specifications 35 shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of the Contract 36 Documents. Submittals shall, at a minimum, include the following: 37 38 1. Certified shop and erection drawings showing all important details of 39 construction, dimensions and anchor bolt locations. 40 2. Descriptive literature, bulletins and /or catalogs of the equipment. 41 3. A complete, total bill of materials for all equipment with the O&M 42 manual. 43 4. A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts with the 44 manufacturer's current price for each item. 45 46 B. Filter media submittals shall include the following information as a minimum: 47 RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366 -3 10/16/14 1 1. Supplier's Name 2 2. Gradation of Each Media Type 3 3. Date of Sampling /Lot Number 4 4. Samples of Each Media Type 5 5. Representative Sample Analysis, (i.e. effective size, uniformity 6 coefficient, specific gravity, acid solubility) 7 6. Material Quantities 8 7. Estimated Shipping Schedule 9 8. Media Loading Procedure 10 9. Test results showing conformance with the requirements of the latest 11 edition of AWWA 8100. 12 13 1.05 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 14 15 A. Five (5) complete draft hard copies of the Operating and Maintenance 16 Manuals (O &M Manuals) shall be furnished for review in accordance with 17 Section 01730, and shall contain the startup report for each filter cell. The 18 manuals shall include all drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, 19 instrumentation loop diagrams, final ladder logic program, as required to 20 instruct operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. 21 22 B. Five (5) complete hard copies and two (2) copies in electronic pdf format of the 23 final O &M Manual shall be submitted incorporating comments from the review. 24 25 C. Five (5) copies of the final approved ladder logic program for 26 operation /backwash of the filters shall be provided to the Owner in CD -ROM 27 format. 28 29 1.06 TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS 30 31 A. Furnish one (1) set of all special tools required for normal operation and 32 maintenance. 33 34 B. Furnish one (1) set of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts for the 35 rapid sand filter system. All spare parts shall be properly protected for 36 prolonged periods of storage and packed in suitable containers that are clearly 37 identified with indelible markings as to contents. 38 39 1.07 WARRANTY 40 41 A. The Contractor shall provide a twelve (12) month warranty commencing from 42 the time of Substantial Completion as outlined in the Contract Documents. 43 The guarantee shall indicate that the equipment furnished is suitable for the 44 purpose intended and free from defects of design, material and workmanship. 45 In the event the equipment fails to perform as specified, the Contractor shall 46 promptly repair or replace the defective equipment without any cost to the 47 Owner (including handling and shipment costs). RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366 -4 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1.08 STORAGE AND HANDLING 3 4 A. All equipment shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration 5 will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation 6 is completed and the units and equipment are ready for operation. 7 8 B. The Contractor shall replace, at no charge to Owner, all materials and ancillary 9 equipment damaged during storage and delivery, including filter media. 10 11 C. The Contractor shall be responsible for having the filter media removed off-site 12 as soon as it is removed from the individual filter cells. Stockpiling of the 13 existing media on the treatment plant site shall not be permitted. The 14 Contractor shall be responsible for any ground or groundwater contamination, 15 or other claims, caused by his failure to promptly remove and dispose of the 16 existing filter media. 17 18 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 19 20 2.01 GENERAL 21 22 A. The material covered by these Specifications is intended to be standard 23 equipment of proven ability and as manufactured by the original equipment 24 manufacturer. The equipment furnished shall be designed, constructed and 25 installed in accordance with best practice and methods and shall operate 26 satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings. 27 28 B. The filter system shall be as manufactured by Evoqua Water Technologies 29 Hydro -Clear Rapid Sand Filters. 30 31 2.02 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 32 33 A. General Requirements 34 35 1. The filter underdrain system shall be designed and installed to ensure 36 long term stability in its operating characteristics. It shall be resistant to 37 changes in head loss, flow uniformity, and any other effects that would 38 in time cause Toss of efficiency or effectiveness in its operation. 39 40 2. The underdrain system shall allow for the uniform collection of filtered 41 water and uniform distribution of backwash water over the total area of 42 the filter floor. 43 44 3. The backwash system shall allow for separate air scouring and water 45 backwashing and for the simultaneous use of air and water at the 46 specified rates. 47 RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366 -5 10/16/14 1 4. The system shall be designed to avoid localized areas of excessive flow 2 mal- distribution, which may cause mounding, lateral displacement, or 3 other deleterious disturbances of the filter media. 4 5 5. The filters shall consist of 10- inches of silica sand quartz media 6 supported by an underdrain system comprised of fiberglass grating, 7 stainless steel wire mesh, PVC cores, and a steel frame system. 8 9 6. Each filter cell shall fit into the existing designated space and have 360 10 square feet of filtration area. 11 12 B. Performance Requirements 13 14 1. Each filter cell shall meet the Performance Requirements specified in 15 Section 3.09. 16 17 C Design Criteria: The filter system shall be furnished and installed to perform 18 satisfactorily when operated under the following conditions: 19 20 1. Downflow of filtered water up to 4.82 gpm /sf. 21 2. Air -Mix air flow rate 900 cfm @ 3.0 psi. 22 3. Upflow of backwash water at a rate of 12 gpm /sf. 23 4 Quartz single grade filter media with 0.45 mm +/- 0.05 effective size 24 and a uniformity coefficient not to exceed 1.7. 25 26 D Structural Design Requirements 27 28 1. The filter underdrain system, including anchorage, supports, etc. shall 29 be designed to safely withstand all loadings under the specified loading 30 conditions. 31 32 E. All specialty hardware, such as supports, special anchorage, grout retaining 33 strips, closures, gaskets, etc., as required for installation of the filter 34 underdrain system, shall be furnished and shall be the products of Evoqua. All 35 steel hardware shall be 316 stainless steel. 36 37 2.03 UNDERDRAIN 38 39 A. The existing underdrain system for the filters shall be re -used and shall not 40 require structural changes to the existing concrete structure. 41 42 B. The underdrain system shall support the weight of its own components, along 43 with the weight of the media, and provide mounting points for the 44 inlet/backwash trough. 45 46 C. The Contractor shall clean and paint in place all carbon steel frames in each 47 cell in accordance with specification Sections 09865 and 09900, and the filter RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366 -6 10/16/14 1 I1 manufacturer's recommended procedure. 2 I 3 D. The Contractor shall furnish and install new carbon steel set screw clips on the 4 short sides of each frame as determined by the Engineer and as shown on the 5 drawings. New clips and welds shall be cleaned and painted in accordance I 6 7 with the specifications and then re -grout the frames in place. 8 E. The Contractor shall remove, clean, paint, and re- install all carbon steel gullet I 9 10 covers in each cell in accordance with specification Sections 09865 and 09900, and re- installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended 11 procedure. I 12 13 F. The Contractor shall furnish and install new underdrain core assemblies and 14 gratings. Each core assembly shall be nominal 51 -inch x 45 -inch, weigh I 15 approximately 130 pounds, and be installed in accordance with the 16 manufacturer's recommended procedure. Each grating section shall be 15 17 block x 16 block with nominal dimensions of 51 -inch x 42 -inch, weighing I 18 approximately 70 pounds, and shall be installed in accordance with the 19 20 manufacturer's recommended procedure. 21 H. The Contractor shall furnish and install new stainless steel wire mesh, I22 neoprene gaskets and sealing strips above the core assemblies and below the 23 fiberglass gratings. Each wire mesh assembly shall be Type 316 stainless I 24 steel, 0.010 -inch wire diameter, 40 mesh screen with the same nominal 25 dimensions as the underdrain frame. Each screen shall be installed in 26 accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedure. 27 I 28 I. The Contractor shall furnish and install all new 2 x 11/2 x % -inch carbon steel 29 hold -down angles around the perimeter of the fiberglass grating in accordance 30 with the manufacturer's recommended procedure. Structural angle iron shall I 31 be individually prepared and painted prior to installation in accordance with 32 specification 09865 and 09900. 33 I 34 J. The Contractor shall furnish and install new S4, 7.7 Ib. carbon steel hold -down 35 beams. Each beam shall be installed above the fiberglass grating in 36 accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedure. Each beam I 37 shall be individually prepared and painted prior to installation in accordance 38 with specification 09865 and 09900. 39 I 40 2.04 UNDERDRAIN GROUT 41 42 A. The Contactor shall repair all grout as needed and made necessary by the I 43 replacement of hold down all-thread hardware assemblies and set screw clips. 44 45 B. The Contractor shall repair all leaks in the grout surrounding the frames that 1 46 are apparent while the filter cell is dry. Leaks may be apparent during the 47 normal filter cycle or the backwash cycle. 1 RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366 -7 10/16/14 1 2 C. The Contractor shall replace /repair any loose grout supporting the underdrain 3 assemblies. If grout work is required, the grout used shall be as specified 4 below. 5 6 D. The Contractor shall furnish all grout/cement required for the installation of the 7 filter underdrain system. The grout used in installing the underdrain frame 8 blocks shall have a minimum compressive strength of 2500 psi after 30 days 9 of curing. The grout shall be comprised of one part Portland cement and two 10 parts clean silica sand properly mixed and wetted with a maximum water - 11 cement ratio by weight equal to 0.50 to 0.55 for the base grout and 0.61 to 12 0.67 for the fill grout. 13 14 E. Cement shall be standard brand Portland cement conforming to ASTM C150, 15 Type II, for general use. Cement that has become "lumpy" shall not be used. 16 The use of non - shrink grout is not acceptable. 17 18 F. Water for mixing and curing shall be clean and clear potable water. The 19 Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing the potable water at no 20 additional cost to the Owner. 21 22 G. Sand shall be clean and washed masonry sand. When tested in accordance 23 with ASTM D2419, the sand equivalency shall not be less than 90% for an 24 average of three samples, or less than 85% for any individual sample. 100% 25 of sand particles shall pass No. 4 sieve and not more than 4% of sand 26 particles shall pass No. 200 sieve. 27 28 2.05 FILTER MEDIA 29 30 A. New media shall be furnished and installed in each filter cell to a uniform 31 nominal depth of 10- inches. 32 33 B. The media shall be a single grade quartz sand, durable, clean siliceous 34 particles, free of all mica, and shall be in strict accordance with AWWA B100 35 with properties as listed below: 36 37 Media Depth 10- inches uniform 38 Sand per Filter 300 cubic feet minimum 39 Effective Size 0.45 mm ± 0.05 mm 40 Uniformity Coefficient Not to exceed 1.7 41 Average Specific Gravity 2.6 42 43 Sufficient media shall be provided for a' /2 -inch skimming allowance. 44 45 2.06 CELL INLET BOX AND WEIR ASSEMBLY 46 47 Each filter cell shall be furnished with one (1) 1/4-inch thick carbon steel inlet box with RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366 -8 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 an adjustable fiberglass cipolletti weir assembly installed at the inlet. Prior to 2 installation, each inlet box shall be individually prepared and painted in accordance 3 with specification Sections 09865 and 09900 and installed in accordance with the 4 manufacturer's recommended procedure. The weirs in all filters cells shall be set 5 level with a surveyor's level so that all weirs are level and at the same elevation. 6 7 2.07 CELL DISTRIBUTION /BACKWASH TROUGH ASSEMBLY 8 9 Each filter cell shall be furnished with one (1) carbon steel distribution /backwash 10 trough assembly including adjustable weirs, trough supports, and removable splash 11 trays. Each trough assembly shall be '/ -inch carbon steel construction with nominal 12 dimensions of 24 -inch x 24 -inch x 30 -foot, comprised of three flanged sections that 13 bolt together. Each carbon steel section of the trough and the supports shall be 14 individually painted by the filter equipment vendor prior to installation in accordance 15 with specification Sections 09865 and 09900. The weirs shall be of fiberglass 16 construction, with 90- degree v- notches on 6 -inch centers with Type 316 stainless 17 steel hardware and connecting plates and adjustable mounting slots providing 2- 18 inches of adjustment meeting the requirements of Section 06600. The splash trays 19 shall be fabricated of Type 304 stainless steel and shall be removable. All 20 components of the distribution /backwash trough assemblies shall be installed in 21 accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedure. The weirs shall be set 22 level with a surveyor's level. 23 24 2.08 HARDWARE, GASKETS, AND CONSUMABLES 25 26 Each filter shall be furnished with stainless steel hardware, including bolts, nuts, 27 washers, clips, all thread, all thread couplings, anchors, and set screws, installed to 28 connect and anchor the various assemblies described herein. All hardware inside 29 the filter cell shall be Type 316 stainless steel except as otherwise specified herein. 30 A 3 -inch x 3/16 -inch closed cellular neoprene gasket shall be installed below the 31 screen. All miscellaneous hardware, gaskets, and consumables shall be installed in 32 accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedure. 33 34 2.09 LOCAL CONTROL CONSOLES 35 36 There are a total of four (4) existing control consoles located in the filter common 37 area. Two of the consoles control 2 filters and 2 consoles control one filter. Work 38 associated with these consoles is limited to the following: 39 40 • Installing and terminating wire and conduit. 41 • Integrating all control panels with the new chemical clean system and the 42 new main filter PLC. 43 44 2.10 MAIN FILTER CONTROL PANEL 45 46 A. The Contractor shall furnish and install a new NEMA 4X 316 S.S. local control 47 panel (LCP) equipped with a PLC as specified in Section 13630 for control and RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366 -9 10/16/14 1 operation of the six (6) filter cells. The filter equipment manufacturer shall 2 furnish a new filter control program for installation by the Contractor's System 3 Integrator. 4 5 B. The filter equipment manufacturer shall be responsible for developing, 6 troubleshooting, debugging, and programming the PLC program such that it is 7 capable of operating all filters, all ancillary systems, and provide all 8 monitoring /alarms, and equipment to support the various filter operating 9 modes. The PLC program shall also incorporate the new electrically actuated 10 chemical clean valves, pumps and tank float controls being installed as part of 11 this project. 12 13 C. At a minimum, the new filter operating program shall perform all of the 14 required operating functions as recommended by the filter equipment 15 manufacturer including automatic filter operation, Air -Mix, Pulse -Mix, 16 Backwash, and Chemical Clean. The new filter control program shall also 17 control the filter valves (5 each cell), washwater pumps (2), blowers (2), 18 chemical clean system and other filter equipment, during the loss of electrical 19 power and the resumption of electrical power. 20 21 E. The Contractor and the filter equipment manufacturer shall coordinate with the 22 chemical clean system valve manufacturer and provide all necessary 23 programming required to operate the valves during the chemical clean cycle. 24 25 F. The Contractor shall connect all existing I/O wiring required for operation of 26 the filters to the new PLC by extending the wiring from the existing PLC to the 27 new PLC. The Contractor shall connect all existing I/O wiring to any new 28 equipment including, but not limited to, the chemical clean system components 29 and floats switches. The Contractor shall connect all new I/O wiring directly to 30 the new PLC including, but not limited to, the chemical clean system valves 31 and pumps, float switches and air compressor low -low pressure switch, which 32 is not shown on the drawings. 33 34 G. The filter equipment manufacturer shall assist the Contractor in start-up and 35 debugging the new PLC filter control system. 36 37 2.11 LEVEL SENSOR FLOAT SWITCHES 38 39 A. The Contractor shall install new level sensing float switches in each filter cell, 40 the inlet channel, the clearwell, the mudwell, and the chemical storage tank as 41 listed below: 42 43 Two (2) in each filter cell (12 total) 44 One (1) in the inlet channel 45 Two (2) in the clearwell 46 One (1) in the mudwell 47 One (1) in the chemical clean storage tank RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366 -10 10/16/14 1 1 2 B. The level sensor float switches in the filter cells, inlet channel, clearwell and I 3 mudwell shall be manufactured and approved for use with chlorinated water 4 and shall all be from the same manufacturer. 5 I 6 D. The level switch for the chemical clean storage tank shall be an Evoqua MAC - 7 3 microswitch float type level sensor or approved equal and shall be 8 specifically approved by the manufacturer for use with Sodium or Calcium I 9 10 Hypochlorite solutions. 11 E. Splices in the float level switch chords shall not be permitted. All level I 12 13 switches shall be supplied with sufficient chord length such that no chord splicing is required and the free ends of the chord shall attach directly to a 14 terminal strip. I 15 16 F. All level switches shall be mounted in their original location using new 17 stainless steel hardware, new stainless steel brackets, and configured to the I 18 elevation specified by the filter equipment manufacturer. 19 20 2.12 SURFACE AIR SYSTEM 21 1 22 A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all new surface air mix diffusers in each 23 filter cell. The diffusers shall be % -inch diameter schedule 80 PVC with UV 24 inhibitors and threaded end caps. The diffuser orientation, number, locations, 1 25 26 and sizes shall be as specified by the filter equipment manufacturer. 27 B. The Contractor shall furnish and install new Schedule 80 UV inhibited PVC air I 28 drop pipes, unions, supports, and anchors as shown on the drawings. The air 29 drop supports shall be furnished by the filter equipment vendor. 30 I 31 2.13 CHEMICAL CLEAN SYSTEM 32 33 A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and incorporate into the existing chemical I 34 35 clean system the following: 36 1.. Furnish and install six (6) new electric actuated valves (EAVs) located I 37 as shown on the filter piping diagram and installed with new wire and 38 conduit to the relevant filter local control console. Each new EAV shall 39 be furnished by the Contractor and integrated into the chemical clean I 40 41 function of the filter PLC control ladder logic. The valve shall be a vented design and approved for use with hypochlorite solutions. 42 I 43 44 2. Furnish and install two (2) new chemical clean pumps, starters, disconnects, and circuit breakers located as shown including new wire 45 and conduit from the pumps to the MCC as shown. Each pump shall 46 be March Model No. TE- 7K -MD, % HP, 230/460V, 50/60 Hz, three- 1 47 phase, magnetically driven centrifugal pumps. The pump front and rear 1 1 RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366 -11 10/16/14 1 housing shall be carbon filled Kynar, with a Viton 0-ring, and a ceramic 2 spindle and thrust washers. 3 4 3. Furnish and install new Schedule 80 PVC pump suction and discharge 5 piping, fittings, and valves from the chemical tank to the pumps and to 6 the filters. All electrically operated valves shall be integrated into the 7 filter control program. All manual valves shall be vented and approved 8 for use with sodium hypochlorite solutions. 9 10 PART 3 — EXECUTION 11 12 3.01 FILTER CELL EQUIPMENT REMOVAL 13 14 A. The Contractor shall carefully disassemble and remove all existing filter 15 components, hardware, and consumables inside the filter cells, including the 16 gullet covers but excluding the underdrain frames, underdrain vents, and low 17 pressure air system horizontal and vertical manifold piping, as shown on the 18 drawings. There are six (6) underdrain frames in each filter cell, each grouted 19 in place. All six (6) underdrain frames in each cell shall be exposed, sand 20 blasted and cleaned and made suitable for a visual evaluation but left in place 21 for evaluation by the Engineer. 22 23 3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION DURING INSTALLATION, TESTING, AND 24 STARTUP 25 26 A.. The Contractor shall take all precautions recommended by the equipment 27 manufacturer or as specified herein to ensure that the filter underdrain system 28 and any piping connected thereto is completely clean and free of any debris, 29 dirt, or other foreign materials that could clog the underdrain system or 30 interfere with flow. Backwash air and water piping shall be thoroughly flushed 31 clean. All loose debris and dirt within the filter cell shall be removed by 32 brooming and vacuuming. As installation progresses, partially completed 33 portions of the work shall be protected with heavy visqueen or other suitable 34 material to maintain the cleanliness of the underdrain system. Such protection 35 shall be maintained until the media is installed. 36 37 B. Any time the underdrain is to be used as a work surface, the underdrain shall 38 be overlaid with 1/2 inch minimum plywood sheeting, to distribute the load of 39 workers, yard buckets, wheel barrows, ladders, scaffolds, etc., to prevent 40 damage to the underdrain. 41 42 3.03 UNDERDRAIN REPLACEMENT 43 44 A. The Contactor shall follow the filter manufacturer's recommended procedure 45 for removing the underdrain cores and grating pieces. Removal is generally 46 the reverse of installation as described in the existing O &M Manual. 47 RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366 -12 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B. The Contractor shall install new cores and gratings in each filter cell in 2 accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3 4 C. The filter manufacturer's representative shall be on site and provide 5 supervision during installation of the initial underdrain cores in the first cell 6 rehabilitated. 7 8 3.04 FILTER PAINTING 9 10 A.. The exposed surfaces of all new and existing carbon steel components, 11 including the filter frames that are normally underwater, shall be cleaned and 12 painted with a polyurethane lining system as specified in Sections 09865 and 13 09900. 14 15 B. Each cell shall be sealed and covered to contain dust while sandblasting 16 activities are occurring inside. 17 18 3.05 FILTER ASSEMBLY 19 20 A. The Contractor shall assemble the filter components in strict accordance with 21 the manufacturer's written instructions, recommendations, installation 22 drawings and the oral and written directions provided by the manufacturer's 23 technical representative who shall instruct the Contractor in the rehabilitation 24 of the first filter; and any additional requirements specified herein. 25 26 B. All stainless steel hardware, fasteners, and anchors shall be assembled with 27 anti -seize compound specifically formulated for use with stainless steel in 28 similar conditions and applications. 29 30 3.06 MEDIA INSTALLATION 31 32 A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean and visually inspect the assembled 33 underdrain before placement of any media to verify that orifices are not 34 clogged with debris. 35 36 B. The equipment supplier shall inspect each assembled filter prior to installing 37 the media and furnish a written certification to the Engineer that the equipment 38 has been installed in strict accordance with the equipment manufacturer's 39 recommendations. Media shall not be installed until after this certification has 40 been furnished to the Engineer. 41 42 C. The Contractor shall place a level line on the walls of the filter designating the 43 top elevation of the media. 44 45 D. The media shall be carefully placed in a manner approved by the equipment 46 supplier so as not to disturb the underdrain system. Media shall be delivered 47 in bulk tanker trucks and off loaded directly into the individual cells RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366 -13 10/16/14 1 pneumatically. Water shall be added during the off loading process to 2 suppress dust. The individual filters cells shall be covered and sealed during 3 the off loading process to contain dust. 4 5 E. The media shall be installed level and the bed shall be backwashed a 6 minimum of three times to remove fines. The media shall be re- leveled by 7 scraping as required to obtain the correct elevation. 8 9 F. The Contractor shall measure the depth of the media after it has been 10 backwashed and skimmed as recommended by the filter equipment 11 manufacturer. 12 13 3.07 TECHNICAL DIRECTION, INSPECTION AND TRAINING 14 15 A. The Contractor shall install all equipment in strict accordance with the 16 recommended instructions of the filter equipment manufacturer. The filter 17 manufacturer's field service technician shall be on -site for a 3 consecutive day 18 period to instruct the Contractor's personnel in the proper installation of the 19 filter components and systems, and to provide training and instructions to the 20 plant personnel in the proper operation of the equipment over two (2) 4 -hour 21 training sessions. Training must be completed before the first cell is placed in 22 service. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the scheduling of 23 both the Contractor's instructions and the Owner's training with the filter 24 equipment manufacturer. 25 26 B. As the re- assembly of each filter cell is completed, the filter manufacturer's 27 field service technician, who shall have complete knowledge of proper 28 operation and maintenance of the equipment, shall be on -site for 3 29 consecutive days to: 1) inspect each filter cell assembly prior to media 30 installation, 2) supervise media installation and 3) supervise the initial start-up 31 of the filter cell, as described below. 32 33 1. Upon completion of the underdrain installation in each filter cell, and prior 34 to installing any media, the Contractor and the filter manufacturer's field 35 service technician shall inspect the installation in the presence of the 36 Engineer. The Contractor shall make any corrections or modifications 37 recommended by the filter manufacturer's field service technician. 38 39 2. After confirming that the underdrain has been properly installed, the 40 manufacturer's field service technician shall supervise the Contractor's 41 installation of the filter media. 42 43 3. Following media installation, the manufacturer's field service technician 44 shall supervise the initial test run and all backwash operations as described 45 further hereinafter. All operations and functions shall be tested and 46 verified. The Contractor shall coordinate the manufacturer's field service 47 technician and the Systems Integrator to properly set all timers, level RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366 -14 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 settings and other parameters required for proper control of the filters. 2 3 C. Following proper start-up of each filter cell, the filter manufacturer's field 4 service technician and the Contractor shall each provide a certificate of proper 5 installation stating that the equipment has been properly installed and is ready 6 to be placed in service. 7 8 D. Should the services of the filter manufacturer's field service technician be 9 required for longer than 3 days as a result of improper installation of the filter, 10 or delays in delivering /installing the media, or delays in starting up the filter 11 cell, or for any other reason, the Contractor shall pay for all additional services 12 of the filter manufacturer's field service technician at no additional cost to the 13 Owner. 14 15 E. Prior to initial start-up of each filter cell, the manufacturer's representative shall 16 provide written certification to the Owner that the equipment has been tested 17 in accordance with the Manufacturer's approved methods and the testing 18 requirements specified herein, and shall certify that the equipment is ready for 19 permanent operation. 20 21 3.08 STARTUP 22 23 A. Each filter shall be started up and placed in service as soon as the mechanical 24 rehabilitation work associated with the specific filter cell, control panel 25 replacement has been completed, and the cell has been cleaned and is ready 26 for service. Until the mechanical and electrical work is complete, a filter cell 27 shall be operated using the existing PLC program. 28 29 B. After all work associated with filter cell rehabilitation is complete, the operation 30 of the cell shall be transferred to the new PLC program. 31 32 C. After the PLC program has been installed, tested, and is operational with the 33 sequence and times appropriate for all events, each filter cell shall be tested 34 for performance as described in Section 3.09 of this Specification. 35 36 3.09 TESTING AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 37 38 A. General 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 1. Subject to the provisions contained herein, each individual filter cell shall produce effluent water of a quality that will comply with the following Performance Requirements. Values shall not be averaged for separate filters. Sampling may be suspended during a backwash event (as specified herein). Performance Requirements Value Peak Flow Rate, gpm /ft2 4.82 RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366 -15 10/16/14 1 2 3 4 5 Maximum Backwash Flow Rate gpm /ft2 12 Maximum Effluent TSS, mg /L 5 Maximum Effluent Turbidity, NTU 2.5 Effluent Turbidity and Total Suspended Solids (TSS) water quality requirements shall be achieved concurrently at the flow rates specified above. 6 2. The Owner is responsible for providing filter influent water quality with a 7 TSS ranging from 0 -20 mg /L and 0 -10 NTU turbidity for the Process 8 Performance Test specified hereinafter. However, it is the Contractor's 9 responsibility to determine and verify filter influent water quality, if the 10 Contractor elects to do so. The Contractor is not required to conduct 11 influent turbidity sampling and testing, however, but it will be assumed 12 that the influent TSS /turbidity is below 20 mg /L /10 NTU if the influent is 13 not sampled and analyzed. 14 15 3. During the Process Performance Test, if any influent TSS /turbidity 16 value is greater than 20 mg /L /10 NTU and the effluent water quality 17 meets the Performance Requirements, the test results shall be used as 18 part of the Process Performance Test. During the Performance Test, if 19 any influent TSS /turbidity value is greater than 20 mg /L /10 NTU and the 20 effluent water quality does not meet the Performance Requirements, 21 the Owner will make such changes in the treatment process as needed 22 to bring the influent water quality below 20 mg /U10 NTU and the 23 Contractor shall re- conduct the Performance Test at no additional cost 24 to the Owner. 25 26 B. Process Performance Test 27 28 1. The Process Performance Test shall demonstrate the ability of each 29 filter cell to meet effluent Performance Requirements identified in 30 section 3.09 A.1. Immediately following start -up of each filter, the 31 Contractor shall conduct a Process Performance Test on each filter cell. 32 Each test shall be conducted over a 72 consecutive hours. Each filter 33 cell shall be tested individually for adherence to the Performance 34 Requirements and blending of filter effluent will not be permitted. A 35 rehabilitated filter cell shall demonstrate compliance with the effluent 36 water quality Performance Requirements before another filter cell will 37 be permitted to be taken out of service for rehabilitation. 38 39 2. The Owner shall provide the labor necessary to operate the treatment 40 plant during the Process Performance Test. The Owner will assist the 41 Contractor and filter equipment manufacturer in the operation of the 42 filter equipment in accordance with instructions from the Contractor and 43 the equipment manufacturer. The Contractor shall be responsible for 44 the actual operation of the filter during the Process Performance Test. RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366 -16 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 3. There is no readily available means to monitor the forward flow through each filter. Therefore, the forward flow through each filter shall be estimated by dividing the total plant flow by the number of filters in service. The number of filters in service shall correspond to the following flow rates and filter loading rates. Total Plant Flow, MGD Total Plant Flow, GPM Number of Filters On -Line Loading Rate, GPM /SF 0.5 347 1 1.0 1 694 1 1.9 1.5 1042 1 2.9 2 1389 1 3.9 2.5 1736 1 4.8 3 2083 2 2.9 3.5 2431 2 3.4 4 2778 2 3.9 4.5 3125 2 4.3 5 3472 2 4.8 5.5 3819 3 3.5 6 4167 3 3.9 6.5 4514 3 4.2 7 4861 3 4.5 7.5 5208 3 4.8 8 5556 4 3.9 8.5 5903 5 3.3 9 6250 5 3.5 9.5 6597 5 3.7 10 6944 5 3.9 10.5 7292 5 4.1 11 7639 5 4.2 11.5 7986 5 4.4 12 8333 5 4.6 12.5 8681 5 4.8 13 9028 6 4.2 13.5 9375 6 4.3 14 9722 6 4.5 14.5 10069 6 4.7 15 10417 6 4.8 The Owner will place filters in service and take filters out of service in order to obtain a filter loading rate just below that shown in the Table above during the Process Performance Test. 4. Prior to initiating the first filter cell testing, the Contractor shall sample the filter influent flow and perform a particle size distribution analysis, using laser diffraction in wet mode, both with and without sonication, acceptable to the Engineer indicating the percentage of particles larger than 3 microns and shall submit the results to the Engineer. RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366 -17 10/16/14 1 5. The Contractor shall furnish and install sample taps as required on the 2 filter effluent piping. The taps shall be used to sample the filter effluent 3 during the Process Performance Test. A small hand held pumping 4 device furnished by the Contractor may be used to extract water from 5 the sample tap. Sample taps may be installed using the chemical clean 6 system injection piping 7 8 6. The Contractor shall supply all manpower and materials needed to 9 collect filter TSS and turbidity samples. Filter effluent samples shall be 10 individual samples taken every 2 hours for 3 consecutive days. Filter 11 turbidity measurements shall be made at the time the samples are 12 taken using a LaMotte LTC 3000 /we turbidimeter and recorded. The 13 Contractor shall be responsible for providing the turbidimeter. 14 15 7. TSS/ turbidity sample collection and analysis shall be performed under 16 the supervision of an NELAC approved Environmental Laboratory in 17 accordance with the current method used to demonstrate compliance 18 with FDEP effluent TSS limits. At the Contractor's option, the City of 19 Clearwater operates an NELAC approved Environmental Laboratory 20 and will perform the TSS analysis for $11.00 each at the Contractor's 21 expense. The Contractor shall be responsible for sample collection, 22 delivery, testing and analyses. 23 24 8. TSS/ turbidity shall be determined based on the 36 total hourly samples 25 (72 samples if the Contractor elects to have the influent sampled as 26 described in A.2 above). At the end of the three -day period, the 27 Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a copy of the test results. 28 29 9. Successful completion of the Process Performance Test shall be 30 demonstrated by the effluent water quality meeting the Performance 31 Requirements. 32 33 10 Individual filter sampling may be suspended and postponed during and 34 immediately after a filter cell is backwashed. Individual effluent 35 sampling may be re- initiated after 60 minutes have elapsed following 36 the last backwash cycle. 37 38 11. The Contractor shall furnish the results of all testing to the Owner and 39 the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit a record of plant flow, which 40 will be supplied by the City, sample volumes, sample times, TSS, and 41 turbidity results as part of the Process Performance Test. 42 43 12. The Contractor shall make no changes to filter operation without the 44 consent of the Owner. 45 46 C. Conditions 47 RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366 -18 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 The Process Performance Test and compliance with the Performance 2 Requirements set forth herein are subject to the following conditions: 3 4 1. During the test period, the filter being tested shall be operated by the 5 Contractor in accordance with 3.09B above. 6 7 2. The Owner shall be responsible for operating the treatment plant during 8 the performance test period in accordance with the FDEP approved 9 Operating Protocol. The Contractor shall be responsible for keeping 10 such detailed records as may be necessary for proper operation of the 11 filter during the performance test period for the purpose of determining 12 whether the process guarantee has been met. Said records shall be 13 retained until the process guarantee has been satisfied and shall be 14 comprised of all daily log sheets, operator notes, sample inspections, 15 and instrument charts produced in the plant operation and filter 16 operation. 17 18 3. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when the Process 19 Requirements have been met, or of the failure of any filter cell to meet 20 the Performance Requirements, specifying the respect in which the 21 Performance Requirement was not met. 22 23 4. Should any effluent sample exceed the 5 mg /L TSS or 2.5 NTU turbidity 24 Performance Requirement, the Contractor shall perform a Particle Size 25 Distribution Analysis as described previously of the filter influent flow. 26 Should the percentage of particles larger than 3 microns be within 10% 27 of the previously measured value, then the Contractor shall modify the 28 filter and re- conduct the Process Performance Test until the filter 29 effluent water quality meets the 5 mg /L TSS or 2.5 NTU turbidity 30 Performance Requirements. 31 32 D. Exclusive Remedy 33 34 1. In the event the Filtration System fails to meet the Process 35 Performance Requirements, the Contractor's sole remedy shall be to 36 replace or modify the filtration system to enable the filters to meet such 37 Performance Requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. 38 39 40 41 42 END OF SECTION 43 RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366 -19 10/16/14 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 RAPID SAND FILTERS 11366 -20 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 11370 2 3 COMPRESSED -AIR SYSTEM 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 DESCRIPTION 8 9 A. This section describes the requirements for the compressed air system, 10 including compressors, electric motors and starters, receiver, all necessary 11 piping, fittings, valves, gauges, switches and all necessary accessories, 12 connections and equipment. 13 14 B. The compressed air system shall include a two stage, air cooled, duplex, tank 15 mounted reciprocating compressor and controls package sized to deliver 20.1 16 acfm at 125 psig each, a 240 gallon receiver tank and a new compressed air 17 refrigerated dryer. The compressed air system equipment shall be supplied by 18 a manufacturer with an authorized dealer and service center located in 19 Hillsborough or Pinellas County Florida and shall be by Ingersoll Rand. 20 21 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK 22 23 A. The work shall include replacement of the existing compressor and receiver 24 assembly, the drier, and the connection /integration of the air compressor into 25 the filter operating system. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and operate a 26 temporary air compressor suitable for operating the filters while the existing air 27 compressor system is being replaced. The temporary system shall be 28 removed after the new system is installed and accepted. 29 30 B. The new compressed air system shall include: 31 32 1. 1/2 - inch Tubing and Fittings 33 2. Supporting Elements 34 3. Valves 35 4. Pressure Gauges 36 5. Air Pressure Reducing and Regulating Valve 37 6. Compressed Air Dryer 38 7. Automatic Drain Valves 39 8. Air Compressor and Receiver Assembly) including one duplex 40 alternator and two starters (one for each motor). 41 9. Manufacturer's recommended vibration control and anchoring system 42 43 1.03 SUBMITTALS 44 45 A. Copies of all materials required to establish compliance with the specifications 46 shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of contract. Submittals 47 shall include at least the following: 48 COMPRESSED -AIR SYSTEM 11370 -1 CONFORMED 10/16/14 1 1. Certified shop and erection drawings showing all important details of 2 construction, dimensions and anchor bolt locations. 3 2. Descriptive literature, bulletins and /or catalogs of the equipment. 4 3. A complete, total bill of materials for all equipment with the O &M 5 manual. 6 4. A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts with the 7 manufacturer's current price for each item. 8 9 1.04 SPARE PARTS 10 11 A. Provide two of each item listed on the manufacturer's. recommended spare 12 parts list. At a minimum, the items listed below shall be provided. 13 14 1. Twelve (12) inlet filters. 15 2. One (1) spare alternator. 16 3. One (1) set of drive belts for each compressor. 17 4. Six (6) auto condensate drain valves. 18 19 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 20 21 2.01 PIPES, FITTINGS, AND TUBES 22 23 A. The existing black tubing and fittings shall be replaced. The owner requests 24 the replacements be Parker 1/2 -inch nylon spiral reinforced air brake tubing, 25 Parker 1120 -8B SAE j844 Type B, and Parker Brass NTA, SAE J246 fittings. 26 27 2.02 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS 28 29 A. Stainless steel flexible hose connectors shall be corrugated, stainless steel 30 tubing with stainless steel wire braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing. 31 The stainless steel hose connectors shall be rated at 200 psig minimum. 32 33 2.03 SPECIALTIES 34 35 A. PRESSURE GAUGES 36 37 1. Pressure gauges shall be permanently installed in the system and listed 38 for compressed air service. Pressure gauges shall be all stainless steel 39 construction with a minimum 3 -inch face and read from 0 -150 psi and 40 1% of span accuracy. The gauges shall have a 5 year warranty and be 41 Ashcroft Type 1009 with the Duralife Plus option, or equal. 42 43 B. AIR PRESSURE REGULATING VALVES 44 45 1. Air pressure regulating valves shall be furnished and installed and shall 46 be pilot or diaphragm operated, bronze body and trim, direct acting, 47 spring loaded manual pressure setting adjustment and rated for 150 48 psig inlet pressure. Air pressure regulators shall be a New Gate COMPRESSED -AIR SYSTEM 11370 -2 CONFORMED 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Technologies R Series, a Wilkerson Model R16, IR PacE.5 or approved 2 equal. 3 4 C. SAFETY VALVES 5 6 1. Safety valves shall be furnished and installed on the air compressor 7 system and constructed according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure 8 Code, Section VIII "Pressure Vessels," and be National Board Certified, 9 labeled, and factory sealed. Safety valves shall be constructed of 10 bronze body with poppet type safety valve for compressed air service. 11 12 D. AUTOMATIC DRAIN VALVES 13 14 1. Automatic drain valves shall be furnished and installed with the air 15 compressor and with the air dryer. The valves shall have stainless 16 steel body and internal parts rated for 200 psig. The automatic drain 17 valve shall be electrically operated and capable of automatic discharge 18 of collected condensate and shall be Deltech series 1700, or approved 19 equal. 20 21 E. REFRIGERATED DRYER 22 23 1. A refrigerated compressed air dryer rated to match or exceed the flow, 24 pressure, and temperature rating of the compressor, at a dewpoint of 25 50 degrees F, shall be furnished and installed downstream of the 26 compressor. The dryer and the compressor shall be supplied by the 27 same manufacturer. . 28 29 2.04 AIR COMPRESSOR AND RECEIVER 30 31 A. A packaged air compressor and receiver assembly shall be furnished and 32 installed in accordance with the Contract Documents. The package shall be a 33 manufacturer's standard unit and shall be factory assembled, wired, piped, 34 and tested delivering a minimum of 20.1 (each) acfm compressed air at 125 35 psig. Maximum pressure rating shall be 250 psi. The packaged air 36 compressor shall be air cooled and continuous duty with 100% standby 37 capacity. The receiver shall have a minimum 240 gallon capacity tank. 38 39 B. The compressors shall be furnished and installed with all necessary power 40 and controls identical to the existing system. The compressors shall be 41 controlled in response to pressure switches mounted on the receiver. Wiring 42 shall meet all electrical codes and these specifications. 43 44 C. The compressed air system shall include a discharge air pressure gauge, an 45 intake air filter /silencer with maintenance indicator for each compressor, an 46 elapsed time meter for each compressor, discharge air temperature gauges, 47 control transformers as required, and control alternators as required. The 48 compressor units shall alternate at each start signal such that each COMPRESSED -AIR SYSTEM 11370 -3 CONFORMED 10/16/14 1 compressor runs approximately half the total run time. In addition, a separate 2 low pressure switch shall be provided to signal low -low pressure in the air 3 supply system. This switch shall be wired to the new PLC using 3 #12 in a %- 4 inch conduit (not shown on the drawings). 5 6 D. The receiver shall be a steel tank constructed in accordance with and meeting 7 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII, Division 1. The receiver 8 pressure rating shall be equal to or higher than the highest rated discharge 9 pressure of the connected compressors. The receiver shall be permanently 10 labeled with all appropriate code symbols, markings, and the pressure rating. 11 The interior finish shall be corrosion resistant. The tank shall include a safety 12 valve, a pressure gauge, an automatic drain valve, and a manual drain valve. 13 14 E. The Contractor shall furnish and install the packaged air compressor /receiver 15 unit using the manufacturer's recommended vibration control and anchoring 16 system. 17 18 F. The compressor shall be reciprocating or rotary, cast iron housing, one piece 19 connecting rods, and receiver mounted. A belt guard(s) shall totally enclose 20 all pulleys and shafts. All reciprocating or rotary units shall be equipped with a 21 low oil level switch that shall prevent the unit from operating with insufficient oil 22 level. 23 24 G. The compressors shall be equipped with open drip proof 7.5 HP motors with a 25 minimum service factor of 1.15. The units shall be designed to operate to 120 26 degrees F ambient temperature rise. Motor shall be ball bearing type, 480V, 3 27 phase and conforming to NEMA standards. The maximum motor speed shall 28 be 1800 RPM. Each motor shall be of sufficient size to operate each 29 compressor without overloading and without operating within the service 30 factor. 31 32 H. Each compressor shall be provided with an after cooler. The after cooler shall 33 be capable of cooling the air stream within 25 °F of ambient air temperature 34 before it enters the receiver. The after cooler shall be built in accordance with 35 applicable requirements of ASME Code for Pressure Vessels and be provided 36 with an automatic condensate drain trap. 37 38 PART 3 - EXECUTION 39 40 3.01 INSTALLATION 41 42 A. Piping shall be installed in accordance with the Drawings and this section. 43 This section shall prevail in the case of conflicts. Pipe shall be along the same 44 general alignment and elevation as the existing piping and shall be exposed. 45 46 B. Exposed piping shall be installed at right angles or parallel to building walls. 47 Diagonal runs are prohibited unless indicated. 48 COMPRESSED -AIR SYSTEM 11370 -4 CONFORMED 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 C. Piping installed adjacent to equipment shall be located that allows for the 2 required service clearances. 3 4 D. Air and drain piping shall be installed with a 1% slope downward in direction of 5 flow. 6 7 E. Nipples, flanges, unions, transitions, and special fittings, and valves shall be 8 installed with pressure ratings same as or higher than system pressure rating. 9 10 F. Only eccentric reducers shall be installed where compressed air piping is 11 reduced in direction of flow, with bottoms of both pipes and reducers fitting 12 flush. 13 14 G. Branch connections shall be installed from the top of the main compressed air 15 line. Drain legs and drain traps shall be installed at the end of each main and 16 branch and at all low points in the system. 17 18 H. A temperature indicator and pressure gauge shall be installed on the receiver. 19 20 I. Valves and unions shall be installed to permit servicing and removal of all 21 equipment and components. 22 23 J. Pipes shall be installed free of all sags and bends. 24 25 K. Piping shall be cut square and accurately with a cutter (sawing is not 26 permitted) to measurements determined at place of installation and worked 27 into place without springing or forcing the pipe. The pipes shall be reamed to 28 remove burrs, being careful not to expand pipe and that no chips of metal 29 remain in the line. 30 31 L Care shall be exercised in handling equipment and tools used in cutting, 32 reaming, and threading of pipe to prevent oil or grease being introduced into 33 piping. The entire high pressure air piping system shall be cleaned and 34 flushed with alcohol prior to placing into service. 35 36 M. Hanger spacing shall be based upon NFPA 99. 37 38 N. Rigidly support valves and other equipment to prevent strain on tube or joints. 39 40 O. The Contractor shall connect the compressor low -low pressure switch to the 41 new PLC using 3 #12 in a % -inch conduit, whether or not shown on the 42 drawings. 43 44 45 46 END OF SECTION 47 COMPRESSED -AIR SYSTEM 11370 -5 CONFORMED 10/16/14 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK COMPRESSED -AIR SYSTEM 11370 -6 CONFORMED 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 13567 2 3 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING PROVISIONS (NOT IN CONTRACT) 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. The Contractor shall design, furnish, install, startup, operate, maintain, and 10 coordinate continuous bypass pumping systems as required to perform the 11 work at the East WRF Influent Pump Station 12 13 B. The temporary bypass pumping system shall be disassembled and removed 14 after all work is completed, tested, and accepted ready for service. All areas. 15 structures, and landscaping disturbed or removed by the bypass pumping 16 operations shall be restored. 17 18 C. The Contractor shall employ the services of a subcontractor specializing in the 19 design, furnishing and operation of temporary bypass pumping systems. The 20 bypass subcontractor shall provide 5 references for projects of similar size and 21 complexity as the proposed system for approval by the Engineer. The 22 proposed bypass pumping system shall meet the requirements of all codes 23 and regulatory agencies having jurisdiction. 24 25 D. Information provided by the City shows the influent pump station has four flygt 26 submersible pumps currently installed as listed below: 27 28 Two pumps at 6,000 gpm and 75 HP. 29 Two pumps at 2,000 gpm abd 18 HP. 30 One of the 6,000 gpm pumps is constant speed 31 The other three pumps are variable speed 32 Design or actual velocity head conditions are not known. 33 The static head on the pumps based on the drawings is 30 feet. 34 35 The bypass pumping system shall be designed for a firm average pumping 36 rate of 5 MGD, a firm peak pumping rate of 12.5 MGD, and a firm low pumping 37 rate of 1.1 MGD. Velocity in the temporary force main(s) shall not exceed 5 38 feet per second. 39 40 The bypass pumping system shall be capable of variable speed operation. 41 42 E. The bypass pumping system shall include both primary and standby pumps. 43 The standby pumping capacity shall be equal to the primary pumping capacity. 44 All standby pumps shall be completely piped, wired, fueled, and ready to run 45 should a primary bypass pump fail. 46 47 F. The Contractor shall furnish and install temporary plugs in the existing sewer 48 pipes entering the wet wells as needed. TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING PROVISIONS 13567 -1 07/15/14 1 2 1.02 BYPASS PUMPING PLAN SUBMITTAL 3 4 A. The Contractor shall submit a written Bypass Pumping Plan/Working Drawings 5 (Plan) and attend a meeting with the Engineer and the Owner to review the 6 Plan. The Bypass Pumping Plan shall be submitted in accordance with 7 Section 01310 to the Engineer prior to beginning any work at the site. 8 9 B. The Plan shall consist of detailed descriptions and diagrams of the proposed 10 pumping system that describes equipment schedules, time schedules, 11 locations, power, controls, instrumentation, piping, and valves. Cut sheets for 12 all equipment and materials shall be submitted. All pumps and valves shall be 13 enumerated and shown on the diagrams. 14 15 C. The Plan shall be detailed and specific for each location and for this project. 16 17 D. The Plan shall show at minimum the following information: 18 19 1. Staging areas for all pumps 20 2. Number, size, material, and location of suction and discharge 21 piping and valves 22 3. Pump curves, sizes, capacities, size, power requirements, and 23 rpm operating range of each pump 24 4. Fuel type, estimated consumption rate, on -site fuel storage and 25 detailed refueling plan 26 5. Temporary pipe supports, pipe restraints, pipe anchors, and 27 thrust blocks. 28 6. Control system details 29 7. Schematics showing the control circuits for each pump. 30 8. List of Personnel to be called by the autodialer. 31 32 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 33 34 2.01 BYPASS PUMPING SYSTEMS - GENERAL REQUIRMENTS AND RESTRICTIONS 35 36 A. The bypass pumping system shall have dedicated suction and discharge 37 piping. The suction shall be taken from those manholes and structures shown 38 on the Drawings. The discharge shall be upstream of the screens at the 39 influent pump station. 40 41 B. The bypass pumping system shall utilize fully automatic, self - priming pumps 42 that do not require foot valves. 43 44 C. The bypass pumping system shall comply with local noise ordinances. 45 46 D. Fuel storage on site shall only be permitted in dedicated fuel tanks attached to 47 portable pumps and portable generators. No other fuel sources or auxiliary 48 fuel storage shall be permitted. TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING PROVISIONS 13567 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 E. None of the existing emergency generators at the East WRF may be used for 3 the bypass pumping system. 4 5 2.02 CAPACITY 6 7 A. The capacity of the bypass pumping systems is specified in Section 1.01. 8 9 B. The Contractor shall be responsible for designing the bypass pumping 10 systems to have adequate flow and pressure capacity to maintain flow to and 11 from each lift station without accumulation in the collection system. 12 13 2.03 REDUNDANCY AND RELIABILITY 14 15 A. The temporary bypass pumping system shall be designed to maintain 16 continuous uninterrupted service at all times. 17 18 B. The temporary bypass pumping system shall consist of a primary and a 19 backup pumping system. The primary and backup system shall be complete, 20 independent, and redundant and be capable of starting and operating 21 automatically based on a water level signal. The primary and backup system 22 shall each have dedicated power and control components. 23 24 2.04 POWER AND CONTROLS 25 26 A. The bypass pumping system shall be controlled by a water level signal from 27 the supply suction manhole. 28 29 B. The Contractor shall design, furnish, and install temporary power and controls 30 for the bypass pumping system and shall pay all power or energy costs for the 31 bypass pumping effort. 32 33 C. If electric power is proposed for the temporary bypass pumping system, two 34 sources of power shall be provided. One of the sources may be from the 35 Utility Company. The second power source shall be a temporary portable 36 generator of sufficient size to power all the pumps running at the same time. 37 The temporary generator shall also be capable of supporting two pumps 38 starting at locked rotor conditions at the same time. 39 40 2.05 ALARMS 41 42 A. The temporary bypass pumping system shall have a high level /alarm based on 43 the water level signal in the suction manhole. Activation of this alarm shall 44 cause a visual and audible alarm to occur at the pump controls. The high 45 level /alarm shall also activate an auto dialer and temporary telephone service 46 to notify the Contractor and the Owner of the high level alarm. The Contractor 47 shall be responsible for responding to the alarms and shall provide the Owner 48 with the phone numbers and emergency contacts of response personnel TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING PROVISIONS 13567 -3 07/15/14 1 capable of being reached 24 hours per day, 7 days per week. 2 3 PART 3 — EXECUTION 4 5 3.01 STARTUP AND OPERATION 6 7 A.. The Contractor shall demonstrate, mechanical, electrical, control, and alarm 8 function integrity of the bypass pumping system to the Engineer and the City 9 prior to beginning any rehabilitation work. The bypass pumping system must 10 function without failure for a period of 24 consecutive hours prior to beginning 11 any other site work. 12 13 B. The Contractor shall be responsible for operation and maintenance of the 14 temporary bypass pumping system 24 hours per day and shall not depend on 15 the Owner to perform any operations or maintenance tasks. 16 17 C. If diesel or gasoline powered pumps are used, the Contractor shall be 18 responsible for operating the pumps 24 hours per day and for keeping the 19 pumps fueled and maintained. The Contractor shall pay all fuel costs for 20 bypass pumping if diesel or gasoline powered pumps are used. 21 22 D. The Contractor shall be responsible for any wastewater spills that occur as a 23 result of the bypass pumping operation and shall pay any and all fines, fees, 24 property damage, environmental damage, and cleanup costs that are 25 associated with the wastewater spills. 26 27 END OF SECTION TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING PROVISIONS 13567 -4 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 13630 2 3 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. The existing filters and ancillary equipment are controlled by an Allen- Bradley 10 PLC -5 system located in the filter control panel (FCP or FCMP), EP -060. The 11 FCP EP -060 is located in the electrical room of the existing filter building. As 12 part of the work, the Contractor shall furnish and install a new local control 13 panel (LCP) for the operation of the six (6) rehabilitated filters specified in 14 Section 11366. The new LCP, referred to as LCP EP -104, shall be furnished 15 and installed by the Contractor where shown on the Drawings outside of the 16 existing filter building electrical room. 17 18 B. The I/O wired to the existing PLC -5 in the FCP EP -060 includes I/O for 19 controlling the six (6) existing filters, ancillary equipment, and other equipment 20 unrelated to the filters. All I/O related to the existing filters that is terminated in 21 the FCP EP -060 and required for operation of the rehabilitated filters shall be 22 extended and wired to the new LCP EP -104 provided by the Contractor. The 23 approximate quantity and type of I/O that will need to be extended from FCP 24 EP -060 and terminated into the new PLC EP -104 is provided herein. All I/O 25 that is not related to the six (6) filters shall remain intact in FCP EP -060. 26 27 C. Any new equipment and corresponding I/O related to the rehabilitation of the 28 six (6) filters shall be wired to the new LCP furnished and installed by the 29 Contractor as specified herein. 30 31 D. LCP EP -104 shall communicate with the existing plant SCADA System via 32 Ethernet/fiber optic. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing and 33 installing a new Ethernet/fiber optic cable to connect LCP EP -104 located at 34 the filter building to an existing Allen- Bradley Stratix managed switch located 35 in the East WRF's main Control Building. The fiber optic cable and ancillary 36 devices shall be as specified in Section 13640. 37 38 E. The Contractor shall furnish the services of a Systems Integrator to perform 39 the work of this section and all related Division 13 specifications, to install and 40 coordinate the start -up of the filters with the filter equipment manufacturer who 41 is providing the PLC program, and to test a complete and operable system as 42 indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. The Systems Integrator 43 shall have not less than 5 years verifiable experience in the water /wastewater 44 field. The Systems Integrator shall be Rocha Controls, Commerce Controls, 45 Curry Controls, or approved equal. 46 47 F. PLC ladder logic programming of the new filter PLC shall be provided by the 48 filter equipment manufacturer specified in Section 11366. HMI graphics, and LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CONFORMED 13630 -1 10/16/14 1 alarms for the monitoring and control of the filter equipment as specified 2 herein, shall be performed by the Systems Integrator. The Contractor shall be 3 responsible for furnishing, installing and testing the complete control system. 4 The Contractor shall be responsible for all labor, materials, equipment, 5 calibration, coordination and incidentals required to furnish and install the 6 control system specified or required. 7 8 G. These Specifications are intended to give a general description of what is 9 required, but do not cover all details, which will vary in accordance with the 10 requirements of the equipment furnished. They are, however, intended to 11 cover the furnishing, the shop testing, the delivery and complete installation 12 and field testing, of all materials equipment and appurtenances for the 13 complete system herein specified, whether or not specifically mentioned in the 14 Specifications. 15 16 H. For all systems, the Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary and 17 desirable accessory equipment and auxiliaries, whether or not specifically 18 mentioned in these Specifications. This work shall include field- testing of the 19 entire installation and instruction of the operating personnel in the care, 20 operation and maintenance of all equipment. 21 22 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS 23 24 A. The Contractor, thru the Systems Integrator, shall assume full responsibility for 25 the satisfactory installation and operation of the control system. 26 27 B. All equipment furnished under these Specifications shall be new and unused 28 and shall be the standard cataloged product of a manufacturer having a 29 successful record of manufacturing and servicing the equipment and systems 30 specified herein. 31 32 1.03 SUBMITTALS 33 34 A. Copies of all materials required to establish compliance with the Specifications 35 shall be submitted in accordance with the General Conditions and the General 36 Requirements. Submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 37 38 1. Shop drawings prepared by the manufacturer and submitted to the 39 Engineer for review prior to the manufacture of the equipment. The 40 shop drawings shall include outline dimensions and external connection 41 diagrams. A list of components, interface cables, specifications and a 42 copy of the manufacturer's warranty shall be included with the 43 submitted data. 44 45 2. Operating Instructions: The Contractor shall submit operation and 46 maintenance manuals for the entire control system. 47 48 a. General - equipment function, description and normal and LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CONFORMED 13630 -2 10/16/14 1 I1 limiting operating characteristics. 2 I 3 b. Installation instructions - assembly procedures and alignment 4 and adjustment procedures. 5 I 6 c. Operation instructions - start-up procedures, normal operating 7 conditions, emergency and normal shutdown procedure. 8 I 9 10 d. Maintenance instructions. 11 e. Trouble- shooting guide. I 12 13 f. Parts list and predicted life of parts subject to wear. 14 15 g. Drawings - cross sectional view, assembly and wiring diagrams. 1 16 17 3. Complete master wiring diagrams and control schematics shall be 18 furnished for approval before proceeding with manufacture or I 19 20 modification of an existing panel. 21 4. Ethernet Network Drawings: furnish an Ethernet network drawing I 22 showing cable types, all equipment (new and existing) connected to the 23 Ethernet network, and IP addresses. 24 I 25 5. Certifications: The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a written 26 certification signed by the manufacturer's representative that the 27 equipment has been properly installed, tested, calibrated, and operated I 28 under typical operating conditions, and satisfactory operation has been 29 obtained. 30 ' 31 6. The Contractor through the Systems Integrator shall provide to the 32 Owner and Engineer a completed as -built drawing showing the actual 33 control components and devices (show existing and new devices) that 34 are mounted in the existing panels after modification. Drawing shall 1 35 also include identification of each wire in the existing panel to which 36 terminal strip it is connected, circuit breaker identification, Flex I/O 37 modules and corresponding I /O, etc. Two additional copies of the panel I 38 as -built shall be placed in the pocket holder on the door of the new 39 panel. 40 I 41 1.04 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 42 43 A. Operating and maintenance manuals shall be furnished in accordance with I 44 45 Section 01730. The manuals shall be prepared specifically for this installation and shall include all required cuts, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, 46 programming logic, calibration requirements, etc., that are required to instruct I 47 48 operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment the number and special requirements shall be as specified. 49 1 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CONFORMED 13630 -3 10/16/14 1 1.05 SPARE PARTS 2 3 A. The Contractor shall furnish the following spare parts: 4 5 1. One (1) spare of each type of PLC I/O module shall be provided. 6 2. One (1) spare DC power supply of each size and type shall be 7 provided. 8 3. Fuses: 20 percent of each size and type use, but no less than ten of 9 each size and type. 10 4. Relays: 20 percent of each type used, but no less than ten of each 11 type. 12 5. One copy of the PLC program, after debugging, recorded on CD -ROM 13 for each PLC. 14 6. One spare Operator Interface Terminal (OIT). 15 7. Corrosion Inhibiting Vapor Capsules: Provide 100 of each type and 16 size used. 17 18 B. Spare parts shall be properly protected for long periods of storage and packed 19 in a box clearly identified with indelible markings as to the contents in 20 accordance with Division 1 General Requirements. 21 22 1.06 WARRANTY 23 24 A. The Contractor shall provide a warranty in accordance with Section 01740 and 25 shall guarantee that the equipment furnished is suitable for the purpose 26 intended and free from defects of design, material and workmanship. In the 27 event the equipment fails to perform as specified, the Contractor shall 28 promptly repair or replace the defective equipment without any cost to the 29 Owner (including handling, shipment and labor costs). 30 31 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 32 33 2.01 EXISTING PANEL MODIFICATIONS 34 35 A. The following is the approximate quantity of existing I/O that is terminated in 36 the existing FCP EP -060 that the Contractor shall relocate to the new panel 37 LCP EP -104. 38 39 1. Digital Inputs (DI): 60 40 2. Digital Output (DO): 80 41 42 B. Upon rehabilitation of each filter cell including testing of all automatic 43 operations, the cell shall be operated using the new filter LCP EP -104, except 44 that an automatic filter backwash cycle shall be manually initiated until all 45 filters are rehabilitated. Existing filter cells that have not been rehabilitated 46 shall continue to be operated using the existing PLC until the filter 47 rehabilitation work is complete. The Contractor shall coordinate the services 48 of the Systems Integrator with those of the filter manufacturer as needed LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CONFORMED 13630 -4 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 during construction. 2 3 C. For all I/O that is being relocated to LCP EP -104, the Contractor shall remove 4 all existing hardware, wiring, circuit breakers, contact relays, and other 5 components in the existing panel (EP -060) that are not being used due to the 6 relocation. Existing PLC modules shall not be removed and shall remain 7 installed in the existing PLC rack. Extending wires from EP -060 to EP -104 8 shall be performed using terminal blocks installed in EP -060. Splicing and 9 joining wires using wire nuts is NOT be acceptable. 10 11 D. The existing filters are equipped with existing local filter control consoles that 12 are wired to the existing FCP EP -060. All wiring from the existing local filter 13 control consoles shall also be extended to the new filter LCP EP -104. 14 15 E. Additional components and wiring in the existing panels shall be installed in a 16 manner that meets the specifications herein to provide the monitoring and 17 control of equipment specified in this section. 18 19 2.02 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS 20 21 A. All new local control panels (LCP) shall be NEMA 4X 316 S.S. All panels 22 shall be as manufactured by Hoffman or approved equal. 23 24 B. The panel shall be the free standing type complete with PLC and Operator 25 Interface Terminal (OIT) as specified herein. 26 27 C. The new filter LCP EP -104 will be located in a non -air conditioned space as 28 shown on the Drawings. As such all components, wiring, and equipment 29 furnished and installed in a LCP shall be designed to operate between 0 — 55 30 degrees C without air conditioning. 31 32 D. Unless otherwise specified on applicable panel drawings, all panels shall be of 33 the fully enclosed type designed for use with high density instrumentation 34 mounting. 35 36 E. Conductors running from the field to the panels shall be continuous without 37 splices, except at approved junction boxes. The junction boxes shall have 38 terminal blocks with 20 percent spare terminals. Special care shall be 39 exercised to carry grounding lines through such junction boxes with the least 40 possible resistance. Cables entering panels shall be multi- conductor. Conduit 41 and multi - conductor cables entering panels shall be sealed to prevent the 42 intrusion of gas and moisture. 43 44 F. Multi- conductor cable shall be used between junction boxes and the panels. 45 46 G. The LCP panels shall be completely fabricated, with instruments installed and 47 wired, at the System Integrator's facility. 48 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CONFORMED 13630 -.5 10/16/14 1 H. All components shall be mounted in a manner that permits servicing, 2 adjustment, testing and removal without disconnecting, moving or removing 3 any other component. Components mounted on the inside of panels shall be 4 mounted on removable plates and not directly to the enclosure. Mounting 5 shall be rigid and stable unless shock mounting is otherwise required by the 6 manufacturer to protect equipment from vibration. Component mounting shall 7 be oriented in accordance with other internal components and shall be 8 identified with suitable plastic or metal engraved tags attached with drive pins 9 adjacent to (not on) each component, identifying the component in accordance 10 with the drawing, specifications, and System Integrator's data. 11 12 I. All exterior panel mounted equipment shall be installed with suitable gaskets, 13 faceplates, etc. required to maintain the NEMA rating of the panel. 14 15 J. All panels shall be supplied with suitable nameplates that identify the panel 16 and individual devices. 17 18 K. All panels and panel assemblies shall be assembled by a UL 508 approved 19 panel shop. Each panel and panel assembly shall bear the mark of such. 20 21 L. Panels shall be constructed of steel with angle or channel bracing. Side filler 22 panels, top filler panels, and sub panels shall be 12 gauge steel. Panels shall 23 be suitable for the environments they are to be installed within. 24 25 M. Panels shall be of continuous welded steel construction. Provide steel angle 26 stiffeners as required on the back of the panel face to prevent panel deflection 27 under instrument loading or operation. Internally the panels shall be supplied 28 with a structural steel framework for instrument support purposes and panel 29 bracing. The internal framework shall permit panel lifting without racking or 30 distortion. Provide removable lifting rings designed to facilitate simple, safe 31 rigging, and lifting of the control panels during installation. Plugs shall be 32 provided and shall unobtrusively fill the panel lifting ring holes when 33 substituted for the lifting rings after installation is complete. All exposed welds, 34 seams, or edges shall be ground smooth. 35 36 N. Each panel shall be provided with full height, fully gasketed access doors. 37 Doors shall be provided with a three point latch and heavy duty locking handle. 38 Rear access doors shall be conveniently arranged and sized such that they 39 extend no further than 24 inches beyond the panel when opened to the 90 40 degree position. Panel access doors shall be provided with full length, 41 continuous, piano type, steel hinges with stainless steel pins. 42 43 O. The panels, including component parts, shall be constructed and assembled in 44 a thoroughly workmanlike manner and shall be free from sharp edges and 45 welding flaws. Wiring shall be free from kinks and sharp bends and shall be 46 routed for easy access to other components for maintenance and inspection 47 purposes. 48 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CONFORMED 13630 -6 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 P. Provide overhead switched lighting and at least one (1) GFI convenience 2 duplex receptacle 110/120VAC in each panel. 3 4 Q. The panel shall be suitable for top or bottom conduit entry as required. For top 5 mounted conduit entry the panel top shall be provided with nominal one foot 6 square removable access plates, which may be drilled to accommodate 7 conduit and cable penetrations. All conduit and cable penetrations shall be 8 provided with ground bushings, hubs, gasketed Iocknuts, or other accessories 9 as required to maintain the NEMA rating of the panel and electrical rating of 10 the conduit system. 11 12 R. Internal Electrical Wiring 13 14 1. Panel equipment shall be mounted and wired on or within the cabinet. 15 Wiring shall comply with the National Electrical Code. Wiring within the 16 panel shall be grouped together with harnesses or ducts and secured to 17 the structure. Wiring shall be numbered in compliance with the 18 numbering system used on the wiring /connection diagrams. Wiring and 19 connection diagrams shall comply with ISA 5.4 Instrument Loop 20 Diagrams and shall be submitted by the System Integrator as part of 21 the Shop Drawings for review by the Engineer. 22 23 2. Power and low voltage DC signal wiring shall be routed in separate wire 24 ways. Crossing of the two system wires shall be at right angles. 25 26 3. Control wire shall be 14 AWG Type THWN stranded and shall be insu- 27 lated for not less than 600 volts unless specified otherwise. Conductors 28 shall be of tinned copper construction. All interconnecting wiring, 29 except for electronic circuits, shall be rated for not less than 90 degrees 30 C. 31 32 4. Signal wire shall be 1 pair 16 AWG shielded. Conductors shall be of 33 tinned copper construction. 34 35 5. Wire color shall be: Line Power - Black; Neutral or Common - White; 36 AC Control - Red; DC Control - Blue; Equipment or Chassis 37 Ground - Green; specified externally powered circuits - Orange. 38 39 6. Wiring shall terminate at a master terminal board, rigid type and 40 numbered. The master terminal board shall have a minimum of 25 41 percent spares. 42 43 7. Terminal blocks shall be arranged in vertical rows and separated into 44 groups (Power, AC control, and DC signal). 45 46 8. Terminal blocks shall be barrier type with the appropriate voltage rating 47 (600 volts minimum). Terminal strips shall be provided for the purpose 48 of connecting all control and signal wiring. They shall be the raised LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CONFORMED 13630 -7 10/16/14 1 channel mounted type as manufactured by Allen Bradley or approved 2 equal. 3 4 9. Wiring trough for supporting internal wiring shall be plastic type with 5 snap on covers. The side walls shall be open top type to permit wire 6 changing without disconnecting. Trough shall be supported to the sub 7 panel by stainless steel screws. Trough shall not be bonded to the 8 panel with glue or adhesives. 9 10 10. Each wire shall be provided with numbered heat shrink tubing 11 identification markers at both ends and the numbering shall be in 12 accordance with the Control Panel Drawings. Identification markers 13 shall be pre- typed. Handwritten markers or paper markers are not 14 permitted. 15 16 11. Direct interlock wiring between equipment is not allowed. Only one side 17 of a terminal block row shall be used for internal wiring. The field wiring 18 side of the terminal shall not be within 6- inches of the side panel or 19 adjacent terminal. 20 21 12. Wiring troughs shall not be more than 60 percent visible fill. Wiring 22 trough covers shall be match marked to identify placement. If 23 component identification is shown on covers for visibility, the ID shall 24 also appear on the mounting sub - panel. 25 26 13. Each panel shall be provided with an isolated copper grounding bus for 27 all signal and shield ground connections. Shield grounding shall be in 28 accordance with the instrumentation manufacturer's recommendations. 29 30 14. Each panel shall be provided with a separate copper power grounding 31 bus (safety) in accordance with the requirements of the National 32 Electrical Code. 33 34 15. Each panel, where required, shall be provided with analog signal 35 isolation (1 /1) where analog signals are sent from one panel or console 36 to another. 37 38 16. Each panel shall be provided with surge suppression protection 39 (electrical transients) for connections between AC power systems and 40 electrical and electronic equipment. Surge suppressor grounding shall 41 be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 42 43 17. All wiring to hand switches and the like that are live circuits independent 44 of the panel's normal circuit breaker protection shall be clearly identified 45 as such. 46 47 S. Relays not provided under Division 11, 15, or 16 and required for properly 48 completing the control function defined in this Section, shown on the LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CONFORMED 13630 -8 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Drawings, or required for the proper operation of the equipment being 2 provided shall be provided under this Section. For example, discrete field 3 control and status circuitry shall be isolated from PLC I/O termination boards 4 using relays. Relays shall have red LED indicators that illuminate upon coil 5 energization. 6 7 T Relays shall be mounted in their respective panel and shall be clearly 8 identified as being live circuits independent of the panel's normal circuit 9 breaker protection. 10 11 U. Nameplates shall be provided for flush mounted equipment. The nameplates 12 shall be approximately 1 -in x 3 -in constructed of black and white laminated, 13 phenolic material having engraved Helvetica letters approximately 1 /4 -in high, 14 extending through the black face into the white layer. Nameplates shall be 15 beveled and attached to panels by self- tapping stainless steel screws. 16 Adhesive bonded or glued -on name plates shall not be accepted. 17 18 V Components shall be mounted in a manner that permits servicing, adjustment, 19 testing, and removal without disconnecting, moving or removing any other 20 component. 21 22 W. Components shall be mounted on plates on the inside of panels in such a 23 manner that allows for removal of the components without removal of the 24 plate. Components shall not be mounted directly to the enclosure. 25 26 X. Internal components shall be identified with suitable plastic engraved name 27 plates attached with stainless steel drive pins adjacent to (not on) each 28 component identifying the component in compliance with the Drawings, 29 Specifications, and System Supplier's data. 30 31 2.03 INSTRUMENT IDENTIFICATION 32 33 A. All components provided, both field and panel mounted, shall be provided with 34 permanently mounted name tags bearing the entire tag number of the 35 component. Panel mounted tags shall be white with black lettering lamicoid 36 plastic; field mounted tags shall be stamped stainless steel. 37 38 B. Nameplates for panels and panel mounted equipment shall be as indicated on 39 the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. 40 41 C. Field mounted tags shall be 16 -gauge 316 stainless steel, with 3/16 -inch high 42 characters. 43 44 D. Tags shall be attached to equipment with a commercial tag holder using a 45 stainless steel band with a worm screw clamping device or by a holder 46 fabricated with standard stainless steel hose clamps and meeting the same 47 description. In some cases where this would be impractical, use 20 -gauge 48 stainless steel wire. LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CONFORMED 13630 -9 10/16/14 1 2 E. For field panels or large equipment cases, use stainless steel screws, 3 however, such permanent attachment shall not be on an ordinarily replaceable 4 part. In all cases, the tag shall be plainly visible to a standing observer and 5 not obscure adjustment ports or impair the function of the instrument. Field 6 mounted control stations, recorders or indicators shall have a nameplate 7 indicating their function and the variable controlled or displayed. Nameplate 8 shall be attached by one of the above methods. 9 10 2.04 PANEL COMPONENTS 11 12 A. LCP shall accept a 110/120 VAC, 60 hertz, single phase power input and be 13 equipped with a fused disconnect switch. When the disconnect switch is in the 14 open position, all power shall be removed from the control system. The LCP 15 shall also be equipped with a 120VAC transient voltage surge suppressor 16 (TVSS). 17 18 B. Industrial Relays and Time Delays 19 20 1. Type: 21 22 a. Industrial heavy duty relays. 23 24 2. Functional /Performance: 25 26 a. Contact arrangement/function shall be as required to meet the 27 specified control function. 28 29 b. Contacts shall be rated 10 amps continuous at 600 volts. 30 31 c. Relays shall be provided with convertible contact blocks. 32 33 d. Pneumatic time delay relays shall be used on time delays less 34 than 180 seconds and shall be adjustable. 35 36 a Solid state time delay relays shall be used on time delays 37 between 180 seconds and one -hour. 38 39 3. Options /Accessories Required: 40 41 a. Provide all mounting rails, etc., as required. 42 43 4. Manufacturers: 44 45 a. Allen Bradley 46 47 b. Square D 48 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CONFORMED 13630 -10 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 C. General Purppse Relays and Time Delays 2 3 1. Relays shall be double pole, double throw, octal plug in type with a 4 transparent dust cover. The relay shall be equipped with an indicating 5 Tight to indicate when its coil is energized. The mechanical life of the 6 relay shall be 10,000,000 operations, minimum. 7 8 a. Type: 9 10 (1) Units shall be of the general purpose plug -in type. 11 12 b. Functional /Performance: 13 14 (1) Coil voltage shall match supply voltage. 15 16 (2) Contact arrangement/function shall be as required to meet 17 the specified control function. 18 19 c. Duty cycle shall be rated for continuous operation. 20 21 d. Solid state time delays shall be provided with polarity protection 22 (DC units) and transient protection. 23 24 e. Time delay units shall be adjustable and available in ranges from 25 0.1 second to 4.5 hours. 26 27 2. Physical: 28 29 a. For 120VAC service, provide contacts rated 10 amps at 30 120VAC; for 24VDC service provide contacts rated 5 amps at 31 28VDC, for electronic (milliamp/ millivolt) switching applicator 32 provide gold plated contacts rated for electronic service. 33 34 b. Relays shall be provided with dust and moisture resistant covers. 35 36 3. Options /Accessories Required: 37 38 a. Provide mounting sockets with pressure type terminal blocks 39 rated 300 volt and 10 amps. 40 41 b. Provide mounting rails /holders as required. 42 43 4. Manufacturers: 44 45 a. Allen Bradley 46 47 b. Potter & Brumfield 48 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CONFORMED 13630 -11 10/16/14 1 c. Eagle Signal Controls 2 3 D. Signal Isolators /Boosters /Converters 4 5 1. Type: 6 7 a. Externally powered solid state electronic type. Loop powered 8 devices are not acceptable. 9 10 2. Functional /Performance: 11 12 a. Accuracy - 0.15 percent. 13 14 b. Inputs - Current, voltage, frequency, temperature, or resistance 15 as required. 16 17 c. Outputs - Current or voltage as required. 18 19 d. Isolation - There shall be complete isolation between input 20 circuitry, output circuitry, and the power supply. 21 22 e. Adjustments - Zero and span adjustment shall be provided. 23 24 f. Protection - Provide RFI protection. 25 26 3. Physical: 27 28 a. Mounting - Suitable for mounting in an enclosure or instrument 29 rack. 30 31 4. Options /Accessories Required: 32 33 a. Mounting rack or general purpose enclosure as required. 34 35 5. Manufacturers: 36 37 a. Phoenix Contact or approved equal 38 39 40 E. Signal Relay Switches (Current Trips) 41 42 1. Type: 43 44 a. Solid state electronic type. 45 46 2. Functional /Performance: 47 48 a. Input - 4 -20 mA. LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CONFORMED 13630 -12 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 b. Output - Isolated contact output, double pole double throw, rated 3 5 amps at 120 VAC. 4 5 c. Accuracy - 0.1 percent. 6 7 d. Protection - Provide RFI protection. 8 9 e. Deadband - Adjustable between 0.1 to 5.0 percent of span. 10 11 f. Setpoint Adjustment - Provide graduated dial for each alarm 12 setpoint from 0 to full scale. Alarms shall be adjustable to trip on 13 rising or falling input signal. 14 15 g. Repeatability - Trip point repeatability shall be at least 0.1 16 percent of span. 17 18 3. Physical: 19 20 a. Mounting - Suitable for mounting in an enclosure or high density 21 instrument rack. 22 23 4. Options /Accessories Required: 24 25 a. Mounting rack or general purpose enclosure as required. 26 27 5. Manufacturers: 28 29 a. Rochester Instrument Systems 30 31 b. Acromag Inc. 32 33 c. Moore Industries 34 35 F. Intrinsically Safe Relays 36 37 1. Type: 38 39 a. Relays shall be of the solid state electronic type in which the 40 energy level of the sensing or actuation circuit is low enough to 41 allow safe usage in hazardous areas. 42 43 2. Options /Accessories Required: 44 45 a. Relays shall match power supply provided. 46 47 b. Relays shall be located in non - hazardous areas. 48 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CONFORMED 13630 -13 10/16/14 1 3. Manufacturers: 2 3 a. Consolidated Electric 4 5 b. Gems Safe -Pak 6 7 c. Warrick Controls 8 9 d. R. Stahl, Inc. 10 11 G. All other relays, switches, timers, lights, and ancillary control devices, ancillary 12 wiring, and hardware, whether specified herein or not, and required for a 13 complete and operational control system shall be furnished and installed. 14 15 2.04 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC) SYSTEM 16 17 A. A PLC shall be furnished and installed in the new filter LCP. 18 19 B. The PLC shall be an Allen - Bradley CompactLogix 5370 Model 1769- L33ER, 20 with Dual Ethernet, 2MB memory, and 2GB SD card. 21 22 C. The PLC shall be furnished with an Allen - Bradley series 1769 Power Supply to 23 provide power to the PLC and all I/O modules. 24 25 D. The PLC shall be furnished with sufficient I/O modules for all I/O plus 20% 26 installed spare. All I/O modules (Al, AO, DI, DO) shall be series 1769 as 27 manufactured by Allen- Bradley. 28 29 E. All installed I/O shall be wired to terminal blocks for field termination. 30 31 F. All input/output shall be color coded and titled with a distinctive label. 32 33 G. PLC Programming Software 34 35 1. The filter manufacturer specified in Section 11366 shall be responsible 36 for developing the program for controlling the filters. As such, the filter 37 equipment manufacturer shall possess a complete licensed copy of the 38 latest version of Rockwell Automation RSLogix, RSLinx and RSNetworx 39 programming software compatible with the PLC specified herein. 40 41 2. The filter manufacturer shall supply all programming necessary to 42 provide a fully debugged and operating system. The software required 43 shall consist of those programs necessary for the equipment to 44 efficiently perform the functions specified herein or other parts of the 45 Contract Documents. The Contractor shall provide any and all 46 additional controls required for smooth operation of the system, whether 47 or not specified herein, at no additional cost to the Owner. The Owner 48 and Engineer shall not be required to expend any programming effort in LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CONFORMED 13630 -14 10/16/14 1 order to achieve a fully operational system. 2 3 2.05 OPERATOR INTERFACE TERMINAL (OIT) 4 5 A. The LCP shall be furnished with a color active - matrix TFT, 15 -inch 6 touchscreen and keypad OIT. 7 8 B. The OIT shall communicate with the PLC via Ethernet. 9 10 C. Door mounted touchscreen and keypad OIT shall be Allen- Bradley Panelview 11 Plus 2711 P- B15C4A8. 12 13 D. The OIT shall be furnished with Rockwell Automation Factory Talk Studio 14 software to allow the Systems Integrator to develop graphic screens for the 15 OIT to control the filter. 16 17 2.06 DC POWER SUPPLIES 18 19 A. 24VDC power supplies shall be provided in the control panels. 24VDC power 20 supplies shall be switching type, din rail mountable power supplies. 21 22 B. 24VDC power supplies shall be approved for use in UL -580 industrial control 23 cabinets. 24 25 C. Provide fuse or short- circuit protection. Provide a minimum of 1 set of dry 26 contacts configured to change state on failure for monitoring and signaling 27 purposes. 28 29 D. Operating temperature range: 0 degrees Celsius to 50 degrees Celsius. 30 31 E. Touch safe design: All connection terminals to be protected against accidental 32 touch. 33 34 F. Provide self - protecting power supplies with a means of limiting DC current in 35 case of short circuit. 36 37 G. 24VDC power supplies shall be Allen Bradley 1606 Series Power Supply. 38 39 2.07 UPS AND SURGE SUPPRESSION 40 41 A. An Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) shall be furnished in the LCP to 42 operate all critical components of the panel in the event of a power failure. 43 44 B. The UPS shall provide backup power for the entire PLC system including PLC 45 power supply, I/O modules, 24VDC power supplies and any other devices 46 inside the LCP. 47 48 C. The UPS shall be capable of sustaining the operation of the equipment for a LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CONFORMED 13630 -15 10/16/14 1 1 1 minimum ten (10) minutes in the event of a power failure. 2 3 D. There shall be no measureable break in the output power of the UPS during 4 transfer from normal AC line supply to battery power or from battery power 5 back to normal AC line supply. 6 7 F Exact sizing of the UPS shall be the responsibility of the Systems Integrator. 8 Submit LCP load calculation with UPS product data showing compliance with 9 specifications. 1 10 11 G. The UPS shall be capable of providing surge suppression for all equipment in 12 the event of a surge or spike on the incoming 120VAC power lines. 1 13 14 H. The UPS shall be by Allen - Bradley. 15 16 2.08 MANAGED SWITCHES 17 18 A. Where shown on the drawings or required for proper communication, Ethernet 19 switches shall be furnished and installed in LCPs. 20 21 B. All switches shall be capable of 10/100BT/X connection speeds and shall 22 auto - detect the appropriate speed for communication with the connected 23 device. 24 25 C. All switches shall have one port capable of being configured as an uplink port 26 to another switch for future expansion or shall provide an expansion slot for 27 this purpose. ' 28 29 D. All switches shall be capable of operating on 110- 120VAC /60Hz or 24VDC 30 power. 1 31 32 E. All switches shall be capable of operation in a temperature range from 0 to 55 33 deg C with relative humidity of 90% non - condensing. 34 35 F. All switches shall provide diagnostic indicators for each channel indicating 36 connection speed, traffic and collision status. 37 38 G. All switches shall be capable of DIN rail mounting as designed or through the 39 use of a provided kit. 40 41 H. Managed switches shall be equipped with four (4) RJ45 Ethernet ports and 42 two (2) fiber optic ports. 43 44 I. Managed switches shall be Allen- Bradley Stratix Switch 1783 series. 45 46 J. The Systems Integrator shall be responsible for configuring the Ethernet 47 switch (IP address, subnet, etc.) to be compatible with the existing Ethernet 48 network. LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CONFORMED 13630 -16 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2.09 ETHERNET MEDIA AND SURGE SUPPRESSION 3 4 A. The network equipment shall be connected using pre - molded Cat -5e or Cat -6 5 patch cords with RJ -45 connectors. Lengths shall be as required. 6 7 B. If it is not possible to use pre - molded cables due to installation requirements, 8 plenum rated Cat -5e or Cat -6 cable shall be used. In addition, a qualified 9 installer must be employed to make the RJ -45 connections at each end of the 10 Ethernet run, as well as to test the cable. Testing shall include a computer 11 generated print -out of the test results, including pin connections and dB Toss in 12 the cable. Furnish test results to the Engineer. 13 14 C. All non -fiber communications cables leaving a PLC panel or a network 15 enclosure shall be equipped with surge suppression devices capable of 16 protecting the communications cards in the event of a voltage spike on the 17 communications line. 18 19 D. Ethernet surge suppression rated for Cat 5/6 and POE applications shall be 20 fully shielded, provide protection for all pins, and shall be DEHN 929 121. 21 Substitutions will not be considered by the City. 22 23 2.10 LIGHTNING /SURGE SUPPRESSION 24 25 A. General - in addition to manufacturer's standard, internal protection, 26 supplementary lightning /surge protection shall be provided to protect all 27 systems from surges propagating along the signal and power supply lines. 28 The protection systems shall be such that the protective level shall not 29 interfere with normal operation, but shall be lower than the instrument surge 30 withstand level, and shall be maintenance -free and self- restoring. Instruments 31 shall be housed in a suitable metallic case, and properly grounded. Ground 32 wires for all surge protectors shall be connected to a good earth ground and, 33 where practical, each ground wire shall be run individually and insulated from 34 each other. These protectors and specified instrumentation /transmitters shall 35 be mounted in a separate NEMA 3R stainless steel vented enclosure. The 36 units shall be manufactured by DEHN. Substitutions will not be considered by 37 the City. 38 39 B. Power supply - additional protection of all alternating current (ac) instrument 40 power supply lines shall be provided. Cabinet(s) /panel(s) and groups of field 41 instruments, as approved by the Engineer, shall be protected by isolation 42 transformers and surge suppressors. Individual field instruments shall be 43 protected by high discharge heavy -duty zinc oxide varistors /spark gap 44 combination. The ac suppressor shall have a response time of less than 25 45 nanoseconds, a surge current rating of 4kA, an input voltage of 120 VAC, 46 50/60 Hz, and have a 6kAms short- circuit withstand capability. Surge 47 protection device model 953 204 manufactured by DEHN. Substitutions will 48 not be considered by the City. LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CONFORMED 13630 -17 10/16/14 1 2 C. Signal line - protection of all field analog, discrete, digital and telemetered 3 signal lines shall be provided. Protection devices shall be installed at the both 4 ends as close to the instrument being protected as possible. Where signal 5 lines enter control rooms through an interface cabinet, the protection devices 6 shall be mounted in the interface cabinet. Protection shall be with the use of 7 silicone avalanche diodes or approved equal. The suppressor shall be 8 capable of protecting a signal pair plus the cable shield with a DC clamping 9 level of 33V, be rated 20kA nominal discharge current and have at least a 10 0.75A current rating. Surge protection device model 920 300 + 926 324 11 manufactured by DEHN. Substitutions will not be considered by the City. 12 13 2.11 IP ADDRESSING 14 15 A. The existing plant network has an IP address scheme defined for some 16 existing equipment. All new equipment requiring IP addresses shall be 17 assigned IP addresses matching the existing plant network IP address 18 scheme to allow the complete and operational control of all equipment as 19 specified herein. 20 21 B. The Contractor shall submit a list of proposed IP addresses for all new 22 equipment requiring IP addresses to be approved by the Owner. 23 24 2.12 FIBER OPTIC CONVERTERS 25 26 A. Media converters shall be industrially hardened and rated for use in the 27 environment specified or shown. Office grade media converters are not 28 acceptable. 29 30 B. The copper side of each media converter shall be a 10/100BT/X RJ -45 31 connector. The media converter shall support both 10Base -T and 100Base- 32 TX Ethernet. 33 34 C. The fiber side of each media converter shall be a standard ST or SC 35 connector. 36 37 D. The media converter shall provide an auxiliary RJ -45 port to maintain a local 38 programming connection for a laptop. 39 40 E. Sufficient quantities of Cat -5e or Cat -6 patch cable and fiber patch cables with 41 appropriate connectors shall be provided and installed where a fiber 42 connection is required. Patch cables shall conform to the specification 43 provided herein. 44 45 F. Fiber Optic Converters shall be as manufactured by Phoenix Contact or 46 approved equal. 47 48 2.13 CORROSION CONTROL LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CONFORMED 13630 -18 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 2 A. Panels shall be protected from internal corrosion by the use of 3 corrosion - inhibiting vapor capsules as manufactured by Northern Instruments 4 Model Zerust VC, Hoffman Engineering Model A -HCI or approved equal. 5 6 2.14 OIT GRAPHIC SCREENS 7 8 A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review all OIT graphic screens 9 in color print on 8.5" x 11" sized paper. The Contractor shall provide the 10 following as a minimum for all OIT graphic screens: 11 12 1. All new OIT graphics for the filters shall generally match the existing 13 filter HMI graphics and include any new equipment installed as part of 14 the project. 15 16 2. All 4 -20mA signals, such as level, pressure and flow signals, shall be 17 capable of being "trended" (depict historical data) on the OIT. 18 19 3. Each filter cell shall have a minimum one (1) dedicated OIT graphic 20 screen for control and monitoring of the filter equipment/backwash 21 operations. 22 23 2.15 EXISTING SCADA HMI GRAPHICS 24 25 A. The existing plant SCADA HMI System software is Rockwell Automation 26 Factory Talk. 27 28 B. The existing SCADA HMI graphics screens for all equipment related to the six 29 filters that are being rehabilitated shall be modified /updated to match those 30 screens developed on the OIT. 31 32 C. The Systems Integrator shall be responsible for remapping the I/O in the 33 SCADA HMI System for the I/O that was relocated from FCP EP -060 to LCP 34 EP -104 so that the monitoring and control functions that are on the existing 35 SCADA HMI System are available on the new HMI. 36 37 D. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner for approval all SCADA HMI graphic 38 screens that are being modified /updated for the filter system in color print on 39 8.5" x 11" sized paper. 40 41 PART 3 - EXECUTION 42 43 3.01 INSTALLATION 44 45 A. The work included in this section consists of furnishing, installing and placing 46 in operation the instruments and appurtenances, including all conduit, wiring 47 and circuitry necessary to provide the Owner with a fully operable system 48 properly calibrated and installed. LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CONFORMED 13630 -19 10/16/14 1 2 B. Install and mount equipment in accordance with the Contract Documents, 3 manufacturer's instructions and installation detailed shop drawings. Mount 4 equipment so that it is rigidly supported, level and plumb, and in such a 5 manner as to provide accessibility; protection from damage; isolation from 6 heat, shock and vibration; and freedom from interference with other 7 equipment, piping and electrical. 8 9 C. Include the services of a factory trained, qualified service engineer of the 10 equipment manufacturer and the Systems Integrator to inspect the complete 11 equipment installation to assure that it is installed in accordance with the 12 manufacturer's recommendations, make all adjustments necessary to place 13 the system in trouble -free operation and instruct the operating personnel in the 14 proper care and operation of the equipment furnished. 15 16 D. All workmanship utilized in the manufacture and installation of this system 17 shall be of the highest quality and performed in a manner consistent with all 18 accepted practices for industrial controls. 19 20 3.02 START -UP SUPERVISION 21 22 A. The Systems Integrator shall provide a qualified service technician to inspect 23 all final connections and check the system prior to start-up. The service 24 technician shall coordinate with the Owner's representative and the filter 25 manufacturer's representative for functional check -out of the complete system. 26 27 B. The Systems Integrator shall be on site during start-up of the system to make 28 adjustments and tune the system as deemed necessary by the filter 29 manufacturer's representative and the Engineer. 30 31 3.03 FIELD TESTS AND ACCEPTANCE 32 33 A. Field tests shall consist of the sequential installation check -out, Field 34 Acceptance Test and Final Inspection. Each phase of testing shall not be 35 commenced until the preceding phase is complete as determined by the 36 Engineer. 37 38 B. Field Test: When the operating setpoints have been established to the 39 satisfaction of the Engineer and the facility is complete and ready for 40 operation, the PLC and associated components shall be inspected and tested 41 for compliance with the Contract Documents. Testing of the equipment shall 42 be made by the Contractor in the presence of the Systems Integrator, the 43 Engineer, the Electrical subcontractor, the filter equipment manufacturer's 44 representative, and the Owner's representative. The equipment field tests 45 shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 46 47 1. Controls: Controls shall be tested to determine satisfactory 48 performance. LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CONFORMED 13630 -20 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2. Electrical: Contractor shall record readings of voltage and amperage 3 on all electrical components at start and steady state operating 4 conditions. Such readings shall be recorded on a form provided by the 5 manufacturer and the results shall meet the manufacturer's prescribed 6 limits. If a tested item fails to meet its requirements, then it shall be 7 replaced. Results of the tests, including the serial number of the 8 accessories tested, shall be furnished to the Engineer. 9 10 3. Inspection: A thorough inspection of all mechanical and electrical 11 equipment and controls, fittings, brackets, mountings, seals, conduit, 12 painting, components, and features shall be made while the facility is 13 being tested to determine performance and compliance with design 14 requirements and specifications. 15 16 4. Repairs, Adjustments and Replacements: The Systems Integrator shall 17 make any and all necessary repairs, adjustments, and replacements 18 until performance has been demonstrated to the satisfaction of the 19 Engineer. The Contractor shall bear the cost of any repair, adjustment 20 and replacement. 21 22 5. Upon completion of the installation, the LCP equipment manufacturer's 23 field service technician shall furnish a certificate of compliance stating 24 that the local control panel and all components and materials have 25 been installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 26 27 3.04 TRAINING 28 29 A. Provide up to eight (8) hours of operator training by the Systems Integrator in 30 accordance with Section 01820 to train the Owner's personnel. Training shall 31 highlight procedures on navigating through screens, adjusting setpoints, and 32 turning on /off equipment through the OIT. Training shall also include the 33 operation and maintenance of all networking equipment and the new filter 34 control panel PLC. 35 36 3.05 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS 37 38 A. The Contractor, through the Systems Integrator, shall provide to the Owner 39 and Engineer complete as -built drawing(s) showing the actual control 40 components and devices (show existing and new devices) that are mounted in 41 the existing FCP Ep -060 after modification. Drawings shall also include 42 identification of each wire in the existing panel, to which terminal strip it is 43 connected, circuit breaker identification, I/O modules, corresponding I /O, etc. 44 Two additional copies of the panel as -built drawings shall be placed in the 45 pocket holder in the door of the existing panel. 46 47 B. The Contractor, through the Systems Integrator, shall provide to the Owner 48 and Engineer complete as -built drawing(s) showing the actual control LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CONFORMED 13630 -21 10/16/14 1 components and devices that are mounted in the new filter control panel EP- 2 104. Drawings shall also include identification of each wire in the existing 3 panel, to which terminal strip it is connected, circuit breaker identification, I/O 4 modules, corresponding I /O, etc. Two additional copies of the panel as -built 5 shall be placed in the pocket holder on the door of the new panel. 6 7 8 END OF SECTION 9 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM CONFORMED 13630 -22 10/16/14 1 SECTION 13640 2 3 FIBER OPTIC CABLE 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 DESCRIPTION 8 9 A. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as 10 shown, specified and required to furnish and install fiber optic cabling, 11 including fiber testing, accessories and splicing requirements. 12 13 B. The entire fiber optic system is considered to be one component and provided 14 by a single source, hereafter referred to as the Supplier. 15 16 C. The Contractor shall furnish and install fiber optic (FO) data lines and 17 connection equipment for the following: 18 19 1. Fiber optic cable for connection of all SCADA system equipment as 20 shown on the Drawings. 21 22 1.02 REFERENCES 23 24 A. Standards referenced in this Section are listed below: 25 26 1. ASTM D 1248, Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Molding and 27 Extrusion Materials. 28 29 2. ASTM D 1603, Test Method for Carbon Black in Olefin Plastics. 30 31 3. ASTM D 1765, Classification System for Carbon Blacks used in Rubber 32 Products. 33 34 4. ASTM D 3349, Test Method for Absorption Coefficient of Ethylene 35 Polymer Material Pigmented with Carbon Black. 36 37 1.03 SUBMITTALS 38 39 A. Shop Drawings: Submit the following: 40 41 1. Cut sheets and catalog literature for proposed fiber optic cable, and 42 fiber optic cable accessories (terminations). 43 44 2. Manufacturer specifications and data clearly and unambiguously 45 showing that the fiber optic cable meets all the requirements specified 46 herein. 47 48 3. Samples of the proposed cable. FIBER OPTIC CABLE 13640 -1 10/16/14 1 2 4. Physical dimensional drawings of all fiber optic accessories. 3 4 5. Proposed fiber identification sequence and labeling. 5 6 6. Provide a Recommended Spare Parts List (RSPL). 7 8 1.04 MAINTENANCE AND SPARE PARTS 9 10 A. Provide off -line maintenance aids and on -line diagnostics to check the 11 performance of the communication links and interfaces of devices on the data 12 highway. 13 14 B. Provide a list of recommended special tools for fiber installation, testing or 15 maintenance. 16 17 C. Furnish to the Owner one (1) hand -held optical light source with ATT- 18 compliant adapters (SC or ST), Corning, or equal. 19 20 D. Furnish to the Owner one hand -held optical power meter with ATT- compliant 21 adapters (SC or ST), Corning, or equal. 22 23 PART 2 PRODUCTS 24 25 2.01 FIBER OPTIC CABLE SUMMARY SPECIFICATIONS 26 27 A. The Contractor shall use multimode fiber where distances between connecting 28 equipment are within the fiber optic cable manufacturer's recommended 29 maximum distance. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for approval, 30 the type of fiber optic cable that shall be used if distances between connecting 31 equipment exceed the multimode fiber optic cable manufacturer's 32 recommendation. The fiber optic cable shall meet the following summary 33 specifications: 34 35 1. Fiber Type: Multimode. 36 2. Core Diameter: 62.5 microns. 37 3. Cladding Diameter: 125 microns. 38 4. Cable Outside Diameter: 13.30 -mm (0.52 -in). 39 5. Cable Weight: 191 kg /km (128 Ibs /1000 ft). 40 6. Maximum Attenuation: 3.5 dB /km at 850 nm, 1.0 dB /km at 1300 nm. 41 7. Bandwidth: 160/500 (MHZ X km)2. 42 8. Buffer Type: Loose tube, gel filled. 43 9. Number of Fibers: Twenty -four (24) 44 10. Cable Central Strength Member: Dielectric. 45 11. Cable Fill: Waterbocked, gel -free 46 12. Outer Jacket: MDPE. 47 13. Maximum Pulling Load: 600 Ibf (2700 N). 48 14. Operating Temperature Range: -40 °C to +70 °C. FIBER OPTIC CABLE 13640 -2 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 15. Parallel Plate Crush Resistance: 400 Ibf. 2 16. Quantity: As shown. 3 17. Packaging: Spools /reels, protected from shipment. 4 5 B. Fibers within the cable shall be color -coded so that each fiber may be 6 individually identified. The color sequence suggested is as follows: blue, 7 orange, green, brown, slate, white, red, black, yellow and violet. Dashed 8 versions of the same colors may be used to continue the sequence, 9 depending on the cable structure and fiber count. 10 11 C. The outer jackets of the cable shall be continuous, free from holes, splits, 12 blisters or inclusions. The same requirement holds for any inner jackets within 13 a given cable structure as well as for fiber coatings. 14 15 D. Materials used for fiber optic cable shall present no environmental or 16 toxicological hazards as defined by current industry standards and shall 17 comply with OSHA and EPA standards or applicable federal or state laws or 18 regulations. 19 20 E. The color of the polyethylene outer jacket material shall be black in 21 accordance with ASTM D 1248, and contain a suitable antioxidant substance. 22 The carbon black used shall be furnace -type conforming to designation N 110 23 in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D 1765. The carbon black 24 content in the jacket material when measured in accordance with the 25 requirements of ASTM D 1603 shall be 2.6 percent ±0.25 percent by weight. 26 The light absorption coefficient of the jacket material shall be at least 400 27 when measured at a wavelength of 375 nm in accordance with the 28 requirements of ASTM D 3349. 29 30 1. Outer polyethylene jacket materials shall meet tensile strength and 31 elongation minimum requirements for unaged and aged samples as 32 follows: 33 34 a. Tensile Strength at Break: 2800 psi (Unaged), 2100 psi (Aged). 35 b. Elongation at Rupture: 400 percent (Unaged), 375 percent 36 (Aged). 37 38 F. The cable jacket shrinkage test measures the shrinkage or expansion of a 39 cable jacket exposed to temperature aging for a specified period of time. 40 Maximum shrinkage shall be Tess than five percent for each specimen tested. 41 The test procedure is described in EIA -RS -455, FOTP -86. 42 43 2.02 CABLE PACKAGING 44 45 A. The cable shall be permanently marked to identify the manufacturer, date of 46 manufacture, length markings, a product identification code, and UL 47 messages, where appropriate. The markings shall be printed at regular 48 intervals of not more than two feet apart. FIBER OPTIC CABLE 13640 -3 10/16/14 1 2 B. The cable shall be packaged on a reel with inner hub diameter greater than 3 the recommended minimum bending diameter of the cable. The anchor holes 4 on the reels shall admit a 2 -1/2 -inch diameter spindle without binding. The 5 package shall be sturdy enough to endure reasonable handling in the process 6 of shipping and storage. The package shall bear the name of the 7 manufacturer, the product identification code and the total amount of product 8 on the reel. 9 10 C. The following information shall be securely attached to the reel as a tag or 11 clearly and permanently stenciled or labeled on each reel: 12 13 1. Customer Order Number. 14 2. Customer Job Number. 15 3. Customer Reel Number. 16 4. Termination. 17 5. Ship Date. 18 6. Manufacturer's Name. 19 7. Factory Reel Number. 20 8. Manufacturer's Cable Code (Type and Fiber count). 21 9. Length of Cable. 22 10. Weight of Cable and Reel. 23 11. Defect Tag. 24 25 D. The ends of all cable shall be sealed to prevent the escape of filling compound 26 and to prevent the entry of moisture during shipping, handling, storage and 27 installation. 28 29 2.03 ADDITIONAL FIBER 30 31 A. The fiber count of the cable shall be as specified above. Each fiber will be 32 tested at the completion of cable installation to verify that there are, indeed, 33 the total quantity of fibers, which conforms to these Specifications. 34 35 B. Contractor may, at their option, furnish a cable with more than the specified 36 numbers of fibers to allow for accidental fibers damaged during installation. 37 38 2.04 FIBER OPTIC CABLE MANUFACTURER 39 40 A. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: 41 42 1. Corning Inc. 43 2. Lucent. 44 3. Or equal. 45 46 2.05 MANUFACTURER TEST DOCUMENTATION 47 48 A. Test documentation from the fiber optic cable manufacturer shall be delivered FIBER OPTIC CABLE 13640 -4 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 to the Engineer upon delivery of the cable to the Site, as a prerequisite for 2 cable installation. 3 4 B. The documentation shall include Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) 5 traces for each fiber of each reel at 850 nm and 1300 nm. Optical attenuation 6 test data shall be furnished for each fiber of each reel, as measured at 850 nm 7 and 1300 nm. 8 9 2.06 PRE - INSTALLATION TESTING 10 11 A. Contractor shall test the fiber optic cable prior to its installation. This testing 12 shall be witnessed by the Engineer. 13 14 B. Testing shall consist of making an OTDR trace of each fiber of each reel, at 15 both 850 nm and 1300 nm. The test shall incorporate a one km long 16 backscatter suppression cable inserted between the OTDR and the fiber end. 17 Each trace shall include the optical length and average attenuation. 18 19 C. The results of the testing shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to 20 installation. Any cable that shows "out -of- spec" performance shall be 21 replaced, at no additional cost to the Owner. 22 23 2.07 CABLE TERMINATION ENCLOSURE AND HARDWARE 24 25 A. Cable termination enclosures shall be furnished and installed at each site 26 accessed by fiber optic cable. The enclosures shall be used to terminate each 27 fiber of the cable. 28 29 B. The enclosures /cabinets shall be the 19 -inch EIA wall mounted type having 30 provisions for terminating multiple fiber optic cables. Splice trays, strain relief 31 cable attachment points, fiber organizers and bend radius hardware shall be 32 furnished within each termination cabinet. The cabinets shall be furnished 33 with an integral lock to prevent unauthorized entry. All locks shall be keyed 34 identically, and two keys shall be furnished for each cabinet installed. 35 36 C. The enclosure cabinets shall house a patch panel internally. The patch panel 37 shall swing out for ease of use. Panel size shall be suited to the number of 38 fibers in the cable, for both directions. Bayonet/flanged couplings shall be 39 furnished and mounted for each fiber to be terminated. 40 41 D. The termination enclosure shall have a swing -down front door that provides 42 access to all splice trays and patch panels. They shall be sized to accept two, 43 12 fiber cables and provide space for unstripped, coiled cable, each being up 44 to 25 feet long. 45 46 E. The cable termination enclosures and hardware shall be manufactured by 47 Blackbox, or equal. 48 FIBER OPTIC CABLE 13640 -5 10/16/14 1 2.08 PIGTAIL CABLES AND CONNECTORS 2 3 A. Each of the fibers shall be terminated by splicing pigtails in the termination 4 enclosures. 5 6 B. Pigtails shall be nine feet long. They shall be multimode for operation at 850 7 nm and 1300 nm, loose- buffered and manufactured from fiber meeting these 8 Specifications described for the main cable. 9 10 C. All connectors shall be identical. They shall be stainless steel AT &T and be 11 compatible with the equipment to which the fiber optic cable is connected. 12 13 2.09 SPLICING 14 15 A. Contractor shall field splice each fiber to a pigtail cable at the termination 16 enclosures. All splices shall be made by the fusion process and shall have a 17 splice loss no greater than 0.35 dB. Loss measurement shall be performed at 18 the time of splicing and documentation shall be furnished for each splice. 19 Splice testing shall be witnessed by the Engineer. 20 21 B. Prior to stripping the cable, Contractor shall record the cable length from the 22 cable jacket. This length shall be documented and included in the test 23 documentation, specified elsewhere. 24 25 2.10 COMMUNICATIONS PULL BOXES 26 27 A. Pull boxes shall be manufactured of fiber reinforced polymer concrete. 28 Minimum dimensions shall be 24" wide x 36" long x 30" deep. 29 30 B. Pull boxes shall be equipped with cable racking on both long walls, suitable to 31 support fiber optic cable of all sizes. 32 33 C. All pull boxes shall be provided with 20K traffic -rated lids. Lids shall have the 34 identification marking of "FIBER OPTIC" permanently indented in the cover. 35 36 2.11 FINK PLATED MARKER POSTS 37 38 A. All fiber optic cables shall be furnished with fiber optic and electrical buried 39 Fink Plated marker warning posts that meet the following requirements: 40 41 1. Material: Composite reinforced thermoplastic, or High Density Polymer. 42 2. Length: 6 ft. 43 3. Top: Domed Cap 44 4. Color: White Post and Cap (orange cap at pull box) 45 5. Text: Caution Buried Communication Cable CaII...(front and back). 46 6. Text Color: Black on Orange Background. 47 7. Width: 3 -inch minimum (diameter). 48 8. Phone number to call if line is hit FIBER OPTIC CABLE 13640 -6 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 B. Fink Plated marker warning posts, (Model 303 or current Model) shall be 3 provided by Pro -Mark or approved equal. 4 5 C. Marker post shall be installed at 100 feet spacing and shall be buried a 6 minimum 18 -inch and encased in 12 -inch deep concrete footing. 7 8 2.12 DETECTION WIRE AND WARNING TAPE 9 10 A. Fiber optic warning tape shall be bright orange color, minimum 3- inches wide. 11 Warning tape shall be installed for the full length of the cable or conduit run. 12 13 B. Warning tape shall be marked "WARNING FIBER OPTIC CABLE." 14 15 C. Warning tape shall be buried 12- inches below existing grade. 16 17 D. The tape shall be a dielectric, polyolefin film tape. The tape shall be 18 constructed using material and ink colors, which will not change when 19 exposed to acids and other destructive substances commonly found in the 20 soil. 21 22 E. Detection wire of #12 gauge (minimum) shall be woven into the tape. 23 24 2.13 CONDUIT 25 26 A. All fiber optic cable shall be installed in conduit specified herein. Conduit shall 27 be manufactured from virgin high - density polyethylene. Conduit shall be 28 extruded from colored material for uniform full- thickness coloring. Where 29 striping is required, a minimum of three colored longitudinal stripes of HDPE 30 material shall be co- extruded on the conduit outer wall. The three stripes shall 31 be equally spaced around the circumference and continuous for the entire 32 length of conduit. Printed or embossed striping is not permitted. 33 34 B. All conduit shall be labeled with durable identification giving the name of the 35 manufacturer, conduit size (inner diameter trade size and wall 36 thickness /rating), manufacture /date codes, and sequential foot marking. 37 Labeling shall occur a maximum of every 2 feet. Conduits to be used in bends 38 and sweeps shall have a minimum burn through time of 30 minutes when 39 tested in accordance with Generic Requirement GR- 356 -CORE, Issue 1, 40 October 1995. 41 42 C. Conduits shall be 2 in. diameter and shall conform to ASTM D -3035 meeting 43 the following requirements: 44 45 1. Smoothwall SDR 11 46 2. Nominal outer diameter: 2 in 47 3. Minimum inner diameter: 2 in. 48 4. Minimum wall thickness: 0.151 in. FIBER OPTIC CABLE 13640 -7 10/16/14 1 2 D. Conduits shall be factory treated with an atomized silicone or manufactured in 3 a manner to reduce friction during pulling of fiber optic cable. 4 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 6 7 3.01 CABLE INSTALLATION 8 9 A. All fiber optic cable shall be installed, terminated, and tested by the fiber 10 subcontractor specified above. 11 12 B. In pulling the cable, strain - release, or other tension limiting devices shall be 13 used to limit the pull tension to less than 600 pounds. The Engineer shall 14 witness the cable being pulled. 15 16 C. Minimum bend radius restrictions shall be satisfied both during and after cable 17 installation. 18 19 D. All conduit and cabinet entrances shall be sealed with RTV or other re- 20 enterable sealant material to prevent ingress of water, dust or other foreign 21 materials. 22 23 E. Splices in the fiber optic cable shall only be made at termination points where 24 connectorized pigtails are applied. Non - terminating field splices shall not be 25 made, unless authorized by the Engineer, in writing. If a field splice is 26 required, it shall be fusion spliced and placed in a buried pull box. Closures 27 shall be AT &T UCB1 with Type 2000 outer case, Siecor SC5, or equal. 28 Encapsulant shall be placed between inner and outer closures. Such splices 29 shall meet the loss parameters /testing requirements specified elsewhere. 30 31 3.02 CABLE DAMAGE DURING INSTALLATION 32 33 A. If the cable is damaged during installation, Contractor shall stop operations 34 and notify the Engineer, in writing, immediately. The Owner and Engineer will 35 decide whether to replace the entire reel of cable or to install a splice at the 36 damaged section. 37 38 B. If the Owner decides to replace the entire reel of cable, Contractor shall begin 39 the installation at the last designated splice point. The damaged cable 40 between these points shall be removed, coiled, tagged, and given to the 41 Owner. Installation of new cable to replace damaged cable shall not be a 42 basis of extra payment. 43 44 C. If the Owner decides to install a splice at the damaged point, and the cable is 45 damaged a second time, the entire reel of damaged cable (and all subsequent 46 damaged reels) shall be replaced with new reels at the Contractor's expense. 47 48 3.03 CABLE ACCEPTANCE TESTING FIBER OPTIC CABLE 13640 -8 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 A. Acceptance testing of the data highway (fiber and electronic equipment) shall 3 be conducted as a part of integrated system field- testing, as specified 4 elsewhere. Prior to such tests, however, the fiber optic cable shall be tested 5 as specified herein. 6 7 B. The Contractor shall conduct fiber optic cable testing as specified below. All 8 testing shall be witnessed by the Engineer and the Owner. A test plan shall be 9 submitted at least one week prior to the proposed test date(s). The test plan 10 and procedures shall be mutually agreed upon prior to conducting the tests. 11 12 C. Each optical fiber in every span shall be tested after installation and 13 termination. For each fiber, an OTDR trace hardcopy shall be provided. This 14 end -to -end trace shall be performed from BOTH ends of the fiber. The traces 15 shall be made at 850 nm and 1300 nm. Also for each fiber, and end -to -end 16 power attenuation (insertion Toss) test shall be performed from BOTH ends of 17 the fiber. The attenuation test shall use a stabilized optical source and an 18 optical power meter calibrated to the appropriate operating wavelength (850 19 nm and 1300 nm). 20 21 D. For each installed fiber, the power attenuation shall not exceed the following, 22 tested from connector to connector at the respective patch panels, at 850 nm 23 and 1300 nm. For the 1300 nm test, substitute 0.0020 for 0.0035 in the first 24 term of the equation. 25 26 (0.0035)L + (0.35)N + 3.0 dB 27 28 where L = the length of the fiber in meters, and 29 N = the number of fusion splices in the fiber. 30 31 E. Any fiber optic cables containing one or more fibers not meeting this 32 performance criteria will not be accepted by the Owner, and shall be repaired 33 or replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. 34 35 F. All fiber optic testing shall be documented on pre- approved test forms. Three 36 copies of all documents (including OTDR traces) shall be submitted to the 37 Engineer upon successful completion of the testing. 38 39 G. Work at the termination cabinets shall be performed such that the fiber optic 40 cables, and the fibers, are not subjected to undesirable bending both during 41 the Work and when permanently fixed in place. The cables, fibers, pigtails, 42 etc. shall be organized in a neat and orderly fashion within the enclosure. 43 Inspection of the Work shall be performed by the Engineer. Unsatisfactory 44 Work shall be reworked. 45 46 47 END OF SECTION 48 FIBER OPTIC CABLE 13640 -9 10/16/14 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK FIBER OPTIC CABLE 13640 -10 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 15010 2 3 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS 8 9 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including all specification sections 10 apply to the work. 11 12 1.02 SUMMARY 13 14 This Section specifies the basic requirements for mechanical installations and 15 includes requirements common to more than one section of these specifications. 16 17 1.03 ACCESSIBILITY 18 19 Equipment and materials shall be installed allowing for adequate access for service 20 and. Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment with the final location of 21 access panels and doors. Allow ample space to remove all parts that may be 22 replaced or require service. Extend all grease fittings to an accessible location. 23 24 1.04 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS 25 26 A. Coordinate mechanical equipment and materials installation with other building 27 components. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify final 28 locations for rough -ins with field measurements and with the requirements of 29 the actual equipment to be connected. Arrange for chases, slots, and 30 openings in other building components to allow for mechanical installations. 31 32 B. Coordinate the installation of supporting devices and sleeves to be set in 33 poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are 34 constructed. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical 35 materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention 36 to large equipment requiring positioning. 37 38 C. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical 39 services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom 40 possible. Coordinate the installation of mechanical materials and equipment 41 above ceilings with suspension system, Tight fixtures, and other installations. 42 43 D. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and 44 overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing 45 regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide 46 required connection for each service. 47 48 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 -1 07/15/14 1 1.05 NAMEPLATE DATA 2 3 Provide permanent operational data nameplate on each item of power operated 4 mechanical equipment, indicating manufacturer, product name, model number, serial 5 number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, 6 and similar essential data. Locate nameplates in an accessible location. 7 8 1.06 THIRD PARTY CERTIFICATION 9 10 All packaged equipment shall be Independently Third Party labeled as a system for 11 its intended us by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) in accordance 12 with OSHA Federal Regulation 29CFR1910.399 and NFPA 70, "National Electrical 13 Code" (NEC), Article 90 -7. 14 15 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 16 17 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 18 19 20 END OF SECTION BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 SECTION 15062 2 I 3 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 1 9 A. The Contractor shall furnish all the materials, tools, labor, supervision and 10 appliances for and properly install, connect, adjust, test and place in 11 continuous satisfactory service all ductile iron pipe and fittings at the locations 1 12 and to the elevations indicated, specified or required for the proper completion 13 of all work. 14 1 15 B. Wherever Construction activities disturb existing conditions or work already 16 completed, Contractor shall restore the same to its original condition in every 17 detail. All such replacement and repair shall be a no additional expense to the 18 Owner. 19 20 C. Ductile iron pipe and fittings are not necessarily completely indicated or 1 21 detailed on the Construction Drawings. The Drawings are schematic only, and 22 indicate pipe and fittings in a general way. It is the Contractor's responsibility I 23 to furnish all materials, pipe and fittings required. 24 25 D. It is the intent of these Contract Documents to require an installation, complete I 26 in every detail, whether or not indicated on the Construction Drawings, or 27 specified herein. Consequently, the Contractor shall be responsible for all 28 details, devices, accessories, and special construction necessary to properly I 29 30 furnish, install, adjust, test, place into continuous satisfactory service, and complete the Work in an acceptable manner. 31 I 32 33 E. Full responsibility for designing, fabricating, and installing the ductile iron pipe and fittings, for selecting materials of construction, and for demonstrating 34 compliance with specified performance requirements shall rest with the I 35 36 Contractor, and through the Contractor, the Manufacturer and the Material Supplier. The Engineer's review of 1) the manufacture and installation of the 37 ductile iron pipe and fittings 2) the use of materials included in this I 38 Specification, and 3) alternative materials offered by the Contractor, shall not 39 relieve the Contractor and Supplier of full responsibility for meeting all 40 performance requirements and guarantees. I41 42 F. The requirements of this specification 15062 supersede relevant articles in 43 Section IV. I44 45 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM 46 I 47 A. Piping shall be installed in the locations as shown on the Drawings and as 48 specified herein. DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -1 07/15/14 1 1 2 B. All pipe, fittings, specials and appurtenances used for potable water piping 3 shall be NSF -61 certified for continuous contact with potable water. 4 5 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS 6 7 All Work specified herein shall be in accordance with the standards of the below 8 listed organizations, except as otherwise shown or specified. Where reference is 9 made to a standard of one of these, or other organizations the version of the 10 standard in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 11 12 American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 13 BI.1 - Standard Specification for Unified Inch Screw Threads. 14 B16.5 - Standard Specification for Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings and 15 other special Alloys. 16 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) 17 A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi 18 Tensile Strength. 19 C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 20 C128 - Standard Specification for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine 21 Aggregate. 22 C144 - Standard Specification for Masonry Mortar. 23 C150 - Portland Cement. 24 D75- Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates. 25 E8 - Methods of Tension Testing of Metallic Materials. 26 E23 - Methods for Notched Bar Impact Testing of Metallic Materials. 27 G95 - Cathodic Disbondment Test. 28 29 American Water Works Association (AWWA) 30 C104 - Standard for Cement - Mortar Lining for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 31 for Water. 32 C105 - Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile -Iron Piping for 33 Water and Other Liquids. 34 C111 - Standard for Rubber - Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe and 35 Fittings. 36 C115 - American National Standard for Flanged Ductile -Iron Pipe with 37 Threaded Flanges. 38 C150 - Standard for the Thickness Design of Ductile Iron Pipe. 39 C151 - Standard for Ductile - Iron Pipe. Centrifugally Cast for Water or Other 40 Liquids. 41 C153 - Standard for Ductile Iron Compact Fittings. 3 -inch through 16 -inch for 42 Water and Other Liquids. 43 C600 - Standard for Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and Their 44 Appurtenances. 45 C651 - Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains. 46 47 NSF International, The Public Health and Safety Company 48 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -2 07/15/14 1 I1 No. 60 - Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals - Health Effects. 2 No. 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. 3 4 1.04 SUBMITTALS 5 I6 A. The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to the Engineer of pipe, fittings 7 and all appurtenances in accordance with these Contract Documents and 8 Sections 01300 and 01340. The requirements of AWWA C110, C150, C151 I9 10 and the following supplemental requirements are applicable: 11 1. Certified dimensional drawings of all pipe, specials and fittings. I12 13 2. Joint and pipe /fitting wall construction details, which indicate the type 14 and thickness of the wall; manufacturing tolerances; performance 1 15 history; and all other pertinent information required for the manufacture 16 of the product. 17 18 3. Details of fittings and specials such as elbows, wyes, tees, outlets, 19 connections, test bulkheads, bosses and nozzles or other specials 20 where shown on the Construction Drawings, which indicate amount and • 21 position of reinforcement. All fittings and specials shall be properly 22 reinforced to withstand the internal pressure both circumferential and I23 longitudinal, and the external loading conditions as indicated in the 24 Contract Documents. Shop Drawings shall clearly detail special 25 castings indicating all pertinent dimensions. I26 27 B. The Contractor shall furnish a certified affidavit of compliance for all pipe and 28 other products or materials furnished under this Section of the Specifications, I29 as specified in ANSI /AWWA C105, C110, C150, and C151; respectively, and 30 certified copies of the following supplemental data for all pipe, fittings, and 31 specials: I32 33 1. The Supplier shall provide, through the Contractor, a sworn statement 34 that the inspection and all specified tests have been made and all I36 35 results thereof comply with the requirements of these Specifications. 37 C. All expenses incurred in making samples for certification of tests and in the I 38 39 preparation of any design reports shall be borne by the Contractor. 40 D. Review of the Shop Drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the I 41 responsibility to ensure that the pipe is designed and installed in strict 42 accordance with the Contract Documents. 43 I44 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE 45 46 A. The Contractor shall furnish materials under this Section that are new, unused I 47 and as specified, or if not particularized herein, which are the best of their 48 respective kind, free of defects and imperfections, and suitable for the service DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -3 07/15/14 1 1 intended, subject to review by the Engineer. 2 3 B. The Contractor shall provide workmanship that is first class in every respect, 4 and have the installation performed by workmen thoroughly experienced in 5 such work. A neat and workmanlike appearance in the finished Work shall be 6 required. 7 8 C. The Contractor shall perform Work in accordance with all applicable laws and 9 regulations and in accordance with all applicable permits and easements. 10 11 D. The ductile iron pipe furnished under this Specification shall comply with 12 AWWA C151 except as it may be modified herein. 13 14 E. Welders and welding methods shall be certified to a nationally recognized 15 welding specification for the type of ductile iron used to manufacture the pipe 16 and fittings. 17 18 F All test equipment used in activities affecting quality control shall be calibrated 19 and certified at not longer than annual intervals, unless otherwise specified or 20 required. 21 22 G. All pipe shall be clean, sound, and without defects. No manner of repair will 23 be accepted, unless otherwise specified by the Engineer. 24 25 H. The Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner, shall perform all the testing 26 and recording that is required in these Specifications unless otherwise 27 specified. 28 29 I. The Engineer shall have the right to determine the amount of pipe to be 30 rejected as defined in AWWA C151 Section 5.7.1 "Determining Rejection." 31 32 1.06 SUPPLIER'S QUALIFICATIONS 33 34 All pipe shall be manufactured, fabricated, coated, cement mortar -lined or epoxy - 35 lined by a single qualified Manufacturer. Fittings may be fabricated and the lining for 36 force main pipe and fittings may be applied at a site other than where the pipe is 37 manufactured. The Manufacturer shall have at least 5 years of experience in work 38 similar in specification to that which is to be furnished on this project. The 39 Manufacturer shall be required to show experience in supplying pipe in environments 40 similar to those expected to exist on this project and that the pipe supplied in those 41 environments has functioned satisfactorily. 42 43 1.07 SHOP TESTS 44 45 All pipes shall be tested by the Manufacturer in accordance with AWWA C104, C110, 46 C150, and C151, the Manufacturer's standard procedures, and this Specification. 47 Shop Tests shall be subject to witness by the Engineer and /or Owner, and /or the 48 Owner's Representative and certified test reports shall be submitted to the Engineer DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -4 07/15/14 1 1 1 by the Contractor. No lot of pipe shall be shipped to the site of the Work until 2 acceptable shop tests are completed and have been reviewed by the Engineer. 3 4 1.08 INSPECTION 5 I6 A. All Work under this Specification, including but not limited to proof of design 7 testing, shop testing and the production of the pipe, fittings and specials, shall 8 be subject to inspection by the Owner's representatives and /or the Engineer in 9 the Supplier's plant. All travel, lodging and meal costs associated with this 10 plant inspection shall be incurred by the Owner and /or the Engineer. 11 12 B The Engineer shall have the right to order any pipe that, in the Engineer's 13 opinion, does not meet the Specifications to be rejected and not shipped to the 14 Project site. I15 16 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 17 1 18 2.01 GENERAL 19 1 20 A. All ductile iron pipes, including flanged, mechanical joint, push -on joint, 21 restrained joint, and plain end pipe, shall be manufactured in accordance with 22 ANSI /AWWA Specification C 151/A 21.51. 23 I24 B. Where ductile iron pipe is supplied for the Project or shown on the Drawings, 25 above ground pipe shall be flanged and buried (underground) pipe shall be I 26 mechanical joint, restrained joint or push -on joint, as required. 27 28 C. All ductile iron fittings shall be marked in accordance with ANSI /AWWA C I29 110/A 21.10 Section 10 -9, "Markings on Fittings." All ductile iron pipe shall be 30 marked in accordance with Section 51 -10, "Marking Pipe" of ANSI /AWWA 31 Specification C 151/A 21.51. I32 33 D. Maximum pipe laying lengths shall be 20 feet with shorter lengths provided as 34 required by the Construction Drawings or to complete the Work and as I 35 36 allowed by AWWA C151. 37 E. Shop cement -mortar lined pipe shall have smooth dense interior surfaces and I 38 39 shall be free from fracture, excessive interior surface crazing and roughness. 40 F. Pipe joints shall not be bonded for electrical conductivity in accordance with I 41 these Specifications and the details as shown on the Construction Drawings 42 and the following schedule: 43 I 44 45 1. All blow -offs, air valve assemblies, and lateral connections to or from the pipe shall not be fitted with dielectric gaskets and /or couplings. 46 I 47 48 G. All materials that may be in contact with the water being conveyed (linings, gaskets, lubricants, grout, disinfecting agents, etc.) shall be in accordance with 1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -5 07/15/14 1 and approved by the appropriate NSF Standard 60 or 61. 2 3 2.02 DESIGN CRITERIA 4 5 A. The pipe furnished under this section shall be ductile iron pipe, cement mortar 6 or epoxy lined and asphalt coated, with EPDM gasket joints. The pipe shall 7 consist of a cast ductile iron wall, shop lined with Portland cement mortar 8 (potable water and reclaimed water) or epoxy (sanitary force main) and an 9 exterior coating of asphalt. 10 11 B. The pipe shall be designed, manufactured, tested, inspected, and marked 12 according to applicable requirements stated herein and except as modified, 13 shall conform to ANSI /AWWA C104, C150, C151. 14 15 C. Pipe supplied for this project shall be suitable for use with neutral pH 16 (approximately 7.0) meeting FDEP Part IV water quality standards (reclaimed 17 water), domestic raw sewage (force mains) or chloraminated drinking water 18 (potable water). 19 20 2.03 PIPE DESIGN 21 22 A. All ductile iron pipe shall have a minimum wall thickness corresponding to 23 Class 150, as calculated according to AWWA C150. 24 25 B. Where threaded flanges are used on ductile iron pipe, the minimum thickness 26 of the pipe wall at the last critical thread after threading shall not be less than 27 the minimum calculated thickness of the pipe including net thickness, casting 28 tolerance and service allowance. 29 30 C. The Contractor shall provide design data on the pipe including calculations 31 showing the separate and combined stresses in the wall of the pipe due to the 32 design loads. 33 34 2.04 MATERIALS 35 36 A. All ductile -iron pipes shall meet the requirements of ANSI /AWWA C 37 151/A21.51. The interior of the pipe shall be finished so that the 38 Hazen - Williams friction factor will not be less than 130. Each length of pipe 39 shall be hydrostatically tested to at least 500 psi by the manufacturer in 40 accordance with ANSI /AWWA C 151/A21.51. Additionally, 30 -inch and larger 41 pipe shall be hydrostatically tested to 75% of the yield strength of the metal, 42 based on the nominal thickness of the pipe. 43 44 B. Castings and connecting pieces, such as bell and bell, bell and spigot, bell 45 and flange, flange and flange, flange and spigot, and flange and flare, shall 46 meet the requirements of ANSI /AWWA C110/A21.10. Connecting pieces may 47 be fabricated. 48 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -6 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 C. The exterior of exposed ductile iron pipe, fittings, glands and bolts shall be 2 field coated with one prime coat of Tnemec 66, 3.0 to 5.0 mils minimum dry 3 film thickness, a second coat of compatible Tnemec Enamel, 4.0 to 6.0 mils 4 per coat minimum dry film thickness and a final coat of Tnemec 73, 2.5 to 4.5 5 mils per coat minimum dry film thickness. Field coatings shall be applied in 6 strict conformance with the coating manufacturer's recommendations and 7 Section 09900. 8 9 D. Pipe that is to be buried shall have the standard asphaltic outside coating 10 specified in ANSI /AWWA C151/A21.51. 11 12 E. The weight and class designation shall be painted conspicuously in a 13 contrasting color on the outside of each pipe, fitting, and special casting after 14 the shop coat has cured. 15 16 F. Epoxy lining for force mains shall be an amine cured epoxy containing at least 17 20% ceramic quartz pigment by volume. The standard of quality is Proteco 18 401 Ceramic Epoxy. 19 20 2.05 JOINTS 21 22 A. Flanges and flanged joints for ductile iron piping shall conform to the 23 dimensions and requirements of ANSI Specification B 16.1. Where threaded 24 flanges are used, they shall be ductile iron and conform to the requirements of 25 ANSI /AWWA Specification C 115/A 21.15. All flanged ductile iron pipe and 26 fittings shall be rated for 250 pound working pressure and shall be faced and 27 drilled to match ANSI B16.1 Class 125 flanges unless special drilling is called 28 for or required. Where tap or stud bolts are required, flanges shall be drilled 29 and tapped accordingly. 30 31 B. All pipe flanges shall be coated with a rust preventive coating, as specified in 32 ANSI /AWWA Specification C 115/A 21.15, immediately after they have been 33 faced and drilled. 34 35 C. Flanged bolt holes on each end of flanged pipe and fittings shall accurately 36 straddle the same horizontal and vertical centerlines unless special drilling is 37 called for, or required. 38 39 D. The Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that the flanges of the pipe 40 are compatible with the flanges of the various components and /or 41 appurtenances. 42 43 E. Flanged pipe, approximately twelve (12) inches or less in length, shall have 44 flanges cast solidly to pipe barrel. Flanges on pipe longer than twelve (12) 45 inches in length may be of the threaded type. Pipe threads shall be of such 46 length that, with flanges screwed home, the end of the pipe shall project 47 beyond the face line of the flange. Flange and pipe shall then be faced to give 48 a flush finish to the flange and the flange surface shall be normal to the axis of DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -7 07/15/14 1 the pipe. Flanges shall be of such design that the flanged neck completely 2 covers the threaded portion of the pipe to protect it against damage and 3 corrosion. 4 5 F Push -on joints for ductile iron piping shall conform to the dimensions and 6 requirements of ANSI /AWWA Specification C111/A 21.11 as they apply to 7 push -on joints. 8 9 G. Mechanical joints for ductile iron piping shall conform to the dimensions and 10 requirements of ANSI /AWWA Specification C 111/A 21.11. Where stud bolts 11 are required, bells shall be drilled and tapped accordingly. The Contractor 12 shall tighten joint bolts with appropriate wrenches, to a tension recommended 13 by the pipe Supplier. 14 15 H. Where joints are in contact with liquids, or buried underground, the Contractor 16 shall paint all bolts and nuts with two (2) heavy coats of coal tar pitch and 17 where joints are buried, the joints, including glands and bolts, shall be 18 wrapped with two laps of 8 mil polyethylene film and sealed to the pipe with 19 polyethylene adhesive tape. 20 21 I. Restrained Joints: 22 23 1. All buried pipe shall be restrained as shown on the Drawings and as 24 specified herein. Pipes subject to pressure or being fed by a pumping 25 system shall be restrained based on the pressures shown on the 26 drawings or specified elsewhere herein. Pipes subject to gravity flow 27 shall be restrained based on 30 psi of working pressure. Restrained 28 joint length indicated in the Tables included on the Drawings represents 29 the length on all sides of fittings and valves within which all joints must 30 be restrained. As a minimum, the joints at all fittings and valves shall 31 be restrained. 32 33 2. Restrained joints shall be capable of holding against withdrawal for line 34 pressures 50 percent above the normal working pressure, but not less 35 than 200 psi. The pipe and fittings shall be restrained push -on joints or 36 restrained mechanical joints. 37 38 3. The pipe Supplier's standard restrained joints shall be of the type 39 utilizing cast lugs, shop welded retainer lugs or retainer rings bearing 40 against pipe shoulders. Field installed joint restraint systems, such as 41 Megalugs, as manufactured by EBAA Iron, or equal, are required for 42 restraining mechanical joint fittings. Field welding or grooving of the 43 restrained joint or components shall not be acceptable. Restrained 44 joints shall be capable of withstanding full bulkhead thrust that can be 45 developed within the pipeline due to the sum of the working and surge 46 pressures. 47 48 4. Thrust blocks shall not be permitted unless specifically identified on the DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -8 07/15/14 ' 1 Drawings. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 5. Joints in tunnels and casings shall be restrained joints as defined 4 previously. 5 6 2.06 FITTINGS 7 8 A. All restrained joint, flanged, mechanical joint, and push -on joint shall be ductile 9 iron and shall be manufactured in accordance with, and shall meet the 10 requirements of ANSI /AWWA Specification C 110/A 21.10 or C153. 11 12 B. Dimensions of flanged fittings not included under ANSI /AWWA Specification 13 C110 /A 21.10 shall conform to the requirements of ANSI Specification B 16.1, 14 Class 125. Fittings shall be short radius (compact) type were possible. 15 16 C. All fittings shall meet the requirements, as to dimensions and weights, as 17 shown in the current Edition of the "Handbook of Ductile Iron Pipe" of the 18 Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association. 19 20 D. All fittings furnished under ANSI /AWWA Specification C110 /A 21.10 or C153 21 shall be ductile iron and shall have the same minimum pressure rating as the 22 pipe to which it is connected. 23 24 E. Special fittings, where required, shall have the same diameters and thickness 25 as standard fittings, unless otherwise required, but their laying lengths and 26 other functional dimensions shall be determined by their positions in the 27 pipelines and by the particular piping materials to which they connect. 28 29 2.07 INTERIOR LINING 30 31 A. Potable Water and Reclaimed Water Piping: 32 33 1. All ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be lined with standard single 34 thickness cement mortar lining and bituminous seal coated inside, at 35 the point of manufacture, in accordance with ANSI /AWWA Specification 36 C 104/A 21.4. Portland cement for cement mortar lining shall be in 37 accordance with the requirements of ASTM C150, Type 11 cement. 38 Shop cement -mortar lined pipe shall have smooth dense interior 39 surfaces and shall be free from fractures, excessive interior surface 40 crazing, disbondment, and roughness. 41 42 2. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent damage to the interior 43 lining and shall repair all damaged linings to the satisfaction of the 44 Engineer. 45 46 3. Test records shall be submitted to the Engineer for review. 47 48 4. The use and type of any admixtures must be reviewed by the Engineer DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -9 07/15/14 prior to their use. All material batching shall be by weight. The method of placing and curing of the mortar lining shall be one with which the manufacturer has experience and can demonstrate a successful history. The lining shall be cured in a manner acceptable to the Engineer so that it will provide a hard and durable lining with a minimum of cracks, surface crazing and disbonded areas. B. Epoxy Lining for Wastewater Service 1. All pipe and fittings for sewer force mains shall be Coated with Protecto 401 as specified. 2. Prior to abrasive blasting, the entire area to receive the protective compound shall be inspected for oil, grease, etc. Any areas with oil, grease, or any substance that can be removed by solvent, shall be solvent cleaned to remove those substances. After the surface has been made free of grease, oil or other substances, all areas to receive the protective compounds shall be abrasive blasted using sand or grit abrasive media. The entire surface to be lined shall be struck with the blast media so that all rust, loose oxides, etc., are removed from the surface. Only slight stains and tightly adhering oxide may be left on the surface. Any area where rust reappears before lining must be re- blasted. 3. After the surface preparation and within 8 hours of surface preparation, the interior of the pipe shall receive 40 mils nominal dry film thickness of Protecto 401. No lining shall take place when the substrate or ambient temperature is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit. The surface also must be dry and dust free. If flange pipe or fittings are included in the project, the lining shall not be used on the face of the flange. 4. Due to the tolerances involved, the gasket area and spigot end up to 6 inches back from the end of the spigot end must be coated with 6 mils nominal, 10 mils maximum using Protecto Joint Compound. The Joint Compound shall be applied by brush to ensure coverage. Care should be taken that the Joint Compound is smooth without excess buildup in the gasket seat or on the spigot ends. Coating of the gasket seat and spigot ends shall be done after the application of the lining. 5. The number of coats of lining applied shall be as recommended by the lining manufacturer. However, in no case shall this material be applied above the dry thickness per coat recommended by the lining manufacturer in printed literature. The maximum or minimum time between coats shall be that time recommended by the lining material manufacturer. To prevent delamination between coats, no material shall be used for lining which is not indefinitely recoatable with itself without roughening of the surface. DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -10 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 6. Protecto Joint Compound shall be used for touch -up or repair in 3 accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4 5 2.08 EXTERIOR COATINGS 6 7 A. The exterior of all pipe and fittings to be submerged in water and for 8 underground installation shall be given a bituminous coating at the point of 9 manufacture, in accordance with ANSI /AWWA Specification C 151/A 21.51. 10 11 2.09 PIPE APPURTENANCES 12 13 A. Threaded flanges shall be ductile iron and shall meet the requirements of 14 ANSI /AWWA C115/A21.15. Flanges with long hubs for flanged pipe shall be 15 screwed on the threaded end of the pipe in the shop. The face of the flange 16 and the end of the pipe shall be refaced together. There shall be no leakage 17 through the pipe threads, and the flanges shall be designed to prevent 18 corrosion of the threads from outside. Flanges shall meet the requirements of 19 ANSI B16.1, and shall be faced and drilled to that standard, unless special 20 drilling is called for or required. The Contractor shall be responsible for 21 assuring that the flanges of the pipe are compatible with the flanges of the 22 various components and /or appurtenances. They shall be faced accurately at 23 right angles to the pipe axis, drilled smooth and true, and the machined faces 24 covered with zinc dust and tallow or equivalent material. The back of the 25 flanges and bolt holes shall be coated with asphaltic coating meeting the 26 requirements of ANSI /AWWA C151/A21.51, Section 51 -8.1. Coating material 27 shall be applied immediately after facing and drilling. Where tap or stud bolts 28 are required, flanges shall be tapped. All flanged joints shall be thoroughly 29 bolted through, stud or tap bolts of required size. All flanged joints buried 30 underground shall also be protected as specified under Section 2.08. Only 31 flanges made in USA shall be supplied to the Project. 32 33 B. All bolts, studs, and threaded rods used in the finished work for flanges shall 34 be of carbon steel and shall conform to the ASTM A 307 Grade B. The ends 35 of all bolts shall be finished to the standard radius in an acceptable manner. 36 All screw threads shall be "American Standard, Coarse Thread (N.C.). Stud 37 bolts shall be hexagonal, cold pressed semi - finished and made of medium 38 open -hearth steel. All dimensions shall be in accordance with "American 39 Standard, Heavy." Nuts used shall be "Grade A Heavy Hex" in conformance 40 with ASTM A563 and be compatible with the bolts. Bolts and nuts shall be 41 cadmium or zinc plated at the point of manufacture with a plating thickness of 42 0.0003 to 0.0005 inches. All bolts and nuts furnished shall be delivered to the 43 field free from grease, rust, and dirt. 44 45 C. All nuts and bolts that come into contact with water or that are to be buried 46 shall be painted with two (2) heavy coats of an coat tar pitch, in accordance 47 with Section 09900. 48 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -11 07/15/14 1 D. Gaskets for flanged joints shall be full -faced type EPDM gaskets one - eighth 2 (1/8) inch thick. All gaskets for flanged joints shall be EPDM having a 3 Durometer of 75 to 85 or neoprene having a Durometer of 55 to 65. As an 4 alternate, the Contractor may supply the pipe Supplier's (manufacturer's) 5 gasket such as American Cast Iron Pipe Company's "Toruseal" gasket or U.S. 6 Pipe's "Flange Tyte" gasket. Gaskets for bell and spigot joints shall be 7 fabricated and tested in accordance with AWWA C111. 8 9 E. Subject to the Engineer's review, welded outlets shall be allowed; however, 10 the welded -on outlet diameter shall not be greater than one quarter the 11 diameter of the main line. 12 13 2.10 COMPRESSION SLEEVE COUPLINGS 14 15 A. The Contractor shall furnish and install where required or where shown on the 16 Drawings, manufactured compression couplings equal to Style 38 or Style 39 17 where isolating dielectric couplings are required, as manufactured by the 18 Dresser Manufacturing Division of Dresser Industries or equal. The 19 compression couplings shall consist of two (2) steel follower flanges, one (1) 20 steel middle ring with pipe stops removed, and sufficient rolled thread, 21 track -head bolts to properly compress the gaskets. After fabrication, the 22 middle and follower rings shall be cold expanded to size and dimension. 23 Thickness of the middle ring shall be suitable for the pressures specified, and 24 the application, and in no case be less than one -half (1/2) inch thick. All parts 25 of the compression coupling shall be galvanized or heavily cadmium plated at 26 the point of manufacture and shall be epoxy coated in accordance with AWWA 27 C210 or AWWA C203. 28 29 B. The entire compression sleeve coupling unit shall be rated for working 30 pressure plus surge pressure as a minimum. 31 32 C. The Contractor shall provide field coating for buried couplings in accordance 33 with AWWA C203 and these Contract Documents. 34 35 D. Small deflections in the pipe alignment shall be allowed at compression type 36 coupling joints, but such deflections shall not exceed three (3) degrees 37 between any two (2) adjacent pipe sections. Where changes in line and /or 38 grade in excess of three (3) degrees are required the deflections shall be 39 made by deflecting multiple joints. 40 41 PART 3 — EXECUTION 42 43 3.01 HANDLING PIPE AND FITTINGS 44 45 A. The Contractor shall transport, deliver and distribute along the line of the work, 46 the pipe, specials and appurtenances. All Work shall be in strict accordance 47 with the provisions of applicable permits and easements. 48 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -12 07/15/14 1 I1 B. Pipe shall be loaded for shipment upon suitable cars or trucks that shall be 2 provided with padded bunks with nylon belt tie -down straps or padded I3 banding. In loading and unloading the pipe, more than ordinary care shall be 4 taken to prevent any injury to the pipe, ends, coatings and connections. Such 5 work shall be done slowly with the pipe at all times under control, and under 6 no condition shall the pipe be dropped. Field repair of damaged pipe shall not 7 be allowed, except for linings and coatings. The pipe shall be protected during 8 shipping by covering or some other means acceptable to the Engineer to 9 prevent contamination of the pipe and to protect the lining from drying during 10 transport. 11 12 C. All pipe, fittings, etc., shall be carefully handled and protected against damage 13 to the lining and coating /interior and exterior surfaces, impact shocks, and free 14 fall. All pipe handling equipment shall be acceptable to the Engineer. Pipe 15 handling equipment shall consist of wide belt slings, padded cradles, or other 16 devices designed and constructed to prevent damage to the pipe or coatings. 17 The use of forks, chains, hooks, or other equipment that may damage the pipe 1 18 19 or its lining or coating shall not be allowed. 20 D. In distributing the pipe in the field, each pipe shall be placed as nearly as I21 possible to the point where it is to be laid, and facing in the proper direction. 22 Pipe shall not be placed directly on rough ground but shall be supported in a I 23 manner that will protect the pipe against injury whenever stored at the trench 24 site or elsewhere. Coated pipe shall be stored on padded skids, sand or dirt 25 berm, sand bags, or other suitable means so that coating will not be damaged. I26 Coated pipe shall be handled with wide belt slings. Pipe fittings and specials 27 which are placed in storage, streets or drives must be so arranged as not to 28 cause undue inconvenience to traffic and must be protected sufficiently to I 29 prevent any damage including but not limited to the interior lining and exterior 30 coatings. Chains, cables or other equipment likely to cause damage to the 31 pipe, fitting or special coating or lining shall not be used. Pipe which has been I 32 improperly distributed and which must be moved longitudinally along the 33 trench shall be reloaded on a suitable car or truck or lifted and swung by a 34 derrick or moved by such means as may be satisfactory to the Engineer. I35 36 E. If in the process of manufacture, transportation, or handling, any ductile iron 37 pipe, fitting or special receives any deformation to the pipe wall, ends or I 38 connections, such pipe, fitting or special shall be rejected and replaced at the 39 Contractor's expense. 40 I 41 42 F In the presence of the Engineer, the Contractor shall inspect upon delivery all pipe, fittings, and specials and mark as "rejected" all pipe lengths and fittings 43 or specials exhibiting signs of damage to the exterior coating, interior cement I 44 mortar linings, joint ends, or pipe wall and the Contractor shall at the 45 Contractor's expense immediately remove the same from the job site, or repair 46 to the Engineer's satisfaction. Any pipe, fittings or specials deemed not I 47 suitable for installation shall be replaced in kind by the Contractor at the 48 Contractor's own expense. DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -13 07/15/14 1 2 G. The Contractor shall inspect each pipe and fitting to insure that there are no 3 damaged portions of the pipe. If any defective pipe is discovered after having 4 been laid, it shall be removed and replaced with a sound pipe or fitting in a 5 satisfactory manner, by the Contractor at the Contractor's own expense. 6 7 H. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean each pipe or fitting of any foreign 8 substance that may have collected on or in it prior to the pipe or fitting being 9 placed in the trench. The openings of all pipes and fittings in the trench shall 10 be closed during any interruption of the Work. As pipe laying progresses, the 11 Contractor shall keep the pipe interior free of all debris. The Contractor shall 12 completely clean the interior of the pipe of all sand, dirt, mortar splatter, and 13 any other debris following completion of pipe laying, pointing of joints and any 14 necessary interior repairs prior to testing and disinfecting the completed 15 pipeline. 16 17 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PIPE 18 19 A. Ductile iron piping shall be installed in strict accordance with the manu- 20 facturer's instructions. Pipe shall be laid only after the trench has been 21 excavated as described Division 2 of the Specifications. Pipe laid in trench 22 shall be laid to a firm and even bearing for its full length. Precautions shall be 23 taken against flotation. The pipe shall be backfilled with selected fine 24 excavated material as shown on the Drawings and thoroughly compacted to 25 one foot above the top of the pipe and thereafter backfilled as specified in 26 Section 02221. 27 28 B. Precautions shall be taken against flotation. Pipe shall be laid directly on the 29 bedding material. Pipe shall be laid in the trench where the bedding forms a 30 continuous and uniform support for the full length of the pipe except that the 31 grade may be disturbed for the removal of lifting tackle. Bell holes shall be 32 formed at the ends of the pipe to prevent point loading at the bells or 33 couplings. Excavation shall be made as needed outside the normal trench 34 section at field joints to permit adequate access to the joints for field 35 connection operations. 36 37 C. Each section of pipe shall be laid in the order and position shown on the laying 38 schedule. In laying pipe, it shall be laid to the set line and grade, within plus or 39 minus one inch. 40 41 D. The maximum obtainable separation between raw water, potable water, 42 reclaimed water ad sewage lines shall be practiced. A minimum horizontal 43 separation of 3 feet, outside to outside, shall be maintained between raw water 44 lines, potable water mains and reclaimed water mains or a minimum of 6 feet 45 separation between sewage lines and either water or potable water lines. In 46 instances where water lines cross a potable water main or a sewage collection 47 line, a minimum vertical separation of 12 inches shall be maintained between 48 the invert of the upper pipe and the crown of the lower pipe. In instances DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -14 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 where a vertical separation of 12 inches between a raw water line and a 2 potable water main or a sewage collection line cannot be achieved, then the 3 raw water line shall be placed in a cast iron sleeve or encased in concrete 4 centered at the point of crossing. 5 6 E. Where necessary to raise or lower the pipe due to unforeseen obstructions or 7 other causes, the Engineer may change the alignment and /or the grades. 8 Such change shall be made by the deflection of joints, or by the use of 9 additional fittings. 10 11 F Except for short runs that may be permitted by the Engineer, pipe shall not be 12 laid uphill on grades exceeding 10 percent. Pipe that is laid on a downhill 13 grade shall be blocked and held in place until sufficient support is furnished by 14 the following pipe to prevent movement. 15 16 G. Contractor shall coordinate yard piping installation such that a minimum of 36 17 inches of cover is maintained over piping at all times, unless otherwise 18 indicated on the plans. At crossings, a minimum of 6 inches of vertical 19 separation between pipes shall be maintained while also maintaining 36 -inch 20 minimum cover, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 21 22 H. Bedding and backfilling shall be in accordance with Section 02221 of these 23 Specifications and the details shown on the Construction Drawings. 24 25 I. Bedding shall be carefully worked into the area between the trench bottom and 26 the pipe wall to keep it round. Bedding shall not be deposited on top of the 27 pipe, but alongside it, and in such a way that it rises evenly on both sides. 28 29 J. All joints shall be assembled in accordance with the Manufacturer's 30 recommended procedures. In general the procedure shall be as described 31 herein. Immediately before jointing pipe, the bell of the pipe shall be 32 thoroughly cleaned, and a clean gasket shall be placed in the bell groove. 33 The spigot shall be carefully cleaned and the bell containing the gasket and 34 the spigot lubricated with a vegetable -based lubricant. The spigot of the pipe 35 section shall then be aligned with the bell end and inserted into the bell of the 36 previously laid joint and telescoped into its proper position. Tilting of the pipe 37 to insert the spigot into the bell will not be permitted. 38 39 K. Restrained joints shall be assembled in a similar manner as described above 40 except that the restraining device shall be installed in accordance with the 41 Manufacturer's recommended procedures. 42 43 L. Bolt holes of flanges shall straddle the field horizontal and field vertical 44 centerlines of the pipe. The Contractor shall clean flanges by wire brushing 45 before installing flanged fittings. The Contractor shall clean flange bolts and 46 nuts by wire brushing. 47 48 M. The Contractor shall insert the nuts and bolts (or studs), finger tighten, and DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -15 07/15/14 1 progressively tighten diametrically opposite bolts uniformly around the flange 2 to the proper tension. The Contractor shall execute care when tightening 3 joints to prevent any strain upon valves, pumps and other equipment. After 4 tightening all bolts any stulls shall be removed from the interior of the pipe if it 5 is not to be buried. 6 7 N. If flanges leak under pressure testing, loosen or remove the nuts and bolts, 8 reset or replace the gasket, reinstall or retighten the bolts and nuts, and retest 9 the joints. Flanged joints shall be watertight. 10 11 O. Pipe stulls, if recommended by the Supplier, shall be left in place until bedding 12 and backfilling operations have been completed. After the backfill has been 13 placed, the stulls shall be removed and shall remain the property of the 14 Contractor. 15 16 P After stulls are removed, the Contractor shall check the inside diameter of the 17 pipe to verify that deflection has not exceeded the allowable 3 percent. The 18 frequency of checking shall be as directed by the Engineer but in no case shall 19 be Tess than the frequency of soil density testing. 20 21 Q. All pipes shall be laid with a 2 -inch metallic tape, appropriately color coded 22 and imprinted with the type of service, 12 inches below final grade and directly 23 above the utility, for identification and ease of location. The appropriate tape 24 color codes are as follows: 25 26 Sanitary Force Main: Green 27 Potable Water: Blue 28 Reclaimed Water: Purple 29 30 R. Care shall be taken in bolting flanged joints so that there is no restraint on the 31 opposite end of one piece which would induce stresses in the pipe or fitting or 32 prevent pressure from being evenly and uniformly applied upon the gasket. 33 The pipe or fitting shall be free to move in any direction while bolting. Bolts 34 shall be gradually tightened, each in turn, at a uniform rate of gasket 35 compression around the entire flange. 36 37 S. No pipe shall be installed upon a foundation into which frost has penetrated or 38 at any time that there is a danger of the formation of ice or penetration of frost 39 at the bottom of the excavation. No pipe shall be laid unless it can be 40 established that the trench will be backfilled before the formation of ice and 41 frost occurs. 42 43 T. Pipes underneath structures and slabs shall be ductile iron and shall have a 6- 44 inch minimum concrete encasement for pipes 24 inches and smaller (except 45 pipes 3 inches and smaller, which shall be SCH 80 PVC). 8 -inch minimum 46 concrete encasement for pipes larger than 24 inches up to and including 36 47 inches and 9 inches minimum concrete encasement for pipes larger than 36 48 inches. Concrete encasement shall extend a minimum of 12 inches past edge DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -16 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 of structure or slab. 2 3 U. All pipe and fitting joints occurring within restrained joint limits as required on 4 the Construction Drawings, or as ordered, shall be properly secured to prevent 5 thrust forces from pulling the pipeline joints apart. All tied joints shall be 6 harnessed by using the pipe Manufacturer's standard restrained joint 7 arrangements conforming to these Specifications. Certain joints may be 8 restrained by the use of rods and clamps as directed by the Engineer. The 9 rods and clamp harnessing arrangements shall be installed utilizing lugged 10 fittings and pipe with saddle clamps placed to bear against the pipe bells. 11 Saddle clamps around the barrel of the pipe that depend on friction or set 12 screws to prevent sliding of the clamp are not acceptable. The pipe clamps, 13 tie rods and their assembly shall meet the requirements of the National Fire 14 Protection Association Bulletin No. 24. After each tied joint is connected up, 15 all pipe clamps, bolts, heads, tie rods and nuts shall be coated as 16 recommended by the Supplier. 17 18 V Careful inspection shall be made of every joint to insure a smooth continuous 19 interior surface. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean the interior of the pipe 20 and remove any obstructions that may reduce the pipe's carrying capacity. 21 Following completion of pipeline progressively or in sections, including 22 completion of inside inspections, insofar as might be possible or practicable, 23 the line shall be kept partially filled with water. 24 25 W. The Contractor shall patch the cement mortar lining of any pipe that has a 26 crack exceeding the allowable crack as determined by the Engineer. Lining 27 failures that exceed 100 square inches and that have dimension greater than 28 12- inches shall be cause for the pipe to be rejected. There shall not be more 29 than one patch on the lining of any one joint of pipe, fitting or special. 30 31 X. Wherever necessary and directed by the Engineer, patches shall be made by 32 the Contractor with a mortar of one part Portland cement and two parts clean, 33 sharp sand; all measurements to be by weight. No pipe requiring the lining to 34 be patched shall be installed until the patch is placed. Pipe thus patched shall 35 not be installed until the patch has been properly and adequately cured and 36 observed by the Engineer. 37 38 Y All buried process piping (excluding drainage and stormwater piping) shall be 39 restrained in accordance with the restrained joint table provided in the 40 Drawings. Pipes subject to pressure or being fed by a pumping system shall 41 be restrained based on a 150 psi working pressure. Pipes subject to gravity 42 flow shall be restrained based on a 30 psi working pressure. Restrained joint 43 length indicated in the Tables represents the length on all sides of fittings and 44 valves within which all joints must be restrained. As a minimum, the joints at 45 all fittings and valves shall be restrained. Restrained joints shall be capable of 46 holding against withdrawal for line pressures 50 percent above the normal 47 working pressure but not less than 150 psi on pipe subject to pressure and 30 48 psi on pipe subject to gravity flow. The pipe and fittings shall be restrained DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -17 07/15/14 1 mechanical joints. 2 3 3.03 CUTTING PIPE 4 5 Whenever pipes require cutting to fit into the lines, the work shall be done in a 6 satisfactory manner so as to leave a smooth end, at right angles to the axis of the 7 pipe. Pipe cutting shall only be done by saws specifically designed for that purpose. 8 After cutting, the end of the pipe shall be beveled to the dimensions of the 9 Manufacturer's specifications. 10 11 3.04. COMPRESSION SLEEVE COUPLINGS 12 13 A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean with a wire brush all surfaces that will be 14 in contact with the gaskets. 15 16 B. The follower rings shall be placed over the pipe ends, then the Contractor shall 17 slip the lubricated gaskets (vegetable based lubricant) over the pipe ends. 18 The Contractor shall place the middle ring over the previously laid pipe then 19 insert the end of the joining pipe into the middle ring, and position both 20 gaskets evenly in the middle ring gasket grooves. The Contractor shall insert 21 bolts in bolt holes of follower rings and tighten nuts in the sequence and with 22 the torque requirements of the coupling manufacturer. After tightening all bolts 23 the stulls shall be removed from the interior of the pipe if it is not to be buried. 24 25 3.05 DRILLING AND TAPPING 26 27 A. Where shown on the Construction Drawings or where required, ductile iron 28 pipe, fittings or specials shall be drilled and tapped to receive drainage outlets, 29 air relief outlets, or other pipe or plugs for pressure testing and /or chlorination. 30 Holes shall be drilled accurately and at right angles to the axis of the pipe or 31 fitting. 32 33 B. Where size of the outlet pipe to be connected is such as to require bosses or 34 reinforcement saddles for making the connection, the Contractor shall furnish 35 such outlet connections with bosses or reinforcement saddles drilled and 36 tapped as indicated on the Construction Drawings or as directed by the 37 Engineer. 38 39 3.06 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING 40 41 A. The Contractor shall remove all debris, dirt, grease, mortar and other foreign 42 material by the use of soap and water or other solvent as may be required. 43 44 B. After each joint has been made the Contractor shall give all steel bolts and 45 nuts a chemical wash of the phosphate type followed by one (1) coat of primer 46 especially prepared for the finish of the bolt and nut installed. After this 47 pretreatment, the Contractor shall coat all bolts and nuts as follows: 48 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -18 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 C. Give all bolts and nuts that will be exposed one (1) coat of primer. 2 3 D. Paint all bolts and nuts that will be underground in accordance with these 4 Contract Documents. 5 6 E. All piping and fittings shall have its surface prepared and painted as specified 7 in Sections 09865 and 09900. 8 9 3.07 SUPPLIER'S FIELD SERVICE 10 11 Contractor shall, at no additional cost to Owner, arrange for pipe Manufacturer's field 12 representative to be on -site and provide instruction to each crew working during the 13 installation of a minimum of four push -on joints and four restrained joints The 14 Manufacturer's field representative shall certify that the installations observed were 15 satisfactorily completed and all pipe installation crews were familiar with the proper 16 methods and procedures for the pipeline installations. 17 18 3.08 FLUSHING AND TESTING 19 20 A. The Contractor shall remove all sand and foreign matter from the pipeline as 21 work progresses. The ends of all pipes shall be suitably closed at each break 22 or pause in pipe laying, and at the end of each work day, so as to minimize the 23 amount of materials that can enter the pipe. 24 25 B. Prior to pressure testing, all 24 -inch and smaller mains shall be flushed to 26 remove all sand and other foreign matter. The velocity of the flushing water 27 shall not be less than 2 feet per second. Flushing shall be terminated at the 28 direction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall dispose of the flushing water 29 without causing property damage or violation of environmental regulations or 30 permits. 31 32 C. Prior to pressure testing, all 30 -inch and larger mains shall be televised. All 33 dirt and foreign matter shall be removed and the pipe shall be cleaned. After 34 cleaning, the mains shall be re- televised. Pre -and post - cleaning videotapes 35 shall be furnished to the Owner. 36 37 D. Testing of lines shall be as specified in Section 01625. 38 39 40 END OF SECTION 41 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -19 07/15/14 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -20 07/15/14 1 1 1 SECTION 15064 2 I 3 4 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 1 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 1 9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install in 10 the locations as shown on the Drawings, the PVC piping, fittings and 11 appurtenances as specified herein. 1 12 13 B. The requirements of this specification 15064 supersede relevant articles in 14 Section IV. 1 15 16 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM 17 I 18 19 A. Piping shall be installed in the locations as shown on the Drawings. 20 B. All pipe, fittings, valves, solvents and glue used for potable water piping shall I21 be NSF -61 certified for continuous contact with potable water. 22 I23 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS 24 25 A. All PVC pipe, fittings and appurtenances shall be furnished by a single I 26 manufacturer who is fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the 27 manufacture of the items to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed, 28 constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods I 29 30 and shall comply with these Specifications. 31 1.04 SUBMITTALS I32 33 A. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for review in accordance 34 with the General Conditions and shall include dimensioning and technical I 35 36 specification for all piping to be furnished. 37 B. Submit to the Engineer, for review, samples of all materials specified herein. I38 39 1.05 TOOLS 40 I 41 A. Special tools, solvents, lubricants, and caulking compounds required for 42 normal installation shall be furnished with the pipe. 43 I44 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 45 46 2.01 MATERIALS I47 48 A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: I POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 15064 -1 10/16/14 1 2 1. Class -rated PVC pipe and accessories four to twelve inches (4 " -12 ") in 3 diameter, where shown or as specified on the Drawings, shall meet the 4 requirements of AWWA Specification C900 "Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) 5 Pressure Pipe." Pipe shall be Class 235, meeting requirements of 6 Dimension Ratio (DR) 18 with cast iron outside diameters. Each length 7 of pipe shall be hydrotested to four (4) times its class pressure by the 8 manufacturer in accordance with AWWA C900. W3 RCW piping shall 9 be pipe Class 200 meeting requirements of Dimension Ratio (DR) 14. 10 11 2. Class -rated fourteen inch (14") or larger PVC pipe and accessories for 12 force main use only shall meet the requirements of AWWA Speci- 13 fication C905, "Polyvinyl Chloride Water Transmission Pipe". . Pipe shall 14 be Class 235, meeting the requirements of DR 18 with cast iron outside 15 diameters. Each length of pipe shall be hydrotested by the 16 manufacturer to two (2) times its class pressure in accordance with 17 AWWA C905. 18 19 3. Pressure rated PVC pipe smaller than 4" shall be 200 psi SDR -21 20 conforming to the requirements of ASTM D2241. Potable water main 21 pipe shall have EPDM gasket push -on joints conforming to ASTM F 22 477. Force main pipe shall have SBR gasket push -on joints conforming 23 to ASTM F -477. 24 25 4. PVC pipe less than 4" in diameter which is exposed to view shall be 26 ASTM D -1785 Schedule 80 pipe with UV inhibitors. 27 28 5. All PVC pipe shall be new, unused and manufactured for this project. 29 Polyvinyl chloride sewer pipe shall conform to ASTM D -3034 and D- 30 1784 (PVC compound). Profile pipe shall conform to ASTM F -794. 31 The PVC pipe shall be manufactured by Johns - Manville Corporation, 32 Certain -Teed Corporation, or equal. All PVC sewer pipe shall be green 33 and conspicuously labeled with the manufacturer's name, nominal pipe 34 size, applicable material code or PVC cell classification, standard 35 dimension ratio number, product type, standard specification 36 designation, and production record code. 37 38 6. Pipe shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. Provisions shall be 39 made for expansion and contraction at each joint with an elastomeric 40 ring, and shall have an integral thickened bell as part of each joint. 41 PVC Class pipe shall be installed in accordance with the Uni -Bell 42 Plastic Pipe Association Guide Specification UNI- B -3 -76, and as 43 recommended by the manufacturer. 44 45 7. Pipe shall be furnished in nominal lengths of approximately 20 feet, 46 unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Pipe for potable water 47 supply and accessories shall bear the NSF mark indicating pipe size, 48 manufacturer's name, and AWWA and /or ASTM Specification number, POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 15064 -2 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 working pressure and production code. Pipe and couplings shall be 2 made from Class 12454 -A or Class 12454 -B virgin compound, as 3 designed in ASTM D1784. 4 5 8. PVC pipe shall be color coded as follows: sanitary mains - green; 6 potable water mains - blue; reclaimed water mains — lavender, process 7 piping — brown. Specific colors shall match county standard colors as 8 applicable. 9 10 B. Joints: 11 12 1. Joints for PVC sewer shall be of the bell and spigot type conforming to 13 ASTM D -3212 using factory installed flexible elastomeric seals 14 (gaskets). These gaskets shall be SBR and shall conform to ASTM F- 15 477. Joints for PVC water pipe shall be of the bell and spigot type 16 using factory installed, flexible elastomeric seals (gaskets). These 17 gaskets shall be EPDM and shall conform to ASTM F -477. 18 19 2. The PVC joints for buried pipe shall be of the push -on type unless 20 otherwise directed by the Engineer so that the pipe and fittings may be 21 connected on the job without the use of solvent cement or any special 22 equipment. The push -on joint shall be a single rubber gasket joint 23 designed to be assembled by the positioning of a continuous, molded 24 rubber ring gasket in annular recess in the pipe or fitting socket and the 25 forcing of the plain end of the entering pipe into the socket, thereby 26 compressing the gasket radially to the pipe to form a positive seal. The 27 gasket and annular recess shall be designed and shaped so that the 28 gasket is locked in place against displacement as the joint is 29 assembled. The rubber ring joint shall be designed for thermal 30 expansion or contraction with a total temperature change of at least 75 31 degrees F in each joint per length of pipe. The bell shall consist of an 32 integral wall section with a solid cross - section elastomeric ring which 33 shall meet requirements of ASTM D1869. The thickened bell section 34 shall be designed to be at least as strong as the pipe wall. Lubricant 35 furnished for lubricating joints shall be nontoxic, shall not support the 36 growth of bacteria, shall have no deteriorating effects on the gasket or 37 pipe material, and shall not impart color, taste, or odor to the water. 38 39 3. PVC joints for exposed pipe shall be threaded or solvent welded joints 40 where called for on the Drawings, unless otherwise directed by the 41 Engineer. Teflon thread tape or liquid Teflon thread lubricant shall be 42 used on all threaded joints to serve as both a sealer and lubricant. 43 Threaded joints should be made hand tight (hard). When the joint is 44 hand tight a strap wrench should be used to make up one to two (1 -2) 45 additional full turns past the hand tight point. Do not use pipe wrenches 46 or pump pliers on plastic pipe or fittings. 47 48 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 15064 -3 10/16/14 1 2 C. Fittings: 3 4 1. Fittings for pressure rated PVC pipe smaller than 4" in diameter shall be 5 solvent weld or threaded Schedule 80 PVC and shall conform to ASTM 6 Specification D 2467 or D D2464 as appropriate. 7 8 2. The manufacturer of the pipe shall supply all polyvinyl chloride 9 accessories as well as any adaptors and /or specials required to perform 10 the work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Standard 11 double bell couplings will not be accepted where the pipe will slip 12 completely through the coupling. 13 14 2.02 RESTRAINED JOINTS 15 16 A. All buried piping shall be restrained in accordance with the restrained joint 17 table provided in the Drawings. Pipes subject to pressure or being fed by a 18 pumping system shall be restrained based on a 150 psi working pressure. 19 Pipes subject to gravity flow shall be restrained based on a 30 psi working 20 pressure. Restrained joint length indicated in the Tables represents the length 21 on all sides of fittings and valves within which all joints must be restrained. As 22 a minimum, the joints at all fittings and valves shall be restrained. 23 24 B. Restrained joints shall be capable of holding against withdrawal for line 25 pressures 50 percent above the normal working pressure but not less than 26 150 psi. The pipe and fittings shall be restrained push -on joints or restrained 27 mechanical joints. 28 29 C. PVC push -on pipe bell and spigot joints shall be restrained with the Uni- Flange 30 Corp. Series 1390 Restrainer or equal. The restraining device and Tee head 31 bolts shall be manufactured of high strength ductile iron meeting ASTM A -536, 32 Grade 65- 45 -12. Clamping bolts and nuts shall be manufactured of corrosion 33 resistance high strength, low alloy CORTEN steel meeting the requirements of 34 ASTM A -242. 35 36 D. Ductile iron mechanical joint fittings used with PVC pipe shall be restrained 37 with the Uni - Flange Corp. Series 1300 Restrainer, EBAA Iron, Inc., Series 38 2000PV Mechanical Joint Restraint Gland, or equal. The restraining device 39 and Tee head bolts shall be manufactured of high strength ductile iron meeting 40 ASTM A -536, Grade 65- 45 -12. Clamping bolts and nuts shall be 41 manufactured of corrosion resistant high strength, low alloy CORTEN steel 42 meeting the requirements of ASTM A -242. 43 44 E. Thrust blocks shall not be permitted unless specifically shown on the 45 Drawings. 46 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 15064 -4 10/16/14 1 1 1 PART 3 — EXECUTION 2 3 3.01 HANDLING PIPE AND FITTINGS 4 5 A. Care shall be taken in loading, transporting, and unloading to prevent injury to 6 the pipe. Pipe or fittings shall not be dropped. Any damaged pipe or fittings 7 shall be replaced. 8 1 9 B. All pipe and fittings shall be subjected to a careful inspection just prior to being 10 laid or installed, and no piece shall be installed which is found to be defective. 11 1 12 C. If any defective pipe is discovered after it has been laid or installed, it shall be 13 removed and replaced with a sound pipe in a satisfactory manner at no 14 additional expense to the Owner. All pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly ' 15 cleaned before laying, shall be kept clean until they are used in the work, and 16 when installed or laid, shall conform to the lines and grades required. 17 1 18 3.02 INSTALLING EXPOSED PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS 19 20 A. All piping and fittings shall be installed true to alignment and rigidly supported 21 thrust anchors shall be provided where required. Each length of pipe shall be 22 cleaned out before erection. 23 24 B. Sleeves shall be installed of proper size for all pipes passing through floors or 25 walls as shown on the Drawings. Where indicated on the Drawings or 26 required for liquid or gas- tightness the pipe be sealed with a mechanical seal 27 equal to Link -Seal as manufactured by Thunderline Corp., Wayne, Michigan. 28 29 C. Concrete inserts for hangers and supports shall be furnished and installed in 30 the concrete as it is placed. The inserts shall in accordance with the 31 requirements of the piping layout and jointing method and their locations shall 32 be verified from piping layout drawings and the structural drawings. Pipe 33 hangers and supports are specified in Section 15094 of these specifications. 34 35 D. All valves, fittings, equipment, and appurtenances needed upon the pipelines 36 shall be set and jointed as indicated on the Drawings or as required. Valves 37 and appurtenances are included in Section 15100 of these specifications. All 38 pipe and appurtenances connected to equipment shall be supported in such a 39 manner as to prevent any strain being imposed on the equipment. When 40 manufacturers have indicated requirements that piping loads shall not be 41 transmitted to their equipment, a certification shall be submitted stating that 42 such requirements have been complied with. 43 44 3.03 FLUSHING AND TESTING 45 46 A. Prior to pressure testing, all mains shall be flushed to remove all sand and 47 other foreign matter. The velocity of the flushing water shall not be less than 2 48 feet per second. Flushing shall be terminated at the direction of the Engineer. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 15064 -5 10/16/14 1 1 The Contractor shall dispose of the flushing water without causing a nuisance 2 or property damage. 3 4 B. Complete PVC piping systems shall be field pressure tested after installation 5 and including all components to 150 psi for 2 hours. Any Teaks discovered 6 during testing shall be repaired. The repaired component or portion must be 7 retested until the entire system passes the pressure testing. Perform pressure 8 testing in accordance with Section 01625. 9 10 3.04 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING 11 12 A. All piping and fittings exposed to view shall have its surface prepared and be 13 painted as specified in Sections 09865 and 09900 of these specifications. 14 Surface preparation and shop priming is a part of the work of this Section. 15 Pipe marking is included in Section 09900, but it shall be part of the work of 16 this Section to assist as required by the Engineering in identifying pipe 17 contents, direction of flow and all else required for proper marking of pipe. 18 19 20 END OF SECTION POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 15064 -6 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 15080 2 3 SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 WORK INCLUDED 8 9 The Contractor shall furnish all the materials, tools, labor, supervision and appliances 10 for and shall properly install, connect, adjust, test and place at the locations shown 11 on the Drawings, or as directed, all copper pipe and fittings and small diameter 12 miscellaneous pipe and fittings at the locations and to the elevations indicated, 13 specified or required, as necessary for the proper completion of the Work. 14 15 Attention is called to the fact that miscellaneous pipe and fittings are not necessarily 16 shown complete on the Drawings, which are more or less schematic, but the 17 Contractor shall do all piping work indicated or required for the proper operation of 18 all equipment and services requiring such piping, and all such work shall be done by 19 competent workmen in a thorough workmanlike manner, according to best custom 20 and practice, and in compliance with all Laws and Regulations, with proper provisions 21 for dismantling, draining, expansion and contraction. 22 23 Wherever the Work disturbs existing conditions or Work already completed, the same 24 shall be restored to its original condition in every detail. All such replacement and 25 repair shall meet with the approval of the Engineer. 26 27 It is the intent of these Contract Documents to require an installation under this 28 Section complete in every detail, whether or not indicated on the Drawings, or 29 specified herein. Consequently, the Contractor shall be responsible for all details, 30 devices, accessories and special construction necessary to properly furnish, install, 31 adjust, test and place in continuous and satisfactory service a complete installation of 32 miscellaneous pipe and fittings. 33 34 Full responsibility for fabricating, and installing the miscellaneous pipe and fittings, for 35 selecting materials of construction, and for demonstrating strict compliance with 36 specified performance requirements shall rest with the Contractor and, through the 37 Contractor, the Supplier. The Engineer's approval of the 1) Shop Drawings, 2) 38 construction of the miscellaneous pipe and fittings, 3) the use of materials included in 39 this Specification, shall not relieve the Contractor and Suppliers of full responsibility 40 for meeting all performance requirements and guarantees specified in the Contract 41 Documents. 42 43 1.02 REFERENCE TO OTHER SECTIONS 44 45 Requirements contained herein under the Specifications for Ductile Iron Pipe shall be 46 considered as and are hereby made a part of the Specifications for Small Diameter SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS 15080 -1 10/16/14 1 Pipe and Fittings insofar as they may apply. 2 3 1.03 WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS 4 5 The Contractor shall furnish materials under this Specification which are new, unused 6 and as specified, or if not particularized herein, which are the best of their respective 7 kind, free of defects and imperfections, and suitable for the service intended, subject 8 to the approval of the Engineer. 9 10 The Contractor shall provide workmanship which is first class in every respect and 11 have the installation performed by workers thoroughly experienced in such work. A 12 neat and workmanlike appearance in the finished work shall be required. 13 14 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with all Laws and Regulations. 15 16 1.04 SUBMITTALS 17 18 The Contractor shall submit detailed, dimensioned Shop Drawings and data 19 conforming to the requirements of Section 01300 and 01340 of the General 20 Requirements to the Engineer for approval before fabrication, shipment or Work 21 specified under this Section begins. 22 23 The Contractor shall make detailed drawings for pipe and fittings to a scale of not 24 less than 1/4 inch equals one (1) foot, indicating piping layout in plan and elevation 25 as may be required to clearly indicate all pipe and fittings. Completely dimension the 26 drawings and indicate connections to equipment and reference to approved shop 27 drawings of such equipment. 28 29 The Contractor shall include a complete schedule of pipe, fittings and specials with 30 mark numbers on the schedules and on drawings corresponding to the mark 31 numbers which will be on the pipe, fittings and specials when delivered to the job site, 32 as called for hereinafter. 33 34 The Contractor shall indicate location and type of pipe supports, hangers and 35 anchors on the Shop Drawings. 36 37 PART 2 - MATERIALS 38 39 2.01 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 40 41 Steel pipe, when specifically called for, shall meet the "Standard Specification for 42 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot - Dipped Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless, 43 for Ordinary Uses," - A.S.T.M. Designation: A 120 -83. Schedule 40 pipe shall be 44 "Standard Weight" pipe and used except as modified herein. Fittings used on black 45 steel pipe lines two and one -half (2 -1/2) inches or less in diameter, unless otherwise 46 specifically called for, shall be standard weight, one hundred fifty (150) pound, SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS 15080 -2 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 beaded, malleable iron conforming to ASTM A338 for "Malleable Iron Flanges, Pipe 2 Fittings and Valve Parts for Railroad, Marine and other Heavy Duty Service" at 3 temperatures up to 650 °F (345 °C), Class 150. Fittings used on black steel pipe lines 4 three (3) inches and larger shall be of the welded American National Standards 5 Institute (A.N.S.I.) type, long radius design of standard weights, A.N.S.I. B 16.9 -1971, 6 "Factory- Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings." 7 8 Flanges shall be of the forged steel slip -on type, faced and drilled, of the one 9 hundred fifty (150) pound series, meeting A.N.S.I. Specification B 16.5 -1977 "Steel 10 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings" , and "Standard Specification for Forging, Carbon 11 Steel for General Purpose Piping," A.S.T.M. Designation: A 181 -83. 12 13 All gaskets for flanged pipe joints except for air or steam service shall be full face. 14 type with a minimum thickness of one - eighth (1/8) inch and shall be red rubber or 15 neoprene. Air and steam service gaskets shall be compressed non - asbestos material 16 Style No. 3000 Garlock Blue Gard, similar products by Cranite or equal. 17 18 The Contractor shall provide unions in each run of pipe and at equipment for easy 19 removal. Furnish unions of the ground joint type with brass seats. No gasketed 20 unions shall be permitted. 21 22 The Contractor shall provide fittings as required and expansion couplings in each run 23 of straight pipe and at structural expansion joints. Groove pipe for expansion 24 couplings where noted or specified. 25 26 The Contractor shall provide each length of pipe with a coupling. 27 28 Malleable iron screwed fittings shall meet the standards of A. N.S.I. B 16.3 -1977, 29 "Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings ". Hot - dipped galvanized malleable iron fittings 30 shall be used on all galvanized steel pipe lines. Malleable iron grooved end fittings 31 shall meet the requirements of "Standard Specification for Malleable Iron Castings ", 32 A.S.T.M. A 47 -77 and be hot - dipped galvanized. Furnish pipe and fittings with sound, 33 well fitting threads. Pieces having defective threads shall be rejected. 34 35 2.02 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 36 37 All stainless steel pipe and fittings shall be made of Type 304 stainless steel, unless 38 shown or specified otherwise. Stainless steel pipe shall be seamless or welded and 39 furnished in strict accordance with "Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded 40 Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe" , A.S.T.M. Designation A 312 -83 and fittings in 41 accordance with "Standard Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel 42 Piping Fittings ", A.S.T.M. Designation A 403 -83a. Butt welded fittings shall meet the 43 standards of ANSI B 16.9 -1971. All pipe and fittings shall be annealed and pickled, 44 and shall have a surface finish equivalent to a No. 1 Mill Finish in accordance with 45 "Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat - Rolled Stainless and Heat - 46 Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip ", A.S.T.M. Designation A 480/ A 480M -83a. SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS 15080 -3 10/16/14 1 Schedule 40 pipe shall be "Standard Weight." Fittings shall have the same schedule 2 wall thickness as the pipe. 3 4 Where stainless steel pipe is connected by grooved -end couplings or flange 5 adaptors, the pipe shall be of the roll grooved (no metal removed) end type. 6 7 All welding shall be done by a fully automatic, shielded arc, inert gas method. Welds 8 shall be fully penetrated and gas shielded on both sides. All welds shall be smooth, 9 uniform bead and thickness, and brushed with stainless steel wire brush, with 10 deposits and discoloration removed. 11 12 2.03 COPPER PIPE AND FITTINGS 13 14 All copper pipe shall be of standard size, as indicated on the Drawings, specified or 15 required and shall conform in all respects to the "Standard Specification for Seamless 16 Copper Water Tube," A.S.T.M. Designation: B 88 -83. The Contractor shall provide 17 copper tubing manufactured by Anaconda American Brass Company, Revere Copper 18 and Brass, Inc., or equal. Copper water pipe, when used underground, shall be Type 19 K, soft temper, coil or straight lengths as directed and when used elsewhere shall be 20 Type L, hard temper, drawn copper tubing, unless otherwise specifically called for. 21 All fittings on these lines shall be cast bronze fittings, as manufactured by Mueller 22 Company; Stanley G. Flagg Co.; or equal. For soft temper tubing the Contractor shall 23 provide cast bronze flared tube type fittings. For hard drawn copper tube fittings the 24 Contractor shall provide the cast bronze sweat type. Unions shall be of the solder 25 type, with brass -to -brass seats. Gasketed unions shall not be acceptable. A liberal 26 amount of unions shall be installed to allow removal of valves and equipment. 27 28 Where copper piping is connected to steel pipe, the Contractor shall furnish and 29 install an insulating union by EPCO Sales, Incorporated, or Capital Manufacturing 30 Co., or equal. 31 32 Where copper pipe is connected to ductile iron pipe, the Contractor shall furnish and 33 install a tapped cap, Clow F -1042, or ACIPCO Type A -338 or equal, and a brass 34 corporation stops, Type HI5025 by Mueller Co., or equal. 35 36 2.04 BRASS PIPE AND FITTINGS 37 38 Brass pipe shall meet the "Standard Specification for Seamless Brass Tube," 39 A.S.T.M. Designation: B 135 -82, drawn temper. Fittings shall be brass. 40 41 2.05 PIPING SCHEDULE 42 43 Unless otherwise called for by the Drawings or elsewhere in these Specifications, the 44 following schedule shall be a guide of minimum requirements for piping for the Work. 45 46 I. Pipe for Underground Service SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS 15080 -4 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 A. Potable Water and Sealing Water 3 4 1. 3" and smaller - Type K (heavy wall) soft temper copper tube 5 with soldered fittings. 6 7 B. Compressed Air 8 9 1. 2" and smaller - Type K (heavy wall) soft temper copper tube 10 with soldered fittings. 11 12 2. 2 -1/2" to 4" - Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with 13 screwed joints, slip -on flanges or compression couplings. 14 15 All ungalvanized (black) steel pipe for underground service shall be coated with a 16 polyethylene sheath. The coating system shall meet Federal Specification L- C -530B. 17 All joints shall be wrapped after laying, so that the finished job shall be completely 18 protected. 19 20 II. Pipe for Nonburied Service, Carrying: 21 22 A. Potable Water and Sealing Water 23 24 1. 3" and smaller - Type L (medium wall) hard temper copper pipe 25 with soldered fittings. Use red brass pipe around equipment, and 26 in other locations where vibration is expected. 27 28 B. Compressed Air 29 30 1. 2" and smaller - Type L (medium wall), hard temper copper pipe 31 with soldered fittings. Use red brass pipe around equipment, and 32 in other locations where vibration is expected. 33 34 2. 2 -1/4" to 6" - Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe, with screwed 35 joints, slip -on flanges or compression couplings. 36 37 C. Vent Gases 38 39 1. 3 -1/2" and smaller - Schedule 40 galvanized steel, with 40 screwed joints, slip -on flanges or compression couplings. 41 42 D. Hydraulic Piping 43 44 1. 1/2" and less - Schedule 40 stainless steel pipe with hydraulic 45 connectors. 46 SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS 15080 -5 10/16/14 1 2. 3/4" and larger - Schedule 40 stainless steel pipe with screwed 2 joints or welded joints. 3 4 All ungalvanized (black) steel piping for interior use, that is not covered by insulation, 5 shall be primed and painted as specified under the painting schedule of Section 6 09900. 7 8 Where more rigidity is required in erecting and supporting copper pipe, the Contractor 9 shall, with the approval of the Engineer or when so directed by the Engineer, 10 substitute brass pipe. 11 12 2.06 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 13 14 The Contractor shall provide all necessary hangers and supports for piping installed 15 in the Work. 16 17 Hangers and supports for all steel or other piping shall meet the following 18 requirements. No perforated strap hangers and no wire supports shall be permitted. 19 20 Hangers supporting insulated piping 2 -1/2" and larger shall be sized to fit the pipe 21 plus the insulation. The insulation at support points shall be provided with metal 22 shields to prevent damage to the insulation. 23 24 Pipe hangers used to support uninsulated copper piping shall be copper or copper 25 plated. 26 27 Guides shall be located not more than twenty (20) feet away from each expansion 28 loop or joint. 29 30 Horizontal runs of pipe shall have supports spaced so that the sag of the 31 unsupported length shall not create any pockets in the piping. 32 33 All vertical piping shall be supported at the base with fittings made for this purpose or 34 supported from the nearest horizontal member or floor with a riser extension pipe 35 clamp. The Contractor shall provide riser extension clamps at each floor. 36 37 All anchors that are installed in existing concrete shall be expansion case inserts. 38 The Contractor shall drill clean holes for insertion of case and patch concrete around 39 drill hole as required. 40 41 The Contractor shall furnish and install concrete inserts that shall be cast in the 42 concrete walls and slabs as required for the proper hanging and supporting of the 43 piping and equipment that is to be furnished and installed. 44 45 If approved by the Engineer, continuous slotted concrete inserts shall be shall be 46 used. The Contractor shall provide secondary angle supports between main inserts SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS 15080 -6 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 to hang the various pipes where the Toads are such that they can be properly 2 supported by this arrangement. 3 4 All inserts and support bolts shall be galvanized. 5 6 2.07 SLEEVES AND FLOOR PLATES 7 8 Wherever pipes pass through floors, walls or ceilings, the Contractor shall provide 9 Standard Wall steel pipe sleeves of the proper size. The Contractor shall properly 10 cement or build sleeves into the masonry in a rigid position. The Contractor shall set 11 ends of the sleeves flush at wall and ceiling surfaces and to extend one inch above 12 floor surfaces. 13 14 For sleeves in walls below grade, the Contractor shall provide water stops and tightly 15 caulk after the pipe is installed. Such sleeves shall be completed tight and tested for 16 leaks. 17 18 PART 3 - EXECUTION 19 20 3.01 INSTALLATION 21 22 All pipe shall be carefully placed by the Contractor to proper lines and grades and 23 shall be connected up, unless otherwise shown or indicated, with screw fittings. 24 Screw joints shall be made tight, with an approved jointing compound, and screwed 25 home. If welding of pipe is called for, it shall be installed in accord with the 26 requirements of the Engineer. 27 28 All piping shall be installed in such manner and at such times as will require a 29 minimum of cutting and repairing of the building structures. In case any such cutting 30 and repairing is necessary, it shall be done only with the permission of the Engineer. 31 All cutting and repairing shall be performed by mechanics of the trade which originally 32 executed the work, with all repairs matching the original condition. 33 34 The following general piping practices, when applicable, shall be followed in installing 35 all steel, copper and brass piping: 36 37 1. Full lengths of pipe shall be used wherever possible; short lengths of pipe with 38 couplings shall not be permitted. 39 40 2. All pipe shall be cut to exact measurement and shall be installed without 41 forcing or springing. 42 43 3. Tool marks and unnecessary pipe threads shall not be allowed. Burrs formed 44 when cutting pipe shall be removed by reaming. Before installing any pipe, 45 care shall be taken that the inside is thoroughly clean and free of cuttings and 46 foreign matter. SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS 15080 -7 10/16/14 1 2 4. In general, all changes in direction shall be made by using pipe fittings. Field 3 bends of pipe shall not be permitted. Wherever there is a galvanized steel 4 pipeline longer than 30 feet, the Contractor shall provide a plugged tee in the 5 line. 6 7 5. A liberal number of unions shall be used on pipe two and one -half (2 -1/2) 8 inches or smaller in diameter, and companion flanges on pipe three (3) 9 inches and larger, to permit the ready removal of any section. Unions shall 10 be installed in all piping connections to equipment, to regulating valves, and 11 wherever necessary to facilitate the removal of valves, strainers, accessories 12 and other items requiring maintenance. Flanges on equipment may be 13 considered as unions when connecting pipe is provided with companion 14 flanges. All unions shall be of the ground joint type, with brass -to -metal seats. 15 No gasketed unions will be permitted. Where wrought iron or steel pipe is to 16 be connected to copper pipe, a dielectric union, such as those 17 manufactured by EPCO Sales, Inc., Capital Manufacturing Company, or 18 equal, shall be used. 19 20 6. Exposed piping shall be neatly arranged, straight, run parallel and at right 21 angles to walls, unless otherwise directed or shown, and shall be so graded 22 that the entire system can be drained. Drain valves or stop and waste valves 23 shall be installed at all low points of piping. 24 25 7. Installed piping shall not interfere with the operation or accessibility of doors or 26 windows, shall not encroach on aisles, passageways, and equipment, and 27 shall not interfere with the servicing or maintenance of any equipment. 28 29 8. The Contractor shall cut annealed, Type K, copper tube square, ream ends 30 and flare using suitable tools. The Contractor shall use bending tools for 31 making bend on annealed copper pipe only and shall assemble hard drawn, 32 Type L, copper tubing, using solder alloy and flux as recommended by the 33 manufacturer of the tubing. The Contractor shall cut tubing square, ream ends, 34 and polish both fitting and tube with steel wool before fluxing; properly heat, 35 taking care not to overheat and after running solder, wipe the joint clean. The 36 Contractor shall install copper tubing only in accordance with the supplier's 37 instructions. 38 39 9. Where copper tubing is connected to ferrous piping or equipment with ferrous 40 fittings, the Contractor shall provide approved insulating bushings. 41 42 10. Where copper lines pass through exterior walls, the Contractor shall carry 43 Type K through a pipe sleeve provided for this purpose and connect Type L 44 inside the building by use of adapter fittings. 45 46 11. All welding of steel pipe shall be carried out in strict accordance with A.W.S. SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS 15080 -8 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 procedures. Welding of black steel pipe shall be accomplished by means of 2 the manual, shielded metal -arc process. Welding of stainless steel pipe shall 3 be by the shielded arc, inert gas method. 4 5 All welding shall be performed by welders thoroughly qualified for this type of 6 work. 7 8 12. When cast iron companion flanges are required to connect steel piping to cast 9 iron piping, or in steel pipe two and one -half (2 -1/2) inches or larger in lieu of 10 unions, such flanges shall be furnished drilled and tapped, as necessary, and 11 included with the pipe. 12 13 13. After welding slip -on flanges to galvanized steel pipe, the disturbed galvanized 14 interior and exterior areas the Contractor shall clean and restore, by hot -dip 15 galvanizing or painting with a zinc -rich cold galvanizing paint. 16 17 14. After testing, exposed pipe threads on joints laid in the ground the Contractor 18 shall paint with one (1) coat of Bitumastic No. 50, Tnemecol or equal coal -tar 19 pitch paint. 20 21 15. In general, the Contractor shall furnish and install pipe expansion joints on all 22 piping where such piping crosses structure expansion joints, whether or not 23 shown on the Drawings. Pipe expansion joints shall be approved by the 24 Engineer. The Contractor shall assemble expansion couplings with bolts 25 drawn sufficiently tight to prevent leakage but not to prevent expansion and 26 contraction. 27 28 16. Where pipes pass through concrete or masonry walls or floors, the Contractor 29 shall provide galvanized pipe sleeves. For pipe two (2) inches and smaller in 30 diameter, provide sleeves two (2) sizes larger than the pipe itself. For pipe 2- 31 1/2 inches and larger in diameter, provide sleeves one (1) pipe size larger than 32 the pipe itself. The Contractor shall extend sleeves through the floor two (2) 33 inches above the finished slab, except in finished areas where the Contractor 34 shall finish the sleeve just above the finished slab, unless it is noted to be 35 flush. The Contractor shall make ends of sleeves flush with wall and ceiling 36 surface, shall render sleeves gas tight and caulk sleeves passing through 37 exterior walls watertight using lead wool. 38 39 17. Provide chromium plated floor, wall and ceiling plates to cover exposed piping 40 passing through surfaces; furnish Grinnell Fig. 10, American Standard, or 41 equal. 42 43 18. Underground piping shall be cradled and backfilled as specified. The use of 44 slag for cradle or backfill material under, around or over steel, copper and 45 brass pipe is prohibited. 46 SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS 15080 -9 10/16/14 1 3.02 TESTING 2 3 After all piping has been connected up in place, and before application of insulation 4 or covering, the Contractor shall test to the satisfaction of the Engineer all piping in 5 accordance with the requirements of Section 01625 and 15062 of these 6 Specifications, as such relate to testing. Any leaks that develop shall be made tight 7 before final acceptance of the work by rewelding, tightening, renewing packing, or 8 replacing materials, as required or as ordered. Caulking is not permitted. All labor, 9 material and equipment for tests shall be furnished by the Contractor. After all lines 10 have been tested and approved, they shall be blown dry with compressed air and 11 carefully cleaned by the Contractor. 12 13 3.03 DISINFECTION 14 15 All steel or copper or brass piping carrying potable water shall be disinfected after 16 testing, in accordance with the procedures specified in Section 01625. 17 18 19 END OF SECTION 20 21 22 23 SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS 15080 -10 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 15094 2 3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. It is the intent of the project to remove existing pipe supports, hangers, and 10 straps and furnish and install new pipe supports, hangers, and straps as 11 shown on the Drawings. 12 13 B. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals and install hangers, 14 supports, concrete inserts, and anchor bolts, including metallic hanging and 15 supporting devices for supporting exposed piping. 16 17 C. All new pipe supports, hangers, straps hardware, clips, unistrut, and anchors 18 shall be 304 stainless steel and shall match the number, type, location, and 19 capacity of the existing supports. 20 21 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS 22 23 A. Hangers and supports shall be of standard design and shall be adequate to 24 maintain the supported load in proper position under all operating conditions. 25 The minimum working factor for pipe supports shall be five (5) times the 26 ultimate tensile of the material, assuming 10 feet of water filled pipe being 27 supported. 28 29 B. All pipe and appurtenances connected to equipment shall be supported in 30 such a manner as to prevent any strain being imposed on the equipment. 31 When manufacturers have indicated requirements that piping loads shall not 32 be transmitted to their equipment, the Contractor shall submit a certification 33 stating that such requirements have been complied with. 34 35 1.03 SUBMITTALS 36 37 A. Submit to the Engineer for review, as provided in the General Conditions, shop 38 drawings of all items to be furnished under this section. 39 40 B. Submit to the Engineer, for review, samples of all materials specified herein. 41 42 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 43 44 2.01 GENERAL 45 46 A. All pipe and tubing shall be supported as required to prevent significant 47 stresses in the pipe or tubing material, valves and fittings, and to support and 48 secure the pipe in the intended position and alignment. All supports shall be PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15094 -1 07/15/14 1 designed to adequately secure the pipe against excessive dislocation due to 2 thermal expansion and contraction, internal flow forces, and all probable 3 external forces such as equipment, pipe and personnel contact. All pipe 4 supports shall be reviewed by the Engineer prior to installation. 5 6 B. All materials used in manufacturing hangers and supports shall be capable of 7 meeting, the respective ASTM Standard Specifications with regard to tests 8 and physical and chemical properties, and be in accordance with MSS SP -58. 9 10 C. Hangers and supports shall be spaced in accordance with ANSI B31.1.0 that 11 the maximum unsupported span shall not exceed 10 feet otherwise specified 12 herein. 13 14 D. Unless otherwise specified herein, pipe hangers and supports shall be 15 manufactured by Piping Technology & Products, Inc. or equal. Any reference 16 to a specific figure or number is for the purpose of establishing a type and 17 quality of and shall not be considered as proprietary. 18 19 2.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR METAL PIPE 20 21 A. Suspended single pipes shall be supported by 304 SS hangers suspended by 22 steel from 304 SS concrete inserts, beam clamps or ceiling mounting as 23 follows: 24 25 1. Hangers: 26 27 Pipe Size, Inches Piping Technology & Products Fig. No. 28 1/2" to 3" 50 29 3" to 30" 83 30 Above 30" See SPECIAL SUPPORTS, 31 Paragraph 2.04 32 33 2. Hanger rods shall be rolled 304 stainless steel machine threaded with 34 Toad ratings conforming to ASTM Specifications and the strength of the 35 rod shall be based on root diameter. Hanger rods shall have the 36 following minimum diameters: 37 38 Pipe Size, Inches Min. Rod Diameter, In. 39 Less than 2 -1/2 3/8 40 2 -1/2 though 4 1/2 41 4 5/8 42 6 3/4 43 8 -12 7/8 44 14 -16 1 45 20 -30 1-1/2 46 Above 30 See SPECIAL SUPPORTS, 47 Paragraph 2.04 48 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15094 -2 07/15/14 1 I1 3. Where applicable, structural attachments shall be beam clamp s. Beam 2 clamps, for rod sizes 1/2 -inch through 3/4 -inch shall be equal to Grinnell I 3 Fig. No. 229, and for rod sizes 7/8 -inch through 1 -1/4 inches shall be 4 equal to Grinnell Fig. No. 228 or equal. 5 I6 4. Concrete inserts for pipe hangers shall be designed to be used in 7 ceilings, walls or floors, spot inserts for individual pipe hangers or 8 ceiling mounting bolts for individual pipe hangers, and shall be as 1 9 10 manufactured by Ramset/Red Head, or equal, and shall be as follows: 11 a. 304 SS Multi Set II drop in style anchors shall be used where I12 applicable and shall be used for hanger rods up to and including 13 7/8 -inch diameter. 14 15 b. Ceiling mounting plates shall be used, where applicable, and be 16 for hanger rod sizes 1 -inch through and including 1 -1/4 inches, 17 shall be Fig. 47, Fig. 49 or Fig, 52 as manufactured by Grinnell I18 or equal. All pipe hangers shall be capable of vertical 19 adjustment under load and after erection. Turnbuckles, as 20 required and where applied, shall 304 SS be equal to Grinnell I21 Fig. No. 230. Wall or column supported pipes shall be 22 supported by welded steel brackets equal to Grinnell Fig. 194, I 23 195, and 199, as required, for pipe sizes up to and including 24 20 -inch diameter. Additional wall bearing plates shall be 25 provided where required. 26 I27 5. Where the pipe is located above the bracket, the pipe shall be set on a 28 0.5 -inch neoprene pad and U -bolt assembly supported by the bracket I 29 30 4- inches. U -bolts shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. 120 and 137. for pipes 4- inches and larger or by a U -bolt for pipes smaller than 31 I 32 33 6. Where the pipe is located below the bracket, the pipes shall be supported by pipe hangers suspended by steel rods from the bracket. 34 Hangers and steel rods shall be as specified above. I35 36 7 Wall or column supported pipes 8- inches and smaller may be supported 37 by hangers equal to Grinnell Figures 103, as required. I38 39 B. Floor supported pipes 3- inches and larger in diameter shall be supported by 40 either cast -in -place concrete supports or adjust -able pipe saddle supports as I 41 42 directed by the Engineer. In general, concrete supports shall be used when lateral displacement of the pipes is probable (unless lateral support is 43 provided), and adjustable pipe saddle type supports shall be used where I 44 45 lateral displacement of the pipes is not probable. 46 1. Each concrete support shall conform to the details shown on the I 47 Drawings. Concrete shall be poured after the pipe is in place with 48 temporary supports. Top edges and vertical corners of each concrete PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15094 -3 07/15/14 1 1 support shall have 1 -inch bevels. Each pipe shall be secured on each 2 concrete support by a wrought iron or steel anchor strap anchored to 3 the concrete with cast -in -place bolts or with expansion bolts. Where 4 directed by the Engineer, vertical reinforcement bars shall be grouted 5 into drilled holes in the concrete floor to prevent overturning or lateral 6 displacement of the concrete support. Unless otherwise directed by the 7 Engineer, maximum height shall be five (5) feet. 8 9 2. Concrete piers used to support base elbows and tees shall be similar to 10 that specified above. Piers may be square or rectangular. 11 12 3. Adjustable pipe saddle support shall be screwed or welded to the 13 corresponding size 150 Ib. companion flanges or slip -on welding 14 flanges respectively. Supporting pipe shall be of Schedule 40 steel 15 pipe construction of the size recommended by the pipe support 16 manufacturer. Each flange shall be secured to the concrete floor by a 17 minimum of two (2) expansion bolts per flange. Adjustable saddle 18 supports shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. No. 259. Where used under 19 base fittings, a suitable flange shall be substituted for the saddle. Floor 20 supported pipes less than 3- inches shall be supported by fabricated 21 steel supports. 22 23 C. Vertical piping shall be supported as follows: 24 25 1. Where pipes change from horizontal to vertical, the pipes shall be 26 supported on the horizontal runs within 2 feet of the change in direction 27 by pipe supports as previously specified herein. 28 29 2. For vertical runs exceeding 15 feet pipes and greater than eight- inches 30 in diameter shall be supported by the fabricated pipe support as shown 31 in the drawings. 32 33 3. Where vertical piping passes through a steel floor sleeve, the pipe shall 34 be supported by a friction type pipe clamp which is supported by the 35 pipe sleeve. Pipe clamps shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. 262. Anchor 36 bolts shall be equal to Kwik -Bolt as manufactured by the McCullock 37 Industries, Minneapolis, Minnesota or Wej -it manufactured by Wej -it 38 Expansion Products, Inc., Bloomfield, Colorado. 39 40 D. All rods, hangers, inserts, brackets, and components shall be 304 Stainless 41 Steel. 42 43 2.03 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLASTIC PIPE 44 45 A. Single plastic pipes shall be supported by pipe supports as previously 46 specified herein. 47 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15094 -4 07/15/14 1 1 B. Multiple, suspended, horizontal plastic pipe runs, where possible, and rubber 2 hose shall be supported by ladder type cable trays such as the Electray I 3 Ladder by Husky - Burndy, the Globetray by the Metal Products Division of 4 United States Gypsum, or equal. Ladder shall be of mild steel construction. 5 Rung spacing shall be approximately 18 inches for plastic pipe and 12 inches 6 for rubber nose. Tray width shall be approximately 6 inches for single runs of 7 rubber hose and 12 inches for double runs of rubber hose. Ladder type cable 8 trays shall be furnished complete with all hanger rods, rod couplings, concrete 9 inserts, hanger clips, etc., required for a complete support system. Individual 10 plastic pipes shall be secured to the rungs of the cable tray by strap clamps 11 fasteners equal to Globe Model M -CAC, Husky - Burndy Model SCR or equal. I12 Spacing between clamps shall not exceed 9 feet. The cable shall provide 13 continuous support along the length of the pipe. 14 I15 C. Individual clamps, hangers, and supports in contact plastic pipe shall provide 16 firm support, but not so firm as to prevent longitudinal due to thermal 17 expansion and contraction. I18 19 2.04 SPECIAL SUPPORTS 20 1 21 A. Pipes, requiring special supports as defined in this specification or shown on 22 the drawing, shall be supported by means of a supporting framework anchored 23 into the floor or curbing. The vertical piping shall be suitably secured to I24 horizontal support members connected at each end vertical support members 25 and spaced as required to provide a rigid installation. 26 I27 1. The complete supporting system shall be as manufactured by the 28 Unistrut Corporation, Globe -Strut as manufactured by the Metal I 29 Products Division of U.S. Gypsum, or equal. Vertical and horizontal 30 supporting members shall be U- shaped channels similar to Unistrut 31 Series P1000. I32 33 2. Vertical piping shall be secured to the horizontal members by pipe 34 clamps or pipe straps equal to Unistrut Series P1100M and Series 35 36 P2558. All components shall be of 304 stainless steel. 37 3. The assemblies shall be furnished complete with all nuts, bolts, and I 38 39 fittings required for a complete assembly. 40 4. The design of each individual framing system shall be the responsibility 41 of the Contractor. Shop drawings shall be submitted and shall show all 42 details of the installation including dimensions and types of supports. 43 44 B. Any required pipe supports for which the supports specified in this Section are 45 not applicable, including pipe supports for above 30 -inch diameter pipe; high 46 temperature and high pressure (greater than 150 psi) shall be fabricated or I 47 constructed from standard aluminum shapes in accordance with 48 Specifications, concrete and anchor hardware similar to items previously PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15094 -5 07/15/14 1 1 specified herein and shall meet the minimum requirements listed below and be 2 subject to review by the Engineer. 3 4 1. Pipe support systems shall meet all requirements of this Section and all 5 related Sections of this Specification. 6 7 2. Complete design details of the entire pipe support systems shall be 8 provided, for review by the Engineer. 9 10 3. The pipe support system shall not impose Toads on the supporting 11 structures, in excess of the Toads for which the supporting structure is 12 designed. 13 14 Hanger rods for above 30 -inch pipe shall be a minimum of 1 -1/2 -inch diameter 15 and shall not exceed the Manufacturer's standard maximum recommended 16 safe load. 17 18 2.05 PIPE HANGER AND SUPPORT SPACING 19 20 21 22 23 24 Pipe hanger and support spacing shall be in accordance with ANSI B31.1.1.0 and MSS SP -69. In no case shall the spacing of hangers or supports exceed the following: t .. •- -'rr --- -- Nominal Pipe Size - Inches - -r - -r - Ductile Iron Steel PVC -1 and PVC -2 (Sch. 80) 1/2 N/A 5 3.5 3/4 N/A 6 3.5 1 N/A 7 3.8 1 -1/4 N/A 7 4.0 1 -1/2 - 3 N/A 9 4.0 4 7 10 5.5 5 -10 10 10 10 12 -48 10 per manufacturer or as shown on drawings 10 25 26 27 PART 3 — EXECUTION 28 29 3.01 INSTALLATION 30 31 A. All pipes, horizontal and vertical, shall be rigidly supported from the building 32 structure with supports. Supports shall be provided at changes in direction 33 and elsewhere as shown in the Drawings or specified herein. No piping shall 34 be supported from other piping or from metal stairs, ladders and walkways, 35 unless it is so indicated on the Drawings, or specifically directed or authorized 36 by the Engineer. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15094 -6 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 B. All pipe supports shall be designed with liberal strength and stiffness to I 3 support the respective pipes under the maximum combination of peak loading 4 conditions to include pipe weight, liquid weight, liquid movement, and pressure 5 forces, thermal expansion and contraction, vibrations and all probable I 6 externally applied forces. Prior to installation, all pipe supports shall be 7 reviewed by the Engineer. 8 I9 C. Pipe supports shall be provided to minimize lateral forces through valves, both 10 sides of split type couplings, and sleeve type couplings and to minimize all 11 pipe forces on pump housings. Pump housings shall not be utilized to support I 12 13 connecting pipes. 14 D. Pipe supports shall be provided as follows: 1 15 16 1. Cast iron and ductile iron shall be supported at a maximum support 17 spacing of 10 feet -0- inches with a minimum of one support per pipe I 18 19 section at the joints. 20 2. Supports for multiple PVC pipes shall be continuous wherever possible. I21 Individually supported PVC pipes shall be supported as recommended 22 by the manufacturer except that support spacing shall not exceed five 23 (5) feet. 24 25 3. Support spacing for galvanized steel pipe and copper tubing shall not 26 exceed five (5) feet. 27 28 4. All vertical pipes shall be supported at each floor or at intervals of at ' 29 30 least 15 feet by pipe collars, clamps, brackets or wall rests, and at all points necessary to insure rigid construction. 31 I 32 33 E. Pipe supports shall not result in point loadings, but shall distribute pipe Toads evenly along the pipe circumference. 34 35 F. Effects of thermal expansion and contraction of the pipe shall be accounted for 36 in pipe support selection and installation. 37 I 38 39 G. Inserts for pipe hangers and supports shall be installed on forms before concrete is poured. Before setting these items, all Drawings and figures shall 40 be checked which have a direct bearing on the pipe location. Responsibility I 41 42 for the proper location of pipe supports is included under this Section. 43 H. Continuous metal inserts shall be embedded flush with the concrete surface. I 44 45 46 I 47 48 1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15094 -7 07/15/14 1 3.02 PRIME COATING 2 3 A. Prior to prime coating, all pipe hangers and supports shall be thoroughly clean, 4 dry, and free from all mill - scale, rust, grease, dirt, paint and other foreign 5 substances to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 6 7 B. All submerged pipe supports shall be prime coated with Koppers 654 Epoxy 8 Primer or equal. All other pipe supports shall be prime coated with Rust - 9 Inhibitive Primer No. 621 as manufactured by Koppers Company, Inc., 10 Pittsburgh, Pa. or equal. 11 12 C. Finish coating shall be compatible with the prime coating used and shall be 13 applied, as specified in Section 09900. 14 15 3.03 PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTROLYSIS 16 17 A. Where dissimilar metals are used in conjunction with each other, suitable 18 insulation shall be provided between adjoining surfaces to eliminate direct 19 contact and any resulting electrolysis. The insulation shall be bituminous 20 impregnated felt, heavy bituminous coatings, nonmetallic separators or 21 washers. 22 23 24 END OF SECTION PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15094 -8 07/15/14 1 I1 SECTION 15100 2 I 3 4 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 I9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for complete 10 and ready operation of all valves and appurtenances shown on the 11 Construction Drawings and as specified herein. 12 13 B. All valves and appurtenances shall be of the size shown on the drawings. 14 15 16 C. All new valves 3 -inch and larger shall be provided by the same manufacturer. 17 D. All new pneumatic actuators shall be provided by the same manufacturer. 1 18 19 E. All valves and appurtenances shall have the name of the manufacturer cast in 20 raised letters on some appropriate part of the body. 1 21 22 F. The equipment shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 23 I24 1. Eccentric Plug Valves 25 2. Slanting Disk Check Valves I 26 3. Swing Check Valves 27 4. Telescopic Valves 28 5. Resilient Seated and Resilient Wedge Gate Valves 1 29 6. Butterfly Valves for Water Service 30 7. Butterfly Valves for Air Service 31 8. Pressure Relief Valves I32 9. Ball Valves 33 10. Air Release Valves 34 11. Combination Air and Vacuum Release Valves 35 12. Valve Actuators 36 13. Valve Boxes 37 14. Gauges I 38 39 15. Flange Adapter Couplings 16. Flexible Couplings 40 17. Quick Connect Couplings I41 18. Flexible Type Expansion Joints 42 19. Unions 43 I 44 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS 45 46 A. All of the equipment and materials specified herein are intended to be I 48 47 standard for use in controlling the flow of wastewater, waste activated sludge, return activated sludge, scum, etc., depending on the application. VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -1 10/16/14 1 1 2 B. Unless otherwise specified herein or on the drawings all resilient seats, seals, 3 and other sealing components of valves and flexible fittings shall be of EPDM 4 construction. 5 6 C. All replacement valves are to be provided with an actuator to match the type of 7 the existing actuator and mounted in an identical fashion as the existing 8 actuator. 9 10 D. In the case of existing valves that are being replaced with new valves, all 11 replacement valves shall have the identical lay length as the existing valves. 12 This applies to all types of valves. Prior to ordering any replacement valve, 13 the contractor shall notify the Engineer if the valve in questions has to be 14 special manufactured or ordered because of a non - standard lay length. 15 16 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS 17 18 All of the types of valves and appurtenances shall be products of well - established 19 reputable firms who are fully experienced and qualified in the manufacture of the 20 particular equipment to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed, constructed 21 and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods and shall comply 22 with these Specifications, as applicable. 23 24 1.04 SUBMITTALS 25 26 Complete shop drawings of all valves and appurtenances shall be submitted to the 27 Engineer for review. 28 29 1.05 TOOLS 30 31 Special tools, if required for normal operation and maintenance, shall be supplied 32 with the equipment. 33 34 1.06 VALVE INDICES 35 36 The Contractor shall submit a valve schedule containing all valves required for the 37 work. The schedule shall the location, type, a number, words to identify the valve's 38 function, and the normal operating position for each valve. 39 40 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 41 42 2.01 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES 43 44 A. Replacement plug valves shall be supplied with end connections identical to 45 those valves they are replacing and have identical lay lengths as those valves 46 they are replacing. 47 48 B. All plug valves shall be manufactured and installed in accordance with 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES I 15100 -2 10/16/14 1 1 standard ANSI/AVVWA C517 Table 1, Resilient- Seated Cast -Iron Eccentric 2 Plug Valves, of the latest revision unless otherwise specified. I 3 MANUFACTURER shall provide affidavit of compliance with AWWA Standard. 4 Valves shall be as manufactured by DeZurik, Val - Matic, Homestead or equal. 5 I 6 C. Plug valves shall be tested in accordance with AWWA C504, latest edition. 7 Each valve shall be performance tested in accordance with Paragraph 5.2 of 8 the above reference and shall be given a leakage test and hydrostatic test as 9 described in Paragraphs 5.2.2 and 5.2.3 of the above reference. The leakage 10 test shall be applied to the face of the plug tending to unseat the valve. The 11 manufacturer shall furnish certified copies of reports covering proof of design 1 12 13 testing as described in Section 5.2.4 of the above reference. 14 D. Valves shall be of the non - lubricated eccentric type with resilient faced plugs I15 and shall be furnished with end connections as shown on the plans. Flanged 16 valves shall be faced and drilled to the ANSI B16.1 125/150 Ib. standard. 17 Mechanical joint ends shall be in full compliance with ANSI/ AWWA I 18 19 C111/A21.11. Screwed ends shall be to the NPT standard. 20 E. Valve bodies shall be of ASTM A126 Class B or ASTM A48, Class 40 cast 21 iron. 22 I 23 F. Port areas for valves 20 inches and smaller shall be a minimum of 80 percent 24 of full pipe area. Valves 24 -inch and larger shall have a minimum port area of 25 100 percent of full nominal pipe area. 26 I27 G. All exposed nuts, bolts, springs, washers, etc., shall be zinc or cadmium 28 plated. Valve plugs shall be constructed of ASTM A -48, Class 40 cast iron or ' 29 30 ASTM A -536 ductile iron. Resilient plug facings shall be of Neoprene. 31 H. Valves shall be furnished with permanently lubricated stainless steel, I 32 33 oil- impregnated bronze or non - metallic upper and lower plug stem bearings. 34 I. Valve seats shall be either nickel or stainless steel. Epoxy seats are not I 35 acceptable. 36 37 J. Plug valves greater than 6 inches in diameter shall be supplied with manual I 38 gear actuators unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 39 40 K. Shaft seals shall be of the multiple V -ring type with a packing gland follower. ' 41 42 Shaft seals shall be externally adjustable and repackable without removing the actuator or bonnet from the valve. 43 I 44 45 L. Valves shall have a factory - applied, internal and external, fusion bonded epoxy resin coating with a minimum thickness of 8 mils, conforming to all 46 applicable requirements of the American Water Works Association Standard I 47 C550 -90 entitled "Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants ". 48 1 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -3 10/16/14 1 2.02 SLANTING DISK CHECK VALVE 2 3 A. Valve body shall be heavy two -piece ASTM A126 Grade B cast iron. The two 4 (2) body halves and body seat shall be 0 -ring sealed and bolted together in a 5 manner to sandwich the body seat on a 55° angle. Each body half shall have 6 a covered access hole for internal inspection and each body half and disc shall 7 be fully machined to accept the attachment of a bottom buffer oil dashpot. 8 9 B. The seat ring and disc ring shall permit replacement in the field without need 10 for special tools or machining. Disc and seat ring shall be bronze. The area 11 throughout the valve body must be equal to full pipe area. 12 13 C. The pivot pins in the body and the bushings in the disc lugs shall be stainless 14 steel of different hardness to prevent galling. The bushings shall be press fit 15 to prevent wear. 16 17 D. An indicator shall be provided to show position of the disc. 18 19 E. The valve shall have a bottom mounted buffer for free open and positive non - 20 slam closing. The buffer shall be designed to contact the disc during the last 21 10% of closure and thereafter control the disc closure until the valve is shut in 22 a manner to minimize or prevent water hammer. The rate of hydraulic control 23 and the initial point of buffer contact to the disc closure shall be externally 24 adjustable and variable to suit the water column reversal time. The bottom 25 buffer hydraulic system must be self contained and independent from pipeline 26 media to prevent contamination of the media and protect the cylinder against 27 corrosion. The buffer rod, oil reservoir and buffer pneumatic tank shall be 28 stainless steel. 29 30 F Valve shall be Apco Series 800B slanting disc check valve with bottom 31 mounted buffer or equal. 32 33 2.03 SWING CHECK VALVES 34 35 A. Replacement check valves shall be supplied with end connections identical to 36 those valves they are replacing and have identical lay lengths as those valves 37 they are replacing. 38 39 B. Swing check valves shall be constructed with heavy cast iron or cast steel 40 body with a bronze or stainless steel seat ring, and a noncorrosive shaft for 41 attachment of weight and lever. Flanges shall be drilled for ANSI Standard 42 B.16.1, 125 Ib. Class. Check valves shall absolutely prevent the return of 43 water or wastewater back through the valve when the inlet pressure decreases 44 below the delivery pressure. 45 46 C. The valves must be tight seating and must operate without hammer or shock. 47 The seat ring must be renewable and shall be securely held in place by a 48 threaded joint. VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -4 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 D. Check valves shall be the lever and spring type with a spring and lever arm 3 attached to the disc assembly to protect valves against slam surge, and shall 4 be in full compliance with ANSI /AWWA C508. 5 6 E. The valves shall be as manufactured by the Mueller, Kennedy or equal, and 7 shall be suitable for horizontal installation. 8 9 F The Contractor shall be responsible for all labor and material costs associated 10 with all work made necessary by the use of replacement check valves with lay 11 lengths different than the existing check valves. 12 13 2.04 TELESCOPING VALVES 14 15 A. New telescopic valve assemblies shall be installed at existing locations as 16 shown on the Drawings. The valves shall be sized and manufactured to be in- 17 kind replacements for the existing valves that are to be removed, except that 18 the new valves shall require a manual actuator (electrically operated actuator 19 not required). The new valves shall be mounted and function properly without 20 requiring modifications to the existing structure or the existing piping. 21 22 B. Each valve assembly shall be complete and include but not be limited to the 23 following components: 24 25 1. Cast or ductile iron floor mounting pedestal. 26 2. Manual, rising stem, rack and pinion lifting mechanism with handwheel 27 and gear reducer. 28 3. Stem Rod (316 stainless steel) 29 4. Stem Cover and graduated position indicator 30 5. Stem Guide (bronze or UHMW polyethylene) 31 6. Bail (stainless steel) 32 7. Slip Tube with v -notch (minimum 1/8 thick, 304 Stainless Steel or 33 Brass) 34 8. Gasket Retainer and Flange (stainless steel) Neoprene Split Gasket 35 36 C. The slip tube shall be of 304 stainless steel and manufactured from seamless 37 tube or pipe with a minimum wall thickness of 1/8 -inch. The finish O.D. of the 38 tube shall be within + 0.04 inches runout, cylindrical within 0.100 TIR and have 39 a smooth 125 micro -inch or better surface. The slip tube shall penetrate the 40 riser pipe a minimum of 9- inches in the up position and have a 48 -inch 41 maximum travel. 42 43 D. The bail shall be of the same material as the slip tube and shall be rigidly 44 welded to the slip tube and shall be connected to the stem with a flanged type 45 connection and multiple fasteners. 46 47 E. A stainless steel companion flange and double '/ -inch thick neoprene wiper 48 gasket shall be installed and attached to the top of the existing riser pipe. The VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -5 10/16/14 1 I.D. of the gasket shall be 1/8 -inch smaller than the O.D. of the tube. The 2 gaskets shall be of split design, sandwiched between the riser pipe flange and 3 the companion flange, and replaceable without removing the slip tube from the 4 riser pipe. The drilled hole pattern and dimensions of the companion flange 5 shall match the drilled hole pattern of the existing riser pipe flange. 6 7 F Lifts shall be handwheel type, mounted to a gearbox. The gearbox output 8 shaft shall rotate the pinion gear on the rack and pinion arrangement. The 9 rack shall be type 304 stainless steel with an integral self - locking device to 10 secure the stem in any infinite position throughout the travel range. The lifting 11 device and gearbox shall comply with the Section 2.04 Valve Actuators of this 12 specification. The rising stem lift shall use a stainless steel square tube with 13 torque nut design or a vee keyed shaft, with torque plate, to prevent valve tube 14 rotation. Handwheels shall be a minimum of 16- inches in diameter of cast 15 aluminum, cast iron, or stainless steel and control the pinion shaft via a gear 16 reducer mounted on a cast iron pedestal. The valves shall include a clear 17 plastic Butyrate stem cover with a mylar strip type position indicator, calibrated 18 in ' inch increments to illustrate valve position. The mylar strip, provided by 19 the manufacturer, will be affixed by the Contractor after installation to provide 20 a true and accurate indication of the tube elevation by comparing it to the top 21 of the rising stem. Stainless steel anchor bolts shall be provided for all 22 pedestals. Pedestals shall be mounted to new supporting structural steel 23 mounted to the existing concrete structure. Cleaning, shop prime coating, and 24 finish painting of all new equipment and mounting supports shall be as 25 specified in Section 09865 and Section 09900. 26 27 G. The telescoping valve assemblies shall be manufactured by Waterman or 28 equal. 29 30 2.05 RESILIENT SEATED AND RESILIENT WEDGE GATE VALVES 31 32 A. All gate valves 4 inches to 24 inches in diameter shall be resilient seated or 33 resilient wedge, manufactured to meet or exceed the requirements of AWWA 34 C515 of latest revision and in accordance with the following Specifications. 35 Valves shall have an unobstructed waterway equal to or greater than the full 36 nominal diameter of the valve. 37 38 B. The valves are to be non - rising stem with the stem made of cast, forged or 39 rolled bronze shown in AWWA C515. Two stem seals shall be provided and 40 shall be EPDM of the 0-ring type, one above and one below the thrust collar. 41 42 C. The sealing mechanism shall consist of a cast iron gate having an EPDM 43 coating. The resilient sealing mechanism shall provide zero leakage at the 44 valve design pressure when installed with the line flow in either direction. 45 46 D. The valve body, bonnet, and bonnet cover shall be cast iron ASTM A126, 47 Class B. All ferrous surfaces inside and outside shall have a minimum 10 mil 48 fusion - bonded epoxy coating. A handwheel or wrench nut shall be provided VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -6 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 for operating the valve. All Valves are to be tested in strict accordance with 2 AWWA C515. 3 4 E. Handwheels or chain wheels shall be turned left or counterclockwise to open 5 the valves. Handwheels shall be of ample size and shall have an arrow and 6 the word OPEN cast thereon to indicate the direction of opening. 7 8 F Valves shall have a factory- applied, internal and external, fusion bonded 9 epoxy resin coating with a minimum thickness of 8 mils, conforming to all 10 applicable requirements of the American Water Works Association Standard 11 C550 -90 entitled "Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants ". 12 13 G. Valves shall be equal to those as manufactured by American, M &H, Mueller, 14 Kennedy, Clow, or equal. 15 16 2.06 BUTTERFLY VALVES FOR WASTEWATER SERVICE 17 18 A. Replacement butterfly valves shall be supplied with end connections identical 19 to those valves they are replacing and have identical lay lengths as those 20 valves they are replacing. Existing wafer type valves shall be replaced with 21 wafer type valves and existing flange type valves shall be replaced with flange 22 type valves. New valves shall have flanged connections if above ground and 23 exposed and mechanical joint connections if buried. 24 25 B. Butterfly valves shall meet, exceed, or otherwise conform to the AWWA 26 Standard Specifications for Resilient Seated Butterfly Valves, Designation 27 C504, except as hereinafter specified. Valves, except as specified hereinafter, 28 shall be Class 150A or B, and equal to those manufactured by Bray, Henry 29 Pratt Company, DeZurik, American, Kennedy, Mueller, Homestead, or equal. 30 The valve discs shall be constructed of cast iron conforming to ASTM A -48, 31 Class 40, ASTM A -126, Class B or ductile iron conforming ASTM A536, Grade 32 65 -45 -12 for Class 150 or Tess. Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536, Grade 33 65 -45 -12 shall be provided for all Class 250 valves. 34 35 C. Replacement butterfly valves shall be of resilient seated, wafer type valves 36 with offset discs type in which the seat is uninterrupted by the shaft around its 37 entire circumference. The seat material shall be NBR. 38 39 D. All butterfly valves shall be in accordance with Table 1 and Table 2 of above - 40 mentioned AWWA Specification for short-body valves. Adequate two -way 41 thrust bearings shall be provided. Flange drilling shall be in accordance with 42 ANSI B16.1. 43 44 E. Valve seats for flanged valves shall be EPDM synthetic rubber compound. 45 Valve seats 24 inches and larger shall be field adjustable and replaceable 46 without dismounting operator disc or shaft and without removing the valve 47 from the line. All retaining segments and adjusting devices shall be of 48 corrosion resistant material with stainless steel screws and be capable of a VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -7 10/16/14 1 1/8 -inch adjustment. Valves 20 inches and smaller shall have bonded or 2 mechanically restrained seats as outlined in AWWA C504 except for the wafer 3 type valves. Where elastomer seat is mounted on the valve body, the mating 4 edge of the valve disc shall be 18 -8 stainless steel or Nickel- Chrome, 80 -20 %. 5 Where elastomer seat is mounted on the valve disc, the valve body shall be 6 fitted with an 18 -8 stainless steel seat offset from the shaft, mechanically 7 restrained and covering 360 degrees of the peripheral opening or seating 8 surface. 9 10 F. The valve body shall be constructed of ductile iron or close grain cast iron per 11 ASTM A -126, Class B with integrally cast hubs for shaft bearing housings of 12 the through boss -type. 13 14 G. The valve shaft shall be turned, ground, and polished constructed of 18 -8, 15 ASTM A -276, Type 304 stainless steel and designed for both torsional and 16 shearing stresses when the valve is operated under its greatest dynamic or 17 seating torque. Shaft shall be of either a one -piece unit extending full size 18 through the valve disc and valve bearing or it may be of a stub shaft design. 19 Shaft bearings shall be Teflon or nylon, self - lubricated type. 20 21 H. All valves shall be subject to hydrostatic and leakage tests at the point of 22 manufacture. The valves shall be tested in conformance with AWWA C -504. 23 24 I. The manufacturer shall certify that the required tests on the various materials 25 and on the completed valves have been satisfactory and that the valves 26 conform to all requirements of the Specification and the AWWA standard. 27 28 J. Where indicated on the Drawings, extension stems, floor stands, couplings, 29 stem guides and floor boxes, as required, shall be furnished and installed. 30 31 K. Valves shall have a factory- applied, internal and external, fusion bonded 32 epoxy resin coating with a minimum thickness of 8 mils, conforming to all 33 applicable requirements of the AWWA C550. 34 35 L. Valves shall have a factory- applied, internal and external, fusion bonded 36 epoxy resin coating with a minimum thickness of 8 mils, conforming to all 37 applicable requirements of the American Water Works Association Standard 38 C550 -90 entitled "Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants ". 39 40 2.07 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES 41 42 A. Floor type hydrostatic pressure relief valve shall be designed for installing in 43 the floor of concrete tanks and shall be type F -1493 as manufactured by Clow 44 Valve Company or equal. The valves shall be designed to open at a 45 hydrostatic head of 9- inches of water. 46 47 B. The assembly shall consist of three parts: cover, body, and grate. All three 48 parts shall be of cast iron conforming to ASTM specifications A -126 Class B. VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -8 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 They shall be designed so that neither the cover nor grate can become 2 separated from the body of the valve, due to ground water pressure around 3 the tank. However, when necessary, both may be easily removed by turning 4 them to right or left to free them from locking lugs cast integrally on the inside 5 of the body. 6 7 C. The seats shall be of Buna -N rubber, bonded to the cover, mating with a 8 machined bronze seat in the body. 9 10 2.08 BALL VALVES 11 12 A. PVC ball valves shall be of Type 1, Grade 1 PVC with union, socket, threaded 13 or flanged ends as required. Ball valves shall be full port, full flow, all plastic 14 construction, 150 psi rated with Teflon seat seals and T- handles. PVC ball 15 valves shall be as manufactured by Spears, Plastiline, Hayward, or equal. 16 17 B. True union, vented, PVC ball valves shall be used on the chemical clean 18 system and shall be manufactured to ASTM F 1970 specifications and 19 constructed from PVC Type I, ASTM D 1784 Cell Classification 1245. All 0- 20 rings shall be Latharge Viton. All valves shall have stem with double 0-ring 21 seals. All valve handles shall be polypropylene with built -in lockout 22 mechanism. All valve union nuts shall have Buttress threads. All seal carriers 23 shall be Safe -T- Blocked. All valve components shall be replaceable. All 24 valves shall be certified by NSF International for use in potable water service. 25 All 1/2" through 2" valves shall be pressure rated to 235 psi, all 2 -1/2" through 26 8" and all flanged valves shall be pressure rated to 150 psi for water at 73° F. 27 Valves shall have a vent hole in the ball to equalize internal fluid pressures. 28 Install valve with ball vent on the pressure (upstream) side when in closed 29 position. Vented ball valves shall be True Union 2000 Industrial Ball Valves as 30 manufactured by Spears, True Union Z -Ball Valves by Hayward, or equal. 31 32 C. Bronze, brass or stainless steel ball valves shall be of 2 -piece (1" and smaller) 33 or 3 -piece (1 -1/2" and larger) construction. Valves shall be rated for 150 psi 34 saturated steam pressure and 400 psi WOG pressure. Valves shall have 35 stainless steel, bronze or brass body, stainless steel or chrome plated brass 36 ball, replaceable Teflon or TFE seats and seals, blowout proof stem and vinyl 37 covered steel handle. All end connections shall be threaded. 38 39 D. All valves shall be mounted in such a position that valve position indicators are 40 plainly visible when standing on the floor. 41 42 2.09 AIR RELEASE VALVES 43 44 A. The air release valves shall be installed as shown on the Construction 45 Drawings. The valves shall have a cast iron body cover and baffle, stainless 46 steel float, EPDM seat and stainless steel trim. The fittings shall be threaded. 47 Air release valves shall be equipped with a vacuum ball or check feature in 48 order to prevent air from entering the valve during vacuum conditions. The VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -9 10/16/14 1 valves for wastewater and sludge applications shall be Model D -025 as 2 manufactured by A.R.I. or equal. Air release valves for reclaimed and potable 3 water service shall be A.R.I. Model D- 040 -C -VAC or equal. 4 5 B. A stainless steel or brass ball valve shall be provided on the inlet of all air 6 release valves. Stainless steel or brass piping shall be provided for air release 7 valves on pumps. 8 9 2.10 COMBINATION AIR AND VACUUM RELEASE VALVES 10 11 A. The air and vacuum valves for the transfer pump discharge lines shall be 12 installed as shown on the Construction Drawings. The valves shall have a 13 cast iron body cover and baffle, stainless steel float, and an EPDM seat. The 14 valves shall be 2" threaded connection. Air and vacuum valves shall be 15 equipped with a baffle to protect the float from direct contact with the rushing 16 air and water and to prevent the float from closing prematurely in the valve. 17 The valves shall be Model D -040 -C as manufactured by A.R.I. or equal. 18 19 B. A stainless steel ball valve shall be provided on the inlet of all air and vacuum 20 valves. 21 22 2.11 VALVE ACTUATORS 23 24 A. General 25 26 1. All valve actuators shall conform to the latest version of Section 3.8 of 27 AVVWA Standard Specification C504, and shall be manual, motor - 28 operated, or air operated and shall match the existing valve operator. 29 30 2. Actuators shall be capable of seating and unseating the disc against the 31 full design pressure and velocity, as specified for each class, into a dry 32 system downstream, and shall transmit a minimum torque to the valve. 33 Actuators shall be rigidly attached to the valve body. 34 35 3. Butterfly valve actuators shall conform to the requirements of Section 36 3.8 of the AWWA Standard Specifications for Rubber Seated Butterfly 37 Valves, Designation C504, insofar as applicable and as herein 38 specified. 39 40 4. The Contractor and the actuator manufacturer are responsible for 41 providing actuators of adequate size, pressure, and torque ratings for 42 the respective application. 43 44 5. The Contractor is responsible for handling and installing the valve and 45 actuator in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The 46 Contractor shall replace any damaged actuator without cost to the 47 Owner. 48 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -10 10/16/14 1 I1 6. Valves located seven (7) feet or more above 2 () ove the floor level shall be equipped with an actuator that allows operation of the valve less than I3 five (5) feet from floor level. Manual operators shall have a chainwheel 4 and electric actuator shall have a remote mounted control panel. 5 6 7 B. Manual Actuators 8 1. Manual actuators shall have permanently lubricated, totally enclosed 9 gearing with handwheel and gear ratio sized on the basis of required 10 opening and closing torque values. Actuators shall be equipped with 11 handwheel, position indicator, and mechanical stop - limiting locking 12 devices to prevent over travel in the open and closed positions. They 13 shall turn counter - clockwise to open valves. Manual actuators shall be 14 of the traveling nut, self - locking type and shall be designed to hold the 1 15 valve in any intermediate position between fully open and fully closed 16 without creeping or fluttering. Actuators shall be fully enclosed and 17 designed to produce the specified torque with a maximum pull of 80 I 18 pounds on the handwheel or chainwheel. Actuator components shall 19 withstand an input of 450 -foot pounds for 30" and smaller and 300 -foot 20 pounds for larger than 30" size valves at extreme actuator positions 21 without damage. Valves located above grade shall have handwheel or 22 chain wheel and position indicator, and valves located below grade 23 shall be equipped with a 2 -inch square AWWA operating nut located at I 24 ground level and cast iron extension type valve box. Valve actuators 25 shall conform to AWWA C504, latest revision. I26 27 2. Handwheels or chainwheels shall be turned left or counterclockwise to 28 open the valves. Handwheels shall be of ample size and shall have an 1 29 arrow and the word OPEN cast thereon to indicate the direction of 30 opening. 31 ' 32 33 3. Chainwheels shall be provided for valves 6 feet or more above the operator walkway. Process air piping valves in the aeration basins shall 34 have actuators and handle extensions to allow actuation of the valve a 35 36 minimum of 24 inches above the operator walkway. 37 C. Motor - Operated Actuators I38 39 1. Motor - Operated actuators shall include the electric motor, reduction 40 gearing, valve stem drive nut/bushing, position sensor, overload torque I 42 41 sensor, ductile iron gear case, automatic declutchable handwheel, local control and mechanical position indication, and remote control and 43 position indication. I44 45 2. Motors shall be totally enclosed, non - ventilated 480 volt, 3 phase and 46 specifically designed for high torque, low inertia duty. Motors for I 47 48 actuators shall also be specifically designed and rated for 15- minute duty operation at 104 °F (40 °C). Output capacity shall be sufficient to VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -11 10/16/14 1 1 open or close the valve against the maximum differential pressure when 2 the voltage is 10% above or below normal at the specified service 3 conditions. Motors shall have Class F insulation. Motors must be 4 protected by 3 thermal contacts, which are embedded in the motor 5 windings. The actuator shall be suitable for up to 60 starts per hour for 6 open /close service and 1200 starts per hour for modulating service. 7 8 3. The actuators shall be suitable for use on nominal 3 phase power 9 supply and must include motor, integral reversing starters, local controls 10 and terminals for remote control and indication housed within a self 11 contained, sealed enclosure. The actuator gearing shall be totally 12 enclosed in a lubricant filled cast iron gearcase suitable for operation in 13 any orientation. Non - metallic gearing is not acceptable. For rising stem 14 valves the output shaft shall be hollow to accept a rising stem, and 15 incorporate thrust bearings of the roller type at the base of the actuator. 16 All gearing and bearings shall be oil or grease lubricated and suitable 17 for year -round service based on prevailing ambient temperature 18 conditions. 19 20 4. The actuator shall be furnished with a handwheel with a maximum rim 21 pull requirement of 60 pounds for valve travel loads. An external 22 manual declutch lever shall be included to place actuator in the manual 23 mode. The lever shall not require more than 10 pounds of force to 24 engage even when the valve has been tightly seated. The lever is to be 25 padlockable in either handwheel or motor mode. Operation by motor 26 shall not cause the handwheel to rotate, or operation of the handwheel 27 shall not cause the motor to rotate. Handwheel shall operate in the 28 clockwise direction to close. 29 30 5. Two nameplates, made of stainless steel, shall be attached to each 31 actuator; one on the motor housing, showing all relevant motor data, 32 one on the actuator housing showing all relevant actuator data. Special 33 information, such as the valve tag no., shall be shown if required. The 34 nameplates shall be securely fixed to the actuator and motor, so that 35 they cannot be removed or scratched off during shipment, installation, 36 operation or maintenance. 37 38 6. The rated output torque of the motor actuator shall be at least 1.5 times 39 the maximum torque required to open or close the valve at any position 40 including seating and unseating conditions when subjected to the most 41 severe operating condition including any mechanical friction and /or 42 other restrictive conditions that are inherent in the valve assembly. Do 43 not include hammer -blow effect in sizing the actuator to comply with this 44 torque requirement. Valve manufacturer is responsible to assure that 45 the motor actuator stall torque output does not exceed the torque limits 46 of the valve operating stem or shaft. Maximum torque shall include 47 seating or unseating torque, bearing torque, dynamic torque, and 48 hydrostatic torque. Assume that the differential pressure across the VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -12 10/16/14 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 valve is equal to the pressure or head rating of the valve. 7 Actuator housings, supports, and connections to the valve shall have a minimum safety factor of five based on the ultimate strength or three based on the yield strength of the material used. Actuators shall be 0- ring sealed, watertight to NEMA 4/6 (6 feet for 30 minutes). All external fasteners shall be of stainless steel. Gear case shall be cast iron. 8. Torque switch bypass to be provided for the torque sensing system to inhibit torque switch trip during unseating or during starting in mid travel against high inertia loads. Manual operation shall be by handwheel. Manual operation will be via power gearing to minimize required rimpull and facilitate easy changeover from motor to manual operation when the actuator is under load. A seized or inoperable motor shall not prevent manual operation. 9. Test each actuator prior to shipment in accordance with AWWA C540. The application torque shall be the maximum torque required to open or close the valve at any position including seating and unseating conditions. 10. For all actuators that are installed greater than five (5) feet above the finished floor surface, the actuator manufacturer shall furnish for installation by the Contractor a remote control unit, such that the operator is able to manually control the actuator while standing on floor grade. The remote control unit shall be hardwired to the actuator and be equipped with all the controls /functionality as on the face of the actuator. Remote controllers shall be mounted between 3 feet and 5 feet from the nearest operator accessible floor surface. 11. The operator face plate shall include as a minimum: Buttons for OPEN - STOP — CLOSE — RESET. Backlit LCD display showing the actuator status in plain English text. Lockable selector switch with LOCAL - OFF - REMOTE function. Indication lights for CLOSED, OPEN, RUNNING, and FAULT. 12. The terminal compartment shall provide sufficient space to accommodate the possible maximum number of incoming wires. A minimum of three cable entries must be provided. Each cable entry shall be properly sealed by cable glands during site installation. The cable glands size shall be chosen by the Contractor, responsible for wiring during the commissioning phase. 13. Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) — back -lit for setting menu showing status indication and diagnostic information. The actuator shall include a digital position indicator with a display from fully open to fully closed in 1% increments. For all actuators that utilize a battery, the actuator manufacturer shall furnish one (1) spare battery for each actuator VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -13 10/16/14 furnished. 14. Setting of all actuator parameters including the torque levels, position limits, configuration of the indication contacts, and positioner functionality shall be accomplished without removing covers from the actuator control assemblies or housing. 15. Actuators shall be suitable for indoor and outdoor use. The actuator shall be capable of functioning in an ambient temperature ranging from -20 °F to +140 °F, up to 100% relative humidity. In order to prevent condensation, a space heater shall be installed inside the actuator, suitable for continuous operation. The actuator shall be stored according to the Manufacturers instructions. If the Contractor voids the actuator warrantee in any way, he shall replace the actuator at no cost to the Owner. 16. Actuators are to receive remote input commands for OPEN, CLOSE, and POSITION (as required). Actuators are to provide remote indication as listed above. 17. Contractor is to provide startup, inspection, and instruction services from the Manufacturer's authorized technical representative. Startup and inspection shall not be less than five (5) days. One (1) day shall be provided for training of plant personnel in operation and maintenance of electric operators. 18. Each actuator shall be warranted for a minimum of 24 months from the date of system acceptance by the Owner. D. Air - Operated Actuators 1. Pneumatic actuators shall be double action vane type design with only one (1) moving part as manufactured by K -Tork Controls or approved equal. 2. The pneumatic operators shall be designed to operate at 150 psi maximum and a normal operating pressure of 80 psi supply air and shall be supplied complete with all components necessary for proper mounting, installation, and operation. 3. The pneumatic actuators shall come equipped with connections /fittings compatible with the tubing manufacture's recommendations. The Contractor shall coordinate with the high pressure tubing supplier and the pneumatic valve manufacturer on this issue. 4. Actuators shall have male output shafts (square) on both sides of actuator to drive valve and accessories. Actuator shall have a vane position indicator milled into the output shaft. One side of the actuator VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -14 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 shall be manufactured to ISO /NAMUR mounting standards for 2 attachment of accessories (limit switches, indicators, positioners). 3 Seals shall be double opposed lip seals with stainless steel expanders. 4 Seal backing plates shall be carbon steel with all surfaces coated with 5 thermosetting epoxy powder coat. 0-ring seals on vane will not be 6 acceptable. 7 8 5. Actuator Materials of Construction: 9 10 a. Casing: Pressure die cast A380 aluminum alloy, or A356T51 V- 11 process sand casting with all surfaces coated with thermosetting 12 hybrid polyester /epoxy powder coat with Ultraviolet Inhibitor. 13 14 b. Vane / Output Shaft: Steel ASTM A148 per AVWVA C540 -2, 15 Grade 115 -95, heat treated with electro less nickel plated finish. 16 17 c. Vane Seals: Molded polyurethane. 18 19 d. Shaft Seals: Buna N 20 21 e. Vane Seal Expanders: Stainless spring steel. 22 23 f. Side Plates: Steel with all surfaces coated with thermosetting 24 epoxy powder coat. 25 26 g. Bolting Hardware: All stainless steel 27 28 6. Actuator Position - Control Capability: 29 30 a. Open /Close Valves: Actuators shall be solenoid operated. 31 Solenoids for smaller size actuators shall be standard 32 ISO /NAMUR VDINDE 3845 direct mounted with the option to be 33 remote mounting for increased accessibility. Solenoid coils shall 34 be 120 VAC 60 Hz NEMA 4 rated. Speed control devices shall 35 allow independent adjustment of OPEN and CLOSE cycling 36 speed. Exhaust air mufflers shall be standard. The 37 manufacturer as a standard shall provide OPEN /CLOSE visual 38 indicator. Solenoids shall have manual override feature to allow 39 operation of valves in the event of power outage. On loss of 40 power, the valve remains in the last position. Solenoids shall be 41 suitable for operation on a 120 volt, single phase power supply. 42 43 b. Modulating Valves: There are no modulating actuators for this 44 project. 45 46 7. Torque Capability: 47 48 a. The rated torque capability of each actuator shall be sufficient to VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -15 10/16/14 1 seat and unseat the valve disc it controls under the operating 2 conditions specified herein. Torque safety factors shall conform 3 to AWWA Standards and in no case be Tess than 1.25 times the 4 valve manufactures published torques. 5 6 8. Safety Factor: 7 8 a. Actuator housings, supports, and connections to the valve shall 9 be designed with a minimum safety factor of 5, based on the 10 ultimate strength, or a minimum safety factor of 3, based on the 11 yield strength of materials used. 12 13 9. Stop- Limiting Devices: 14 15 a. Valve actuators shall be equipped with adjustable mechanical 16 stop - limiting devices to prevent over - travel of the valve disc in 17 the open and closed positions. 18 19 10. Actuators shall be equipped with adjustable flow - control devices 20 controlling the operating air exhausting from the actuator. The flow 21 control device shall be located at or near the actuator. The opening 22 and closing speeds shall be adjustable from 5 -60 seconds. Final 23 adjustments shall be made by the filter equipment manufacturer to 24 minimize line surges during normal operation. 25 26 11. Operating air pressure shall be maintained on the actuator at each end 27 of its stroke, unless other means are provided to prevent drifting. 28 29 12. Actuators shall not require more than five (5) psig to be cycled a 30 complete stroke in each direction before they are connected to the 31 valve. 32 33 13. The actuator manufacturer shall provide a qualified factory trained 34 technician for installation inspection, start- up, and training. The 35 contractor shall provide a certificate by the valve actuator supplier 36 indicating proper installation and start-up procedures have been 37 followed. This certificate shall be required and included as part of the 38 final operation and maintenance manuals. 39 40 41 2.12 VALVE BOXES 42 43 A. All buried valves shall have cast -iron three -piece valve boxes. Valve boxes 44 shall be provided with suitable heavy bonnets and to extend to such elevation 45 at or slightly above the finished grade surface, as directed by the Engineer. 46 The barrel shall be two- piece, sliding type, having 5 -1/4 -inch shaft. The upper 47 section shall have a flange at the bottom having sufficient bearing area to 48 prevent settling and shall be complete with cast iron covers. VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -16 10/16/14 1 1 1 2 B. All valves shall have actuating nuts extended within 12 inches of the top of the 1 3 valve boxes. Valve boxes shall be provided with concrete base and valve 4 nameplate engraved with lettering 1/8 -inch deep as shown on the Construction 5 Drawings. 1 6 7 2.13 PRESSURE AND VACUUM GAUGES 8 1 9 A. All pumps furnished under this contract shall have pressure/ vacuum gauges 10 installed on their respective suction lines and pressure gauges installed on 11 their discharge lines. All pressure and vacuum gauges furnished under this I12 Contract shall be mounted per manufacturer requirements using tapping 13 saddles and sleeves specified in Section 15100, 2.19. 14 1 15 B. Each gauge shall be direct mounted, phenolic, shock resistant or 304 stainless 16 steel case with a 4 -1/2 -inch diameter dial and furnished with a clear glass 17 crystal window, 1/4 -inch shut -off valve, and a bronze pressure snubber. 1 18 Provide stainless steel diaphragm seals between shut -off valve and pressure 19 gauge on all lines with unclear matter in suspension of solution. All gauges 1 20 shall be weatherproofed. The face dial shall be white finished aluminum with 21 jet black graduations and figures. The face dial shall read in units of both 22 pounds per square inch and feet of head. 1 23 24 C. Suction gauges shall read from 10 inches of mercury vacuum to 50 feet of 25 head. Discharge gauges shall read from zero feet of head to the expected I 26 27 shutoff head of the respective pump. 28 D. Gauges shall be as manufactured by H.O. Trerice Co., Marshalltown ' 29 30 Instruments, Dwyer, Ametek, Ashcroft, Helicoid, Wekslar or equal 31 2.14 FLANGE ADAPTER COUPLINGS I32 33 A. Flange adapter couplings shall be of the sizes shown on the Drawings. 34 35 36 B. Flange adapter couplings shall have a 150 psi minimum pressure rating. 37 C. All couplings shall be restrained and shall have a sufficient number of anchor I 38 studs to meet or exceed the test pressure rating for this project, 150 psi 39 minimum. 40 I41 D. Couplings shall be EBAA Iron Series 24100 Megaflange Restrained Flange 42 Adapter, JCM Model 301 R, or equal. 43 I44 2.15 FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS 45 46 A. Flexible couplings shall be either the split type or the sleeve type as shown on I 47 48 the Drawings. VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -17 10/16/14 1 B. Split type coupling shall be used with all interior piping and with exterior piping 2 as noted on the Drawings. The couplings shall be mechanical type for radius 3 groove piping. The couplings shall mechanically engage and lock grooved 4 pipe ends in a positive couple and allow for angular deflection and contraction 5 and expansion. 6 7 C. Couplings shall consist of malleable iron, ASTM Specification A47, Grade 8 32510 housing clamps in two or more parts, a single chlorinated butyl 9 composition sealing gasket with a "C" shaped cross - section and internal 10 sealing lips projecting diagonally inward, and two or more oval track head type 11 bolts with hexagonal heavy nuts conforming to ASTM Specification A183 and 12 A194 to assemble the housing clamps. Bolts and nuts shall be hot - dipped 13 galvanized after fabrication. 14 15 D. Victaulic type couplings and fittings may be used in lieu of flanged joints. 16 Pipes shall be radius grooved as specified for use with the Victaulic couplings. 17 Flanged adapter connections at fittings, valves, and equipment shall be 18 Victaulic Vic Flange Style 741, equal by Gustin -Bacon Group, Division of 19 Certain -Teed Products, Kansas City, Kansas or equal. 20 21 E. Sleeve type couplings shall be used with all buried piping. The couplings shall 22 be of steel and shall be Dresser Style 38 or 40, as shown on the Drawings, or 23 equal. The coupling shall be provided with hot dipped galvanized steel bolts 24 and nuts unless indicated otherwise. 25 26 F. All couplings shall be furnished with the pipe stop removed. 27 28 G. Couplings shall be provided with gaskets of a composition suitable for 29 exposure to the liquid within the pipe. 30 31 H. If the Contractor decides to use victaulic couplings in lieu of flanged joints, he 32 shall be responsible for supplying supports for the joints. 33 34 2.16 QUICK CONNECT COUPLINGS 35 36 A. Quick connect couplings shall be Model 633 -E hose shank adapter and Model 37 633 -C hose shank coupler as manufactured by Dover Corporation OPW 38 Division, Cincinnati, Ohio, Ever -tite Coupling Co., Inc., New York, New York, 39 or equal. 40 41 2.17 FLEXIBLE TYPE EXPANSION JOINTS 42 43 A. Expansion joints shall be manufactured of molded EPDM rubber with filled 44 arches and wire reinforcement. Joints shall be reinforced with baked enamel 45 ductile iron or split galvanized steel retaining rings placed directly against the 46 inside of the flange to prevent damage to the rubber surface when the bolts 47 are tightened. Flanges shall be drilled to ANSI 150 #. Rated working pressure 48 shall be 150 psi. Retaining rings, control rods, bolts, nuts, and washers shall VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -18 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 be coated according to Section 09900 or shall be 304 or 316 stainless steel. 2 3 B. Joints shall be rated for a minimum operating temperature of 180 °F. 4 5 C. Tapered expansion joints shall be eccentric, single arch, and shall be capable 6 of a 1/2" maximum lateral deflection. Double arch expansion joints shall be 7 required where called out on the drawings. 8 9 D. Joints shall be provided and installed with the manufacturer's standard control 10 rods. Total joint deflection shall not exceed the manufacturer's recommended 11 maximum. Joints shall be installed in neutral position. 12 13 E. Expansion joints shall be Mercer Series FER, Proco, Red Valve Redflex, or 14 equal. 15 16 2.18 UNIONS 17 18 A. Unions on ferrous pipe 2 inches in diameter and smaller shall be 150 pounds 19 malleable iron, zinc - coated. Unions on water piping 2 -1/2 inches in diameter 20 and larger shall be flange pattern, 125 -pound class, zinc - coated. Gaskets for 21 flanged unions shall be of the best quality EPDM. Unions shall not be 22 concealed in walls, ceilings, or partitions. 23 24 2.19 BUTTERFLY VALVES FOR AIR SERVICE 25 26 A. Butterfly valves shall be of the offset disc design and shall be DeZurik Model 27 BOS or Engineer approved equal. 28 29 B. The face -to -face dimensions and lay length of flanged end valves and wafer 30 type valves shall be in accordance with Table 2 of AWWA Specification C -504 31 for short-body valve. Adequate two -way thrust bearings shall be provided. 32 Flange drilling shall be in accordance with ANSI B16.1. All air service valves 33 shall be wafer style. 34 35 C. Valve seats and sealing rings shall be EPDM synthetic rubber compound 36 adequate for constant service at 250 degrees F. Valve seats 24 inches and 37 larger shall be field adjustable and replaceable without dismounting operator 38 disc or shaft and without removing the valve from the line. All retaining 39 segments and adjusting devices shall be of corrosion resistant material with 40 stainless Nylock screws and be capable of a 1/8 -inch adjustment. Valves 20 41 inches and smaller shall have bonded or mechanically restrained seats. 42 Where elastomer seat is mounted on the valve body, the mating edge of the 43 valve disc shall be 18 -8 stainless steel. Where elastomer seat is mounted on 44 the valve disc, the valve body shall be fitted with an 18 -8 stainless steel seat 45 offset from the shaft, mechanically restrained and covering 360 degrees of the 46 peripheral opening or seating surface. 47 48 D. The valve body shall be constructed of ductile iron or close grain cast iron per VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -19 10/16/14 1 ASTM A -126, Class B with integrally cast hubs for shaft bearing housings of 2 the through boss -type. 3 4 E. The valve shaft shall be turned, ground, and polished constructed of 18 -8, 5 ASTM A -276, Type 304 stainless steel and designed for both torsional and 6 shearing stresses when the valve is operated under its greatest dynamic or 7 seating torque. Shaft shall be of either a one -piece unit extending full size 8 through the valve disc and valve bearing or it may be of a stub shaft design. 9 Shaft bearings shall be Teflon or nylon, self - lubricated type adequate for 10 constant service at 250 degrees 11 12 F. Gearing for the operators shall be totally enclosed in a gear case in 13 accordance with Paragraph 3.8 of the AWWA C -504 Standard Specification. 14 15 G. Where indicated on the Construction Drawings extension stems, operators 16 with extended handles, floor stands, couplings, stem guides and floor boxes, 17 as required, shall be furnished and installed. 18 19 H. Valves shall have a factory- applied, internal and external, fusion bonded 20 epoxy resin coating with a minimum thickness of 8 mils, conforming to all 21 applicable requirements of the American Water Works Association Standard 22 C550 -90 entitled "Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants ". 23 24 PART 3 — EXECUTION 25 26 3.01 INSTALLATION 27 28 A. All valves and appurtenances shall be installed in the locations shown, true to 29 alignment and rigidly supported. Any damage to the above items shall be 30 repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer before they are installed. 31 32 B. After installation, all valves and appurtenances shall be tested at least 2 hours 33 at the working pressure corresponding to the class of pipe, unless a different 34 test pressure is specified. If any joint proves to be defective, it shall be 35 repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 36 37 C. Install all floor boxes, brackets, extension rods, guides, the various types of 38 operators and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings that are in masonry 39 floors or walls, and install concrete inserts for hangers and supports as soon 40 as forms are erected and before concrete is poured. Before setting these 41 items, the Contractor shall check all plans and figures which have a direct 42 bearing on their location and he shall be responsible for the proper location of 43 these valves and appurtenances during the construction of the structures. 44 45 D. Pipe for use with flexible couplings shall have plain ends as specified in the 46 respective pipe sections in Division 15. 47 48 E. Flanged joints shall be made with high strength, low alloy Corten bolts, nuts 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES I 15100 -20 10/16/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 and washers. Mechanical joints shall be made with mild corrosion resistant 2 alloy steel bolts and nuts. All exposed bolts shall be painted the same color as 3 the pipe. All buried bolts and nuts shall be heavily coated with two (2) coats 4 (14 -20 mils DFT) of bituminous paint comparable to Carboline Bitumastic 5 300M, Tnemec Series 46H -413 Tneme -Tar, or equal. 6 7 F Prior to assembly of split couplings, the grooves, as well as other parts, shall 8 be thoroughly cleaned. The ends of the pipes and outside of the gaskets shall 9 be moderately coated with petroleum jelly, cup grease, soft soap or graphite 10 paste, and the gasket shall be slipped over one pipe end. After the other pipe 11 has been brought to the correct position, the gasket shall be centered properly 12 over the pipe ends with the lips against the pipes. The housing sections then 13 shall be placed. After the bolts have been inserted, the nuts shall be tightened 14 until the housing sections are firmly in contact, metal -to- metal, without 15 excessive bolt tension. 16 17 G. Prior to the installation of sleeve -type couplings, the pipe ends shall be 18 cleaned thoroughly for a distance of 8 inches. Soapy water may be used as a 19 gasket lubricant. A follower and gasket, in that order, shall be slipped over 20 each pipe to a distance of about 6 inches from the end, and the middle ring 21 shall be placed on the substantial completion date unless otherwise requested 22 by the Owner. 23 24 H. Valve boxes with concrete bases shall be installed as shown on the 25 Construction Drawings. Mechanical joints shall be made in the standard 26 manner. Valve stems shall be vertical in all cases. Place cast iron box over 27 each stem with base bearing on compacted fill and top flush with final grade. 28 Boxes shall have sufficient bracing to maintain alignment during backfilling. 29 Knobs on cover shall be parallel to pipe. Remove any sand or undesirable fill 30 from valve box. 31 32 3.02 SHOP PAINTING 33 34 Ferrous surfaces of above ground valves and appurtenances to be painted shall 35 receive a coating of rust - inhibitive primer compatible to paint system specified in 36 Section 09900. All pipe connection openings shall be capped to prevent the entry of 37 foreign matter prior to installation. 38 39 3.03 FIELD PAINTING 40 41 All metal valves and appurtenances specified herein and exposed to view, except 42 ball valves, shall be painted as part of the work in Section 09900. 43 44 3.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING 45 46 Completed pipe shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure and leakage in 47 accordance with Section 01625. All leaks shall be repaired and lines retested. Prior 48 to testing, the pipelines shall be supported in a manner to prevent movement during VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -21 10/16/14 tests. END OF SECTION VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -22 10/16/14 APPENDIX ' ODP DOCUMENTS AND OTHER PROJECT DOCUMENTATION Table of Contents: OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) DOCUMENTS • ODP Instructions • Request to requisition Form ' PROJECT PERMITS The Owner has obtained the City of Clearwater Building Department Permit for this project. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all other City of Clearwater Permits and 1 Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Ground Water from Any Non - Contaminated Site Activity as applicable. 1 GEOTECHNICAL SOIL REPORT No geotechnical information is anticipated for this project. 1 ASBESTOS REPORT Not Applicable To This Project INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS Drawings from the existing filter O &M Manual and record drawings from the initial construction of the filters are available in electronic format upon request. EVOOUA FILTER PROPOSAL 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Appendix.docx i 7/7/2014 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) DOCUMENTS Appendix.docx 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Instructions 1. Upon contract award and execution, a Purchase Order (PO) shall be issued to Contractor for the full amount of contract. 2. Contractor shall submit a list (ODP Summary) of potential ODP vendors and estimated dollar amounts (minimum of $10,000) to the City for approval prior to initial pay application. Certain contracts will be awarded based upon the bid proposal with pre - determined item(s) for ODP and the accompanying tax savings. The ODP Summary shall list: (a) item cost, (b) sales tax savings, and (c) Contractor's costs associated with the item. 3. Contractor shall submit Request to Requisition forms (see attached) for each vendor to the City for review and approval, in electronic, MS Word format. The City will review and code, then return to Contractor for electronic signature. The City prefers that all Request to Requisitions be included in a single submittal. 4. A Change Order (CO) shall be issued to Contractor reducing their PO by the amount of the ODP purchase(s) and the sales tax savings (per Request to Requisitions). COs will be drafted by the City and will be forwarded to the Contractor for execution. Contractor shall submit two (2) originals, signed, sealed and witnessed, to the City for execution. One original shall be returned to the Contractor. 5. Concurrently, the City Purchasing Department shall issue ODP POs directly to each vendor (via email), per the Request to Requisition, along with an executed Certificate of Entitlement and the City's Certificate of Tax Exemption. The Contractor and City Project Manager will be copied. 6. Contractor shall coordinate delivery with Vendor. Material shall be delivered to the project site. Contractor shall instruct Vendor to send invoice to the Contractor, naming the City as the purchaser. 7. Contractor shall review, approve and submit executed invoices to the Project Manager with adequate documentation (delivery ticket, packing slips). Invoices shall include the ODP PO number, invoice number, and be addressed to the City of Clearwater, c/o Contractor. Two (2) executed invoices (1 — signed and 1 — copy) and one (1) signed packing slip shall be mailed to the City for processing. 8. City shall approve invoices and issue payment to the Vendor for materials received. 9. ODP POs must be closed out prior to closing out the contract/Contractor PO. If material costs needed for project exceeds the Vendor PO amount, the ODP PO will not be increased. Amounts in excess of the ODP PO will be paid for by the Contractor. Appendix.docx 7/7/2014 REQUEST TO REQUISITION mato for Owner Direct Purchase Materials STANDARD PURCHASE ORDER U City Contract #: City Project Name: General Item Description: Vendor: Contact Name: Street Address: Phone No: City /State /Zip: Email: Receiving Location (Ship to): 3141 Gulf to Bay Boulevard_Clearwater, FL Attention: Street Address: City /State /Zip: Requested by: (General Contractor) Contact Name: Date Needed by: Phone No: Phone No: Email: Expense Code: (City will complete) Line # Quantity Units (LS, SF, etc.) (refer to Line Item # and details from Bidder's Proposal, Section V) Detailed Description (List shipping & handling charges, if applicable) special delivery instructions Hold X% for retainage LS Send Ori • inal Invoices to: City of Clearwater c/o Contractor or Subcontractor Name whoever installs the materials Mailing Address, Attention To: Email address, Phone Number PO Total LS Sales Tax Savings to Owner (first $5,000 x 7.0 %, thereafter sales tax rate is 6.0% Equipment shall be in accordance with the applicable technical spec., and all other applicable provisions (shop drawings, O &Ms, warranties, etc.,) of contract referenced above. Spare parts provided as per s•ecifications; frei•ht included. Start u• services and trainin• are included in the above •rice. Contractor's signature Requesting Official - PRINT NAME Date: City Rea Signature Approving Official - PRINT NAME Date: Title and Name of Contracting Firm City of Clearwater Representative Title Engineering will provide records retention according to City of Clearwater's Records Management Program. Appendix.docx 7/72014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PROJECT PERMITS The Owner has obtained the City of Clearwater Building Department Permit for this project. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all other City of Clearwater Permits and Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Ground Water from Any Non - Contaminated Site Activity as applicable. Appendix.docx 7/7/2014 GEOTECHNICAL SOIL REPORT Not applicable to this project Appendix.docx 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Not applicable to this project Appendix.docx ASBESTOS REPORT 7/7/2014 EVOOUA FILTER PROPOSAL Appendix.docx 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 evoQuA rACr IF:C.' QUOTATION NO. 140147 -A7 REFERENCE Clearwater East DATE 10/3/2014 To: King Engineering Bid Date: TBD 1) SCOPE: Owner: City of Clearwater Plant: Clearwater East APCF 314 Gulf to Bay Blvd. Clearwater FL, 34619 Engineers: King Engineering 4921 Memorial Highway Tampa, FL 33634 813- 880 -8881 Evoqua Water Technologies LLC ( Evoqua) proposes to furnish the equipment specified in this Quotation for the purpose of rebuilding the HydroClear Filters in cooperation with a yet to be designated general contractor. The original filters provided, project 21- 2212 - 89429, consist of six (6) concrete filter cells each 12 foot by 30 foot that provided a total of 2160 square foot of filtration area. The proposal is for the scope to provide equipment for the rebuilding of portions of the filter as defined herein. All of the information set forth in this quotation (including drawings, designs and specifications) is confidential and /or proprietary and has been prepared solely for the recipient's use in considering the purchase of the equipment and /or services described herein. Transmission of all or any part of this information to others, or use by the recipient, for other purposes is expressly prohibited without Evoqua's prior written consent. FOR FURTHER INFORMATION: Questions relative to this Quotation should be directed to Evoqua's area sales representative: Greg Chomic Heyward Florida Inc. 415 Country Club Drive Winter Park, FL 32789 407 - 628 -1880 (Office) 407 - 948 -0332 (Cell) 2607 N. Grandview Blvd., Suite 130 Tel: +1 (262) 547 -0141 Waukesha, WI 53188 USA Fax: +1 (262) 547 -4120 tsa,'Jrt■ Page 1 of 17 QUOTATION NO. 140147 -A7 RE: Clearwater East DATE: 10/03/2014 2) PRICE SUMMARY: Evoqua's price includes only the specific items detailed in this quotation. Items not specifically identified herein are to be furnished by others. Please refer to the "Excluded Items" Section of this quotation for a list of items to be furnished by others. A) UNIT PRICING: ITEM & DESCRIPTION: (See following pages for further description) HydroClear Filter Internals, Components and Accessories PRICE $ 641,256 B) FREIGHT: Price is FOB shipping point with standard freight allowed to the job site. Our price does not include any costs for unloading, transporting on the site or storage. Freight is quoted with 100% replacement insurance. C) FIELD SERVICES: Evoqua's price(s) include(s) the services of a factory field service technician for: (i) checking the installed equipment, (ii) equipment startup and commissioning, (iii) technical assistance for controls integration; all of which shall be performed over a total of: Filter installation supervision & inspection for first cell w/ operator training 1 trip 3 days Filter inspection trip prior to sand installation and cell startup 1 trip 3 days Electrical startup, onsite programming and integration support 1 trip 3 days Second cell inspection trip prior to sand installation and cell startup 1 trip 3 days Third cell inspection trip prior to sand installation and cell startup 1 trip 3 days Fourth cell inspection trip prior to sand installation and cell startup 1 trip 3 days Fifth cell inspection trip prior to sand installation and cell startup 1 trip 3 days Sixth cell inspection trip prior to sand installation and cell startup 1 trip 3 days D) SERVICE MANUALS: Our price includes Five (5) draft copies of the manual shipped prior to the equipment delivery, Five (5) final hard copies and Two (2) electronic PDF copies. The rights to the content of Evoqua 0 & M Manuals and drawings belong solely to Evoqua and Evoqua reserves the right to make changes to content at any time. E) QUOTATION VALID: This quotation is valid for a period of one hundred and eighty days (180) days unless extended in writing by Evoqua. F) PAYMENT AND PRICE TERMS: The terms of payment are in accordance with the following milestones: 5% on drawing submittal, net 30; 85% on shipment of equipment, or offer to ship, net 30; 10% on startup of equipment or 120 days from final delivery, whichever occurs first, net 30. Evoqua's prices are exclusive of any taxes unless expressly stated in this quotation. If this project is subject to sales or use tax, the Purchaser shall be invoiced for taxes at the current rate of sales or use tax for the jobsite location, at the time of invoice Page 2 of 17 Evoqua Water Technologies LLC QUOTATION NO. 140147 -A7 RE: Clearwater East DATE: 10/03/2014 issuance. If this project is not subject to sales or use tax, please send a Tax Exempt Certificate with the issuance of any ensuing P.O. to Evoqua. 3) DRAWING and SHIPMENT INFORMATION: Evoqua shall furnish shop drawing submittals and equipment per the following project schedule: Submittal Drawings: Within 4 to 6 weeks from the date of final agreement by both parties. Submittal Drawing Reviews /Approvals: Within 4 weeks from Evoqua's delivery of Submittal Drawings. Shipment of Equipment: Within 10 to 18 weeks after approval of Submittal Drawings. This is contingent upon an order being received within 45 days of this proposal. If Submittal Drawing Reviews /Approvals are not received by Evoqua in accordance with the project schedule noted above, unless the delay is due the fault of Evoqua, Evoqua shall be entitled to a reasonable extension of the "Shipment of Equipment" times and /or a reasonable increase in the contract price to cover costs incurred as a result of Submittal Drawing Review /Approval delays. 4) EQUIPMENT SCOPE: Evoqua shall provide the following equipment. Also Reference the Appendix A for a table version with installation responsibilities detailed. 4.1 Cell Inlet Boxes: Six (6) cell inlet boxes with adjustable Cipoletti weirs will be supplied and shipped by Evoqua to the project site for installation in the filter cells by Purchaser's installation contractor (Hereinafter referred to as "Contractor"). There is one inlet boxes for each filter cell. Each inlet box shall be constructed of 1/4" painted carbon steel. The flow proportioning weirs shall be fabricated from 1/4" fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP). Twelve 316SS anchors shall be provided with each inlet box. 4.2 Distribution /Backwash Troughs: Six (6) prefabricated inlet distribution /backwash trough assemblies to be constructed from 1/4" painted carbon steel will be supplied and shipped by Evoqua to the project site for installation in the filter cells by the Contractor. There is one trough for each filter cell. Each trough assembly shall be roughly 24" wide x 30" deep x 30' long. The trough assemblies shall include removable, flip -up splash plates and V -notch weir plates, which will be shipped loose to the project site for installation on the trough assemblies in the field by the Contractor. The removable, flip - up splash plates shall be constructed of stainless steel. The weir plates shall be constructed of FRP and fabricated with 90° V- notches and slots that provide approximately 2" of vertical adjustment. 316SS hardware and anchors for complete trough, supports, weir and splash plate assembly will also be provided. The support structure for the trough shall also be provided by Evoqua. 4.3 Filter Underdrain Detail: Each of the six (6) filter cells shall be equipped with a false bottom, atmospherically vented underdrain system supported above a true bottom filter structure consisting of prefabricated PVC underdrain core module assemblies and a filter media support system. Page 3 of 17 Evoqua Water Technologies LLC QUOTATION NO. 140147 -A7 RE: Clearwater East DATE: 10/03/2014 The following underdrain components shall be furnished by Evoqua for installation by the Contractor i) One Hundred and Eight (108) PVC underdrain core assemblies each approximately 51 -1/4" long x 44 -3/4" wide weighing approximately 130 pounds. Eighteen core assemblies shall be installed in each of the six cells by the Contractor. ii) Twenty Five (25) 50 foot rolls of 3/16" x 3" wide neoprene closed cellular gasket. Approximately two hundred (200) linear feet shall be field installed by the Contractor for each filter cell. iii) Thirty Six (36) pieces of stainless steel wire mesh, type T -316, 0.010 wire diameter, 40 mesh, each piece 11' 7" long x 4' 7 -5/8" wide for field installed by the Contractor. iv) One Hundred and Eight (108) pieces of fiberglass grating sections, 18 block x 15 block (50" x 42 ") weighing approximately 70 pounds. Fiberglass grating shall be field installed by the Contractor on top of the wire mesh in the filter cells. v) Seventy Two (72) pieces of perimeter structural angle, 2" x 1 -1/2" x 1/4 ", 11' 7" long field installed by the Contractor on the perimeter of each steel hold -down frame. Angles shall be painted carbon steel. vi) Seventy Two (72) pieces of perimeter structural angle, 2" x 1 -1/2" x 1/4 ", 4' 3 -3/4" long field installed by the Contractor on the perimeter of each steel hold -down frame. Angles shall be constructed of painted carbon steel. vii) Two Hundred and Sixteen (216) pieces of structural hold -down I- Beams, 4' -6- 5/8" long. Thirty Six (36) beams shall be field installed by the Contractor in each filter cell. Beams shall be constructed of painted carbon steel. viii) Four Hundred and Thirty Eight (438) 316 stainless steel 5/8" diameter 8" long hex -head cap screws (H.H.C.S.) with two (2) stainless steel washers. 72 per cell and 6 spare. ix) Two Hundred and Eighteen (218) 316 stainless steel 5/8" diameter x 4" long set screws with two (2) stainless steel washers and two (2) stainless steel nuts. 36 per cell and 4 spare. x) Underdrain material summary: 108 PVC underdrain cores 25 Rolls of 3/16" neoprene gasket 36 Pieces of stainless steel wire mesh 108 Sections of fiberglass grating 144 Pieces of loose perimeter angle 216 Pieces of structural I -Beams 656 Hardware kits for hold down structure Page 4 of 17 Evoqua Water Technologies LLC QUOTATION NO. 140147 -A7 RE: Clearwater East DATE: 10/03/2014 4.4 Level Probes and Probe Guides: Seventeen (17) MAC 3 level floats complete with 10 meters of oil resistant neoprene cable. Twelve (12) shall be for the filter cells, each filter cell with have two floats. The high float will initiate a backwash and the low float will allow the air mix and pulse mix functions. Of the remaining floats two (2) shall be for the clearwell low level and high level, one (1) shall be for the influent channel high level, one (1) shall be for the mud well high level, and shall be for the chemical clean tank low level. Six (6) level float guides, one per cell, approximately 50" long shall be furnished with anchors as required. Float guides and anchors shall be 316SS. 4.5 Air Mix® System: Each cell shall contain a series of low pressure air diffusers. The diffusers (24 per cell; 144 total) provided by Evoqua for field installation by the Contractor. Each set of two (2) diffusers, provided by Evoqua, shall be connected to a 1 -1/2 " diameter header by means of existing 1" diameter drop. i) One Hundred and Forty Four (144) diffusers, 3/4" diameter schedule 80 PVC with threaded end MPT shall be furnished by Evoqua for installation by the Contractor. ii) Seventy Two (72) 316SS drop pipe support brackets, with U -bolt support for 1" diameter drop pipe. Also Includes 316SS Anchors. Spare U -bolt and anchor set shall be provided. iii) All piping, including manual valves (gas cocks), unions, etc., as required for the filtration system's low pressure air system, shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. 4.6 Filter Media: Ninety (90) tons of single grade filter media will be provided by Evoqua. Fifteen (15) tons is to be field installed in each of the filter cells by the Contractor to a uniform depth of ten inches (10 "). The filter media shall be quartz sand with an effective size of 0.45mm (± 0.05mm) and a uniformity coefficient not to exceed 1.70. 4.7 PLC Program: Evoqua shall supply a PLC program for the contractor supplied Allen - Bradley Compact Logix PLC. Working in cooperation with the contractor and system integration we will help facilitate the program installation and debugging. 4.8 Spare Parts: A kit of spare parts shall be provided consisting of: Two (2) of every type float/level sensor provided, including cord Six (6) diffusers One (1) Lot of gasket material sufficient to replace 1 full cell. Two (2) spare electronic copies of the PLC program One (1) Lot of touchup paint of every type primer /paint used. 5) EXCLUDED ITEMS: Evoqua's price includes only those items listed in this Quotation. Therefore, the items listed below will not be supplied by Evoqua: 1. Field installation labor of any description. 2. Concrete structures, foundations, pads or vessels. 3. Grout work of any description. 4. Electrical, hydraulic, or pneumatic controls Page 5 of 17 Evoqua Water Technologies LLC QUOTATION NO. 140147 -A7 RE: Clearwater East 1 DATE: 10/03/2014 5. Piping systems of any description including all pipe, fittings, flanges, check valves, manual valves, etc., as required for the complete piping systems. 6. Low pressure air system including blower, piping, fittings, manual valves, etc. 7. High pressure air compressor system including compressor, piping /tubing /fittings, manual valves, etc. 8. Backwash, Clearwell or Mudwell pumps 9. Grease clean system including storage tank, chemical pumps, piping, fittings and manual valves. 10. Hold down frames are existing and shall be re -used. Any touchup work, repair, blasting or painting is also not included. 11. Thimbles, wall /floor sleeves, brackets, hangers, supports, etc., as required to install piping systems associated with the filter equipment being provided under this proposal. 12. Walkways, platforms, grating, handrails, etc. 13. Electrical and instrumentation labor and all interconnecting wiring and associated conduit of any description. 14. Unloading, storage or installation /setting up of any equipment furnished. 15. All weirs not specifically delineated in this Proposal. 16. Any field blasting, painting or touchup work. 17. Modifications to existing equipment or structures 18. Underdrain frames, vent tees, vent piping or gullet covers 19. Low pressure blowers or air compressors or any related equipment 20. Valves or actuators other than those listed above 21. Chemical storage tanks 22. Control panels, local control consoles, PLC's or control panel components of any kind. 23. Equipment offloading and installation of any kind 24. Special written process performance or extended mechanical warranties 25. Detail shop fabrication drawings 6) ADDITIONAL FIELD SERVICES: Should the Purchaser feel that additional services will be required, they can be purchased from Evoqua. Additional services may be purchased at the per diem rate stated below. Evoqua price does not include service of a factory field service technician during the time of installation of the equipment items. In the event Purchaser wishes to videotape the Evoqua field service personnel during start-up and /or field service, Purchaser must execute Evoqua's standard "Videotape Agreement" in which the Purchaser shall expressly waive any claim against Evoqua, for injury or damage caused by inaccuracies or errors in such videotape(s), and acknowledge that such videotaping is done by Purchaser at its sole risk. TERMS GOVERNING FIELD SERVICES: Services of a factory field service technician to inspect installation and /or first operation of the products specified in the quotation can be furnished by Evoqua at the following rates: A. Supervision or consultation of a process service technician within the continental limits of the United States: $1,400 per eight (8) hour day, Monday through Friday inclusive. B. Supervision or inspection of a field service technician within the continental limits of the United States: $1,200 per eight (8) hour day, Monday through Friday inclusive. Page 6 of 17 Evoqua Water Technologies LLC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 QUOTATION NO. 140147 -A7 RE: Clearwater East DATE: 10/03/2014 Overtime Monday through Friday and Saturday work is charged at time and one -half. Time worked on Sunday will be charged double time; time worked on U.S. Holidays will be charged triple time. C. Traveling, living and incidental expenses at cost, including shipping charges on tools and other equipment which the factory field service technician has shipped to the construction site. Travel time will be charged to and from Purchaser's construction site, and weekend or holiday travel request or required by Purchaser will be charged at the overtime rates. Rates shown above apply only to additional services performed within twelve (12) months from the date of Quotation. Additional services performed after twelve (12) months from the date of Quotation shall be subject to Evoqua's current rates at the time such service is provided. Except for the direct acts or omissions of the factory field service technician, the responsibility for the installation and /or first operation shall be Purchaser's. Evoqua will assume responsibility for workmen's compensation coverage of Evoqua employees only, and will provide umbrella liability coverage during installation. All other insurance coverage and necessary materials to accomplish installation shall be provided by Purchaser. 7) PROCESS PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE Evoqua offers the following performance guarantee as part of this proposal: Based on proper installation, operation, and maintenance, Evoqua shall guarantee that the Hydro - Clear filter being refurbished under this submittal shall meet the following process requirements: Performance Requirements Value Peak Flow Rate, gpm /ft2 4.8* Maximum Backwash Flow Rate gpm /ft2 12 Maximum Effluent TSS, mg /L 5xx Maximum Effluent Turbidity, NTU 2.5*** * Peak Flow Rate, gpm /ft2 is based on a total maximum flow rate to the filter of 15 MGD with 6 filters online. ** Maximum Effluent TSS is based on a maximum of 20 mg /L TSS influent to the filter. * ** Maximum Effluent Turbidity is based on a maximum of 10 NTU influent to the filter. The filter is based on typical secondary wastewater biomass constituents, high concentrations of foreign atypical items such as plastics, polymers, high levels of algae, FOG as well as high concentrations of colloidal particulate matter may affect the filter's to meet the performance. In order to achieve above requirements, particle sizes must be filterable (greater than 3 microns in size). Responsibility for meeting influent characteristics to the filter as defined above rests solely by others. Evoqua is not responsible for any labor, chemical addition system, monitoring devices, or other equipment or services necessary to achieve influent characteristics defined above. Page 7 of 17 Evoqua Water Technologies LLC QUOTATION NO. 140147 -A7 RE: Clearwater East DATE: 10/03/2014 8) PROPOSAL AND ORDER FORM NOTE: Any order resulting from this proposal is subject to the terms and conditions attached and acceptance by Evoqua. Purchaser's acceptance of this offer is expressly limited to such terms and conditions without change or addition. Accepted by Buyer: Acknowledged by Seller: Evoqua Water Technologies, LLC Company Name Company Name Signed Signed Printed Name Printed Name Title Title Date Date Page 8 of 17 Evoqua Water Technologies LLC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 QUOTATION NO. 140147 -A7 RE: Clearwater East EVOQUA WATER TECHNOLOGIES LLC STANDARD TERMS OF SALE DATE: 10/03/2014 1. Applicable Terms. These terms govern the purchase and sale of the equipment and related services, if any (collectively, "Equipment "), referred to in Seller's purchase order, quotation, proposal or acknowledgment, as the case may be ( "Seller's Documentation "). Whether these terms are included in an offer or an acceptance by Seller, such offer or acceptance is conditioned on Buyer's assent to these terms. Seller rejects all additional or different terms in any of Buyer's forms or documents. 2. Payment. (a) Buyer shall pay Seller the full purchase price as set forth in Seller's Documentation. Unless Seller's Documentation provides otherwise, freight, storage, insurance and all taxes, levies, duties, tariffs, permits or license fees or other governmental charges relating to the Equipment shall be paid by Buyer. If Seller is required to pay any such charges, Buyer shall immediately reimburse Seller. If Buyer claims a tax or other exemption or direct payment permit, it shall provide Seller with a valid exemption certificate or permit and indemnify, defend and hold Seller harmless from any taxes, costs and penalties arising out of same. All payments are due within 30 days after receipt of invoice. Buyer shall be charged the lower of 1 %% interest per month or the maximum legal rate on all amounts not received by the due date and shall pay all of Seller's reasonable costs (including attorneys' fees) of collecting amounts due but unpaid. (b) Credit Approval — All orders are subject to credit approval by Seller. The amount of credit or terms of payment may be changed or credit withdrawn by Seller at any time for any reason without advance notification. Seller may also, at its discretion, withhold further manufacture or shipment; require immediate cash payments for past and future shipments; or require other security satisfactory to Seller before further manufacture or shipment is made; and may, if shipment has been made, recover the Equipment from the carrier, pending receipt of such assurances. (c) Back Charges - Field work which may result in back charges to Seller must be discussed and mutually agreed prior to performing the necessary work. Seller will issue an authorization for work that may be charged to Seller's account. Back charges without prior approval and mutual agreement shall not be accepted. 3. Delivery. Delivery of the Equipment shall be in material compliance with the schedule in Seller's Documentation. Unless Seller's Documentation provides otherwise, delivery terms are EXW (Ex Works) factory with risk of loss on all Equipment shipped by Seller to Buyer passing to Buyer upon Delivery of the Equipment to the carrier at the Seller's point of shipment. Title to all Equipment shipped by Seller to Buyer shall pass upon receipt of payment for the Equipment under the respective invoice. Unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Seller, shipping dates are approximate only and Seller shall not be liable for any loss or expense (consequential or otherwise) incurred by Buyer or Buyer's customer if Seller fails to meet the specified delivery schedule. 4. Ownership of Materials. All devices, designs (including drawings, plans and specifications), estimates, prices, notes, electronic data, software and other documents or information prepared or disclosed by Seller, and all related intellectual property rights, shall remain Seller's property. Seller grants Buyer a non - exclusive, non - transferable license to use any such material solely for Buyer's use of the Equipment. Buyer shall not disclose any such material to third parties without Seller's prior written consent. 5. Changes. Seller shall not implement any changes in the scope of work described in Seller's Documentation nor shall Seller accept or be responsible for any back charges unless Buyer and Seller agree in writing to the details of such change or back charge and any resulting price, schedule or other contractual modifications. Any change to any law, rule, regulation, order, code, standard or requirement which requires any change hereunder shall entitle Seller to an equitable adjustment in the price and any time of performance. 6. Excusable Delay /Force Maieure Event (a) Definitions: (1) "Excusable Delay" shall mean delays caused by: (i) Buyer- directed changes; (ii) other actions or omissions of Buyer, Buyer's agents or representatives, including but not limited to, the untimely approval of Seller's submittals or failure to complete work, designated as "Buyer's Work "; (iii) Differing site conditions; or (iv) Seller being required to repair, replace, revise, or reconstruct any of the work as a result of damage to or destruction of the Equipment when such damage or destruction is not caused by Seller. Page 9 of 17 Evoqua Water Technologies LLC QUOTATION NO. 140147 -A7 RE: Clearwater East DATE: 10/03/2014 (2) "Force Majeure Event" shall mean events or circumstances that: (i) are beyond the affected party's control; (ii) could not reasonably have been provided against before entering into this agreement; (iii) having arisen, could not reasonably have been avoided or overcome; and (iv) are not substantially attributable to the other party. Force Majeure may include, but is not limited to, the following circumstances or events: (a) war, invasion, act of foreign enemies, (b) rebellion, terrorism, insurrection, military or usurped power, or civil war, (c) riot, commotion, strike, or lockout by persons other than the mangers, supervisors, staff, labor, or other employee of Seller or its sub - suppliers, (d) natural catastrophes such as earthquake, hurricane, typhoon, volcanic activity, or (with respect to on -site work), unusual weather conditions. (b) Force Maieure: Neither Buyer nor Seller shall have any liability for any breach or delay (except for breach of payment obligations) caused by a Force Majeure event Schedule Modification: If the Seller experiences an Excusable Delay or Force Majeure Event, Seller is entitled to make a claim for a change order modifying the project schedule and shall provide Buyer with a revised schedule. (d) Pricing Modification: If Seller has suffered an Excusable Delay or Force Majeure Event, and the delay will increase the cost of performance, Seller shall be entitled to an adjustment in the purchase price. Adjustments to the purchase price shall be: (i) in an amount agreed by the parties; (ii) using applicable agreed to unit prices or hourly rates reflected in Seller's Documentation; or (iii) if neither(i) or (ii) applies, then in the amount of the cost actually and reasonable incurred, and properly documented. (e) Right to Terminate for Force Maieure: If a Force Majeure event exceeds six (6) months in duration, the Seller shall have the right to terminate the Agreement without liability, upon fifteen (15) days written notice to Buyer, and shall be entitled to payment for work performed prior to the date of termination. (c) 7. Warranty (a) Subject to the following sentence, Seller warrants to Buyer that the Equipment shall materially conform to the description in Seller's Documentation and shall be free from defects in material and workmanship. The foregoing warranty shall not apply to any Equipment that is specified or otherwise demanded by Buyer and is not manufactured or selected by Seller, as to which (i) Seller hereby assigns to Buyer, to the extent assignable, any warranties made to Seller and (ii) Seller shall have no other liability to Buyer under warranty, tort or any other legal theory. The Seller shall warrant the Equipment, or any components thereof, through the earlier of (i) eighteen (18) months from delivery of the Equipment or (ii) twelve (12) months from initial operation of the Equipment (the "Warranty Period "). If Buyer gives Seller prompt written notice of breach of this warranty within the Warranty Period, Seller shall, at its sole option and as Buyer's sole remedy, repair or replace the subject parts or refund the purchase price therefor. Unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Seller, (i) Buyer shall be responsible for any labor required to gain access to the Equipment so that Seller can assess the available remedies and (ii) Buyer shall be responsible for all costs of installation of repaired or replaced Equipment. If Seller determines that any claimed breach is not, in fact, covered by this warranty, Buyer shall pay Seller its then customary charges for any repair or replacement made by Seller. Seller's warranty is conditioned on Buyer's (a) operating and maintaining the Equipment in accordance with Seller's instructions, (b) not making any unauthorized repairs or alterations, and (c) not being in default of any payment obligation to Seller. Seller's warranty does not cover damage caused by chemical action or abrasive material, misuse or improper installation (unless installed by Seller). (b) THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION 7 ARE THE SELLER'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE WARRANTIES AND ARE SUBJECT TO THE LIMITATION OF LIABILITY PROVISION BELOW. SELLER MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PURPOSE. 8. Indemnity. Seller shall indemnify, defend and hold Buyer harmless from any claim, cause of action or liability incurred by Buyer as a result of third party claims for personal injury, death or damage to tangible property, to the extent caused by Seller's negligence. Seller shall have the sole authority to direct the defense of and settle any indemnified claim. Seller's indemnification is conditioned on Buyer (a) promptly, within the Warranty Period, notifying Seller of any claim, and (b) providing reasonable cooperation in the defense of any claim. 9. Assignment. Neither party may assign this Agreement, in whole or in part, nor any rights or obligations hereunder without the prior written consent of the other party; provided, however, the Seller may assign its rights and obligations under these terms to its affiliates or in connection with the sale of transfer of the Seller's business and Seller may grant a security interest in the Agreement and /or assign proceeds of the agreement without Buyer's consent 10. Suspension. In the event that Buyer suspends the work in whole or in part, for a period of time as Buyer may determine, then Seller shall be entitled to a change order for its reasonable and necessary costs incurred, including , but not be limited to, material and labor escalation incurred, due to such suspension. Seller shall resume any suspended work within a Page 10 of 17 Evoqua Water Technologies LLC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 QUOTATION NO. 140147 -A7 1 RE: Clearwater East 1 DATE: 10/03/2014 commercially reasonable period after Buyer gives Seller written notice to do so. If Buyer orders a suspension which continues for ninety (90) or more days, Seller may thereafter terminate this agreement without liability, upon fifteen (15) days written notice to Buyer, and shall be entitled to payment for work performed, whether delivered or undelivered, prior to the date of termination. 11. Termination. (a) For Convenience: Buyer may terminate the work and this agreement at any time in its sole discretion by giving Seller at least ten (10) days written notice. Buyer shall pay termination charges to Seller that shall consist of: (i) the value of the work performed, and not paid for; (ii) termination charges from Seller's suppliers and sub - suppliers that Seller cannot reasonably reduce or avoid; (iii) additional handling and transportation costs that Seller cannot reasonably reduce or avoid and (iv) a reasonable mark up for Seller's administrative costs necessary to effect such termination. The total amount payable for such termination shall be reduced by any credits obtained, with the understanding that Buyer, at its exclusive preference, may accept delivery of complete or incomplete work, included in the termination cost. (b) Either party may terminate this agreement, upon issuance of a written notice of such breach and a thirty (30) day cure period, for a material breach (including but not limited to, filing of bankruptcy, or failure to fulfill the material obligations of this agreement). 12. Dispute Resolution. Seller and Buyer shall negotiate in good faith to resolve any dispute relating hereto. Failing such efforts, the dispute shall be finally settled by binding arbitration in Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania pursuant to the Commercial Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association. The arbitration panel shall consist of three individuals experienced in the discipline that is the subject of the dispute and shall be jointly selected by Seller and Buyer. If the parties are unable to agree upon the arbitrators within twenty (20) days, then each party shall select one arbitrator and those arbitrators shall select a third arbitrator. The decision of a majority of the arbitrators shall be the decision of the panel. Judgment may be entered upon the arbitrators' decision in any court of competent jurisdiction. The prevailing party in any arbitration shall be reimbursed by the other party for all costs, expenses and charges, including without limitation reasonable attorneys' fees, incurred by the prevailing party in connection with the arbitration. Any order being shipped outside of the United States shall subscribe to ICC rules and the governing language shall be English. 13. Export Compliance. Buyer acknowledges that Seller is required to comply with applicable export laws and regulations relating to the sale, exportation, transfer, assignment, disposal and usage of the Equipment provided under this Agreement, including any export license requirements. Buyer agrees that such Equipment shall not at any time directly or indirectly be used, exported, sold, transferred, assigned or otherwise disposed of in a manner which will result in non - compliance with such applicable export laws and regulations. It shall be a condition of the continuing performance by Seller of its obligations hereunder that compliance with such export laws and regulations be maintained at all times. BUYER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY AND HOLD SELLER HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL COSTS, LIABILITIES, PENALTIES, SANCTIONS AND FINES RELATED TO NON - COMPLIANCE WITH APPLICABLE EXPORT LAWS AND REGULATIONS. 14. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING ELSE TO THE CONTRARY, SELLER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE OR OTHER INDIRECT DAMAGES, AND SELLER'S TOTAL LIABILITY ARISING AT ANY TIME FROM THE SALE OR USE OF THE EQUIPMENT SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THE EQUIPMENT. THESE LIMITATIONS APPLY WHETHER THE LIABILITY IS BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, STRICT LIABILITY OR ANY OTHER THEORY. 15. Notice. All notices required hereunder shall be in writing and shall be deemed properly served if delivered in person or if sent by registered or certified mail, with postage prepaid and return receipt requested, to the addresses set forth in the [purchase order ]t. All notices shall be deemed received on the date of delivery, or attempted delivery, if delivered in person, or if mailed, on the date which is two (2) days after the date such notice is deposited in the mail. Electronic mail is also acceptable provided that "read receipts" are documented 16. Miscellaneous. These terms, together with any quotation, purchase order or acknowledgement issued or signed by the Seller, comprise the complete and exclusive statement of the agreement between the parties (the "Agreement ") and supersede any terms contained in Buyer's documents, unless separately signed by Seller. No part of the Agreement may be changed or cancelled except by a written document signed by Seller and Buyer. To the extent the Agreement is considered a subcontract under Buyer's prime contract with an agency of the United States government, in case of Federal Acquisition Regulations (FARs) flow down terms, Seller will be in compliance with Section 44.403 of the FAR relating to commercial items and those additional clauses as specifically listed in 52.244 -6, Subcontracts for Commercial Items (JUL 2013). No course of dealing or performance, usage of trade or failure to enforce any term shall be used to modify the Agreement. If any of these terms is unenforceable, such term shall be limited only to the extent necessary to make it enforceable, and all other terms shall remain in full force and effect. The Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania without regard to its conflict of laws provisions. Both Buyer and Seller reject the applicability of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the international sales of goods to the relationship between the parties and to all transactions arising from said relationship. Page 11 of 17 Evoqua Water Technologies LLC QUOTATION NO. 140147 -A7 I RE: Clearwater East I DATE: 10/03/2014 Appendix A: Scope Clarification Table Provided By Evo• ua Contractor Installed By Page 12 of 17 Evoqua Water Technologies LLC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x N/A Submittals -- x N/A O &M Manual 2 x 2 of every type float /level sensor included cords Spare Parts 6 x PVC Diffuers Spare Parts 1 x 50' roll of gasket screen Spare Parts 2 x Copies of PLC program Spare Parts -- x N/A Storage and Handling Removal -- x N/A Filter Cell Equip -- x N/A Siemens Supplied Equipment toJobsite Freight -- x N/A Includes 7 trips 3 days each Startup -- x N/A Includes PLC Debuging Detailed below Electrical Programming Filter Cell Internals -- x Existing Contractor to Sandblast Clean and Paint Existing Underdrain Frames Vent Tees (grouted in) -- x Existing No Work Anticipated Underdrain -- x Existing Contractor to Repair as Needed Underdrain Grout -- x Existing was not in original scope, should not need replacing Vent Piping -- x Existing Contractor to Sandblast Clean and Paint Existing Gullet Covers Cores 108 x Contractor All New Underdrain Gasketting 25 x Contractor All New Underdrain 36 x Contractor All New Wire Mesh 108 x Contractor All New FRP Grating Hold Down Angles 144 x Contractor All New Loose Perimeter Beams 216 x Contractor All New Hold Down for Hold Down Structure, 316SS 656 x Contractor All New Hardware Is x Contractor All New Anchors, 316SS Boxes 6 x Contractor All New Inlet 6 x Contractor All New Trough Assemblies Sensors 19 x Contractor All New, 12 for cells, 2 clearwell, 1 mudwell, 1 influent, 2spare Level Sensors Probe Guide 6 x Contractor All New Level 90 x Contractor All New Filter Media PVC 144 x Contractor All New Diffusers, Drop Piping 72 x Contractor Existing Diffuser Diffusers Piping Support & Hardware, 316SS Is x Contractor All New Pumps, Blowers, and Compressors Backwash Pump 2 x Existing Keep Existing Mudwell Pump 2 x Existing Keep Existing Clean Pump 2 x Contractor New Pumps Chem Pressure Air Blower 2 x Existing Keep Existing Low Compressor 1 x Contractor All New Air High Pressure Tubing -- x Contractor All New Valves Inlet Valves and Actuators, 18" 6 x Existing Keep Existing Trough Valves No Actuators, 20" 6 x Existing Keep Existing Filtrate Valves and Actuators, 20" 6 x Existing Keep Existing Backwash Valves and Actuators, 20" 6 x Existing Keep Existing Air Mix Valves, 3" 6 x Existing Keep Existing Low Pressure Air Valve, 2" 12 x Existing Keep Existing Low Pressure Air Valve, 3" 6 x Existing Keep Existing Chem Clean Valves &Actuators 6 x Contractor All New Miscallaneous Other items FRP Chemical Storage Tank 1 x Existing Keep Existing Chem Clean Piping -- x Contractor All New Main Filter Control Panel and HMI 1 x Contractor All New with New PLC and New Location PLC Program -- x Contractor Installed by Contractor and Integrator with Evoqua Support Program Debug -- x x Co -Op Includes 1 trip 3 days onsite. PLC Local Control Console 4 x Existing Keep Existing, Add Conduit and Wiring for New Chem Clean Valve Warranty Startup and of Proper Installation 6 x x Contractor Contractor and Evoqua are to a certificate for each cell. Certificate -- x x Co -Op Startup Testing -- x x Co -Op Performance Warranty -- x x Co -Op Page 12 of 17 Evoqua Water Technologies LLC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 QUOTATION NO. 140147 -A7 RE: Clearwater East DATE: 10/03/2014 Appendix B: PLC I/O List The following is a suggested list of the PLC Inputs and Outputs to be utilized for the Clearwater East Rehabilitation Project. Inputs Backwash Pumps Backwash Control Selector in Hand Backwash Control Selector in Auto Backwash Pump 1 in Auto Backwash Pump 2 in Auto Backwash Pump 1 Running Backwash Pump 2 Running Backwash Pump 1 Overload Failure Backwash Pump 2 Overload Failure Blowers Blower 1 In Auto Blower 2 In Auto Blower 1 Running Blower 2 Running Blower 1 Overload Failure Blower 2 Overload Failure Air Compressor System Air Compressor 1 Running (1) Air Compressor 2 Running (1) Reciever Low Pressure Chem Clean System Chem Clean Pump 1 in Auto Chem Clean Pump 2 in Auto Chem Clean Pump 1 Running Chem Clean Pump 2 Running Chem Clean Stop Pushbutton (2) Level Probes Clearwell High Level Float Mudwell High Level Float Clearwell Low Level Float Chem Clean Tank Low Level Float Inlet Channel High Level Float Page 13 of 17 Evoqua Water Technologies LLC QUOTATION NO. 140147 -A7 RE: Clearwater East DATE: 10/03/2014 Other Cell 1 Air Mix / Pulse Mix Level Float Cell 1 Backwash Level Float and Push Button Cell 1 Chem Clean Select Button (3) Cell 1 Pulse Counter Reset to Zero Button (3) CeII 2 Air Mix / Pulse Mix Level Float CeII 2 Backwash Level Float and Push Button Cell 2 Chem Clean Select Button (3) Cell 2 Pulse Counter Reset to Zero Button (3) Cell 3 Air Mix / Pulse Mix Level Float CeII 3 Backwash Level Float and Push Button Cell 3 Chem Clean Select Button (3) Cell 3 Pulse Counter Reset to Zero Button (3) CeII 4 Air Mix / Pulse Mix Level Float CeII 4 Backwash Level Float and Push Button Cell 4 Chem Clean Select Button (3) Cell 4 Pulse Counter Reset to Zero Button (3) CeII 5 Air Mix / Pulse Mix Level Float CeII 5 Backwash Level Float and Push Button Cell 5 Chem Clean Select Button (3) Cell 5 Pulse Counter Reset to Zero Button (3) CeII 6 Air Mix / Pulse Mix Level Float CeII 6 Backwash Level Float and Push Button Cell 6 Chem Clean Select Button (3) Cell 6 Pulse Counter Reset to Zero Button (3) Horn Reset CeII 1 Power On CeII 2 Power On Cell 3 Power On CeII 4 Power On CeII 5 Power On CeII 6 Power On Page 14 of 17 Evoqua Water Technologies LLC QUOTATION NO. 140147 -A7 RE: Clearwater East DATE: 10/03/2014 Outputs Status Lights & Alarms Mudwell High Level Alarm Clearwell Low Chem Clean Tank Low Level Alarm Processor Failure Horn Relay Remote Alarm Lamp & Horn Pulse Mix Light (2) Backwash Light (2) Chem Feed Light (3) Water Fill Light (2) Soaking Light (2) HydroJet Light (2) Chem Clean Cycle Complete Light (2) Inlet Channel High Level Light (2) Equipment Failure Light (2) Chem Feed Pumps Chem Clean Pump 1 Run Command Chem Clean Pump 2 Run Command Blowers Blower 1 Run Command Blower 2 Run Command Backwash Pumps Backwash Pump 1 Run Command Backwash Pump 2 Run Command Backwash Pump Failure (2) Filter Cell Valves and Status CeII 1 Air Mix Solenoid Valve Cell 1 Trough Valve CeII 1 Inlet Valve CeII 1 Backwash Inlet Valve CeII 1 Filtrate Valve Cell 1 Pulse Counter CeII 1 Chem Clean On CeII 1 Backwashing Cell 2 Air Mix Solenoid Valve Page 15 of 17 Evoqua Water Technologies LLC QUOTATION NO. 140147 -A7 RE: Clearwater East DATE: 10/03/2014 Cell 2 Trough Valve Cell 2 Inlet Valve Cell 2 Backwash Inlet Valve Cell 2 Filtrate Valve Cell 2 Pulse Counter Cell 2 Chem Clean On Cell 2 Backwashing Cell 3 Air Mix Solenoid Valve Cell 3 Trough Valve Cell 3 Inlet Valve Cell 3 Backwash Inlet Valve Cell 3 Filtrate Valve Cell 3 Pulse Counter Cell 3 Chem Clean On Cell 3 Backwashing Cell 4 Air Mix Solenoid Valve Cell 4 Trough Valve Cell 4 Inlet Valve Cell 4 Backwash Inlet Valve Cell 4 Filtrate Valve Cell 4 Pulse Counter Cell 4 Chem Clean On Cell 4 Backwashing Cell 5 Air Mix Solenoid Valve Cell 5 Trough Valve Cell 5 Inlet Valve CeII 5 Backwash Inlet Valve CeII 5 Filtrate Valve CeII 5 Pulse Counter CeII 5 Chem Clean On CeII 5 Backwashing CeII 6 Air Mix Solenoid Valve CeII 6 Trough Valve CeII 6 Inlet Valve CeII 6 Backwash Inlet Valve CeII 6 Filtrate Valve CeII 6 Pulse Counter Page 16 of 17 Evoqua Water Technologies LLC QUOTATION NO. 140147 -A7 RE: Clearwater East DATE: 10/03/2014 Cell 6 Chem Clean On CeII 6 Backwashing Chem Clean CeII 1 Chem Clean Valve Open Command CeII 2 Chem Clean Valve Open Command CeII 3 Chem Clean Valve Open Command CeII 4 Chem Clean Valve Open Command CeII 5 Chem Clean Valve Open Command CeII 6 Chem Clean Valve Open Command Notes: (1) Air compressor running status is optional if available from MCC or Compressor CP. (2) Existing Item is located in Existing Main Control Panel, New Control can be located on HMI. (3) Existing Item is located in Local Consoles, New Control can be located on HMI. Page 17 of 17 Evoqua Water Technologies LLC THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Table of Contents: CONTRACT BOND 1 CONTRACT 3 CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT 7 PROPOSAL BOND 8 AFFIDAVIT 9 NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT 10 PROPOSAL 11 CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET 14 BIDDER'S PROPOSAL 15 SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM 17 Section V.docx Page i 9/12/2014 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 14 Rti CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE 416.....----- DATEIMM /DD/YYYY) 03/27/2015 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER MARSH USA, INC. 501 MERRITT 7 NORWALK, CT 06856 Attn: Emcor.Certrequest @marsh.com / Fax: 203 - 229 -6787 299174- P00- COM -14 -15 15702 CONTACT NAME: PHONE FAX (A/C, No. Ext): (A/C No): E-MAIL DORLSS: INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURER A : Continental Casualty Company 20443 INSURED POOLE & KENT COMPANY OF FLORIDA 1781 N.W. NORTH RIVER DR. MIAMI, FL 33125 INSURER B : American Casualty Company Of Reading, Pa 20427 Transportation Insurance Co INSURER C : po 20494 INSURER D : $ 2,000,000 INSURER E : $ 1,000,000 INSURER F : ES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: • THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR 'MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL INSR SUBR Wvn POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF (MM /DD/YYYY) POLICY EXP (MM /DD/YYYY) LIMITS A GENERAL X LIABILITY COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY GL 4025755651 10/01/2014 10/01/2015 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 2,000,000 DAMAGE TO RENTED PREMISES (Ea occurrence) $ 1,000,000 CLAIMS -MADE X OCCUR MED EXP (Any one person) $ 25,000 PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ 2,000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 6,000,000 GENL AGGREGATE POLICY X LIMIT APPLIES TA: PER: LOC PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 14,000,000 $ A AUTOMOBILE X X LIABILITY ANY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS HIRED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS BUA 4025755696 10/01/2014 10/01/2015 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) $ 2,000,000 BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ BODILY INJURY (Per accident ( ) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ Auto Physical Damage $ Included UMBRELLA LIAB EXCESS LIAB OCCUR CLAIMS -MADE EACH OCCURRENCE $ AGGREGATE $ DED RETENTION $ $ B B C WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY ANY PROPRIETOR /PARTNER/EXECUTIVE YIN OFFICER /MEMBER EXCLUDED? N (Mandatory In NH) If yes, describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below N / A WC 4025755584 (AOS) WC 4025755598 (CA) WC 4025755570 (AZ, OR, WI) 10/01/2014 10/01/2014 10/01/2014 10/01/2015 10/01/2015 10/01/2015 X WC STATU- TORY LIMITS OTH- ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT 1,000,000 $ E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT 1,000,000 $ DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (Attach ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, if more space is required) RE: 15702 - EAST WRF EFFLUENT FILTERS REHABILITATION PROJECT - PROJECT NO. 13- 0014 -UT ADDITIONAL INSURED UNDER ALL POLICIES (EXCEPT WORKERS COMPENSATION & EMPLOYERS LIABILITY) WHERE REQUIRED BY CONTRACT: OWNER OF CLEARWATER AND ANY OTHER PERSONS OR ENTITIES IDENTIFIED IN THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, AND THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS AND EMPLOYEES WHERE REQUIRED BY CONTRACT, COVERAGE PROVIDED TO THE ADDITIONAL INSUREDS IS PRIMARY & NON- CONTRIBUTORY. WAIVER OF SUBROGATION AS REQUIRED BY CONTRACT. CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY IS INCLUDED IN THE GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE FORM. THE GENERAL LIABILITY POLICY HAS NO XCU EXCLUSION. CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELL CITY OF CLEARWATER ATTN: CATHY TEFFT 100 S. MYRTLE AVENUE SUITE 220 CLEARWATER, FL 33756 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE of Marsh USA Inc. Heidi Bauermeister ,j✓pe/— ACORD 25 (2010/05) © 1988-2010 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ACORD® AGENCY CUSTOMER ID: 299174 LOC #: Norwalk ADDITIONAL REMARKS SCHEDULE Page 2 of 2 AGENCY MARSH USA, INC. NAMED INSURED POOLE & KENT COMPANY OF FLORIDA 1781 N.W. NORTH RIVER DR. MIAMI, FL 33125 POLICY NUMBER CARRIER NAIC CODE EFFECTIVE DATE: ADDITIONAL REMARKS THIS ADDITIONAL REMARKS FORM IS A SCHEDULE TO ACORD FORM, FORM NUMBER. 25 FORM TITLE• Certificate of Liability Insurance Auto Physical Damage Comp / Coll Deductible $500 In the event of cancellation or material change that reduces or restricts the insurance afforded by this Coverage Part (other than the reduction of aggregate limits through payment of claims as applicable), Insurer agrees to mail prior written notice of cancellation or material change to: Certificate Holder Schedule 1. Number of days advance notice: For any statutorily permitted reason other than non - payment of premium, the number of days required for notice of cancellation as provided in paragraph 2 of either the Cancellation Common Policy Conditions or as amended by the applicable state cancellation endorsement is increased to the lesser of 60 days or the number of days required in a written contract. For non - payment of premium, The greater of (1) the number of days required by state law or (2) the number of days required by written contract. 2. Name: Notice will be mailed to: Certificate holder ACORD 101 (2008/01) © 2008 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD Bond No.: 106250485 (TR), 82389122 (FE) PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND (Front Page) This bond is given to comply with § 255.05, Florida Statutes, and any action instituted by a claimant under this bond for payment must be in accordance with the notice and time limitation provisions in subsections (2) and (10). Pursuant to § 255.05(1)(b), Florida Statutes, "Before commencing the work or before recommencing the work after a default or abandonment, the contractor shall provide to the public entity a certified cony of the recorded bond. Notwithstanding the terms of the contract or any other law governing prompt payment for construction services, the public entity may not make a payment to the contractor until the contractor has complied with this paragraph." CONTRACTOR Poole & Kent Company of Florida 1715 W. Lemon St. Tampa, FL 33606 (813) 251-2438 SURETY Travelers Casualty and Surely Company pf America One Tower Square, Hartford, CT 06183 732 - 321 -5600 Federal Insurance Company (727) 562 -4630 15 Mountain View Road, Warren, NJ 07059 908 - 903 -7908 OWNER City of Clearwater Engineering Department 100 S. Myrtle Avenue Clearwater, FL 33756 PROJECT NAME: EAST WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY (WRF) EFFLUENT FILTERS REHABILITATION PROJECT NO.: 13- 0014 -UT PROJECT DESCRIPTION: replacement of a portion of the compressed air system and chemical cleaning systems. The project includes furnishing and installing a new main filter control panel, fiber optic cable and plant SCADA work and may include the replacement of the air operated filter valves, which are bid as an additive alternate., address is 3141 S.R. 60, Clearwater, Florida, 33759. FRONT PAGE All other Bond page(s) are deemed subsequent to this page regardless of any page number(s) that may be pre - printed thereon. BOND NUMBER: 106250485 (TR), 82389122 (FE) CONTRACT BOND (1) STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF Pinellas County KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we Poole & Kent Company of Florida as Contractor and Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America & Federal Insurance Company (Surety) whose home address is One Tower Square, Hartford, CT 06183 (TR), & 15 Mountain View Road, Warren, NJ 07059 (FE) HEREINAFTER CALLED THE "Surety ", are held and firmly bound into the City of Clearwater, Florida (hereinafter called the "Owner ") in the penal sum of: The Base Bid of $1,160,000, and Additive Alternate Bid #5A of $107,778; Additive Alternate Bid #5B of $104,064; Additive Alternate Bid #5C of $103,464; Additive Alternate Bid #5D of $27,852; Additive Alternate Bid #5E of $22,158; Additive Alternate Bid #5F of $19,256; and, Additive Alternate Bid #5G of $8,280; for a total of ONE MILLION, FIVE HUNDRED FIFTY -TWO THOUSAND, EIGHT HUNDRED VD-FY-TWO Dollars ($1,552,852.00) for the payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, .administrators, successors, and assigns for the faithful performance of a certain written contract, dated the day of , 20, entered into between the Contractor and the City of Clearwater for: EAST WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY (WRF) EFFLUENT FILTERS REHABILITATION PROJECT PROJECT #13- 0014 -UT: a copy of which said contract is incorporated herein by reference and is made a part hereof as if fully copied herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION ARE SUCH, that if the Contractor shall in all respects comply with the terms and conditions of said contract, including the one year guarantee of material and labor, and his obligations thereunder, including the contract documents (which include the Advertisement for Bids, Form of Proposal, Form of Contract, Form of Surety Bond, instructions to Bidders, General Conditions and Technical Specifications) and the Plans and Specifications therein referred to and made a part thereof, and such alterations as may be made in said Plans and Specifications as therein provided for, and shall indemnify and save harmless the said Owner against and from all costs, expenses, damages, injury or conduct, want of care or skill, negligence or default, including patent infringements on the part of the said Contractor agents or employees, in the execution or performance of said contract, including errors in the plans furnished by the Contractor, and further, if such "Contractor" or "Contractors" shall promptly make payments to all persons supplying him, them or it, labor, material, and supplies used directly or indirectly by said Contractor, Contractors, Sub - Contractor, or Sub - Contractors, in the prosecution of the work provided for in said Contract, this obligation shall be void, otherwise, the Contractor and Surety jointly and severally agree to pay to the Owner any difference between the sum to which the said Contractor would be entitled on the completion of the Contract, and that which the Owner may be obliged to pay for the completion of said work by contract or otherwise, & any damages, direct or indirect, or consequential, which said Owner may sustain on account of such work, or on account of the failure of the said Contractor to properly and in all things, keep and execute all the provisions of said contract. Section V.docx Page 1 of 17 9/12/2014 CONTRACT BOND (2) And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, executors, administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, that they will amply and fully protect the said Owner against, and will pay any and all amounts, damages, costs and judgments which may be recovered against or which the Owner may be called upon to pay to any person or corporation by reason of any damages arising from the performance of said work, or of the repair or maintenance thereof, or the manner of doing the same or the neglect of the said Contractor or his agents or servants or the improper performance of the said work by the Contractor or his agents or servants, or the infringements of any patent rights by reason of the use of any material furnished or work done; as aforesaid, or otherwise. And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, heirs, executors, administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, to repay the owner any sum which the Owner may be compelled to pay because of any lien for labor material furnished for the work, embraced by said Contract. And the said Surety, for the value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, witness the hands and seals of the parties hereto this 27th day of March , 20 15 t Name: Christine dez WITNESS: rint Name: Donna Kissane COUNTERSIGNED: NA Print Name: NA Section V.docx Page 2 of 17 POOLE & KENT COMPANY OF FLORIDA 171emon Street, Tampa, FL 33606 By: (�– �--Q —� Print Name: Patrick H. Carr Title: President & CEO Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America & Federal Insurance Company SURE Y By: ATTO `- Y- - ACT Print Name: Rita Sagistano Non Resident License #P026098 9/12/2014 TRAVELERS) Attorney -In Fact No. WARNING: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER POWER OF ATTORNEY Farmington Casualty Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company 227925 St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company Certificate No. 006260386 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Farmington Casualty Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut, that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa, and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin (herein collectively called the "Companies "), and that the Companies do hereby make, constitute and appoint Thomas Bean, Rita Sagistano, Gerard S. Macholz, Susan Lupski, Robert T. Pearson, Camille Maitland, George O. Brewster, Colette R. Chisholm, Virginia M. Lovett, Vincent A. Walsh, Lee Ferrucci, Desiree Cardlin, and Nelly Renchiwich of the City of Uniondale State of New York . their true and lawful Attorney(s) -in -Fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign, execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, recognizances, conditional undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused this instrument to be signed and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed, this 10th day of February 2015 • State of Connecticut City of Hartford ss. Farmington Casualty Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company - Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company By: Robert L. Raney, enior Vice President On this the 10th day of February 2015 before me personally appeared Robert L. Raney, who acknowledged himself to be the Senior Vice President of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, and that he, as such, being authorized so to do, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by himself as a duly authorized officer. In Witness Whereof, I hereunto set my hand and official seal. My Commission expires the 30th day of June, 2016. 58440 -8 -12 Printed in U.S.A. W w" • Marie C. Tetreault, Notary Public WARNING: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER WARNING: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, which resolutions are now in full force and effect, reading as follows: RESOLVED, that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary may appoint Attorneys -in -Fact and Agents to act for and on behalf of the Company and may give such appointee such authority as his or her certificate of authority may prescribe to sign with the Company's name and seal with the Company's seal bonds, recognizances, contracts of indemnity, and other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond, recognizance, or conditional undertaking, and any of said officers or the Board of Directors at any time may remove any such appointee and revoke the power given him or her; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President may delegate all or any part of the foregoing authority to one or more officers or employees of this Company, provided that each such delegation is in writing and a copy thereof is filed in the office of the Secretary; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that any bond, recognizance, contract of indemnity, or writing obligatory in the nature of a bond, recognizance, or conditional undertaking shall be valid and binding upon the Company when (a) signed by the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary and duly attested and sealed with the Company's seal by a Secretary or Assistant Secretary; or (b) duly executed (under seal, if required) by one or more Attorneys -in -Fact and Agents pursuant to the power prescribed 'in his or her certificate or their certificates of authority or by one or more Company officers pursuant to a written delegation of authority; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signature of each of the following officers: President, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President, any Secretary, any Assistant Secretary, and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Resident Vice Presidents, Resident Assistant Secretaries or Attorneys -in -Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding on the Company in the future with respect to any bond or understanding to which it is attached. I, Kevin E. Hughes, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary, of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies, which is in full force and effect and has not been revoked. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies this 27th day of March Kevin E. Hughes, Assistant Sec tary ,20 15. To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney, call 1- 800 - 421 -3880 or contact us at www.travelersbond.com. Please refer to the Attorney -In -Fact number, the above -named individuals and the details of the bond to which the power is attached. WARNING: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER Florida State of k, County of } ss. 30th March 15 On this day of , 20 , before me personalty appe to me known, in b TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY OF AMERICA HARTFORD, CT. 06183 ATTORNEY -IN -FACT JUSTIFICATION PRINCIPAL'S ACKNOWLEDGMENT —IF A CORPORATION Miami -Dade duly Patrick H. Carr t, g by pt du y s es and says: That he /she resides in the it of Miami thathe/shelathe who, resiuent '�`�� of Poole & Kent Oompany of Flori42 corporation described in and which executed the within instrument; that lie/site knows the seal of said corporation; that the seal affixed to said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation, and that he /she signed his/her name thato by like order. State of New York, County of PRINCIPAL'S ACKNOWLEDGMENT— IF INDIVIDU °° ry auhlihc 40141 CARLA J. W00DALL , A Notary Public - State of Florid: i. On this day f 20 , before me personally '{ Commission • FF 197193 Y P YaPp d ;;,�► ��f r x, -5 �g 411 me known to be (die individual) (one of the firm of • Fo,,�A) y� 27tb i1 f c within instrument, and he /she thereupon duly acknowledged to me that he /she executed the same (as the act and deed of'stitt'flim 6dtd roue : pry ssn } ss. Slate of New York, County of Nassau SURETY COMPANY'S ACKNOWLEDGMENT } ss. On this 27th day of March , 20 15 before me personally eared Rita Sagistano to me brown, who, being by me duly sworn, did depose and say: That he/he resides in Nassau County, NY that he/she is Attorney -in -Fact of TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY OF AMERICA, the corporation described in and which executed the within instrument; that he /sire knows the corporate seal of said Company; that the seal affixed to said Instrument is such corporate seal; and that he/she signed said instrument as Attome3 in -Fact by authority of the Board of Directors of said Company; and affiant did further depose and say that the Superintendent cf Insurance of the State of New York has, pursuant to Chapter 882 of the Laws of the State of New York for the year 1939, constituting chapter 28 of the Consolidating Laws of the Slate of New York as the Insurance Law as amended, issued td TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY OF AMERICA his/her certificate that said Company is qualified to become and be accepted as surety or guarantor on all bonds, undertakings, recognizances, guaranties, and other obligations required or permitted by law; and that such certificate has not been revoked, TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY OF AMERICA Hartford, Connecticut 08183 FINANCIAL STATEMENT AS OF DECEMBER 31, 2013 AS FILED WITH THE INSURANCE DEPT. OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK CAPITAL STOCK $ 8,480,000 Notary Public CAMILLE MAITLAND Notary Public, State of New York No. 01 MA6006044 Qualified in Kings County Commission Expires AO 20, 2018 ASSETS LIABILITIES CASH AND INVESTED CASH BONDS • INVESTMENT INCOME DUE AND ACCRUED OTHER INVESTED ASSETS PREMIUM BALANCES NET DEFERRED TAX ASSET REINSURANCE RECOVERABLE SECURITIES LENDING REINVESTED COLLATERAL ASSETS RECFJVABLES FROM PARENT, SUBSIDIARIES AND AFFIU ATE$ STATE SURCHARGES RECEIVABLE OTHER ASSETS TOTAL ASSETS $ 87,799,824 3,452,214,898 47,768,602 265.099,610 180,838,462 61.576,098 11,361,414 4.910,772 30.772.481 258,711 14,872,822 If 4,147,460,454 UNEARNED PREMIUMS LOSSES LOSS ADJUSTMENT EXPENSES COMMISSIONS TAXES. LICENSES AND FEES OTHER EXPENSES FUNDS HELD UNDER REINSURANCE TREATIES CURRENT FEDERAL AND FOREIGN INCOME TAXES REMITTANCES AND ITEMS NOT ALLOCATED AMOUNTS WITHHELD / RETAINED BY COMPANY FOR OTHERS RETROACTIVE REINSURANCE RESERVE ASSUMED POLICYHOLDER DMDENDS PROVISION FOR REINSURANCE ADVANCE PREMIUM PAYABLE FOR SECURITIES LENDING DERIVATIVES CEDED REINSURANCE NET PREMIUMS PAYABLE ESCHEAT LIABILITY OTHER ACCRUED EXPENSES AND LIABILITIES TOTAL LIABILITIES CAPITAL STOCK PAID IN SURPLUS OTHER SURPLUS TOTAL SURPLUS TO POLICYHOLDERS TOTAL LIABILITIES &SURPLUS Securities carried at $8,174,873 In the above statement are deposited with public authorities, as required by law. 5 808,717,871 809,863,178 480,870,453 31,781,138 12 ,482,322 38,437,893 94,401,484 18,387,407 13,577,603 23,816,367 1,511,874 8,462,613 3,970,484 1,078,609 4,910,772 112,003 (64,954,264) 471,948 242,238 $ 2,285.740,367 S 8,480,000 433,803,780 1,441.430.327 3 1.881,720,088 $ 4,147,4.40,454 Chubb Surety POWER Federal Insurance Company Attn: Surety Department OF Vigilant Insurance Company 15 Mountain View Road ATTORNEY Pacific Indemnity Company Warren, NJ 07059 Know All by These Presents, That FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, an Indiana corporation, VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, a New York corporatio , and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY a Wisconsin corporation, do each hereby constitute and appoint Thomas Bean, George O. Brewster, Colette R. Chisholm Susan Lupskt, Gerard S. Macholz, Camille Maitland, Robert T. Pearson and Rita Sagistano of Uniondale, New fork each as their true and lawful Attorney- in- Fact to execute under such designation in their names and to affix their corporate seals to and delver for and on their behalf as surely thereon or otherwise, bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory I i the nature thereof (other than ball bonds) given or executed in the course of business, and any instruments amending or altering the same, and consents to the modification or alteration of any Instrument referred to In said bonds or obligations. In Witness Whereof, said FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPf4Y, VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY have each executed and these presents and Axed their corporate seals on this 24 day of September, 2014. Dawn M. Chloros, Assistant Secretary STATE OF NEW JERSEY County of Somerset On this 2441' day of September, 2014 before me, a Notary Public of New Jersey, personally came Dawn M. C locos, to me known to be Assistant Secretary of FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY, the companies which executed the foregoing Power of Attorney, and the said Dawn M Chiros, being by me duty sworn, did depose and say that she Is Assistant Secretary of FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY and knows the corporate seals thereof, that the seals affixed to The foregoing Power of Attorney are such corporate seals and were thereto affixed by authority of the By- Laws of said Companies; and that she signed said Power of Attorney as Assistant Secretary of said Companies :by Idce:atdholiryrsnit ihatishe IS acquainted With David :B 'Nonls.:Jr.,end knows trm to be` Vkoe President stub : Companies: and that the aisratuxe:of.Davld:B. Norrfs,:Jr., subscribed to said Power of Attorney Is in the genuine handwriting of David B. Norris, Jr., and was thereto subscribed by authority of said By- Laws and in deponent's presence. Notarial Seal SS. KATHERINE J. ADELAAR NOTARY PUBLIC OF NEW JERSEY No. 231(1685 Commission Expires July 16, 2019 CERTIFICATION Extract from the By- Laws of I INSURANCE COMPANY, VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY: 'All powers of attorney for and on behalf of the Company may and shall be executed in the name and an behalf of the Company, either by the Chairman or the President or a Vice President or an Assistant Vice President. jointly with the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary, under their respective designations. The signature of such officers may be engraved, printed or Lithographed. The signature of each of the following officers: Chairman, President, any Vice President, any Assistant We President, any Secretary, any Assistant Secretary and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Assistant Secretaries or Attorneys- In- Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such power of attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached." I, Dawn M. Chloros, Assistant Secretary of FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY (the 'Companies') do hereby certify that 0) the foregoing extract of the By- Laws of the Companies is true and correct (ii) the Companies are duty licensed and authorized to transact surety business In all 50 of the United States of America and the District of Columbia and are authorized by the U.S. Treasury Department; further, Federal and Vigilant are soensed in the U.S. Virgin Islands, and Federal is licensed in American Samoa, Guam, Puerto Rico, and each of the Provinces of Canada except Prince Edward island; and - • (iii) the foregoing Power of Attorney Is true, correct and In full force and effect. Given under my hand and seals of said Companies at Warren. NJ this 27th day of March, 2015 �J ide?Ce--- Notary Public IN THE EVENT YOU WISH TO NOTIFY US OF A CUM. VERIFY THE AUTHENTICITY OF THIS 8ON 0 OR NOTIFY US OF ANY OTHER MATTER. PLEASE CONTACT US AT ADDRESS LISTED MOVE. OR BY Telephone (909) 903- 3493 Feu (9011903- 3655 ..moll: auqtlachihb.00m Form 15-1 0 - 0225B- U OEN CONSENT (rev. 0214) 1 ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF SURETY COMPANY STATE OF Ngw York COUNTY OF ....Atesiwu........ es On this March 2; 2015 . beforae me came Rita Sagistano to me known, who, being by . me duly sworn, did depose and say; that he/she resides in . Nassau County,, , State of NY , that helshe Is the Atoms . Attorney-in-Fact of the Federal Insurance Company the corporation desorLed in which executed the above instrument that he!ehe knows the seal of said corporation; that the seal affixed to said Instrument is such corporate seal; that is was so affixed by the Board of Dkeotore of said corporation; and that hie signed hlslher name thereto by lire order; and the atfiarrt did further. depose and say that the 8uperiraendent of insurance of the State of New York, has, ppaant to Section 1111 of the Insurance Law of the State of New York, issued to Federal Insurance omny (Surety) hisiher csrtifloate of qudification .................. Y suety�g for and propriety accepting and approvtngit such; and and that such certificate law of the State of New has not been revoked. NY xdmo*ikmaent Notary Pubic CAMILLE MAITLAND Notary Public, State of New York No. 01MA6006044 Qualified in Kings County Commission Expires April 20, 2015 r 1 1 1 1 Form 15- 10 -0313A (Rev. 3/15) FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY STATEMENT OF ASSETS, LIABILITIES AND SURPLUS TO POLICYHOLDERS Statutory Basis DECEMBER 31, 2014 (in thousands of dollars) LIABILITIES AND ASSETS SURPLUS TO POLICYHOLDERS Cash and Short Term Investments $ 110,484 Outstanding Losses and Loss Expenses $ 12,181,139 United States Government, State and Unearned Premiums 3,654,861 Municipal Bonds 10,245,402 Ceded Reinsurance Premiums Payable 339,466 Other Bonds 4,927,443 Provision for Reinsurance 46,470 Stocks 1,066,355 Other Liabilities 1,434,018 Other Invested Assets 1,365,367 TOTAL INVESTMENTS 17,715,051 TOTAL LIABILITIES 17,655,954 Investments in Affiliates: Chubb Investment Holdings, Inc. 3,565,038 Capital Stock 20,980 Pacific Indemnity Company 2,922,214 Paid -In Surplus 3,106,809 Executive Risk Indemnity Inc 1,258,019 Unassigned Funds 11,700,594 Chubb Insurance Investment Holdings Ltd.... 1,162,709 CC Canada Holdings Ltd 652,880 Chubb Insurance Company of Australia Ltd. 480,068 SURPLUS TO POLICYHOLDERS 14,828,383 Great Northern Insurance Company 476,969 Vigilant Insurance Company 292,313 Chubb European Investment Holdings SLP 287,633 Other Affiliates 517,330 Premiums Receivable 1,679,148 Other Assets 1,474,965 TOTAL LIABILITIES AND SURPLUS TOTAL ADMITTED ASSETS $ 32,484,337 TO POLICYHOLDERS $ 32,484,337 Investments are valued in accordance with requirements of the National Association of Insurance Commissioners. At December 31, 2014, investments with a carrying value of $518,199,884 were deposited with government authorities as required by law. State, County & City of New York, — ss: Yvonne Baker, Assistant Secretary of the Federal Insurance Company being duly sworn, deposes and says that the foregoing Statement of Assets, Liabilities and Surplus to Policyholders of said Federal Insurance Company on December 31, 2014 is true and correct and is a true abstract of the Annual Statement of said Company as filed with the Secretary of the Treasury of the United States for the 12 months ending December 31, 2014. Subscribed and sworn to before me this March 11, 2015. / / 4.A.43.400 JEANETTE SHIPSEY Assistant Secretary Notary Public, State of New York Notary Public No 02SH5074142 Qualified in Nassau County Commission Expires March 10, 2019 Form 15- 10 -0313A (Rev. 3/15) CONTRACT (1) This CONTRACT made and entered into this 3 r� day of Apr ∎ , 20 1 S by and between the City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinafter designated as the "City ", and Poole and Kent Company of Florida, of the City of West Palm Beach County of Palm Beach and State of Florida, hereinafter designated as the "Contractor ". WITNESSETH: That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements on the part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows: The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the sums of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will at their own cost and expense perform all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equipment for the following: EAST WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY (WRF) EFFLUENT FILTERS REHABILITATION PROJECT PROJECT #13- 0014 -UT: in the amount of $1,552,852.00 In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any advertisement, instructions to bidders, general conditions, proposal and bond, which may be hereto attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this contract, and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successors and assigns shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the City. If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulations as contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the Contractor, then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf and shall have the right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in accordance with the provisions as contained herein. THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HEREBY AGREE TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE BROUGHT AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES ARISING OUT OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF THE TERMS, STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES TO HOLD THE CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, COSTS OF SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUB CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES BY THE AFOREMENTIONED CONTRACTOR, SUB CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES. Section V.docx Page 3 of 17 9/12/2014 CONTRACT (2) In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements: In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religion, color, or national origin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay off or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees or applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of the non discrimination clause. The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including contracts or agreements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub contractors for standard commercial supplies or raw materials. It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the event that the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be due to the Contractor the sum of $1,000.00 ner dav, for each day that the work to be performed by the Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1,000.00 per dav, shall only and solely represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of the Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is not to be construed as a penalty but is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the Contractor to complete and perform all work within the time period as specified in this contract. It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of this contract and the surety bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the terms and conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or sureties upon such performance bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases to be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional bond or bonds in such term and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the City. If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and provisions of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful performance of the work under the terms hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City in a form satisfactory to it. Section V.docx Page 4 of 17 9/12/2014 CONTRACT (3) The successful bidder /contractor will be required to comply with Section 119.0701, Florida Statutes (2013), specifically to: (a) Keep and maintain public records that ordinarily and necessarily would be required by the City of Clearwater in order to perform the service; (b) Provide the public with access to public records on the same terms and conditions that the City of Clearwater would provide the records and at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided in this chapter or as otherwise provided by law; (c) Ensure that public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law; and (d) Meet all requirements for retaining public records and transfer, at no cost, to the City of Clearwater all public records in possession of the contractor upon termination of the contract and destroy any duplicate public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. All records stored electronically must be provided to the public agency in a format that is compatible with the information technology systems of the City of Clearwater. Section V.docx Page 5 of 17 9/12/2014 CONTRACT (4) IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals and have executed this Agreement, in duplicate, the day and year first above written. CITY OF CLEARWATER IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA By: LUG r3.1,44Atuat- William B. Horne, II City Manager Countersigned: By: —ev to /1 Cr At �o f George N. Cretekos, Mayor (Contractor must indicate whether Corporation, Partnership, Company or Individual.) (The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his title; where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the Corporation). Section V.docx Page 6of17 Attest: % h hL �� 4 Rosemarie Call City Clerk Approved as to form: 'l1SHE0 Ma s' w M. Smith As stant City Attorney POOLE & KENT COMPANY OF FLORIDA r By: Print Name): �r—n Title: rR c`3 f C E v (SEAL). 9/12/2014 ` 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CERTIFICATE OF SECRETARY OF POOLE & KENT COMPANY OF FLORIDA The undersigned, Mark M. Porto, certifies that he is the duly elected, qualified and acting Secretary of Poole & Kent Company of Florida, a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of Delaware with a business address of 1781 N. W. North River Drive, Miami, FL 33125 and that as Secretary, he is the keeper of the corporate records and seal of said Corporation. 2015. The undersigned further certifies: 1. Attached hereto as Exhibit A is a true, correct and complete copy of resolutions adopted upon written consent of the sole director of this Corporation dated as of January 28, 2015; and said resolutions do not contravene any provision of the certificate of incorporation or by -laws of said Corporation, and have not been rescinded or modified in any respect but still remain in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand this 28th day of January, Mark M. Porto, Secretary Poole & Kent Company of Florida, a Delaware Corporation 1781 N. W. North River Drive, Miami, FL 33125 EXHIBIT A RESOLVED, that Patrick H. Carr the duly elected President and Chief Executive Officer, David A. Strickland the duly elected Senior Vice President and Assistant Secretary, Brian D. MacClugage the duly elected Executive Vice President and David B. BuShea the duly elected Vice President of the Company, be and each hereby are, authorized, empowered and directed to execute a contract and all related bonds with the City of Clearwater for the East WRF Effluent Filters Rehabilitation Project #13- 0014 -UT and such other instruments in writing as may be necessary on behalf of the said Corporation, and that the Contract, Bond and other such instruments signed by him shall be binding upon the said Corporation as its own acts and deeds. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT (replaces the Contractor's Affidavit for Final Payment page) TO OWNER: City of Clearwater Engineering Dept. 100 S. Myrtle Ave. Clearwater, FL 33756 CONTRACTOR: Poole and Kent Co. of Florida PROJECT NAME: East WRF Effluent Filters Rehabilitation PROJECT NO.: 13- 0014 -UT CONTRACT DATE: BOND NO.: , recorded in O.R. Book , Page , of the Public Records of Pinellas County, Florida. Pursuant to § 255.05(11), Florida Statutes, and in accordance with the provisions of the Contract between the Owner and the Contractor as indicated above, the: Name of Surety: Address: on bond of Poole & Kent Company of Florida 1715 W. Lemon St. Tampa, FL 33606 ,SURETY, ,CONTRACTOR, hereby approves of the final payment to the Contractor, and agrees that final payment to the Contractor shall not relieve Surety of any of its obligations to City of Clearwater Engineering Department 100 S. Myrtle Ave. Clearwater, FL 33756 as set forth in said Surety's bond. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety has hereunto set its hand this Attest: (Seal): day of ,OWNER, (Surety) (Signature of authorized representative) (Printed name and title) Section V.docx Page 7 of 17 9/12/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PROPOSAL BOND (Not to be filled out if a certified check is submitted) KNOWN ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, the undersigned, Poole & Kent Company of Florida 1715 W. Lemon Street, Tampa, FL 33606 as Principal, and Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America as Surety, who's address is One Tower Square Hartford, CT 06183, , are held and firmly bound unto the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the sum of Ten Percent of the Amount Bid Dollars ($ 10% of Amt. Bid ) (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount) for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns. The condition of the above obligation is such that if the attached Proposal of Poole & Kent Company of Florida as Principal, and Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America as Surety, for work specified as: • ►. - .u. 1i d -i - : -� ._.. si - • . 11 all as stipulated in said Proposal, by doing all work incidental thereto, in accordance with the plans and specifications provided herefor, all within Pinellas County, is accepted and the contract awarded to the above named bidder, and the said bidder shall within ten days after notice of said award enter into a contract, in writing, and furnish the required Performance Bond with surety or sureties to be approved by the City Manager, this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall be in full force and virtue by law and the full amount of this Proposal Bond will be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages. Signed this 25th day of November • (Principal must indicate whether corporation, partnership, company or individual) (The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his title; where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the Corporation). Section V.docc , 20 14 . B Poole & Kent Company of Florida Princi-� By: ` 1 '.-..- Title /}ay Lc,- C4-14/� 1,/k2 /cc: Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America Page 8 of 17 urety Rita Sa'ttano, Attorney -In -Fact Non Resident License #P026098 9/12/2014 TRAVELERS) Attorney -In Fact No. 227925 WARNING: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER POWER OF ATTORNEY Farmington Casualty Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company Certificate No. 0 0 6 0 4 7 3 8 3 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Farmington Casualty Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut, that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa, and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin (herein collectively called the "Companies "), and that the Companies do hereby make, constitute and appoint Thomas Bean, Rita Sagistano, Gerard S. Macholz, Susan Lupski, Robert T. Pearson, Camille Maitland, George O. Brewster, Colette R. Chisholm, Virginia M. Lovett, Vincent A. Walsh, Lee Ferrucci, Desiree Cardlin, and Nelly Renchiwich of the City of Uniondale , State of New York , their true and lawful Attorney(s) -in -Fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign, execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, recognizances, conditional undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. 4th IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused this instrument to be signed and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed, this day of. September 2014 State of Connecticut City of Hartford ss. Farmington Casualty Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company By: Robert L. Raney, en or Vice President On this the 4th day of September 2014 before me personally appeared Robert L. Raney, who acknowledged himself to be the Senior Vice President of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, and that he, as such, being authorized so to do, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by himself as a duly authorized officer. In Witness Whereof, I hereunto set my hand and official seal. My Commission expires the 30th day of June, 2016. 58440 -8 -12 Printed in U.S.A. W iA/" C . Marie C. Tetreault, Notary Public WARNING: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER WARNING: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, which resolutions are now in full force and effect, reading as follows: RESOLVED, that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary may appoint Attorneys -in -Fact and Agents to act for and on behalf of the Company and may give such appointee such authority as his or her certificate of authority may prescribe to sign with the Company's name and seal with the Company's seal bonds, recognizances, contracts of indemnity, and other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond, recognizance, or conditional undertaking, and any of said officers or the Board of Directors at any time may remove any such appointee and revoke the power given him or her; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President may delegate all or any part of the foregoing authority to one or more officers or employees of this Company, provided that each such delegation is in writing and a copy thereof is filed in the office of the Secretary; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that any bond, recognizance, contract of indemnity, or writing obligatory in the nature of a bond, recognizance, or conditional undertaking shall be valid and binding upon the Company when (a) signed by the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary and duly attested and sealed with the Company's seal by a Secretary or Assistant Secretary; or (b) duly executed (under seal, if required) by one or more Attorneys -in -Fact and Agents pursuant to the power prescribed in his or her certificate or their certificates of authority or by one or more Company officers pursuant to a written delegation of authority; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signature of each of the following officers: President, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President, any Secretary, any Assistant Secretary, and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Resident Vice Presidents, Resident Assistant Secretaries or Attorneys -in -Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding on the Company in the future with respect to any bond or understanding to which it is attached. I, Kevin E. Hughes, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary, of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies, which is in full force and effect and has not been revoked. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies this 25th day of November Kevin E. Hughes, Assistant Sec tary , 20 14. To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney, call 1- 800 - 421 -3880 or contact us at www.travelersbond.com. Please refer to the Attorney -In -Fact number, the above -named individuals and the details of the bond to which the power is attached. WARNING: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY OF AMERICA HARTFORD, CT. 06183 FLORIDA PRINCIPAL'S ACKNOWLEDGMENT-1F A CORPORATION State ofiigk, County of MIAMI —DADE } ss. On this 4TH day of DECEMBER 14 PATRICK H. CARR 20 , before me personally appeared tome known, whq bein mo 3 m oses and says: That he /she resides to the City °MIAMI that he/she is the PRID of POOLE & corporation described in and which executed the within instrument; that he/she knows the seal of said corporation; that the seat; that it was so affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation, and that he/she signed his/rer name thato ATPORNEY 1N.FACP JUSTIFICATION State ofNew York, County of On this day of , 20 , before me personally appeared known to be (the individual) (one of the flnn of instrument, and he /she thereupon duly acknowledged tome that he/she executed the same (as the act and deed of said firm). PRINCIPAL'S ACKNOWLEDGMENT— IF INDIVIDUAL OR FI } 8S. COMPANY OF FLORIDA1110 to said shwnent is such corporate state ofNew York; County of Nassau SURETY COMPANY'S ACKNOWLEDGMENT } ss. On this 25th day of November .2014 , before me personally appeared Rita Sagistano me known, who, being by me duly sworn, did depose and say: That he /ho resides in the OW& Nassau County, NY that he /she is Attorney -in -Fact of TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY OF AMERICA, the corporation described In and which precut hutrument; that he /she knows the corporate seat of said Company; that the seal axed to said Instrument is such corporate Atlomey-in-Pact by authority of the Board ofDirectors of said Company; and atfant did further de_ a Superintendent in en and d than mane si fthe Said has, pursuant to Chapter 882 of the Laws of the State of New York for the year 1939, constituting chapter say of the Con rrnn Laws of th - State of Insurance Law as amended, issued td TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY OF AMERICA hi certifi e that : d Comp became and be accepted as surety or guarantor on all bonds, undertakings, recognizances, guaranties, and other obli; lions requt -� or r itt by eenificate has not been revoked. .r..� kw,7,4l �� , ,fir 1� 4 Y!' NOTA&ik►ls 1 ::. , ?eta .4 MY COMMISSION 4 EE 213393 EXPIRES: October 31, 2016 Bonded Thru Notary Public Underwriters to me ) described in and who executed the wi hin , to e within tas v York re TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY OF AMERICA ` A MARIE SPIELMAN Hartford, Connecticut 08183 Notary Public, State of New York No. 01SP6248741 FINANCIAL STATEMENT AS OF DECEMBER 31, 2013 T, Qualified In Nassau County AS FILED WITH THE INSURANCE DEPT. OF THE STATE OF NEW YOR to r h1I bores September 19, 2015 CAPITAL STOCK $ 6,480,000 ASSETS GASH AND INVESTED CASH BONDS • INVESTMENT INCOME DUE AND ACCRUED OTHER INVESTED ASSETS PREMIUM BALANCES NET DEFERRED TAX ASSET REINSURANCE RECOVERABLE SECURITIES LENDING REINVESTED COLLATERAL ASSETS i EcEIVABLES FROM PARENT, SUBSIDIARIES AND AFFIUATES STATE SURCHARGES RECEIVABLE OTHER ASSETS LIABILITIES $ 87,709,824 3.452,214,898 47,758,602 285,009,810 190,838,482 81,576,098 11,881,414 4,910,772 30,772,481 258,771 14,872,822 UNEARNED PREMIUMS LOSSES LOSS ADJUSTMENT EXPENSES COMMISSIONS TAXES, LICENSES AND FEES OTHER EXPENSES FUNDS HELD RIDER REINSURANCE TREATIES CURRENT FEDERAL AM FOREIGN INCOME TAXES REMITTANCES AND ITEMS NOT ALLOCATED AMOUNTS WITHHELD / RETAINED BY COMPANY FOR OTHERS RETROACTIVE REINSURANCE RESERVE ASSUMED POLICYHOLDER DIVIDENDS PROVISION FOR REINSURANCE ADVANCE PREMIUM PAYABLE FOR SECURITIES LENDING DERNATIVE8 CEDED REINSURANCE NET PREMIUMS PAYABLE ESCHEAT LIABILITY OTHER ACCRUED EXPENSES AND LIABILITIES TOTAL LIABILITIES CAPITAL STOCK PAID IN SURPLUS OT1IEt SURPLUS TOTAL SURPLUS TO POLICYHOLDERS TOTAL ASSETS 5 4, 147,480,454 TOTAL LIABILITIES&SURPLUS Securities carried at $8,174,873 In the above statement are deposited with public authorities, as required by law. 5 808,717,871 809,883,178 480,870,453 31,781,138 12,482,322 38.437,893 94,401,484 18,387,407 13,677,603 23,815,367 1,611,874 8,482,813 3,070,484 1,078,809 4,910,772 112,003 (84,954,284) 471,848 242,238 $ 2,285.740,387 s 8,480,000 433,803„780 1,441,438.327 $ 1,881,726,088 $ 4.147,480,454 AFFIDAVIT (To be filled in and executed if the bidder is a corporation) STATE OF FLORIDA ) COUNTY OF Miami -Dade ) David A. Strickland being duly sworn, deposes and says that he /she is Assistant Secretary of Poole & Kent Company of Florida a corporation organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Florida, and having its principal office at: 1781 N.W. North River Drive (Street & Number) Miami (City) Miami -Dade FL (County) (State) Affiant further says that he is familiar with the records, minute books and by -laws of Poole & Kent Company of Florida (Name of Corporation) Affiant further says that Patrick H. Carr (Officer's Name) (Title) of the corporation, is duly authorized to sign the Proposal for the City of Clearwater or said corporation by virtue of Written Consent of Sole Director dated November 19 2014 (state whether a provision of by laws or a Resolution of Board of Directors. If by Resolution give date of adoption). is President & CEO David A. Strickland, Senior Vice President & Assistant Secretary Affiant Sworn to before me this 4th day of December , 20 14 ry Public Christine Mendez A46, Type /print /stamp name of Notary Executive Assistant, EE 213393 Title or rank, and Serial No., if any . CHRISTINE MENDEZ :r MY COMMISSION # EE 213393 y • EXPIRES: October 31, 2016 '�'�p ti, Bonded Thru Notary Pubac Underwriters Section V.docx Page 9 of 17 9/12/2014 CERTIFICATE OF SECRETARY OF POOLE & KENT COMPANY OF FLORIDA The undersigned, Mark M. Porto, certifies that he is the duly elected, qualified and acting Secretary of Poole & Kent Company of Florida, a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of Delaware with a business address of 1781 N. W. North River Drive, Miami, FL 33125 and that as Secretary, he is the keeper of the corporate records and seal of said Corporation. The undersigned further certifies: 1. Attached hereto as Exhibit A is a true, correct and complete copy of resolutions adopted upon written consent of the sole director of this Corporation dated as of November 19, 2014; and said resolutions do not contravene any provision of the certificate of incorporation or by -laws of said Corporation, and have not been rescinded or modified in any respect but still remain in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand this 19th day of November, 2014. Mark M. Porto, Secretary Poole & Kent Company of Florida, a Delaware Corporation 1781 N. W. North River Drive, Miami, FL 33125 1715 Lemon Street Tampa, FL 33606 EXHIBIT A RESOLVED, that Patrick H. Carr the duly elected President and Chief Executive Officer, David A. Strickland the duly elected Senior Vice President and Assistant Secretary, Brian D. MacClugage the duly elected Executive Vice President and David B. BuShea the duly elected Vice President of the Company, be and each hereby are, authorized, empowered and directed to execute and submit a bid and all related bonds to the City of Clearwater, Florida for the East Water Reclamation Facility Effluent Filters Rehabilitation Project, Contract No. 13- 0014 -UT and such other instruments in writing as may be necessary on behalf of the said Corporation, and that the Contract, Bond and other such instruments signed by him shall be binding upon the said Corporation as its own acts and deeds. STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF Miami -Dade Patrick H. Carr NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT being, first duly sworn, deposes and says that he is President & CEO of Poole & Kent Company of Florida the party making the foregoing Proposal or Bid; that such Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham: that said bidder is not financially interested in or otherwise affiliated in a business way with any other bidder on the same contract; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any bidders or person, to put in a sham bid or that such other person shall refrain from bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or communication or conference, with any person, to fix the bid price or affiant or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of said bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the City of Clearwater, Florida, or any person or persons interested in the proposed contract; and that all statements contained in said proposal or bid are true; and further, that such bidder has not directly or indirectly submitted this bid, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto to any association or to any member or agentthereof. Sworn to and subscribed before me this 4th day of Affiant ember , 20 14 . otary Public Christine Mendez '#alas'.,. CHRISTINE MENDEZ ,; ,•� s+r_ MY COMMISSION 1 EE 213393 ;? EXPIRES: October 31, 2016 Bonded 'Mrs Notary Underwriters Section V.docx Page 10 of 17 9/12/2014 PROPOSAL (1) TO THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, for EAST WRF EFFLUENT FILTERS REHABILITATION PROJECT PROJECT #13- 0014 -UT: and doing such other work incidental thereto, all in accordance with the contract documents, marked EAST WRF EFFLUENT FILTERS REHABILITATION PROJECT PROJECT #13- 0014 -UT: Every bidder must take notice of the fact that even though his proposal be accepted and the documents signed by the bidder to whom an award is made and by those officials authorized to do so on behalf of the City of Clearwater, Florida, that no such award or signing shall be considered a binding contract without a certificate from the Finance Director that funds are available to cover the cost of the work to be done, or without the approval of the City Attorney as to the form and legality of the contract and all the pertinent documents relating thereto having been approved by said City Attorney; and such bidder is hereby charged with this notice. The signer of the Proposal, as bidder, also declares that the only person, persons, company or parties interested in this Proposal, are named in this Proposal, that he has carefully examined the Advertisement, Instructions to Bidders, Contract Specifications, Plans, Supplemental Specifications, General Conditions, Special Provisions, and Contract Bond, that he or his representative has made such investigation as is necessary to determine the character and extent of the work and he proposes and agrees that if the Proposal be accepted, he will contract with the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the form of contract; hereto annexed, to provide the necessary labor, materials, machinery, equipment, tools or apparatus, do all the work required to complete the contract within the time mentioned in the General Conditions and according to the requirements of the City of Clearwater, Florida, as herein and hereinafter set forth, and furnish the required surety bonds for the following prices to wit: Section V.docx Page 11 of 17 9/12/2014 PROPOSAL (2) If the foregoing Proposal shall be accepted by the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the undersigned shall fail to execute a satisfactory contract as stated in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City may, at its option determine that the undersigned has abandoned the contract, and thereupon this Proposal shall be null and void, and the certified check or bond accompanying this Proposal, shall be forfeited to become the property of the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the full amount of said check shall be retained by the City, or if the Proposal Bond be given, the full amount of such bond shall be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages; otherwise, the bond or certified check accompanying this Proposal, or the amount of said check, shall be returned to the undersigned as specified herein. Attached hereto is a bond or certified check on Bank, for the sum of 10% of Bid Amount (being a minimum of 1 0% of Contractor's total bid amount). ($ ) The full names and residences of all persons and parties interested in the foregoing bid are as follows: (If corporation, give the names and addresses of the President and Secretary. If firm or partnership, the names and addresses of the members or partners. The Bidder shall list not only his name but also the name of any person with whom bidder has any type of agreement whereby such person's improvements, enrichment, employment or possible benefit, whether sub contractor, materialman, agent, supplier, or employer is contingent upon the award of the contract to the bidder). NAMES: ADDRESSES: See attached Signature of Bidder I� Patrick H. Carr, President & CEO (The bidder must indicate whether Corporation, Partnership, Company or Individual). Section V.docx Page 12 of 17 9/12/2014 11 Officers Poole & Kent Contractors An EMCOR Company Poole & Kent Company of Florida is a wholly owned subsidiary of EMCOR Group, Inc., a publicly traded company on the New York Stock Exchange. Patrick H. Carr - Chief Executive Officer, President, and Treasurer Richard Harrington - Chief Financial Officer Brian D. MacClugage - Executive Vice President David A. Strickland, P.E. - Senior Vice President & Assistant Secretary David B. BuShea - Vice President Duane Armstrong - Assistant Secretary Stephen Polk - Vice President R. Kevin Matz - Vice President Mark M. Porto - Secretary Headquarters - Miami -Dade County Hillsborough County Palm Beach County Charlotte County 1781 N.W. North River Drive 1715 W. Lemon Street 801 Northpoint Parkway, Suite #64 18245 Paulson Drive, Suite #125 Miami, FL 33125 Tampa, FL 33606 West Palm Beach, FL 33407 Port Charlotte, FL 33954 P:305- 325-1930 P:813- 251 -2438 P:561- 721 -6439 P:941- 206 -2210 PROPOSAL (3) The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title. Where the person signing for a corporation is other than the President or Vice President, he must, by affidavit, show his authority, to bind the corporation. Principal: P4-714. �� (t— By: I Business Address of Bidder: 1715 W. Lemon Street Title: 1 City and State: Tampa, FL Zip Code 33606 Dated at Miami -Dade , this 4th day of December , A.D., ZO 14. Section V.docx Page 13 of 17 9/12/2014 CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET PROJECT: EAST WRF EFFLUENT FILTERS REHABILITATION PROJECT (PROJECT #13 - 0014 -UT): Acknowledgment is hereby made of the following addenda received since issuance of Plans and Specifications. Addendum No. 1 Date: 11/24/2014 Addendum No. 2 Date: 12/01/2014 Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Poole & Kent Company of Florida (Name of Bidder) (Signature of Officer) Patrick H. Carr President & CEO (Title of Officer) December 4, 2014 (Date) Section V.docx Page 14 of 17 9/12/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BIDDER'S PROPOSAL PROJECT: EAST WRF EFFLUENT FILTERS REHABILITATION PROJECT (PROJECT #13- 0014 -UT) CONTRACTOR: Poole & Kent Company of Florida BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL: $ I11 ® Q QD BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL: o(, rtJt1 o (\i one 1At (Numbers) you set c . (Words) BASE BID ITEM DESCRIPTION EST. QTY. UNIT UNIT PRICE TOTAL lA Filter Equipment and Services in accordance with Section 01150, 3.01A. (ODP amount paid to manufacturer by City) 1 LS $641,256.00 $641,256.00 1B Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) - Sales Tax Savings Retained by the City, in accordance with Section 01150, 3.01B 1 LS $38,525.36 $38,525.36 1C Filter Rehabilitation Complete in accordance with Section 01150, 3.O1C. 1 LS $ VA, 35.6Y $ L0,31i 0 $ 1 Q! 5'00 1D Filter Angle Iron Clips in accordance with Section 01150 3.01D 216 EA $ 5 0.0() 2 East WRF Influent Pump Station Rehabilitation in accordance with Section 01150, 3.01E 1 LS NOT IN CONTRACT 3 Mobilization in accordance with Section 01150, 3.O1F (not to exceed 4% of the Base Bid Total) 1 LS $ Li0/000 $ (.I ©, (I00 4 Indemnification in accordance with Section 01150, 3.O1G. 1 LS $ 100.00 $ 100.00 BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL (BASE BID TOTAL OF ITEMS 1 -4) $ l/ l (0 n o ADDITIVE ALTERNATE WORK 5A Filter Influent Valves and Actuators in accordance with Section 01150 3.O1H. 6 EA $ �/ �� °7 �7 r $ 10 / / / • 5B Filter Filtrate Valves and Actuators in accordance with Section 01150 3.01I. 6 EA $173`(4 $ 1041001 v $ Io3i cl r y 5C Filter Backwash Valves and Actuators in accordance with Section 01150 3.O1J. 6 EA $ 1 7 1 4 (1 5D Filter Mudwell Valves in accordance with Section 01150 3.01K. 6 EA $ l6 1 I I $ �� S J 5E Filter Air Mix Valves and Actuators in accordance with Section 01150 3.01L. 6 EA $ 3/ / (�� Y! 1 $ ��/ ) 5 1 5F Backwash Pump Check Valves in accordance with Section 01150 3.O1M. 2 EA $ 1� 6 $ it ,V5 6 5G Backwash Pump Butterfly Valves in accordance with Section 01150 3.OIN. 2 EA $ �/ / � O $ / �$ O Section V.docx Page 15 of 17 9/12/2014 THE BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON HIS UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED FOR EACH SECTION. THIS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL GOVERN. Section V.docx Page 16 of 17 9/12/2014 SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM PER SECTION HI, ITEM 25, IF YOUR BID IS $1,000,000 OR MORE, THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WITH THE BID PROPOSAL. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORM AS REQUIRED, MAY DEEM YOUR SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIVE. The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that: 1. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is aware of the requirements of section 287.135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or engaging in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 2. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is eligible to participate in this solicitation and is not listed on either the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engaged in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 3. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce; and 4. If awarded the Contract (or Agreement), the vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner will immediately notify the City of Clearwater in writing, no later than five (5) calendar days after any of its principals are placed on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities; the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engages in business operations in Cuba and Syria. STATE OF Florida COUNTY OF Miami -Dade L-� Authorized Signature Patrick H. Carr Printed Name President & CEO Title Poole & Kent Company of Florida Name of Entity /Corporation The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me on this 4th day of December , 20 14 , by Patrick H. Can (name of person whose signature is being notarized) as the President & CEO (title) of Poole & Kent Company of Florida (name of corporation/entity), personally known to me as described herein or oc� ced a (type of identification) as identification, and who did/did not tae an ,{ �- Notary Public My Commission Expires: 10/31/2016 NOTARY SEAL ABOVE Section V.docx Page 17 of 17 Christine Mendez Printed Name CHRISTINE MENDEZ .,,: MY COMMISSION # EE 213393 4 EXPIRES: October 31, 2016 In .t." Bonded Thru Notary Public Underwriters 9/12/2014 1 1 EAST PORT WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY STAGE 1 IMPROVEMENTS PORT CHARLOTTE, FLORIDA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Charlotte County Utilities is a water and wastewater utility serving about 50,000 homes and businesses in Charlotte County. The County's East Port Water Reclamation Facility is a multi- faceted treatment facility that encompasses over 700 acres. In addition to providing wastewater treatment services, the facility houses a state - certified laboratory and waste receiving plant. The water reclamation facility (WRF) is a 6 million gallon per day (mgd) capacity activated sludge wastewater treatment facility that was originally built in 1982. The WRF was upgraded in 1994 to provide reclaimed water to Port Charlotte, and then again in 1996 by the East Port Expansion Phase 1A. Effluent disposal methods currently used include reclaimed water reuse, deep well injection, and slow -rate land application. The site is approximately 80 acres alone and contains two injection wells and two storage reservoirs. The facility also contains a 325 acre irrigation sprayfield. The WRF expansion will increase the plant capacity from 6 -mgd to 12 -mgd to be completed in two stages. The first stage will bring a 3 -mgd stand -alone and self - sustaining expansion online. The second stage will duplicate and complement the first stage of expansion. The current project includes the efforts to complete the first stage of the WRF total expansion. Owner/ Client: Charlotte County Utilities 25550 Harbor View Road Suite 1 Port Charlotte. FL 33980 Phone: 941 - 764 -4509 Owner Contact: Bruce Bullert Bruce.bullert @charlottefl.com Engineer: Jones Edmunds & Associates, Inc. 5104 N. Lockwood Ridge Rd. Suite 307 Sarasota, FL 34234 Phone: 941 - 358 -1440 Engineer Contact: Kim Clayback kclayback @jonesedmunds.com Prime Contractor: Poole & Kent Company of Florida Notice to Proceed: April 1, 2013 Scheduled Completion Date: February 16, 2015 Contract Value: $12,105,404 - original $12,287,210 - current Poole & Kent Contractors An EMCOR Company POOLE & KENT COMPANY OF FLORIDA Miami • West Palm Beach ■ Tampa • Port Charlotte www.pkflorida.com 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EAST PORT WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY STAGE 1 IMPROVEMENTS PORT CHARLOTTE, FLORIDA The major treatment process components and improvements for the facility expansion include the following: • Removal of the three existing Return Activated Sludge (RAS) pumps and the common header and discharge piping. Installation of five new RAS pumps with a new common header and discharge piping. ♦ Removal of the four existing Internal Recycle (IR) pumps and installation of six new IR pumps. • Replacement of the drive motors on the four existing mixing aerators in the oxidation ditches with new invertor -duty rated motors with adjustable -speed drives (ASD) and installation of new dissolved oxygen (DO) control system. ♦ Removal of the existing slide gate in the anoxic tanks and installation of new slide gates. • Installation of a new baffle plate between the first anoxic tanks and oxidation ditches. • Construction of a new 2.0 mgd aerobic digester with associated blowers, decanting systems, supernatant return pumps, and feed pumps with associated electrical and controls, including connecting the waste - activated sludge (WAS) and scum pipes from the secondary clarifiers to the new aerobic digester, digested sludge pipes from the new aerobic digester to the belt presses, and supernatant piping from the new aerobic digester to the existing headworks. • Removal of grit, rags, and other trash in the two oxidation ditches and anoxic tanks, and loading, transport, and disposal. Washing down of tank walls and floor to provide a clean tank. • Installation of a new truck transfer pumping station with truck - loading pad, trench drain with H -20 traffic grating. • Rehabilitation of the existing automatic backwash filters No. 1 and No. 2. • Replacement of one of the bar screens and classifier at the headworks. • Installation of a new grit transfer pump at the headworks and the replacement of the two existing grit transfer pumps. ♦ Construction of a belt filter press pump station. • Construction of two new electrical buildings and related ductbanks, wiring and instrumentation. • Replacement of a section of the plant 8 -in water pipe under the new RAS pump station. • Replacement of the existing PLC -based SCADA system with a new system, reusing the existing SCADA application and server hardware and expansion of fiber optic communication systems. • Grading of the stormwater pond and installation of associated improvements. • Perform piping modifications to the existing North and South Sludge Feed Pumping Stations. During the bidding phase of the project, all of the bids received by the City exceeded the City's budget for the project. Poole & Kent assisted the City in bringing the project within budget by performing a Value Engineering review of the design and providing recommendations for reducing project costs while accomplishing the project objectives. The awarded contract value is within the City's budget and the project is currently on schedule and within budget. Poole & Kent Contractors An EMCOl Company POOLE & KENT COMPANY OF FLORIDA Miami • West Palm Beach • Tampa • Port Charlotte www.pkflorida.com WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT FILTRATION & DISINFECTION IMPROVEMENTS CONS- FILTRATION /PH2 PUNTA GORDA, FLORIDA The City owns a 4.0 million gallon per day (mgd) capacity wastewater treatment plant. Wastewater residuals are beneficially reclaimed by and application to on- site agricultural fields. Treated effluent is discharged to an on -site effluent disposal deep injection well. As part of the City of Punta Gorda's Capital Improvements Program the Wastewater Treatment Plant was scheduled for treatment improvements. In October 2012, Poole & Kent Company of Florida (P &K) was given the Notice to Proceed on the filtration and disinfection improvements for the City. Improvements included under the project include the following components: ♦ Demolition of the existing chlorine contact chamber weirs and associated tanks and piping and miscellaneous structures in the location of the new sand filters. • Construction of a polymer injection system including a FRP polymer feed building that houses the polymer pump skids, injection piping, and polymer storage. • Construction of a monitoring well pump station that includes one 500 - gallon storage tank, submersible pump, and associated piping. ♦ Construction of a cast -in -place concrete filter pump station consisting of four 15 HP submersible pumps, and a 30 -inch DIP influent line with an emergency by -pass. Owner/ Client: City of Punta Gorda 326 W. Marion Avenue Punta Gorda, FL 33950 Phone: 941- 575 -3366 Fax: 941 - 575 -3340 Owner Contact: Steven Leonard, PMMC Senior Project Manager Cell: 941 - 628 -6319 sleonard @ci.punta- gorda.fl.us Engineer: CPH, Inc. 5601 Mariner St, Ste 240 Tampa, FL 33609 Phone: 813 - 288 -0233 Engineer Contact: Wade Wood. P.E. wwood @cphcorp.com Prime Contractor: Poole & Kent Company of Florida Notice to Proceed: October 23, 2012 Substantial Completion Date: March 23. 2014 Contract Value: $3,246,418 - original $3,296,972 - final Poole & Kent Contractors An EMCOR Company POOLE & KENT COMPANY OF FLORIDA Miami • West Palm Beach • Tampa ■ Port Charlotte www.pkflorida.com 1 1 WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT FILTRATION & DISINFECTION IMPROVEMENTS CONS- FILTRATION /PH2 PUNTA GORDA, FLORIDA • Three 2.0 mgd deep -bed, mono -media (sand) wastewater filters, including cast -in -place concrete basins, a filter underdrain system, filter media, washwater troughs, filter gallery piping, and control instrumentation. • Construction of a cast -in -place mudwell and mudwell pumping station, including two 7.5 HP submersible pumps. • Construction of a cast -in -place concrete clear well with a water quality sampling structure. • A high -rate backwash system including a backwash pump station with two submersible pumps and an air scouring system consisting of two 2,280 cfm positive displacement rotary blowers, each with associated air piping, filters, silencers, and instrumentation and controls. • Chorine Contact Chamber modifications including the removal of the existing weirs. • Modifications to the existing chlorine gas system with the addition of one one -ton chlorine gas cylinder to the existing chlorination building and one one -ton chlorine gas cylinder. Installation of two one -ton chlorine gas cylinder scales, removal of the existing monorail and replacement with a monorail beam trolley. • Construction of an effluent sampling structure with a pH meter, chlorination residual analyzer, composite sampler and associated piping and controls. • Replacement of the existing PLC -based SCADA system with a new system, reusing the existing SCADA application and server hardware and expansion of fiber optic communication systems. • Construction of a new soakage swale and storm water pond with littoral shelf located to the southeast of the plant. P &K was responsible for scheduling, coordination, procurement, and execution of all aspects of construction of the facilities and process equipment. Due to a need for minimal impacts on the facility operation, the successful completion of the project required extremely close coordination and cooperation with the Owner, Engineer, and other construction contractors. Substantial weather delays (heavy rains and flooding) were encountered. The project delays were overcome by close coordination with the plant operators. Poole & Kent Contractors An EMCOR Company POOLE & KENT COMPANY OF FLORIDA Miami • West Palm Beach ■ Tampa • Port Charlotte www.pkflorida.com WATER TREATMENT PLANT FILTER VALVE REPLACEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM UPGRADES NAPLES, FLORIDA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Owner/ Client: City of Naples 380 Riverside Circle Naples, FL 34102 Ph: 239 - 213 -4762 Owner Contact: Justin Frederiksen, P.E., Deputy Utilities Director jfrederiksen @naplesgov.com Engineer: CH2M Hill 3011 SW Williston Road Gainesville, FL 32608 Ph:353- 384 -7099 Prime Contractor: Poole & Kent Company of Florida Notice to Proceed: May 2012 Project Duration: 12 Months Completion Date: June 2013 Contract Value: $1,263,000 AA" CITY OF NAPLES WATER TREATMENT PLANT The City of Naples owns and operates a 30 -MGD lime softening water treatment plant serving approximately 62,000 customers. The existing plant consists of 14 filters which were built over a span of 20 years from 1959- 1979. In 2011, the City decided it was time to update the filters and control system due to the aging equipment and obsolete replacement parts. This project was part of the 2012 -2016 Capital Improvement Program and assisted the City's efforts for energy reduction at the water treatment plant. The scope of the contract consisted of the removal and disposal of the existing valves, actuators, and control panels; the purchase, installation, and testing of the new valves, actuators, and control panels; and the programming, integration, and calibration associated with the new filter control system. The completed project provided the City with a fully automated filtration system. The completed project included: ♦ Demolition and removal of existing process equipment, control components, and ancillaries. ♦ Replacement of all non - modulating valves and actuators. Existing Poole & Kent Contractors An EMCOR Company POOLE & KENT COMPANY OF FLORIDA Miami • West Palm Beach • Tampa • Port Charlotte www.pkflorida.com WATER TREATMENT PLANT FILTER VALVE REPLACEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM UPGRADES NAPLES, FLORIDA pneumatic actuators were replaced with new pneumatic actuators. 115 valves with actuators were replaced ranging from 4" to 24 ". • Replacement of the existing control system with new control system. The new control system included instrumentation, remote I/O panels, control panels, programmable logic controllers (PLC), human machine interface (HMI) units, and programming. • Modifications of the air supply system, including new copper pipe in certain locations and pneumatic tubing and demolition of existing tubing and piping. • Electrical work associated with the new control systems. One of the rehabilitated filter banks treats approximately 50 percent of the plant flow. The rehabilitation of this filter bank had to be closely coordinated with the plant operating staff to minimize disruptions to plant operations and ensure that the plant production was not interrupted. Temporary piping was installed to add operational flexibility during renovation of this filter bank. The project was completed in June 2013, on schedule and on budget. Poole & Kent Contractors An EMCOR Company POOLE & KENT COMPANY OF FLORIDA Miami • West Palm Beach • Tampa • Port Charlotte www.pkflorida.com 1 FIVEASH WATER TREATMENT PLANT FILTER REHABILITATION FORT LAUDERDALE, FLORIDA WaterWorks 2011.. The City of Fort Lauderdale implemented the WaterWorks 2011 program. The water and wastewater master plan improved the City's water and wastewater infrastructure by providing the most up -to -date, cost - efficient water service and improving the quality and reliability of the City's drinking water system. The three major components of the program were: State -of -the -art water treatment + Installation of a modern, citywide sewer service that protects the environment and promotes a healthier lifestyle Comprehensive utility infrastructure improvements Owner /Client: City of Fort Lauderdale, Florida Engineer: Hazen and Sawyer General Contractor: Poole & Kent Company of Florida Completion Date: May 2007 Contract Value: $2,430,000 The City of Fort Lauderdale contracted Poole & Kent Company of Florida to rehabilitate (6) of the existing (22) filters at the Fiveash Water Treatment Plant under the WaterWorks 2011 program. The Fiveash Water Treatment Plant, built in 1954, is the main potable water treatment for the City of Fort Lauderdale, having (22) individual gravity sand filters with a total capacity of 60 -mgd, and as such, needed to remain in service during the entire course of the project. During the completion of the contract work, the City of Fort Lauderdale increased our scope of work from (6) to (10) filters. Poole & Kent was limited to working on only two filters at a time. This work was also concurrent with another Poole & Kent project at this site which required the replacement of all filter valves, instrumentation and controls. This required close coordination between the two contracts and the City of Fort Lauderdale's operation personnel. Each of the ten filter rehabilitations included removal of the existing filter internals, including the underdrain system, media and surface wash piping. The inside concrete surfaces of all rehabilitated filters were refinished and prepared for the new underdrain and media installation. A new 316 stainless steel surface wash system was installed in each filter, and each pair of rehabilitated filters was tested, disinfected, and placed back into operational service within six weeks of being taken out of service. Poole & Kent Contractors An EMCOR Company POOLE & KENT COMPANY OF FLORIDA Miami • West Palm Beach • Tampa • Port Charlotte www.pkflorida.com SOUTHWEST WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY EXPANSION & UPGRADES CAPE CORAL, FLORIDA This project consisted of construction of expansion of the existing 6.1 million gallon per day (mgd) capacity water reclamation facility to a 15.1 -mgd capacity under a "program - manager-at- risk" contract. Because Poole & Kent's contract scope did not include the electrical, instrumentation, and controls improvements for the project, Poole & Kent's responsibilities included extensive design - discipline cross - checking and coordination with other contractors working on site to ensure that construction proceeded smoothly. The project was delivered to the Owner on time and under budget. The project won the Design -Build Institute of America (DBIA) 2011 National Design -Build Award, while the overall FEP program, of which the project was a component, was awarded the Engineering News Record (ENR) Southeast Best of 2011 Project, under the category of Best Civil Works /Infrastructure Project. Owner /Client: City of Cape Coral, Florida Randy Mikkelson Chief Operator (239) 574 -0850 Engineer / CM MWH Americas Inc. Shon Fandrich (512) 682 -9900 Prime Contractor: Poole & Kent Company of Florida Project Duration: 865 days Completion Date: April 2009 Contract Value: $54,173,000 - Original $55,991,751 - Final Blair M. Lavoie, P.E., Senior Vice President and Director of MWH Constructors: "Together they were able to achieve their goals of minimizing plant disruptions during the expansion while completing the project on time, on budget with no safety incidents." 0- Poole & Kent Contractors Art UICOR Company POOLE & KENT COMPANY OF FLORIDA Miami • West Palm Beach • Tampa • Port Charlotte www.pkflorida.com SOUTHWEST WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY EXPANSION & UPGRADES CAPE CORAL, FLORIDA In recent years, the City of Cape Coral has undergone rapid growth, experiencing a nearly 60% increase in population in the 1990s. This explosive growth has placed greatly increased demands on the City's water and wastewater infrastructure. In 2001, the City undertook the $873 million Facility and Utility Expansion Program (FEP) for the water, wastewater, and reclaimed water infrastructure, which included expansion of the City's Southwest Water Reclamation Facility (WRF) from a treatment capacity of 6.1 -mgd (average daily flow, ADF) to an expanded capacity of 15.1 -mgd. Expansions to the water and wastewater infrastructure were made under a "Program- Manager -At- Risk" contract format, with MWH Americas, Inc. (MWH) serving as the Program Manager. In December 2006, MWH teamed with Poole & Kent Company of Florida for the largest portion of construction for the WRF. Poole & Kent contracted directly with MWH for construction of all plant facilities. Project Description The major treatment process components and improvements for the expanded facility include the following: • Installation of new mechanical bar screens and screenings wash - presses at the existing headworks building. • Installation of a new grit removal system consisting of grit chambers, grit pumps, grit separation, and dewatering equipment. • Construction of a new biological odor control system for the plant headworks and grit removal system. • Construction of 3 new aeration basins with integral flow splitting box, floating mixers, blowers, air diffuser system, sludge pumping, and scum removal system. • Construction of 3 new secondary clarifiers with return activated sludge (RAS), waste activated sludge (WAS), and scum pump systems. • Construction of 4 new tertiary filters. • Construction of 2 new chlorine contact chambers and sodium hypochlorite storage and feed system. • Construction of large blower building with (3) 450 hp blowers. Piping is 36" stainless steel and elevated in route to the new aeration basins. • Construction of new plant drainage pumping station that is approximately 23' deep. • Construction of three new electrical buildings which supplied power to the new facilities. • Installation of new effluent transfer pumps, an effluent surge tank, and reclaimed water distribution pumps which connected to a new deep injection well. • Modifications to the existing headworks building. Poole & Kent Contractors Aa EMCOR Company POOLE & KENT COMPANY OF FLORIDA Miami • West Palm Beach ■ Tampa • Port Charlotte www.pkflorida.com